Manual Operator OEC Elite English - UM - 5483603-8EN-18 - 1

GE Healthcare
GE OEC Elite®
Operator Manual
5483603-8EN-18
Rev. 1
© 2022
GE OEC Medical Systems, Inc.
All rights reserved.
Revision history
Revision history
Document # Revision # Release Date
5483603-8EN-18 Rev. 1 2022-05
Caution U.S. federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a physician,
veterinarian, or other designated licensed practitioner as appropriate for its
clinical use.
IMPORTANT: SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. PLEASE READ THIS MANUAL BEFORE USING
EQUIPMENT.
This manual may not be reproduced, in whole or in part, without the written permission of GE Healthcare.
Other product and company names mentioned herein are the property of their respective owners.
The contents of this document are accurate at the time of publication. However, changes in design and
additional features can, at any time, be incorporated in the hardware and software and may not be
reflected in this version of the document. Contact GE Healthcare Technical Support for clarification, if
discrepancies arise.
Images in this manual, including screen shots, hardware images, diagrams, icons, and labels, may vary
from actual system appearance.
All product documentation was originally drafted, approved, and supplied by the manufacturer in English.
SLES Appliance License. The Branded Product may include components of the SUSE Linux Enterprise
Server product (SLES). Licensee acknowledges and agrees to the following restriction with respect to
use of SLES notwithstanding the license grant in the SLES end user license agreement that may
accompany or otherwise apply to the copy of SLES Licensee received with the Licensed Software:
Licensee agrees to use SLES solely for the purpose of running the Branded Product and not as a
general purpose operating system. If Licensee did not receive a copy of the SLES end user license
agreement, it can be found at http://www.suse.com/licensing/eula/
GE OEC Medical Systems, a General Electric company, going to market as GE Healthcare.
GE OEC Medical Systems, Inc. GE Medical Systems SCS

384 Wright Brothers Drive 283 rue de la Minière
Salt Lake City, Utah 84116 U.S.A. 78530 Buc, France
801-328-9300 Telephone: (+33) 1 30 70 40
40
Fax: (+33) 1 30 70 44 40
ii
Medical directive / WEEE
Medical Directive
This product conforms with the Medical Device Directive, Council Directive 93/42/EEC: June
14,1993, as amended by 2007/47/07 (as applicable) following the provisions of Annex II, when
it bears the following CE Mark of Conformity.
The OEC Elite was first CE marked in 2016.
Radio Equipment Directive (RED)

This product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of
the Radio Equipment Directive 2014/53/EU when it bears the CE Mark of Conformity.
Hereby, GE OEC Medical Systems, Inc. declares that the radio equipment type OEC Elite is in
compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU.
1. Navigate to the Support Documentation Library
(https://www.gehealthcare.com/documentationlibrary) in a web browser.
2. Once in the portal, enter RED DOC in Enter the document number or keyword field.
3. Select X-ray Surgery (XR) from the Modality filter menu.
4. Select X-RAY (SURGERY) OEC ELITE from the Products filter menu.
5. Click Search. The search results display.
6. Click the Download icon in the Actions column to save the document to your computer.
Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)

This symbol indicates that the waste of electrical and electronic equipment must not be
disposed as unsorted municipal waste and must be collected separately. Contact an
authorized representative of the manufacturer for information concerning the decommissioning
of your equipment.
The separate collection symbol is affixed to a battery, or its packaging, to advise you that the
battery must be recycled or disposed of in accordance with local or country laws. The letters
below the separate collection symbol indicate whether certain elements (Pb=Lead,
iii
Medical directive / RED / WEEE
Cd=Cadmium, Hg=Mercury) are contained in the battery. To minimize potential effects on the
environment and human health, it is important that all marked batteries that you remove from
the product are properly recycled or disposed.
For information on how the battery may be safely removed from the device, please consult the
service manual or equipment instructions.
iv
Table of contents
Table of contents
Revision history ii
Medical Directive iii
Radio Equipment Directive (RED) iii
Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) iii
Table of contents v
1. Safety overview 1-1
1.1 Applicability 1-1
1.2 Owner responsibilities 1-1
1.2.1 System compatibility 1-1
1.2.2 Operator qualifications 1-1
1.2.3 Continued compliance 1-1
1.2.4 Unauthorized modifications 1-1
1.3 GE OEC responsibilities 1-2
1.4 Product description and summary of use 1-2
1.4.1 Device description 1-2
1.4.2 Intended use 1-2
1.4.3 Indications for use 1-3
1.4.4 Patient population 1-3
1.4.5 Use environment 1-3
1.4.6 Intended users 1-3
1.4.7 Intended clinical benefits 1-3
1.4.8 Contraindications for use 1-3
1.4.9 Potential side effects 1-3
1.4.10 Essential performance 1-4
1.4.11 X-ray equipment certification 1-4
1.4.12 After-sale operating and safety practices 1-4
1.5 General safety 1-5
1.5.1 Contact information 1-5
1.5.2 Reporting serious incidents 1-5
1.5.3 Safety hazard alerts 1-5
1.5.4 External devices 1-6
1.5.5 Wireless compliance and safety 1-6
1.5.6 Patient environment 1-8
1.6 Electrical safety 1-9
1.6.1 Electrical shock 1-9
1.6.2 Electrical fire 1-9
1.6.3 Explosion 1-10
1.6.4 Ground fault 1-10
1.6.5 Equipment malfunction 1-10
v
Table of contents
1.7 Mechanical safety 1-11

1.7.1 Improperly attached equipment 1-11
1.7.2 Equipment stability, transport, and positioning 1-11
1.7.3 Motorized and manual mechanical movement 1-11
1.7.4 Repetitive motion 1-12
1.7.5 Ingress of fluids 1-12
1.7.6 Draping 1-12
1.7.7 Cooling efficiency 1-13
1.7.8 Contact Burns 1-13
1.8 Radiation safety 1-13
1.8.1 Designated use areas 1-14
1.8.2 Personal radiation protection 1-14
1.8.3 Patient radiation protection 1-14
1.8.4 Radiation indicators 1-14
1.8.5 Radiation burns 1-14
1.8.6 Source-to-skin distance 1-14
1.8.7 Patient supports 1-15
1.8.8 Radiation fast stops 1-15
1.9 Electromagnetic compatibility 1-15
1.9.1 Performance criteria 1-16
1.10 Patient privacy and data security 1-16
2. System setup 2-1
2.1 System Overview 2-1
2.1.1 First time system setup 2-1
2.1.2 System setup screens 2-2
2.1.3 Set up image acquisition 2-4
2.1.4 Set up default profile 2-6
2.1.5 Set up patient information 2-8
2.1.6 Set up position defaults 2-10
2.1.7 Set up touchpad and audio 2-10
2.1.8 Set up DICOM network configurations 2-12
2.1.9 Set up network configuration 2-12
2.1.10 Set up regional settings 2-23
2.1.11 Set up security 2-25
2.1.12 Set up Utilities 2-59
2.1.13 Service screen 2-68
2.2 System startup, shutdown, and restart 2-68
2.2.1 System pairing 2-68
2.2.2 Turn on the system 2-69
2.2.3 Turn off the system 2-79
2.2.4 Immediate system shutdown 2-80
vi
Table of contents
2.2.5 Restart the system 2-81

2.2.6 Power loss and system restart 2-81
2.2.7 Unplug / plug the system with power on 2-82
2.2.8 Disconnect / connect the C-Arm 2-82
2.2.9 System lockups 2-82
2.2.10 Screen saver 2-83
3. System operation 3-1
3.1 Electronic operator manuals 3-1
3.1.1 Accessing the eIFU operator manuals 3-1
3.2 General system controls 3-3
3.3 Workstation overview 3-16
3.3.1 Monitor 3-18
3.3.2 Workstation external connections 3-19
3.3.3 View External Video 3-21
3.3.4 Workstation video signal 3-22
3.3.5 Move the Workstation 3-23
3.4 System controls 3-24
3.4.1 Workstation battery-backed power supply 3-24
3.4.2 Workstation keyboard 3-24
3.4.3 Virtual keyboard 3-25
3.4.4 Image control keypad 3-29
3.4.5 Touchpad 3-30
3.4.6 Touchscreen controls 3-31
3.4.7 Tabs 3-31
3.4.8 Blank button 3-33
3.4.9 Virtual control panel 3-33
3.4.10 Workstation batteries 3-35
3.4.11 Extended exposure feature 3-35
3.5 C-Arm overview 3-36
3.5.1 C-Arm identification 3-36
3.5.2 C-Arm components 3-39
3.5.3 Detector types 3-41
3.5.4 Skin spacer 3-41
3.5.5 Anti-scatter grid 3-43
3.5.6 Move the C-Arm 3-46
3.5.7 C-Arm orientation 3-48
3.6 Positioning the C-Arm 3-49
3.6.1 Positioning the Super C-Arm 3-50
3.6.2 Positioning the Standard C-Arm 3-55
3.6.3 Positioning the Ergo C-Arm 3-62
3.6.4 Position a non-motorized C-Arm for CPR 3-71
vii
Table of contents
3.7 Motorized C-Arm overview 3-72

3.7.1 Safety 3-73
3.7.2 Motorized C-Arm setup 3-73
3.7.3 Remote user interface 3-77
3.7.4 Buttons 3-78
3.7.5 System function buttons 3-80
3.7.6 Motorization status icons 3-81
3.7.7 Positioning the Motorized C-Arm 3-83
3.7.8 Manual movement 3-87
3.7.9 C-Arm position panel 3-88
3.7.10 Positioning a Motorized C-Arm for CPR 3-92
3.8 C-Arm controls 3-93
3.8.1 OEC Touch / Touch Tableside C-Arm control panel 3-93
3.8.2 C-Arm sleep mode 3-112
4. Patient information and exams 4-1
4.1 Patient screen 4-1
4.1.1 Select current patient 4-2
4.1.2 Enter patient information 4-2
4.1.3 Additional information 4-4
4.1.4 Edit patient information 4-6
4.2 Scheduled exams 4-8
4.2.1 Set up scheduled exams 4-8
4.2.2 Select a patient from Scheduled Exams 4-9
4.2.3 Update schedule and schedule filters 4-10
4.2.4 Append step procedure 4-12
4.3 Saved exams 4-15
4.3.1 Access saved exams 4-15
4.4 Service exam 4-22
5. Imaging 5-1
5.1 Modes of operation 5-1
5.1.1 Select modes 5-1
5.1.2 Mode pairs 5-1
5.1.3 X-ray mode setup 5-1
5.1.4 Changing imaging modes during an exam 5-3
5.2 Anatomical profile 5-4
5.3 X-ray image screen 5-6
5.4 Radiation controls 5-7
5.4.1 Cross-arm housing 5-7
5.4.2 Automatic and manual technique control 5-8
5.4.3 Fast stop switches 5-9
5.4.4 X-ray On switch 5-10
viii
Table of contents
5.4.5 Footswitch and handswitch 5-10

5.4.6 Keyswitch positions 5-13
5.4.7 System and X-ray control alarms 5-14
5.5 Live zoom 5-15
5.5.1 Set up live zoom and create live zoomed images 5-15
5.6 Image save and auto save 5-18
5.6.1 Last image hold (LIH) 5-18
5.6.2 Zoomed images 5-18
5.6.3 Recalled and modified images 5-18
5.7 General imaging 5-19
5.7.1 X-ray switch setup for standard fluoroscopy imaging 5-19
5.7.2 Mode screen in fluoroscopy imaging 5-19
5.7.3 Continuous vs. pulsed fluoroscopy considerations 5-22
5.7.4 Fluoro mode 5-22
5.7.5 High Level Fluoro mode (HLF) 5-23
5.7.6 Pulsed X-ray mode 5-23
5.7.7 Low dose 5-25
5.7.8 Digital Spot mode 5-26
5.8 Vascular imaging 5-27
5.8.1 X-ray switch setup for vascular imaging 5-27
5.8.2 Mode screen in vascular imaging 5-28
5.8.3 Change the pulse rate 5-31
5.8.4 Subtraction imaging 5-31
5.8.5 Roadmap mode 5-36
5.9 Digital Cine Pulse mode on Vascular or Cardiac systems 5-41
5.9.1 Create a pulsed digital cine pulse run on Vascular systems 5-42
5.10 Imaging pediatric or smaller patients 5-43
5.10.1 Pediatric profile 5-43
5.10.2 Radiation exposure sensitivity 5-43
5.10.3 Minimize pediatric and small patient doses 5-43
5.10.4 Imaging recommendations for small or pediatric patients 5-44
5.11 Image quality 5-45
5.11.1 Anti-scatter grid 5-45
5.11.2 Equivalent filtration 5-46
5.12 Radiation display 5-46
5.12.1 Dosimetry display 5-46
5.12.2 Air kerma and air kerma rate 5-47
5.12.3 Dose Area Product (DAP) 5-48
5.12.4 Dose summary 5-48
5.12.5 Radiation Dose Structured Report (RDSR) 5-49
5.12.6 Radiation associated with modes 5-50
ix
Table of contents
5.13 Deterministic effects of ionizing radiation on humans 5-56

6. Dynamic recording 6-1
6.1 Cine setup 6-3
6.2 Cine review 6-7
6.2.1 Review a cine run 6-8
6.2.2 Select cine runs from the Cine screen 6-10
6.2.3 Set subtraction mask 6-11
6.2.4 Set cues 6-12
6.2.5 Viewing options 6-14
6.2.6 Mini cine playback 6-17
6.3 Using zoom with dynamic images 6-18
7. Image annotation and measurement 7-1
7.1 Display Annotation screen 7-1
7.1.1 Annotations on the main system monitor 7-1
7.1.2 Annotations on the Touch / Tableside C-Arm control panel 7-2
7.1.3 Fine-tune annotation and measurement placement 7-3
7.2 Image markers 7-3
7.2.1 Place a marker 7-4
7.2.2 Delete markers 7-4
7.3 Image comments 7-5
7.3.1 Place comments on an image 7-5
7.3.2 Delete comments from an image 7-6
7.4 Measure an image 7-7
7.4.1 Calibration 7-8
7.4.2 Measure a distance 7-9
7.4.3 Measure an angle 7-10
7.4.4 Measure a stenosis 7-11
7.4.5 Delete measurements 7-12
7.5 Hide and display annotations 7-12
7.5.1 Hide annotations 7-13
7.5.2 Display annotations 7-13
7.6 Digital pen tool 7-14
8. Review and archive 8-1
8.1 Images 8-1
8.1.1 Images screen 8-2
8.1.2 Thumbnail icons 8-3
8.1.3 Damaged thumbnails in the image screen 8-3
8.1.4 Image review 8-3
8.2 Image processing 8-9
8.2.1 Image adjustment procedure 8-10
8.2.2 Adjust brightness 8-10
x
Table of contents
8.2.3 Adjust contrast 8-11

8.2.4 Adjust enhancement 8-12
8.2.5 Reset image manipulations 8-14
8.3 Retrieve a saved exam 8-14
8.3.1 Retrieve exams from a portable media device 8-14
8.3.2 Retrieve exams from a DICOM server 8-15
8.4 Move to a new study 8-19
8.4.1 Dose information for moved images 8-19
8.4.2 Move to a new study 8-20
8.5 Review patient summary and dose summary screens 8-21
8.5.1 Display the dose summary 8-21
8.5.2 Display the patient summary 8-22
8.6 Create prints 8-22
8.6.1 Connect an onboard (local) printer 8-22
8.6.2 Print images 8-23
8.6.3 Print dose summary 8-26
8.6.4 Print patient summary 8-28
8.6.5 Clear the print queue 8-29
8.7 Check disk space 8-29
8.8 Archive images 8-30
8.8.1 Select a storage location or device 8-31
8.8.2 Configure a storage device 8-33
8.8.3 Portable media options 8-33
8.8.4 Copy to archive device 8-35
8.9 Delete exams and images 8-36
8.9.1 Delete selected images 8-37
8.9.2 Delete exams 8-37
8.9.3 Delete all images 8-37
8.10 DICOM image viewer application 8-37
8.11 Portable media viewer utility 8-40
8.11.1 Use the Media Viewer 8-40
9. Laser Aimer 9-1
9.1 Laser Aimer safety 9-1
9.2 Operating the Laser Aimer 9-2
10. DICOM setup and configuration 10-1
10.1 Set up DICOM network configurations 10-1
10.1.1 Set up DICOM local server 10-4
10.1.2 Set up DICOM MWL / MPPS server 10-6
10.1.3 Set up DICOM print servers 10-7
10.1.4 Set up DICOM query / retrieve server 10-10
10.1.5 Store / Storage Commit Server 10-12
xi
Table of contents
10.2 Troubleshoot DICOM setup 10-16

11. Contrast agent injector 11-1
11.1 Safety notice 11-1
11.2 Proper injector use 11-1
11.2.1 Intended use 11-1
11.2.2 Connect the injector to the system 11-1
11.2.3 Auto inject synchronization 11-2
12. Labels and symbols 12-1
12.1 Labels 12-1
12.2 Symbols 12-5
13. Quality assurance, maintenance, and storage 13-1
13.1 Cleaning and disinfecting the system 13-1
13.1.1 Approved cleaning agents / disinfectants 13-1
13.2 Planned and periodic maintenance 13-4
13.2.1 Owner responsibilities 13-4
13.2.2 Definitions 13-4
13.2.3 Planned maintenance overview 13-5
13.3 Quality assurance (QA) checks 13-9
13.3.1 Mechanical QA check 13-11
13.3.2 Motorized system QA check 13-12
13.3.3 Electrical QA check 13-14
13.3.4 Fast stop QA check 13-14
13.3.5 Image quality and dosimetry QA checks 13-15
13.4 Storage and shipment 13-26
13.4.1 Storage 13-26
13.4.2 Shipment 13-27
14. Troubleshooting and messages 14-1
14.1 Error recovery 14-1
14.1.1 Error recovery procedure 14-1
14.1.2 Event logs 14-1
14.1.3 Transfer status 14-3
14.1.4 Image freeze 14-4
14.1.5 No X-ray 14-4
14.1.6 No boot 14-4
14.2 Heat management 14-4
14.2.1 Anode temperature thresholds 14-4
14.3 Messages 14-6
15. Privacy and security 15-1
15.1 Privacy and security environment 15-1
15.2 Portable media security 15-1
15.3 Enterprise authentication and user administration 15-2
xii
Table of contents
15.3.1 Enable enterprise authentication 15-2

15.3.2 Local and enterprise user administration 15-2
15.3.3 Privileges, users, and groups 15-3
16. Technical specifications and references 16-1
16.1 General system information 16-1
16.1.1 Communication center contact information 16-1
16.1.2 Classification type 16-1
16.1.3 Power requirements 16-2
16.1.4 Workstation shelf power 16-3
16.1.5 Environmental conditions 16-3
16.2 Workstation specifications 16-4
16.2.1 Display monitor specifications 16-4
16.2.2 Line pair resolutions 16-4
16.2.3 Input/Output (I/O) 16-4
16.2.4 Image storage capacity 16-5
16.2.5 Portable media specifications 16-5
16.2.6 Wireless Card 16-6
16.2.7 RSvP specifications 16-6
16.2.8 Interconnect cable 16-7
16.3 C-Arm specifications 16-7
16.3.1 C-Arm generator specifications 16-7
16.3.2 C-Arm generator operating parameters 16-8
16.3.3 Modes of operation 16-9
16.3.4 X-ray source assembly 16-11
16.3.5 Heating and cooling charts - tube housing 16-12
16.3.6 Heating and cooling chart - anode 16-13
16.3.7 Tube rating charts 16-13
16.3.8 Maximum surface temperatures 16-14
16.3.9 Collimator information 16-14
16.3.10 Image detector specifications 16-15
16.3.11 Removable anti-scatter grid specifications 16-15
16.3.12 X-ray beam geometry 16-16
16.3.13 C-Arm camera output video signal 16-16
16.3.14 Laser Aimer 16-16
16.4 Other system specifications 16-17
16.4.1 Optional accessories 16-17
16.4.2 Disposable items 16-18
16.4.3 Zones of occupancy 16-18
16.4.4 Isokerma maps of stray radiation 16-19
16.4.5 Electromagnetic specifications 16-28
16.4.6 Immunity 16-29
xiii
Table of contents
16.4.7 Material safety data sheets 16-32

16.5 Dimensions 16-33
16.5.1 Workstation dimensions 16-33
16.5.2 C-Arm dimensions 16-34
16.5.3 OEC Touch Tableside dimensions 16-36
17. Country and regional information 17-1
17.1 USA and all FDA-regulated regions 17-1
17.2 North America 17-4
17.3 Argentina 17-4
17.4 Australia and New Zealand 17-5
17.5 Brazil 17-5
17.5.1 Registration and importer information in Brazil 17-5
17.5.2 Labels 17-6
17.6 Canada 17-7
17.7 China 17-8
17.8 European Union 17-8
17.9 Iran 17-9
17.10 Japan 17-10
17.11 Kazakhstan 17-10
17.12 Mexico 17-10
17.13 Peru 17-11
17.14 Russia 17-11
17.15 Saudi Arabia 17-12
17.16 Singapore 17-12
17.17 South Korea 17-13
17.18 Turkey 17-13
Appendix A: Dose rates A-1
Determining your settings A-2
A.1 Dose rates for software versions 1.0.XXXX / 1.2.XXXX A-3
A.2 Dose rates for software versions 2.X.X.XXXX / 3.1.X.XXXX A-12
Appendix B: IQ and dose QA check data form B-1
Index I-1
xiv
1. Safety overview
1. Safety overview
This manual describes operation about your OEC system. It is intended for qualified medical
personnel who have been trained in the use of medical imaging equipment. It is not designed to
replace or substitute for certified training in the radiological or medical field.
Functional capabilities and operation of the equipment are described here which can be used
in a variety of diagnostic, therapeutic, and surgical applications.
1.1 Applicability
This manual is provided for operators using the product for uses described in the 1.4.3
Indications for use. It has been written to describe the use of the system in its most complete
configuration. If any of the options described in this manual are not included on your system,
skip the corresponding chapter or section. Contact GE OEC Customer Service for the options
available in your market.
1.2 Owner responsibilities

The owner has the responsibility to ensure system compatibility, operator qualifications, and
the continued compliance of equipment and operating specifications. Systems should only be
used in designated use areas appropriate for X-ray radiation.
1.2.1 System compatibility

Using the system in combination with accessories or other items that are not part of the system
may have possible adverse effects arising from materials located in the X-ray beam (such as
parts of an operating table).
Damage may result to the system if incompatible components are connected. Read this
operator manual thoroughly prior to connecting components with uncertain compatibility.
1.2.2 Operator qualifications

It is the responsibility of the owner to ensure that only properly trained, qualified personnel who
have obtained credentials from the appropriate authorities operate the system.
1.2.3 Continued compliance

The owner is responsible for registration and licensure of the system under state and federal
regulations. The owner is responsible for verifying continued compliance with all applicable
regulations and standards. Consult local, state, federal and/or international agencies regarding
specific requirements and regulations applicable to the use of this type of medical electrical
equipment.
1.2.4 Unauthorized modifications

When properly assembled this equipment meets US Federal regulations and International
1-1
1. Safety overview
standards. Unauthorized modifications to the equipment may impact adherence to these

standards and make the equipment unsafe to operate. Never make any modifications or
adjustments to the equipment unless directed by a qualified GE OEC representative.
Warning Do not modify this equipment without authorization of the manufacturer.
1.3 GE OEC responsibilities

GE OEC Medical Systems, Inc. certifies each system at the time of manufacture and
installation. After-sale operating practices and safety are the responsibility of the
owner/operator.
1.4 Product description and summary of use

1.4.1 Device description
The OEC Elite is a mobile fluoroscopic system used to assist trained surgeons and other
qualified physicians in providing fluoroscopic X-ray images and volumetric reconstructions
during diagnostic, interventional, and surgical procedures. These images help the physician
visualize the patient’s anatomy and interventional tools. This visualization helps to localize
clinical regions of interest and pathology. The images provide real-time visualization and
records of pre-procedure anatomy, in vivo clinical activity, and post-procedure outcomes.
The system is composed of two major components, a C-Arm and a tethered Workstation:
l The C-Arm is a stable mobile platform capable of performing linear motions (vertical,
horizontal) and rotational motions (orbital, lateral) that allow the user to position the X-ray
image chain at various angles and distances with respect to the patient anatomy and
table. It includes a high voltage generator, software, X-ray control, and a “C” shaped
image gantry, which supports an X-ray tube and an image detector. Its functionality is
controlled by software on the Workstation and on the OEC Touch, a digital flat panel
controller mounted on the cross-arm. Some systems also include a standalone mobile
Touch Tableside C-Arm control panel mounted on a cart.
l The Workstation is a stable mobile platform with an articulating arm supporting a color
image high resolution LCD display monitor, image processing equipment/software,
recording devices, data input / output devices, and power control systems. The
Workstation is the primary user interface to the system and can be located at a
convenient location in the room independent of where the C-Arm is located.
1.4.2 Intended use

The OEC Elite mobile fluoroscopy system is designed to provide fluoroscopic and digital spot
images of adult and pediatric populations during diagnostic, interventional, and surgical
procedures.
1-2
1. Safety overview
1.4.3 Indications for use

The OEC Elite mobile fluoroscopy system is designed to provide fluoroscopic and digital spot
images of adult and pediatric populations during diagnostic, interventional, and surgical
procedures. Examples of a clinical application may include orthopedic, gastrointestinal,
endoscopic, urologic, neurologic, vascular, cardiac, critical care, and emergency procedures.
1.4.4 Patient population

The OEC Elite system can be used on all patients including patients of any sex, age (from
pediatric to geriatric), level of health, or condition. The device can be used on all regions of the
body.
1.4.5 Use environment

The intended use environment for the OEC Elite is in a hospital or clinic setting within a sterile
operating room, a procedure room or, in some situations, an emergency room.
1.4.6 Intended users

Intended users of the OEC Elite are surgeons and physicians, along with qualified physician’s
assistants, nurse practitioners, and radiology technicians.
1.4.7 Intended clinical benefits

The OEC Elite system can be used to provide fluoroscopic X-ray images during diagnostic,
interventional, and surgical procedures. The 2D functionality help the physician visualize the
patient’s anatomy, its regions of interest, pathology, surgical instruments, catheters, injections,
and implants. This visualization helps to localize clinical regions of interest and pathology. The
images provide real-time visualization and records of pre-procedural anatomy, in vivoclinical
activity, and post-procedure outcomes. The visualization and images enable the physician to
perform open and minimally invasive surgical techniques which can help reduce tissue
disruption and blood loss, and even lower the length of surgery and anesthesia time over
conventional open methods, allowing for a quicker recovery time.
1.4.8 Contraindications for use

There are no contraindications for use of the OEC Elite system.
1.4.9 Potential side effects

The potential side effects of the OEC Elite system are those related with X-ray radiation. In
general, there are two types of effects of X-ray radiation: deterministic and stochastic.
Deterministic effects, such as skin reddening, hair loss, radiation dermatitis, and potential
changes to the lens of the eye, can appear after an acute exposure to high levels of radiation.
Stochastic effects, such as cancer incidence and DNA mutations, represent some increase in
the likelihood of long-term health effects years and decades into future due to length and time
of exposure to radiation. Pediatrics patients are at greater risk with stochastic effects compared
to adults, due to their longer potential life and increased sensitivity to such effects. The OEC
1-3
1. Safety overview
Elite uses low levels of ionizing X-ray radiation to limit the possibility of collateral side effects.
When used as intended in a clinical setting according to the Use environment (on page 1-3)
and under medical supervision of a physician, it is not reasonably anticipated to result in
unforeseeable or observable side effects.
1.4.10 Essential performance

In order to meet its intended use and comply with regulatory standards, the system must:
l Provide fluoro imaging.
l Display Last Image Hold images (LIH) following the termination of an X-ray exposure,
and indicate them as such.
l Maintain patient and image database integrity.
l Produce fluoroscopic images of acceptable quality.
l Motorized systems only: Provide C-Arm motorization.
l Ensure increment / decrement between two X-ray tube voltage settings is within 50% to
150% of the indicated change.
l Maintain X-ray tube voltage inaccuracy at 8% or less.
l Maintain X-ray tube current inaccuracy at 20% or less.
l Maintain X-ray tube loading time at +/- (10% + 1 ms).
l Maintain a coefficient of variation of measured values of air kerma at 0.05 or lower.
l Maintain the quotient of average of the measured values of air kerma divided by the
preselected values or the indicated values of current time product <= 0.2 mean value of
quotients.
l Implement the Automatic Exposure Rate Control feature in the Automatic Brightness
Stabilization (ABS) function.
l Maintain the need for re-initiation (by deliberate user action: foot pedal press, pressing a
push button) to produce irradiation.
l Complete a system boot-up in less than 180 seconds.
l Provide radiation dose structured report (RDSR) as per IEC/PAS 61910-1:2007.
1.4.11 X-ray equipment certification

The US configuration for this device conforms to all applicable standards of 21 CFR subchapter
J for Radiation Health when assembled according to manufacturer's instructions. The unit may
be configured to meet destination country regulations when shipped outside the US. If returned
to the US, the unit must be reconfigured to comply with 21 CFR Subchapter J before putting
into use. To do so, contact your local GE OEC Service representative.
1.4.12 After-sale operating and safety practices

GE OEC Medical Systems, Inc. assumes no responsibility or liability for after-sale operating
and safety practices, nor can it be responsible for personal injury or damage resulting from
misuse of its systems.
1-4
1. Safety overview
1.5 General safety

Potential hazards exist in the use of medical electronic devices and X-ray systems. Operators
using the equipment should understand the safety issues, emergency procedures, and the
operating instructions provided.
The following pages describe hazardous and potentially hazardous conditions, and how to
adequately protect yourself and others from possible injury.
1.5.1 Contact information

Questions and comments regarding safety should be addressed to the GE OEC Medical
Systems, Inc. service organization nearest them. Unresolved problems should be referred to:
Vice President, Quality Assurance
384 Wright Brothers Drive
Salt Lake City, Utah 84116
(801) 328-9300
See 17. Country and regional information beginning on page 17-1 for regional contact
information.
1.5.2 Reporting serious incidents

Any serious incident related to the use of this device should be reported to both the
manufacturer and the health authority / competent authority where the device is installed.
To report to GE Healthcare, do one of the following:
l Contact your local service representative, or
l Send an email to [email protected].
In you communication, include the following information:
l The catalog number or the model designation of the device as stated on the identification
plate affixed on the device,
l The System ID / serial number / lot number of the device,
l The date of the incident,
l A description of incident, including any patient or user impact or injury, and
l Your contact information including facility, address, contact name, title, and telephone
number.
1.5.3 Safety hazard alerts

There are three hazard classifications, which are denoted and prioritized by the alert words:
1-5
1. Safety overview
Table 1-1: Hazard alert definitions
Alert Circumstances for Use

DANGER
DANGER INDICATES AN IMMINENTLY HAZARDOUS SITUATION THAT,
IF NOT AVOIDED, WILL RESULT IN DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY.
Warning
Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided,
could result in death or serious injury.
Caution
Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, may
result in moderate to minor injury, equipment damage or loss of data.
1.5.4 External devices

To ensure patient safety, only connect external equipment that has been approved by GE OEC
Medical Systems, Inc. All equipment attached to the external interface connections must meet
the requirements of IEC 60601-1 when operated within the patient environment. When used
outside of the patient environment, each externally connected device must comply with the
relevant IEC/ISO requirements for that device. In any case, the combination of all externally
connected equipment shall not cause the leakage current of any device used within the patient
environment to exceed the limits stated in IEC 60601-1.
Connection to a network
The system can be connected to a facility network. When connecting the system to a network,
the Responsible Organization must analyze, evaluate, and control potential risks or hazardous
situations that may occur due to failure of the network connection. This analysis should
consider network configuration changes, equipment added to or removed from the network,
and updates or upgrades.
See 2.1.9 Set up network configuration beginning on page 2-12 for more information on
connecting to a network.
1.5.5 Wireless compliance and safety

This device complies with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of the Radio
Equipment Directive 2014/53/EU.
Hereby, GE OEC Medical Systems, Inc. declares that the radio equipment type OEC Elite is in
compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU.
(https://www.gehealthcare.com/documentationlibrary) in a web browser.
2. Once in the portal, enter RED DOC in Enter the document number or keyword field.
1-6
1. Safety overview
3. Select X-ray Surgery (XR) from the Modality filter menu.

4. Select X-RAY (SURGERY) OEC ELITE from the Products filter menu.
This device complies with ACMA radio communications regulatory arrangements and
mandatory technical standards as required for Australia and New Zealand.
This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device. The IC number identifies the ISED certification number associated with
the transmitter.
See Table 17-8 on page 17-4 for information on the wireless certification label and symbols.
Caution Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Caution Due to the fact that the frequencies used by 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g,
802.11n, and 802.16e wireless LAN devices may not yet be harmonized in all
countries, 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11n, and 802.16e products are
designed for use only in specific countries, and are not allowed to be operated in
countries other than those of designated use. As a user of these products, you
are responsible for ensuring that the products are used only in the countries for
which they were intended and for verifying that they are configured with the
correct selection of frequency and channel for the country of use. Any deviation
from the permissible power and frequency settings for the country of use is an
infringement of national law and may be punished as such.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.
This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference
to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following
measures:
l Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
l Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
l Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
l Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
1-7
1. Safety overview
Note: To comply with FCC’s RF Exposure Safety Limits for general population / uncontrolled
exposure, the antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a
separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or
operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
This product is restricted to indoor use.

AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE EL ES
FI FR HR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV
MT NL NO PL PT RO SE SI SK TR UK
1.5.6 Patient environment

United States
Within the US, the Patient Environment is defined by NFPA 99. In areas in which patients are
normally cared for, the patient environment is the space with surfaces likely to be contacted by
the patient or an attendant who can touch the patient.
This encloses a space within the room 6 ft. beyond the perimeter of the bed (examination table,
surgical table, treatment booth, and so on) in its intended location, and extending vertically 7.5
ft. above the floor.
Figure 1-1: US patient environment
International
In many international countries, the patient environment is defined by IEC 60601-1. In areas in
which patients are normally cared for, the patient environment is the space with surfaces likely
to be contacted by the patient or an attendant who can touch the patient.
This encloses a space within the room 1.5 m beyond the perimeter of the bed (examination
table, surgical table, treatment booth, and so on) in its intended location.
1-8
1. Safety overview
Figure 1-2: International patient environment
1.6 Electrical safety

Note: Any emergency procedure developed by the owner, for the area in which the system is
used, should include these safety measures.
1.6.1 Electrical shock

Observe the following safety procedures to avoid electric shock or serious injury to operators
and patients and to avoid system malfunction.
l Make all electrical connections to equipment while outside the patient environment. Do
not touch a connector and the patient at the same time.
l Do not bypass, jumper or otherwise disable the safety interlocks.
l Do not remove any of the assembly covers.
l Do not place food or beverage containers on any part of the equipment. If spilled they
can cause short circuits.
l Always remove power to the equipment before cleaning. See 13.1.1 Approved cleaning
agents / disinfectants beginning on page 13-1 for details on cleaning the system.
l Only qualified service engineers are allowed to service or repair a system.
Warning Electrical circuits inside the equipment may use voltages which are capable
of causing serious injury or death from electric shock. To avoid this hazard,
never remove any of the cabinet covers.
Warning To avoid the risk of electric shock, this equipment must only be connected to
a supply mains with protective earth.
1.6.2 Electrical fire

In the event of electrical fire on or near the system, perform the following emergency
procedure:
1-9
1. Safety overview
1. Remove battery-backed power from the system by pressing the system disable switch
on the back of the Workstation.
2. Unplug the power cord from the AC receptacle.
3. Evacuate personnel from the area.
4. Only use a fire extinguisher that is approved for use on electrical fires.
5. Call your local fire department for help if necessary.
Warning The use of the wrong type of fire extinguisher presents electrical shock and
burn hazards. To avoid these hazards, a fire extinguisher which meets
applicable regulations and standards must be available in the room where the
equipment is being used. Remember that equipment that is equipped with
batteries is a source of electrical current, even when AC power is
disconnected.
1.6.3 Explosion
The system is not rated for use in a flammable gas or oxygen-rich environment.
If an abnormal condition occurs, such as the room fills with flammable gas, take steps to
prevent the gas from coming in contact with the equipment. Follow these guidelines:
l Do not turn the system off or unplug it from the AC receptacle.
l Do not operate any other electrically powered equipment.
l Evacuate all personnel from the area and ventilate with fresh air. Avoid operating any
automated (electrically operated) doors or windows.
l Contact your local fire department as soon as possible.
1.6.4 Ground fault

If the operating room has a ground fault alarm and the alarm is actuated:
l Do not operate the system.
l Call a qualified service technician.
1.6.5 Equipment malfunction

If either the hospital or equipment circuit breakers trip, an equipment malfunction may be
indicated. Do not attempt to operate the equipment until a qualified service engineer has
checked it.
If any of the equipment controls fail to respond as indicated in this manual, you should:
1. Remove power to the equipment by placing the power switch in the off position and
unplugging the power cord from the AC receptacle.
2. Notify a qualified service engineer.
1-10
1. Safety overview
3. Do not operate the equipment until the service technician advises that it is operating
properly.
1.7 Mechanical safety

1.7.1 Improperly attached equipment
If your equipment accommodates a Laser Aimer or some other piece of equipment that can be
attached or removed, follow these guidelines:
l Use only equipment and accessories approved by GE OEC Medical Systems, Inc.
l Read and follow all instructions for attaching and detaching equipment.
Warning Attach the equipment properly. Incorrectly attached equipment could fall,
causing injury to the patient or operator.
Note: See 16.5 Dimensions beginning on page 16-33 for the correct dimensions of items that
may be used in conjunction with this product.
1.7.2 Equipment stability, transport, and positioning

If your system is mounted on wheels and casters and it is moved or operated improperly it
could roll out of control. Follow these guidelines:
l Two people should maintain control of the equipment when moving up or down an
incline.
l Place all mechanical assemblies in their most compact (transport) position and lock
brake handles prior to moving the equipment.
l Always lock the monitor assembly during transport.
l Use the handles designed for moving the equipment and mechanical assemblies.
l Never attempt to move the system up or down steps.
l Do not operate the equipment on unlevel floors.
l Do not lock the wheel brakes and leave the equipment unattended on unlevel floors or
inclines.
l Always apply the wheel locks when the system is in its final position.
l Do not move the equipment if the casters or wheels are not functioning properly.
l Moving or positioning while disk drives are accessing information may cause mechanical
shock damage to the disk drive.
1.7.3 Motorized and manual mechanical movement

This equipment has parts that move or can be moved during normal operation. Some parts
require manual activation, while others are activated using motors.
Observe the following safety guidelines:
1-11
1. Safety overview
l Take care to avoid pinching hands, fingers, or other body parts when moving or
positioning the system.
l Observe and prevent articles of clothing from getting caught in moving parts.
l Always observe mechanical assemblies when operating the motor to avoid collision with
a person or object.
l Use care when working around equipment to avoid unintentional motor actuation. Do not
carelessly place objects on the equipment or bump or lean against the equipment.
l Ensure that motion locks are secure after mechanical movements to prevent unintended
motion or collision with a person or object.
l Ensure that motion clutches are secure after motorized movements to prevent
unintended motion or collision with a person or object.
l A motion stop button is provided on the RUI and mini RUI to stop motion immediately, if
needed. See Motion stop switch beginning on page 3-78 for instructions and locations.
l A fast stop switch is provided on the cross-arm housing to stop X-ray generation and
motor motions, if needed. See 5.4.3 Fast stop switches beginning on page 5-9 for
additional information about the fast stop function.
l A bumper on the detector provides contact detection to stop motion if a collision occurs.
See Contact detection beginning on page 3-83 for information about this the bumper.
1.7.4 Repetitive motion

The system is designed to reduce repetitive motion injury risks as much as is reasonably
practicable. When operating the system, follow work practices to further reduce these risks,
such as taking frequent breaks and varying motions.
1.7.5 Ingress of fluids

Caution The X-ray system is not rated for water-tight operation. If liquids drip into the
equipment, disconnect the power cord and do not operate the system until it can
be cleaned and inspected by a qualified service engineer.
Excessive amounts of fluids such as antiseptics, cleaning solutions, or bodily fluids may
damage internal components if they are allowed inside the equipment and may require
unplanned service that is not covered by standard planned maintenance or service contract
coverage. Use drapes to protect equipment and do not apply excessive amounts of fluid when
cleaning.
1.7.6 Draping
Cover the C-Arm using a sterile draping system during use. Replace drapes after each use.
Custom fit, single-use sterile drapes specifically designed for OEC C-Arms can be purchased
from GE Healthcare. See 16.1.1 Communication center contact information beginning on page
16-1 to order any consumables.
Refer to the instructions provided with the draping system for details on how to drape the
1-12
1. Safety overview
system.
Note: Use of a footswitch cover is recommended during all medical procedures.
Draping the X-ray tube housing will inhibit air flow resulting in cooling inefficiencies. This may
result in the housing reaching its rated heat capacity sooner. You will receive messages
indicating the temperature of the housing. When the housing reaches its maximum rated heat
capacity, X-rays will be disabled until the housing has cooled. A message displays. See
HOUSING OVERHEATED, X-RAYS DISABLED Restart the system. on page 14-38 for more
information.
Caution Avoid covering the X-ray tube’s ventilation holes or system vents with a drape or
other obstruction. The system may overheat, resulting in downtime while the
system cools.
Draping the X-ray tube cooling kit option

When an X-ray tube cooling kit is installed (on applicable models), a fan and vents are added to
increase air flow to the X-ray tube housing. Covering the vents in the high voltage cable cover
with drapes will prevent the fan from cooling the X-ray tube housing as designed.
1.7.7 Cooling efficiency

Draping some parts of the X-ray equipment may restrict airflow to components that provide
heat sinking and to vents designed to cool the equipment. Drape equipment and cover vents
only when exposure to excessive fluids is unavoidable and extended use of the equipment is
not required.
1.7.8 Contact Burns

Warning Extended use of imaging equipment may cause components such as X-ray
tubes to reach temperatures capable of inflicting burns. Use care when
positioning equipment to avoid placing hot components on or in close
proximity to patients and personnel. An anesthetized or unconscious patient
is incapable of sensing and reacting to a hot component.See 16.3.8
Maximum surface temperatures beginning on page 16-14 for more
information.
1.8 Radiation safety

Warning This equipment either produces or is used in the vicinity of ionizing radiation.
Risks and dangers are inherent in the operation of this equipment, and
exposure to radiation can have both short-term deterministic and long-term
stochastic effects, including skin injury, hair loss, and increased risk of
cancer. This equipment should only be used by personnel properly trained
and authorized in the use of ionizing radiation. Observe proper safety
practices during equipment operation.
1-13
1. Safety overview
1.8.1 Designated use areas

This equipment should be used only in areas that are suitable for safe operation. These areas
should provide radiation protection from stray scatter radiation outside the equipment use area,
and be properly marked, indicating that ionizing radiation may be in use in the area.
1.8.2 Personal radiation protection

Ensure that all personnel wear appropriate protective clothing, such as lead aprons, thyroid
shields, glasses, and radiation monitoring devices, and use protective devices such as lead
shields, stands, curtains, and so on, while using the equipment or working in the area around
the equipment. See 16.4.4 Isokerma maps of stray radiation beginning on page 16-19 for stray
radiation levels expected near the equipment, to assist with protective equipment selection.
Take care that operators and other personnel do not put hands, arms, or other body parts in the
X-ray beam. Always stand as far as possible from the X-ray tube when generating X-rays.
Consult with local radiation officials for specific radiation protection guidance.
1.8.3 Patient radiation protection

Exercise care in patient and equipment positioning to minimize the amount of radiation needed
for diagnosis and treatment. Use appropriate protective shielding and covers over patient
anatomy that is not part of the area to be imaged. Select X-ray techniques and imaging modes
that maximize imaging capabilities while minimizing the amount of radiation delivered to the
patient. See 5.12.1 Dosimetry display beginning on page 5-46 for additional information on
radiation controls, modes of operation, and dose levels.
1.8.4 Radiation indicators

Remain alert for visual indicators and audible alarms that are activated when ionizing radiation
is being produced by equipment in the work area. Yellow indicator lights illuminate when X-rays
are being produced. An audible rhythmic beeping tone is emitted at the initiation of X-rays, and
continues throughout the duration of the radiation exposure. See Visual and audible X-ray
indication beginning on page 5-55 for additional information on radiation indicators.
1.8.5 Radiation burns

High levels of radiation directed at the same patient skin area for a prolonged period of time
may cause deterministic effect skin burns. To minimize this absorbed dose to the patient, use
reduced dose techniques or reorient the X-ray beam in relation to the patient anatomy
whenever possible. See 5.12.1 Dosimetry display beginning on page 5-46 for additional
information on radiation controls, modes of operation, and dose levels.
1.8.6 Source-to-skin distance

Caution The patient should be positioned as far away from the X-ray source as possible in
order to keep the absorbed dose to the patient as low as reasonably achievable.
1-14
1. Safety overview
Regulations specify that a minimum source-to-skin distance (SSD) be maintained, with a

reduced distance exception for special surgical procedures. The system maintains a minimum
source-to-skin distance of 30 cm when the skin spacer is attached to the collimator cover.
Where allowed, the skin spacer may be removed for special procedures. When removed, the
collimator cover maintains a minimum source-to-skin distance of 20 cm.
Warning Removing the skin spacer may result in increased radiation exposure to the
patient. The rate of exposure increases exponentially as the anatomy is
positioned closer to the X-ray tube. The skin spacer should only be removed
on the instructions of a physician, and should be reattached to the collimator
cover immediately following the procedure. See 3.5.4 Skin spacer beginning
on page 3-41 for information on attaching and detaching the skin spacer.
1.8.7 Patient supports

Objects in the beam, such as tables and patient supports, may cause the imaging system to
increase the amount of radiation in order to obtain an optimal image of the patient. Minimize
additional exposure by removing unnecessary objects from the path of the X-ray beam or by
using accessories designed for use in X-ray beams.
1.8.8 Radiation fast stops

Radiation fast stop switches located on the cross-arm housing are provided to stop X-rays
immediately if needed. Pressing a red fast stop switch will immediately stop X-ray generation
and motor motions. If the fast stop switch is activated, ensure that no hazard exists before
resetting the switch. See 5.4.3 Fast stop switches beginning on page 5-9 for additional
information about the fast stop function.
1.9 Electromagnetic compatibility

All OEC C-Arms generate and use radio frequency energy and must be installed and used
according to the manufacturer’s instructions in order to avoid receiving radio frequency
interference. If this equipment generates or receives interference do the following to correct the
problem:
l Verify that the equipment is the cause by turning the system on and off.
l In the event of unintended motor actuation, immediately remove power to the equipment.
l In the event of unintended X-ray actuation, immediately remove power to the equipment.
l Reorient the equipment until the interference stops.
l Relocate the equipment with respect to other equipment in the room.
l Plug the equipment into a different outlet so that the equipment and the receiver are on
different branch circuits.
l Use only input/output (I/O) cables supplied by GE OEC Medical Systems, Inc.
Mobile imaging equipment has the potential to emit electromagnetic radiation that may
interfere with the safe operation of other medical equipment. Conversely, other medical
equipment, including RF communications equipment, may emit electromagnetic radiation that
1-15
1. Safety overview
interferes with the mobile imaging system.

See 16.4.5 Electromagnetic specifications beginning on page 16-28 for Emission Compliance
level and limits and Immunity Compliance level and recommendations to help the equipment
keep its clinical utility.
Systems containing a wireless transmitter generate elevated levels of radio frequency energy
at specific frequencies during normal operation. See 16.2.6 Wireless Card beginning on page
16-6 for transmission frequencies and energy levels of the wireless transmitter.
Note: All cables that are used to connect to the DVI and D-Sub connector I/O ports of the
Workstation must be shielded cables or cables supplied by GE OEC Medical Systems,
Inc.
1.9.1 Performance criteria

The system is designed to perform its intended function during normal operation. In the
presence of electromagnetic interference some degradation of displayed live video may occur
but the system will return to normal operation when the interference is eliminated. Any loss of
function will be readily apparent to the operator and will not cause a safety hazard.
Electromagnetic interference will not cause permanent damage to the system.
Degraded electromagnetic compatibility

Warning The use of accessories, transducers, and cables other than those specified
may result in increased emissions, or decreased immunity, or degraded
electromagnetic compatibility of the equipment and/or system.
System use in the vicinity of other equipment

The system should not be used adjacent to or stacked with other equipment; if adjacent or
stacked use is necessary, the system should be observed to verify normal operation in the
configuration in which it will be used.
1.10 Patient privacy and data security

If a system is to be left operating while unattended, or operated around unauthorized persons,
such as in an emergency room, enable the following HIPAA security measures to protect
patient privacy.
l Set up a system password to prevent unauthorized access of patient data. See 2.1.11
Set up security beginning on page 2-25 for how to set up and Password and log in
beginning on page 2-73 for how to use this function.
l Use the Blank button to clear the screens and prevent unauthorized persons from seeing
patient data. See 3.4.8 Blank button beginning on page 3-33 for details on this function.
l Place the system in Standby mode. The operator should remove the key from the
keyswitch and keep the key with them at all times to prevent unauthorized motion and X-
rays. See 5.4.6 Keyswitch positions beginning on page 5-13 for how to use this function.
1-16
1. Safety overview
l If the device is connected to a network, the network should be private and inaccessible
by unauthorized personnel, including patients and the general public.
Note: All names appearing in example screens in this manual are fictitious. Any resemblance
to real people, living or dead is purely coincidental.
1-17
1. Safety overview
This page intentionally left blank.
1-18
2. System setup
2. System setup
This chapter covers the basic software setup as well as basics of starting up the system,
shutting it down, and restarting it.
Note: Main system screens includes a breadcrumb trail at the top of the screen to help
navigation. These screens are introduced in this chapter using the full breadcrumb trail,
then referred to by the screen title thereafter.
Screens may vary depending on system configuration.
2.1 System Overview

This section describes how to set up the system for initial use.
2.1.1 First time system setup

The first time the system is set up or after an extended time in storage, the batteries in the UPS
need several hours to charge before the UPS can be completely effective in case of an
unexpected power loss.
Charging of the UPS batteries begins automatically when the system is plugged in and does
not affect operation.
If the Workstation is connected to a compatible C-Arm, the C-Arm could require several hours
to charge its batteries after the system is plugged in initially or after an extended period in
storage.
Note: For more information on C-Arm charge times and requirements, refer to the information
on powering on and battery charging in 2.2.2 Turn on the system beginning on page 2-
69.
This section explains how to tailor system operations to your specific requirements. Use these
screens to configure how decimals display, enable auto features, set defaults, time and date,
and alarm tones, and so on.
Some features are not available on all systems.
2-1
2. System setup
2.1.2 System setup screens

Use the main Applications > Setup screen to set up system features. These settings apply
when the system is started and when a new exam is started, and should be set up before using
the system for the first time.
Touch the Applications tab. The Applications screen displays.
Figure 2-1: Applications screen
See DICOM Images, 3.3.3 View External Video beginning on page 3-21, 14.1.2 Event logs
beginning on page 14-1, and 14.1.3 Transfer status beginning on page 14-3 for more
information about the other buttons on this screen.
Touch the Setup... button to display the main Setup screen. By default, the main Setup screen
displays system, hardware and software information, and current connectivity.
X-rays are disabled when the Setup screens are being configured.
2-2
2. System setup
Figure 2-2: Main Setup screen with menu on the right side
Use the menu items on the right side of this screen to set up system options. Touch Exit to
return to the main Applications screen from any of the system option screens, or to the
previous screen from any submenu screens. If settings have been changed but not saved, a
message displays. Follow the message instructions.
2-3
2. System setup
2.1.3 Set up image acquisition

Use the Applications > Setup > Image Acquisition screen to set up automatic save, swap,
cine playback, mini cine playback, and Smart Metal default functionality, and to select dose,
pulse rate, high level controls, HLF, vascular settings, CAK alarm limits, X-ray termination, and
default landmark percentage settings.
Touch Acquisition in the menu to display the Image Acquisition setup screen.
Figure 2-3: Image Acquisition setup screen
Default Settings
Auto Swap at Beginning of Exposure
Select this check box to automatically move live images to the right side of the main sys-
tem monitor when the image is created. Clear the check box to require users to swap
images manually.
Auto Save at End of Exposure
Select this check box to automatically save static images as soon as the X-ray switch is
released. Clear the check box to require users to save images manually. Note that
Roadmap phase 1 always saves even if auto save is disabled because it is necessary
to save an image for Roadmap to work correctly.
Auto Playback When Cine Acquired
Select this check box to automatically begin cine playback as soon as the cine is
acquired. Clear the check box to require users to play cine runs manually.
Use Mini Cine Playback
Select this check box to automatically begin cine playback in the mini cine viewer as
soon as the cine is complete. Clear the check box to use the full cine viewer. If Auto
Playback When Cine Acquired is cleared, users must start cine playback manually.
2-4
2. System setup
Use Smart Metal

Select to enable metal rejection functionality and improve image quality when the
patient's body contains metal, such as dental fillings or internal hardware. Clear the
check box to turn off metal rejection.
Dose
Choose Standard Dose to improve image quality, or Low Dose to use a lower dose
rate.
Pulse Rate
Choose 4 PPS, 8 PPS, or 15 PPS (pulses per second). Available options may depend
on the system configuration.
High Level Control
Choose HLF, Digital Spot, or Digital Cine Pulse.
HLF generates X-rays at higher power output for denser anatomy and improves visu-
alizations while reducing X-ray exposure. Digital Spot generates X-rays at higher radi-
ation dose rates resulting in high quality imaging, and is often used for diagnostic
interpretation.
HLF
Choose Armed, which allows HLF at any time, or Disarmed, which requires the user to
arm HLF before each HLF shot.
Vascular
Select a default mode for Vascular imaging. Choose Roadmap or Fluoro.
CAK Alarm Limit
Choose the Cumulative Air Kerma (CAK) alarm limit from 0.50 Gy to 2.50 Gy, in 0.25
increments. The CAK Alarm indicates when radiation exposure has exceeded the limit
for an exam. Use lower settings for pediatric use, or in situations where lower doses are
preferred. Use higher settings to allow higher dose before the alarm sounds.
Shot Mode
Select Continuous to set the default shot mode to continuous imaging, or select
Pulse to set the default shot mode to pulsed imaging. By default, continuous
imaging is the default setting. The selection applies to new exams, but the user
can change the shot mode during the exam.
Contrast Selection
When negative (CO2) contrast is enabled on the system, choose Positive (e.g.
Iodine) to set the default contrast agent to a positive contrast agent, such as
iodine, or Negative (e.g. CO2) to set the default contrast agent to a negative
contrast agent, such as CO2.
Vascular Mode Negative Contrast
When negative (CO2) contrast is enabled on the system, select Enable Negative
Contrast (e.g. Iodine) to allow the user to enable negative contrast agent, such
as CO2, or clear to only allow positive contrast agents, such as iodine.
2-5
2. System setup
Terminate Short Exposure When

Depending on the service settings selected, one or more of the following may display.
Choose one. Contact Service if this setting needs to be changed. The actual limit of
exposure extension on very short “toe tap” exposures is dependent on the X-ray ter-
mination mode selected:
l Switch Released - Stops X-ray generation when the X-ray switch is released.
Image processing may be incomplete, which can reduce the quality of the image
displayed.
l Target Technique Reached - Stops X-ray generation as soon as the system
reaches the selected target technique, which may be after the X-ray switch is
released.
l Selected Noise Filter Applied - Stops X-ray generation when the selected level of
image processing has been applied to the image, which may be after the X-ray
switch is released. Note that maximum processing includes frame averaging,
which attempts to reduce noise effects in any one frame.
Landmark Percentage
Choose any value, from 0% to 100%.
Touch Save to save the settings or touch Exit to return to the main Applications screen. If
settings have been changed but not saved, a message displays. Follow the message
instructions.
2.1.4 Set up default profile

Use the Applications > Setup > Default Profile screen to select the imaging profile that will be
active when the system is started and when a new exam is started. See 5.2 Anatomical profile
beginning on page 5-4 for more information on imaging profiles.
Touch Profile in the menu to display the Default Profile setup screen.
2-6
2. System setup
Figure 2-4: Default Profile setup screen
Touch a profile option on the Default Profile setup screen to select that imaging profile as the
default.
Default Imaging Profile
General
The General profile provides image processing optimized for versatility, providing the
best images possible over a wide range of uses.
General HD
The General HD profile is optimized to provide small detail visibility with increased
sharpness.
Bolus Chase
The Bolus Chase profile is optimized for run-off procedures and for interventional pro-
cedures using small guidewires. It is tuned to provide the appearance and the advant-
ages of a subtracted run, although the image is not actually subtracted.
C-Spine (FPD systems)
On FPD systems, the C-Spine profile's X-ray technique and image processing are
optimized for cervical spine imaging to provide high visibility of vertebral bodies, pro-
cesses, facet joints, needles, and tools in short fluoro acquisitions.
Cardiac
The Cardiac profile is optimized for cardiac procedures. It reduces blooming artifacts
and enhances the visibility of moving features and vessels filled with a contrast agent
when compared to not using the profile. The moving features are interventional devices
2-7
2. System setup
such as guidewires, catheters, and stents that are inserted into vessels and manually
manipulated through vessels to the surgical location in the heart.
By default, systems are configured to use an enhanced noise reduction algorithm that
has image quality equivalent to a system with higher power capability, without an
increase in radiation dose. Enable or disable enhanced noise reduction using the Car-
diac check box on the Default Profile screen.
Orthopedic
The Orthopedic profile is optimized for bone contrast and small-detail visibility. It fea-
tures increased sharpness and increased noise reduction.
Pediatric
The Pediatric profile utilizes a lower dose optimized for small patients. This profile
provides image processing and is optimized for versatility, creating the best possible
images over a wide range of uses.
Spine (FPD systems)
On FPD systems, the Spine profile's X-ray technique and image processing are optim-
ized for thoracolumbar and sacral spine imaging to provide high visibility of vertebral
bodies, processes, facet joints, needles, and tools in short fluoro acquisitions.
Spine (II systems)
On II systems, the Spine profile's X-ray technique and image processing are optimized
for spine imaging from cervical to sacrum to provide high visibility of vertebral bodies,
processes, facet joints, needles, and tools in short fluoro acquisitions.
Vascular
The Vascular profile is optimized to visualize positive contrast agent-filled vessels, cath-
eters, stents, and other tools and devices in vascular procedures
increase in radiation dose. Enable or disable enhanced noise reduction using the Vas-
cular check box on the Default Profile screen.
9900
The 9900 profile mimics the imaging behavior of the earlier GE OEC 9900 Elite system.
Note: The Spine and General HD profiles are not available on GSP systems.
Enable Profile Enhancement
Select to enable image enhancement. Select Cardiac to enable image enhancement
when using the Cardiac profile, and Vascular to enable image enhancement when
using the Vascular profile. Enhancement for these profiles is on by default.
instructions.
2.1.5 Set up patient information

Some system setup is limited to Administrative users only. Emergency and clinical users
do not have access to the screens and functions described in this section.
2-8
2. System setup
Use the Applications > Setup > Patient Information screen to define the data that displays in
the image overlay, is saved to DICOM, and is printed.
Touch Patient in the menu to display the Patient Information setup screen.
Figure 2-5: Patient Information setup screen
Display information on X-ray images

When a patient information category is selected here, the related patient information
entered in active boxes displays on left side of the main system monitor.
Select the check box for each Patient Information category that should appear on
images, or clear the check box to exclude that information from images.
Options include Patient Name, Birthdate, Gender, Hospital Name, Patient ID, Phys-
ician, Procedure, Comments, Accession #, and Date/Time.
Retain Exams
Enter the default number of days to retain exams. Exams must be archived or manually
deleted. See 8.9 Delete exams and images on page 8-36 for details on archiving and
deleting exams.
Emergency Patient Information
Enter a name and ID for beginning exams for a new patient without entering full patient
information, for use in emergency situations. The system automatically adds a number
so that each emergency exams has a unique name.
Disable DICOM for Unnamed Exams
Select this check box to disable DICOM MPPS, Store, and Print messages from being
sent for emergency or unnamed exams.
2-9
2. System setup
instructions.
2.1.6 Set up position defaults

Use the Applications > Setup > Position Defaults screen to set up the default positions for the
system collimator, rotation, and magnification for new exams.
Touch Position Defaults in the menu to display the Position Defaults setup screen.
Figure 2-6: Position Defaults setup screen
New Exam Position Defaults for Collimator, Orientation, and Magnification

Select Home to return to neutral position and normal magnification for each new exam.
Select Retain Last to retain the last used settings for each new exam.
instructions.
2.1.7 Set up touchpad and audio

Use the Applications > Setup > Touchpad / Audio screen to configure the mouse functions,
touchpad operation, and alarm pitch.
Touch Touchpad / Audio in the menu to display the Touchpad / Audio setup screen.
2-10
2. System setup
Figure 2-7: Touchpad / Audio setup screen
Touchpad Configuration
Pointer Configuration
Select Right-Handed or Left-Handed pointer configuration.
Pointer Acceleration
Select the pointer acceleration, from 1x (slowest) to 5x (fastest). Increasing accel-
eration allows you to move the cursor from one side of the screen to the other with less
motion on the touchpad.
Workstation Audio Configuration
Volume Level
Select a volume level, from 1% to 100%, for system alerts, the shutdown sound, and
keyboard clicks. When the level is changed, a test tone sounds.
Note: This does not control the volume of the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside. See
Volume and brightness control on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside beginning
on page 3-111 for information on controlling the C-Arm control panel beep
volume.
Adjust C-Arm Alarm Pitch
Pitch Up
Touch to adjust the alarm pitch up. There are 18 distinct pitches.
Pitch Down
Touch to adjust the alarm pitch down.
Test
Touch to hear the alarm pitch.
2-11
2. System setup
Note: X-rays are disabled while this screen is active.

Touch Save to save the settings and return to the Setup screen or touch Exit to return to the
main Applications screen. If settings have been changed but not saved, a message displays.
Follow the message instructions.
2.1.8 Set up DICOM network configurations

See 10. DICOM setup and configuration beginning on page 10-1 for information on setting up
DICOM network configurations. DICOM setup is complicated and should be performed by
specialized IT personnel.
DICOM setup is limited to Administrative users only.
2.1.9 Set up network configuration

When the system is connected to a network, a network status icon displays in the status bar on
left side of the screen.
Figure 2-8: Network status icon
The network status icon varies to indicate the type of network and its connectivity or status.
l An Ethernet icon indicates that the system is connected to a wired network.
l A green wireless icon indicates a strong wireless connection.
l A yellow wireless icon indicates a weak wireless connection.
l A wireless icon with a yellow warning triangle indicates that all the configured settings to
connect to the network are correct, but the system is waiting for an assigned IP address
2-12
2. System setup
from the network before it can perform any network related actions. This may happen if
the network that the system is connecting to is slow or unresponsive.
l A red circle with a strike-though indicates that there is no network connection.
Figure 2-9: Network status icons
Wired Strong wireless Weak wireless No
network network network network
Connected Connected No IP Connected No IP Not

to network to network address to network address connected
Network Configuration
Touch Network in the menu to display the Applications > Setup > Network Configuration
screen. This screen displays the current network configuration details and provides a field to
enter or edit a Host Name.
If setting or editing the Host Name, touch Save, confirm the changes in the message, and then
touch Exit to return to the main Applications screen.
Figure 2-10: Network Configuration screen with a wired connection
The configuration details are defined in the following list:

Status
Displays whether the network connection status: Connected or Disconnected.
Connection Type
Displays the type of the current connection: Wired or Wireless.
2-13
2. System setup
Host Name
Displays the name of the host network, if applicable. Provide a name if this field is
blank.
Network Name SSID
Displays the wireless network name or Service Set Identifier (SSID) for hidden net-
works. This field is hidden when the system is connected to a wired network.
IP Address
Displays the host Internet Protocol (IP) address.
Subnet Mask
Displays the Subnet Mask address.
Gateway
Displays the Gateway address.
Primary DNS
Displays the primary Domain Name Server (DNS).
Secondary DNS
Displays the secondary Domain Name Server (DNS), if supplied.
Wired MAC Address
Displays the media access control (MAC) address of the wired network adapter.
Wireless MAC Address
Displays the media access control (MAC) address of the wireless network adapter.
Set up wireless networks

Note: On slow wireless networks, the system can sometimes experience a delay during the
login process. One or more of the following measures can improve connection times:
l Connect to a wired network.
l Connect to a faster wireless network.
l Disconnect from the network entirely.
Touch Wireless in the menu to display the Applications > Setup > Network Configuration >
Wireless Networks screen.
2-14
2. System setup
Figure 2-11: Wireless Networks screen
Wireless Networking
Enable Wireless Networking
Select this check box to detect and access existing wireless networks, or clear it to dis-
able the wireless radio.
Refresh
Touch this to scan for currently available wireless networks.
Delete All
Touch this to delete all saved wireless network information on the system, including
imported certificates for those networks.
Wireless networks list
This screen lists detected wireless networks. The name of the detected wireless net-
works are listed in the first column. The signal strength is listed in the second column
and the signal quality is listed in the third column.
Connection column
This column displays an icon next to the connected network, if applicable.
Signal Quality column
This column displays icons indicating the wireless network's signal strength.
Touch Exit to return to the Network Configuration screen.
Edit or Add Wireless Network
Use the Applications > Setup > Network Configuration > Wireless Network Defin-
ition screen to edit existing networks or add a new network. Touch the name of the
2-15
2. System setup
network to edit network details, or touch Other... to add a wireless network with a hid-
den SSID.
Figure 2-12: Wireless Network Definition screen
The Wireless Network Definition screen displays the following:

Network Name SSID
Displays the selected network's name or Service Set Identifier (SSID). If the selected
network is a hidden network, this field is editable.
Security
The detected authentication protocol of the selected network is automatically populated
in this field.
If the selected network is hidden, select the type of security used by the network.
Choose WEP, WPA/WPA2 PSK,or WPA/WPA2 EAP.
When FIPS 140-2 enforcing is enabled, networks with an unsupported security type will
not be selectable. If you attempt to connect to a network with a security type or encryp-
tion which is not supported by FIPS 140-2, a message displays and you are prompted
to select another network.
Networks supported under FIPS 140-2 are WPA2 PSK CCMP networks and WPA2
EAP TLS CCMP networks. Networks using WPA, WEP, or TKIP encryption are not sup-
ported by FIPS 140-2. Use WPA/WPA2 EAP or WPA/WPA2 PSK when FIPS 140-2
Enforcing is enabled.
EAP Type
If the selected network uses WPA/WPA2 EAP, select the type of Extensible Authentic-
ation Protocol (EAP) used. Choose Automatic, PEAP-MSCHAPV2, PEAP-MD5,
2-16
2. System setup
PEAP-GTC, TTLS-MSCHAPV2, TTLS-MD5, or TLS. By default, the system uses
Automatic and cycles through all options to find correct type.
If FIPS 140-2 Enforcing is enabled, this field is not configurable, and only TLS is sup-
ported.
Load Certificates
If the selected network uses WPA/WPA2 EAP, touch this to manage certificates for the
network.
Username
Enter the username for an account on the wireless network. This is only configurable if
Security type is WPA/WPA2 EAP.
Password
Enter the wireless network or client certificate private key password.
Use DHCP
Select to allow the system to use Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) to auto-
matically obtain an IP address and other necessary network information from a server
on the network.
If the network does not have a DHCP server, enter the information on this screen manu-
ally.
IP Address
Enter the host Internet Protocol (IP) address.
Subnet Mask
Enter the Subnet Mask address.
Gateway
Enter the Gateway address. This is optional.
Primary DNS
Enter the primary Domain Name Server (DNS). This is optional.
Secondary DNS
Enter the secondary Domain Name Server (DNS). This is optional.
Connect
Touch to connect to the wireless network.
Cancel
Touch to return to the Network Configuration screen without saving any changes.
Forget
This is displayed when the system has previously attempted to connect to a network.
Touch to delete the saved data associated with the network and return to the Wireless
Network Definition screen.
Touch Exit to return to the Network Configuration screen.
2-17
2. System setup
Manage certificates
Use the Applications > Setup > Network Configuration > Wireless Network Defin-
ition > Certificates screen to import and delete certificate files on systems using EAP
authentication.
Figure 2-13: Certificates screen
The Certificates screen displays the following:

Actively Configured Certificate Files
CA Certificate
Displays the actively configured certificate for the trusted certified authority.
Client Certificate
Displays the actively configured certificate the client system uses to make authen-
ticated requests to remote servers.
Private Key
Displays the actively configured private key code used for to encrypt and decrypt text
sent and received on the system.
Delete
Touch this to delete a specific certificate.
Delete All
Touch this to delete all existing certificates and the private key for this network on the
system.
2-18
2. System setup
Import Certificate from portable media device

Insert a portable media device containing valid certificate files into a system USB port
to import the certificates onto the system. The files must be stored on the root directory
of the portable media device, not in a subfolder. Once certificates are imported, they
will display in the Actively Configured Certificate Files section above.
If the certificate does not require a password, clear Enable FIPS140-2 Enforcing on
the Applications > Setup > Security to connect to the network.
CA Certificate
Select a Central Authority certificate file.
A CA certificate is not required in order to connect to a network but strongly recom-
mended for security purposes. When a CA Certificate is configured, the system per-
forms an extra validation step to ensure the Central Authority is genuine. If a CA
Certificate is not configured, the system skips this validation step.
Client Certificate
Select a certificate file.
The certificate is how the network validates the system. Each system that connects to
the network should have a unique client certificate. Certificates may be set to expire
and will need to be updated periodically.
Private Key
Select a private key file.
A private key may not be needed but some networks require them.
Import
Touch this to import the selected certificate.
Mount USBs
Touch this to mount any portable media devices plugged into the system. When a port-
able media device is mounted, the CA Certificate, Client Certificate, and Private Key
drop-down lists are populated with files found on the root directory of all connected port-
able media devices.
Unmount USBs
Touch this to safely remove any portable media devices plugged into the system.
Touch Save to save any imported certificates on the system. If one or more of the files fail to
import, the Actively Configured Certificate section displays the files that were successfully
saved, and remove any that failed to import. Once the certificates are imported, touch Exit to
return to the Wireless Network Definition screen.
Set up wired networks

Touch Wired in the menu to display the Applications > Setup > Network Configuration >
Wired Network screen.
2-19
2. System setup
Figure 2-14: Wired Network screen
The Wired Network screen displays the following:

Use DHCP
Select this check box to allow the system to use Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP) to automatically obtain an IP address and other necessary network information
from a server on the network.
If the network does not have a DHCP server, enter the information on this screen manu-
ally.
IP Address
Enter the host Internet Protocol (IP) address.
Subnet Mask
Enter the Subnet Mask address.
Gateway
Enter the Gateway address.
Primary DNS
Enter the primary Domain Name Server (DNS).
Secondary DNS
Enter the secondary Domain Name Server (DNS). This is optional.
Wired MAC Address
This displays the media access control (MAC) address of the wired network adapter.
Touch Save, confirm the changes in the message, and then touch Exit to return to the
main Applications screen.
2-20
2. System setup
Touch Save to save the settings and connect to the network. Touch Exit to return to the
Network Configurations screen.
Ping / Trace
Touch Ping / Trace... or touch Ping / Trace in the menu to display the Applications > Setup >
Network Configuration > Ping / Trace screen.
Figure 2-15: Ping/Trace screen
Destination
Enter a network destination, an IP address or server name.
Results
Results of the network ping or trace route display in this text box.
Ping
Touch this button to test the network connection. See Test the network connection
beginning on page 2-22 for how to use the ping function.
Trace Route
Touch this button to display the network route between the system and the destination
network. See Trace the network connection route beginning on page 2-22 for how to
use trace route function.
2-21
2. System setup
Test the network connection

1. Enter a network destination, an IP address or server name, in the Destination box.
2. Touch Ping. The system sends a command to the destination to test whether the server
is connected and available. The results of the ping display in the results window.
3. If the network test is successful, the network connection is working correctly.
4. If the network test is unsuccessful, check the destination and try again.
If the network test is still unsuccessful, consult with the local network administrator and
check the system's network configuration and the network cable to make sure that they
are set up correctly.
Finally, contact GE OEC Customer Service for help.

Once the network is working properly, touch Exit or Network in the menu to return to the
Network Configuration screen.
Trace the network connection route
1. Enter a network destination, an IP address or server name, in the Destination box.
2. Touch Trace Route. The system sends a command to the destination.
3. If the network test is successful, the route the command followed displays in the results
window.
4. If the network test is not successful, check the destination and try again.
If the network test is not successful, consult with the local network administrator and
check the system's network configuration and the network cable to make sure that they
are set up correctly.
Finally, contact GE OEC Customer Service for help.

Once the network is working properly, touch Exit or Network in the menu to return to the
Network Configuration screen.
2-22
2. System setup
2.1.10 Set up regional settings

Use the Applications > Setup > Regional Settings screen to set the hospital name, select
decimal, radiation, and SAP unit defaults, and set up the system time and date.
Touch Regional in the menu to display the Regional Settings setup screen.
Figure 2-16: Regional Settings setup screen
Hospital Name
The full or user-designated name of the hospital. This value displays on the image over-
lay.
Decimal Format
Select the preferred regional format, either 1,000.00 or 1.000,00.
Radiation Units
Select the preferred regional format, either gray (mGy, Gy) or roentgen (R).
DAP Units
Select the preferred format for Dose Area Product (DAP). If the selected radiation unit
is gray, choose from Gy cm2, cGy cm2, mGy m2, or mGy cm2. If the selected radiation
unit is roentgen, the default Rcm2 is selected.
Date/Time Settings
X-Ray Timer Units
Select the preferred regional format, either mm.d or mm:ss.d.
2-23
2. System setup
Set Automatically
Select to set the time and date automatically, using the local network. If this is selected,
choose one of the following:
l Use DHCP to request IP addresses and networking parameters automatically from
a DHCP server.
l Enter NTP Address and then enter a valid IP address to manually identify the
address that will synchronize all participating computers. If this setting is selected,
it must be verified using the Verify button to take effect.
Verify
Touch to check automatic time and date settings. The system will force a restart for
changes to take effect.
Depending on network conditions, verification may take longer than the expected 3-5
seconds or may fail, and startup time may be longer than expected. Contact the local
network administrator for assistance with NTP settings.
If the system is configured to set the date and time automatically, always touch Verify
after changing the UTC time zone offset prior to saving. The offset selection will not be
saved if it is not verified.
Set Manually
Select to enter a complete timer and date manually, if there is no local network.
Timezone Offset
Select the appropriate UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) time offset. Select the offsets
hour, half an hour, or fifteen minute increments. By default, the system uses -05:00,
which is Eastern Time.
Daylight Savings
Select if the local region uses Daylight Savings Time. This setting must be manually
cleared during Standard time.
Date Format
Select the preferred regional format, either MM/DD/YYYY, DD.MM.YYYY, or
YYYY/MM/DD.
instructions.
2-24
2. System setup
2.1.11 Set up security

Use the Applications > Setup > Security screen set up security features.
Touch Security in the menu to display the Security setup screen.
Figure 2-17: Security setup screen
Set Up Login
Require Users to Log In
Select this check box to require a password after the system has been started up or
locked, or clear the check box to allow system use without a password.
If users are required to log in, an Emergency User button displays on the Login screen.
Emergency users do not have to enter a password and only have access to basic
emergency functionality such as creating exams and taking images.
If users are not required to log in to use the system, all users have Clinical user access
to the system. Any access to Administrative user functionality is restricted on systems
in this case. The exception is that the Require Users to Log In check box remains
available.
If Administrative user level changes need to be made on a system that does not require
users to log in, select the Require Users to Log In check box and then restart the
system. An Administrative user can then log in and make security changes to the
system.
2-25
2. System setup
If desired, clear then Require Users to Log In check box once changes are complete.
When the system is restarted, it will not require a password and all users will once
again have Clinical user access.
Screen Saver
Screen Saver Delay Time (1 - 45 mins)
The screen saver dims the screen when the system is not in use, and is designed to
reduce wear and monitor burn-in on the system to increase the life of the monitor. It
does not log out or lock the system, and a password is not required to return the screen
to full brightness.
Enter the number of minutes until the system dims the screen. Select 0 to disable the
feature or select from 1 to 45 minutes. By default, the system waits 10 minutes.
Touch the screen or press any key on the keyboard, any control panel key, any Work-
station keypad key, RUI key, or any X-ray switch to return the screen to full brightness.
Note that pressing an X-ray switch also initiates an X-ray shot.
Notification
Notification Email Addresses
Enter email addresses to receive OS level audit log failures.
SMTP Server Address
Enter the mail server address for the email address entered above.
Banner Upload
Banner File
Select a banner to display.
To set up a banner:
1. Create a plain text (.txt) file containing the desired banner text on a
computer or laptop.
2. Save the text file to the root directory to a non-powered USB drive.
3. Insert the USB drive into a USB port on the system.
4. On the Security screen, touch the Banner File menu and select the text file
from the list
5. Touch Save and then touch Exit.
FIPS
Enable FIPS140-2 Enforcing
Select to enforce Federal Information Processing Standard Publication 140-2, a U.S.
government encryption security standard.
Networks supported under FIPS 140-2 are WPA2 PSK CCMP networks and WPA2
EAP TLS CCMP networks. Networks using WPA, WEP, or TKIP encryption are not sup-
ported by FIPS 140-2.
When FIPS 140-2 enforcing is enabled, networks with an unsupported security type will
not be selectable. If you attempt to connect to a network with a security type or
2-26
2. System setup
encryption which is not supported by FIPS 140-2, a message displays and you are
prompted to select another network.
If a certificate imported on the Applications > Setup > Network Configuration > Wire-
less Network Definition > Certificates screen does not require a password, clear
Enable FIPS140-2 Enforcing to connect to the network.
Portable Media
Copy from/to Portable Media Enabled
Select to allow images and data to be copied from the system to portable media
devices such as USB devices or burned to DVDs. Select to allow images and data to be
copied from the system to portable media devices such as USB devices. Clear to pre-
vent images and data from being copied.
Patient Health Information
Delete All
Touch to delete all patient information and data, including exams and contents of the
Patient screen, before shipping a system or having it serviced. A confirmation message
displays. Follow the message instructions.
instructions.
Antivirus
Touch Antivirus in the menu to display the McAfee Endpoint Security for Linux Threat
Prevention screen.
The screen displays an Entering Antivirus Mode message. Note that the system must be
restarted after exiting the antivirus software and resuming imaging.
Note: Do not perform McAfee agent updates from the ePO server.
Touch the Antivirus Scan tab to display the McAfee Endpoint Security for Linux Threat
Prevention > Antivirus Scan screen.
2-27
2. System setup
Figure 2-18: Antivirus Scan screen
Antivirus Details
Shows the latest versions of the antivirus software, antivirus engine, and DAT file.
Antivirus Scan
Start Scan
Touch to begin an OnDemand (manual) scan.
Status Information
Shows status of the antivirus software. Options include Not Started, Starting, Running,
Stopping, and Stopped.
Occasionally, the status display may not indicate that the scan has finished. If more
than 30 minutes have elapsed since starting the antivirus scan and the status indicates
that the scan is still running, restart the system to exit the antivirus scan.
Antivirus Scan Results Details
Last On-Demand Scan Result
Shows relevant details for the most recent OnDemand scan including the completed
time, number of scanned files, number of excluded files, any timeouts that occurred, the
number of infected files, and a link to the most recent OnDemand scan log.
Recent On-Access Scan Result
Not currently used.
2-28
2. System setup
List of Files Being Scanned

These files are included in the scan: OS libraries, application software, servers, and
configuration files.
List of Files Excluded from Scan
Some files are inaccessible to outside users and do not need to be scanned. These
include system log files, application log files, and image data.
Touch the Antivirus EPO Setup tab to display the McAfee Endpoint Security for Linux Threat
Prevention > Antivirus EPO Setup screen.
Figure 2-19: Antivirus EPO Setup screen
Antivirus Details
Antivirus EPO Setup

EPO Server IP Address
The IP address for the McAfee ePO server.
EPO Port No
Enter 8443, the port number for the McAfee ePO server.
EPO User Name
The username for the McAfee ePO server.
EPO Password
The password f for the McAfee ePO server.
2-29
2. System setup
Save Password
Select to save the password.
Apply EPO Settings
Touch to save these settings.
Status Information
Shows status of the current update, when an update is in process.
Touch the Antivirus Non-EPO Setup tab to display the McAfee Endpoint Security for Linux
Threat Prevention > Antivirus Non-EPO Setup screen.
Figure 2-20: Antivirus Non-EPO Setup screen
Antivirus Details
Instructions
Gives detailed instructions on updating the antivirus DAT and engine files.
Please Enter Engine DAT File Location

Enter the location for updates to the DAT and Engine files.
Update DAT
Touch to update the DAT file.
Update Engine
Touch to update the Engine file.
2-30
2. System setup
Status Information
Shows status of the current update, when an update is in process.
Authentication management
Touch Authentication Management in the menu to display the Applications > Setup >
Security > Authentication Management screen.
Figure 2-21: Authentication Management setup screen
Application Authentication
Application Authentication...
Touch to open the Application Authentication screen.
Audit Logging
Audit Logging...
Touch to open the Audit Logging screen.
Certificate Management
Certificate Management...
Touch to open the Certificate Management screen.
Application authentication
Touch Application Authentication ... from the Application Management screen to display the
Authentication Management > Application Management screen.
Application
Touch Application in the tab bar to display the Authentication Management > Application
Management > Application screen.
2-31
2. System setup
Figure 2-22: Application tab and screen
Note: Most of this screen is not used for authentication implementation. Making changes to
the items listed in gray below will not change the system's functions.
Application
Enable Authorization
Select to enable authorization or clear to disable it.
When authorization is enabled, any local or enterprise user must have a role, and users
without an assigned role will be denied access if authorization is turned on.
Configurable delay after authentication failure (seconds)
Not currently used.
Inactivity Timeout (Minutes)
Not currently used.
Display Last Login Name
Not currently used.
Administrator Message
Not currently used.
Custom message to display on login page
Not currently used.
Apply Configuration
Touch to save authorization changes.
2-32
2. System setup
Restore Configuration
Touch to discard changes and restore the previous authorization settings.
Local Users
Touch Local Users in the tab bar to display the Authentication Management > Application
Management > Local Users screen. Use this tab to administer users and user groups.
Figure 2-23: Authentication Management > Application Management > Local Users screen
Add Local User

Touch to add a local user to the system. A dialogue box displays. See Add local user
on page 2-35 more information.
Max Logon Attempts Before Lock
Enter the number of failed attempts to log in that a local user can make before the sys-
tem locks out further attempts. An Administrative user or Service user can unlock a
user if they are locked out incorrectly.
An Administrative user or Service user can unlock a user if they are locked out incor-
rectly.
Lock Duration
Enter the number of minutes a user stays locked for if they become locked because of
failed attempts to log in.
Password Rules
Minimum Password Length
Enter a minimum length of characters for passwords. The default is 8 characters.
Maximum Password Length
Enter a maximum length of characters for passwords.
2-33
2. System setup
Minimum Password Retention Period

Enter the minimum number of days a password must be retained before it can be
changed. The default is 1 day. To disable the minimum retention period and allow new
passwords to be changed immediately, set this to 0.
Password Expiry Period
Enter the number of days a password can be used before it expires and must be reset.
The default is 0, meaning the password will never expire.
Advanced Password Rules
Select to enable advanced password rules. Administrative users may implement the fol-
lowing additional rules for password complexity:
l Passwords must contain 8 new characters (not applicable to passwords for
new users).
l Passwords must contain at least 1 number.
l Passwords must contain at least 1 uppercase letter.
l Passwords must contain at least 1 lowercase letter.
l Passwords must contain at least 1 special non-alphanumeric character or
symbol.
l Passwords cannot contain your username.
l Passwords cannot contain be a palindrome (the same backwards and
forwards such as 123aBA321).
l Passwords cannot contain 3 identical consecutive characters such as ###
or 555.
l Passwords cannot contain whitespace character.
Apply Configuration
Touch to save local user changes.
Touch to discard changes and restore the previous local user settings.
Local Users
Displays the current list of local users. Select a user from this list to make changes to
the user's account. When a user is selected, the name is highlighted in the list and the
area to the right is populated with that user's details.
User display pane (untitled)
Displays information about the selected user.
Username
Displays the selected user's account name.
Full Name
Displays the selected user's full name.
Roles
Displays the selected user's assigned roles.
Change Password
Touch to change the selected user's password.
2-34
2. System setup
Change Name
Touch to change the selected user's full name.
Remove User
Touch to delete the selected user from the system.
Groups
Displays the current list of groups.
Add To Groups
Touch to add the selected user to a group. A dialogue box displays. See Add user to
group(s) on page 2-36 for more information.
Remove From Groups
Touch to remove the selected user from a group. A dialogue box displays. See
Remove user from group(s) on page 2-36 for more information.
Locked
Select to prevent a user from logging in or clear to unlock a previously locked user to
allow them to log in.
Change Password on Next Login
Select to require the selected user to change their password the next time they use the
system.
Apply Configuration
Touch to save local user changes.
Touch to discard changes and restore the previous local user settings.
Add local user
Figure 2-24: Add Local User dialogue box on the Local Users screen
User ID
Enter a unique ID for the new user. User IDs are optional but strongly recommended,
and display on the lock screen when user is logged in. If no user ID is set for a user, the
lock screen will display without a user ID.
Fullname
Enter the new user's full name (given name and surname).
Password
Enter a password for the new user.
2-35
2. System setup
Confirm Password
Re-enter the password.
Add User
Touch to add the user and close the dialogue box.
Cancel
Touch to cancel and close the dialogue box.
Add user to group(s)
Figure 2-25: Add Membership dialogue box on the Local Users screen
Add Membership For User (admin)

Choose groups to add user as a member
Lists the current groups on the system. Select one or more to add the user to the
groups.
Add Membership
Touch to add the user to the group and close the dialogue box.
Cancel
Remove user from group(s)
Figure 2-26: Remove Membership dialogue box on the Local Users screen
2-36
2. System setup
Remove Membership (admin)

Choose groups to remove user as a member
Lists the current groups on the system. Select one or more to remove the user from the
groups.
Add Membership
Touch to remove the user to from group and close the dialogue box.
Cancel
Groups
Touch Groups in the tab bar to display the Authentication Management > Application
Management > Groups screen. Use this tab to administer local and enterprise groups.
Figure 2-27: Authentication Management > Application Management > Groups screen
Add Local Group

Touch to add a local group to the system. A dialogue box displays. See Add Local
Group on page 2-38 more information.
Add Enterprise Group
Touch to add an enterprise group to the system. A dialogue box displays. See Add
Enterprise Group on page 2-39 more information.
Local Groups
Displays the current list of local groups. Select a group from this list to make changes.
When a group is selected, the name is highlighted in the list and the group display pane
to the right is populated with that group's details.
2-37
2. System setup
Enterprise Groups
Displays the current list of enterprise groups. Select a group from this list to make
changes. When a group is selected, the name is highlighted in the list and the group dis-
play pane to the right is populated with that group's details.
Group display pane (untitled)
Displays information about the selected group.
Group Name
Displays the selected group.
Remove Group
Touch to delete the selected group from the system.
Roles
Select roles to apply them to the group, or clear them to remove them from the group.
Choose from Administrator and Standard User.
Apply Roles
Touch to apply group role changes.
Group Members
Displays the user members of the selected group.
Add Membership
Touch to add users to a group. See Add Membership / Add Users to the Group on page
2-39 more information.
Remove Membership
Touch to remove users from a group. See Remove Membership on page 2-40 more
information.
Add Local Group
Figure 2-28: Add Local Group dialogue box
Add Local Group

Group Name
Enter the name of the group to be added. Group names must be unique.
Add Group
Touch to add the group and close the dialogue box.
Cancel
2-38
2. System setup

Figure 2-29: Add Enterprise Group dialogue box

Adding an Enterprise group to a local system does not create a new group on the Enterprise
directory server. Instead, it provides the ability to manage roles for a group that already exists
on the Enterprise directory server.
Group Name
Enter the name of the group to be added. Group names must be unique and should
match a group that exists on the Enterprise server.
Add Group
Touch to add the group and close the dialogue box.
Cancel
Add Membership / Add Users to the Group
Figure 2-30: Add Users To Group dialogue box
Add Users To Group

Choose users to add to the group
Displays the name of the user(s) selected.
Add To Group
Touch to add the user to the selected group and close the dialogue box.
Cancel
2-39
2. System setup
Remove Membership
Figure 2-31: Remove Users From Group dialogue box
Remove Users From Group

Choose users to remove from group
Select user(s) to be removed from the selected group.
Remove From Group
Touch to remove the selected users from the group and close the dialogue box.
Cancel
Enterprise
Touch Enterprise in the tab bar to display the Authentication Management > Application
Management > Enterprise screen. Use this tab to configure a connection to an enterprise
directory server.
2-40
2. System setup
Figure 2-32: Authentication Management > Application Management > Enterprise setup
screen
Enable Enterprise Authentication

Select to allow local and enterprise users to log in to the system. Clear to allow only
local users to log in.
Cache Enterprise Users
Select to save enterprise user information once they successfully log in, allowing them
access if they log in with the correct password when the enterprise server is
unavailable. Clear to deny access if the server is unavailable.
Enterprise Authentication Latency (Seconds)
Enter the number of seconds for the system to wait for a response from the enterprise
server before returning a failed login attempt. 5 seconds is typically long enough.
Apply Configuration
Touch to apply configuration changes.
Touch to discard configuration changes.
Enterprise Server List
Enter the number of seconds for the system to wait for a response from the enterprise
server before returning a failed login attempt. 5 seconds is typically long enough.
Add
Touch to add a new server.
2-41
2. System setup
Configuration Instructions
Displays step-by-step instructions for configuring an enterprise server,.
Auto-detect Server Name
Touch to look up the name of an enterprise server in the directory, if allowed by the
server. Note that not all servers are detectable. If a failure message displays, continue
to add the server manually.
Test Connection
Touch to test the connection to a new server.
A CONNECTION OK message displays next to the button if the test succeeded or a
CONNECTION BAD message displays if the test failed. If the connection fails, check
the server's IP address and verify that the system's DNS is running.
Generate Defaults
Touch to populate the server fields in the area to the right.
This should populate the Realm Name, Format, DN, Login Attribute, First Name
Attribute, Last Name Attribute, and Group Attribute fields with default values for the
selected directory server type. These fields can be configured manually and changed
after they are populated using Generate Defaults.
Username
Enter a username to test the server login functionality. The user must exist on the
server.
Password
Enter the user's password.
Login
Touch to log in to the server. This is a test login to determine that the connection works.
An alert message may display if any of the fields failed to populate or were incorrect.
This may mean that the enterprise server properties may not have been configured
correctly or a user's information is incomplete. Contact the server's owner if this
continues.
Login Results
Displays the login test results.
Server Configuration: 1
Server Name / IP
Enter the enterprise server's name or IP address.
Authentication Type
Select a server authentication type. Choose LDAP (for most Novell eDirectory Servers)
or Kerberos (for most Microsoft Active Directory Servers). LDAP is more commonly
used.
2-42
2. System setup
Use SSL
Select to use SSL connections, if allowed by the enterprise server. Clear if the server
does not support SSL connections.
Note that using LDAP without enabling SSL is not recommended, as this setting allows
passwords to be sent unencrypted.
Verify Certificate
Select to use SSL connections, if allowed by the enterprise server. Clear if the server
does not support SSL connections.
Server Type
Select a server type. Choose Microsoft Active Directory, Novell eDirectory, or Other.
Realm Name
Enter the server's realm, usually its DNS domain name. This is the location where the
enterprise accounts are stored.
LDAP Configuration
These fields are typically pre-populated when Generate Defaults is used. However,
they can be configured manually and changed after they are populated using Generate
Defaults.
Format
Select a format from Domain (for most Microsoft Active Directory Servers) or dn(for
most Novell eDirectory and other servers).
DN
Enter a distinguished name location.
Login Attribute
Enter the attribute to help find a user's unique ID. On Microsoft Active Directory
Servers, use sAMAccountName. On Novell eDirectory servers, use cn.
First Name Attribute
Enter the attribute to help find a user's given name.
Last Name Attribute
Enter the attribute to help find a user's surname.
Group Attribute
Enter the attribute to help find a user's group(s). On Microsoft Active Directory Servers,
use memberOf.
Apply Configuration
Touch to apply configuration changes.
Touch to discard configuration changes.
2-43
2. System setup
Audit logging
Touch Audit Logging... from the Application Management screen to display the
Authentication Management > Application Management > Application screen. Use this
screen to configure audit logging which is used for logging user account activity.
Audit Message Settings
Touch Audit Message Settings in the tab bar to display the Authentication Management >
Application Management > Audit Message Settings screen. Use this tab to configure
additional fields to be logged.
Figure 2-33: Authentication Management > Audit Logging > Audit Message Settings setup
screen
Audit Source ID
Enter a number or phrase will make audit logs also log that ID for identification
purposes
Patient Name Anonymized
Not currently used.
Save
Touch to save the audit ID.
Cancel
Touch to cancel changes.
Enterprise Repository
Touch Enterprise Repository in the tab bar to display the Authentication Management >
2-44
2. System setup
Application Management > Enterprise Repository screen. Use this tab to configure a remote
server to accept system audit logs.
Figure 2-34: Authentication Management > Audit Logging > Enterprise Repository setup
screen
Enterprise Repository 1
Select On to enable a remote server or Off to disable it.
Host Name / IP
Enter the remote server's name or IP address.
Port Number
Enter the remote server's port number.
Protocol
Select a protocol. Choose from UDP or TCP. Note that UDP does not send an
acknowledgment that a log was received and TCP sends an acknowledgment. Choose
from UDP, TCP, or TLS. Note that UDP does not send an acknowledgment that a log
was received, TCP sends an acknownledgement, and TLS requires an certificate on
the system to encrypt the message.
Send Test Message
Touch to send a test message to the server. A message displays whether the test
message succeeded or failed.
Enterprise Repository 2
Select On to enable a second remote server or Off to disable it.
2-45
2. System setup
Host Name / IP
Enter the second remote server's name or IP address.
Port Number
Enter the second remote server's port number.
Protocol
Select a protocol. Choose from UDP, TCP, or TLS. Note that UDP does not send an
acknowledgment that a log was received, TCP sends an acknownledgement, and TLS
requires an certificate on the system to encrypt the message.
Send Test Message
Touch to send a test message to the second server. A message displays whether the
test message succeeded or failed.
Save
Touch to save the remote server information.
Cancel
Local Repository
Touch Local Repository in the tab bar to display the Authentication Management >
Application Management > Local Repository screen. Use this tab to configure and view audit
logs locally.
Figure 2-35: Authentication Management > Audit Logging > Local Repository setup screen
2-46
2. System setup
On / Off
Select On to save local audit logs or Off to disable it.
Refresh
Touch to refresh the logs displayed.
|<
Touch to go to the earliest page of logs.
<
Touch to go to the previous page of logs.
Page X / Y
Displays the current and total pages of logs..
>
Touch to go to the next page of logs.
>|
Touch to go to the latest page of logs.
Display Raw XML
Displays the raw XML of the log files, without any formatting.
Event ID / Time / Event Outcomes
Displays a list of logged events, the time they were logged, and any outcome of the
event.
Local Repository: XX Messages
Displays the total number of log messages in the local repository. Note that the local
repository contains logs for logins, logouts, password changes, and user creation.
Certificate management
Touch Certificate Management... from the Application Management screen to display the
Certificate Management screen. Use this screen to configure a certificate to encrypt
communications with remote servers.
2-47
2. System setup
Figure 2-36: Authentication Management > Certificate Management screen
Certificate list (untitled)

#
Displays the certificate number.
Certificate
Displays the certificate name.
Expiry Date
Displays the certificate expiration date.
Applications
Displays OEC Secure application the certificate applies to.
Actions
Touch the icon to delete the certificate.
Refresh (symbol)
Touch to refresh the certificate list.
Instructions (untitled)
Import Host Certificate
Touch to import an host certificate. The Host Certificate pane displays on the right side
of the screen.
2-48
2. System setup
Import Third Party Certificate

Touch to import an host certificate. The Third Party Certificate pane displays on the
right side of the screen.
Configure Certificate
Touch to map the certificate to desired applications that have the ability to use
certificates.
Host Certificate pane
Figure 2-37: Authentication Management > Certificate Management screen with Host
Certificate pane
Certificate Name
Enter the certificate name to import.
Select USB
Select the USB where the certificate is located. USB Connected! displays under the
field when a portable media device is detected.
Private Key
Select a private encryption key.
Certificate Content
Select a certificate from the certificate authority that contains the public encryption key.
Submit
Touch to submit changes.
2-49
2. System setup
Reset
Third Party Certificate pane
Figure 2-38: Authentication Management > Certificate Management screen with Third
Party Certificate pane
Certificate Name
Enter the certificate name to import.
Select USB
Select the USB where the certificate is located, if applicable.USB Connected! displays
under the field when a portable media device is detected.
Certificate Content
Select a certificate from the certificate authority that contains the public encryption key.
Certificate URL
Enter the URL where the certificate is located, if applicable.
Submit
Reset
2-50
2. System setup
Figure 2-39: Authentication Management > Certificate Management screen with the
Configure Certificate pane
Certificates
Select an uploaded certificate for configuration.
Submit
Reset
instructions.
Certificate management
Touch Certificate Management in the menu to display the Applications > Setup > Security >
Certificate Management screen. Use this screen manage security certificates and to enable
and configure transport layer security for DICOM transactions.
2-51
2. System setup
Figure 2-40: Certificate Management setup screen with Host Certificate as the selected
certificate type
Figure 2-41: Certificate Management setup screen with Trusted Certificate as the selected
certificate type
2-52
2. System setup
Certificate Management
Import / Export
Touch to select a location to import or export a certificate.
Certificate Type
Touch to select a certificate type. Choose from Host Certificate or Trusted Certificate.
The section below displays different depending on which is selected.
If Host Certificate is the elected type, the section below displays the following:
Using
Touch to select a certificate type. Choose from Certificate Authority or Self-Signed.
Certificate
Displays the current host certificate file or No Certificate if one has not been imported
or created.
Expires
Displays the host certificate expiration information.
Key
Displays Set if a private key has been created or imported or Not Set if there is no cer-
tificate.
Create Signing Request / Create Self-Signed Certificate
This button text depends on the Using field selection above.
If Certificate Authority is selected, touch to create a certificate signing request on the
Import/Export location. If Self-Signed is selected, touch to create a self-signed host cer-
tificate and private key.
Import... / Export
This button text depends on the Using field selection. Touch to import or export a cer-
tificate.
If Trusted Certificate is the selected certificate type, the section below displays the following:
Trusted Certificates list
This section lists trusted certificates on the system.
Subject column
This column displays the trusted certificate's applicability.
Expires column
This column displays the trusterd certificate's expiration date.
Import...
Touch to import a new certificate.
Delete
Touch to delete a selected certificate.
DICOM Over TLS Configuration
Enable DICOM Over TLS
Select to enable DICOM over TLS functionality on the system.
2-53
2. System setup
Remote Logging Over TLS Configuration

Enable with Certificate
Select to enable Remote Logging over TLS functionality on the system. This option is
only functional if the Protocol Type on the Applications > Setup > Security > Remote
Logging screen is set to TCP.
Certificate (untitled)
Select a certificate to use for remote logging on TLS.
Import Certificate
Use the Application > Setup > Security > Certificate Management > Import Certificate
screen to import trusted certificates, a host certificate, or a host certificate and private key.
This screen varies slightly, depending on the type of certificate being imported.
If the certificate is a host certificate, a screen similar to the following displays.
Figure 2-42: Import Certificate screen for importing a host certificate
Import Host Certificate

Certificate
Select a certificate. Note that importing a new certificate will overwrite the previous cer-
tificate.
Key
Optionally, select a key. The key must be the private key for the selected certificate.
Key Pass Phrase
If the selected key is pass phrase protected, enter the pass phrase. The pass phrase is
not stored on the system.
2-54
2. System setup
Import
Touch to import the certificate.
If the certificate is a trusted certificate, a screen similar to the following displays.
Figure 2-43: Import Certificate screen for importing a trusted certificate
Import Trusted Certificate

Certificate
Select a certificate.
Import
Touch to import the certificate.
Touch Exit to return to the main Applications screen.
Disk encryption
Touch Disk Encryption in the menu to display the Applications > Setup > Security > Disk
Encryption screen.
The system must have at least one password set, either a user password or an auto boot
password, and can have up to two encryption passwords and one auto boot password. If a user
attempts to delete the last password, a message displays that it is the last password and
cannot be deleted.
Encryption passwords are created by an Administrative user. The auto boot password is
generated by the system software and is embedded internally.
2-55
2. System setup
Figure 2-44: Disk Encryption screen
Encryption Password Configuration

Note that these passwords can be set independently, and do not take precedence over the
others.
Password1
Displays the current status of the encryption password. If no password is set, Not
Enabled displays. Otherwise, Enabled displays.
Password2
Displays the current status of the encryption password. If no password is set, Not
Auto Boot
Displays the current status of the auto boot password. If no password is set, Not
Update
Touch to create or change a password.
Delete
Touch to delete a password.
Create or change a password
Touch Update to create or change a specific password. A new section displays on the screen.
2-56
2. System setup
Figure 2-45: Updating a password on the Disk Encryption screen
Update Password
Existing Password
Enter the current password.
If no encryption passwords are set, this field is unavailable.
Show Password (eye icon)
Touch and hold to show the password. When the button is released, the password is
obscured with symbols.
New Password
Enter the new password. Passwords must meet the following complexity requirements:
l Passwords must contain at least 15 characters.
l Passwords must contain at least 1 of each character class: upper case
letter, lower case letter, number, and symbol.
l Passwords are case-sensitive.
l No character may repeat more than 3 times.
l No character class (upper case letter, lower case letter, number, or symbol)
may repeat in a sequence more than 4 times.
l Passwords cannot be palindromes (the same forward and backward,
regardless of case).
l Previously used passwords cannot be reused.
l Certain easily-guessed words are not allowed, including password.
If a new password does not meet the complexity requirements, a DECRYPTION
PASSWORD CREATION FAILURE message displays.
2-57
2. System setup
Retype Password
Enter the new password again.
Update Password
Touch to change the selected password.
Delete a password
Touch Delete to delete a specific password. A new section displays on the screen.
The system must have at least one password set, and the last password cannot be deleted.
If the auto boot password is deleted, an encryption password must be entered every time the
system starts.
Figure 2-46: Deleting a password on the Disk Encryption screen
Delete Password
Existing Password
Enter a current password. Use either encryption passwords.
Delete
Touch to delete the selected password.
instructions.
Remote Logging
Touch Remote Logging in the menu to display the Applications > Setup > Security > Remote
Logging screen.
2-58
2. System setup
Figure 2-47: Remote Logging screen
Set Up Logging to Remote Server

Enable Remote Logging
Select to enable remote logging or clear to disable it.
Local Hostname
Displays the local system's hostname.
Remote Server Address
Enter the IP address for the remote server. Invalid IP addresses display in orange with
an orange outline.
Port
Enter the port number for the remote server.
Protocol Type
Select a protocol type. Choose from UDP or TCP.
Send Test Message
Touch to send a test message to verify the settings.
instructions.
2.1.12 Set up Utilities

Use the Applications > Setup > Utilities screen to display the line power information and
voltage display, set up a display test pattern, and set up external video display.
2-59
2. System setup
Use the Applications > Setup > Utilities screen to display the line power information and
voltage display, set up a display test pattern, set up lift column functionality, and set up external
video display.
Touch Utilities in the menu to display the Utilities screen.
Figure 2-48: Utilities screen
System Voltage Display
Show / hide system voltage display is available only for Administrative users.
Show
Touch to display the system AC voltage and current on the bottom right of the screen.
Service personnel may instruct users to display this information for troubleshooting pur-
poses.
Figure 2-49: Voltage display in the left status bar
Hide
Touch to hide the AC voltage and current information.
Surgery Analytics
Status
Displays the status of the Surgery Analytics tool.
Information
Displays additional Surgery Analytics information.
2-60
2. System setup
Remote Service
Connection Status
Displays the connection status. Options include:
l Not enabled – Connections are disabled.
l Not configured – Remote connections are not available until the service engineer
correctly configures the RSvP agent.
l Local network unavailable – The network is not connected.
l Local proxy connection refused – The system cannot access the proxy server
on a local network.
l Can’t reach Internet server – The system cannot connect to a GE back office
server.
l System is not recognized by Remote Service – The system ID (configured by
the service engineer) is not verified by the GE back office.
l Connecting – The RSvP agent running and trying to connect.
l Connected – The RSvP agent successfully connected and verified.
Display
Display Test Patterns...
Touch to open the Applications > Setup > Utilities > Display Test Patterns screen.
See Display Test Patterns beginning on page 2-65 for more information.
Display Video Output...
Touch to open the Applications > Setup > Utilities > Video Output screen. See Video
output beginning on page 2-66 for more information.
Touch Exit to return to the main Applications screen or touch the submenu item or the
corresponding button to access the Display Test Patterns screen.
Remote Service Platform (RSvP)
The InSite Remote Service Platform (RSvP) provides a secure remote connection to the GE
back office through the hospital network and allows users to automatically or manually upload
log packages for service activities. RSvP does not open listening network ports. All connections
are initiated from the agent on the system and connect only to validated GE servers using
unique identifiers and tokens for each request.
The RSvP agent provides connectivity for the following remote service features:
l Daily and manual log file uploads
l Screen Sharing
Remote service is disabled by default on the system. Contact Service to enable remote service
connections.
Once remote service is enabled, the Applications > Setup > Utilities screen includes a
Remote Service section, similar to the following:
2-61
2. System setup
Figure 2-50: Utilities screen
Touch Remote Service on the Utilities screen to control remote service connections. A screen
similar to the following displays:
2-62
2. System setup
Figure 2-51: Applications > Setup > Utilities > Remote Service screen
When RSVP screen sharing is enabled, the Patient, Reference, and Annotation tabs and
some functions on the Images tab are unavailable.
Connection
Local Network
Displays the network connection status. Options are Connected or Disconnected.
Local IP Address
Displays the system's IP address.
Remote Service
Displays the connection status. Options include:
on a local network.
l Can’t reach Internet server – The system cannot connect to a GE back office
server.
2-63
2. System setup
Log Upload
System log files that previously could be exported to a USB device can now be uploaded
directly to the GE back office servers for analysis without a site visit. The system will not upload
logs during imaging activities. If a log is uploading when an X-ray switch is turned on, the
upload stops until the switch is released and imaging is complete.
To schedule log file uploads, contact Service.
Note: Log files do not contain PHI.
Daily Log Upload
Displays the selected option for log uploads. Options are Enabled and Disabled.
Last Log Upload
Displays the last successful upload date.
File Transfer Status
Displays the file transfer status. Options include Not Started, Transmitting, Stopped,
Failed, and Successful.
Start
Touch to begin a manual file transfer. A progress bar displays the status of the upload.
Stop
Touch to end a file transfer.
Screen Sharing
During a technical support call, customers can now initiate a screen sharing session.
Screen sharing uses a GE proprietary service connection and is not accessible by other
computers on the network. A GE remote service engineer will be able to see and con-
trol the main system monitor, but not the C-Arm touchscreen.
Note: PHI may be visible to the GE employee during screen sharing sessions.
Note: X-Rays are disabled during a screen sharing session.

Touch Share to begin a screen sharing session.
The system displays the current screen sharing status. Options include:
l Disconnected – The network is not connected.
l Starting – The screen sharing session is starting.
l Ready – The screen sharing has started and the system is waiting for the remote
service engineer to log in.
l Active – The remote service engineer is able to view and control the main system
monitor.
Touch Cancel to end a screen sharing session.
Secure File Transfer
If the system is configured for encrypted secure file transfers, this section displays.
During a secure transfer session, any other transfers, including scheduled or manual
transfers, are disabled. The session closes after 10 minutes of inactivity or if the system
2-64
2. System setup
shuts down. Call for Service to enable or disable secure file transfer functionality.
A remote transfer status displays. Options include:
on a local network.
l Can’t connect to Remote Service – The system cannot connect to a GE back
office server.
Accept
Touch to start a secure file transfer session.
Reject (or Close)
Touch to reject a secure file transfer session request or to close an open session.
Touch Exit to return to the main Applications screen.
Display Test Patterns
Touch Display Test Patterns... or touch Test Patterns in the menu to display the Display Test
Patterns screen.
Figure 2-52: Display Test Patterns screen
2-65
2. System setup
Touch a test pattern button to display the test pattern or touch Exit to return to the Utilities
screen.
Available Test Patterns
Touch a test pattern button to display the test pattern. Options include:
l SMPTE l TG18-LN8-06 l TG18-LN8-15
l TG18-OIQ l TG18-LN8-07 l TG18-LN8-16
l TG18-UN80 l TG18-LN8-08 l TG18-LN8-17
l TG18-UN10 l TG18-LN8-09 l TG18-LN8-18
l TG18-LN8-01 l TG18-LN8-10 l TG18-MP
l TG18-LN8-02 l TG18-LN8-11 l TG18-UN80/UN10
l TG18-LN8-03 l TG18-LN8-12 AAPM:TG18/DIN6868-
157
l TG18-LN8-04 l TG18-LN8-13
l TG18-LN8-05 l TG18-LN8-14
Figure 2-53: Example Test Patterns screen
Press any key or touch anywhere on the main system monitor to close this screen and return to
the Test Patterns screen.
Video output
Touch Video Output in the menu to display Applications > Setup > Utilities > Video Output
screen. An external monitor must be plugged in to the Video-out connector to display the
system image on an external screen.
2-66
2. System setup
Figure 2-54: Video Output screen
Workstation Connectors
Displays the available Workstation connectors.
Video Output 1 and 2
Displays the current output configuration for the screen setup displayed on devices
plugged into the external video connectors. Touch anywhere in the video output area to
configure the display options.
Touch an area of the screen to select or clear it from the display configuration. Blue dot-
ted borders indicate that an area can be selected or cleared. Yellow dotted borders
indicate that, in that configuration, the area cannot be cleared.
Video output can be configured in several ways:
Entire screen. All areas have yellow dotted borders. This is the default set-
ting.
Left side of the screen with header and footer. The image area has a yellow
dotted border and the header and footer has blue dotted borders.
Left side of the screen only, without header or footer. The image area has a
yellow dotted border.
Right side of the screen with header and footer. The screen area has a yel-
low dotted border and the header and footer has blue dotted borders.
2-67
2. System setup
Right side of the screen only without header and footer. The screen area has
a yellow dotted border.
Apply
Touch Apply to save the display configuration and activate the external display.
2.1.13 Service screen

The Applications > Setup > Service screen is used by trained GE OEC technicians only. Do
not touch Service on the menu.
2.2 System startup, shutdown, and restart

For best system performance, restart your system daily.
If you are starting the system after a period of long-term storage it may be necessary to allow
the system to warm up or recharge the batteries before it can be used. The system clock will
sense how long the system has been in storage and display a message that describes the
action required. See X-RAYS DISABLED, RECHARGE FOR 24 HOURS Shut down the
system and leave plugged in. on page 14-68 for more information.
Caution At initial setup or when removing from storage, stabilize the system for 24 hours
at ambient temperature and humidity before applying power.
Failure to observe this caution may result in damage to equipment.
2.2.1 System pairing
Note: The C-Arm can only be used in conjunction with a paired Workstation with matching
serial numbers.
Each system is shipped with a sheet of colored dot system pairing labels.
Figure 2-55: System pairing labels sheet
The system pairing labels are provided so that users can mark a compatible C-Arm and
Workstation to aid in system pairing during setup and after storage.
2-68
2. System setup
Applying the system pairing labels

During the initial system setup, follow these steps to apply the system pairing labels.
1. Match the C-Arm and Workstation serial numbers.
2. Apply matching colored dots to a clean, dry surface of the C-Arm and Workstation.
Suggested locations are provided on the system pairing label sheet. If more than one
system is in use at the site, select a different set of colored dots for each system.
2.2.2 Turn on the system

The C-Arm must be connected to the Workstation and electrical power before X-rays can be
taken. When a compatible C-Arm is connected to the Workstation, it draws its power through
the interconnect cable from the Workstation.
The system stores power in batteries on the Workstation and C-Arm. When the batteries are
charging, the green charging indicator on the power input module on the back of the
Workstation and on the C-Arm interface panel illuminates. The Workstation batteries and the
C-Arm batteries, if connected, charge whenever the Workstation is plugged in to a power
outlet. The Workstation does not need to be turned on to begin charging the batteries.
If the system fails to start normally

The Workstation rear panel contains a voltage selector switch, labeled 115/230, located where
the power cord enters the Workstation. The system can be configured for 100-127 VAC mains
(115 position) or 200-240 VAC mains (230 position). If the switch is in the wrong position, the
system will block power and will not operate. Call for service.
The Workstation rear panel contains four circuit breakers designed to protect the system in the
event of a power surge.
If the Workstation or C-Arm does not start up when the power is turned on, unplug the power
cord and visually inspect the circuit breakers on the Workstation rear panel (Figure 2-56). If any
of the circuit breaker buttons extends approximately ¼" (6 mm) as shown in Figure 2-57, reset
it by pushing the button back in, and then plug the power cord in to a power outlet and turn on
the system.
Figure 2-56: Circuit breaker locations on Workstation rear panel
2-69
2. System setup
Figure 2-57: Workstation circuit breaker detail
If one or more breakers continue to trip, discontinue use, unplug the system, and call for
service.
The underside of the C-Arm contains a large circuit breaker, CB1, shown in Figure 2-58. CB1
disconnects the C-Arm batteries from the circuit and is used when the system is shipped or
transported, or during rough handling.
Figure 2-58: C-Arm CB1
If CB1 is switched off when the system starts up, a PRECHARGE CIRCUIT TIMEOUT or
PRECHARGE VOLTAGE ERROR message displays. To reset CB1:
1. Turn off system power and allow the system to shut down.
2. Reach under the C-Arm at the location indicated in Figure 2-58 and push the circuit
breaker switch forward.
3. Turn the system on.
If the PRECHARGE CIRCUIT TIMEOUT or PRECHARGE VOLTAGE ERROR message
recurs, call for service.
If the system suffers a failure while starting up, the following displays on the screen. Call for
service.
Figure 2-59: System startup failure
2-70
2. System setup
Normal system startup procedure

1. Before connecting a Workstation and C-Arm, check that the colored system pairing dots
or Workstation and C-Arm serial numbers match to ensure that the components are
compatible.
2. Plug the Workstation power plug into a properly rated AC outlet. Always position the
Workstation so that the power plug is accessible and can be easily unplugged in case of
an emergency. See 2.2.4 Immediate system shutdown on page 2-80 for more
information.
Note that the system allows the Workstation to be turned on before connecting the C-
Arm to the Workstation.
3. Insert the Workstation interconnect cable into the connector located on the right side
cover of the C-Arm by aligning the index marks (red dots) on the connector and pushing
the connector in until it locks in place.
Caution If the connector does not lock in place, unreliable system operation may result.
Figure 2-60: Connect the C-Arm to the Workstation
4. Connect the footswitch and/or handswitch to the sockets on the C-Arm interface panel
located on the left side cover. Verify that each connector locks in place.
2-71
2. System setup
Figure 2-61: C-Arm interface panel
Non-motorized Motorized OEC Touch OEC Touch

systems systems Tableside Tableside
non-motorized motorized
systems systems
1. Keyswitch. The keyswitch has three positions:

System Standby - The key is vertical. X-rays and any
motorized motion are disabled.
X-rays and Motion Enabled - The key is at a 45° angle. The C-
Arm is fully operational, with X-rays and any motorized motion
enabled.
X-rays Disabled - The key is horizontal. X-rays are disabled,
but the C-Arm remains powered, and any motorized motion is
enabled.
2. Battery charger indicator. The lamp illuminates when the
batteries are charging.
3. Handswitch connector socket
4. Footswitch connector socket
5. OEC Touch Tableside socket (Touch Tableside systems only)
6. RUI socket (motorized systems only)
5. Motorized systems only: Plug the Remote User Interface (RUI) into the RUI connector on
the C-Arm interfact panel.
6. Turn the keyswitch located on the C-Arm interface panel to the 45° X-rays and Motion
Enabled position to enable X-rays and any motorized mechanical movement.
7. Press the power switch to turn on the system.
2-72
2. System setup
Figure 2-62: Workstation power switch
The switch lights up, indicating that the power is turned on. Both the Workstation and the C-Arm
will begin their startup sequence.
The system starts up and is fully functional within 175 seconds, or just under 3 minutes.
Note: If NTP is enabled and the network is experiencing connectivity issues, startup time may
be longer than expected. Verify the NTP server on the Regional Settings setup screen.
Contact the local network administrator for assistance with NTP settings. See 2.1.10
Set up regional settings beginning on page 2-23 for more information.
Note: During the startup sequence, all lights on the C-Arm control panel and on the footswitch
and handswitch, if connected, illuminate. The C-Arm control panel remains dark until
the end of initialization. When the system is initialized, the C-Arm control panel displays
the default technique screen.
The system has completed the startup sequence when the Workstation displays either the
Login screen or the Patient screen on the right side of the main system monitor.
The C-Arm controls will default to the following settings at start up:
Image Orientation Select either Retain Last or Reset to Home. See 2.1.6 Set up pos-
ition defaults beginning on page 2-10 for more information.
Field Size NORM
Collimation The iris is fully opened. The leaf / leaves are opened and rotated
180° from the stops.
Brightness / Auto Brightness / Contrast is selected.
Contrast
Generator Auto Technique is selected along with the standard Auto Bright-
ness / Contrast. Pulse is off. kV and mA may vary by detector size.
Note: If a problem is encountered during power up, an error message may be displayed. See
14.3 Messages beginning on page 14-6 for more information.
Password and log in

OEC C-Arms are available as locally administered systems or as Enterprise systems with
2-73
2. System setup
advanced security applications and user authentication.

OEC Secure systems ship with a default password, geoecws. This password must be changed
at the time of installation.
A Login screen similar to the following displays when the system starts up.
Figure 2-63: Login screen on Enterprise systems
For clinical use, enter a username and password, and touch Login. Clinical use allows access
to all non-Administrative operations described in the manual, depending on the type of system
and software.
Login
Username
Enter the username. If the system is locked, displays the current user.
Password
Enter the password.
Login
Touch to log into the system.
Change User
If the system is locked, touch to log out the current user, clear the user displayed in the
Username field, and log in with a new username.
Change Password...
If a password has expired or been forgotten, touch to set up a new one.
2-74
2. System setup
Last Login
Once the user is logged in, if that user has previously logged in, the date and time of the
last login displays. Otherwise, No previous logins displays.
On rare occasions, all administrative and clinical users cannot log in and an
AUTHENTICATION ERROR Invalid login and/or password detected message displays. If
this occurs, call for service. Use the Emergency login to access the system.
Emergency login
For emergency use, enter your name and touch Emergency Login. A password is not required.
Emergency access is limited to the following screens and functions:
l Patient tab - enter patient information including additional information for an emergency
patient
l Mode and Profile screens - select modes and profiles
l Images tab - view images for the current exam, move images to a new study, and end
the exam
l External Video screen - view an external video source (for example, an endoscope) on
the system monitor
Change password
If a password has expired or forgotten, use the Change Password... button to set up a new
password. The Login screen displays a new section, similar to the following.
Figure 2-64: Change Password fields on the Login screen
2-75
2. System setup
Change Password
Username
Enter the username.
Old Password
Enter the previous (old) password.
New Password
Enter the new password. A check mark displays when the password meets the system
complexity requirements. Complexity requirements include:
l Passwords must be at least 8 characters.
l Passwords are case-sensitive.
l Previously used passwords cannot be reused.
l Certain easily-guessed words are not allowed, including password.
If a new password does not meet the complexity requirements, a LOGIN
PASSWORD ERROR message displays.
Confirmed New Password
Enter the new password again. A check mark displays when the retyped password
matches the new password.
Confirm
Touch to save the new password and return to the normal Login screen.
Cancel
Touch to cancel and return to the normal Login screen.
Show Password (eye icon)
Touch and hold to show the password. When the button is released, the password is
obscured with symbols.
Note: Until the correct password is entered and accepted by the system, X-rays and all
switches and remotes are disabled.
Note: On slow wireless networks, the system can sometimes experience a delay during the
login process. One or more of the following measures can improve connection times:
l Connect to a wired network.
l Connect to a faster wireless network.
l Disconnect from the network entirely.
Log out
When you have finished using the system, you can log out by pressing the Logout button or
simply by shutting down the system. When you press the Logout button, a confirmation dialog
box displays. Touch OK to log out or touch Cancel to return to work on the system.
2-76
2. System setup
Figure 2-65: Logout button
Note: If the system is not configured to use a password, the Logout button is hidden.
Startup checklist
Use the following checklist when preparing the system for use.
1. Place the C-Arm and Workstation in a position that leaves the various cables and
connectors easily accessible and from which the system can easily be moved into
position for use.
2. Check the cables and connectors for breaks, wear, bent pins or prongs, or any other
damage. Do not use worn or damaged cables.
3. Visually inspect the system for damage and missing parts.
Caution Do not turn on electrical power if any of the covers are not in place or broken.
Hazardous electrical or mechanical parts could be exposed. Damaged parts may
lose their degree of protection against harmful ingress of liquids or may fall.
Contact service to replace the damaged or missing parts.
4. If using the C-Arm, plug the interconnect cable from the Workstation into the interconnect
socket on the C-Arm.
Note: The system allows the Workstation to be turned on before connecting the C-Arm to the
Workstation, but the C-Arm should not be connected while the system is starting up.
5. Plug the Workstation power cord into an appropriate wall socket.

6. Press the power switch to start the system. The switch lights up as the system starts up.
Note: If the C-Arm was not already connected, it can be connected after the system has
completed the startup sequence.
2-77
2. System setup
7. Systems with a Touch Tableside device only: Plug in the Touch Tableside cable into the
Touch Tableside socket.
8. Systems with a Touch Tableside device only: Plug the mini Remote User Interface (RUI)
into the RUI connector on the C-Arm interface panel.
9. Plug handswitches and/or wired footswitches (if applicable) into the appropriate sockets
on the C-Arm interface panel.
10. If using a wireless footswitch, press the Mode switch on the footswitch to confirm that the
mode changes on the system.
11. If using a wired network connection, plug the Ethernet cable in.
12. If using a wired external video device, plug the device into the system and check its
operation.
13. Motorized systems only: Plug the Remote User Interface (RUI) into the RUI connector on
the C-Arm interface panel.
Caution Cords and cables connected to the Workstation and C-Arm can become trip
and/or snag hazards in the work area. Make sure that all cords and cables are
routed to eliminate trip and/or snag hazards. Personnel working around the
Workstation and C-Arm should be aware of all cords and cables whenever they
move around the system or the system is moved.
14. When startup is complete, the Login screen displays if password protection is enabled.
Enter the password and touch OK.
15. Place the C-Arm keyswitch to the 45° X-rays and Motion Enabled position.
16. Check the lift column operation by pressing the lift column switches on the cross-arm
housing.
17. Motorized systems with Touch Tableside device only: Check the lift column operation by
pressing the lift column switches on the mini RUI.
18. Move the C-Arm through its complete range of motion both lateral rotation and cephalad
/ caudal tilt making sure that motion is smooth without binding or rough motion.
19. Motorized systems only: Squeeze the bumper and verify that a CONTACT DETECTED
message displays and that all motion stops.
20. Check the operation of the Touch / Tableside C-Arm control panel by adjusting the kV
value manually using the kV button.
21. Motorized systems only: If using an RUI or mini RUI, orient the RUI to the C-Arm and the
patient, as described in Orientation beginning on page 3-74.
22. Check the imaging system.
l Put on appropriate personal protective equipment, for example, a lead
apron.
l Make sure that no unprotected people are in the immediate vicinity and
place a radio opaque object in the X-ray field. Take a 1-second fluoro image.
2-78
2. System setup
l During the shot, make sure that the values for shot time, dose rate, and
cumulative dose displayed in the bottom right corner of the left side of the
main system monitor are greater than 0.
l Check the image quality.
l Check image manipulation: rotation, flip vertical, flip horizontal.
l Open, close, and rotate the iris and leaf collimators.
l Check any other modes of operation, such as subtraction, that will be used
during the proposed clinical procedure.
If the system fails any of the checks, do not proceed with clinical use of the system.
Call for service. Otherwise, the system is ready for clinical use.
23. Enter patient information and proceed.
2.2.3 Turn off the system

To turn off the system normally:
1. Press the power switch on the front of the system.
2. The power switch begins to blink as the system shuts down. A shutdown message
displays in the status bar and a controlled shutdown begins. Shutdown time varies
according to what the system was doing when the power switch was pressed. The power
switch blinks for 10 seconds after power turns off, indicating a lockout period during
which the power switch is ignored. When the switch stops blinking, power can again be
turned on. Shutdown takes a minimum of 10 seconds.
Note that the system allows the C-Arm to be unplugged before turning off the Workstation, or
while the Workstation is shutting down. When the Workstation power button is off, neither the
Workstation nor the C-Arm will operate.
Caution If the system shuts down but power does not completely switch off, press the red
system disable switch on the back of the Workstation. See 2.2.4 Immediate
system shutdown beginning on page 2-80.
Note: Once the system shutdown message displays, the shutdown cannot be aborted. Wait
for the shutdown to finish before restarting the system.
Note: Because the system contains battery-backed power supplies, shutting down using the
power switch does not completely remove power from the system. To remove power,
shut down the system and unplug the system from the wall socket after normal
shutdown is complete.
Caution Never unplug the power cord until shutdown is complete and power is off.
Note: Remove all power from the system before moving the system or if a problem occurs
which prevents normal operation. All power should also be removed when planned
maintenance or cleaning is performed.
2-79
2. System setup
Warning All power to the system has not been removed until the Workstation is
unplugged from the electrical outlet.
Shutdown checklist
Use this checklist when shutting down the system after use.
Note that the system allows the C-Arm to be unplugged before turning off the Workstation, or
while the Workstation is shutting down.
1. Return all C-Arm moving assemblies to their most compact positions, lower the vertical
column, and retract the cross-arm.
2. Motorized systems only: Move the C-Arm image detector to the 0,0 position (vertical with
no lateral rotation or cephalad / caudal tilt).
3. Press the power switch on the front of the system. The power switch begins to blink as
the system shuts down. A shutdown message displays in the status bar. Shutdown time
varies according to what the system was doing when the power switch was pressed.
Shutdown takes a minimum of 10 seconds. The Workstation power switch continues to
blink for 10 seconds to indicate the wait time.
4. After the system is completely shut down and the Workstation power switch has stopped
blinking, disconnect the Workstation power cord from the AC outlet, coil it, and store it on
the Workstation.
5. If the system is connected to the site network by wired Ethernet, disconnect the Ethernet
cable before moving the Workstation.
6. Disconnect any switch cables from the C-Arm connector panel and store the cables and
switches on the C-Arm.
7. Disconnect the C-Arm interconnect cable, coil it, and store it on the Workstation. Ensure
that any other cables and connectors are accessible and can be easily moved into place
for use.
Shutdown is complete.
2.2.4 Immediate system shutdown

Note: Using the system disable switch for immediate shutdown of the system does not allow
the Workstation to complete a controlled shutdown and may result in corrupted hard
disk data and software, lost or mixed images, slow subsequent start-up due to
execution of file system checks, failure to start up requiring software re-installation, and
loss of all saved images. See If the system fails to start normally beginning on page 2-
69 for information about problems encountered after an improper shutdown.
Caution Data loss can occur if the system startup sequence is interrupted. In order to
prevent data loss, the system cannot be shut down during startup sequence.
Under normal conditions the Workstation should always be shut down using the power switch
2-80
2. System setup
on the front of the Workstation. If a situation arises that requires the immediate shutdown of the
system or the normal shutdown does not complete properly, the Workstation is equipped with a
system disable switch.
Figure 2-66: System disable switch
Pressing the system disable switch immediately shuts down the system. To restore system
operation, unplug the power cord for 10 seconds, plug it back in to the power outlet, and press
the power switch.
If pressing the system disable switch does not stop X-rays, press a fast stop switch or
disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet.
2.2.5 Restart the system

To restart the system:
1. Shut down the system normally, using the power switch on the front of the system. A
shutdown message displays on the right side of the main system monitor and the power
switch blinks as the system shuts down. The power switch blinks for 10 seconds to
indicate that power can not be turned back on during the shutdown sequence, until the
system shuts down successfully and then turns off.
2. After the system shuts down, wait until the power switch stops blinking, about 10
seconds, and then press the power switch to restart the system. The power switch lights
up as the system starts up.
2.2.6 Power loss and system restart

When the system loses AC power unexpectedly, by being accidentally unplugged or from
some other unexpected power loss, X-rays and motorized lateral motion, and motorized
cephalad / caudal tilt are disabled, although column motion remains enabled. A message
displays on the main system monitor informing the operator that an AC power loss has
occurred and that the system will shut down in 20 seconds. Unless AC power is restored, the
system begins a normal shutdown at the end of the specified time.
The system contains backup batteries that allow for outages lasting up to 20 seconds before
the system begins to shut down. If power is restored within 18 seconds, the system will
automatically restore X-ray capability, motorized lateral motion, and motorized cephalad /
2-81
2. System setup
caudal tilt within 5 seconds after AC comes back on.

If the power switch is pressed while power is lost, the system will begin to shut down. If the
Workstation backup battery charge is low when AC power is lost, the system will begin to shut
down without waiting the full 20 seconds. This may be an indication that the Workstation
backup batteries need to be replaced or that the system has been shut down incorrectly too
many times.
When AC power is not present, X-rays, motorized lateral motion, and motorized cephalad /
caudal tilt are disabled. Lift column movement remains enabled. See 3.7.8 Manual movement
on page 3-87 for information on manual movement in the absence of AC power.
The controlled shutdown of the system when power is lost prevents the loss of data saved on
the system. See 5.6 Image save and auto save beginning on page 5-18 for details on
automatically saving images on the system.
2.2.7 Unplug / plug the system with power on

If necessary, the system power cord can be unplugged and plugged in again, such as when
moving the cord from one power outlet to another. The system can be unplugged for 18
seconds while powered on.
Avoid unplugging the system in this way, as it can reduce the Workstation backup batteries,
which can result in early system shutdown when moving the plug or during procedures.
2.2.8 Disconnect / connect the C-Arm

The system is designed to allow the C-Arm to be disconnected from and connected to the
Workstation at any time.
If the Workstation is fully initialized when the C-Arm connector is plugged in, a message
displays while the C-Arm is initializing. The C-Arm initializes and is ready to take X-rays in
approximately 1/3rd of the time it takes for the full system to initialize after turning on power.
This feature allows a user to move a Workstation into an operating room, plug it in, and turn it
on, then move the C-Arm into the room and connect it.
Note that if the C-Arm is disconnected and then immediately plugged back in, the C-Arm power
will not be reapplied for 10 seconds. There will be no indication that a C-Arm has been
reconnected for that 10 seconds. This is normal operation. C-Arm power is be applied following
the 10-second lockout.
The system messages C-ARM HAS BEEN CONNECTED TO WORKSTATION (see page
14-16 for information on this message) and C-ARM CONTROL PANEL DISCONNECTED
(see page 14-16 for information on this message) may display when the C-Arm is connected or
disconnected.
2.2.9 System lockups

Should the system unexpectedly become unresponsive or lock up, attempt to shut down the
system using the power switch. If the power switch is unresponsive, press the system disable
switch on the back of the Workstation and then unplug the power cord for 10 seconds. See
2-82
2. System setup
2.2.4 Immediate system shutdown beginning on page 2-80 for detailed instructions for
restarting the Workstation.
If the system fails to respond or continues to lock up, call for service.
2.2.10 Screen saver

The screen saver dims the screen when the system is not in use, and is designed to reduce
wear and monitor burn-in on the system to increase the life of the monitor. See Screen Saver
on page 2-26 for information about setting up the screen saver.
Touch the screen or press any key on the keyboard, any C-Arm control panel key, any
Workstation keypad key, RUI key, or any X-ray switch to return the screen to full brightness.
Note that pressing an X-ray switch also initiates an X-ray shot.
The screen saver does not log out or lock the system, and a password is not required to return
the screen to full brightness.
2-83
2. System setup
2-84
3. System operation
3. System operation
This chapter describes how to use the system, including physical positioning and operating
controls.
3.1 Electronic operator manuals

The system includes access to the electronic Information for Use (eIFU) operator manuals
which can be read with Adobe Acrobat Reader or any PDF reader.
Read the operator manual before using the system.
3.1.1 Accessing the eIFU operator manuals

Operator manuals are available in PDF format on the USB device included with your system.
Manuals on the eIFU USB device are:
l 5483603-8EN - GE OEC Elite® Operator Manual
l 5728033-899 - GE OEC Elite® Addendum and Tips
l 5887720-899 - GE OEC® Wireless Video Operator Manual Supplement
To access eIFUs on the system:

1. Insert the operator manual USB device into a USB port on the system.
2. Touch the Applications tab and select Setup....
3. Touch User Manual. The Applications > Setup > User Manual screen with the default
(English) manual displays.
4. From the drop-down list, select your language to open the Operator Manual or select
5728033-899 to open the Tips and Addendum.
3-1
3. System operation
Figure 3-1: User Manual screen
To access eIFUs on a PC:

1. Insert the operator manual USB device into a USB port on any USB-enabled device with
PDF reader capabilities.
2. Open the USB location and then open the appropriate PDF.
To use the eIFU:

l Use the index on the left to select a section.
l Use the scroll bar on the right to scroll through pages.
Replacement USB device

Any modifications to the files on the USB device may render them unreadable by your system.
To order a replacement USB device, call the Communications Center or your local sales
representative. See 16.1.1 Communication center contact information beginning on page 16-1
for telephone numbers.
Online eIFU
The most current versions of operator documentation is available on the Internet.
To access manuals online:
(https://www.gehealthcare.com/documentationlibrary) in a web browser
2. Under the Customer Documentation Portal header, click VISIT THE SITE.
3-2
3. System operation
3. Once in the portal, enter the part number in the Enter Document Number or keyword
field.
Paper copies
A paper copy of the operator manual can be ordered at no additional cost.
Send a request to your Sales or Service representative. They will transfer your request to
[email protected].
In application of the EU Commission Regulation on electronic instructions for use of medical
devices, in the European Union, your request should be treated within 7 days.
3.2 General system controls

The system includes a number of controls located in multiple places, including the C-Arm
control panel, the Workstation image control keypad, the virtual control panel, the Remote User
Interface (RUI) on motorized systems, the footswitch, and the handswitch. These are explained
here, and referenced elsewhere in the manual. These tools function in the same way
regardless of location of the key or button. Tools found in a single location are described in the
section dedicated to that location.
See 3.8.1 OEC Touch / Touch Tableside C-Arm control panel beginning on page 3-93, 3.4.4
Image control keypad beginning on page 3-29, 3.4.9 Virtual control panel beginning on page 3-
33, and 3.7.3 Remote user interface beginning on page 3-77 for more information on the
locations listed here.
The tools are grouped by the type of function they perform:
C-Arm imaging function keys

C-Arm imaging function keys control both mechanical processes and in-system processing
when the images are taken.
Rotate image
Location: C-Arm control panel and RUI
Use Rotate image to rotate a live static image or live cine run produced while X-
rays are generated, or a Last Image Hold (LIH) image.
Touch the left portion of the button to rotate the image counterclockwise. Touch the
right portion of the button to rotate the image clockwise. Rotate image remains
selected when the button is touched, and will be applied to subsequent images.
This feature is used with the most recent shot in order to aid setting optimal
orientation for the next live shot.
3-3
3. System operation
Reverse image
Use Reverse image to reverse a live static image or live cine run produced while X-
rays are generated, or a Last Image Hold (LIH) image.
Touch the left button to reverse the image left to right, and touch the right button to
reverse the image top to bottom. The icon on the C-Arm control panel is highlighted
when a reversal is applied. Reverse image remains selected when the button is
touched, and will be applied to subsequent images.
This feature is used with the most recent shot in order to aid setting optimal
orientation for the next live shot. Recalled static images, recalled cine runs, and
swapped images cannot be reversed.
Mode
Location: C-Arm control panel, handswitch, footswitch, and the RUI
Use Mode to toggle through available modes, or between standard fluoroscopy
and the vascular imaging modes when using a Vascular or Cardiac system. The
currently selected modes display in the status bar. See 5.1.1 Select modes
beginning on page 5-1 for more information on modes and using Mode.
Mode on the C-Arm control panel
The C-Arm control panel includes an area for selecting modes, assigning X-ray
switches, and applying pulse rates. This area mimics the layout of both the
footswitch and the Reference > Mode screen. See 5.1.3 X-ray mode setup
beginning on page 5-1 for more information on selecting modes and assigning
pulse rates.
Figure 3-2: Mode selection on the C-Arm control panel
Field of View
Use Field of View to select the desired X-ray field size. The radio button indicates
which field of view is enabled:
Text Icon Field Size Field Size Field Size Field Size
(9 in II) (12 in II) (21 cm FPD) (31 cm FPD)
NORM 22 cm diameter 29 cm diameter 21 cm x 21 cm 31 cm x 31 cm
MAG1 16 cm diameter 20 cm diameter 15 cm diameter 21 cm diameter
MAG2 12 cm diameter 16 cm diameter 11 cm diameter 15 cm diameter
The system can be configured so that the boundaries of the beam limiting device
are visible on the main system monitor with the X-ray field at its maximum size for
each magnification mode. Contact service to have the system configured.
3-4
3. System operation
Collimator Leaf Rotation

Use Collimator Leaf Rotation to rotate the collimator leaves before generating X-
rays. This feature helps reduce exposure to X-rays while collimating.
Touch the left side of this button to rotate the collimator leaves counterclockwise
and touch the right side of this button to rotate them clockwise.
Collimator Iris Open / Close
Use Collimator Iris Open / Close to position the collimator iris before generating
X-rays. This feature helps reduce exposure to X-rays while collimating.
Touch the top side of this button to open the collimator iris and touch the bottom
side of this button to close it.
An icon showing a circle displays to indicate the position and orientation of the iris.
Collimator Leaf Open / Close
Use Collimator Leaf Open / Close to position the collimator leaves before
generating X-rays. This feature helps reduce exposure to X-rays while collimating.
Touch the top side of this button to open the collimator leaves and touch the bottom
side of this button to close them.
An icon showing lines displays to indicate the position and orientation of the
collimator leaves.
Note: C-Arms may be equipped with one or two collimator leaves. If the
collimator has one leaf, the icon will display only one line instead of two.
Pulse
Use Pulse to enable pulsed imaging mode using the current pulse rate, selected
on the Reference > Mode screen. A preset number of X-ray pulses are generated
each second while the X-ray switch is pressed. Pulsed X-rays can reduce total
radiation dose, and cannot be used with Digital Spot mode.
3-5
3. System operation
To change the pulse rate of a selected mode, touch and hold the Pulse button on
the image control panel. A menu displays next to the Pulse button. Select a pulse
rate.
Figure 3-3: Pulse rate selection on the C-Arm control panel
Tap the Pulse button to switch between pulse and continuous modes.
The C-Arm control panel also includes an area for selecting modes, assigning X-
ray switches, and applying pulse rates. This area mimics the layout of both the
footswitch and the Reference > Mode screen, and includes drop-down lists for
selecting a frame rate for each mode. See 5.1.3 X-ray mode setup beginning on
page 5-1 for more information on selecting modes and assigning frame rates.
Low Dose
Use Low Dose to select the low dose function.
Touch this button to reduce the exposure dose rate to the patient. Touch it again to
return to normal dose. The icon on the C-Arm control panel is highlighted when low
dose is enabled.
3-6
3. System operation
eAlarm Reset
Use Alarm Reset to reset the alarm on the C-Arm and briefly to silence the alarm,
turn off the LED (on the RUI), and clear related error messages.
Touch and hold Alarm Reset for at least two seconds to reset the accumulated
exposure time to zero and silence the alarm.
The C-Arm tracks the amount of time that X-rays are generated when an X-ray
switch is pressed. The amount of accumulated exposure time is indicated on the C-
Arm control panel.
If pulse mode is enabled, the amount of time accumulated depends on the length
of time an X-ray switch is pressed and the length of the pulses and the number of
pulses per second.
Systems sound an alarm and the icon on the C-Arm control panel flashes at the
end of each 5 minute (by default) interval of accumulated fluoroscopy time.
Systems can be configured to terminate X-rays when the “continuous” fluoro time
reaches a preset limit. The default is 10 minutes maximum. Thirty seconds prior to
termination an alarm will sound. Touch Alarm Reset to silence the alarm. Release
the X-ray switch and then press the X-ray switch again to enable X-rays.
Note: A service representative can adjust the time duration before X-rays are
terminated.
Image handling and processing

Image handling and processing keys and buttons control images after they are taken. Before
applying processing, always save the image. If Auto Save is not enabled, use Save, described
below.
Save
Location: C-Arm control panel, image control keypad, RUI, optional wireless
footswitch, and handswitch, and bottom left of the main system monitor
Use Save during a live X-ray or after the shot is complete to save the image
displayed on the left side of the main system monitor, or to save any image
processing or annotation changes made to an already saved image.
While generating X-rays, it is acceptable to use Save to save one frame of the live
X-ray to the system hard-drive without interrupting live X-rays.
During cine playback or with a cine paused, touch or press Save to save one frame
of the cine run. If an image or frame is zoomed, touch or press Save to save the
magnified view. Images derived in these ways are marked with a D in the Images
screen. The image label also includes the cine number from which the image was
derived.
3-7
3. System operation
Swap
Location: C-Arm control panel, image control keypad, RUI, and bottom left of the
main system monitor
Use Swap while generating live X-rays or after X-rays have been terminated.
l While generating live X-rays or while playing back a cine run - touch or
press Swap to copy one frame of the live X-ray and move it to the right side
of the main system monitor. Touch or press Swap again to discard the
previously swapped image and replace it with the new image.
l After X-rays have been terminated - the last frame of the exposure is
retained on the left side of the main system monitor (last image hold). Touch
or press Swap to swap the images displayed on the left and right sides of the
monitor.
l If the right side of the main system monitor is blank, touch or press Swap to
copy the image on the left side of the main system monitor to the right side of
the main system monitor.
Auto Brightness / Contrast

Location: C-Arm control panel, virtual control panel, image control keypad, and
RUI
Use Auto Brightness / Contrast to automatically select the optimum contrast and
brightness values for the left side of the main system monitor image to avoid the
need for manual adjustment to images. The current levels of brightness and
contrast remains in effect until adjusted manually or until Auto Brightness /
Contrast is selected again. Touch or press Auto Brightness / Contrast after
manually adjusting the levels to readjust them.
To enable automatic brightness / contrast, touch or press Auto Brightness /
Contrast. The icon on the C-Arm control panel is selected and the hardware LEDs
on the image control keypad and RUI illuminate when Auto Brightness / Contrast
is enabled.
To disable automatic brightness / contrast, touch or press Contrast or Brightness,
or Auto Brightness / Contrast again.
Note: Auto Brightness / Contrast is also used to access the Smart Metal
function. See Smart Metal beginning on page 3-10.
3-8
3. System operation
Manual Brightness / Contrast
Location: C-Arm control panel, virtual control panel, image control keypad, and
RUI
Use Brightness and Contrast to view and change the contrast and brightness level
of the image displayed on the left side of the main system monitor.
Figure 3-4: Contrast and brightness display on the virtual
control panel, with Contrast selected
As brightness and contrast are adjusted, changes are indicated by a corresponding

rise or fall in the shaded portion of the indicator bar on the left side of the main
system monitor. The indicator bar disappears two seconds after the slider is
released or immediately when any X-ray switch is pressed.
The current contrast or brightness level is shown in a range from 0-100 on the
indicator bar displayed on the left side of the main system monitor and in a numeric
value displayed on the upper right corner of the left side of the main system monitor
image.
When Manual Brightness / Contrast adjustment is enabled, the Auto Brightness /
Contrast icon is highlighted on the C-Arm control panel.
Changing brightness and contrast on the RUI:
Brightness and contrast are controlled simultaneously with a single key on the C-
Arm control panel and the RUI.
To adjust them:
l Press the top of the key to increase contrast and decrease brightness, or
l Press the bottom of the key to increase brightness and decrease contrast.
Changing brightness and contrast on the C-Arm control panel, virtual control
panel, and image control keypad:
Brightness and contrast are controlled independently on the C-Arm control panel,
the virtual control panel, and on the image control keypad.
3-9
3. System operation
To adjust them:
Make sure that the Auto Brightness / Contrast LED on the image control keypad
and the RUI on motorized systems is off and the icon on the C-arm control panel is
not highlighted, indicating that manual adjustment is enabled, and then do one of
the following:
l On the C-arm control panel: Touch the slider beneath the image and drag to
the right to increase the value, or to the left to decrease it.
l On the Image control keypad: Press Contrast to change the level of contrast
or Brightness to change the level of brightness.
l On the virtual control panel: Touch the slider at the right and drag up to
increase the value, or down to decrease it.
Smart Metal
Location: Virtual control panel and C-Arm control panel
Use Smart Metal to minimizes the effect of metals on image sharpness or quality.
Instead of using metal in the image (such as plates, pins, and screws) to determine
brightness and contrast (potentially causing image errors such as blooming),
Smart Metal uses other features to set brightness and contrast.
Smart Metal can be disabled or enabled on the Applications > Setup > Image
Acquisition screen, and must be enabled for use. See Set up image acquisition on
page 2-4 for more information.
Smart Metal values are 0 to 100, in increments of 1.
Smart Metal can also be accessed by using Auto Brightness / Contrast on the C-
Arm control panel or RUI. Use Brightness / Contrast to adjust autohistogram
levels and reduce the appearance of metal in the image. Use the top to increase
contrast and decrease brightness. Use the bottom to increase brightness and
decrease contrast.
To use this feature on the C-Arm control panel:
1. Ensure that the Auto Brightness / Contrast icon on the C-Arm control panel
is selected or the LED on the image control keypad is illuminated, indicating
that automatic brightness / contrast is enabled.
2. Touch Smart Metal on the C-Arm control panel.
3. The Smart Metal default level bar will display on the left side of the main
system monitor and on the C-Arm control panel.
4. Adjust the level of metal rejection using the up and down arrows on the
virtual control panel or adjusting the slider on the C-Arm control panel.
5. Touch Smart Metal to exit. The icon will turn off, indicating the system is in
manual contrast/ brightness mode.
6. Touch Auto Brightness / Contrast to enable automatic brightness / contrast
again, if necessary.
3-10
3. System operation
To use this feature on the RUI:

1. Ensure that the Auto Brightness / Contrast LED on the RUI is illuminated,
indicating that automatic brightness / contrast is enabled. Press the
Brightness / Contrast key on the RUI.
2. The Smart Metal default level bar will display on the left side of the main
system monitor and on the C-Arm control panel.
3. The Auto Brightness / Contrast icon will blink, indicating that smart metal
values are applied to the image.
4. Adjust the level of metal rejection using the up and down arrows on the
virtual control panel or adjusting the slider on the C-Arm control panel.
5. To exit Smart Metal, press the Auto Brightness / Contrast key. The LED
will turn off, indicating the system is in manual contrast/ brightness mode.
6. Press the Auto Brightness / Contrast key to enable automatic brightness /
contrast again, if necessary.
Negate
Location: Virtual control panel, C-Arm control panel, and image control keypad
Use Negate to invert the display of light and dark values in an image.
Figure 3-5: Negate displays
Positive image Negated image

This negative inversion is applied to the current image on the left side of the main
system monitor and to all subsequent images produced until negate is disabled.
Touch or press Negate to inverse the image. Until the inversion is disabled, each
time a fluoro image is produced, the image will be negative.
To disable the negative inversion, touch or press Negate again.
Note: A negative inversion can be applied to static and dynamic images.
3-11
3. System operation
Zoom
Location: Virtual control panel, image control keypad, and Reference screen
On the C-Arm control panel, zoom is accomplished with a gesture on the
touchscreen and is described below. Zoom fine adjustment can also be
accomplished using the Zoom icon on the image display on the left side of the C-
Arm control panel, also described below.
Use Zoom to magnify the image on the screen.
Figure 3-6: Zoom display
Magnified image - left side Zoom screen - right side

of the monitor of the monitor
Touch or press Zoom to magnify the image. The left side of the main system
monitor image is copied to the right side of the main system monitor and the left
image is displayed by default at two times the magnification. A square box
representing the region of interest is displayed on the right side of the main system
monitor. Drag (touch and move) the box to move the region of interest. Use the
arrow keys to fine tune the placement of the box.
Touch the slider at the right and drag up to zoom in or down to zoom out.
Press Save to save a copy of a magnified image. Images derived in these ways
are marked with a D in the Images screen. The image label also includes the
image number from which the image was derived.
A live shot, a static image, single frame of a cine run, subtraction, or roadmap, or
an entire cine run, subtraction, or roadmap can be zoomed.
Touch OK or Cancel to close the zoom screen. If the image is magnified when OK
is selected, the left side of the main system monitor image remains magnified until
an X-ray switch is pressed or until another image is recalled. If the image is
magnified when Cancel is selected, the left side of the main system monitor
image displays the original unmagnified image.
3-12
3. System operation
Zoom fine control on the Touch / Tableside C-Arm control panel:

Images can be zoomed using the Zoom icon. Touch the icon, then drag the bar up
to zoom in or down to zoom out.
Figure 3-7: Zoom fine adjustment controls on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside
Zoom gesture on the Touch / Tableside C-Arm control panel:

On the C-Arm control panel, use two fingers to zoom in or out. Most people use an
index finger and thumb for the best control.
To zoom in, place two fingers on the screen and spread them apart. The
image will expand on the screen.
To zoom out, place two fingers on the screen and pinch them together.
The image will contract on the screen.
Figure 3-8: Zoom on the C-Arm control panel
3-13
3. System operation
Enhance
Use Enhance to emphasize edges and increase image detail and sharpness.
Figure 3-9: Enhance display on the virtual control panel
On the virtual control panel, touch Enhance, and then touch the slider at the left and
drag up to increase the enhancement or down to decrease it.
On the image control keypad, press the top portion of the key to increase the
enhancement or the bottom portion to decrease it. Enhancement values are 0 to 10, in
increments of 1.
On the C-Arm control panel, touch Enhance in the image processing bar on the left side
of the screen, and then touch the slider at the right and drag up to increase the
enhancement or down to decrease it.
Changes to enhancement are indicated by a corresponding rise or fall in the light-
colored portion of the indicator bar on the left side of the main system monitor. The
indicator bar disappears two seconds after Enhance is released or the button is
pressed. The indicator bar disappears immediately when any X-ray switch is pressed.
Note: Enhancement can be applied to static and dynamic images. This function can
be applied to live and post-processed images.
3-14
3. System operation
Noise Filter (Averaging)

Use Noise Filter to view the current noise filtering level.
Figure 3-10: Noise filter display on the virtual control panel
On the virtual control panel, touch Noise Filter and then touch the slider at the right
and drag up to increase noise filtering or down to decrease it.
On the image control keypad, press the top portion of the key to increase the
filtering or the bottom portion to decrease it.
Changes to noise filtering are indicated by a corresponding rise or fall in the light-
colored portion of the indicator on the left side of the main system monitor. No
light-colored bar showing on the indicator means minimal filtering is applied. The
indicator disappears two seconds after the slider is released or the button is
pressed. The indicator disappears immediately when any X-ray switch is pressed.
Averaging provides image noise reduction to create a smoother image. Noise
filtering can be applied during live fluoro for all image modalities. Higher levels of
noise filtering produce a smoother (or less noisy) image, but may also cause more
lag when imaging moving objects or anatomy. Choose from minimal, low, medium,
and high levels of filtering.
Note: Noise filtering is a real-time processing function and cannot be adjusted on
static images.
Reset
Location: Virtual control panel and C-Arm control panel

Use Reset to remove all unsaved image processing. This resets a newly acquired
image to its original settings, and resets a recalled image to its last saved settings.
3-15
3. System operation
3.3 Workstation overview

Caution The GE OEC Workstation should only be used in conjunction with a compatible
and appropriately configured GE OEC C-Arm or as a stand-alone system.
Damage may occur if you connect the Workstation to an incompatible C-Arm or
other equipment. This Workstation is compatible only with OEC C-Arms. If the
Workstation is connected to an incompatible C-Arm or other equipment, a
message displays and Workstation will not operate.
Note: Each C-Arm and Workstation is marked with a set of system pairing labels, colored dot
that correspond on compatible components. System pairing labels may be yellow,
green, purple, red, orange, blue, or indigo. Always match the system pairing labels
before connecting a Workstation and a C-Arm.
If the Workstation is used as an independent Workstation to review or navigate on previously
captured images, plug it into an active, compatible AC receptacle and turn the Workstation on.
If the Workstation is to be used with a compatible C-Arm, connect the Interconnect Cable from
the Workstation to the C-Arm and check it for proper operation. The system does not need to
be shut down to disconnect or connect a C-Arm to the Workstation. When the interconnect
cable is disconnected while the system is running, there is a 10-second wait period before
power is applied to the C-Arm. If the interconnect cable is connected within that 10-second wait
period, power will not be applied to the C-Arm until the wait period is complete.
The following illustration and list show the location of Workstation components.
Figure 3-11: Workstation components
1. X-Ray On indicator
2. Monitor latch
3. Image control keypad
4. Printer shelf
5. Interconnect cable, wrapped on cable
hanger
6. Monitor handle
7. Power switch (green illuminated button)
8. Workstation handle
9. Power cord, wrapped on cable hanger
10. Fan vents (one on each side)
11. Workstation brake pedal
3-16
3. System operation
The Workstation back panel has a green indicator light that illuminates when the Workstation
receives AC line power from an active electrical outlet.
Circuit breakers are located below the green indicator light and on the right side of the back
panel. See 2.2.2 Turn on the system beginning on page 2-69 for more details on each circuit
breaker.
Figure 3-12: Workstation back panel
1. System disable switch
2. Illuminated green indicator light
3. Circuit breakers
Brake pedal
The Workstation brake pedal has three positions that control wheel movement. The pedal is
located on the left side of the Workstation. The pedal positions are:
1. Fully locked position: None of the wheels can roll or pivot.
2. Steering position: The wheels close to the pedal roll in a straight line, and the wheels
opposite pivot freely. Place the brake pedal in this position to move the Workstation long
distances.
3. Free movement position: All wheels pivot freely. Place the brake pedal in this position to
easily maneuver the Workstation during final positioning.
Figure 3-13: The Workstation brake pedal
3-17
3. System operation
3.3.1 Monitor
The main system monitor can be positioned and tilted for optimal viewing.
Caution Only use the monitor handle to position the monitor. Pulling on other parts of the
monitor assembly to position the monitor could damage the monitor assembly.
Caution Do not hang on, lean on, or load the monitor arm. Doing so may cause a tip
hazard.
Caution Do not position the monitor in a high traffic area.
Caution Do not drape cables over the monitor or monitor arm. Pulling a cable draped over
the monitor assembly could cause the monitor to move unexpectedly.
Caution Make sure hands and fingers are clear when latching the monitor to avoid
pinching.
Note: The monitor may become warm to the touch after extended use. This is normal.
Figure 3-14: Monitor from front, in latched position

1. Monitor handle
2. Monitor latch
To position the monitor:

1. Press down on the monitor latch to release the monitor.
2. Using the monitor handle at the bottom front of the monitor, move the monitor to the
desired location and position. The monitor can be tilted side to side and top to bottom to
change the viewing angle.
3-18
3. System operation
When you have finished using the Workstation:

1. Using the monitor handle at the bottom front of the monitor, move the monitor to face
front, pressing down into the monitor latch.
2. Press the latching bar into the monitor latch until it locks in place.
3.3.2 Workstation external connections

These warnings apply to the connectors on the rear of the Workstation as well as any
connectors not in use on other medical devices, such as printers, that are connected to the
Workstation.
Warning Do not touch connectors and patient simultaneously. Electric shock could
occur.
Warning Connect only medical devices that comply with UL/IEC 60601 Standards.
Contact GE Healthcare for a list of compliant devices.
Connecting a non-compliant device could cause injury to the operator, the
patient, or the equipment.
Figure 3-15: Workstation external connections 1. DICOM /

Ethernet network
connector (RJ45)
2. Room interface
connector
3. Video-in (DVI-D)
connector
4. Video-out
(DisplayPort)
connector - 1
5. Video-out
(DisplayPort)
connector - 2
3-19
3. System operation
Figure 3-16: Workstation USB port locations
1. Two USB ports inside Workstation

yoke
2. One USB port inside printer shelf
Connect a device to a Workstation connector

Warning Connect only shielded cables or cables supplied by GE OEC Medical
Systems. When connecting accessories, verify normal operation in the
configuration in which the accessory will be used.
Plug in external devices to the Workstation, using the appropriate connection, as shown in
Figure 3-15: Workstation external connections.
Note: The Workstation can provide a signal to an approved injector through the Room
Interface connector. This signal is sent when the Syringe icon displays during Subtract
procedures, and when the Workstation sends a signal during HLF with Cine and Digital
Cine Pulse procedures. A custom cable must be constructed or obtained from an
approved injector manufacturer or GE OEC Medical Systems, Inc.
Room Interface connector

The Room Interface connector can communicate with various devices, including a Room In
Use sign, an X-Rays On lamp, a contrast agent injector, and a Door Open controller. The relays
are capable of switching 24V DC or 24V AC at a current of up to 2 amps.
Figure 3-17 shows a diagram of the pin numbers on the external connection that controls each
signal.
Figure 3-17: Input/Output relay connections on Workstation
Door Interlock Injector Room In Use Room X-Rays On
Pins 4 and 5 Pins 1 and 6 Pins 3 and 8 Pins 2 and 7
3-20
3. System operation
Door Interlock
This signal prevents X-rays from being produced when the room door is open.
If the system will not produce X-rays when the door is closed but produces X-rays when the
door is open, the system may be configured incorrectly for the room door's switch. Call for
service.
Injector
This controls a power contrast injection connector output. A signal is sent when the Syringe
icon displays during a Subtract procedure. See 11. Contrast agent injector beginning on page
11-1 for details on using a power contrast injector.
Call Technical Support for a list of approved injectors that work with the system. See 16.1.1
Communication center contact information beginning on page 16-1 for phone numbers.
Room In Use sign
This signal controls a Room In Use sign. When the system is turned on and ready to take X-
rays, the Room In Use light illuminates.
Room X-Rays On lamp
This signal controls a Room X-Rays On lamp. When X-rays are being produced, the Room X-
Rays On lamp illuminates. It does not pulse with pulsed X-rays.
3.3.3 View External Video

The external video port provides a means of viewing an external video source (for example, an
endoscope) on the system monitor by a DVI-D connection.
To connect and view an external video source follow these steps.
Caution Position external video cables to avoid trip, catch, and snag hazards. The
assembly could move unexpectedly if external video cables are pulled.
1. Plug the external device into the Video-in (DVI-D) connector, shown in 3.3.2 Workstation
external connections on page 3-19.
2. Touch the Applications tab.
3. Touch External Video.... The External Video screen displays.
3-21
3. System operation
Figure 3-18: External Video screen
Note: If no external device is connected, this screen still displays. Connect an external video
device as instructed in step 1, above.
4. Touch Display. The external video displays on the right side of the main system monitor.
5. Touch Exit to stop the external video display, and then disconnect the external video
source.
Caution Clean the external connector area with dry cloths only. Do not use liquid cleaners
on this area.
3.3.4 Workstation video signal

Plug an external monitor in to a video-out connector, as shown in 3.3.2 Workstation external
connections on page 3-19.
Note: If a connected external DisplayPort device does not have an EDID, the system will
output 1920 X 1080 full screen resolution. If the device cannot display 1920 X 1080, it
may not display external video.
If a connected external DisplayPort device does not have a compatible native
resolution, the device will display a supported resolution with the same aspect ratio.
3-22
3. System operation
3.3.5 Move the Workstation

Note: In order to avoid premature or unnecessary wear and tear of cables attached to the
system, pay special attention to the cables and avoid running over them with carts or
other equipment.
Caution Become familiar with the location and mechanical operation of all controls prior
to moving the system.
Use the following procedure to move the Workstation, including into and away from a patient
location.
1. Verify that the Workstation is completely shut down.
2. Unplug the Workstation power cord. Wrap and secure the cable around the cable
hangers.
3. Disconnect the interconnect cable from the C-Arm and wrap it around the Workstation
interconnect cord wrap.
4. Disconnect any other external connections, DICOM, and so on.
5. Motorized systems only: stow the RUI in the tray at the rear of the Workstation, and wind
the cable around the Workstation handle to secure it. Do not transport the RUI together
with the C-Arm.
Figure 3-19: RUI stowed on the rear of the Workstation
6. Using the monitor handle, face the monitor to the front and lock it into the monitor latch
(See Figure 3-14: Monitor from front, in latched position on page 3-18). Make sure hands
and fingers are clear when latching the monitor to avoid pinching.
7. Unlock the wheel brakes on the Workstation, and place the brake in the appropriate
position, as described in Figure 3-13: The Workstation brake pedal on page 3-17.
8. Guide the Workstation to its destination using the handles, as shown in Figure 3-20:
Moving the Workstation.
9. When you reach your destination, apply the wheel brakes on the Workstation.
3-23
3. System operation
Caution Two people should maintain control of the Workstation when moving up or down
an incline. Do not move the Workstation over inclines greater than 10°. Do not
move the Workstation up or down stairs or steps. Do not lock the Workstation in
place on an incline greater than 5°.
Figure 3-20: Moving the Workstation
Note: The monitor enclosure should be checked for damage if the system collides with any
object.
3.4 System controls

Before using the system, you should become familiar with the controls.
3.4.1 Workstation battery-backed power supply

The system contains battery-backed power supplies that provide emergency backup power to
the system in the event of an unexpected power loss. If power is lost, the battery-backed power
supply allows the system to remain on for 20 seconds before shutting down. This provides time
to save current images or to restore power. If power is restored within 18 seconds, the system
will be ready to resume X-rays in 5 seconds.
The battery-backed power supply is on as soon as the system power is turned on, allowing the
system to complete startup even if power is lost.
3.4.2 Workstation keyboard

The hardware keyboard controls include cursor movement keys, text-entry keys, and a
touchpad.
The keyboard is not fixed to the system.
Note: When the keyboard is removed from the system, the touchpad will not function.
3-24
3. System operation
Caution Do not place objects on the keyboard. Objects on the keyboard may result in
unintended keyboard presses.
Multiple keyboards are available, and the keyboard present on the system depends on the
system's location. The configurations and functionality of each keyboard is identical. Only
labeling distinguishes the keyboards. Layout options are:
Figure 3-21: QWERTY-US Figure 3-22: QWERTY-International

keyboard keyboard
Figure 3-23: QWERTZ Figure 3-24: AZERTY

keyboard keyboard
3.4.3 Virtual keyboard

The virtual keyboard is an on-screen QWERTY keyboard.
To open the virtual keyboard, touch the virtual keyboard button in the left side of the status bar.
3-25
3. System operation
Figure 3-25: Virtual keyboard button
The virtual keyboard displays in the location where it was last placed and with the last used
layout. If the system has been restarted, the virtual keyboard displays at the bottom of the right
side of the main system monitor.
Figure 3-26: Virtual keyboard
The virtual keyboard operates similarly to a hardware keyboard. Touch the letters to enter
characters in text entry fields.
3-26
3. System operation
Uppercase, lowercase, numerals, and symbols

The virtual keyboard includes three different layouts, one for typing capital letters, one for
typing lowercase letters, and one for typing numerals and symbols.
Touch Shift to display uppercase keys. Shift is highlighted when the uppercase keyboard
displays.
Figure 3-27: Virtual keyboard with uppercase letters selected
Touch Shift again to display lowercase keys.

Figure 3-28: Virtual keyboard with lowercase letters selected
Touch the symbols key, marked with ?#@, to display the numerals and symbols keys.
Figure 3-29: Virtual keyboard with numerals and symbols selected
Touch the alphanumeric key, marked with ABC, to display lowercase keys.
Modifier and special keys

The virtual keyboard includes some modifier and special keys. These function just as they do
on a hardware keyboard.
3-27
3. System operation
Figure 3-30: Virtual keyboard modifier and special keys
1. Tab key
2. Caps lock key (one on
each side)
3. Space bar
4. Arrow keys
5. Enter key
6. Backspace key
7. Delete key
Move the virtual keyboard

The virtual keyboard can be moved to a different location on the screen to accommodate
screens with text entry boxes on the lower half of the screen.
Touch the top bar of the keyboard and drag it to another location on the screen to move the
virtual keyboard.
Figure 3-31: Virtual keyboard top bar
Close the virtual keyboard

To close the virtual keyboard, touch the virtual keyboard button shown in Figure 3-25. The
virtual keyboard also closes when an X-Ray switch is pressed.
Cursor movement and text entry

The Workstation touchpad, cursor movement, text entry, and text modification keys allow you
to move the cursor, edit text, and make button selections from the touchscreen. Additionally,
functions can be accessed on the touchscreen simply by touching the displayed touchscreen
function button.
Caution Do not use sharp or metal objects on the touchpad. A sharp or metal object can
damage the touchpad.
The touchpad is located on the bottom of the keyboard. To select a button on the touchscreen
3-28
3. System operation
with the touchpad, use your finger on the touchpad to move the mouse cursor over the desired
button and then press the left touchpad button or tap the touchpad.
Touchscreen buttons can also be selected by using the Tab key to move to a button. Once the
button is selected and highlighted with a dashed line, press Enter.
Note: A touchscreen button possesses focus when its text label has a dotted border. Press
Enter to activate the button with focus. A button is selected when it possesses the
focus.
Cursor movement keys

Tab
Moves the cursor to the next text-entry box, and changes the focus to
the next touchscreen button in left-to-right, top-to-bottom order.
Enter
Moves the cursor to the next text-entry box. Also selects the
touchscreen button that possesses the focus.
Arrows
Used for fine positioning of image annotation and measurements on the
touchscreen.
Text entry keys

The text-entry keys allow you to enter and edit text.
Backspace
Deletes one character to the left of the cursor, or deletes a selected marker
or comment.
Delete
Deletes a selected marker or comment on the Annotation screen.
Caps Lock
Toggles between all upper case letters and mixed case letters. The LED,
located in the upper right corner of the keyboard, illuminates when Caps
Lock is enabled, and the keyboard types only upper case letters. When
disengaged, the keyboard types mixed case letters. The default setting for
Caps Lock is engaged.
3.4.4 Image control keypad

The Workstation includes an image control keypad that allows access to image processing and
some viewing functions that are also available from the C-Arm control panel. The keypad is part
of the Workstation top and is located on the left of the keyboard shelf.
3-29
3. System operation
Figure 3-32: Image control keypad

1. Switch Applications (See Switch Applications beginning
on page 3-30)
2. Auto Brightness / Contrast (See Auto Brightness /
Contrast beginning on page 3-8)
3. Auto Brightness / Contrast indicator LED
4. Contrast (See Manual Brightness / Contrast beginning on
page 3-9)
5. Brightness (See Manual Brightness / Contrast beginning
on page 3-9)
6. Enhance (See Enhance beginning on page 3-14)
7. Noise Filter (See Noise Filter (Averaging) beginning on
page 3-15)
8. Zoom (See Zoom beginning on page 3-12)
9. Negate (See Negate beginning on page 3-11)
10. Save (See Save beginning on page 3-7)
11. Swap (See Swap beginning on page 3-8)
Switch Applications
Location: Image control keypad
Use Switch Applications to navigate quickly between the current screen and either
the Reference screen or the Applications screen, or the current application
displayed on the Applications screen, such as the Applications > DICOM Image
Viewer or the External Video screen. If either the Reference screen or the
Applications screen is the current screen, this key toggles them on the main
system monitor.
3.4.5 Touchpad
Caution Do not use sharp or metal objects on the touchpad. A sharp or metal object can
damage the touchpad.
The touchpad controls the mouse cursor and can be used to select buttons on the touchscreen
monitor.
Figure 3-33: Touchpad
1. Touchpad
2. Left button for normal select / click
function
3. Right button for right-click function
Use your finger on the touchpad to move the mouse cursor over the desired control on the
3-30
3. System operation
touchscreen monitor. When the cursor is in position, either click the left button or tap lightly on
the touchpad to select and execute the control.
Touchpad sensitivity and button configuration can be set up on the Applications > Setup >
Touchpad/Audio screen. See 2.1.7 Set up touchpad and audio beginning on page 2-10.
3.4.6 Touchscreen controls

The monitor provides a touchscreen for interacting with the system. Using the touchscreen you
can:
l View patient information
l Enter text such as patient information using the virtual keyboard
l View images
l Process images using the virtual control panel
l Configure the X-ray switches
l Set imaging parameters
l Annotate images
To select a touchscreen button, or a box for text-entry, firmly touch the desired object.
Figure 3-34: Using the touchscreen
3.4.7 Tabs
Use the tabs located at the top of the right side of the main system monitor to access screens.
3-31
3. System operation
Figure 3-35: Tabs at the top of the screen
The tab icons are described below:

Reference
Displays the main Reference screen. Use the screens on this tab to view current
images and to set up modes for imaging. See 5. Imaging beginning on page 5-1.
Patient
Displays the Patient screen. Use the screens on this tab to enter and edit patient
information, select imaging profile, and to create, schedule, and access exams.
See 4.1 Patient screen beginning on page 4-1.
Images
Displays the Images screen. Use the screens on this tab for image review, print,
archival, and deletion, patient summary review, and stored images and dose
information access. See 8.1 Images beginning on page 8-1.
Annotations
Displays the Annotations screen. Use the screens on this tab to add comments,
markers, and measurements to images. See 7. Image annotation and
measurement beginning on page 7-1.
Applications
Displays the Applications screen. Use the screens on this tab to access additional
applications installed on the system.
3-32
3. System operation
3.4.8 Blank button

The Blank button is provided as a security feature for HIPAA purposes.
Use Blank to clear the screen quickly if it is displaying information which should not be seen by
someone else.
To clear the screen, touch the Blank button in the left side of the status bar.
Figure 3-36: Blank button
Touch Blank to clear the entire screen completely. Press any key on the keyboard or touch the
system touchscreen to return to the active screen display.
3.4.9 Virtual control panel

The virtual control panel allows access to image processing and some viewing functions that
are also available on the C-Arm control panel.
To open the virtual control panel, touch the virtual control panel button in the left side of the
status bar.
3-33
3. System operation
Figure 3-37: Virtual control panel button
Figure 3-38: Virtual control panel

1. Negate (See Negate beginning on page
3-11)
2. Hide / Display annotations (See 7.5 Hide
and display annotations beginning on page
7-12)
3. Rotate (left / right - See Rotate image
beginning on page 3-3)
4. Zoom (See Zoom beginning on page 3-
12)
5. Auto Brightness / Contrast (See Auto
Brightness / Contrast beginning on page 3-
8)
6. Control slider for variable tools (6-10)
7. Brightness (See Manual Brightness /
Contrast beginning on page 3-9)
8. Contrast (See Manual Brightness /
Contrast beginning on page 3-9
9. Smart Metal (See Smart Metal beginning on page 3-10)
10. Enhance (See Enhance beginning on page 3-14)
11. Noise Filter (See Noise Filter (Averaging) beginning on page 3-15)
12. Reset (See Reset beginning on page 3-15)
Motorized systems only: An additional C-Arm position panel opens with the virtual control
panel. See 3.7.9 C-Arm position panel beginning on page 3-88 for more information.
3-34
3. System operation
Close the virtual control panel

To close the virtual control panel, touch the virtual control panel button shown in Figure 3-37.
3.4.10 Workstation batteries

The Workstation contains two batteries, a lithium metal coin battery in the motherboard and a
lead-acid battery providing the power for the Workstation battery-backed power supply. Both
batteries are sealed and maintenance-free. Any battery-related work must be performed by a
qualified service engineer. Call for service.
3.4.11 Extended exposure feature

The X-ray switch may not detect short or rapid presses, such as those created by toe-tapping
on the footswitch. This behavior may produce no image, or can also produce poor image
quality.
The Extended Exposure feature is designed to provide a usable Last Image Hold (LIH) capture
on very short X-ray control switch activations. These are activations of insufficient duration to
produce a suitable LIH capture, typically less than 1 second. This feature extends only these
very short exposures, but only to the extent necessary to provide a suitable image capture.
For fluoroscopy exposures longer than 0.5 seconds, the system terminates the exposure within
0.1 seconds of when the switch is released. For fluoroscopy exposures 0.5 seconds or less, the
system terminates the exposure within 0.5 seconds of when the switch is released.
The actual limit of exposure extension on very short “toe tap” exposures is dependent on the X-
ray termination mode selected:
l Switch Released - Stops X-ray generation when the X-ray switch is released. Image
processing may be incomplete, which can reduce the quality of the image displayed.
l Target Technique Reached - Stops X-ray generation as soon as the system generates
a stable image, which may be after the X-ray switch is released.
l Selected Noise Filter Applied - Stops X-ray generation when the maximum level of
image processing has been applied to the image, which may be after the X-ray switch is
released. Note that maximum processing includes frame averaging, which attempts to
reduce noise effects in any one frame.
The options available are based on local regulations, and are controlled on the Applications >
Setup > Image Acquisition screen. See 2.1.3 Set up image acquisition beginning on page 2-4
for more information.
If these options are unavailable on the Image Acquisition screen, the X-ray Termination Mode
option is disabled. Call for service to enable these options, if allowed by local regulations.
The total exposure extension is limited unconditionally to 1.25 seconds.
3-35
3. System operation
Caution This feature can be disabled by a Field Engineer but could result in poor image
quality and increased exposure to patient.
Attempting to take very short exposures in quick succession may not operate as
expected. This could result in degraded image quality of the initial or subsequent
exposures.
With Target Technique Reached selected, X-rays may continue to be produced
following the release of a momentary X-ray switch press until the desired
technique has stabilized.
With Selected Noise Filter Applied selected, X-rays may continue to be
produced until the system finishes processing the image to produce a stabilized
image.
Caution Taking very rapid and short exposures repeatedly over an extended period of
time may cause errors to occur. Avoid continuous tapping on the X-ray switch
over long periods of time.
3.5 C-Arm overview

This section describes the C-Arm's parts and how to move the C-Arm.
3.5.1 C-Arm identification

The C-Arm is available in the following configurations and sizes:
Figure 3-39: C-Arms
Standard C-Arm with 9 in (23 cm) Standard C-Arm with 12 in (31 cm)
image intensifier and L-arm image intensifier and L-arm
3-36
3. System operation
Super C-Arm with 21 cm Super C-Arm with 31 cm

flat panel detector flat panel detector
Ergo C-Arm with 21 cm Ergo C-Arm with 31 cm

flat panel detector and L-arm flat panel detector and L-arm
3-37
3. System operation
Motorized C-Arm with 21 cm Motorized C-Arm with 31 cm

flat panel detector flat panel detector
Super C-Arm with 9 in (23 cm)

image intensifier
3-38
3. System operation
3.5.2 C-Arm components

Common C-Arm components
The items listed below identify the location of components common to all C-Arms. See 16.5
Dimensions beginning on page 16-33 for dimensional differences.
Figure 3-40: Common C-Arm component identification (Super C-Arm pictured)
1. OEC Touch C-Arm control panel

2. Vertical column lift switches
3. Horizontal cross-arm handle
4. Steering handle (right side only)
5. Interconnect cable port
6. High voltage (HV) cable
7. Rear wheel brake pedal
8. Image detector handle
9. Image detector
10. X-ray tube handle
11. Fan vent (active cooling systems only)
12. Interface panel (left side)
Super C-Arms
The items listed below identify only the components on the Super C-Arm that differ from other
GE OEC C-Arms. See 3.6.1 Positioning the Super C-Arm beginning on page 3-50 for
positioning information.
Figure 3-41: Super C-Arm component identification
1. Horizontal cross-arm brake handle

2. Wig-wag brake handle
3. C-Arm handle (top)
4. Cephalad / caudal tilt brake handle
5. Lateral rotation brake handle
6. C-Arm handle (bottom)
3-39
3. System operation
Standard C-Arms
The Standard C-Arm has an image intensifier and an L-arm for moving the C-Arm into
SmartView positions. The items listed below identify only the components on the Standard C-
Arm that differ from other GE OEC C-Arms. See 3.6.2 Positioning the Standard C-Arm
beginning on page 3-55 for positioning information.
Figure 3-42: Standard C-Arm component identification
1. C-Arm lateral rotation brake

2. L-arm rotation brake
3. C-Arm handle (top)
4. L-arm handle (top)
5. Cephalad / caudal tilt brake
6. Wig-wag handle
7. L-arm assembly
8. L-arm handle (bottom)
Ergo C-Arms
The Ergo C-Arm has a flat panel detector and an L-arm for moving the C-Arm into SmartView
positions. It also includes a longer lateral rail allowing for greater lateral rotation, and a
removable stop device for the rail. The items listed below identify only the components on the
Ergo C-Arm that differ from other GE OEC C-Arms. See 3.6.3 Positioning the Ergo C-Arm
beginning on page 3-62 for positioning information.
Figure 3-43: Ergo C-Arm component identification
1. C-Arm lateral rotation brake

2. L-arm rotation brake
3. C-Arm handle
4. Cephalad / caudal tilt brake
5. Wig-wag handle
6. L-arm assembly
7. L-arm handle (wraps around both sides of L-
arm)
Not pictured: Removable stop
Motorized C-Arms
The Motorized C-Arm includes a motor assembly, a clutch for moving the C-Arm manually, a
3-40
3. System operation
bumper assembly for detecting contact, and a Remote User Interface (RUI) for controlling the
motorized movement and other functions. The items listed below identify only the components
on the Motorized C-Arm that differ from other GE OEC C-Arms. See 3.7.7 Positioning the
Motorized C-Arm beginning on page 3-83 for positioning information.
Figure 3-44: Motorized C-Arm component identification
1. Contact detection bumper

2. Motor assembly
3. Clutch
4. Remote User Interface (RUI). See Figure
3-107: The Remote User Interface (RUI)
on page 3-77
5. OEC Touch C-Arm control panel
Not pictured: RUI connector. See 3.7.2
Motorized C-Arm setup on page 3-73.
3.5.3 Detector types

OEC C-Arms are equipped with one of two types of X-ray detectors, a tube-based image
intensifier detector or a flat panel-based detector. Operation of these detector types varies.
Warning Do not remove the flat panel bumper.
3.5.4 Skin spacer

Attaching the skin spacer
To attach the skin spacer:
1. Push the skin spacer onto the X-ray tube cover and gently twist it. It will snap into place
on the pins.
2. If required by local regulations, or to avoid losing the skin spacer locking tab, rotate the
tab into the locking tab space and tighten the screw using a Torx T10 screwdriver.
3-41
3. System operation
Figure 3-45: Skin spacer installed on the X-ray tube cover
Figure 3-46: Skin spacer attached and locked into place
Removing the skin spacer

Warning Removing the skin spacer may result in increased radiation exposure to the
patient. The rate of exposure increases exponentially as the anatomy is
positioned closer to the X-ray tube. The skin spacer should only be removed
on the instructions of a physician, and should be reattached to the collimator
cover immediately following the procedure. See 3.5.4 Skin spacer beginning
on page 3-41 for information on attaching and detaching the skin spacer.
To remove the skin spacer:
1. Using a Torx T10 screwdriver, loosen the screw on the skin spacer locking tab. You do
not need to remove the screw completely.
2. Rotate the locking tab 180° and tighten the screw. Take care not to over-tighten the
screw, or the plastic lock can break.
3. Rotate the skin spacer off the pins.
3-42
3. System operation
Figure 3-47: Skin spacer unlocked, ready to be removed
4. Slide the skin spacer off the X-ray tube cover.

5. Store the skin spacer on the skin spacer storage pins located on the cord wraps on the
Workstation when it is not in use or for storage or shipping.
Figure 3-48: Skin spacer stored on cord wrap
3.5.5 Anti-scatter grid

Flat panel detector
Removing the anti-scatter grid from a flat panel system
The grid should only be removed on the instructions of a physician, and should be reattached
immediately following the procedure.
To remove the grid:
1. Support the grid with one hand.
2. With the fingertips of the other hand, push the metal latch in.
3-43
3. System operation
Figure 3-49: Anti-scatter grid latch
3. Pull the grid away from the flat panel detector and gently slide the tabs out of the slots.
Attaching the anti-scatter grid to a flat panel system
1. Align the two tabs along one edge of the grid with the slots in the flat panel detector, and
slide the tabs into the slots.
Figure 3-50: Anti-scatter grid tab and slot
2. Push the grid's metal latch in with your fingertips, and gently swing the grid into the flat
panel detector.
3. Release the metal latch. Ensure that the grid is properly seated and latched into the flat
panel detector before operating the C-Arm.
Image intensifier
Removing the anti-scatter grid from an image intensifier system
To remove the grid, slide the grid out of the holder.
3-44
3. System operation
Figure 3-51: Anti-scatter grid removal
When the grid is removed, a yellow strip is visible along the edge, indicating that the grid has
been removed. Always reattach the grid immediately following the procedure.
Figure 3-52: Yellow indicator strip on II with removed grid
Attaching the anti-scatter grid to an image intensifier system

1. Align the edges of the grid with the grid holder on the image intensifier.
2. Slide the grid into the holder until the grid clicks into place.
3-45
3. System operation
3.5.6 Move the C-Arm

Familiarize yourself with the location and mechanical operation of all controls prior to moving
the C-Arm.
Note: In order to avoid premature or unnecessary wear and tear of cables attached to the
system, pay special attention to the cables and avoid running over them with carts or
other equipment.
Caution Use the handles provided on the C-Arm to position mechanical assemblies. The
handles are provided for your safety.
1. Return all moving assemblies to their most compact positions. Lower the vertical column
and retract the cross-arm. Motorized systems only: Place the C-Arm in the 0,0 position.
2. Lock all movable mechanical assembly brakes: the C-Arm lateral rotation brake, the
cephalad / caudal tilt brake, the Wig-wag brake, and the horizontal cross-arm brake.
3. Remove all power from the system.
4. Disconnect the interconnect cable from the C-Arm and wrap it around the Workstation
interconnect cord wrap.
5. Store the footswitch on the rack located on the rear of the C-Arm and store the
handswitch in the holster located on the C-Arm's left front cover.
Figure 3-53: Footswitch stored in rack on rear of C-Arm
3-46
3. System operation
6. Motorized systems only: Disconnect the RUI and place it in the tray at the back of the
Workstation. Do not transport the RUI together with the C-Arm.
7. Place the C-Arm's right steering handle in the 0° position and unlock the wheel brakes.
8. Guide the C-Arm by pushing with the steering handles, or by pulling with the positioning
handles.
Caution Do not move the C-Arm over inclines greater than 10°. Do not move the C-Arm
up or down stairs or steps. Do not lock the C-Arm in place on an incline greater
than 5°.
9. When you reach your destination place the C-Arm’s wheel brakes in the locked position.
Figure 3-54: Moving the C-Arm
C-Arm wheel brakes

The C-Arm brake pedals are located above the rear wheels on both sides of the C-Arm. The
pedals operate much like rocker switches.
The pedal positions are:
Figure 3-55: C-Arm brake pedal positions
1 2 3 1. Locks the rear wheel brakes.
2. Unlocks the rear wheel brakes allowing
the wheels to rotate freely.
3. Locks the rear wheel brakes.
C-Arm steering handle

Use the right steering handle to turn the rear wheels from 0° to 90° to the right or left. Use this
feature to position the C-Arm during clinical applications or to negotiate sharp turns during
3-47
3. System operation
transport. The rear wheels turn at approximately the same angle as the right steering handle.
Figure 3-56: Right steering handle
Caution To avoid losing control of the C-Arm, always reduce transport speed before
moving the steering handle out of the 0° position.
Caution If the Wig-wag brake is set to the extreme right, use caution not to injure your
knuckles when turning the steering handle 90° to the left.
Note: The rear wheels can be positioned in this manner whether the brakes are applied or
not.
3.5.7 C-Arm orientation

Before you begin using the system with a patient you must orient the C-Arm to the patient.
Use the following steps to orient the C-Arm. The steps described are for illustration only. C-Arm
and patient positions will vary for actual clinical procedures.
1. Imagine the patient lying face up on the table with the C-Arm positioned perpendicular to
the patient, on the patient's left, and the image detector above the patient, as shown in
the following diagram.
2. Position the C-Arm gantry to the left of the patient with the image detector over the
patient’s chest.
3-48
3. System operation
Figure 3-57: Typical clinical arrangement for non-motorized OEC Elite systems
1. C-Arm
2. Workstation
3. Table
4. Footswitch
(varies)
Never place patient anatomy directly on the detector or use the detector as a work surface.
Avoid any direct patient contact with the detector.
3.6 Positioning the C-Arm

Positioning is similar for all OEC C-Arms, but the brakes and some motions vary. The C-Arm
movements defined in the documentation are based on the axes of movement of the C-Arm
and not related to the clinical positions centered around the patient.
Possible C-Arm movements are:
l Lateral rotation rotates the C-Arm around the patient or table.
l Cephalad / caudal motion tilts the C-Arm at a pivot point on the horizontal cross-arm.
l Horizontal motion moves the C-Arm horizontally across the table or patient from a point
underneath the cross-arm housing.
l Vertical motion lifts the C-Arm up and down over the patient or table.
l SmartView rotation uses the L-arm found on the Standard C-Arm and Ergo C-Arm only,
and moves the C-Arm in a gyroscopic motion. It simultaneously rotates and tilts the C-
Arm in up to three axes around the patient or table.
Note: The bottom rail of the cross-arm is coated with a thin oil surface to protect it from
moisture. Do not wipe this oil off the cross arm.
See 3.5.2 C-Arm components beginning on page 3-39 for locations of the brakes and other
components on each type of C-Arm.
See 16.5 Dimensions beginning on page 16-33 for differences in dimensions and degrees of
rotation.
See 3.7.7 Positioning the Motorized C-Arm beginning on page 3-83 for information on
positioning the Motorized C-Arm.
3-49
3. System operation
3.6.1 Positioning the Super C-Arm

The Super C-Arm allows lateral rotation, cephalad / caudal tilt, horizontal and vertical motion,
and side-to-side Wig-wag motion.
C-Arm lateral rotation and brake

Lateral rotation rotates the C-Arm around the patient or table for lateral shots. The Super C-
Arm can be rotated a total of 145° (55° overscan and 90° underscan). The back of the C-Arm is
marked with a scale to aid in positioning. The lateral rotation brake can be loosened or
tightened using variable resistance, so the brake can be set to allow motion while avoiding drift.
Figure 3-58: C-Arm lateral rotation
Caution Pinch points exist between the C-Arm support assembly and the C-Arm. Do not
place fingers or allow clothing in between these assemblies when positioning the
C-Arm.
Caution Grasp one of the C-Arm positioning handles to prevent uncontrolled C-Arm
movement whenever you release the brake.
To rotate the C-Arm laterally:

1. Release the lateral rotation brake by turning the brake handle, located on the C-Arm
spine, counterclockwise to loosen it.
2. Grasp the C-Arm handle and rotate the C-Arm to the desired position.
3. Lock or tighten the lateral rotation brake by turning the brake handle clockwise.
3-50
3. System operation
Figure 3-59: Lateral rotation brake in the fully locked

position (left) and fully unlocked position (right)
Cephalad / caudal tilt and brake

Cephalad / caudal motion tilts the C-Arm at a pivot point on the horizontal cross-arm. This
provides increased versatility in positioning the X-ray tube and image detector by allowing them
to tilt along the cephalic / caudal plane. The C-Arm can pivot from 0 - 270° in one direction and
from 0 - 90° in the opposite direction. The cephalad / caudal tilt brake can be loosened or
tightened using variable resistance, so the brake can be set to allow motion while avoiding drift.
To tilt the C-Arm:
1. Release the cephalad / caudal tilt brake by turning the brake handle, located at the top of
the tilt knuckle, counterclockwise to loosen it.
2. Grasp the C-Arm handle and tilt the C-Arm to the desired position.
3. Lock or tighten the cephalad / caudal tilt brake by turning the brake handle clockwise.
Figure 3-60: Cephalad / caudal tilt
Caution Guide the C-Arm carefully with both hands until the C-Arm is in the position you
want and then lock the brake.
3-51
3. System operation
Figure 3-61: Cephalad / caudal tilt brake in the fully locked

Horizontal cross-arm motion and brake

Horizontal motion moves the C-Arm horizontally across the table or patient from a point
underneath the cross-arm housing. The horizontal cross-arm extends a maximum of 20 cm (8
inches). The horizontal brake can be loosened or tightened using variable resistance, so the
brake can be set to allow motion while avoiding drift.
Figure 3-62: Positioning the horizontal cross-arm
To position the cross-arm:

1. Release the cross-arm brake by turning the brake handle, located at the top of the cross-
arm housing, counterclockwise to loosen it.
2. Push or pull the cross-arm to the desired position. Use the centimeter scale located on
the cross-arm as an aid in positioning.
3. Lock or tighten the cross-arm brake by turning the brake handle clockwise.
Note: The cross-arm brake may be used to apply light tension, and allow some movement of
the cross-arm, while restricting free-drift.
3-52
3. System operation
Figure 3-63: Horizontal cross arm brake in the fully locked

Vertical column operation

Vertical motion lifts the C-Arm up and down over the patient or table. The vertical lift raises the
C-Arm a maximum of 18 inches (46 cm). The vertical lift arm of the C-Arm is marked with a
centimeter scale to aid in positioning.
Warning When positioning the vertical column, observe moving assemblies to prevent
patient contact and ensure the safety of anyone near the C-Arm.
Caution When accessories are attached to the C-Arm, releasing the lateral or cephalad /
caudal tilt brake could cause the C-Arm to move.
Caution A possible pinch point exists between the C-Arm and the tip of the front cover. Do
not place your foot on the tip of the front cover while operating the vertical column
or while positioning the C-Arm.
Figure 3-64: Elevating or lowering the vertical column
To position the C-Arm vertically:

Press the vertical column extension or retraction switches located on top of the cross-arm
3-53
3. System operation
housing.
Figure 3-65: Motorized vertical column switches on the cross-arm housing
Figure 3-66: Motorized vertical column switches on the Touch Tableside device
Initialization takes approximately five seconds, after which lift motion is enabled. If the column
does not move after the system is turned on, wait approximately five seconds after releasing
the key and then press the key again. This wait should give the lift motor time to initialize. If the
column still does not move, check that the keyswitch is not in the System Standby position, a
fast stop switch is not engaged, or that a key is not stuck.
A 0.3 second delay is built into the up and down switch operations. If the vertical column
switches are pressed rapidly, the lift column may not move. If the column does not move after a
switch press, release the switch, wait a second, and then press the switch again to resume
movement.
Wig-wag motion and brake

The mechanical assemblies attached to the horizontal cross-arm can "Wig-wag," or move from
side-to-side. The total distance traveled from side-to-side depends on whether the horizontal
cross-arm is extended or retracted.
3-54
3. System operation
Figure 3-67: Wig-wag motion and distance traveled
Distance traveled (21 cm / 31 cm Super C-

Arms):
1. Extended position: 53.57 cm (21.09 in)
2. Retracted position: 46.13 cm (18.16 in)
Distance traveled (9 in Super C-Arms):

The Wig-wag brake on the Super C-Arm is a set of wing-like bars on either side of the vertical
column underneath the cross-arm housing. The Wig-wag brake can be loosened or tightened
using variable resistance, so the brake can be set to allow motion while avoiding drift.
To position the Wig-wag:
1. Release the Wig-wag brake by pulling the brake handles, located on the vertical column,
toward the back of the C-Arm loosen it.
2. Move the C-Arm into position.
3. Lock or tighten the Wig-wag brake by pushing the brake handles forward.
Figure 3-68: Wig-wag brake in the fully locked
3.6.2 Positioning the Standard C-Arm

The Standard C-Arm includes lateral rotation, cephalad / caudal tilt, horizontal and vertical
motion, and side-to-side Wig-wag motion, and adds SmartView rotation using the L-arm.

The Standard C-Arm can be rotated a total of 115° (25° overscan and 90° underscan). The
3-55
3. System operation
back of the C-Arm is marked with a scale to aid in positioning.

Figure 3-69: C-Arm lateral rotation
C-Arm.

1. Unlock the lateral rotation brake by turning either of the brake handles located on both
sides of the C-Arm support assembly to the unlocked position, indicated by an unlock
icon.
3. Lock the lateral rotation brake by turning the brake handle to the lock position, indicated
by a lock icon.
3-56
3. System operation
Figure 3-70: Lateral rotation brake in the unlocked position

This feature provides increased versatility in positioning the X-ray tube and image detector by
allowing them to tilt along the cephalic / caudal plane. The C-Arm pivots from 180° in each
direction.
To tilt the C-Arm:
1. Unlock the cephalad / caudal tilt brake and position the C-Arm in the desired position by
rotating the C-Arm around the pivot point.
2. When the C-Arm is in position, lock the brake.
The brake's locked and unlocked positions are indicated by lock and unlock icons. Turn the
brake handle to the unlock position to tilt the C-Arm.
want and then lock the brake.
3-57
3. System operation
Figure 3-72: Cephalad / caudal tilt brake

The horizontal cross-arm extends a maximum of 20 cm (8 inches).

3-58
3. System operation


3-59
3. System operation
housing.
movement.

side-to-side. The total distance traveled from side-to-side depends on whether the horizontal
cross-arm is extended or retracted.
3-60
3. System operation

Distance traveled (9 in Standard C-Arms):
Distance traveled (12 in Standard C-Arms):
1. Extended position: 52 cm (20.5 in)
2. Retracted position: 45 cm (17.7 in)
The Wig-wag brake on the Super C-Arm is a set of wing-like bars on either side of the vertical
column underneath the cross-arm housing. The Wig-wag brake can be loosened or tightened
using variable resistance, so the brake can be set to allow motion while avoiding drift.
Figure 3-79: Wig-wag brake in the fully locked
SmartView rotation
SmartView rotation moves the C-Arm in a gyroscopic motion. It simultaneously rotates and tilts
the C-Arm in up to three axes around the patient or table. By unlocking the L-Arm, cephalad /
caudal tilt, and lateral rotation brakes, the C-Arm can be moved around the patient in a 3-D
manner, achieving angles that normally would require movement of the entire C-Arm and some
angles that cannot be practically achieved in other ways. The L-arm joint is marked with a scale
to aid in positioning. The scale and brake are color-coded in gray.
The L-arm rotates 180° in either direction (for a total of 360°).
3-61
3. System operation
Figure 3-80: L-arm rotation
To position the L-arm:

1. Release the L-arm brake by moving the brake handle into the position identified by the
unlock icon.
2. Release the cephalad / caudal tile brake and the lateral rotation brake as described
previously in this chapter.
3. Grasp the two L-arm handles (top and bottom) and position the L-arm and the arc of the
C-Arm.
4. Lock all three positioning brakes by placing the brake handles in the position identified by
the lock icon.
Figure 3-81: L-arm brake
3.6.3 Positioning the Ergo C-Arm

The Ergo C-Arm includes lateral rotation, cephalad / caudal tilt, horizontal and vertical motion,
side-to-side Wig-wag motion, and SmartView rotation using the L-arm. The Ergo C-Arm also
allows more fine control over motion by including variably resistant brake knobs, and each
brake and its related scale labeling is color-coded.
3-62
3. System operation

Lateral rotation rotates the C-Arm around the patient or table for lateral shots. The back of the
C-Arm is marked with a scale to aid in positioning. The scale and brake are color-coded in blue.
The Ergo C-Arm can be rotated a minimum of 148° (53° overscan and 95° underscan). The
Ergo C-Arm includes an accessible rail that extends 5° past the end of the image detector,
allowing a greater degree of lateral rotation.
The lateral rotation brake can be loosened or tightened using variable resistance, so the brake
can be set to allow motion while avoiding drift.
Figure 3-82: Ergo C-Arm lateral rotation
C-Arm.

1. Release the lateral rotation brake by turning the brake handle, located on the C-Arm
spine, counterclockwise to loosen it.
3. Lock or tighten the lateral rotation brake by turning the brake handle clockwise.
3-63
3. System operation
Figure 3-83: Lateral rotation brake in the fully locked

Removable stop
Because the lateral rail allows the C-Arm to be rotated past 90°, a removable stop is provided.
Place the stop at 90° to prevent rotation past that point, or at any location to allow quick return
to a previous position.
To insert the removable stop:
1. Bend the stop at the hinge.
Figure 3-84: Removable stop bent at the hinge
2. Place the stop under the rails at an angle.
3-64
3. System operation
Figure 3-85: Removable stop placed at an angle under the rails
3. Turn the stop until it rests firmly under the rails, aligned at the desired degree marking,
and press down on the handle to straighten the stop at the hinge.
Figure 3-86: Removable stop in place and straightened at the hinge
If the stop is too loose or tight, use the recessed knob to adjust it.

Cephalad / caudal motion tilts the C-Arm at a pivot point on the horizontal cross-arm. This
provides increased versatility in positioning the X-ray tube and image detector by allowing them
to tilt along the cephalic / caudal plane. The tilt joint is marked with a scale to aid in positioning.
The scale and brake are color-coded in orange.
The C-Arm can pivot 180° in either direction.
The cephalad / caudal tilt brake can be loosened or tightened using variable resistance, so the
brake can be set to allow motion while avoiding drift.
3-65
3. System operation
To tilt the C-Arm:

1. Release the cephalad / caudal tilt brake by turning the brake handle, located at the top of
the L-arm, counterclockwise to loosen it.
2. Grasp the C-Arm handle and tilt the C-Arm to the desired position.
3. Lock or tighten the cephalad / caudal tilt brake brake by turning the brake handle
clockwise.
want and then tighten the brake.
Figure 3-88: Cephalad / caudal tilt brake in the fully locked


Horizontal motion moves the C-Arm horizontally across the table or patient from a point
underneath the cross-arm housing. The horizontal cross arm of the C-Arm is marked with a
centimeter scale to aid in positioning. The scale and brake are color-coded in green.
The horizontal cross-arm extends a maximum of 20 cm (8 inches).
3-66
3. System operation
The horizontal brake can be loosened or tightened using variable resistance, so the brake can
be set to allow motion while avoiding drift.



3-67
3. System operation

housing.
3-68
3. System operation
movement.

side-to-side. The base of the cross-arm housing is marked with a scale to aid in positioning.
The scale and brake are color-coded in yellow.
The total distance traveled from side-to-side depends on whether the horizontal cross-arm is
extended or retracted.
Distance traveled (21 cm / 31 cm Ergo C-

Arms):
The Wig-wag brake on the Ergo C-Arm is a set of wing-like bars on either side of the vertical
column underneath the cross-arm housing.
The Wig-wag brake can be loosened or tightened using variable resistance, so the brake can
be set to allow motion while avoiding drift.
3-69
3. System operation
Figure 3-95: Wig-wag brake in the fully locked position (left) and fully unlocked position (right)
SmartView rotation
SmartView rotation moves the C-Arm in a gyroscopic motion. It simultaneously rotates and tilts
the C-Arm in up to three axes around the patient or table. By unlocking the L-Arm, cephalad /
caudal tilt, and lateral rotation brakes, the C-Arm can be moved around the patient in a 3-D
manner, achieving angles that normally would require movement of the entire C-Arm and some
angles that cannot be practically achieved in other ways. The L-arm joint is marked with a scale
to aid in positioning. The scale and brake are color-coded in gray.
The L-arm rotates 180° in either direction (for a total of 360°).
The L-arm brake can be loosened or tightened using variable resistance, so the brake can be
set to allow motion while avoiding drift.
3-70
3. System operation
Figure 3-96: Example L-arm rotation
To position with SmartView:

1. Release the L-arm brake by turning the brake handle, located on the joint where the L-
arm meets the C-Arm, counterclockwise to loosen it.
2. Release the cephalad / caudal tilt brake and the lateral rotation brake as described
previously in this chapter.
3. Grasp the L-arm handle and position the L-arm and the arc of the C-Arm.
4. Lock or tighten all three positioning brakes by turning the brake handles clockwise.
Figure 3-97: L-arm brake in the fully locked position (left) and fully unlocked position (right)
3.6.4 Position a non-motorized C-Arm for CPR

See 3.7.10 Positioning a Motorized C-Arm for CPR on page 3-92 for how to position a
Motorized C-Arm for CPR.
To position a C-Arm away from the patient in the case of CPR or other emergency, follow these
steps:
3-71
3. System operation
1. Release the lateral and cephalad / caudal tilt brakes and rotate the C-Arm into its 0°
lateral and cephalad / caudal tilt position.
Figure 3-98: Rotate the C-Arm
2. Unlock the rear wheel brakes, move the system away from the patient, and then lock the
rear wheel brakes again.
Figure 3-99: Move the C-Arm away from the patient
3.7 Motorized C-Arm overview

This section describes the motorized C-Arm's parts and the basic setup and orientation of the
motorized C-Arm.
The system has motorized lateral rotation and cephalad / caudal tilt motion. The motorized C-
Arm has a range of motion similar to other C-Arms and includes a remote user interface (RUI)
for initiating and controlling motorized C-Arm movement. See 3.7.7 Positioning the Motorized
C-Arm beginning on page 3-83 for complete range-of-motion details.
3-72
3. System operation
Figure 3-100: C-Arm and Remote User Interface (RUI)
1. Contact Detection Assembly

2. RUI
3. RUI connector
3.7.1 Safety
Be sure that you are familiar with the safety information and procedures covered in Chapter 1,
Safety, in this manual. In addition to that information, you should be familiar with the safety
features specific to the motorized C-Arm system.
Note: The Remote User Interface is not watertight. It has limited protection from spray only.
Any fluid immersion of the RUI will cause damage to the system.
Warning Use great care when operating all motorized features. Although the system
detects and mitigates the effects of a collision, it is still possible for a moving
C-Arm to hit a person or object with enough force to cause injury or
equipment damage.
Warning Do not put anything around or near the joystick that could squeeze against
the safety switch and cause the joystick to be continuously enabled. When a
joystick is continuously enabled, any use can result in unintentional
movement of the C-Arm, causing injury or equipment damage.
Warning Make sure the cross-arm brake and the foot brake are both applied before
using any motorized movement feature. Failure to do so may cause
unintended movement across the floor, resulting in injury or equipment
damage. Unintended movement can also occur when you use a motion stop
switch or a fast stop switch with the brakes off.
3.7.2 Motorized C-Arm setup

Before you begin using the system you must connect the RUI or mini RUI on systems with a
Touch Tableside device to the system.
Note: Unless otherwise stated RUI refers to both the full RUI and the mini RUI found on the
motorized Touch Tableside device. See See 3.7.9 C-Arm position panel on page 3-88
for information on positioning the mini RUI.
3-73
3. System operation
Connect the Remote User Interface

The RUI controls motorized motion. Before you begin using the system you must plug the RUI
cable into the RUI port on the key switch panel as shown.
Figure 3-101: Plugging in the RUI
Mount the RUI

Note: This applies to the full RUI only. The mini RUI is mounted on its own stand, and does
not need to be mounted to a rail.
After you plug the RUI cable into the RUI port on the C-Arm, place the RUI near the patient
table. It is best to attach the RUI to the patient’s surgical table rail if possible. First make sure
the locking handle on the bottom of the RUI mounting bracket is unlocked. Then slide the RUI
onto the rail and use the locking handle to secure the RUI into place.
Figure 3-102: Attaching the RUI to a surgical table
Caution Make sure to mount the RUI in a spot where it will not interfere with the
movement of the C-Arm.
Orientation
Before you begin using the system with a patient you must orient the C-Arm and RUI to the
patient so that the motion controls on the RUI move the C-Arm as you expect.
3-74
3. System operation
Note: The OEC Touch / Touch Tableside includes a joystick that can move the C-Arm.
Because the control panel can be moved, the C-Arm uses the position setting of the
RUI as the point of view, regardless of the location and position of the touchscreen.
Warning Failure to orient the C-Arm and RUI with the table before using the joystick
could result in injury to the patient and/or operator and/or damage to the
system. Always update the orientation of the C-Arm and the RUI to the table
when they are moved to a different position.
The orientation buttons are located to the right of the RUI joystick.
Figure 3-103: Orientation buttons are to the right of the joystick
Use the following steps to orient the C-Arm. The steps described are for illustration only. C-Arm
and patient positions will vary for actual clinical procedures.
1. Imagine the patient lying face up on the table as shown in the following diagram. Position
the C-Arm gantry to the left of the patient with the image detector over the patient’s chest.
Figure 3-104: Typical clinical arrangement for motorized OEC Elite systems
1. C-Arm
2. Workstation
3. Table
4. Footswitch (varies)
5. RUI
Figure 3-105: C-Arm orientation button (top) and RUI orientation button (bottom)
3-75
3. System operation
2. Press the C-Arm orientation button (the top button) until the LED that matches the
position of the C-Arm with respect to the patient lights. In this case, this will be the top
LED.
3. Press the RUI orientation button (the bottom button) until the LED that matches the
position of the RUI with respect to the patient lights. In this case, this will be the bottom
LED.
4. Test the orientation by moving the joystick.
l Start with the image detector at the 0,0 position (vertical with no lateral rotation or
cephalad / caudal tilt). Squeeze the joystick and push it away from you. This should
cause the image detector to rotate away from you, and the angular display on the left
side of the main system monitor to read LAO with the angular values increasing. This
means the image detector is moving to the patient’s left. Stop the movement after the
C-Arm orbits a few degrees.
l Return the image detector to the 0,0 position. Squeeze the joystick and pull it toward
you. This should cause the image detector to rotate toward you, and the angular
display on the left side of the main system monitor to read RAO with the angular
values increasing. This means the image detector is moving toward the patient’s right.
Stop the movement after the C-Arm orbits a few degrees.
l Return the image detector to the 0,0 position. Squeeze the joystick and push it to your
left. This should cause the image detector to tilt to your left, and the angular display on
the left side of the main system monitor to read CRA with the angular values
increasing. This means the image detector is moving toward the patient’s head. Stop
the motion after the C-Arm rotates a few degrees.
l Return the image detector to the 0,0 position. Squeeze the joystick and push it to your
right. This should cause the C-Arm to tilt to your right, and the angular display on the
left side of the main system monitor to read CAU with the angular values increasing.
This means the image detector is moving toward the patient’s feet. After the C-Arm
rotates a few degrees, return the image detector to the 0,0 position.
Figure 3-106: Motorized C-Arm with image detector at the 0,0 position
1. C-Arm in 0,0 position showing

no lateral rotation
2. C-Arm in 0,0 position, showing
no cephalad caudal tilt
3-76
3. System operation
3.7.3 Remote user interface

The remote user interface (RUI) allows you to set up and control the Motorized C-Arm. You can
use the RUI to orient the system, perform all motorized C-Arm movements, and perform some
C-Arm and Workstation functions.
The RUI keys are arranged in groups. The vertical movement and orientation keys are on the
left side of the RUI near the joystick. C-Arm keys are in the center of the RUI. Workstation keys
are on the right side of the RUI.
Figure 3-107: The Remote User Interface (RUI)
1. Joystick (See
Joystick beginning
on page 3-80)
2. Motion stop switch
(See Motion stop
switch on page 3-78)
3. Lift column keys
(See Lift column
keys on page 3-80)
4. C-Arm orientation
and LED indicator
(See C-Arm Orientation beginning on page 3-80)
5. RUI orientation and LED indicator (See RUI Orientation beginning on page 3-80)
6. Rotate image (See Rotate image on page 3-3)
7. Reverse image and LED indicators (See Reverse image on page 3-4)
8. Field of View and LED indicators (See Field of View on page 3-4)
9. Save (See Save on page 3-7)
10. Swap (See Swap on page 3-8)
11. Mode (See Mode on page 3-4)
12. Collimator Leaf Rotation (See Collimator Leaf Rotation on page 3-5)
13. Collimator Iris Open / Close (See Collimator Iris Open / Close on page 3-5)
14. Collimator Leaf Open / Close (See Collimator Leaf Open / Close on page 3-5)
15. Brightness / Contrast (See Manual Brightness / Contrast beginning on page 3-9)
16. Auto Brightness / Contrast and LED indicator (See Auto Brightness / Contrast on page
3-8)
17. Pulse and LED indicator (See Pulse on page 3-5)
18. Low dose and LED indicator (See Low Dose on page 3-6)
3-77
3. System operation
19. Virtual control panel and C-Arm position panel (See 3.4.9 Virtual control panel
beginning on page 3-33 and 3.7.9 C-Arm position panel beginning on page 3-88.
20. Images (See Images beginning on page 3-81)
21. RUI arrows and enter key (See RUI arrows and Enter key beginning on page 3-81)
22. Alarm reset and LED indicator (See eAlarm Reset on page 3-7)
3.7.4 Buttons
The movement and orientation buttons on the RUI are unique to the motorized system. See 3.2
General system controls beginning on page 3-3 for information about the system buttons that
are duplicated on the RUI.
The motorized C-Arm has a fast stop button on the cross-arm housing and a motion stop button
on the Remote User Interface (RUI). Systems with an OEC Touch Tableside have an additional
motion stop switch on the mini RUI.
Function of the fast stop and motion stop switches is similar with one significant difference. Any
of the switches can be pressed to stop all motorized motion on the C-Arm. Pressing a fast stop
switch also disables all X-rays. Pressing a motion stop switch does not disable X-rays.
Fast stop switches

The system has a fast stop button on the cross-arm housing. Press the fast stop switch to
disable X-rays and, on motorized systems, all motorized C-Arm motion.
Figure 3-108: A fast stop switch is located on the cross-arm housing
Warning If pressing a fast stop switch fails to stop motor movement or X-rays, turn off
the system power switch or disconnect the power plug from the AC outlet.
Call for service.
To re-enable X-rays and motorized C-Arm motion, reset the fast stop switch by turning it to the
left and allowing it to pop up, and then restart the system.
Motion stop switch

Warning Pressing the motion stop switch on the RUI and mini RUI immediately stops
all C-Arm motion but does not disable X-rays. Press a fast stop switch on the
cross-arm housing to disable X-rays.
The RUI and mini RUI each have a motion stop switch located above the joystick. Pressing the
motion stop switch disables all motorized C-Arm motion controlled from the RUI but does NOT
3-78
3. System operation
disable X-rays.
Figure 3-109: The RUI motion stop switch is above the Orientation keys
Figure 3-110: The mini RUI motion stop switch
To re-enable motorized C-Arm motion, reset the motion stop switch by turning it and allowing it
to pop up. C-Arm motion is disabled until the motion stop switch is reset. If you receive a
MOTION STOP PRESSED message, check the state of the motion stop switch to make sure it
has been reset.
Note: When the C-Arm motion has been stopped using the motion stop switch, you can
manually move the C-Arm's lateral position. See 3.7.8 Manual movement beginning on
page 3-87 for more information on manual movement.
Joystick, lift column keys, and orientation keys

The joystick, lift column keys, and orientation keys on the RUI are unique to the motorized
system and are used to control the movement of the C-Arm.
Note: The Touch Tableside device includes a joystick as well. See 3.8.1 OEC Touch / Touch
Tableside C-Arm control panel beginning on page 3-93 for information on positioning
the C-Arm using the Touch / Tableside C-Arm control panel joystick.
Warning Do not wrap anything around the joystick that may simulate the operator
squeezing the joystick. Squeezing the joystick can cause the C-Arm to move
unexpectedly and injure the patient or operator or damage the C-Arm.
3-79
3. System operation
Joystick
The Joystick moves the C-Arm through lateral rotation and cephalad / caudal tilt
motion. When properly oriented, the image detector moves away or toward you
when you move the joystick forward or back. The image detector moves to your left
or right when you move the joystick in those directions. See 3.7 Motorized C-Arm
overview beginning on page 3-72 for information on orienting the C-Arm and RUI.
Note: The joystick has a safety switch that prevents the C-Arm from moving unless you
squeeze the joystick shaft as you move it. This safety feature ensures that the C-Arm
does not move unexpectedly should the joystick be moved accidentally.
Note: The C-Arm may coast or continue to move slightly after it is moved with the joystick.
This is normal.
Lift column keys

The lift column keys are used to move the C-Arm vertically. Press the top key to
move the C-Arm up and the bottom key to move the C-Arm down.
Warning Failure to orient the C-Arm and RUI to the patient prior to system use could
injure the patient or operator, or damage the equipment.
Orientation keys
The orientation keys are used to orient the C-Arm and RUI so that the image detector moves in
the expected direction when you use the joystick.
C-Arm Orientation
Press the C-Arm orientation key to select the correct image detector position in
relation to the patient, indicated by the LED.
RUI Orientation
Press the RUI orientation key to select the correct RUI position in relation to the
patient, indicated by the LED.
3.7.5 System function buttons

The RUI allows you to access some of the system functions to store and perform basic image
manipulation. See 3.4 System controls beginning on page 3-24 for a more detailed explanation
of the capabilities and function of each button.
3-80
3. System operation
System operation
The RUI allows access to some of the system functions for image storage and basic image
manipulation. See 3.4 System controls beginning on page 3-24 for a more detailed explanation
of the capabilities and function of each key,
Images
Press this key to display the Images screen. From this screen, you can review, print,
and archive stored images and dose information. See 8.1 Images beginning on
page 8-1 for more information.
Remote image processing
Press this key to display the virtual control panel and the C-Arm position panel.
See 3.4.9 Virtual control panel beginning on page 3-33 for information on using the
virtual control panel.
See 3.7.9 C-Arm position panel beginning on page 3-88 for information on using the
C-Arm position panel.
RUI arrows and Enter key
Use the arrow keys on the RUI to move the cursor on the main system monitor
between controls on the screen.
Moving the cursor to one of the tabs at the top of the screen select that tab and
opens the associated screen.
When you place the cursor on a touchscreen button, the button possesses the
focus and can be activated by pressing the Enter key found in the center of the RUI
arrows. When selecting items such as zoom boxes or markers, press the Enter key
and then use the arrow keys. To remove the focus after moving an object, press the
Enter key again.
Note: The RUI may be used to activate any touchscreen button.
3.7.6 Motorization status icons

Motorized systems only: A motorization status icon displays in the status bar on the left
side of the screen.
3-81
3. System operation
Figure 3-111: Motorization status icon
The motorization status icon also displays on the C-Arm position panel on the Touch /
Tableside C-Arm control panel.
Figure 3-112: Motorization status icon on the C-Arm position panel
The motorization status icon varies to indicate the availability of motorization. An icon with a
white arrow indicated that motion is enabled. An icon with a red X indicates that motion is
disabled. An icon with a yellow alert symbol indicates that motion is restricted by speed or
angle.
3-82
3. System operation
Figure 3-113: Motorization status icons

Motion enabled icon Motion disabled icon Motion restricted icon
3.7.7 Positioning the Motorized C-Arm

Motorized C-Arms are equipped with motors that position the C-Arm. Motorized lateral rotation
and cephalad / caudal tilt is controlled with the joystick on the RUI. Vertical movement is
controlled either by the lift column keys on the RUI or by the lift column keys on the cross-arm
housing. The C-Arm can be manually positioned by using the clutch handle to disengage the C-
Arm clutch and then moving the C-Arm laterally by hand.
Note: If a motorized lateral or cephalad / caudal tilt C-Arm movement occurs during imaging,
there may be an increase in image noise. This is because the system turns off
averaging during motorized movement.
C-Arm and RUI orientation

Make sure that the LEDs on the C-Arm and RUI orientation keys match the current orientation
of the C-Arm and the RUI with respect to the patient.
Test the orientation of the C-Arm and RUI before loading a patient by moving the joystick. The
image detector should move away from you when you push the joystick away from you. The
image detector movement from side to side should correspond to the movement of the joystick
from side to side.
Maximum C-Arm motorized rotational speed

Motorized C-Arms have a maximum motorized rotational speed of 9° per second.
Note: Clear any contact or collision condition and make sure all motorized features are
responding correctly to RUI motion controls before turning off or restarting the system.
Failure to do so causes the next system startup to bring the system up with all
motorized features disabled.
Contact detection
Caution Collisions can cause serious injury to patients and equipment. Always observe
C-Arm motion and be aware of the C-Arm position in relation to the patient to
avoid interruptions during procedures.
The C-Arm is equipped with a contact detection system that activates whenever the contact
detection bumper, mounted on the image detector, contacts another object.
3-83
3. System operation
Figure 3-114: Contact detection bumper
When the contact detection assembly encounters minimal resistance, motorized motion
(except for lift column motion) is partially disabled and a CONTACT DETECTED message
displays on the left side of the main system monitor. An audible alarm sounds. If the C-Arm was
contacted while moving, it can be backed away from the contacted object, but cannot be moved
toward the object. Clear the blockage to dismiss the message and fully re-enable motorized
motion.
Note: Before using the system, always test the contact detection assembly to make sure the
system stops properly upon contact. If the system does not stop properly, the assembly
should be removed or serviced immediately to prevent injury to the operator or patient.
Should a collision occur to another part of the C-Arm, the system detects the increased
resistance to movement and shuts down all motorized features. A COLLISION DETECTED
message displays on the left side of the main system monitor. Motion stops when the system
senses forces that exceed predefined internal limits. To re-enable motorized movement, clear
any blockage and move the C-Arm 3° back from the point of collision.
Additionally, the virtual joystick on the Touch / Tableside C-Arm control panel displays warning
icon in the direction of an uncleared contact, and a blue indicator showing the direction to move
the C-Arm to clear the problem. See 3.7.9 C-Arm position panel on page 3-88 for more
information.
Note: If contact is detected by the contact detection assembly when the joystick is not active,
(for example if the contact assembly is bumped when the C-Arm is not in motion) the
system limits motion speed to 3°/second when the joystick is activated and used to
move the C-Arm. Once the contact is cleared, normal motion speed is restored.
Note: Clear any contact or collision condition and make sure all motorized features are
responding correctly to RUI motion controls before turning off or restarting the system.
Failure to do so causes the next system startup to bring the system up with all
motorized features disabled.
Cephalad / caudal tilt

Caution Make sure the C-Arm and RUI are properly oriented before using the joystick for
motorized movement.
The C-Arm can tilt through a complete circle. The C-Arm can move 270° in one direction and
90° in the opposite direction, as shown in the following picture. Angular position and direction of
movement information displays on the left side of the main system monitor.
3-84
3. System operation
Use the joystick to tilt the C-Arm.

Figure 3-115: C-Arm cephalad / caudal tilt
Lateral movement
Caution Make sure the C-Arm and RUI are properly oriented before using joystick for
motorized movement.
Motorized C-Arms can be rotated laterally a total of 141° (53° overscan and 88° underscan).
Information about angular position and direction of movement displays on the left side of the
main system monitor.
Use the joystick to position the C-Arm laterally.
Note: When the lateral clutch is opened for manual movement, there is a slight increase in the
range of motion. See Manual lateral movement beginning on page 3-88 for more
information in the lateral clutch.
Figure 3-116: Motorized C-Arm with lateral movement
3-85
3. System operation

Warning Be especially careful when moving the C-Arm vertically. It is very easy to
collide with the patient table or objects under the table. The system has no
contact or collision detection capability for vertical movement.

housing.
3-86
3. System operation
movement.
3.7.8 Manual movement

You can manually move the C-Arm horizontally using the horizontal cross-arm handle. You can
manually rotate the C-Arm laterally by disengaging the lateral rotation clutch. Manual cephalad
/ caudal tilt rotation of the C-Arm is not possible without special tools.
Manual horizontal movement

Caution Make sure the cross-arm brake is fully engaged before using motorized
movement.
3-87
3. System operation

Manual lateral movement

To manually rotate the C-Arm laterally:
1. Push and hold the clutch handle toward the front of the C-Arm to disengage the clutch.
3. After the C-Arm is in the desired position, release the clutch handle to re-engage the
clutch and hold the C-Arm in place.
Figure 3-121: Operating the C-Arm lateral clutch
3.7.9 C-Arm position panel

Motorized systems only: An additional C-Arm position panel opens with the virtual control
3-88
3. System operation
panel or is accessed from the Touch / Tableside C-Arm control panel.

To open the C-Arm position panel, do one of the following:
Touch the virtual control panel / C-Arm position panel button on the RUI.
Touch the virtual control panel button on the main system monitor to open the C-Arm
position panel.
Touch the C-Arm position panel button on the Touch / Tableside C-Arm control panel.
Figure 3-122: C-Arm position panel
1. C-Arm position panel

2. Current C-Arm position display
3. Preset Position button (preset #1
indicated)
4. Preset angle (preset #1 indicated)
5. Preset Save button (preset #1
indicated)
6. Back (arrow) button
7. Angle of previous image
3-89
3. System operation
Figure 3-123: C-Arm position panel on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside

2. C-Arm orientation button
3. Control panel orientation button
4. C-Arm orientation display
5. Preset Position button (preset #1 indicated)
6. Preset Save button (preset #3 indicated)
9. Motorization status icon
10. Motion status message display
11. Virtual joystick
12. Joystick Lock button
13. Home (AP) position preset button
14. Full Underscan position preset button
15. Alarm Reset button
16. Technique display
By default, the preset positions are set to the 0,0 position, with no tilt or rotation.
Use this panel to set up to three C-Arm preset positions and to move the C-Arm into these
positions.
Note: The C-Arm moves to within 2° of the selected position.
During an X-ray imaging shot, if the C-Arm position panel is displayed, all other tabs are
disabled and cannot be selected.
To set a position preset

1. Move the C-Arm into the desired position using the joystick on the RUI or the Touch /
Tableside C-Arm control panel. If using the virtual joystick, slide the Joystick Lock button
to the right to unlock it. The virtual joystick remains unlocked for 30 seconds.
2. Use the RUI arrow keys to navigate to one of the Preset Save buttons on the C-Arm
position panel. If using the virtual joystick, touch and hold the arrows to move the C-Arm,
or tap the arrows to move the C-Arm a small amount for fine-tuning the position.
3. Press Enter on the RUI or touch and hold the Preset Save button for 1 second on the
Touch / Tableside C-Arm control panel for 1 second.
To move the C-Arm into a preset position

1. On the C-Arm position panel, use the RUI arrow keys to navigate to the numbered
Preset Position button that corresponds to the desired setting.
2. Press Enter on the RUI to select the preset position.
3. Press and hold the Enter key on the RUI.
4. When the C-Arm reaches the selected position, release the Enter key.
Motion stops if the Enter key is released before the C-Arm reaches the preset position. Press
and hold the Enter key on the RUI to continue moving the C-Arm into position.
Note: Hold the Enter key for 2 seconds to start motion.
3-90
3. System operation
To move the C-Arm into the previous image position

The last preset displays the position of the C-Arm for the previous image. This allows you to
take an image, move the C-Arm into a new position and take another image, and then return
the C-Arm to the position of the previous image.
Note: The position displayed is not of the LIH or last saved image, but of the previous image.
For example, if you have taken 4 images, the position displayed is that of image 3. The
images do not have to have been saved.
1. On the C-Arm position panel, use the RUI arrow keys to navigate to the Back (arrow)
button.
2. Press Enter on the RUI to select the preset position.
3. Press and hold the Enter key on the RUI.
4. When the C-Arm reaches the selected position, release the Enter key.
Technique display on the C-Arm position panel

The C-Arm position panel displays the technique when an X-ray image is taken.
To close the C-Arm position panel, touch the virtual control panel button shown in Figure 3-
37. See 3.4.9 Virtual control panel on page 3-33 for more information on the virtual control
panel.
To close the C-Arm position panel on the main system monitor, touch the virtual control panel
button.
Figure 3-124: Virtual control panel button
Collision or contact detected

If a collision or an uncleared contact is detected during motorized movement, the system
3-91
3. System operation
displays the C-Arm position panel on the OEC Touch / OEC Touch Tableside C-Arm control
panel, with a message in the status bar.The virtual joystick displays showing a warning icon in
the direction of the collision or uncleared contact, and a blue indicator showing the direction to
move the C-Arm to clear the problem.
Figure 3-125: C-Arm position panel showing the (1) warning and (2) the direction to move the
C-Arm to clear the problem.
3.7.10 Positioning a Motorized C-Arm for CPR

To position a Motorized C-Arm away from the patient in the case of CPR or other emergency,
follow these steps:
1. Using the joystick, rotate the C-Arm into its 0,0 position. If there is a loss of power for a
Motorized C-Arm, disengage the C-Arm lateral clutch by pushing it toward the front of the
C-Arm. While holding the clutch, rotate the C-Arm.
Figure 3-126: Rotate the C-Arm
3-92
3. System operation
2. Unlock the rear wheel brakes, move the system away from the patient, and then lock the
rear wheel brakes again.
Figure 3-127: Move the C-Arm away from the patient
3.8 C-Arm controls

This section describes the C-Arm operating controls. Before you begin imaging, familiarize
yourself with the following controls:
l OEC Touch / Touch Tableside C-Arm control panel
l Footswitch (See 5.4.5 Footswitch and handswitch beginning on page 5-10 information
on footswitches.)
l Handswitch (See 5.4.5 Footswitch and handswitch beginning on page 5-10 information
on the handswitch.)
Note: Older systems shipped with a C-Arm control panel integrated into the cross-arm
housing. This hardware is no longer available. If your system has an older C-Arm
control panel, refer to the original Operator Manual. Prior manuals are available online.
See Online eIFU beginning on page 3-2 for instructions on accessing manuals.
3.8.1 OEC Touch / Touch Tableside C-Arm control panel
Caution The OEC Touch / Touch Tableside monitor is for reference only. It is not meant to
be used for diagnosis.
Caution The OEC Touch / Touch Tableside includes a USB port that is used during
manufacture and is not intended for use by end users or service personnel. Do
not plug anything into this port, as it does not send signal to or from the system.
Do not remove the cover. Do not touch the USB port or the OEC Touch / Touch
Tableside and the patient at the same time.
3-93
3. System operation
Caution The OEC Touch / Touch Tableside tablet includes a non-functioning camera.
The camera is disabled, and cannot be used to take photos of video. Avoid
placing stickers or gummy paper over the camera, as this can affect touchscreen
functionality.
The OEC Touch / Touch Tableside allows you to:

l Open and close the collimators.
l Set the technique.
l Select the field of view.
l Reset the exposure alarm and timer.
l View and save the current image.
l Adjust and apply post-processing to images.
l Use the digital pen tool.
l Control Zoom fine adjustment.
l View the Images screen.
l Select and view images and cine runs, archive them, and send them to DICOM servers.
l View peak opacification, and apply and adjust masks and landmarks on cine runs.
l Control the C-Arm position (Motorized systems only)
l Select a profile, mode, X-ray switch setup, and pulse rates.
l Set up Cine recording and select frame rates.
l View the current technique, dose information, and C-Arm status.
l See system messages.
Figure 3-128: OEC Touch / Touch Tableside with Home button selected
3-94
3. System operation
1. Image display
2. Image processing bar - See Image processing on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside on
page 3-103 for details.
3. Home panel button
4. Images panel button - See Images screen on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside on
page 3-106 for details.
5. C-Arm position panel button - See C-Arm position panel on the OEC Touch / Touch
Tableside (Motorized systems only) on page 3-107 for details.
6. Context-sensitive area - use the buttons to the right to select profiles, mode setup, or
cine display.
7. Profiles button - See Profile selection on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside on page 3-
108 for details.
8. Mode button - See Mode selection on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside on page 3-109
for details.
9. Cine display button - See Cine record and frame rate selection on the OEC Touch /
Touch Tableside on page 3-110 for details.
10. Messages and technique display area - See Message, technique, and system status
display on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside on page 3-110 for details.
11. C-Arm status display area - See Message, technique, and system status display on the
OEC Touch / Touch Tableside on page 3-110 for details.
12. Image control and processing area - See Image control panel on the OEC Touch /
Touch Tableside on page 3-95 for details.
Caution The OEC Touch / Touch Tableside tablet includes a non-functioning camera.
The camera is disabled, and cannot be used to take photos of video. Avoid
placing stickers or gummy paper over the camera, as this can affect touchscreen
functionality.
Image control panel on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside

The image control panel provides image control functionality and control over some system
functions. Some of these controls appear in multiple locations on the system. See 3.2 General
system controls beginning on page 3-3 for a complete explanation of these tools and functions.
3-95
3. System operation
Figure 3-129: Image control panel on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside
1. Rotate image - See Rotate

image beginning on page 3-
3.
2. Reverse image - See
Reverse image beginning on
page 3-4.
3. Save - See Save beginning
on page 3-7.
4. Swap - See Swap
beginning on page 3-8.
5. Field of View - See Field of
View beginning on page 3-4.
6. Laser Aimer - See 9.2 Operating the Laser Aimer beginning on page 9-2.
7. Collimator Leaf Rotation - See Collimator Leaf Rotation beginning on page 3-5.
8. Collimator Iris Open / Close - (See Collimator Iris Open / Close beginning on page 3-5.
9. Collimator Leaf Open / Close - See Collimator Leaf Open / Close beginning on page 3-
5.
10. kVp - See kVp beginning on page 3-104.
11. mA - See mA beginning on page 3-104.
12. Pulse - See Pulse beginning on page 3-5.
13. HLF - See High Level Fluoro on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside beginning on page
3-105.
14. Alarm Reset - See eAlarm Reset beginning on page 3-7.
15. Auto Technique - See Auto Technique on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside beginning
on page 3-105.
16. Low Dose - See Low Dose beginning on page 3-6.
Fast stop switches

Call for service.
3-96
3. System operation
OEC Touch Tableside C-Arm control panel

The Touch Tableside C-Arm control panel is mounted on a stand-alone cart. It is intended to
provide user's at the table a direct, unobstructed view of images displayed on the left side of the
main system monitor and to provide additional functionality from the table.
The Touch Tableside C-Arm control panel does not allow for collimator control when the
system is producing X-rays, but its functionality is otherwise identical to that of the Touch C-
Arm control panel.
Figure 3-131: Touch Tableside device A: for non-motorized systems and B: with mini RUI for
motorized systems
Connection status icons

The Touch Tableside C-Arm control panel displays the following icons indicating the
connection status. These icons display in the status bar on the right side of the OEC Touch
Tableside (and OEC Touch) screen and in the status bar on the left side of the screen.
Then System Connected icon displays when a Touch Tableside device is connected to a
system.
Note that if a system is booted without a Touch Tableside device connected, the Disconnected
/ Unavailable icon does not display. It displays when a Touch Tableside has been connected
and then disconnected.
Figure 3-132: Connection status icons
System Disconnected /
Connected Unavailable
3-97
3. System operation
OEC Touch Tableside compatibility

Caution The OEC Touch Tableside device can only be used in conjunction with a
compatible C-Arm. OEC Elite C-Arms and OEC 3D Touch Tableside devices are
not compatible. Disconnect the incompatible Touch Tableside device
immediately to avoid system malfunction.
If an OEC 3D Touch Tableside device is plugged in to the OEC Elite C-Arm, an image similar to
the following displays on the Touch Tableside monitor.
Figure 3-133: C-Arm and Touch Tableside incompatibility display
If an incompatible Touch Tableside device is left connected to the C-Arm, the system will
malfunction. Disconnecting the incompatible Touch Tableside device will return the system to
normal functionality.
Positioning the Touch Tableside device
Caution Use the handle to position the Touch Tableside device. Pulling on other parts of
the device could damage it.
Caution Do not hang on, lean on, or load the Touch Tableside device. Doing so may
cause a tip hazard.
Caution Do not drape cables over the Touch Tableside device. Pulling a cable draped
over the device could cause it to move unexpectedly.
The Touch Tableside device is lightweight and rolls easily. Always set the four wheel brakes
once the cart is in position.
To set the wheel brakes, use your foot to press the front portion of the brake latch down until the
brake clicks. To release them, use your foot to press the back portion of the brake until the
brake clicks.
3-98
3. System operation
Figure 3-134: Touch Tableside device wheel brakes operation (A: Unlocked B: Locked)
The monitor tilts from approximately 40° to 70°. To adjust its position, grip either side of the
monitor and move to the desired position. If necessary, place a foot on the base to stabilize the
cart during adjustment.
Figure 3-135: Touch Tableside device monitor tilt
The entire Touch Tableside device can be positioned vertically from 37 to 43 inches, measured
at the handle using a hydraulic lift. To adjust the vertical position, lift up on the lift latch, slide the
Touch Tableside device to the desired height, then release the latch to lock it in place.
Figure 3-136: Touch Tableside device vertical latch operation
3-99
3. System operation
Figure 3-137: Touch Tableside device vertical positioning
OEC Touch Tableside on motorized systems

Warning Use great care when operating all motorized features. Although the system
detects and mitigates the effects of a collision, it is still possible for a moving
C-Arm to hit a person or object with enough force to cause injury or
equipment damage.
Caution Collisions can cause serious injury to patients and equipment. Always observe
C-Arm motion and be aware of the C-Arm position in relation to the patient to
avoid interruptions during procedures.
If a non-motorized OEC Touch Tableside device is connected to a motorized system that also
has an RUI connected, the C-Arm position panel button does not display. Additionally, when
any motorized motion actions are performed, an hourglass icon displays on the OEC Touch
Tableside C-Arm control panel.
Monitor swivel
The monitor on motorized systems swivels approximately 90° each to the left or right. To adjust
its position, grip either side of the monitor and move to the desired position. If necessary, place
a foot on the base to stabilize the cart during adjustment.
Figure 3-138: Touch Tableside device monitor swivel (Motorized systems only)
3-100
3. System operation
Mini RUI
Motorized systems include a mini RUI mounted on the Touch Tableside device. The mini RUI
includes a motion stop switch, a joystick, and lift column switches.
Warning Do not put anything around or near the joystick that could squeeze against
the safety switch and cause the joystick to be continuously enabled. When a
joystick is continuously enabled, any use can result in unintentional
movement of the C-Arm, causing injury or equipment damage.
Figure 3-139: Mini RUI
1. Motion stop switch

2. Joystick
3. Positioning latch
4. Lift column switches
5. Vertical latch
Use the mini RUI latch to position the controller left to right. The mini RUI can travel
approximately 2 inches from the center in either direction, but cannot be removed.
To adjust the mini RUI position, pull up on the latch, slide the mini RUI to the desired position,
and then push down firmly on the latch to lock the mini RUI in place.
If there is no RUI or mini RUI connected to a motorized system, the C-Arm position panel
button does not display.
Caution Make sure hands and fingers are clear when latching the mini RUI to avoid
pinching.
3-101
3. System operation
Figure 3-140: Mini RUI positioning latch operation
OEC Touch
The OEC Touch is mounted on the cross-arm housing. It is intended to provide the C-Arm
operator a direct, unobstructed view of images displayed on the left side of the main system
monitor and to provide additional functionality from the C-Arm. The monitor is classified as a
continuous operation system.
The screen swivels approximately 270° left or right, and tilts approximately 30° up, and
approximately 5° down. To adjust the screen position, grip either side of the monitor and move
to the desired position.
Caution Do not use the screen as a handle or place of leverage to move, manipulate, or
physically adjust the position of the C-Arm.
3-102
3. System operation
Image processing on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside

Image processing on the C-Arm control panel works similarly to image processing on the main
system monitor.
Figure 3-141: Image processing bar
1. Auto brightness and contrast - See 7. Negate - See Negate beginning

Auto Brightness / Contrast beginning on on page 3-11
page 3-8 8. Reset - See Reset beginning on
2. Brightness - See Manual Brightness / page 3-15
Contrast beginning on page 3-9 9. Annotations / Measurements
3. Contrast - See Manual Brightness / 10. Hide / Show Annotations
Contrast beginning on page 3-9 11. Digital Pen - See 7.6 Digital pen
4. Smart Metal - See Smart Metal tool beginning on page 7-14
beginning on page 3-10 12. Delete - See 7.6 Digital pen tool
5. Enhance - See Enhance beginning on beginning on page 7-14
page 3-14 13. Reference Image Swap - See
6. Noise reduction - See Noise Filter Subtraction procedure beginning
(Averaging) beginning on page 3-15 on page 5-33
14. Save - See Save beginning on
page 3-7
Rotating images on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside

Images can be rotated using the Rotate buttons. They can also be rotated using one finger.
Touch the circular Rotate icon, then drag the image to the correct angle.
Figure 3-142: Rotation on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside
1. Rotate
control
2. Rotation
angle
3. Rotate
buttons
3-103
3. System operation
Zoom fine control on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside

Images can be zoomed using the Zoom icon. Touch the icon, then drag the bar up to zoom in
or down to zoom out.
Figure 3-143: Zoom fine adjustment controls on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside
Technique control on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside

Note: In some cases, the C-Arm control panel may display a different technique than displays
on the LIH. When setting the technique manually, base any adjustments on the LIH
values, not the technique displayed on the C-Arm control panel.
kVp
Touch this button on the C-Arm control panel before or during exposure to
manually adjust kVp and override auto technique setting. Use the top portion of the
key to increase kVp or the bottom portion of the key to decrease kVp.
mA
Touch this button on the C-Arm control panel) or press this key before or during
exposure to manually adjust mA for fluoroscopy and override auto technique
setting. Use the top arrow to increase mA or the bottom arrow to decrease mA.
Note: Manual adjustments to mA before an HLF exposure are not applied and
the system will revert to its default settings. Adjustments made during an
HLF exposure will be applied to subsequent HLF exposures until the Auto
Technique key is pressed.
3-104
3. System operation
Auto Technique on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside

Touch this button on the C-Arm control panel to enable the system to produce an
optimum image by adjusting the technique (kVp and mA) automatically. Use Auto
Technique to avoid the need for manual adjustment to images. The icon on the
touchscreen C-Arm control panel is highlighted when Auto Technique is enabled.
Note: Standard Fluoro shots default to the Auto Technique values even when
Auto Technique is not highlighted, unless they have been manually
adjusted.
High Level Fluoro on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside

Touch this button on the C-Arm control panel to arm the HLF mode on systems
with HLF enabled. The icon is highlighted when HLF is armed.
In order to reduce unnecessary high level exposure to the user, High Level Fluoro
must be armed before taking HLF shots. There are two settings for arming HLF,
which are set up on the Image Acquisition screen:
l Default: Armed. HLF is armed by default, and touching HLF toggles
between armed and disarmed.
l Default: Disarmed. HLF is disarmed by default, and touching HLF toggles
between armed and disarmed.
Depending on local regulations, only one HLF shot may be allowed at a time, and
HLF must be armed before each HLF shot. This setting overrides the defaults
listed above.
3-105
3. System operation
Images screen on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside

The Images panel works similarly to the Images screen on the main system monitor. Images
can be viewed and selected to be sent to a DICOM server, portable media device, or printer.
See 8.1 Images beginning on page 8-1 for information on using Images screen functionality.
Figure 3-144: Images panel on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside
with a static image displayed
1. Selected image display

2. Selected image
3. RDSR thumbnail
4. Patient summary
thumbnail
5. Dose Summary
thumbnail
6. Select All button
7. Delete button
8. End Exam button
9. To location button
10. DICOM Print Layout
button
11. Send button
Cine runs on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside

Cine runs can be viewed and processed on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside. Select a cine
from the Images panel or touch the Cine Display button. See 6.2 Cine review beginning on
page 6-7 for information on reviewing and working with cine runs.
Figure 3-145: Images panel on the OEC Touch / Touch Tablesidewith a Cine run displayed
1. Cine playback controls

2. Roadmap mask button
3. Landmark button
4. View Subtracted button
5. Peak Opacity button
6. Set Mask button
7. Adjust Mask buttons
8. Reset Mask button
9. Set / Clear Cues button (1
of 2)
10. Mask frame indicator
11. Set / Clear Cues button (2
of 2)
3-106
3. System operation
Figure 3-146: Cine display panel on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside
C-Arm position panel on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside (Motorized systems only)
Use the C-Arm position panel to set up to three C-Arm preset positions and to move the
motorized C-Arm into these positions. See 3.7.9 C-Arm position panel beginning on page 3-88
for information on using the C-Arm position panel.
Figure 3-147: C-Arm position panel on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside

2. C-Arm orientation button
3. Control panel orientation button
4. C-Arm orientation display
5. Preset Position button (preset #1 indicated)
6. Preset Save button (preset #3 indicated)
9. Motorization status icon
10. Motion status message display
11. Virtual joystick
12. Joystick Lock button
13. Home (AP) position preset button
14. Full Underscan position preset button
15. Alarm Reset button
16. Technique display
During an X-ray imaging shot, if the C-Arm position panel is displayed, all other tabs are
disabled and cannot be selected.
3-107
3. System operation
Figure 3-148: Virtual joystick (Left: selected. Right: joystick moved to the right)
Use the virtual joystick to move the C-Arm position.

By default, the joystick is locked to prevent accidental movement. To use the joystick to move
the system:
1. Touch the Joystick Lock button with one finger and slide it to the right. The blue arrows
illuminate to indicate that the joystick is unlocked and active, as shown in the images
above. The virtual joystick remains unlocked for 30 seconds.
2. Using one finger, slide the joystick to any point in the 360° circle. Touch and hold the
arrows to move the C-Arm, or tap the arrows to move the C-Arm a small amount for fine-
tuning the position.
Profile selection on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside

Use the C-Arm control panel to select an anatomical profile for imaging. See 5.2 Anatomical
profile beginning on page 5-4 for information on using profiles and the profiles available for
imaging.
Figure 3-149: Profiles panel on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside
1. General profile button, selected

2. Unselected profile button (Orthopedic indicated)
3-108
3. System operation
Mode selection on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside

Use the C-Arm control panel to select imaging modes. See 5.1.1 Select modes beginning on
page 5-1 for information on setting up and using modes and the modes available for imaging.
The Mode button changes depending on the selected modes. When general ortho modes are
selected, the Mode button is dark gray, with white lettering and border. When vascular modes
are selected, the Mode button is light gray, with black lettering and an aqua blue border.
Figure 3-150: Mode button with general imaging modes selected (left) and with
vascular imaging modes selected (right)
Figure 3-151: Mode selection panel on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside
1. Record mode / frames per second menu for the left

imaging mode
2. Mode switch button
3. Record mode / frames per second menu for the right
imaging mode
4. Left X-ray switch mode - Fluoro selected
5. Right X-ray switch mode - HLF selected
Once a mode pair is selected, the panel displays the selected modes. The layout mimics the
footswitch layout, with the Mode button in the center occupying the same location as the Mode
switch on the footswitch. Use the Mode button to change between fluoroscopy and vascular
modes.
Figure 3-152: 2-pedal Mode display panel on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside
3-109
3. System operation
Figure 3-153: 3-pedal Mode display panel on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside
To change the pulse rate of a selected mode, touch and hold the Pulse button on the image
control panel. A menu displays next to the Pulse button. Select a pulse rate.
Figure 3-154: Pulse rate selection on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside
Cine record and frame rate selection on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside
Use the C-Arm control panel to select cine record options including frame rate. See 6.1 Cine
setup beginning on page 6-3 for information on setting up cine modes and selecting frame
rates.
Figure 3-155: 2-pedal Mode display panel with the cine setup options menu open
Touch the Record mode / frames per second button to select the frames per second or select
the --FPS-- to disable cine recording.
Message, technique, and system status display on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside
The C-Arm control panel displays relevant system messages, technique, and system status
information.
Figure 3-156: Message display on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside
3-110
3. System operation
Figure 3-157: Technique display and C-Arm status panel on the OEC Touch / Touch
Tableside
1. kVp
2. mA
3. Exposure time
4. Dose Area Product (DAP)
5. Cumulative Air Kerma (CAK)
6. Air Kerma Rate (AKR)
7. X-ray tube housing heat percentage
8. X-ray anode heat percentage
9. Anti-scatter grid icon
Volume and brightness control on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside

Use the C-Arm control panel to control the volume and OEC Touch / Touch Tableside C-Arm
control panel brightness.
To access the controls, use one finger to swipe down from the top of the left side of the OEC
Touch / Touch Tableside.
When the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside control panel volume is set to minimum, the beep
(alarm) sound level is 25% of the maximum volume. The beep (alarm) sound is not active on
the Tableside. The input response (click) volume cannot be changed, and sound cannot be
completely silenced.
Figure 3-158: Accessing the volume and brightness controls on the OEC Touch / Touch
Tableside
3-111
3. System operation
Figure 3-159: Volume control (1) and brightness control (2) on the OEC Touch / Touch
Tableside
Touch and drag the sliders to the right to increase the beep (alarm) volume and C-Arm control
panel brightness or to the left to decrease the volume and brightness.
Note: This does not control the system volume or main system monitor brightness. See 2.1.7
Set up touchpad and audio beginning on page 2-10 for information on controlling the
Workstation volume and brightness.
C-Arm control panel recovery

Occasionally, the system must restart the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside. This can take up to 3
seconds, and does not disrupt X-ray functionality on the system.
When this occurs, the C-Arm control panel screen briefly blanks, displays the GE logo screen,
and then displays the home screen.
3.8.2 C-Arm sleep mode

All OEC C-Arms use a “sleep mode” to extend the life of the C-Arm’s X-ray tube.
After 5 minutes of inactivity, the C-Arm enters sleep mode. High level X-rays (including HLF,
Subtract, Digital Spot, and Digital Cine) are blocked until a key is pressed, fluoro X-rays are
taken, or a high level X-ray is attempted.
After 30 minutes of inactivity, the C-Arm enters standby mode. A SYSTEM STANDBY
message displays. All X-rays are blocked until a key is pressed or an X-ray is attempted.
Touch the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside screen or press any key on the C-Arm control panel
to wake the C-Arm and make it ready for normal activity in 2 seconds.
3-112
4. Patient information and exams

4.1 Patient screen

Use the Patient screen to:
l Touch New Exam and enter patient information.
l Touch Edit and edit an existing patient's information.
l Touch Saved Exams... and select a saved exam containing images.
l Touch Scheduled Exams... and begin a scheduled exam.
l Touch Additional Info... and add procedure and protocol information.
l Touch Profile... and select a different imaging profile. See 5.2 Anatomical profile
beginning on page 5-4 for information on using Anatomical Profiles.
Note: For proper documentation of images, always enter patient information before beginning
a new exam. If a patient name is not entered, images will be saved under the default
name UNNAMEDXXX, where "XXX" is a system-assigned number. The prefix
"UNNAMED" can be modified on the Applications > Setup > Patient Information
screen. See Emergency Patient Information on page 2-9 for details on modifying this
setting.
The Patient screen displays automatically at system start-up.
4-1
Figure 4-1: Patient screen
Touch the Patient tab to display the Patient screen.

The available fields are defined in the Patient Information setup screen. Unavailable fields are
"ghosted" and cannot be selected. See 2.1 System Overview beginning on page 2-1.
A cursor and dotted outline indicate the active field. Use the Tab or Enter key, or touch the next
box to move the cursor to the next active box.
Touch Exit, begin imaging, or navigate to anther screen to lock the fields and continue. To edit
the fields, touch Edit on the Patient screen.
4.1.1 Select current patient

Before taking images, select a current patient record to receive the images in one of the
following ways.
l Touch New Exam and then enter the patient information on the Patient screen.
l Select an exam from the Patient > Saved Exams screen and touch Resume Exam.
l Select an exam from the Patient > Scheduled Exams screen and touch OK.
4.1.2 Enter patient information

Enter patient information immediately before a procedure.
On the Patient screen, touch New Exam and then enter the patient information as follows:
Patient Last Name
Enter the patient's surname.
4-2
Patient First Name

Enter the patient's given name.
M.I.
Enter the patient's middle initial.
Birthdate
Enter the patient's birth date.
Gender
Select the patient's gender. Select from Male, Female, or Other.
Patient ID
Select the patient's unique identification number.
Accession #
Enter the unique identifier for the exam that allows the system to link images. This may
be drawn from the internal medical information system.
Study ID
Enter the study identification number. This may be drawn from the internal medical
information system.
Physician Last Name
Enter the physician's surname.
Physician First Name
Enter the physician's given name.
Procedure Code
Enter a procedure code for the performed procedure. This can be ICD, ICPM, or similar
codes.
Designator
Enter the code scheme used or the procedure code, such as ICD.
Procedure Description
Enter a brief description of the planned procedure.
Note: This data may also display in the Protocol Description and Procedure Step
Description fields of the Patient > Additional Information screen for images
retrieved from a portable media device or a Query/Retrieve or Store Server, if
the images do not contain Protocol Code Meaning data.
Comments
Enter any additional comments or relevant information.
Note that editing this field during an exam modifies the information stored with all exist-
ing and subsequent images for that patient exam.
Requested Contrast Agent
Displays details about the specific contrast agent to be used, if applicable. This content
is pulled from a RIS Query Retrieve and is not editable.
4-3
Pregnancy Status
Displays the patient's pregnancy status, if applicable. This content is pulled from a RIS
Query Retrieve and is not editable.
When complete, do one of the following:
l Begin taking images. The Patient screen closes automatically and the Reference
screen displays. The patient just entered becomes the current patient.
l Touch Exit. The patient just entered becomes the current patient, the Patient screen
closes, and the Reference screen displays. The system is ready to begin taking X-rays.
l Touch New Exam. The patient information just entered is saved in the scheduled exams
list and the Patient screen fields clear to allow another patient to be entered.
Note: C-Arm settings are not retained with the exam information. Each time New Exam or
Scheduled Exams is selected, if the Home setting is selected on the Applications >
Setup > Position Defaults screen, the collimator leaves and iris on the C-Arm adjust to
a full open position, and the C-Arm settings, such as the fluoro timer, brightness /
contrast, noise filtering, and mode settings, all return to the system's default settings.
When returning to re-image the patient, any parameters used for that patient may need
to be specified again.
4.1.3 Additional information

Use the Additional Information screen to enter additional procedure and protocol information.
On the Patient screen, touch Additional Info....
Figure 4-2: Additional Info... button on the Patient screen
A screen similar to the following displays.
4-4
Figure 4-3: Additional Information screen
Requested Procedure Step

Displays the requested procedure step from a scheduling server, if applicable.
Protocol
Code
Enter a protocol code, up to 16 characters. Codes for completed and abandoned
exams cannot be edited or added.
If the exam was created from a scheduling server, this displays the protocol code from
the scheduling server, and is not editable.
Description
Enter a protocol description, up to 64 characters. Descriptions for completed and aban-
doned exams cannot be edited or added.
If the exam was created from a scheduling server, this displays the protocol description
from the scheduling server, and is not editable.
If a retrieved image does not contain Protocol Code Meaning data, this displays the
procedure description from the scheduling server, and is not editable.
Procedure Step
ID
Enter a procedure ID, up to 16 characters. IDs for completed and abandoned exams
cannot be edited or added.
If the exam was created from a scheduling server, this displays the procedure ID from
the scheduling server, and is not editable.
4-5
Description
Enter a procedure description, up to 64 characters. Descriptions for completed and
abandoned exams cannot be edited or added.
If the exam was created from a scheduling server or if a retrieved image does not con-
tain Protocol Code Meaning data, this displays the procedure description from the
scheduling server, and is not editable.
Procedure Information
The procedure information is based on DICOM standards.
If the information is not entered correctly for a procedure, these default values are used. In this
case, the information printed on the patient summary and dose summary and included in the
Radiation Dose Structured Report (RDSR) may not match the procedure actually performed,
and the patient record may therefore not provide accurate information about the exam.
Anatomic Region
Select the anatomic region imaged during the exam. The default is Topography
Unknown.
Patient Orientation
Select the patient's orientation during the exam. The default is Recumbent.
Orientation Modifier
Select the patient's orientation modifier during the exam. The default is Supine.
Patient/Table Relationship
Select the patient / table relationship during the exam. The default is Headfirst.
Procedure Intent
Select the intent or purpose for the exam, based on the context of invocation. The
default is Therapeutic Intent.
MPPS Server Alias
Displays the server alias if the exam was created from a scheduling server.
Age
Displays the patient's age.
Weight
Displays the patient's weight, if available from a scheduling server.
Height
Displays the patient's height, if available from a scheduling server.
4.1.4 Edit patient information

Touch the Edit button on the Patient screen to edit the displayed patient's information.
4-6
Figure 4-4: Edit button on the Patient screen
Note: Editing general patient information modifies information stored with all images for that
patient exam. Editing the Comment field during an exam changes the information on
the new image and any subsequent images. Comments information for previous
images stays the same.
Note: The Comment line is always active and does not require this procedure to edit.
1. Touch Edit.
2. Touch the patient field to be edited.
3. Edit information as needed.
4. Touch Exit to save changes and return to the Reference screen.
Note: To edit patient information on a previously saved record in the scheduled exams or
saved exams lists, recall the exam and follow the instructions for editing information.
To edit comments:
1. Touch the Patient tab to open the Patient screen.
2. Touch the Comment field.
3. Enter new information.
4. Touch Exit to save changes and return to the Reference screen.
The comment displayed in the upper-left side of the left side of the main system monitor display
updates for the current image and subsequent images. Use the Comment function in
Annotations to add post-processing comments to an image.
4-7
4.2 Scheduled exams

Use the scheduled exams feature to enter patient information prior to exams and retrieve it at
the beginning of the procedure.
Up to 100 patients can be entered in the scheduled exams list for 48 hours, and up to 500
patients can be downloaded from an external server or device. If X-rays are not taken within 48
hours, the record is deleted. Once an X-ray image has been saved, the patient record is moved
to the saved exams list.
4.2.1 Set up scheduled exams

Note: See 10. DICOM setup and configuration beginning on page 10-1 on how to update the
work list from the hospital network.
1. Enter the necessary information on the Patient screen.

2. Touch New Exam to send the information to the Scheduled Exams screen. An empty
Patient screen displays.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each patient exam to be scheduled. X-rays for each patient
must be taken within 48 hours.
4. When completed, touch New Exam to send the last patient information entered to the
scheduled exams list, or Exit to begin imaging that patient.
Note: If exams are scheduled during or prior to an exam, select the correct current patient to
be imaged before continuing exam.
4-8
4.2.2 Select a patient from Scheduled Exams

1. On the Patient screen, touch Scheduled Exams....
Figure 4-5: Scheduled Exams...button on the Patient screen

Figure 4-6: Scheduled Exams screen
4-9
The Scheduled Exams screen displays a list of scheduled patients. If the list is longer
than can be displayed in a single screen, use the arrow keys on the keyboard or the
Page Up / Page Down arrows on the screen to page through the list. Use Search By,
Search For, Sort By, and Sort Order to find specific scheduled exams. Search and sort
can be used together, or individually. The list updates automatically as the search and
sort criteria change.
l To search, select a Search By criterion, from Patient Name, Patient ID, Physician
Name, Procedure Description, or Accession Number, and then enter a few letters or
numbers to search for. The list updates automatically as the search results narrow.
l To sort, select a Sort By criterion, from Patient Name, Patient ID, Exam Date Time,
or Physician Name, and then select a sort strategy, Ascending (from A to Z, or from
earliest to most recent) or Descending (from Z to A, or from most recent to earliest).
2. Select a check box next to a patient's name to select the associated patient.
3. Touch OK to close the Scheduled Exams screen and display the Patient screen for the
selected patient.
Begin imaging once these steps are complete.
Note: Ensure that the correct patient name displays on the Patient screen before producing
X-rays; otherwise, images may be stored under an incorrect patient’s name.
Delete scheduled exams

Manually entered scheduled exams can be deleted. Select the exam and then touch Delete.
4.2.3 Update schedule and schedule filters

Use the Update Schedule and Schedule Filter... buttons on the Scheduled Exams screen to
retrieve patient records from a DICOM work list query server. If the system is not connected to
a DICOM network or if DICOM servers are not defined on the system, the Update Schedule
and Schedule Filter... buttons cannot be selected.
Before using the update schedule function, select a Server Alias for a defined DICOM server.
See 10. DICOM setup and configuration beginning on page 10-1.
1. Touch Update Schedule to retrieve patient records from the DICOM server defined for
the system. This operation may take some time, depending on the number of records
available on the DICOM server and the speed of the network.
2. Select a study date, from None, Get today's scheduled exams, Get today-tomorrow,
Get last seven days, or Get specific start to today. If the last item is selected, enter a
specific start date in the date field.
3. The update schedule operation can retrieve up to 500 records. Use the schedule filter
function to limit the number of records displayed. Touch Schedule Filter... to display the
Patient > Scheduled Exams > Schedule Filter screen.
4-10
Figure 4-7: Schedule Filter screen
4. Enter information into the Schedule Filter screen to search for patient records that meet
the filter criteria. Once entered, these search terms remain until a new exam is begun.
Search on any combination of fields, including Patient Last Name, Patient First Name,
Patient ID, Procedure ID, Accession #, Physician Last Name, and Physician First
Name.
Some servers support wildcards. If so, use * for a general search of a name, such as
Jones*. Check the server's DICOM Conformance Sheet for more information.
Touch Clear Fields to remove all search terms and start over.
5. In addition, the system can also search exams on DICOM servers. Once entered, these
search terms remain until they are changed by the user.
Select Include AE Title and Include Local Station Name to search for exams on a
selected configured DICOM server.
Select an imaging type from modality options: RF (X-ray Radio Fluoroscopic Image
Storage), XA (X-ray Angiographic Image Storage), SC (Secondary Capture Image
Storage), or ALL (to search all types).
Note: No error checking is done for date or time values, so results from the server will vary if
these values are entered in a different format or are incorrectly entered.
6. Touch OK. The Schedule Filter screen closes, a DICOM Search in Progress...
message displays, and then Scheduled Exams screen displays. To exit to the
Scheduled Exams screen without filtering, touch Cancel.
4-11
7. Touch Update Schedule and the patient names, filtered according to the criteria entered
in the filter screen, display.
8. Select a patient from the list.
9. Touch OK to return to the Patient screen. The selected patient is the current patient.
The system is now ready to take X-rays.
Note: Always ensure the correct patient name displays on the Patient screen before
producing X-rays, or images may be stored under an incorrect patient’s name.
Note: Each time New Exam or Scheduled Exams is selected, the C-Arm settings, fluoro
timer, brightness / contrast, noise filtering and mode settings return to the system's
default settings.
C-Arm settings are not displayed with the exam information. When a new current
patient is selected, imaging parameters are reset to the system default values. When
returning to re-image the patient, any parameters used for that patient need to be
specified again. See 2. System setup beginning on page 2-1 for any settings that can
be selected by default.
4.2.4 Append step procedure

The system provides support for facilities that choose to use the IHE (Integrating the
Healthcare Enterprise) DICOM Scheduled Workflow standard. This functionality allows you to
append multiple scheduled steps into a single procedure and to communicate with a
scheduling MPPS server.
When multiple steps are available in the Scheduled Exams screen, follow this procedure to
combine them into a single procedure and to correctly communicate the procedure status to the
MPPS server.
1. On the Scheduled Exams screen, touch Update Schedule if necessary to display the
scheduled exam steps.
2. Select the first exam step. The Patient screen displays, populated with the patient
information from the scheduled exam.
3. Take an X-ray shot to begin the procedure. The system notifies the MPPS server that the
procedure is in progress. Complete the exam step, taking as many X-rays as needed.
4. To append the next exam step, touch Patient and then touch Additional Info.... The
Additional Information screen displays.
4-12
Figure 4-8: The Additional Information Screen screen
5. Touch Append. If there is at least one exam step left, Append Step screen displays.
Otherwise, the Procedure Step fields become editable. Additional exam steps can be
manually appended to the procedure.
Figure 4-9: The Append Step Screen screen
4-13
6. Select the next exam step from the list, and then touch OK.
7. Complete the exam step, taking as many X-rays as needed.
8. Repeat steps 4-7 for each exam step.
9. When the entire procedure is complete, touch End Exam on the Images tab. The End
Exam screen displays.
10. Select Complete Exam. The system sends information for the procedure to the MPPS
server and notifies the MPPS server that the procedure is complete.
Figure 4-10: The End Exam Screen screen
When multiple exam steps exist for a manually created patient record, follow this procedure to
combine them into a single procedure and to correctly communicate the procedure status to the
MPPS server.
1. On the Patient screen, touch New Exam and enter patient information into appropriate
fields.
2. Take an X-ray shot to begin the procedure. The system notifies the MPPS server that the
procedure is in progress. Complete the exam step, taking as many X-rays as needed.
3. To append the next exam step, touch Patient and then touch Additional Info.... The
Additional Information screen displays.
4. Touch Append. The ID and Description fields under Procedure Step become editable.
5. Enter the Procedure Step ID and Description information. Then Press OK.
6. Complete the exam step, taking as many X-rays as needed.
7. Repeat steps 4-6 for each exam step.
4-14
8. When the entire procedure is complete, touch End Exam on the Images tab. The End
Exam screen displays.
9. Select Complete Exam. The system sends information for the procedure to the MPPS
server and notifies the MPPS server that the procedure is complete.
4.3 Saved exams

Use the Saved Exams screen to view images and information from a saved patient exam. It
contains a list of previously saved exams. Exams are moved to the saved exams list
automatically when images are created. If no images were taken during an exam, the system
will not save the exam, and the patient remains in the scheduled exams list. If no images were
saved during an exam, the system moves the exam to the saved exams list, and displays the
patient and dose information on the Images screen. If a last name was not entered for the
patient before X-rays were produced, images are stored under the last name "UNNAMED."
4.3.1 Access saved exams

Access the system saved exams list
Caution Any new images taken will be added to the current patient selected from the
Patient screen.
1. Touch the Patient tab to display the Patient screen.

2. Touch Saved Exams... to display the Saved Exams screen.
Figure 4-11: Saved Exams screen
4-15
This screen lists patient exams that have been saved on the system. The current or
reviewing exam always displays at the top of the list.
If the list is longer than can be displayed in a single screen, use the arrow keys on the
keyboard or the Page Up / Page Down arrows on the screen to page through the list.
3. Select an exam from the list.
This screen offers a number of options. Depending on the current state of a selected
exam, some buttons will be unavailable. Possible states are Current, Reviewing,
Paused, Completed, and Abandoned.
l Resume the selected current, paused, or reviewing exam. To continue the exam and
add more images, touch Resume Exam. The Patient screen for this patient displays.
This patient becomes the current patient. Completed and abandoned exams cannot
be resumed.
l Review the selected exam. To display the images from the selected exam, touch
View Exam. The Images screen displays, with the patient information and images
associated with the selected patient.
Exams being reviewed display with the notation REVIEWING and a gray banner
displays on the top of the left image region to indicate the system is in reviewing
mode.
l Create a new exam for the selected patient. To start a new exam for the selected
patient, touch New Exam. The Patient screen for this patient displays. This patient
becomes the current patient, and the patient information is automatically populated
allowing for shorter setup time.
l Complete the selected exam. Multiple exams can be completed at once. To end the
selected exam, touch Complete. A COMPLETE SELECTED EXAM(S)? message
displays. Once an exam is completed, no images can be added. The Saved Exams
screen displays.
If an MPPS server is in use, completing an exam sends information to the MPPS
server. See 4.2.4 Append step procedure on page 4-12 for more information.
Completed exams display with the notation, COMPLETED. From here, view or delete
the exam, or begin a new exam for this patient, or touch Close to return to the Patient
screen for the current patient.
l Abandon the selected exam. Multiple exams can be abandoned at once. To end an
exam without saving it, touch Abandon. An Abandon Exam dialogue box displays.
Select a reason for abandoning the exam, and then touch Abandon. An ABANDON
SELECTED EXAM WITH SELECTED ABANDON CODE? message displays. To
abandon the exam, touch OK. To return to the Saved Exams screen without
abandoning the exam, touch Cancel. Once an exam is abandoned, no images can be
added. The Saved Exams screen displays.
If an MPPS server is in use, abandoning an exam sends information to the MPPS
server. See 4.2.4 Append step procedure on page 4-12 for more information.
Abandoned exams display with the notation, ABANDONED. From here, view or
4-16
delete the exam, or begin a new exam for this patient, or touch Close to return to the
Patient screen for the current patient.
Abandon reasons include:
l Change of procedure for correct charging
l Discontinued Prosedure Step rescheduled
l Discontinued Prosedure Step rescheduling recommended
l Discontinued for unspecified reason
l Doctor canceled procedure
l Duplicate order
l Equipment change
l Equipment failure
l Incorrect procedure ordered
l Incorrect side ordered
l Incorrect worklist entry selected
l Injection Site Extravasation
l Nursing unit canceled
l Patient allergic to media/contrast
l Patient condition prevented continuing
l Patient did not arrive
l Patient expired
l Patient pregnant
l Patient refused to continue procedure
l Patent taken for treatment or surgery
l Radiopharmaceutical Adverse Reaction
l Resource inadequate
l Resource pre-empted
l Workitem assignment rejected by assigned resource
l Delete an exam. To delete a completed, abandoned, and retrieved exam, select the
exam and touch Delete. Multiple exams can be deleted at once. A DELETE
SELECTED EXAM(S)? message displays. If the exam has images attached to it, a
DELETE EXAMS CONTAINING IMAGES QUEUED TO BE SAVED TO PACS?
message displays. Deleted exams and their images cannot be recovered or archived.
Touch Close to exit the Saved Exams screen. The Patient screen displays, with the current
patient's information.
Access previous exams on the system for the current patient

1. Touch the Images tab to display the Images screen.
2. Touch Previous Exams in the top right corner of the screen.
4-17
Figure 4-12: Previous Exams button on the Images screen
The Images > Previous Exams screen displays.

Figure 4-13: Previous Exams screen
This screen lists any previous exams on the system for the current patient ID. If the list is
longer than can be displayed in a single screen, use the arrow keys on the keyboard or
the Page Up / Page Down arrows on the screen to page through the list. Sort the exams
by Exam Date, Patient Name, Patient ID, Physician Name, or Modality, and select a
4-18
sort order, either Ascending or Descending.

3. Select one or more exams to add them to the list of Available Exams for review on the
Images screen.
Retrieve previous exams for the current patient

2. Touch Previous Exams in the top right corner of the screen. The Previous Exams
screen displays.
3. Touch Retrieve. The Images > Retrieve screen displays.
Figure 4-14: Retrieve screen for retrieving from a DICOM server
4-19
Figure 4-15: Retrieve screen for copying from a portable media device
4. The Retrieve screen displays with Source list of possible locations to retrieve from
(including any Worklist server or portable media device mounted on the system) as well
as the Patient Last Name, Patient First Name, and Patient ID for the current patient.
Change any of the search terms, as needed, and select a Study Date, from All, Today,
Since Yesterday, Last 3 Days, Last 7 Days, or Last 30 Days.
Touch Clear Fields to remove all the text entries and search for a different patient. The
Study Date reverts to Last 3 Days when the fields are cleared.
Touch Query to search for matching exams on the server or portable media device. The
bottom of the screen displays an alphabetical list of matching exams. If the list is longer
than can be displayed in a single screen, use the arrow keys on the keyboard or the
Page Up / Page Down arrows on the screen to page through the list.
Touch MWL Studies to retrieve the current exam if it originated from a Modality Worklist
entry and has a referenced study ID number. This button is unavailable if the current
exam did not originate from a Modality Worklist entry.
Use Sort By to sort exams by Patient Name, Patient ID, Date, or Modality, and Sort
Order to arrange the records in Ascending or Descending order.
5. Select exams to copy and do one of the following:
l Touch Retrieve to copy the records from the selected DICOM source to the system.
This button is only available when the source is a DICOM server.
l Touch Copy to copy the records from the selected portable media device to the
system. This button only displays when the source is a portable media device.
4-20
l Touch Close to cancel the retrieve operation and return to the Previous Exams
screen.
Note: If any problems occur during import from or export to a portable media device, use an
external check to ensure that the read and write functionality of the portable media
device is working properly, that the device has sufficient storage available, and that it
contains the expected data.
Reconcile exams copied from a portable media device

If a patient copied from a portable media device does not already exist on the system, the
patient must be reconciled to keep the content orderly. When this occurs, the Images > USB
Retrieve > Reconcile Patient screen displays.
Figure 4-16: Reconcile Patient screen
Reconcile the records:

1. Select a reconcile option:
l Current Patient to reconcile the retrieved patient with the current patient on the
system. This option is disabled if there is no current patient selected on the system.
l New Patient to create a new patient on the system with the retrieved record.
l System Patient List to reconcile the images with a patient on the system with the
same last name and birth date.
2. Touch OK and follow any message instructions.
4-21
4.4 Service exam

The service exam stores data and images created during service functions performed by
trained service personnel. It is named the “Service Visit” in the list of saved exams.
4-22
5. Imaging
5. Imaging
This chapter describes how to produce images using the basic fluoroscopy features provided
on all systems and how to produce images using vascular imaging modes provided on
Vascular and Cardiac systems.
5.1 Modes of operation

OEC systems employ a variety of modes of operation for maximum flexibility in a number of
imaging procedures. This section contains information on the various modes of operation and
technical information, as well as specifics on using the various modes.
5.1.1 Select modes

All fluoro modes can be engaged, disengaged, and modified with the Mode keys on the C-Arm
control panel, handswitches, and footswitches, and on the Remote User Interface on Motorized
C-Arms. See 3.5 C-Arm overview beginning on page 3-36 for locations of the Mode switch on
the system being used.
Use the Reference > Mode screen on the right side of the main system monitor to select
modes or assign functions to the footswitch and handswitch. To access this screen, touch
Mode... on the Reference screen, or touch a mode icon in the status bar.
The active modes display in the right side of the status bar, at the bottom of the monitor.
Note: When switching to or from a mode pair that includes Digital Cine mode, wait 1200ms to
allow the filament to heat up before taking a shot. Pressing an X-ray switch too soon
after switching will cause a dumb beep to sound, and no shot will be taken.
5.1.2 Mode pairs

A mode pair can be selected from each imaging group.
Only one mode pair is active at a time. The active mode pair displays in the right side of the
status bar.
Continuous X-ray is the default. See 5.7.6 Pulsed X-ray mode beginning on page 5-23 for more
information on enabling and setting pulse rates. See 5.9 Digital Cine Pulse mode on Vascular
or Cardiac systems beginning on page 5-41 for more information on setting pulse rates for
Digital Cine Pulse mode.
5.1.3 X-ray mode setup

To change the active mode, select the desired button on the Mode screen. To access this
screen, touch Mode... on the Reference screen, or touch a mode icon in the status bar. The
5-1
5. Imaging
highlighted bar displays next to the selected button and the status bar reflects the change.
l The left X-ray switch can be set for Fluoro or for Roadmap modes.
l The right X-ray switch can be set for HLF, Digital Spot, Digital Cine Pulse, or
Subtract modes.
l Cardiac systems only: The far-right X-ray switch can be set for Digital Cine Pulse
mode
Additionally, the pulse rate and the digital cine pulse rate can be set.
The active modes and related settings display in the status bar on the right side of the screen.
The Mode screen is similar to the following.
Figure 5-1: Mode screen with Vascular / Cardiac modes selected
1. Standard
fluoroscopy modes
2. Vascular / Cardiac
modes
3. Status bar
Status bar
The status bar is located at the bottom of the monitor. During an exam, the configured active
mode pair displays in the right side of the status bar.
The status bar shows the setting of the footswitch, handswitch, and X-ray switch buttons. See
Footswitches and modes beginning on page 5-54 in this section for more information.
The active modes display in the right side of the status bar, similar to these:
5-2
5. Imaging
Figure 5-2: Example status bar for a two-pedal footswitch setup
Figure 5-3: Example status bar for a three-pedal footswitch setup
All information next to the or icon describes which imaging, anatomical profile, and
pulse or cine rate is applied using the X-ray switch with that label.
With these modes active:
l Initiate a fluoro shot by pressing the left X-ray switch.
l Initiate an HLF shot by pressing the right X-ray switch.
l On a three-pedal system, initiate a 30 PPS digital cine shot by pressing the far-right
switch.
5.1.4 Changing imaging modes during an exam

In this example, a basic fluoro image and a roadmap need to be taken.
1. Touch Mode... on the Reference screen or touch a mode icon in the status bar.
The default setting for standard fluoroscopy is Fluoro/HLF.
If the highlighted center bar displays next to HLF, the active fluoroscopy pair is
Fluoro/HLF.
If the highlighted bar is next to Digital Spot or Digital Cine Pulse, touch HLF to activate
HLF in the standard fluoroscopy group.
Figure 5-4: Mode pairs on Mode screen, with Fluoro and HLF modes selected
1. Standard fluoroscopy
mode pairs
2. Vascular mode pairs
The default setting for vascular is Fluoro/Subtract. Touch Roadmap to switch to

Roadmap/Subtract and move the highlighted center bar next to Roadmap.
2. Touch Exit to close the Mode screen and begin imaging.
3. Verify that the available modes display in the status bar. If the vascular mode pair
(Roadmap/Subtract) displays, press the Mode switch to display the fluoroscopy pair
(Fluoro/HLF).
5-3
5. Imaging
Figure 5-5: Mode pair status bar with Roadmap and Subtract modes selected
Figure 5-6: Mode pair status bar with Fluoro and HLF modes selected
4. Complete the fluoro part of the exam.

5. Press the Mode switch to display Roadmap and Subtract in the status bar. Note that the
selected modes are retained which switching between mode pairs.
6. Complete the roadmap procedure. See 5.8.5 Roadmap mode beginning on page 5-36
for more information on completing a roadmap procedure.
5.2 Anatomical profile

The Reference > Mode > Profile screen allows you to change the anatomical profile applied to
images. The anatomical profile optimizes the display of images for the selected type of
imaging.
The anatomical profile resets to the default profile with each new patient. To use the default
profile, do not make any changes. Change the default profile on the Applications > Setup >
Default Profile screen. See 2.1.4 Set up default profile beginning on page 2-6.
Note: The system determines which profiles are available depending on the software
installed and the type of system.
1. To select an appropriate anatomical profile for imaging, touch the Profile icon in the
status bar or touch Profile… on the Mode screen. A screen similar to the following
displays.
5-4
5. Imaging
Figure 5-7: Profile screen
2. Select the desired profile. The profile's icon displays in the status bar.
3. Touch OK to return to the Mode screen.
Changing the image profile allows you to quickly adjust the behavior of the system for optimal
performance in specific imaging situations. Selecting a profile optimizes image processing for
the procedure to be performed. All systems may not include all available profiles. Available
profiles include the following.
General
The General profile provides image processing optimized for versatility, providing the
best images possible over a wide range of uses.
General HD
The General HD profile is optimized to provide small detail visibility with increased
sharpness.
Bolus Chase
The Bolus Chase profile is optimized for run-off procedures and for interventional pro-
cedures using small guidewires. It is tuned to provide the appearance and the advant-
ages of a subtracted run, although the image is not actually subtracted.
C-Spine (FPD systems)
On FPD systems, the C-Spine profile's X-ray technique and image processing are
optimized for cervical spine imaging to provide high visibility of vertebral bodies, pro-
cesses, facet joints, needles, and tools in short fluoro acquisitions.
Cardiac
The Cardiac profile is optimized for cardiac procedures. It reduces blooming artifacts
and enhances the visibility of moving features and vessels filled with a contrast agent
5-5
5. Imaging
when compared to not using the profile. The moving features are interventional devices
such as guidewires, catheters, and stents that are inserted into vessels and manually
manipulated through vessels to the surgical location in the heart.
increase in radiation dose. Enable or disable enhanced noise reduction using the Car-
diac check box on the Default Profile screen.
Orthopedic
The Orthopedic profile is optimized for bone contrast and small-detail visibility. It fea-
tures increased sharpness and increased noise reduction.
Pediatric
The Pediatric profile utilizes a lower dose optimized for small patients. This profile
provides image processing and is optimized for versatility, creating the best possible
images over a wide range of uses.
Spine (FPD systems)
On FPD systems, the Spine profile's X-ray technique and image processing are optim-
ized for thoracolumbar and sacral spine imaging to provide high visibility of vertebral
bodies, processes, facet joints, needles, and tools in short fluoro acquisitions.
Spine (II systems)
On II systems, the Spine profile's X-ray technique and image processing are optimized
for spine imaging from cervical to sacrum to provide high visibility of vertebral bodies,
processes, facet joints, needles, and tools in short fluoro acquisitions.
Vascular
The Vascular profile is optimized to visualize positive contrast agent-filled vessels, cath-
eters, stents, and other tools and devices in vascular procedures
increase in radiation dose. Enable or disable enhanced noise reduction using the Vas-
cular check box on the Default Profile screen.
9900
The 9900 profile mimics the imaging behavior of the earlier GE OEC 9900 Elite system.
Note: The Spine and General HD profiles are not available on GSP systems.
The selected profile optimizes image processing for the selected type of imaging. Changing an
image profile affects the detail of captured images.
Note: The default profile can be set to any of the profiles available in the Profile screen. See
2.1 System Overview beginning on page 2-1 for information on selecting a default
profile.
5.3 X-ray image screen

The X-ray image screen displays an image and information about the image, patient, and
exam.
5-6
5. Imaging
Figure 5-8: Image screen - live image

1. Patient name
2. Patient ID
3. X-ray technique factor
4. Image type - live image,
last image hold (LIH), or
recalled image
5. Image number
6. Cine Seconds remaining
using the current frame
acquire rate.
7. Save button
8. Swap button
9. Dose Area Product (DAP)
value. See Dose Area
Product (DAP) display
10. Air Kerma Rate (AKR)
value. See 5.12.2 Air kerma
and air kerma rate
11. Cumulative Air Kerma
(CAK). See 5.12.2 Air
kerma and air kerma rate
12. Physician name 21. Magnification mode used to create the

13. Accession number image
14. Date and time of image creation 22. Exposure timer. This accumulates the
15. Angle of the C-Arm at image creation time during which X-ray has been
16. Contrast and brightness values generated during the exam, displayed in
17. Zoom applied to the image minutes and seconds. The timer starts at
18. Rotation applied to the image 0 at the beginning of the exam and
19. Orientation of the image increases for each X-ray exposure
20. Profile used to create the image during the exam.
5.4 Radiation controls

The system offers several methods for producing X-rays and for controlling the amount of
radiation delivered during an exam.
5.4.1 Cross-arm housing

A fast stop switch and the X-ray On switch are located on the C-Arm cross-arm housing.
5-7
5. Imaging
Figure 5-9: Control locations on the OEC Touch cross-arm housing

1. X-ray On switch
2. Fast stop switch
5.4.2 Automatic and manual technique control

Press the Auto key in the Generator control section of the C-Arm control panel to toggle
between automatic and manual technique control.
l When automatic technique control is selected, the Auto button on the C-Arm control
panel is highlighted. If an X-ray control switch is pressed, the system automatically
adjusts the kV and mA to acquire an X-ray image.
l When manual technique control is selected, the Auto button on the C-Arm control panel
is not highlighted.
If an X-ray control switch is pressed, kVp and mA can be independently adjusted before
or during the generation of X-rays.
When manual technique control is selected, the current kVp value remains the same, but
the mA / gain changes, based on the currently selected automatic brightness setting.
This occurs when the system is switched between standard does to low dose, between
Fluoro modes to HLF modes, between continuous modes to pulsed modes, and between
magnification modes.
The system defaults to automatic technique control of X-ray technique (kVp and mA).
Note: Automatic technique control is recommended for most imaging situations. The system
automatically acquires the desired X-ray image with technique factors that minimize the
amount of radiation exposure.
If the system is switched from manual technique control to automatic technique control, current
kVp values remain the same, but the mA / gain changes, based on the currently selected
automatic brightness setting.
If the system is switched from automatic technique control to manual technique control, the
kVp, mA, and gain values remain the same if the manual mA limits are identical to the Auto mA
limits.
5-8
5. Imaging
Note: In some cases, the C-Arm control panel may display a different technique than displays
on the LIH. When setting the technique manually, base any adjustments on the LIH
values, not the technique displayed on the C-Arm control panel.
5.4.3 Fast stop switches

Call for service.
If the fast stop switch is pressed, on purpose or inadvertently, while an operator is pressing the
vertical column switch, vertical column operation will cease and X-rays will be disabled. After
both switches have been released it may be possible to operate the vertical column; however,
X-rays will remain disabled until the system is restarted.
If the fast stop switch is pressed when a run-away condition exists, vertical column motion will
cease and X-rays will be disabled. Under this condition it is not possible to operate the vertical
column or take X-rays. Call your service representative.
If the fast stop switch has been pressed to disable unintended X-rays, do not restart the
system. Call your service representative.
Note: C-Arm motorized lift column motion can be used after releasing a fast stop switch.
However, after you press a fast stop switch, you must restart the system before you can
take X-rays or use other motorized functions.
Resetting fast stop switches

To re-enable lift motor motion, reset the fast stop switch by twisting it and allowing it to pop up.
To re-enable X-rays, reset the fast stop switch as described above and then restart the system.
If the system is restarted without a fast stop switch reset, X-rays will be disabled. Reset the fast
stop switch as described above, and then restart the system.
5-9
5. Imaging
5.4.4 X-ray On switch

The X-ray On switch is located on the cross-arm housing. The switch can be used to generate
fluoro images or initiate Roadmapping mode on Vascular systems. It functions just like the left
switch on the standard footswitch or handswitch, and its function depends on the imaging
mode selected: standard fluoroscopy or vascular imaging.
When X-ray are generated, the image displays on the left side of the main system monitor.
When the X-ray switch is released, X-rays are terminated and the last image or frame of the
exposure is retained on the left side of the main system monitor. This is referred to as "Last
Image Hold" or LIH.
See 5.1 Modes of operation beginning on page 5-1 for additional information about imaging
modes.
Figure 5-11: X-ray On switch location
5.4.5 Footswitch and handswitch

The X-ray footswitch and handswitch offer maximum flexibility and control over image
generation. Switches may be used to generate X-rays or change between the available
imaging modes. Features and imaging modes available are determined by what you purchased
with your system.
Most systems come with a two-pedal footswitch and a four-button handswitch. Cardiac
systems offer a three-pedal footswitch.
Pressing a footswitch begins X-rays in the indicated mode. Releasing the footswitch stops X-
rays. Pressing the small switch in the center of the two-pedal footswitch and in between the left
and center switches of the three-pedal footswitch toggles through the currently selected fluoro
and vascular modes and is reflected in the Reference > Mode screen.
5-10
5. Imaging
Table 5-1: Three-pedal footswitch and modes

Mode Left X-ray Switch Right X-ray Far-right X-ray Switch
Group Switch
Standard Fluoro HLF or Digital Digital Cine

Fluoroscopy Spot
Vascular / Fluoro or Subtraction Digital Cine
Cardiac Roadmap
Mode Toggle Small switch between left and center footswitches
Footswitch models
Figure 5-12: Two-pedal and three-pedal footswitches
l Use the switch labeled to produce standard fluoroscopic images or roadmaps.

l Use the switch labeled to produce HLF images, digital spot images, pulsed digital
cine runs, or subtractions.
l On three-pedal footswitches: Use the switch labeled to produce pulsed digital cine
HLF runs at the preset rate.
l Use the Mode switch to toggle through the available imaging modes on ESP/GSP
systems, and to change between fluoroscopy and vascular modes on Vascular systems.
Note: If a three-pedal footswitch is attached to a non-Cardiac system, it functions as a two-

pedal footswitch using the first two switches and the Mode switch. In this case, the third
switch will cause a beep to sound when pressed but will have no functionality with the
system.
Handswitch
Figure 5-13: Handswitch
5-11
5. Imaging
Caution Do not stretch the handswitch cord further than 3.048 m (10 feet). This may result
in damage to the cord. If the cord is damaged and touches the floor, it is a safety
hazard. Call the Communications Center for assistance.
l Use the switch labeled to produce standard fluoroscopic images or roadmaps.

l Use the switch labeled to produce HLF images, digital spot images, pulsed digital
cine runs, or subtractions.
l Use the Mode switch to toggle through the available imaging modes on ESP/GSP
systems, and to change between fluoroscopy and vascular modes on Vascular systems.
l Use the Save key to save an image displayed on the left side of the main system
monitor.
Mode mismatches
The basic two- and three-pedal footswitch or four-button handswitch may not operate as
expected when paired with a system model for which it is not intended.
The three-pedal footswitch is intended for use with Cardiac systems. When a three-pedal
footswitch is attached to a non-Cardiac system, it functions as a two-pedal footswitch using the
first two switches and the Mode switch. In this case, the third switch will cause a beep to sound
when pressed but will have no functionality with the system.
The two-pedal footswitch is intended for use with non-Cardiac systems. When a two-pedal
footswitch is connected to a Cardiac system, the Digital Cine Pulse mode that is usually
assigned to the third pedal of a three-pedal footswitch is unavailable unless it is configured for
the second switch using the Mode screen.
Multiple switch presses

Note: On Cardiac systems, if the , , and switches on a two-pedal or three-pedal
footswitch are pressed simultaneously, a digital cine shot begins. On Vascular and
ESP/GSP systems, if the , , and switches on a two-pedal or three-pedal
footswitch are pressed simultaneously, X-rays are not produced. Take precautions to
avoid simultaneous pressing of these switches by keeping the footswitch area clear of
objects that could cause one or more of these switches to be pressed accidentally.
Occasionally, multiple switches are pressed during a single shot. Pressing of multiple switches
during a single shot is not recommended. However, the system accommodates multiple switch
presses as shown in the following table. Multiple switch presses can happen using the
footswitches or handswitches, or the X-ray switch on the C-Arm control panel or cross-arm
housing, or by pressing a combination of those switches. The switches are marked as follows:
Left X-ray switch on both footswitches and handswitches.
Right X-ray switch on both footswitches and handswitches.
Far-right X-ray switch on a three-pedal footswitch.
X-ray switch on C-Arm control panel housing or cross-arm housing.
5-12
5. Imaging
Table 5-2: Multiple switch press behavior

If this While this is
This is the result:
is pressed being pressed
or or Shot will continue until both switches are released.
Shot will continue until both switches have been released.
Shot will not begin until all switches are released and is
or or pressed alone.
Shot will not begin until all switches are released and the
or or
switch is pressed alone.
Shot will not begin until all switches are released and the
or or switch is pressed alone.
Switching mode pairs using the footswitch or handswitch

Use the Mode switch to change between fluoroscopy and vascular / cardiac modes.
A Mode switch is also located on the C-Arm control panel housing or cross-arm housing.
Figure 5-14: Mode switch on handswitch and footswitches
5.4.6 Keyswitch positions

l System Standby - The key is vertical position. X-rays and any motorized movement are
disabled. The Workstation power switch will remain lit, indicating that the system is still
powered on.
l X-rays and Motion Enabled - The key is at a 45° angle. The C-Arm is fully operational,
with X-rays and any motorized movement enabled.
l X-rays Disabled - The key is horizontal. X-rays are disabled, but the C-Arm remains
powered, and any motorized movement is enabled.
Note: Placing the equipment in the System Standby position disables X-rays and motorized
operation so these features will not be activated unintentionally. A message displays on
the C-Arm control panel indicating that the keyswitch is in the System Standby position.
5-13
5. Imaging
5.4.7 System and X-ray control alarms

The system includes alarms to indicate the passage of exposure time. See eAlarm Reset
beginning on page 3-7 for the location of the Alarm Reset button.
Cumulative X-ray exposure alarm

The system is equipped with a cumulative X-ray exposure timer to alert the user to the passage
of the selected radiation time. A service representative can configure the alert for exposure
times of 100, 200, 295, and 300 seconds.
Once configured, a continuous tone sounds and the Alarm Reset button blinks to indicate that
the selected time has passed. These continue until the user touches the Alarm Reset button on
the C-Arm control panel.
After the Alarm Reset button is touched, the alarm will sound and the icon will blink after the
selected time passes again.
The timer resets to 0 when a new exam begins.
X-ray termination alarm

The system is equipped to terminate X-ray exposures that continue for the selected length of
time. A service representative can configure the system for this alarm.
The timer resets to 0 when the X-ray switch is released and a new exposure begins.
Continuous fluoro alarm
The system is equipped with a continuous fluoro exposure alarm to alert the user that the
selected time is near. A service representative can configure the alarm for exposure times of
300, 310, 320, 350, 400, 500, and 600 seconds.
During the exposure, a warning alarm sounds at 30 seconds before the selected time to alert
the user of the approaching termination of exposure. The system terminates the exposure at
the selected time, and the alarm sounds. The alarm continues until the user touches the Alarm
Reset button on the C-Arm control panel.
HLF termination alarm
The system is equipped to terminate HLF exposures and sound an alarm after a selected
exposure time. A service representative can configure the alarm for exposure time from 5 to 30
seconds.
The alarm continues until the user touches the Alarm Reset button on the C-Arm control panel.
Note that there is no warning alarm before termination of HLF shots.
Digital Cine Pulse termination alarm
The system is equipped to terminate Digital Cine Pulse exposures and sound an alarm after a
selected exposure time. A service representative can configure the alarm for exposure time
from 10 to 25 seconds.
The alarm continues until the user touches the Alarm Reset button on the C-Arm control panel.
Note that there is no warning alarm before termination of Digital Cine Pulse shots.
5-14
5. Imaging
Cumulative Air Kerma (CAK) alarm limit

The system is equipped to sound an alarm when the radiation exposure has exceeded the limit
set for an exam. The alarm limit is set on the Applications > Setup > Image Acquisition
screen, and can be set from 0.50 Gy to 2.50 Gy , in 0.25 increments
When the CAK limit is exceeded, a CUMULATIVE AIR KERMA LIMIT EXCEEDED message
displays in the status bar and on the C-Arm control panel, and an alarm sounds. The alarm
continues until the user touches the Alarm Reset button on the C-Arm control panel.
5.5 Live zoom

The system includes a zoom feature that allows you to digitally magnify anatomy during a live
shot, cine run, subtraction, or roadmap. Live zoomed shots use the same dose rate as the non-
magnified shot, and the zoom factor on these shots can be changed after the shot is saved.
Note: The live zoom feature is not available on GSP systems.
5.5.1 Set up live zoom and create live zoomed images

To use the live zoom feature on live images:
1. Press the left X-ray switch on the footswitch, handswitch, or the X-ray On switch on
the C-Arm to take a reference image. This image does not need to be saved.
2. As soon as the X-ray switch is released, the LIH image displays on the left side of the
screen, and a Zoom button displays on the Reference screen, just under Roadmap
Mask. The button displays an icon of a magnifying glass with a plus (+) sign in the center.
Figure 5-15: The Zoom button (+) on the Reference screen
5-15
5. Imaging
3. Touch Zoom. The Zoom screen displays on the right side of the main system monitor,
with a slider and a yellow box to indicate the magnified area of the reference image, and
the left side of the screen displays the magnified portion of the image. The Image display
area of the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside also display the magnified portion of the
image.
Figure 5-16: The magnified portion of the image (left) and the Zoom screen (right)
4. Adjust the zoom using the up and down arrows on the slider, and move the yellow box to
the area to be magnified, as needed. The left side of the screen displays the adjusted
image. Images can be zoomed up to 4x in 0.2 increments.
5. When the desired adjustments are complete, touch OK. The zoomed reference image
displays on the left side of the main system monitor. The right side of the screen displays
the Reference screen. Note that the Zoom button now displays an icon of a magnifying
glass with a minus (-) sign in the center.
5-16
5. Imaging
Figure 5-17: The Zoom button (-) on the Reference screen
6. Take additional images, cine runs, subtractions or roadmaps, as needed. The digital
zoom settings will be applied to each subsequent image. Saved images will be saved as
both a full, non-zoomed image and as a zoomed image denoted with a D to indicate that
the image is Derived. The image label also includes the image number from which the
image was derived.
When a zoomed image displays on the left side of the main system monitor, you can turn off the
digital zoom on the LIH image by touching the Zoom button with a minus (-) sign. Touch Zoom
again to turn zoom on and off.
To turn off the digital zoom on a dynamic image, press Zoom on the image control keypad and
drag the slider all the way down to 1x, then touch OK.
5-17
5. Imaging
5.6 Image save and auto save

5.6.1 Last image hold (LIH)
When generating an X-ray image, the image displays on the left side of the main system
monitor. When the X-ray switch is released, X-rays are terminated and the last image or frame
of the exposure is retained on the left side of the main system monitor. This is referred to as
"Last Image Hold" or LIH.
To save the LIH on the left side of the main system monitor display, press the Save
key. A copy of the image is saved every time the Save key is pressed. The system
can save one image per second. Do not press Save more than once per second.
Auto save for LIH images

Auto Save may be enabled to automatically save the LIH. When this feature is enabled, the
LIH displayed on the main system monitor after the X-ray switch is released will be saved
automatically by the system.
See 2.1.3 Set up image acquisition beginning on page 2-4 for information on enabling the auto
save feature. See 8.7 Check disk space beginning on page 8-29 for information on how the
system manages storage space. See 8.8 Archive images beginning on page 8-30 for
information on archiving images and exams.
5.6.2 Zoomed images

If an image was magnified using the zoom feature, two copies of the image are saved - one
magnified and the other non-magnified. The thumbnail of the magnified image is denoted with
a D to indicate that the image is Derived. The image label also includes the image number from
which the image was derived.
If a derived image that was previously magnified is subsequently changed to the non-magnified
view, the thumbnail still indicates a D.
Magnified cine runs, subtractions, and roadmaps are not marked with a D.
5.6.3 Recalled and modified images

If a recalled image is modified and saved, the saved image overwrites the original image, and
the original image is not retained on the system.
5-18
5. Imaging
5.7 General imaging

All systems provide standard fluoroscopy modes. Fluoroscopy modes are the only modes
available on the ESP/GSP system models. Vascular and Cardiac systems provide basic
fluoroscopy imaging as well as vascular and cardiac imaging. See 5.8 Vascular imaging
beginning on page 5-27 for an explanation of vascular and cardiac imaging features.
Fluoroscopy imaging features include:
l Fluoro
l High Level Fluoro (HLF)
l Pulsed X-ray
l Low dose
l Digital spot
When the system is first turned on, the default available imaging mode pairs and the active
anatomical profile display in the status bar.
5.7.1 X-ray switch setup for standard fluoroscopy imaging

On standard fluoroscopy systems, one imaging modality is available with four modes: fluoro,
HLF, pulsed fluoro, and Digital Spot. Fluoro is available at all times.
Press the Mode key on the X-ray switches, C-Arm control panel, RUI (motorized systems only),
or the Mode screen on the main system screen to change from one pair of imaging modes to
another.
The status bar indicates which mode pairs are selected.
5.7.2 Mode screen in fluoroscopy imaging

The Mode screen provides a choice of available imaging pairs for use during a procedure. The
following examples show how to set up the anatomical profile, mode, and pulse rates for
standard fluoroscopy imaging.
Use the Mode screen to:
l Change imaging mode pairs that are available from the X-ray switches during a
procedure.
l Select the pulse rate or the digital cine pulse rate.
l Change anatomical profiles.
Mode screen on the main system monitor

On the Reference screen, touch Mode... or touch a mode icon in the status bar.
5-19
5. Imaging
Figure 5-18: Mode... button on Reference screen
A screen similar to the following displays on the right side of the main system monitor.
Figure 5-19: Mode screen
Touch Profile... to change the imaging profile. Select a mode, then touch OK to return to the
Mode screen.
Note: The Profile… button is not active if the Workstation is not connected to a C-Arm.
5-20
5. Imaging
Mode screen on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside C-Arm control panel
Systems with a OEC Touch / Touch Tableside C-Arm control panel also provide Mode screen
functionality from the C-Arm control panel.
Touch Mode on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside C-Arm control panel.
Figure 5-20: Mode button on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside C-Arm control panel
A screen similar to the following displays:

Figure 5-21: Mode screen on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside C-Arm control panel
5-21
5. Imaging
Use the drop-down lists to select acquisition rates (fps) for each selected mode.
Figure 5-22: Acquisition rates on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside C-Arm control panel
Mode screen use on all systems

To change the active mode, select the desired button. The highlighted bar displays next to the
selected button and the status bar reflects the change.
The left X-ray switch can be set to produce standard fluoroscopic images.
The right X-ray switch can be set to produce HLF images or digital spot images.
5.7.3 Continuous vs. pulsed fluoroscopy considerations

The system is designed with continuous, pulsed, and digital spot fluoroscopy modes to allow
maximum clinical utility with effective dose management. Each of these modes employs
different characteristics in image quality, dose, and real-time temporal response.
In continuous fluoroscopy, the generator provides a steady tube current while the fluoroscope
is activated, and images are acquired at a rate of 30 frames per second. This is especially
useful where continuous real-time viewing of an exam, procedure, or procedure step is desired.
Following ALARA principles, use of higher dose continuous fluoroscopy is now typically rare
and/or intermittent.
In pulsed fluoroscopy the frame rates can be adjusted to a present a number of X-ray pulses
each second to meet the image quality needs for the procedure or procedure step. Pulsed
fluoroscopy can significantly reduce the time and radiation dose rate compared with continuous
fluoroscopy. Spot fluoroscopy allows for targeted imaging within a region of anatomy. This
function also reduces the patient dose area and scatter radiation to the staff over long
procedures. The clinician and fluoroscopist, per their training and experience, choose the
visualization mode that best meets the imaging needs of the patient in order to achieve the
clinically desired results in adherence to the principals of ALARA.
5.7.4 Fluoro mode

Fluoro mode displays live fluoroscopic images on the left side of the main system monitor.
5-22
5. Imaging
Produce a fluoro Image

1. Verify that Fluoro displays in the status bar.
2. Press the left X-ray switch on the footswitch, handswitch, or the X-ray On switch on
the C-Arm.
After the image has been obtained, image attributes such as edge enhancement or contrast
and brightness can be modified. See 8.2 Image processing beginning on page 8-9 for more
information.
5.7.5 High Level Fluoro mode (HLF)

Warning HLF should not be used for general purpose imaging. To minimize X-ray
exposure hazards, use HLF with discretion.
During continuous HLF, the mA can increase to as much as 20 mA. During
pulsed HLF the mA can increase to as much as 40 mA. This can subject the
patient and those working around the X-ray field to a significantly larger dose
of radiation than they would receive during fluoro or pulsed fluoro operation.
High Level Fluoro (HLF) mode decreases noise level and improves image quality by increasing
fluoroscopic mA.
Continuous HLF uses mA levels up to 20 mA.
Pulsed HLF at 4, 8, or 15 PPS (pulses per second) provides pulsed fluorography. When using
HLF mode, mA can increase up to 40 mA. Available options may depend on the system
configuration.
Automatic termination of HLF and pulsed HLF exposure occurs after each predetermined
interval of continuous use. This interval may be set by a service representative, and can be
from 5 seconds to 30 seconds, depending on customer need and local regulations. Automatic
exposure termination reduces unnecessary X-ray exposure and is designed to comply with X-
ray tube ratings. An HLF OVERTIME message displays on the C-Arm control panel.
Produce a standard HLF image

1. Verify that HLF displays in the status bar. If Digital Spot displays, use the Mode screen
to select HLF.
2. Press the right X-ray switch on the footswitch or handswitch to make HLF
exposures.
5.7.6 Pulsed X-ray mode

Pulsed mode generates a preset number of X-ray pulses each second while the X-ray switch is
pressed. Pulsed X-rays can be used to reduce total radiation.
Use of a pulsed fluoro mode can significantly reduce the dose rate; however, image quality may
be degraded in pulsed fluoro modes.
See 5.9 Digital Cine Pulse mode on Vascular or Cardiac systems beginning on page 5-41 for a
description of Digital Cine Pulse mode.
5-23
5. Imaging
Note: Pulse rates available may vary based on which system you have purchased.
When continuous mode is active, no pulse rate (PPS) displays in the status bar.
Figure 5-23: Status bar – continuous mode
Enable pulsed X-ray

To enable pulsed operation at the currently selected pulse rate, press the Pulse key on the C-
Arm or select a pulse rate on the Mode screen.
When Pulse is enabled, one of the Pulse options on the Mode screen is filled and the pulse
rate (PPS) displays in the status bar.
Figure 5-24: Status bar – pulsed mode
Note: Combined use of both a pulsed fluoro mode and the low dose mode may have a
compounding effect in degrading image quality.
Note: To reselect continuous operation, press the Pulse key on the C-Arm control panel or
select Continuous on the Mode screen. The pulse rates will no longer display in the
status bar.
Change the pulse rate

1. On the Mode screen, select a pulse rate.
5-24
5. Imaging
Figure 5-25: Pulse rate selection buttons on the Mode screen
2. Touch Exit on the Mode screen to return to the Reference screen.
5.7.7 Low dose

Low dose is used to decrease the amount of radiation received by the patient and operator for
procedures that do not require a high quality image. Low Dose is not a separate imaging mode.
It is a feature intended to be used with the system’s imaging modes.
Decreasing the dose can degrade the image quality compared to images produced at the
normal dose level.
In the standard and pulsed fluoro modes, using low dose will reduce the dose rate by 50% or
more compared to standard dose levels, as defined by IEC 60601-2-43:2010 cl. 203.6.101.
Other modes, such as HLF, will experience lower dose levels if low dose is activated, but the
reduction amount may vary.
Digital Spot mode works independently of the low dose feature. In Digital Spot mode, dose
levels are similar regardless of whether low dose is enabled or disabled.
Caution Combined use of a pulsed fluoro mode and low dose can have a compounding
effect degrading image quality.
Produce a low dose image

1. Touch the Low Dose button on the C-Arm control panel. An icon is highlighted on the C-
Arm control panel when low dose is enabled.
5-25
5. Imaging
2. Press the appropriate X-ray switch on the footswitch or handswitch to make exposures.
3. When complete, touch or press Low Dose again to return to normal dose.
5.7.8 Digital Spot mode

Digital Spot mode creates a short-duration, high-mA exposure to produce a high-quality single
image.
After the image has been obtained, image attributes such as edge enhancement or contrast
and brightness can be modified. See 8.2 Image processing beginning on page 8-9 for more
information.
Pulsed operation is not allowed in Digital Spot mode.
Produce a Digital Spot image

1. Touch Digital Spot from the Mode screen. Verify that Digital Spot displays in the status
bar.
2. Press the left X-ray switch on the footswitch, handswitch or the X-ray On switch to
confirm positioning and to allow the system to determine the appropriate fluoro
technique. The system uses this fluoro technique to determine the digital spot technique.
3. When the desired image displays on the main system monitor, release the left X-ray
switch and then press and hold the right X-ray switch to obtain the digital spot image.
The system increases the mA significantly to produce a high-quality image.
4. The system automatically terminates the exposure and saves the digital spot image on
the hard disk. The image displays on the left side of the main system monitor.
Caution Digital spot always terminates immediately when the footswitch is released.
Note: Early footswitch release causes the exposure to terminate prematurely. Continue
pressing the switch until the system automatically terminates the exposure.
Note: If the digital spot mode is misused for real-time imaging, the image display delay may
be longer than the delay seen in radioscopy.
5-26
5. Imaging
5.8 Vascular imaging

Vascular systems provide standard fluoroscopy modes as well as specialized vascular modes
and profiles. See 5.7 General imaging beginning on page 5-19 for basic fluoro information.
Read the entire section before beginning vascular imaging procedures.
Vascular imaging features include:
l Subtraction
l Roadmapping
l Digital cine pulse
Note: Vascular and Cardiac systems include all standard fluoroscopy features.
When the system is first turned on, the default available imaging modes and the active
anatomical profile display in the status bar.
5.8.1 X-ray switch setup for vascular imaging

On Vascular systems, two image modalities (standard fluoroscopy and vascular) are available
at start-up, with six modes available: Fluoro, HLF, Digital Spot, Digital Cine Pulse, Roadmap,
and Subtract.
Press the Mode key on the X-ray switches or C-Arm control panel to change from one pair of
imaging modes to another.
5-27
5. Imaging
5.8.2 Mode screen in vascular imaging

The Mode screen provides a choice of available imaging pairs for use during a procedure.
Vascular and Cardiac systems provide slightly different mode screens allowing for the different
features necessary to these systems. The following examples show how to set up the
anatomical profile, mode, and pulse rates for vascular imaging.
Use the Mode screen to:
l Change imaging mode pairs that are available from the X-ray switches during a
procedure.
l Select the pulse rate and the digital cine pulse rate.
l Change anatomical profiles.
l Select a contrast medium (positive, such as iodine or negative, such as CO2).
Mode screen on the main system monitor

On the Reference screen, touch Mode... or touch a mode icon in the status bar.
Figure 5-26: Reference screen
A screen similar to the following displays on the right side of the main system monitor.
5-28
5. Imaging
Figure 5-27: Mode screen
To change the active mode, select the desired button. The highlighted bar displays next to the
selected button and the status bar reflects the change.
Mode screen on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside C-Arm control panel
The OEC Touch / Touch Tableside C-Arm control panel also provides Mode screen
functionality.
Touch Mode on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside C-Arm control panel.
Figure 5-28: Mode button and panel on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside C-Arm control
panel
To change the pulse rate of a selected mode, touch and hold the Pulse button on the image
control panel. A menu displays next to the Pulse button. Select a pulse rate.
5-29
5. Imaging
Figure 5-29: Pulse rates on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside C-Arm control panel
Mode screen use on all systems

With standard fluoroscopic modes active:
The left X-ray switch can be set to produce standard fluoroscopic images.
The right X-ray switch can be set to produce HLF images, digital spot
images, or pulsed digital cine runs.
With vascular modes active:
The left X-ray switch can be set to produce standard fluoroscopic images
or roadmaps.
The right X-ray switch can be set to produce subtractions.

Press the Mode key on the footswitch or handswitch, or the C-Arm control panel to switch
between standard fluoroscopy and vascular imaging.
See 5.8.5 Roadmap mode beginning on page 5-36 or 5.8.4 Subtraction imaging beginning on
page 5-31 for more instructions on creating a roadmap or subtraction.
Touch Profile... on the main system monitor or C-Arm control panel to change the imaging
profile. See 5.2 Anatomical profile beginning on page 5-4 for more information about imaging
profiles.
Note: The Profile… button is not active if the Workstation is not connected to a C-Arm.
Vascular, Cardiac, and Bolus Chase profiles are only available for vascular imaging, and only
available if enabled. For vascular imaging, select one of the vascular modes then touch OK to
return to the Mode screen.
Contrast agent selection

The mode screen allows selection of positive contrast agents, such as iodine, and negative
contrast agents such as CO2.
Negative (CO2) contrast is enabled by default, and positive contrast is selected by default.
Users can select the default contrast setting on the Applications > Setup > Image Acquisition
screen. By default, the user can also enable or disable negative contrast from this setup
screen. See Set up image acquisition beginning on page 2-4 for more information.
When positive contrast is selected, the vascular mode pairs display Roadmap/Fluoro and
Subtract modes. When negative contrast is selected, the vascular mode pairs display
5-30
5. Imaging
Roadmap CO2/Fluoro and Subtract CO2 modes.

A field service engineer can disable negative (CO2) contrast and can disable user access to the
Enable Negative Contrast control on the Image Acquisition screen. Once this setting is
changed, only a field service engineer can change it.
5.8.3 Change the pulse rate

1. On the Mode screen, select a pulse rate. Choose 8 PPS, or 15 PPS (pulses per
second). 4PPS is not available for vascular imaging modes. Available options may
depend on the system configuration.
Figure 5-30: Vascular pulse rates
2. Touch Exit on the Mode screen to return to the Reference screen.
5.8.4 Subtraction imaging

Real-time subtraction provides images that reflect the difference between current fluoroscopic
images and a mask image obtained at the start of the subtraction process. The result displays
on the left side of the main system monitor. The live, unsubtracted fluoro image displays on the
right side of the main system monitor when cine playback is minimized. Real-time subtraction is
primarily used for contrast studies such as angiography.
Peak opacification can be applied during post-processing.
Caution Do not use pulsed fluoro modes for subtraction or roadmap imaging. Use of
pulsed fluoro modes for subtraction or roadmapping may result in poor image
quality.
5-31
5. Imaging
Note: If you are injecting contrast manually, begin injecting the contrast when the Syringe
icon displays on the left side of the main system monitor.
Contrast agent options

The system supports use of both positive contrast agents, such as iodine, and negative
contrast agents such as CO2. Positive contrast agents appear black in X-ray imaging, while
negative agents appear white. Select the contrast agent from the Mode screen. See Mode
screen in vascular imaging beginning on page 5-28 for more information.
Sequence of events during subtraction

The system software automatically performs several steps during real-time subtraction. To
illustrate the process, a time line diagram of a typical subtraction is shown below.
Figure 5-31: Event Sequence During Subtraction
Note: The Syringe icon varies depending on the type of contrast selected. If negative contrast
is used, it includes a CO2 notation. The functionality is otherwise unchanged.
The sequence of events shown on the timeline includes:
1. The right X-ray switch is pressed to begin the
exposure. The X-ray technique stabilizes.
2. The mask is acquired and technique is locked.
Note: Any movement results in a mask and incoming image mismatch.
3. The mask image has been acquired and the subtraction process begins.
The left side of the main system monitor displays a uniform gray result and the system
begins subtracting images and displaying them. As long as the subtraction continues,
new images are subtracted from the mask obtained at the beginning of the cine run. As
images are acquired, a Syringe icon displays indicating that the system is ready for
contrast to be injected.
4. Contrast is injected, and the subtracted images display on the left side of the main
system monitor. Vessels are highlighted with contrast.
5. The contrast concentration peaks.
6. Contrast concentration decreases to a minimum.
7. When the footswitch is released:
5-32
5. Imaging
l If Auto Playback is enabled, the subtraction cine run plays back automatically on the
left side of the main system monitor
l If Auto Playback is disabled, the last subtracted image displays on the left side of the
Note: Early release of the X-ray switch terminates the subtraction process before it is
complete. Avoid tapping the footswitch in subtraction mode.
Subtraction procedure
Note: The Subtract button and Syringe icon varies depending on the type of contrast
selected. If negative contrast is used, they include a CO2 notation. The functionality is
otherwise unchanged.
1. If you want to use a reference image during the subtraction, select the image and press
Swap to display the image on the right screen before beginning.
2. Press the Mode switch to activate vascular mode, if necessary.
3. Verify that Subtract displays in the status bar or that the Subtract mode button. If
negative contrast is selected, additionally verify that a dark colored vessel icon displays
on the Touch / Touch Tableside C-Arm control panel.
Figure 5-32: Subtract button (with the negative contrast agent icon) on the Touch / Touch
Tableside C-Arm control panel
Cine is set automatically. To change the cine frame rate, use the Reference > Cine >
Setup screen. See 6. Dynamic recording beginning on page 6-1 for more information.
5-33
5. Imaging
4. Press and hold the right X-ray switch to begin the subtraction process and create a
mask automatically.
Acquiring and creating the mask image can take from 2.0 to 4.6 seconds, depending on
the mode and contrast used.
Table 5-3: Time to acquire and create a mask
Positive Negative
Mode
contrast contrast
Continuous mode 2.1 seconds 2.0 seconds
15pps pulsed subtract mode 3.3 seconds 3.25 seconds
8pps pulsed subtract mode 4.6 seconds 4.5 seconds
5. After the mask is acquired, continue pressing the right X-ray switch to subtract
subsequent images from the mask. Subtraction begins when a subtracted image and the
cine disc icon display on the left side of the main system monitor.
6. A Syringe icon displays on the left side of the main system monitor, signaling the
operator to inject the contrast medium. If an approved injector is properly connected to
the system, a signal is sent to the injector.
Subtracted images display on the left side of the main system monitor as the
contrast concentration peaks and decreases to a minimum. The unsubtracted view
of the current live image displays on the right side of the main system monitor as a
reference. If you selected a reference image in step 1, touch the Reference Image
Swap button to switch between the unsubtracted image and the reference image.
Figure 5-33: Reference Image Swap button
5-34
5. Imaging
7. Release the right X-ray switch to end the subtraction.

If Auto Playback is enabled, the subtraction cine run plays back automatically on the left side of
the main system monitor. If Auto Playback is disabled, the last subtracted image displays on
the left side of the main system monitor.
See 2.1.2 System setup screens beginning on page 2-2 for details on auto playback. See 6.
Dynamic recording beginning on page 6-1 for a description of the Cine Playback screen.
Adjust the mask

Note: This feature is available for subtraction and roadmap imaging.
Registration
If the patient moves during a subtraction run or roadmap fluoro, misalignment of the mask and
incoming images could cause a poor image. Registration allows you to move the mask image
to produce an accurate registration by realigning the mask and the incoming images. You can
realign the mask during the procedure, or during playback if the images are saved.
To register the roadmap mask:
1. Touch Adjust Mask on the Reference screen or the Cine Playback screen. The Adjust
Mask screen displays.
2. Use the mask registration buttons to align the mask image with the incoming images.
Figure 5-34: Adjust Mask controls on the main system monitor
Figure 5-35: Adjust Mask controls on the

Touch / Touch Tableside screen
3. Touch Reset at the center of the mask adjustment controls to restore the mask to its
original position.
5-35
5. Imaging
4. Touch OK to save and return to the Reference screen.
Landmarking
In some subtracted images, it may be necessary to see the position of vessels in relation to
certain background anatomies. Landmarking allows you to vary the percentage of background
anatomy that displays in a subtracted image. This function is available for subtraction and
roadmapping.
To vary the percentage of background anatomy:
1. Touch Adjust Mask on the Reference screen or the Cine Playback screen.
2. Touch the landmarking buttons.

3. Touch OK to close the Adjust Mask screen.
The mask is adjusted in 1% increments with each press of the landmark button.
5.8.5 Roadmap mode

Roadmap mode provides a modified subtracted image on the left side of the main system
monitor showing the difference between the current fluoroscopic image and a roadmap mask
image. Roadmapping is useful for providing the anatomical location of pathology for proper
placement of a catheter, balloon, or stent.
During the first phase of roadmapping, a mask image is created using contrast media. The
Roadmap-1 image is saved automatically.
During the second phase of roadmapping, new incoming images are subtracted from the mask
image. The result displays on the left side of the main system monitor, and the right side of the
main system monitor displays the live, unsubtracted image.
Peak opacification is enabled automatically during the first phase of roadmapping (mask
acquisition). When peak opacification is applied, each pixel is compared, as it is acquired, to its
counterpart in the previous image. If the new pixel is darker than in the previous image, the old
pixel is replaced. When this process is complete, the resulting image contains the darkest
pixels acquired for each point. Opacification is turned off during the second phase of
roadmapping.
Continuous X-ray mode should be used for roadmapping.
Note: If you are using a mechanical contrast injector, no signal from the system is sent when
the Syringe icon displays on the left side of the main system monitor. The injection of
contrast should be manually initiated.
Contrast agent options

The system supports use of both positive contrast agents, such as iodine, and negative
contrast agents such as CO2. Positive contrast agents appear black in X-ray imaging, while
negative agents appear white. Select the contrast agent from the Mode screen. See Mode
screen in vascular imaging beginning on page 5-28 for more information.
The system automatically selects the correct Roadmap mode based on the contrast agent
5-36
5. Imaging
used when the image was originally created.
Sequence of events during Roadmap imaging

The software automatically performs several steps during roadmapping. The following
illustrates and describe the process:
Figure 5-36: The roadmapping process
1st phase:
1. X-ray switch is pressed. X-ray
technique adjusts and stabilizes.
Roadmap–1 displays in status bar.
2. Syringe icon displays. Contrast
injection begins, and contrast
concentration in image increases.
Note: The Syringe icon varies depending on the type of contrast selected. If negative
contrast is selected, the icon includes a CO2 notation.
3. Vessels and contrast displays, at or near peak concentration.

4. Footswitch released. Peak opacification is automatically applied.
5. Last image saves automatically as mask. X-ray technique is frozen.
6. Peak opacification causes areas darkened by contrast to retain their darkest values in
mask image.
2nd phase:
7. X-ray switch is pressed again. Roadmap subtraction begins. Roadmap–2 displays in the
status bar.
8. X-ray technique is the same as during mask acquisition. X-ray switch press continues
roadmapping. New incoming images are subtracted from mask image. Result displays
on the left monitor.
Roadmap procedure
Note: The Roadmap button and Syringe icon varies depending on the type of contrast
selected. If negative contrast is used, they include a CO2 notation. The functionality is
otherwise unchanged.
1. If you want to use a reference image during the subtraction, select the image and press
Swap to display the image on the right screen before beginning.
2. On the Reference screen, touch Mode to open the Mode screen and select Roadmap
mode.
3. Press the Mode switch on the footswitch or handswitch to toggle from Roadmap mode to
Fluoro mode, and verify that Fluoro displays in the status bar. See Switching mode pairs
5-37
5. Imaging
using the footswitch or handswitch beginning on page 5-13 for details on the Mode
switch.
4. Press the left X-ray switch to create a fluoro image to confirm position.
5. Press the Mode switch on the footswitch or handswitch to toggle from Fluoro mode to
Roadmap mode, and verify that Roadmap-1 displays in the status bar.
6. Press the left X-ray switch to initiate the first phase of roadmapping. Roadmap–1
displays in the left side of the status bar.
7. While the left X-ray switch is being pressed, the Syringe icon displays on the left side
of the main system monitor. Inject contrast media.
8. Release the left X-ray switch when a satisfactory image displays on the left side of
the main system monitor and the contrast is at, or near, peak concentration in the area of
interest. The system enters phase 2 automatically when the X-ray switch is released.
The roadmap mask is created automatically and displays on the left side of the main
system monitor. This mask is saved, and the thumbnail on the Images screen displays a
mask icon.
Figure 5-37: Thumbnail with mask icon
9. Press the left X-ray switch again to begin roadmapping. Roadmap–2 displays on the
left side of the status bar. The saved mask is subtracted from the new fluoro image. The
resulting roadmap displays on the left side of the main system monitor, while the right
side of the main system monitor displays the current live fluoro image. If you selected a
reference image in step 1, touch the Reference Image Swap button to switch between
the roadmap image and the reference image. The X-ray technique is locked.
5-38
5. Imaging
Figure 5-38: Reference Image Swap button
10. As long as Roadmap-2 displays in the status bar, continue roadmapping as many times
as necessary by pressing the left X-ray switch. The original contrast image is used as
the roadmap mask.
11. To exit Roadmap mode, press the Mode switch on the footswitch or handswitch.
Clear the current mask

To begin a new roadmap procedure:
1. Press Mode on the footswitch or handswitch to select Fluoro mode.
2. Optional: Press the left X-ray switch to create a fluoro image to confirm position.
3. Press Mode again to select Roadmap-1 mode.
Select a Roadmap mask

Any previous image or mask created using contrast media can be used as a roadmap mask.
This eliminates the need for additional contrast media. Use any of the following as a mask:
l A recalled mask from the current procedure
l A frame from a cine run from the current procedure
l A Last Image Hold from the current procedure
l A recalled image from the current procedure
Images should be from the current procedure because patient positioning must be the same as
it was when the recalled mask was created. Use the Adjust Mask screen to compensate for
slight movement. (See Adjust the mask beginning on page 5-35 for information about mask
5-39
5. Imaging
registration.)
Note: Roadmap CO2 can only be used with Subtract CO2 images. The system automatically
selects the correct Roadmap mode based on the contrast agent used when the image
was originally created.
Use a recalled mask

An existing roadmap mask from the current exam may be reused for another roadmap
acquisition. The system automatically selects the correct Roadmap mode based on the
contrast agent used when the image was originally created.
Note: The Roadmap-2 button varies depending on the type of contrast selected. If negative
contrast is used, it includes a CO2 notation. The functionality is otherwise unchanged.
To perform a roadmap procedure using a saved mask:
1. Recall a mask. The thumbnail will be identified with a mask icon, as shown in Figure 5-
37: Thumbnail with mask icon on page 5-38.
2. When Roadmap-2 displays in the status bar, indicating that the second phase of
roadmapping is in process, the current mask image displays on the left side of the main
system monitor.
3. Press the left X-ray switch. The technique will stabilize and roadmapping will begin
using the image from step 1, above, as the mask.
4. If necessary, touch Adjust Mask... on the Reference screen to adjust registration.
Produce a Roadmap mask from a cine run

A roadmap mask can be created from any type of cine run, including a stored subtraction, from
the current exam. This method avoids additional contrast injection and reduces patient
exposure.
To perform a roadmap procedure using a frame from a cine run as the mask:
1. Select the cine run from the Images screen.The cine run begins playback on the left side
of the main system monitor. The Cine screen displays on the right side of the main
system monitor.
2. Optional: Touch Peak Opacify to enable peak opacification.
3. Use the cine playback buttons to navigate to and select the frame you want to use as the
mask on the left side of the main system monitor.
4. Touch Roadmap Mask on the Cine screen.
5. The image on the left side of the main system monitor becomes the roadmap mask, and
the system enters the Roadmap-2.
6. If necessary, touch Adjust Mask on the Reference screen to adjust registration.
7. Press the left X-ray switch. The technique stabilizes and roadmapping begins.
5-40
5. Imaging
Use a Last Image Hold as a mask

A roadmap mask can be created from a Last Image Hold from the current exam.
To perform a roadmap procedure using a Last Image Hold as the mask:
1. Touch Roadmap Mask on the Reference screen.
2. The image on the left side of the main system monitor becomes the roadmap mask and
the system enters Roadmap-2 phase.
3. Press the left X-ray switch. The technique will stabilize and roadmapping will begin.
Use a recalled image as a mask

A roadmap mask can be created from a recalled image from the current exam.
To perform a roadmap procedure using a recalled image as the mask:
1. Select the image from the images screen. The image displays on the left side of the main
system monitor.
2. Touch Roadmap Mask on the Reference screen.
3. The image on the left side of the main system monitor becomes the roadmap mask and
the system enters Roadmap-2 phase.
4. Press the left X-ray switch. The technique will stabilize and roadmapping will begin.
5.9 Digital Cine Pulse mode on Vascular or Cardiac sys-

tems
Digital Cine Pulse mode combines shorter pulsed widths with higher mA values to reduce
image motion artifacts.
To provide optimum images:
l Gain is reduced and the mA increases to as much as 150 mA.
l There is no dose reduction.
l Exposure time is limited.
l Averaging is turned off.
Automatic termination of digital cine exposure occurs after each preset interval of continuous
use. Automatic exposure termination reduces unnecessary X-ray exposure and is designed to
comply with X-ray tube ratings. To change the exposure time limit, contact service.
5-41
5. Imaging
Warning During pulsed digital cine HLF, the mA can increase to as much as 150
mA. This can subject the patient and those working around the X-ray field
to a significantly larger dose of radiation than they would receive during
normal pulsed fluoro operation. To minimize X-ray exposure hazards, use
HLF with discretion.
5.9.1 Create a pulsed digital cine pulse run on Vascular systems
On Vascular systems, the right X-ray switch can be set to invoke Digital Cine Pulse mode
imaging. The pulse rate selection box on the Mode screen allows the user to display and
change the preset rate.
1. Verify that Digital Cine Pulse displays in the status bar.
2. Select a pulse rate on the Mode screen to enable pulsed operation.
Figure 5-39: Pulse rate selection buttons on the Mode screen
3. Select a digital cine pulse rate to set a pulse rate of 15 or 30 PPS from the Digital Cine
Pulse box on the Mode screen. Verify that the selected pulse rate displays in the status
bar.
The frame rate displayed is the same as the pulse rate. Acquisition occurs at that rate.
4. Press the right X-ray switch. The digital cine run is acquired automatically.
Note: Pulse rate options may vary depending on the system.
5-42
5. Imaging
Note: Cine runs automatically include a cue at the beginning of the run. Regulations require
the cine run to include all frames captured, including the frames captured while the
image stabilizes. These frames do not contain usable images, and therefore a cue is
placed at the beginning of the usable frames.
Note: The X-ray switch may not detect short or rapid presses, such as those created by toe-
tapping on the footswitch. A Digital Cine Pulse run may not be saved because the user
released the pedal or X-ray switch prior to at least two pulses, that is before the system
started taking a Digital Cine Pulse.
5.10 Imaging pediatric or smaller patients

5.10.1 Pediatric profile
The system provides a Pediatric profile that utilizes a lower dose optimized for small patients.
This profile provides image processing and is optimized for versatility, creating the best
possible images over a wide range of uses.
5.10.2 Radiation exposure sensitivity

Radiation exposure is a concern in both adults and children. However, children are more
sensitive to radiation than adults and have a longer post-exam life expectancy, so particular
attention should be paid to the displayed dose values and alarms. Radiation risk is higher in
young patients, as they have more rapidly dividing cells than adults. Using the same exposure
parameters on a child as is used on an adult may result in unnecessarily large doses to the
child.
C-Arm settings can be adjusted to reduce dose significantly while maintaining diagnostic image
quality. GE suggests reducing radiation dose to as low as reasonably achievable for all
patients, especially for pediatric and small patients.
5.10.3 Minimize pediatric and small patient doses

Use the following suggestions to reduce the amount of radiation that pediatrics and small
patients receive from fluoroscopic examinations
Perform only necessary fluoroscopic examinations

The indications and the appropriate technique to be used should be reviewed by the physician /
surgeon prior to every exam, including the number of previous medical X-ray examinations,
reasons for the fluoroscopic procedure, and consideration of other effective lower dose
modalities. In all circumstances, the expected benefits of the fluoroscopic procedure must
exceed the overall risk.
Image only the anatomical region indicated

Limit imaging coverage to the anatomical region of the body indicated to avoid unnecessary
exposure.
5-43
5. Imaging
Obtain only clinically necessary image quality

Limit images requiring the highest radiation dose to very specific procedures or procedure
steps.
5.10.4 Imaging recommendations for small or pediatric patients

Radiation dose reduction must be balanced with safe, accurate, and effective procedures. The
goal is to minimize the dose to the patient, providing important and necessary medical care
while maximizing patient safety. Not all steps listed below may be possible depending on
patient size, technical challenge, critical nature, and type of procedure.
1. Remove the anti-scatter grid when performing examinations on small patients. See 3.5.5
Anti-scatter grid beginning on page 3-43.
2. Before beginning the procedure, and during the procedure as conditions and field of view
change, consider the collimator position and aperture size.
3. Use the Low Dose function. Low Dose automatically decreases the calculated ABS or
manually entered technique to less than or equal to one half the dose rate. See Low
Dose beginning on page 3-6 and 5.7.7 Low dose beginning on page 5-25.
4. Keep the skin spacer installed to keep the minimum distance between the patient and X-
Ray focal spot.
5. Adjust acquisition parameters to achieve lowest dose necessary to accomplish the
procedure.
6. Position the C-Arm over the area of interest, using the Laser Aimer to aid in proper
positioning. This helps avoid extra positioning shots. See 9. Laser Aimer beginning on
page 9-1.
7. Keep the image detector as close as possible to patient.
8. Minimize use of magnification modes. Instead, use the zoom feature when possible. See
Zoom beginning on page 3-12.
9. Position and size the collimator using the Collimator Leaf Rotation, Collimator Leaf
Open/Close, and Collimator Iris Open / Close keys, described beginning on page 3-3. If
necessary, perform a brief fluoroscopy to check position.
10. Collimate as tightly as possible to the area of interest, taking care to exclude the eyes,
thyroid, breasts, and gonads, when possible.
11. Use the Pulse function with as low a pulse rate as possible, rather than continuous
fluoroscopy. See Pulse beginning on page 3-5 Information on changing the pulse rates
is contained within the sections detailing pulsed modes later in this chapter.
12. Briefly press the X-ray pedal or button, and review the anatomy and record information
using last image hold, rather than with live fluoroscopy.
13. Utilize the DICOM RDSR to establish a site imaging dose review process.
14. Ensure that the equipment is checked regularly by a physicist or designee with
appropriate skills.
5-44
5. Imaging
The information and list above is adapted from the Alliance for Radiation Safety in Pediatrics
Imaging’s Image Gently website. For more information about pediatric patient safety in
fluoroscopy and other X-ray emitting technologies you can consult the following online
resources:
l Image Gently (www.imagegently.org)
l Image Wisely (Radiation Safety in Adult Medical Imaging) (www.imagewisely.org)
l Society of Pediatric Radiology (SPR) (http://www.pedrad.org)
l American Association of Physicists in Medicine (AAPM) (www.aapm.org)
l American College of Radiology (ACR) (http://www.acr.org)
l Pediatric X-ray imaging information on the FDA website (www.fda.gov)
l International Atomic Energy Association’s Radiation Protection of Patients
(rpop.iaea.org)
5.11 Image quality

The system offers options to improve image quality while keeping dose as low as is reasonably
achievable in typical clinical settings.
5.11.1 Anti-scatter grid

Systems have an anti-scatter grid, which improves image quality by reducing stray scatter
radiation, particularly when imaging a large anatomy or when using higher X-ray techniques.
Stray radiation can degrade image quality by reducing contrast and resolution.
The anti-scatter grid is removable for imaging smaller anatomy or smaller patients, such as
pediatric patients. Removing the anti-scatter grid reduces the dose delivered by the system for
imaging but may degrade image quality.
See 3.5.5 Anti-scatter grid beginning on page 3-43 for information on removing and installing
the anti-scatter grid.
Caution Placing objects directly on the anti-scatter grid can cause image degradation.
Note: Do not remove the grid during X-ray imaging operations.
Anti-scatter grid indication

On II systems, a yellow strip is visible, indicating that the grid has been removed.
On FPD systems, an icon displays in the status bar, indicating that the grid has been removed.
5-45
5. Imaging
Figure 5-40: Anti-Scatter Grid Detached icon in the status bar
5.11.2 Equivalent filtration

The system provides 6.75 mm ± 0.75 mm aluminum equivalent (at 75 kVp) total X-ray source
filtration in the X-ray beam.This filtration is equivalent to 3 mm aluminum plus 0.1 mm copper in
the X-ray beam.
5.12 Radiation display

The system displays three indications for dosimetry: Cumulative Air Kerma (CAK), Air Kerma
Rate (AKR), and Dose Area Product (DAP). This information continuously updates throughout
an exposure, and displays in the left side of the status bar. It is also available on the Dose
Summary screen.
5.12.1 Dosimetry display

These dosimetric indications are calculated in the system based on kVp, mA, exposure time,
exposure mode (pulsed or continuous exposure), and collimation. The dosimetry displayed can
be independently measured with a dosimeter. Dosimetry information requires accurate
calibration.
Note: Dosimetry can be displayed in units based on Grays (Gy) or Roentgens (R). This
setting can be changed on the Applications > Setup > Regional Settings screen.
If the radiation unit is set to Grays, the DAP units can be set to either Gy cm2, cGy
cm2, mGy m2, or mGy cm2. If the radiation unit is set to Roentgens, DAP displays as R
cm2.
5-46
5. Imaging
5.12.2 Air kerma and air kerma rate

Air Kerma (Kinetic Energy Released per unit Mass) is an indication of the radiation delivered to
the Patient Entrance Reference Point, a point in space, and is measured in the units of Grays
(Gy) or Roentgens (R).
The system determines the Patient Entrance Reference Point as a point along the central X-ray
beam axis between the focal spot and the center of the image detector entrance. This point is
located 30 cm above the image detector entrance, which is 70 cm from the focal spot.
Note: Selection of the Patient Entrance Reference Point is based on international convention
and typical usage of a multi-use mobile fluoroscopy system. This point should
represent a typical intersection of patient surface and the X-ray beam axis.
Note: Actual patient entrance air kerma rates may vary significantly depending on the
distance between the focal spot and the patient's skin surface.
Warning When the patient is positioned more than 30 cm from the image detector, the
dose received by the patient is higher than the indications displayed on
Workstation.
The Air Kerma display option on the system provides two indications of Air Kerma, the
Cumulative Air Kerma and the Air Kerma Rate.
l The Cumulative Air Kerma (CAK) is an indication of the accumulated Air Kerma at the
Patient Entrance Reference Point for the duration of the exam. The number is at 0 at the
beginning of the exam and increases for each X-ray exposure. The CAK value is
automatically reset to 0 at the beginning of each new exam. CAK is displayed in terms of
mGy or R.
l The Air Kerma Rate (AKR) is an indication of the instantaneous rate of radiation. During
an X-ray exposure, the AKR displays in units of mGy/min or R/min. Otherwise, the
system displays the AKR as 0 mGy/min.
Note: Air Kerma is useful in predicting short-term deterministic effects from radiation. See
5.13 Deterministic effects of ionizing radiation on humans beginning on page 5-56 for
more information.
Note: The International Commission on Radiological Protection in "Avoidance of Radiation

Injuries From Medical Interventional Procedures" (ICRP Publication 85)(2000)
suggests a threshold of 2 Gy.
Note: The system does NOT disable X-ray production at any radiation dose threshold.
5-47
5. Imaging
The system can display CAK and AKR using different units.
Table 5-4: CAK and AKR units
Measurement Units Conversion
CAK or Entrance Dose Gy or R 1Gy corresponds to 114 Roentgens
(R).
AKR or Entrance Exposure mGy/min or R/min 1Gy corresponds to 114 Roentgens
Rate (R).
5.12.3 Dose Area Product (DAP)

The calculated dose area product is a measure of radiation emitted by the X-ray tube. This
does not represent the radiation absorbed by the patient. DAP is the product of the exposed
area and the Air Kerma. DAP does not depend on the patient position relative to the X-ray tube.
The system computes the area of the X-ray field from the position of the fixed and adjustable
components in the collimator. The area of the X-ray field varies with the iris and shutter
settings, and is reduced by using smaller iris and shutter openings. Both the collimator and
dose information rely on system calibration for accuracy.
Note: DAP is useful for assessing the risk of long-term stochastic effects from radiation. For
example, an increased risk of cancer due to lifetime radiation exposure is a stochastic
effect.
Note: The system does NOT disable X-ray at any radiation dose threshold.
The DAP specification for accuracy is based on the IEC 60601-2-43.
Dose Area Product (DAP) display

Dose Area Product is measured in the units of mGy m2, cGy cm2, Gy cm2, or mGy cm2 (when
Gy is the selected radiation unit), or Rcm2 (when R is the selected radiation unit).
The DAP display option on the system provides the DAP for each X-ray exposure on the left
side of the status bar. Between exposures, the system retains the DAP value for the previous
exposure on the left side of the status bar. The Dose Summary screen displays the
accumulated DAP for the entire exam. The DAP value is automatically reset to 0 at the
beginning of each new exam.
5.12.4 Dose summary

The Dose Summary screen displays X-ray exposure dosimetry data for each patient exam and
the total for all a specific patient’s exams.
To display this screen, touch View under the Dose Summary thumbnail on the Images screen.
See 8.5.1 Display the dose summary on page 8-21 for how to display this screen.
5-48
5. Imaging
Figure 5-41: Dose Summary screen

1. Patient information
2. Exam information
3. Total exposure summary for the
current exams.
4. Exposure for each dose mode
5. Pedal Time in seconds, which is
the amount of time the X-ray On
switch was pressed.
6. The total time that X-rays were
being generated.
7. Calculated Dose Area Product
(the dose in mGy or R times the
exposed area in meters) for the
whole procedure or study.
8. The Cumulative Air Kerma
calculated in mGy or R. The
displayed Cumulative Air Kerma
values are based on the Patient
Entrance Reference Point of 30
cm from the image detector. See
5.12.2 Air kerma and air kerma
rate beginning on page 5-47 for more information.
9. Dose Calibration Date. The date on which dose display accuracy calibration was last
performed. Dose display accuracy should be checked during planned maintenance and
calibration should be performed if needed. If a date is not shown, the dose display
accuracy calibration has not been performed, and the reported dose display will not be
accurate. Contact service to have dose display accuracy calibrated.
Note: Pedal time is the total time an X-ray control is pressed during an exam, while exposure
time is the total time X-rays are being generated during an exam. These times may be
different, such as when pulsed modes are used.
Note: In Pulsed modes, the total time that X-rays were generated displays in the Time
column, rather than the length of time that the X-ray switch was pressed.
Note: The displayed AKR and CAK values are based on a reference point 70 cm from the
focal spot (30 cm from the detector entrance) along the X-ray beam axis. The
reference point location is based on international convention and typical usage of a
multi-use mobile fluoroscopy system. GE OEC has selected this location to represent a
typical intersection of patient surface and the X-ray beam axis. Actual patient AKR and
CAK may vary significantly depending on source-to-skin distance.
5.12.5 Radiation Dose Structured Report (RDSR)

The Radiation Dose Structured Report (RDSR) displays X-ray exposure dosimetry and exam
data for a specific patient's exams. A RDSR is created for each exam.
The system can archive RDSRs to a portable media device or to DICOM storage. When
5-49
5. Imaging
RDSRs are copied to a portable media device, a portable DICOM viewer can be written to the
device and can be used to review those images on a PC.
The RDSR displays in the Images tab on the main system monitor and the Touch / Tableside
C-Arm control panel for completed exams:
Figure 5-42: RDSR icon
Regulations require dose to be recorded for all radiation events, so the RDSR lists all dose
accumulated during the exam, including dose that does not result in a saved image.
A Digital Cine Pulse run may be reported as a continuous shot in the RDSR because the user
released the pedal or X-ray switch prior to at least two pulses, that is before the system started
taking a Digital Cine Pulse.
5.12.6 Radiation associated with modes

The following table summarizes the modes available on the system, the X-ray techniques
available with each mode, time limitations, auto save behavior, and a brief list of examples for
each mode. The examples are not exhaustive and other uses may be as valid as the examples
shown. The user must be aware of the techniques associated with the various modes and
monitor dose rates and doses for each patient.
5-50
5. Imaging
Table 5-5: Imaging mode overview

Imaging X-ray Technique1 Maximum Time Auto Auto Record Clinical Imaging
Mode kV mA Per Shot Save Task Examples
Fluoro 40 - 120 0.2 - 10 Unlimited Optional 2 General fluoro ima-
ging
Roadmap 40 - 120 0.2 - 10 Unlimited Phase 1: Phase 1: N/A Roadmap imaging
Always
saves
Phase 2: Optional 2
Pulsed Fluoro 40 - 120 0.2 - 28 Unlimited Optional 2 Low-dose imaging
High Level 40 - 120 0.2 - 20 30 s Optional 2 Dense anatomy
Fluoro (HLF) (low noise)
Pulsed HLF 40 - 120 0.2 - 40 30 s Optional 2 Fluoro video
Subtract 40 - 120 0.2 - 40 30 s Optional 2 Optional Subtraction
except where
required by
regulations
(on by default)
2
Pulsed Subtract 40 - 120 0.2 - 40 30 s Optional 2 Optional Subtraction

except where
required by
regulations
(on by default)
2
Digital Spot 40 - 120 1.4 - 75 1.3 s Always N/A Short-duration,

saves3 high mA
imaging
Pulsed Digital 40 - 120 10 - 150 15 PPS: 25 s4 N/A Always Cardiac and
Cine 30 PPS: 10 s4 records5 vascular
Imaging
1. Technique limits may vary based on local regulations, kV setting, and imaging mode.
2. The auto save feature may be enabled to automatically save the last image held on the
left side of the main system monitor display during imaging. When the auto save feature
is enabled, the system automatically saves the image displayed on the main system
monitor when the X-ray switch is released.
3. The auto save feature does not apply to Roadmap-1 and Digital Spot modes, as these
modes always save automatically.
4. Maximum time is based on configuration.
5. Pulsed digital cine always records. Auto record cannot be turned off for pulsed digital
cine runs.
The maximum reference air kerma rate and reference air kerma per frame is delivered with the
following loading factors:
5-51
5. Imaging
l HLF: 120kV/16mA
l Pulsed HLF: 120kV/35mA
l Digital spot: 120kV/33mA
l Digital cine pulse: 120kV/125mA
Imaging Modes
When you select a mode, the previous mode is disengaged.
Fluoro / Roadmap (both positive and negative contrast)
kV: 40 - 120
mA: 0.2 - 10
Mode Description: Fluoro mode displays live fluoroscopic images. Roadmap mode displays
live fluoroscopic images to be used in Roadmapping.
Enable mode: Fluoro mode is enabled by default.
Acquire X-rays: To take a Fluoro shot, press the left X-ray switch on the footswitch,
handswitch, or the X-ray On switch on the C-Arm.
Screen indic- When Fluoro mode is enabled, the C-Arm control panel displays the default
ations: technique. The status bar displays Fluoro or Roadmap, as follows:
or
Pulsed Fluoro
kV: 40 - 120
mA: 0.2 - 28
Mode Description: Pulsed Fluoro mode generates a user-selected number of X-ray pulses
each second while the X-ray switch is pressed. Use of a pulsed fluoro
mode can significantly reduce the dose rate, but image quality may be
degraded in this mode as a result.
Enable mode: To enable Pulsed Fluoro mode, press the Pulse key on the C-Arm or select
a Pulse rate on the Mode screen.
Acquire X-rays: To take a Pulsed Fluoro shot, press the left X-ray switch on the
footswitch, handswitch, or the X-ray On switch on the C-Arm.
Mode indications: When Pulsed Fluoro mode is enabled, one of the Pulse options on the
Mode screen is filled and the status bar displays Fluoro and the pulse rate
(PPS), as follows:
High Level Fluoro (HLF) / Subtract (both positive and negative contrast)
kV: 40 - 120
HLF mA: 0.2 - 20
Subtract mA: 0.2 - 40
5-52
5. Imaging
Mode Description: High Level Fluoro (HLF) mode decreases noise level and improves image
quality by increasing fluoroscopic mA. Continuous HLF uses mA levels up
to 20 mA. HLF mode is limited to 30 seconds per shot. Subtract mode uses
HLF imaging for Subtraction imaging, which can use mA levels up to 40
mA.
Enable mode: HLF mode is enabled by default in some locations. In others, HLF is
unarmed; press the HLF button to arm HLF for each shot.
Acquire X-rays: To take an HLF shot, press the right X-ray switch on the footswitch or
handswitch.
Mode indications: When HLF mode is enabled, the status bar displays HLF or Subtract, as
follows:
or
Pulsed HLF / Pulsed Subtract (both positive and negative contrast)

kV: 40 - 120
mA: 0.2 - 40
Mode Description: Pulsed HLF mode decreases noise level and improves image quality by
increasing fluoroscopic mA. Pulsed HLF uses mA levels up to 40 mA.
Pulsed HLF is limited to 30 seconds per shot. Pulsed Subtract mode uses
HLF imaging for pulsed Subtraction imaging.
Enable mode: To enable Pulsed HLF mode, press the Pulse key on the C-Arm or touch
HLF on the Mode screen and select a pulse rate.
Acquire X-rays: To take a Pulsed HLF shot, press the right X-ray switch on the
footswitch or handswitch, or the X-ray On switch on the C-Arm.
Mode indications: When Pulsed HLF mode is enabled, the status bar displays HLF or
Subtract and the pulse rate (PPS), as follows:
or
Digital Cine Pulse

kV: 40 - 120
mA: 10 - 150
Mode Description: Digital Cine Pulse mode, available on Vas15, VasMTS, and Cardiac
systems, combines shorter pulsed widths with higher mA values to reduce
image motion artifacts. In this mode, camera gain is reduced and the mA
increases to as much as 150 mA, there is no dose reduction, exposure time
is limited, and averaging is turned off.
Enable mode: Cardiac systems: Digital Cine Pulse mode is enabled by default. These
systems have a three-pedal footswitch.
Acquire X-rays: Cardiac systems: Press the far-right X-ray switch on the three-pedal
footswitch.
Enable mode: Vascular systems: Touch Digital Cine Pulse on the Mode screen.
5-53
5. Imaging
Acquire X-rays: Vascular systems: Press the right X-ray switch on the footswitch or
handswitch.
Mode indications: When Digital Cine Pulse mode is enabled, the status bar displays Digital
Cine and the pulse rate (PPS) and, if applicable, frames per second (FPS),
as follows:
Digital Spot
kV: 40 - 120
mA: 1.4 - 75
Mode Description: Digital Spot mode creates a short-duration, high-mA exposure to produce a
high-quality single image.
Note: Digital Spot mode works independently of the low dose feature. In
Digital Spot mode, dose levels are similar regardless of whether
low dose is enabled or disabled.
Enable mode: To enable Digital Spot mode, touch Digital Spot on the Mode screen.
Acquire X-rays: To take a Digital Spot shot, first press the left X-ray switch on the
footswitch or handswitch, allowing the system to acquire the appropriate
technique, and then press the right X-ray switch. The system locks the
kV technique and increases mA for the Digital Spot exposure. See 16.3.3
Modes of operation beginning on page 16-9 for the relationship of fluoro
technique to Digital Spot technique.
Mode indications: When Digital Spot mode is enabled, the status bar displays Digital Spot,
as follows:
Footswitches and modes

The modes displayed in the status bar and in the Mode screen relate to the two- or three-pedal
footswitch as follows.
Table 5-6: Two-pedal footswitch and modes
Mode Left X-ray Switch Right X-ray Switch
Group
Standard Fluoro HLF, Digital Spot, or Digital

Fluoroscopy Cine
Vascular Fluoro or Roadmap Subtract
Mode Toggle Small center switch
5-54
5. Imaging
Table 5-7: Three-pedal footswitch and modes

Mode Left X-ray Switch Right X-ray Far-right X-ray Switch
Group Switch
Standard Fluoro HLF or Digital Digital Cine

Fluoroscopy Spot
Vascular / Fluoro or Subtraction Digital Cine
Cardiac Roadmap
Mode Toggle Small switch between left and center footswitches
Table 5-8: Handswitch and modes

Mode Left X-ray Switch Right X-ray Switch
Group
Standard Fluoro HLF, Digital Spot, or Digital

Fluoroscopy Cine
Vascular Fluoro or Roadmap Subtract
Mode Toggle Top right key
Visual and audible X-ray indication

The following visual indications are provided as alerts that X-rays are being generated.
Imaging C-Arm X-ray Workstation X-ray Workstation / Audible
Mode On Lamp (Yel- On Lamp (Yellow) C-Arm Display Alarms
low)
Fluoro On continuously On continuously LIVE pulses on bottom left Pulsed alarm
of the monitor
Pulsed Blinks at Blinks at LIVE pulses on bottom of Pulsed alarm
Fluoro 3-5 Hz 3-5 Hz the monitor
HLF On continuously On continuously LIVE pulses on bottom left Pulsed alarm at twice the
of the monitor rate as the standard
alarm
Pulsed Blinks at Blinks at LIVE pulses on bottom left Pulsed alarm at twice the
HLF 3-5 Hz 3-5 Hz of the monitor rate as standard alarm
Digital On during On during LIVE displays briefly on bot- By default: Single audible
Spot X-ray X-ray tom left of the monitor. X- beep (at a higher pitch
exposure exposure rays automatically ter- than the Fluoro beep) fol-
minate, and Save icon and lowed by three beeps to
number of saved image dis- indicate when image is
play briefly on bottom left of automatically saved. The
the monitor. beep at the beginning
can be disabled by Ser-
vice.
5-55
5. Imaging
Digital Blinks at Blinks at LIVE pulses on bottom left Single audible beep (at a
Cine 3-5 Hz 3-5 Hz of the monitor higher pitch than the
Pulse Fluoro beep) followed by
higher pitched pulsed
beep.
When the alarm is triggered, the system generates a constant alarm until the Alarm Reset key
is pressed.
5.13 Deterministic effects of ionizing radiation on

humans
During normal use of an X-ray system, there is a risk that dose levels may occur that have
deterministic effects on humans. The risk of occurrence increases with procedures that require
higher dose levels (high kV and mA) and/or are of prolonged duration.
CAK is useful in predicting short-term deterministic effects from radiation. Examples of
deterministic effects include skin injury and hair loss. The United States Food and Drug
Administration (FDA) in “Recording Information in the Patient's Medical Record That Identifies
the Potential for Serious X-ray-Induced Skin Injuries,” (1995), suggests a threshold of 1 Gy,
beyond which deterministic effects might appear. The International Commission on
Radiological Protection (ICRP) in "Avoidance of Radiation Injuries From Medical Interventional
Procedures (ICRP Publication 85)(2000) suggests a threshold of 2 Gy beyond which
deterministic effects might appear.
It is possible, in all Fluoroscopy modes, to reach deterministic thresholds of radiation if the
radiation exposure goes long enough. For most typical fluoroscopic procedures the dose to
patient is low and the risk if injury is low. Complicated interventional procedures of prolonged
duration may reach and exceed the deterministic level threshold. To avoid reaching this
threshold, use reduced dose techniques or reorient the X-ray beam in relation to the patient
anatomy whenever possible.
Use the Image Acquisition setup screen to select a CAK limit commensurate with the local and
the hospital’s thresholds of radiation. Then, when the CAK limit is exceeded, a CUMULATIVE
AIR KERMA LIMIT EXCEEDED message displays in the status bar. See 2.1.3 Set up image
acquisition beginning on page 2-4 for information on selecting a CAK limit.
See Appendix A: Dose rates beginning on page A-1 for information on typical AKR dose rates
related to specific modes of operation and techniques under specific conditions.
See 16.4.3 Zones of occupancy on page 16-18 for information on typical dose rates to the
operator.
5-56
6. Dynamic recording
The system can record dynamic images, called cine runs. The Reference > Cine > Cine
Setup screen allows you to enable and disable cine acquisition for the various image modes
and to set cine acquisition rates.
Warning Use caution while the Workstation is in use. The system is always running
during operation of the Workstation. Any sudden, intense impact can damage
the system and could result in loss of previously recorded cine runs and
prevent further imaging.
During acquisition, cine images are recorded until the exam is complete.
Note: Cine runs can be archived to a portable media device for further review after the exam
completes. See 8.3 Retrieve a saved exam beginning on page 8-14 for information
about archiving cine runs.
When acquiring a cine run, the system will not save the run until after the video has stabilized
and 2 frames have been captured. Runs shorter than 5 frames will be discarded.
At lower cine acquisition rates, it may take up to 2 seconds to record a cine run successfully.
When recording begins, a frame counter displays on the left side of the main system monitor.
When a Digital Cine Pulse run is saved, an automatic cue point is created at the beginning of
the stable, usable frames. As a result, all Digital Cine Pulse runs are marked with a "trimmed"
thumbnail in the Images screen.
When available cine space is shown to be full, there is still enough storage space left to
complete the exam. When there is no more storage space left, an X-RAYS TEMPORARILY
DISABLED message displays and exams cannot be started or resumed until space is freed.
See 8.7 Check disk space on page 8-29 for details on how to check used and remaining space
on the disk. If disk space is low, use one of the methods described in 8.8 Archive images
beginning on page 8-30 to save exams, or delete images as described in 8.9 Delete exams and
images beginning on page 8-36.
To display the Cine screen, touch Cine... from the Reference screen.
6-1
Figure 6-1: Cine... button on the Reference screen

Figure 6-2: Reference > Cine screen
6-2
6.1 Cine setup

Use the Cine Setup screen to enable cine acquisition, and change the recording rate (frame
rate). Check the system configuration to determine the space available for cine runs.
The Cine Setup screen displays the storage time remaining in number of seconds. This
number displays adjacent to the Rate button for each mode and on the left side of the main
system monitor.
Touch Cine Setup... on the Cine screen.
Figure 6-3: Cine Setup... button on the Cine screen
6-3
Figure 6-4: Cine Setup screen
6-4
Select image modes for cine recording

Select the check box next to the corresponding imaging mode to enable or disable cine
recording. Cine recording is enabled if the box is selected, and the record rate only applies
when cine recording for the corresponding imaging mode is enabled.
Figure 6-5: Cine Setup screen - Acquire
If a mode is not available on this screen, contact service to enable the mode for your system.
Pulsed digital cine always records. Auto record cannot be turned off for pulsed digital cine runs.
Depending on regulations, disabling automatic recording of Subtract runs may not be allowed
in some locations. By default, cine acquisition is enabled for Subtract mode.
6-5
Select a continuous acquisition rate

The current acquisition rate displays under Acquire Rate for each mode. The acquisition
default for Fluoro, HLF, and Roadmap modes is 8 FPS and 30 FPS for continuous subtract
mode. If pulse is enabled, the acquisition rate equals the pulse rate.
The available acquisition time, listed as Seconds Remaining, varies according to the
acquisition rate. Select a lower rate to increase the amount of acquisition time.
Select one of the continuous rates for each imaging mode available for cine acquisition.
Figure 6-6: Cine Setup screen - continuous rate options for Fluoro mode
The status bar displays the acquisition rate (FPS) when cine acquire is enabled for that mode
and the mode is selected.
Figure 6-7: Status bar showing a fluoro cine rate of 8 FPS
Pulsed mode acquisition rate

The pulsed rate and recording time remaining display for each imaging mode selected for cine
acquisition in the Pulsed Mode section of the screen.
Pulsed mode acquisition overrides any selected acquisition rate. In pulsed modes, if the
acquisition rate check box is selected, acquisition is performed at the pulsed rate, and the
selected acquisition rate is ignored.
6-6
Figure 6-8: Cine Setup screen - pulsed mode rate and time remaining display
Touch OK to save any changes and close the Cine Setup screen.
6.2 Cine review

Cine run thumbnails include the letter C next to the image number on the Images screen, as
shown in Figure 6-9: Images screen with cine thumbnail on page 6-8. Cine runs display the
same exam information as static images. Apply any of the post-processing functions to a single
frame of a cine run. See 8.2 Image processing beginning on page 8-9 for more information.
Use the Cine screen to review a cine run, set cues, adjust landmark and registration, define a
roadmap mask, or select a mask at any point in the run to reprocess a subtraction.
6-7
6.2.1 Review a cine run

Note: Some systems are set up to use Mini Cine by default. See 6.2.6 Mini cine playback
beginning on page 6-17 for more information on the Mini Cine controls.
Note: If an error displays while a cine run is playing and cine images are being transferred,
touch OK to acknowledge the error message and return to the cine run playback.
For best results, allow transfer processes to complete before viewing cine runs.
To review a cine run:
1. Touch the Images tab to display the Images screen and all images and cine runs for the
current patient.
Note: See 8.3 Retrieve a saved exam beginning on page 8-14 for selecting a cine run from a
different patient exam.
Figure 6-9: Images screen with cine thumbnail
2. Select the thumbnail of the cine run in the Images screen. Cine playback occurs on the
left side of the main system monitor and the Cine screen displays on the right side of the
3. As playback progresses through the acquired images, the frame number changes to
indicate the position of the frame within the run.
6-8
Figure 6-10: Cine playback and mask indicator bar

1. Progress bar
2. Position of mask (vertical black line)
3. Amount of time (in seconds)
elapsed from start of cine run
4. Frame number display
4. Replay continues to loop until you touch the Play / Pause ( ) button to pause the run
to view a single frame or exit.
Figure 6-11: Cine playback buttons
l Touch to move forward by a
single frame.
l Touch to move back by a
single frame.
l Touch to move forward by 10
frames.
l
Touch to move back by 10
frames.
l
Touch to begin, pause, or
resume cine playback.
l Touch Minimize to close the Cine
screen and display the cine
playback controls on the selected
cine run. See 6.2.6 Mini cine
playback beginning on page 6-17
for an explanation of the Mini Cine
controls.
6-9
6.2.2 Select cine runs from the Cine screen

Use the Cine screen to view each cine run for a single patient.
Figure 6-12: Cine run selection buttons
l Touch < to review the previous
cine run for the current patient
session.
l Touch > to review the next
cine run for the current patient
session.
The total number of runs is noted as Run X of X. This number does not correspond with the
image number of the cine run in the Images screen. The run number indicates the cine run
currently being reviewed and the number of runs available for review.
6-10
6.2.3 Set subtraction mask

1. Use the playback buttons to display a selected frame as the mask on the left side of the
2. Touch Set Mask.
Figure 6-13: Set Mask button
3. Use the playback buttons to review the run.
6-11
6.2.4 Set cues

Use the Set Cues function to select a portion of a cine run for playback.
1. Touch Set Cues....
Figure 6-14: Set Cues... button
The Set Cues dialog box displays on the Cine screen.
6-12
Figure 6-15: Mask indicator bar with a mask frame (2) and cues set (1 and 3)
2. Pause the run. Use the playback buttons to display the frame in the cine run that will be
the starting cue.
3. Touch Set Left to set the beginning cue.
4. Advance to the chosen ending frame. Touch Set Right to set the ending cue. Playback
displays the images located between the cues.
5. To delete the cues, touch Clear Left or Clear Right.
6. Touch OK to close the Set Cues dialog box.
Note: The cues remain set on the cine run until they are cleared. If a run with cues is archived,
only the portion of the session between the cues will be archived.
Cine runs with cues saved display a thumbnail with a trim icon on the Images screen. The
thumbnail on the Images screen may display a frame which is not included in the trimmed cine
run.
Figure 6-16: Cine run thumbnail with trim icon
6-13
Note: Digital cine pulse runs automatically include a cue at the beginning of the run.
Regulations require the cine run to include all frames captured, including the frames
captured while the image stabilizes. These frames do not contain usable images, and
therefore a cue is placed at the beginning of the usable frames.
6.2.5 Viewing options

The Cine screen offers the following options:
l View a cine run in subtracted or unsubtracted form.
l Perform a post-processing subtraction from a fluoro or HLF run.
l Apply peak opacification to a subtracted or unsubtracted run.
View in subtracted or unsubtracted form

Enable and disable subtracted view by touching View Subtracted on the Cine screen. View
Subtracted is only available if the selected cine run is a subtracted run.
If the View Subtracted button is highlighted, the cine run displays in subtracted form.
Figure 6-17: View Subtracted button
To view the run in unsubtracted form, touch View Subtracted again. The button is no longer
highlighted and the cine run displays unsubtracted.
Note: Roadmaps cannot display in unsubtracted form.
6-14
Perform a post-processing subtraction

If contrast has been injected during acquisition of fluoro or HLF images, the run can be played
or used for a mask. Use the Set Mask and View Subtracted buttons to display a post-
processing subtraction on the left side of the main system monitor.
Note: The displayed image should not have any contrast material in it prior to selecting Set
Mask, or vessel visualization will be lost.
To perform a post-processing Subtraction using a fluoro or HLF image:
1. Display the run to use as the mask on the left side of the main system monitor.
2. Touch Set Mask.
3. Touch View Subtracted.
The fluoro or HLF run displays as a subtraction on the left side of the main system monitor. Use
the cine playback buttons to review the run.
Apply peak opacification during playback

Peak opacification is a process automatically applied in roadmap mode during mask
acquisition. Each pixel of a new frame is compared with its counterpart in the previous frame. If
the new pixel is darker than in the previous image, the old pixel is replaced. The resulting image
contains the darkest pixels acquired for each point.
Figure 6-18: Peak Opacify button
Use the Peak Opacify button during post-processing to view a subtraction run with
opacification. The areas darkened by the contrast media remain dark in the playback of the run,
providing maximum vessel display.
6-15
Adjust mask
Figure 6-19: Adjust Mask button
See Adjust the mask beginning on page 5-35 for information on how to adjust the mask or
landmarking on an image.
Roadmap mask
Figure 6-20: Roadmap Mask button
6-16
Use this button to select an image or frame to be used as a mask. Select from a Last Image
Hold, a recalled image, or a frame from a subtracted or unsubtracted cine run. See Produce a
Roadmap mask from a cine run beginning on page 5-40.
6.2.6 Mini cine playback

Mini cine playback allows you to review cine runs using playback controls displayed on the
same screen as the cine run. To activate mini cine, touch Minimize on the Cine Playback
screen. A screen similar to the following displays.
Note: See 2.1.2 System setup screens beginning on page 2-2 to make the mini cine display
the default for viewing cine runs.
Figure 6-21: Mini cine controls
1. Roadmap Mask – use to select a

roadmap mask from previously
saved masks or create a mask from
a subtraction cine run.
2. Cine playback and Mask indicator
bar – shows progress of playback
and the mask frame, if applicable.
3. Elapsed time in seconds and
current frame number.
4. Peak Opacify– applies peak
opacification to the current cine run.
5. Next/previous cine run for the

selected patient.
6. Current/total cine runs for the
selected patient.
7. OK – exits cine playback and
returns to the Reference screen.
8. Cine playback controls – Play / Pause, Forward / Back one frame, Forward / Back
multiple frames.
9. Maximize – returns to Cine screen.
Note: Mini cine controls provide the same functionality as the equivalent Cine screen controls
described previously in this chapter.
6-17
6.3 Using zoom with dynamic images

The system includes the ability to apply magnification to an entire dynamic image run (cine
runs, subtractions, and roadmaps). See 5.5 Live zoom beginning on page 5-15 for details on
using the Zoom feature.
To apply zoom to a saved dynamic recording:
1. While reviewing the dynamic image, press Zoom on the image control keypad. The
Zoom screen displays on the right side of the main system monitor, with a slider and a
yellow box to indicate the magnified area of the reference frame, and the left side of the
screen displays the magnified portion of the frame.
Figure 6-22: The magnified portion of the reference frame (left) and the Zoom screen (right)
2. Adjust the zoom using the up and down arrows on the slider, and move the yellow box to
the area to be magnified, as needed. The left side of the screen displays the adjusted
image. Images can be zoomed up to 4x in 0.2 increments.
3. When the desired adjustments are complete, touch OK. The zoomed dynamic image
displays according to the system's default settings.
To turn off the digital zoom on a dynamic image, press Zoom on the image control keypad and
drag the Zoom slider all the way down to 1x, then touch OK.
6-18
7. Image annotation and measurement

This chapter explains how to use image annotation to place markers, add comments, and
measure features on last image hold (LIH) images, cine images, and saved images.
Images saved with annotations can be edited at any time. Annotations can be added (up to the
annotation limit), changed, moved, or deleted. Annotations cannot be placed outside the field
of view displayed on the system.
Note: The Annotations feature is not available on GSP systems.
7.1 Display Annotation screen

7.1.1 Annotations on the main system monitor
Touch the Annotations tab to display the Annotation screen.
Figure 7-1: Annotation screen
When Annotations is opened, the current image from the left side of the main system monitor
also displays on the right side of the main system monitor, within the Annotations screen. If no
image is currently selected, the Annotations screen displays no image, and the Markers...,
Measure..., and Add Comment buttons are disabled.
7-1
Touch Exit on the Annotations screen at any time to display the Reference screen.
7.1.2 Annotations on the Touch / Tableside C-Arm control panel

To open the annotations and measurements toolbars on the Touch / Touch Tableside C-Arm
control panel, touch the new Annotations / Measurements button:
Figure 7-2: Image processing bar showing the (1) Annotations / Measurements button and
the (2) Hide / Show Annotations button
A toolbar displays on the left side of the screen. similar to the following:
Figure 7-3: Annotations toolbar on the
Touch / Touch Tableside C-Arm control panel
1. Measurements selection
button - touch to switch to the
Measurements toolbar
2. Directional Arrow marker
buttons
3. Left (L) / Right (R) marker
buttons
4. Comment button
5. Virtual Keyboard button
6. Delete Annotation button
7-2
Figure 7-4: Measurements toolbar on the

Touch / Touch Tableside C-Arm control panel
1. Annotations selection button -

touch to switch to the
Annotations toolbar
2. Distance measurement button
3. Calibrate measurement button
4. Angle measurement button
5. Stenosis measurement button
6. Virtual Keyboard button
7. Delete Annotation button
Note: The Annotations screen closes automatically if an X-ray shot is taken.
Moving and deleting measurement lines

Measurement lines on the Touch / Touch Tableside C-Arm control panel include a midpoint
control. Select this control to move the entire measurement line or to delete it.
7.1.3 Fine-tune annotation and measurement placement

Annotations and measurement endpoints can be moved in small increments using the arrow
keys on the virtual keyboard. To do so:
1. Touch the measurement endpoint or annotation to be moved.
2. Touch the Virtual Keyboard button. The virtual keyboard displays.
3. Touch the arrow keys on the virtual keyboard to fine-tune the endpoint placement.
The virtual keyboard disappears when another annotation or measurement endpoint is
selected. To move another endpoint, repeat the steps above.
7.2 Image markers

Markers are objects used to point out features in an image, and to indicate left and right on the
image.
Up to five markers can be placed on any image.
7-3
7.2.1 Place a marker

1. Touch Markers... on the Annotations screen to display the Markers screen and the
Markers object bar at the top of the screen.
Figure 7-5: Markers screen showing an arrow and an L marker
The markers object bar includes four directional arrows and L (left) and R (right) markers.
2. Touch a marker button in the object bar. The marker displays on both sides of the
monitor.
3. To position a marker, touch the marker on the right side of the main system monitor and
drag it to the desired position. To fine tune the position, use the arrow keys on the
keyboard. Each press of an arrow key moves the selected marker by four pixels.
4. To add more markers, repeat steps 2 and 3. Up to five markers can be placed on any
image.
5. Press Save to save a copy of the image with the markers. This step is only for static
images because annotations save automatically on cine runs.
6. Touch OK to close the Markers screen. The annotated image remains displayed on the
left side of the main system monitor until you press an X-ray switch or recall a saved
image.
7.2.2 Delete markers

1. Touch the marker on the right side of the main system monitor to select it.
2. Touch the Delete button, or press Delete on the keyboard.
7-4
7.3 Image comments

Comments are short text annotations on an image.
Up to five comments can be placed on any image.
Caution Do not enter personal information or Protected Health Information (PHI) in image
annotations. Information entered in image annotations is preserved even after
patient de-identification and can compromise patient privacy. Enter the
information in provided patient fields only.
7.3.1 Place comments on an image

1. Touch Add Comment on the Annotation screen. A comment box displays.
Figure 7-6: Comment box on the Annotation screen
2. Enter text in the comment box. Comments have no character limit but can be only as
long as the width of the image.
7-5
Figure 7-7: Comment with text entered
l To position the comment box on the image, select the comment box on the right side
of the main system monitor and drag it. Use the keyboard arrow keys to fine-position
each comment box. Each press of an arrow key moves the box four pixels.
l To add additional comments, touch Add Comment and enter another comment. Up to
five comments can be placed on any image.
3. Press Save to save a copy of the image with the comments. This step is only for static
images because annotations save automatically on cine runs.
7.3.2 Delete comments from an image

1. Touch the comment on the right side of the main system monitor to select it.
7-6
7.4 Measure an image

Measure allows you to measure features on an image, measure an angle, and measure the
ratio of a stenotic area.
Caution Measurements are for reference only, and are not intended for diagnostic
purposes.
Measurement units are millimeters (mm) for distance measurements, percent (%) for stenosis
measurements, and degrees (°) for angle measurements. Failure to correctly calibrate the
system may result in inaccurate distance measurements. When calibrated accurately, distance
measurements are accurate to within 0.4 mm or better. When calibration is performed, the
reference calibration value displays in the upper-right corner of the Calibrate screen. See 7.4.1
Calibration beginning on page 7-8 for how to calibrate before measuring an image.
Measurements can be applied to a saved image, a cine run, a recalled image, an image
magnified using the zoom feature, a Last Image Hold (LIH) image, and the current image
displayed. Note that a cine run pauses when entering the Annotations feature. Measurements
applied to a cine run display on the entire cine run.
Up to eight annotations - five distance measurements, two angle measurements, and one
stenosis measurement - can be placed on any image.
To position the measurement box on the image, touch and drag the endpoint. Use the
keyboard arrow keys to fine-position each endpoint. Each press of an arrow key moves the box
one pixel.
Caution Measurements should only be performed on images created with the detector
parallel to the anatomy to be measured. If the detector is not parallel to the
anatomy during imaging, measurements may be inaccurate.
Note: Because the left side of the main system monitor does not display a box around the
endpoint, endpoints may be more easily placed while looking at the left side of the main
system monitor.
Note: The Measure screen closes when X-rays are enabled.
7-7
Figure 7-8: Measure screen
7.4.1 Calibration
Note: Calibration must be performed before distance measurements are applied and should
be performed before stenosis measurements are applied. Stenosis can display only a
percentage if no calibration is performed.
To perform a calibration between two points, place a measuring device in the plane of interest.
For the most accurate calibration and subsequent measurements, place the anatomy to be
measured as close as possible to the center of the detector, and place the measuring device for
calibration as close as possible to the anatomy and in the same plane of the anatomy. The
magnification mode may also affect the accuracy.
The distance on the image should be marked during calibration and the length value entered in
the mm or French measurement box. Once the value is entered, the reference value for the
fixed length displays in the upper-right corner of the Calibrate screen.
When calibration is changed during a procedure, the values in length for stenosis and distance
adjust to the new calibration values.
On cine run frames, each frame of a cine run will receive measurement calculations based on
the same calibration values when measurements are applied. When the frame is saved, it is
saved as a single frame with the current calibration and cannot be modified when calibration is
adjusted. Calibration performed on a single frame of a cine run is used for measurements on
any frame of that cine run. Because anatomy can move throughout a cine run, it is best to
calibrate on the same frame that will be used for measurement. If the frame is saved, it is saved
as a single frame with the current calibration. To change the calibration on a cine run frame,
recall the frame and perform calibration on it again.
When zoom is enabled on an image, the reference calibration values are scaled to match the
7-8
zoom factor.
Perform calibration
1. Touch Calibrate on the Measure screen.
Figure 7-9: Calibrate screen
2. On the Calibrate screen, move the crosshairs to set the distance.

3. Enter the measured length or catheter size in the appropriate calibration input box.
7.4.2 Measure a distance

Calibration must be performed before distance measurements can be placed. The Distance
button will not be active until calibration is performed.
A default calculation displays when the first endpoint is placed. The distance calculation
displays once both endpoints have been placed. This value displays adjacent to the line.
When calibration is changed during the procedure, the distance measurements are
recalculated and the new values display. Any new images taken after calibration must be
calibrated, as the patient or C-Arm may have moved or been repositioned.
Perform distance measurements

1. Perform calibration.
2. Touch the Distance button on the Measure screen. The image on the left side of the
main system monitor is copied to the right side and displayed in the Measure screen with
a default measurement line displayed. This line is based on the calibration performed.
7-9
Figure 7-10: Distance measurement
3. Touch one crosshair at either end of the line and position the beginning point of
measurement.
4. Touch the second crosshair and position the endpoint of measurement. The distance
measurement displays in millimeters below and to the right of the endpoint.
5. Press Save to save a copy of the image with the measurement information. This step is
only for static images because annotations save automatically on cine runs.
6. Touch OK to close the Measure screen. The annotated image remains displayed on the
image.
7.4.3 Measure an angle

Touch the Angle button to display the angle calculation. Angles can be used to measure
parallel lines (0°) as well as any angle from 1° to 360°. The lines of the angle do not have to
intersect on the screen.
When creating an image for angle measurements, place the image detector perpendicular to
the anatomy to be measured to create the most accurate angle measurements. If the C-Arm is
not perpendicular to the anatomy to be measured, angle measurements may be inaccurate.
Perform angle measurements

1. Touch the Angle button on the Measure screen. The image displays with a default 45°
angle.
Note: Calibration is not required for angle measurements.
7-10
Figure 7-11: Angle measurement
2. Touch the crosshairs at the ends of one line and position the endpoints of the angle.
3. Touch the crosshairs at the ends of the other line and position the endpoints of angle.
The endpoints do not have to intersect on the screen. The angle measurement displays
next to the arc between the two lines and updates as the lines are moved.
4. Press Save to save a copy of the image with the angle measurement. This step is only
for static images because annotations save automatically on cine runs.
image.
7.4.4 Measure a stenosis

A calibration should be performed before applying stenosis lines. If calibration is not performed,
only the stenosis percentage can display. Calibration may be performed after the stenosis lines
are placed.
The stenosis function is a ratio measurement of three distances. The ratio is the average of the
lines drawn above and below a stenosis and a dotted line bisecting the stenosis.
The dotted stenosis line is drawn across the stenotic region. The other two lines are drawn
across normal vessel regions above and below the stenotic region.
Once the lines have been placed, the percent stenosis displays near the start point of the
stenosis line. If calibration has been performed, the length of each line displays adjacent to and
below the endpoint.
7-11
Perform a stenosis measurement

1. Perform calibration.
2. Touch the Stenosis button on the Measure screen. Three measurement lines
appear.
Figure 7-12: Stenosis measurement
3. Place the shorter dashed default line to mark the stenotic area.
4. Place one longer, dotted line across a normal vessel distal to the stenotic region.
5. Place the other dotted line across a normal vessel proximal to the stenotic region.
6. Press Save to save a copy of the image with the stenosis measurement information.
This step is only for static images because annotations save automatically on cine runs.
image.
7.4.5 Delete measurements

1. From the Measure screen, touch the measurement's endpoint on the right side of the
screen to select it.
7.5 Hide and display annotations

Annotations can be hidden and displayed on recalled images, cine runs, and LIH images using
7-12
the Hide/Display Annotations button on the virtual control panel.

Figure 7-13: Hide/Display Annotations button
7.5.1 Hide annotations

To hide annotations:
1. With the image open on the main system monitor, touch the Virtual control panel button.
See 3.4.9 Virtual control panel beginning on page 3-33 for location of the Virtual control
panel button.
2. Touch the Hide/Display annotations button on the virtual control panel.
Any annotation content placed on the image is hidden.
If the image is saved with annotations, the annotation content is still saved with the image even
if the annotation content is hidden. If the image is printed with annotation content hidden, the
annotation content will appear on the printed output.
7.5.2 Display annotations

To display annotations:
1. With the image open on the main system monitor, touch the virtual control panel button.
2. Touch the Hide/Display annotations button on the virtual control panel.
Any annotation content saved with the image displays on the screen.
7-13
7.6 Digital pen tool

The system includes a digital pen tool. This tool allows the user to draw freely on the main
system monitor to mark Last Image Hold (LIH) or recalled images during procedures.
Note: The digital pen feature is not available on GSP systems.
Digital pen markups can be erased and redrawn on the image in real time. They remain on the
screen for the entire exam, unless deleted, but are not stored with or saved on the image as
annotations are.
To use the digital pen tool:
1. With an image on the screen, touch Annotations, then touch the Digital Pen button,
located directly beneath the Markers... button on the top left corner of the right side of the
Figure 7-14: Digital Pen button on the Annotations screen
Alternatively, on the C-Arm control panel, touch the Digital Pen icon under the image on
the left side of the screen.
7-14
Figure 7-15: Digital Pen button on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside C-Arm control panel
2. Draw or otherwise mark the image on the right side of the main system monitor. The
markups display on both sides of the monitor, and remain displayed for the entire exam,
unless the markups are deleted.
Figure 7-16: Digital Pen markups displayed on both sides of the monitor
7-15
3. Touch Digital Pen again to turn off the feature. The button toggles between enabled and
disabled states.
To delete digital pen markups, use one of the following methods:
l Start a new exam.
l Resume a previous exam.
l Touch the Delete button at the top-right corner of the Annotations screen, beneath
Measure... or from the image processing bar on the C-Arm control panel, under the
image. The last markup is deleted. To delete multiple markups, touch Delete multiple
times.
Figure 7-17: Delete button on the Annotations screen
7-16
Figure 7-18: Delete button on the OEC Touch / Touch Tableside C-Arm control panel
7-17
7-18
8. Review and archive

This chapter covers image review and processing, including how to create a new study from an
existing patient, review patient summaries and dose information, improve the quality of images
after the shot is taken, print images, and archive images.
8.1 Images
Use the Images screen to display static images and cine runs from previous or retrieved
exams, for review or modification.
Touch the Images tab to display the Images screen.
8-1
8.1.1 Images screen

Figure 8-1: Images screen features
1. Patient information. Lists brief

information about the current patient.
2. Available Exams. Shows exams
available for review, selected from the
previous exams list.
3. Thumbnail Images. Static images and
cine runs associated with the selected
patient.
4. Patient Summary. See 8.6.4 Print
patient summary on page 8-28.
5. Dose Summary. See 8.6.3 Print dose
summary on page 8-26.
6. Previous Exams. Touch to see a list of
all earlier exams for the current patient.
7. From. Use this button to select the source location for the copy operation.
Caution When copying to or from a portable media device, touch Load to make the
device available. Wait until the device information displays on the screen before
beginning the copy operation. Load time and copy rates may vary among
portable media devices, and the read speed of a device can be as much as 10x
faster than the write speed.
8. To. Touch to select the target destination for the copy operation. Device information
displays below to indicate the selected device and, for portable media devices, its used
and free space. Use this information to determine if the selected images will fit on the
device.
9. This button varies based on the target destination:
l Touch Options... to display the Images > Portable Media Options screen to
select save options for images and to format a portable media device
l Touch Layout... to select layout options for printing.
10. This button varies based on the target destination:
l Touch Print to send selected images to a printer.
l Touch Move to move selected images to the system or to a new study.
l Touch Send to send the selected images to a portable media device or a DICOM
server.
11. Select All. Touch to select all images in the gallery for copying or printing.
8-2
12. Delete. Touch to delete selected images from the system.

13. View DICOM.... Touch to view images from other modalities, such as CT images.
14. End Exam. Touch to end an exam, create a radiation report, and prepare it for archive.
15. Exit. Touch to close the Images screen.
8.1.2 Thumbnail icons

Thumbnails may display a small icon, indicating if it has been saved, printed, trimmed, or so on.
The thumbnail icons indicate the following:
Figure 8-2: Thumbnail icons
The image was sent to a picture The image was saved to or
archiving and communication sys- retrieved from a portable media
tem (PACS) location. device.
The image was committed to a The image is being processed.
PACS location.
The image was sent to a PACS loc- The image was printed using a
ation, but the transfer failed. DICOM printer.
The image was printed using an The cine run failed or is incom-
onboard (local) printer. plete.
One or more frames has been The image was used as a mask or
trimmed from the cine run using the has a mask applied.
Set Cues functionality on the Cine
Playback screen. Digital Cine Pulse
runs are always shown as trimmed The images was created using
because of the auto-cue set at the negative contrast such as CO2.
beginning of each run.
8.1.3 Damaged thumbnails in the image screen

If an image thumbnail has been damaged or otherwise becomes inaccessible to the system, a
damaged thumbnail icon displays on the Images screen.
Figure 8-3: Damaged thumbnail icon
Even though the thumbnail is damaged, the image itself is still available and can be displayed
by selecting the damaged thumbnail icon displayed in its place.
8.1.4 Image review

The system allows review of previous exams for comparison to current images.
8-3
Select previous exams to display on the Images screen

If there are previous exams for the current patient, including exams from other modalities and
those with different patient IDs, they display by default in the Available Exams drop-down list
on the Images screen.
Previous exams include exams for the current patient that have been retrieved for this patient
from a portable media device or using the Query/Retrieve operation. This allows quick access
to all images for this patient based on the patient's ID.
Figure 8-4: Available Exams drop-down list on the Images screen
If the current patient has more than one exam stored on the system, the Available Exams drop-
down list displays the exams in the Imaging Modality, Exam Status, Procedure Description
format. Modality can include native OEC images, or CT, MR, XA, RF, or SC. Exam status can
include Current, Paused, Completed, or Abandoned.
Use the Previous Exams button to select exams to be included in this list.
1. Touch Previous Exams... on the Images screen.
8-4
Figure 8-5: Previous Exams button on Images screen
The Images > Previous Exams screen displays, along with a list of exams found on the
system for the current patient.
For each exam for the same patient ID, the Previous Exams screen displays the
procedure description, exam modality, number of images, origin (manually acquired or
retrieved), accession number, date and time of the exam, physicians's name, number of
reports, and exam status (Current, Retrieved, Completed, or Abandoned).
8-5
Figure 8-6: Previous Exams screen
Note: Use Retrieve... to open the Images > Retrieve screen, to retrieve exams from a
DICOM server or a portable media device. See 8.3.2 Retrieve exams from a DICOM
server beginning on page 8-15 and 8.3.1 Retrieve exams from a portable media device
2. Use Sort By to sort exams by Date, Patient Name, Patient ID, Physician Name, or
Modality, and Sort Order to arrange the records in Ascending or Descending order.
3. Touch the check box next to the exam(s) to display in the Available Exams drop-down
list. A green check mark displays in any selected exam's check box.
To exclude an exam from the list of available exams, clear the check mark next to that
exam.
4. Touch OK to exit the Previous Exams screen. The Images screen displays the current
exam.
5. Touch the Available Exams arrow to display the selected exams.
8-6
Figure 8-7: Images screen with two available exams
6. Select an exam from the list to review.

The Images screen displays the selected exam.
Current and retrieved exams

Images for the current patient exam display from the newest images to the oldest ones.
When a current or retrieved exam for the current patient displays, a procedure data bar with
brief summary information displays:
Figure 8-8: Current patient procedure data
Reviewing exams
When a patient exam is viewed from the Patient > Saved Exams screen, and is not an exam
for the current patient, the procedure data bar displays differently:
Figure 8-9: Reviewing exam procedure data
Touch Exit in the procedure data bar to return to the Patient screen for the current patient, with
the current patient information displayed in the procedure data bar.
Image types
X-ray images display in both real time and as static, saved images. Four image type
8-7
designators display in the lower left corner of the image to identify the type of image displayed:
l Live images display on the left side of the screen with a flashing designator, LIVE, to
indicate that they are being created in real time and that X-rays are being generated.
l The most recent image saved at the end of a radiation event displays on the left side of
the screen with the designator, LIH, to indicate that it is the last held image and that X-
rays are no longer being generated. If the LIH is saved, the saved image number
displays below the designator.
l If an LIH is swapped to the right side of the screen and then back to left side of the
screen, it displays with the designator, REFERENCE, to avoid confusion between
swapped images and future LIH images from additional exposures.
l Saved images display on the left side of the screen, and display with the designator
RECALLED. The saved image number displays below the designator, and may also
include a D to indicate that the image was derived from another image, and has been
zoomed and then saved. The image label also includes the image number from which
the image was derived.
Overlays displayed with images

The following overlay displays with the image:
Figure 8-10: Sample Live, LIH, or Reference image
1. Comments (up to 2 lines)

2. Technique used during the
exposure
Note: On live images, the dose rate

information changes as the X-ray
is taken and then drops to 0 at the
end of the shot.
3. Type of image: LIVE, LIH, or

RECALLED
4. Image number. On live images, this
displays briefly as the image is
saved.
5. Elapsed cine record time /
remaining cine record time
6. Hospital or facility name
7. Exposure date and time
8. Contrast and Brightness values 11. Profile used
9. Zoom 12. Magnification used, if any
10. Shot rotation 13. Exposure time for the study
14. Shot orientation - normal, reversed, inverted, or reversed and inverted
8-8
Motorized systems display the rotation angles of the C-Arm on live and LIH shots:
Figure 8-11: Sample Live or LIH image on motorized systems - differences only
1. Right anterior oblique / left anterior oblique

(RAO / LAO) angle
2. Caudal / cranial (CAU / CRA) angle
Additional information displays on recalled images:

Figure 8-12: Sample saved image - differences only
1. Procedure description
2. Patient ID
3. Patient name
4. Physician name
5. Accession number
6. Comments (up to 2 lines)
7. Patient birthdate
8. Patient gender
9. Type of image: RECALLED
8.2 Image processing

Anatomical profiles have been optimized to provide brightness, contrast, and enhancement
(sharpness) levels suitable for a wide range of uses.
Process images to finely adjust the brightness, contrast, and enhancement to suit personal
preference, or change default values for brightness, contrast, and enhancement for a specific
profile.
8-9
8.2.1 Image adjustment procedure

To adjust images, proceed in the following order:
1. Adjust brightness for overall and background image appearance.
2. Adjust contrast level to define the anatomical structure.
3. Adjust enhance level for overall definition.
The brightness, contrast, and enhancement control icons are shown below. See 3.2 General
system controls beginning on page 3-3 for enhancement key and button locations.
Figure 8-13: Brightness, Contrast, and Enhance icons
The brightness and contrast values are located to the left of the brightness and contrast icons in
the upper-right corner of the image (Figure 8-14).
To display the enhance value, press the Enhance key once. The enhance value displays as a
vertical, graduated column on the left side of the image as shown in Figure 8-14.
In the examples shown in Figure 8-14, the brightness value is 36, the contrast value is 28, and
the enhance value is 3.
Figure 8-14: Location of brightness, contrast, and enhance values
1. Brightness value
and icon
2. Contrast value
and icon
3. Enhance value
displayed on
graduated
vertical column
8.2.2 Adjust brightness

Analyze the overall image appearance and background. If the overall image appears darker
than desired, or if there is too much tissue density in the image, or if the background image
needs to be brighter, increase the brightness level to brighten the overall image.
1. Increase the brightness by 1-2 units and observe the overall image appearance.
2. Repeat the adjustment until the desired image brightness and quality are achieved.
Figure 8-15 shows an image before the brightness level was increased. Figure 8-16 shows the
same image after the brightness level was increased.
8-10
Figure 8-15: Before brightness increase Figure 8-16: After brightness increase
If the overall image appears brighter than desired, or if a bright area of features is saturated, or
if there is a loss of anatomy (or skin lines) that should be visible, decrease the brightness.
1. Decrease the brightness by 1-2 units and observe the overall image appearance.
2. Repeat the adjustment until the desired image brightness and quality are achieved.
Figure 8-17 shows an image before the brightness level was decreased. Figure 8-18 shows the
same image after the brightness level was decreased.
Figure 8-17: Before brightness decrease Figure 8-18: After brightness decrease
8.2.3 Adjust contrast

Analyze the appearance of the anatomical structure. If the anatomical structures (bones,
contrast filled vessels, and other features of interest) appear soft, or if the structures are not
well defined, not dark enough, or look blurred, increase the contrast level to improve the overall
image. Such images are sometimes described as “washed out” or as not having enough detail.
1. Increase the contrast by 1-2 units and observe the overall image appearance.
2. Repeat the adjustment until the desired image contrast and quality are achieved.
8-11
Figure 8-19 shows an image before contrast level adjustment. Figure 8-20 shows the same
image after the contrast level was increased.
Figure 8-19: Before contrast level increase Figure 8-20: After contrast level increase
If the anatomical structures (bones, contrast filled vessels, and other features of interest) are
too contrasted, too dark, too noisy, or saturated in the bright areas, reduce the contrast level to
improve the overall image. Such images may be described as “grainy.”
1. Decrease the contrast by 1-2 units and observe the overall image appearance.
2. Repeat the adjustment until the desired image contrast and quality are achieved.
Figure 8-21 shows an image before the contrast level was decreased. Figure 8-22 shows the
same image after the contrast level was decreased.
Figure 8-21: Before contrast level decrease Figure 8-22: After contrast level decrease
8.2.4 Adjust enhancement

Analyze the appearance of the anatomical structure. If an image with proper brightness and
contrast levels appears noisy or grainy, reduce the enhancement level.
8-12
1. Decrease the enhancement by one unit and observe the change in the image.
2. Repeat the adjustment until the desired image quality is achieved.
Using lower enhancement may suppress noise and improve the image quality of local
structures, but may also sacrifice image sharpness (for example, for small anatomy and quiet
image). A tradeoff should be made based on personal preference. The following figures
provide example images before and after enhance adjustment.
The images in Figure 8-23 and Figure 8-24 were taken with the Spine profile. A higher
enhancement level will produce a sharper image (Figure 8-23), but may cause a noisy or grainy
appearance, especially for large and dense anatomy.
The modified image in Figure 8-24 uses the same brightness and contrast settings as in Figure
8-23, but with a lower enhancement value.
Reducing the enhancement level reduces the noisy and grainy appearance. This may improve
the system tolerance to patient size and density differences, resulting in more consistent
images.
Figure 8-23: Higher enhancement level Figure 8-24: Lower enhancement level
If the image has proper brightness and contrast levels but the anatomical structures (bones,
contrast filled vessels, and other features of interest) need to be sharper to reveal more details,
increase the enhancement level to improve the sharpness of local structures.
1. Increase the enhancement by one unit and observe the change. Greater enhancement
may introduce more noise into the image. A trade-off should be made based on personal
preference.
2. Repeat the adjustment until the desired image quality is achieved.
Figure 8-25 shows an image before enhance adjustment. Figure 8-26 shows the same image
after the enhance level was adjusted.
8-13
Figure 8-25: Before enhancement Figure 8-26: After enhancement adjustment

adjustment
8.2.5 Reset image manipulations

Reset an image to its last saved settings at any time using the Reset button on the virtual
control panel. Reset resets invert, reverse, negate, contrast, brightness, and static image zoom
settings. Images zoomed using the live zoom feature cannot be reset using Reset.
See Reset beginning on page 3-15 for more information.
8.3 Retrieve a saved exam

Exams can be saved and retrieved from archival devices.
8.3.1 Retrieve exams from a portable media device

Archived images and cine runs cannot be viewed on the system directly from a portable media
device. Copy archived images and cine runs to the system to view and print them.
Note: Before selecting a portable media device, make sure it is connected and has been
loaded.
1. In the Copy area of the screen, near the top right, in the From menu, select the location
containing the patient exam.
2. In the To location, select a location to copy to. Select System to copy to the system.
Images can be copied to any available destination, as long as the source and destination
devices are different.
8-14
Figure 8-27: Images screen copying from a portable media device to the system
3. Touch View.... The Retrieve screen displays, with the current patient information in the
query fields.
Note: See Access previous exams on the system for the current patient beginning on page 4-
17 for information on retrieving exams, including using the options on the Retrieve
screen.
4. Touch Query to search for any exams associated with the current patient on portable
media device.
5. Exams display at the bottom of the Retrieve screen. Select an exam and touch Copy to
copy it to the To location, or touch Close to return to the Images screen.
6. If prompted, follow the steps for reconciling a patient, as described in Reconcile exams
copied from a portable media device beginning on page 4-21.
Always touch Eject USB before removing a USB device. Removing a USB device without
ejecting it can make it unusable.
8.3.2 Retrieve exams from a DICOM server

The system provides a fully functional DICOM Query/Retrieve system to find, retrieve, and
view images from a range of configured sources stored on the DICOM network. These multi-
modality images can then be viewed using the integrated DICOM viewer. See 8.10 DICOM
image viewer application beginning on page 8-37.
Use the DICOM Query / Retrieve tools to find and retrieve images from a DICOM network.
8-15
Note: DICOM queries are canceled if an X-ray switch is pressed during a query. They are
noted as Failed in the transfer log.
DICOM transfers are suspended if an X-ray switch is pressed during transfers. They
are noted as Queued in the transfer log, and resume when the X-ray switch is released.
If there are archived exams or preoperative studies for the current patient, retrieve them from a
DICOM store serve using this procedure:
1. In the Copy area of the Images screen, near the top right, select a DICOM server as the
From location.
2. Select System as the To location.
Figure 8-28: Images screen with a DICOM storage server selected as the From location
3. Touch View. The Retrieve screen displays with the current patient's information
populated and the selected DICOM server in the Source field. Select a different source,
if necessary.
8-16
Figure 8-29: Retrieve screen
4. In the patient search area at the top of the screen, use the fields to find the specific
patient. Search any combination of fields, including Patient First Name, Patient Last
Name, Patient ID, and Study Date. Use * for a general search of a name, such as
Jones*.
Change any of the search terms, as needed, and select a Study Date, from All, Today,
Since Yesterday, Last 3 Days, Last 7 Days, or Last 30 Days.
Touch Clear Fields to remove all the text entries and search for a different patient. The
Study Date reverts to Last 3 Days when the fields are cleared.
5. Touch Query. The system searches the selected source for records that match the
search fields, and populates the bottom portion of the screen with all matching results.
Note: If the list in the DICOM Retrieve window is too long to fit on one screen, use the arrows
on the right side of the window to page up and page down through the list to find a
specific record.
8-17
Figure 8-30: Retrieve screen with search results and a selected record
6. Use Sort By to sort exams by Patient Name, Patient ID, Date, or Modality, and Sort
Order to arrange the records in Ascending or Descending order.
7. Touch the check box next to the exam(s) to import. A green check mark displays in any
selected exam's check box.
8. Touch Retrieve. A DICOM Retrieve in Progress message is displayed. Once the
system has finished importing the exam, the message closes and the Images screen
displays the retrieved exam.
Retrieved exams display the notation Retrieved in the exam title in the Available Exams
drop-down list and in the list of exams on the Saved Exams screen.
8-18
Figure 8-31: Images screen displaying a retrieved exam
8.4 Move to a new study

Use the move function to move images to another exam for the existing patient, or to an exam
for a new patient.
Note: X-rays are disabled while the new study is being created.
Note: For software versions 1.0.XXXX and 1.2.XXXX: If you save several images as part a
single exam and then decide to move some images to a different existing exam, the
moved images retain the original exam's anatomical additional information. The addi-
tional information will need to be edited after the images are moved.
8.4.1 Dose information for moved images

When images are moved to a new study, the system also moves the dose information to the
new study, and removes it from the previous study.
For each exposure - each time an X-ray switch is pressed - the system records the dose
generated. Pressing the Save button more than once during an exposure saves multiple
images for that exposure. All images saved during a single exposure are tied together, along
with the dose information for that event.
If one image from a single exposure is selected to move to a new study, all other images from
that exposure also move to the new study, along with the dose information for the entire
exposure. The dose information displays in the Dose Summary screen.
See 5.12.4 Dose summary beginning on page 5-48 and 8.5.1 Display the dose summary
beginning on page 8-21 for more information about this screen.
8-19
8.4.2 Move to a new study

1. View a current or paused exam on the Images screen.
Completed, retrieved, and abandoned exams cannot be copied to a new study.

2. Select one or more images to move to the new study. Press and hold the Ctrl key to
select multiple images, or touch Select All to select all of the images from the original
study.
Images are added to the new study in the order they are selected from the Images
screen.
3. In the Location area of the screen, near the top right, select System as the From
location, and select New Study as the To location. The information area below the To
field changes to display options for moving images to a new study.
Figure 8-32: Options for moving images to a new study
4. Select the appropriate patient information setting to copy the selected images.
l Select Use Existing to use the current patient's information, and then touch Move.
The Images > New Study screen displays, showing the current patient
information. Touch OK. The selected images are moved to a new study with the
current patient's information.
l Select New to create a new patient, and then touch Move. The Images > New
Study screen displays in editable format. Enter the new patient information and
then touch OK. The selected images are moved to a new study with the new
patient's information.
8-20
5. Touch the Patient tab, and then touch Saved Exams... and select the new study.
6. Touch Resume Exam. The new study displays in the Images screen.
Note: All images saved during a specific radiation event are moved, even if only some images
were selected to be moved. Manually delete any unwanted images, if necessary.
Note: If Select All is used, the dose summary and all images are moved from the original
study to the new study, and the patient summary is copied to the new study. The
original study and patient summary are not deleted. A dose summary icon is retained
with the original study but the dose summary information is not retained with the
original study.
8.5 Review patient summary and dose summary

screens
The Patient Summary screen displays a summary of the patient's exam information and the
Dose Summary screen displays X-ray exposure dosimetry data for each of the patient's exams
and the total for all of the exams for that patient.
8.5.1 Display the dose summary

Figure 8-33: Images screen with Dose Summary icon and View button
1. Dose Summary icon
2. View button for dose
summary
2. Touch View under Dose Summary. The Dose Summary screen displays. See 5.12.4
Dose summary beginning on page 5-48 for more information about this screen.
8-21
8.5.2 Display the patient summary

Figure 8-34: Images Screen with Patient Summary icon and View button
1. Patient Summary icon
2. View button for patient
summary
2. Touch View under Patient Summary. The Patient Summary screen displays.
8.6 Create prints

The system supports a variety of optional hard copy devices. Use these devices to print
images, patient information, and dose summaries:
l DICOM printer
l Onboard (local) printer
Detailed instructions for using each device are provided in the documentation supplements for
the specific printer. This section explains, in general, how to select and send to a printer.
Note: For HIPAA compliance, identifying information can be removed from the image prior to
printing using the Applications > Setup > Patient Information screen. See 2.1.5 Set up
patient information beginning on page 2-8.
For more information on any of these devices, call the Communications Center or your local
sales representative. See 16.1.1 Communication center contact information beginning on page
16-1 for telephone numbers.
8.6.1 Connect an onboard (local) printer

Onboard, or local, printers connect to the system using one of the USB ports. See 3.3.2
Workstation external connections on page 3-19 for USB port locations.
8-22
Note: Do not change the onboard (local) printer's driver configurations using controls on the
local printer. Doing so can disrupt the communication between the system and the
printer, which can cause print processes to fail.
Note: If the onboard (local) printer is disconnected at the USB port, wait 1 minute before
plugging it back it in. Plugging it in too soon may result in the printer being unavailable.
Unplug it, wait 1 minute, and then plug it back in.
8.6.2 Print images

1. In the Copy area of the screen, near the top right, select a From location, usually
System.
2. Select a printer as the To location.
The information area below the To field changes to display the default layout.
3. Touch Layout... on the Images screen. The DICOM Print Options screen displays. (If
an onboard printer is selected, the Onboard Print Options screen displays instead.)
Layouts vary depending on the device and settings. See 10.1.3 Set up DICOM print
servers beginning on page 10-7 for DICOM layout selection and setup.
Note: For HIPAA compliance, remove identifying information from the image using the
Patient Information setup screen prior to printing.
Note: DICOM print processes are suspended if an X-ray switch is pressed during transfers.
They are noted as Queued in the transfer log, and resume when the X-ray switch is
released.
Note: Local print processes are suspended if an X-ray switch is pressed during transfers, and
resume when the X-ray switch is released.
8-23
Figure 8-35: DICOM Print Options screen
Note: If an onboard (local) printer is selected, the Onboard Print Options screen displays.
This screen is otherwise the same as the DICOM Print Options screen.
4. Select the icon representing the layout to use.

5. Select the number of copies to print.
6. Select an orientation, Portrait (tall) or Landscape (wide).
7. Touch OK to close the DICOM Print Options screen. The selected layout displays on
the Images screen.
8-24
Figure 8-36: Images screen with the DICOM printer and 4-up layout selected
8. Select a thumbnail and then select an area on the layout. The image number or summary
icon displays in that region of the layout, indicating that the image will print in that area of
the layout.
Figure 8-37: Images screen with 4-up print layout. Image 3 and
the dose summary are ready to print
The number of images printed at one time is limited by the device type and selected print
8-25
format. Continue to select images and load them into the layout until all available
positions are filled.
If a thumbnail is selected and placed into a layout area already containing an image, the
last selected image number replaces the previous image number.
9. Touch Print. As images are sent to the print device, a PLEASE WAIT message displays.
To cancel the copy process, touch Cancel on the message screen. Once the process has been
canceled, a PLEASE WAIT message with no Cancel button displays until the cancel command
is completed.
Note: If the Sony printer's Copy button is pressed, the copy printed is of the last image
printed, not the image currently displayed on the screen.
8.6.3 Print dose summary

Note: A printer must be connected and configured on the system in order to print dose
summary information. See 8.6.2 Print images beginning on page 8-23 for more
information on selecting a printer, if necessary.

2. Touch the Dose Summary button. Do not touch the View button. The Dose Summary
button is highlighted on the screen.
System.
4. Select a printer as the To location. The information area below the To field changes to
display a print layout.
8-26
Figure 8-38: 1-up print layout with dose summary ready to print
5. Touch Layout... to change the print layout, if desired. See 8.6.2 Print images beginning
on page 8-23 for information on selecting layouts.
6. Touch Print.
Note: The dose summary can be placed into a layout and printed with images. See 8.6.2 Print
images beginning on page 8-23 for information on printing images.
8-27
8.6.4 Print patient summary

Note: A printer must be connected and configured on the system in order to print patient
summary information. See 8.6.2 Print images beginning on page 8-23 select a printer, if
necessary.

2. Touch the Patient Summary button. Do not touch the View button. The Patient
Summary button is highlighted on the screen.
System.
4. Select a printer as the To location. The information area below the To field changes to
display a print layout.
Figure 8-39: 1-up print layout with patient summary ready to print
5. Touch Layout... to change the print layout, if desired. See 8.6.2 Print images beginning
on page 8-23 for information on selecting layouts.
6. Touch Print.
Note: The patient summary can be placed into a layout and printed with images. See 8.6.2
Print images beginning on page 8-23 for information on printing images.
8-28
8.6.5 Clear the print queue

Clear the queue using any of the following methods:
l Select a different destination device in the To field on the Images screen.
l Select a different print layout from the DICOM Print Options screen.
l Exit the Images screen.
8.7 Check disk space

Check the system's available disk space regularly to ensure that there is sufficient image
storage capacity.
The system displays a disk space status icon in the status bar on the left side of the screen,
similar to the following:
Figure 8-40: Disk space status icon
A green check mark indicates that the system has sufficient disk space. A yellow warning
symbol indicates that disk space is low. The system may still have enough space to complete
the current exam, but files should be archived or deleted soon. A red X indicates that the
system is out of disk space, and X-rays are disabled.
Figure 8-41: Disk space status icons
Sufficient disk space Low disk space No disk space
Additional details on available disk space displays on the Saved Exams screen, similar to the
following:
8-29
Figure 8-42: Available space information on the Saved Exams screen
If disk space is low, use one of the methods described in 8.8 Archive images beginning on page
8-30 to save exams, or delete images as described in 8.9 Delete exams and images beginning
on page 8-36.
8.8 Archive images

The system supports a variety of options for archiving images, patient information, dose
summaries, and RDSRs.
Available storage options include:
l Portable media device
l DICOM Storage
For more information on available storage options, call the Communications Center or your
local sales representative. See 16.1.1 Communication center contact information beginning on
page 16-1.
The system can archive static images, cine runs, patient and dose summaries, and RDSRs to a
portable media device or to DICOM storage. When images are copied to a portable media
device, a portable DICOM viewer can be written to the device and can be used to review those
images on a PC. See 8.8.2 Configure a storage device beginning on page 8-33.
Note: Before selecting a portable media device, make sure a portable media device is in the
port has been loaded.
The number of images that can be archived on the device depends on the selected file format
and storage capacity of the storage device.
8-30
8.8.1 Select a storage location or device

In the Copy area of the screen, near the top right, select a From location, usually System, and
select a storage device as the To location.
The information area below the To field changes to display the default layout, and the storage
device button displayed on the Images screen is specific to each available storage device.
Figure 8-43: Images screen with a DICOM storage server selected
Note: When patient information is transferred to a DICOM store, the data is then under the
control of another system. The other system is then responsible for HIPAA compliance.
8-31
Figure 8-44: Images screen with a USB device selected
Note that when a USB device is selected, its used and free capacity displays, along with the
amount of space needed for all selected images.
Figure 8-45: Images screen with a DVD burner selected
When a DVD burner is selected, the type of media displays under the To field, and the disc's
capacity displays, along with the amount of space needed for all selected images. Always load
a writable DVD into the tray. If a DVD burner is selected, but the burner does not have a
8-32
writable disc inserted, the message Tray Empty displays under the To field. If the disc is not
writeable or empty, then the free space will be set to 0 and the Send button will be disabled.
8.8.2 Configure a storage device

See 10. DICOM setup and configuration beginning on page 10-1 if a DICOM device is the
target device.
If a portable media device is the target, touch Options. A screen similar to the following
displays.
Note: If any problems occur during import from or export to a portable media device, use an
external check to ensure that the read and write functionality of the portable media
device is working properly, that the device has sufficient storage available, and that it
contains the expected data.
Figure 8-46: Images > Portable Media Options screen
8.8.3 Portable media options

Use the Portable Media Options screen to select options for archiving images to a portable
media device.
Select Save As Option
DICOM Viewer Compatible
Select this check box to save images in the DICOM Viewer format. These images can
then be viewed using the DICOM Viewer.
Select a DICOM Viewer format option from the following:
XA - X-ray Angiographic image storage
8-33
RF - X-ray Radio Fluoroscopic image storage

CR - Computed Radiography image storage. Multi-frame cine runs are not supported.
SC - Secondary Capture image storage - full-size screen capture image with
annotations and markers as an overlay on static images. Overlays are not supported
on multi-frame cine runs.
OEC Compatible
Select this check box to save images in the OEC Compatible format, viewable on other
OEC devices.
Web Viewable
Select this check box to save images in a format that can be viewed on a browser. This
can only be selected if DICOM Viewer Compatible is selected.
JPG and BMP
Select this check box to save images in both JPEG and bitmap formats. This can only
be selected if DICOM Viewer Compatible is selected.
Format USB
Use this button to delete all data on the USB device and format it completely. All data
on the USB device will be lost. A progress bar displays to indicate the formatting pro-
gress, and disappears when formatting is complete.
Note: Always touch Eject USB before removing a USB device, particularly after formatting it.
Removing a USB device without ejecting it can make it unusable.
Select Image File Size
Available for XA, RF, and CR images only; these options are unavailable if SC is selec-
ted above.
Full Size
Select this check box to save images at full resolution (1280 x 1280). Images stored at
full size are higher resolution and take more room on the disc, but also contain more
image data.
Half Size
Select this check box to save images at half resolution (640 x 640). Images stored at
half size are lower resolution and take less room on the disc, but also contain less
image data.
Copy Options
Merge Annotations and Image Technique
Select this check box to include any annotations and the image technique used on the
selected image as a single DICOM overlay.
Remove Patient Information
Select this check box to delete all identifying patient information from the selected
images as they are written to the portable media device. The images are not affected by
deleting the patient information and can be retrieved from the disc for display and study
but they no longer contain any information about the patient.
8-34
Include DICOM Viewer

Select this check box to include a viewer application program that allows images on the
portable media device to be viewed on other platforms. This option is available for
DICOM viewer compatible images only. See 8.11 Portable media viewer utility begin-
ning on page 8-40.
8.8.4 Copy to archive device

Note: DICOM transfers are suspended if an X-ray switch is pressed during transfers. They
are noted as Queued in the transfer log, and resume when the X-ray switch is released.
Transfers to portable media devices are canceled if an X-ray switch is pressed during
transfers. They are noted as Failed in the transfer log, and resume when the X-ray
switch is released.
Note: When images are copied from the system to a portable media device, an index.html
file is created on the portable media device to display stored images using a web
browser.
Use the Firefox browser to open and display the index.html file stored on the
portable media device. Other browsers will not display the file.
Static images
1. In the Copy area of the Images screen, near the top right, select a From location, usually
System.
2. Select a storage device as the To location. Device information displays below to indicate
the selected device and, for portable media devices, its Capacity and Free space.
3. Press and hold the Ctrl on the keyboard and touch the thumbnails of the images to
archive. For portable media devices, the Capacity, Free, and Selected space will update
as thumbnails are selected. Use this information to determine if the selected images will
fit on the device.
If all of the images in the directory will fit on one device, touch Select All to select all of
the images in the directory. Continue selecting images until the Capacity reaches 0.
4. Touch Send on the Images screen to copy the selected images.
As images are sent to the storage device, a PLEASE WAIT message displays. To cancel the
copy process, touch Cancel on the message screen. Once the process has been canceled, a
PLEASE WAIT message with no Cancel button displays until it has completed the cancel
command.
Refer to the portable media device's capacity before beginning the copy process. Images can
be copied to a portable media device until the INSUFFICIENT MEDIA CAPACITY or
SELECTED IMAGE(S) ARE BIGGER THAN THE CURRENT MEDIA CAPACITY message
displays. To continue copying images, insert another device and touch OK in the dialog box.
See Figure 8-44: Images screen with a USB device selected on page 8-32.
Always touch Eject USB before removing a USB device. Removing a USB device without
ejecting it can make it unusable.
8-35
Cine runs
Note: Multiple cine runs can be queued for archiving, but for best results, allow the copying
process to complete before taking X-rays or disconnecting the C-Arm.
The cine run thumbnail contains an image number and the letter C.
1. Select the cine run thumbnail . The cine run plays on the left side of the main system
monitor and the Cine screen displays on the right side of the main system monitor.
2. Touch OK to close the Cine screen.
System.
4. Select a storage device as the To location. The information area below the To field
changes to display the Capacity and Free space in the selected device.
5. Touch Send.
Note: If cues are set, only the active portion of the cine run between the cues is archived.
Note: DICOM limits the maximum size of a single cine run to 4.29 GB. Use the Set Cues
functionality to make cine runs smaller for archiving.
Cancel archive
To stop the archive process , touch Cancel on the Send in Progress message, and then touch
Yes on the Cancel message.
To cancel the archive process and clear the selected images before the system begins
archiving, touch Exit on the Images screen.
8.9 Delete exams and images

Once at least one image or RDSR from an exam has been archived, the system retains it for a
user-determined number of days for retention, and then automatically deletes it the next time
the system is started. See 2.1.5 Set up patient information beginning on page 2-8 for more
information on defining the number of days to retain exams.
The system does not automatically delete completed and abandoned exams that have not
been archived. After the user-defined number of days for retention have passed, a message
displays at startup, prompting the user to manually delete old exams.
The system caches retrieved exams for a user-determined number of days, and then
automatically deletes them the next time the system is started. See 10.1.1 Set up DICOM local
server beginning on page 10-4 for more information on defining the number of days to cache
retrieved exams.
If disk space is low, archive or delete images to create free space. Only images acquired on the
system need to be deleted. Retrieved images do not take up space used to store images
generated by the system.
8-36
8.9.1 Delete selected images

To manually delete selected images:
1. On the Images screen, touch the thumbnail to select an image to delete. Hold down Ctrl
and touch thumbnails to select multiple images for deletion.
2. Touch Delete. A DELETE SELECTED IMAGE(S)? message displays; touch Yes to
delete the images, or No to cancel the delete operation and return to the Images screen.
8.9.2 Delete exams

To manually delete a completed, abandoned, or retrieved exam:
1. Touch the Patient tab to display the Patient screen.
2. Touch Saved Exams... to display the Saved Exams screen.
3. Select the exam(s) to be deleted, and touch Delete. A DELETE SELECTED EXAM(S)?
message displays. If the exam has images attached to it, a DELETE EXAMS
CONTAINING IMAGES QUEUED TO BE SAVED TO PACS? message displays.
Deleted exams and their images cannot be recovered or archived. See 4.3.1 Access saved
exams beginning on page 4-15 for more information.
8.9.3 Delete all images

Use Delete All on the Applications > Setup > Security screen to delete all patient information
and data, including exams and contents of the Patient screen, before shipping a system or
having it serviced.
This operation cannot be reversed. Once patient information and data are deleted, they cannot
be restored.
8.10 DICOM image viewer application

Images retrieved from a DICOM server can be reviewed using the Application > DICOM
Image Viewer screen. See 8.3.2 Retrieve exams from a DICOM server beginning on page 8-
15 for information on retrieving exams from a DICOM server.
1. Retrieve an exam from a DICOM server. See 8.3.2 Retrieve exams from a DICOM
server beginning on page 8-15 for more how to retrieve an exam.
2. Touch one or more thumbnails on the Images screen. To select more than one image,
press and hold the CTRL key on the keyboard and touch each thumbnail, or touch
Select All to select all thumbnails in the study.
3. Touch View DICOM.... The DICOM Image Viewer screen displays, showing the first
image.
8-37
Figure 8-47: DICOM Image Viewer screen
Use the DICOM Image Viewer screen to view and manipulate images and cine runs.
The controls on this screen are as follows.
1x1 Layout - Displays when the layout is 1x1. Touch to select the next layout
option.
option.
option.
4x4 Layout - Displays when the layout is 4x4. Touch to select the first layout
option.
Hide Overlay - Displays when the Overlay is hidden. Touch to select the next
overlay option.
Show Overlay - Displays when the Overlay is visible. Touch to select the pre-
vious overlay option.
Negate – Inverts the image into a negative image.
Flip Vertical – Flips the selected image vertically.
Flip Horizontal – Flips the selected image horizontally.
8-38
Zoom – Zooms in or out on the image. The zoom factor displays under the but-
ton.
Window Center – Adjusts the brightness of the image. Drag the slider to the
right to make the image darker, or to the left to make it brighter. The window
center value displays in the bottom right corner of the image as C:XXX.
Window Width – Adjusts the dynamic range of the image, similar to contrast.
Drag the slider to the right to give the image higher contrast (greater range
between the lightest and darkest areas of the image), or to the left to give it
lower contrast (less range between the lightest and darkest areas of the
image). The window width value displays in the bottom right corner of the
image as W:XXX.
Reset – Removes all changes and resets the selected image to its original
form.
If the selected image is a cine run, the cine viewer controls at the bottom of the
screen are enabled. The total frames and current frame number displays under
the cine controls.
Play / Pause – Initiates play back of a cine run or pauses a cine run that is
playing.
Back 1 Frame – Goes back one frame in a cine run.
Forward 1 Frame - Goes forward 1 frame in a cine run.
Back Multiple Frames – Goes back multiple frames, up to 10 frames, in a cine

run.
Forward Multiple Frames – Goes forward multiple frames, up to 10 frames, in
a cine run.
Note: To use the cine controls, the cine run must be displayed in the 1x1 layout.
4. Touch Exit to return to the Images screen.
8-39
8.11 Portable media viewer utility

The system can copy images and cine runs to a portable media device. The system
automatically loads Media Viewer version 3.0 and the Media Viewer Operator Manual onto
portable media (USB device or DVD) when the option to include the viewer is selected. Use
Media Viewer to view the images and cine runs on the disk as well as add linear and angular
measurements to the images.
Caution The Media Viewer should not be used for diagnostic purposes. Its use is limited
to reviewing images. The images should be displayed on the main system
monitor or printed if they are used to provide diagnostic information.
8.11.1 Use the Media Viewer

When the system writes the DICOM Viewer to portable media, it adds Autorun files. These files
allow the viewer to run automatically when the portable media device is accessed on a
personal computer running the Microsoft Windows operating system.
To begin using the DICOM Viewer, insert the portable media device containing the images and
the viewer into the PC.
Refer to the GE OEC Media Viewer Operator Manual for details on using the Media Viewer
utility.
8-40
9. Laser Aimer
9. Laser Aimer
All flat panel detector systems are equipped with an integrated Laser Aimer.
The Laser Aimer produces a set of laser cross-hairs which is used to indicate the central axis of
the X-ray beam. Call for service to have the cross-hairs adjusted.
Note: An add-on, detachable Laser Aimer may be purchased for systems without the
integrated Laser Aimer. See 16.1.1 Communication center contact information
beginning on page 16-1 to order.
9.1 Laser Aimer safety

Note: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified
herein, may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Warning If the laser aimer is on, do not look directly into the laser apertures.
Figure 9-1: Laser Aimer apertures on the flat panel detector
When the Laser Aimer is not in use, switch it off. Verify that the laser beam is off by checking
the On/Off switch. If the switch is illuminated, the laser is on and appropriate precautions
should be taken.
Figure 9-2: Laser Aimer On/Off switch positions
On position Off position

(illuminated) (dark)
9-1
9. Laser Aimer
9.2 Operating the Laser Aimer

1. Place the C-Arm in the position it will be used during the procedure.
2. Press the Laser Aimer switch on the front of the flat panel detector or touch the Laser
Aimer button on the Touch / Tableside C-Arm control panel to turn on the laser
crosshairs. The switch illuminates when the Laser Aimer is on, as shown in Figure 9-2:
Laser Aimer On/Off switch positions.
3. The laser crosshairs appear on the patient at the center of the X-ray beam. Use the
crosshairs to assist in placing the anatomy in the correct location prior to initiating X-rays.
Figure 9-3: Laser Aimer crosshairs - off (left) and on (right)
4. When Laser Aimer use is complete, turn off the lasers.
9-2
10. DICOM setup and configuration

The system supports the DICOM (Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine) standard
for handling, storing, printing, and transmitting information in medical imaging.
Use DICOM to print, store, and archive images, and to retrieve items from the worklist.
The American College of Radiology (ACR) and the National Electrical Manufacturers
Association (NEMA) developed the Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine (DICOM)
standard.
The standard uses an object-oriented design to query the worklist, archive, and print images.
During network transfers, both images and patient information are sent. This patient
information may be the result of a DICOM WorkList Query or it may be manually entered in the
Patient screen by the technologist. Patient birth dates can be part of the manually-entered
patient data.
The system must be configured to access the DICOM network. Configuration identifies the
system to the network and defines DICOM network servers.
All devices that meet the DICOM standard are required to have a Conformance Statement that
defines how the device implements the standard. To configure devices, enter information
contained in the device's Conformance Statement or obtained from the local network
administrator.
Note: Network communications are always initiated by the system.
Note: The system supports 10 Base-T, 100 Base-T, and 1000 Base-T Ethernet connections.
10.1 Set up DICOM network configurations

To set up network configurations, you must first connect your system to your facility's network.
See 2.1.9 Set up network configuration beginning on page 2-12 for more information on
connecting to the network using the system's external Ethernet jack.
Touch the Applications tab and then touch Setup to display the Applications > Setup screen.
10-1
Figure 10-1: Applications > Setup screen with menu on the right side
Touch DICOM in the menu to display the Applications > Setup > DICOM screen and display
the DICOM menu items on the right side of the screen.
Caution Only qualified users should make changes to DICOM settings. Incorrect settings
may cause loss of DICOM functionality.
10-2
Figure 10-2: DICOM screen
Use the DICOM screen to edit existing DICOM servers, set up new DICOM servers, view
configured DICOM servers, and set up default DICOM settings.
If DICOM servers are already configured, the screen will display values in one or more of the
fields.
Station Name
Displays the unique name, internal to the system, used to identify the server in the list
of available destination devices.
AE Title
Displays the DICOM Application Entity Title for the local server. AE Titles are limited to
a maximum of 16 characters, and are case-sensitive. This title is used for queries. The
title also is used by the Retrieve Server in response to store requests.
Edit Local Server...
Touch to change the local DICOM server settings. See 10.1.1 Set up DICOM local
server beginning on page 10-4.
Add Server
If no servers are configured, or to add more servers, use this section to configure one or
more servers. A local server must be configured first.
Server Type
Select a server type from the menu. Options include Store / Store Commit, MWL /
MPPS, Query / Retrieve, and DICOM Print.
Add...
Touch to add a new DICOM server of the selected type.
10-3
Configured Servers
Server Alias
Displays the server unique name for each configured server.
Server Type
Displays the server type for each configured server.
Edit...
Touch to edit a selected server.
Delete
Touch to delete a selected server.
Default Servers
Default Store Server
Displays the server alias for a configured store / store commit server. If more than one
server is configured, use the menu to select a default.
Default RDSR Server
Displays the server alias for a configured Radiation Dose Structured Report (RDSR)
server. If more than one server is configured, use the menu to select a default.
Default Print Server
Displays the server alias for a configured print server. If more than one server is con-
figured, use the menu to select a default.
Default MWL / MPPS Store Server
Displays the server alias for a configured Modality Work List (MWL) or Modality Per-
formed Procedure Step (MPPS) server. If more than one server is configured, use the
menu to select a default.
Default Query / Retrieve Server
Displays the server alias for a configured query / retrieve server. If more than one
server is configured, use the menu to select a default.
Touch Save to save the settings. If no changes have been made, the Save button is
unavailable.
Touch Exit to return to the main Applications screen without saving any changes; a SAVE
CHANGES BEFORE EXITING? message displays. Follow the message instructions.
10.1.1 Set up DICOM local server

Use the Applications > Setup > DICOM > Local Server Definition screen to set up a local
server and image caching, and to view wired and wireless local server information. A local
server must be configured for other DICOM services to function.
Obtain the values and information from a local network administrator.
On the DICOM screen, touch Edit Local Server..., or select Local from the menu. A screen
similar to the following displays.
10-4
Figure 10-3: Local Server Definition screen
Obtain the following information from the facility's network administrator or from the device's
DICOM Conformance Statement and enter it in on this screen:
Station Name
Enter the unique name, internal to the system, used to identify the server in the list of
available destination devices.
AE Title
Enter the DICOM Application Entity Title. AE Titles are limited to a maximum of 16 char-
acters, and are case-sensitive. This title is used for queries. The title also is used by the
retrieve server in response to store requests.
Retrieve / Storage Commit Port
Enter the port number assigned to the server running on the system. The default value
is 10004. Valid values are 104 and 1025-49150.
Days to Cache Retrieved Images
Select the number of days, up to 7, that retrieved documents will remain in the local
cache. The default is 3.
Wired
Displays the IP Address and MAC address for the wired network, if one is configured.
Wireless
Displays the IP Address and MAC address for the wireless network, if one is con-
figured.
Verify
Touch to test that the settings are correct. If the system is not connected, a CANNOT
MAKE NETWORK CONNECTION message displays. Touch OK and follow the
10-5
message instructions.
If the settings are correct and the system negotiates the network, a PORT
VERIFICATION SUCCESSFUL message displays. Touch OK to continue.
Otherwise, an INVALID PORT ENTRY OR PORT IN USE message displays. Touch
OK to continue and then check the settings entered. If the settings are correct but the
port verification fails, contact the facility's Network Administrator.
unavailable.
10.1.2 Set up DICOM MWL / MPPS server

Use the Applications > Setup > DICOM > MWL / MPPS Server Definition screen to set up
DICOM Modality Work List or Modality Performed Procedure Step servers, which provide
patient and exam schedule information from the Radiology Information System (RIS).
On the DICOM screen, select MWL/MPPS from the Server Type menu, and touch Add..., or
select MWL/MPPS from the menu. A screen similar to the following displays.
Figure 10-4: The MWL / MPPS Server Definition screen
DICOM Worklist Server Configuration

DICOM Query Type
Select the query type. Select Worklist to query the worklist data associated with a
patient or Image to query the metadata stored with the image.
In order to configure a DICOM MPPS Server, you must select Worklist.
10-6
DICOM MPPS Server Configuration

Enable MPPS
Select this check box to enable an MPPS (Modality Performed Procedure Step) server.
If the MPPS server settings are the same as the modality worklist, the rest of the fields
will be entered automatically. Otherwise, obtain the following information from the facil-
ity's network administrator or from the device's DICOM Conformance Statement and
enter it in on this screen.
Use Worklist Settings
Select this check box if the MPPS server settings are the same as the MWL settings.
The rest of the fields will be entered automatically. Otherwise, leave this blank.
Hostname / Server IP Address
Enter the unique host name or IP address assigned to the configured server.
Port Number
Enter the port number assigned to the MPPS server. The default value is 104. Valid val-
ues are 104, 1025-49000.
AE Title
acters, and are case-sensitive.
Timeout
Select the maximum length of time to allow for transactions. Select 0 for no maximum
time, or select from 10 to 999 seconds.
Verify
Touch to test that the settings are correct. If the system is connected, a DICOM
SERVER VERIFIED SUCCESSFULLY message displays. Touch OK and follow the
Otherwise, a VERIFY FAILED message displays. Touch OK to continue and then
check the settings entered. If the settings are correct but the verification fails, contact
the facility's Network Administrator.
unavailable.
10.1.3 Set up DICOM print servers

Use the Applications > Setup > DICOM > Print Server Definition screen to set up network
nodes that provide print functions in compliance with the DICOM standard.
See 8.6.2 Print images beginning on page 8-23 for details on printing to a DICOM printer.
On the DICOM screen, select DICOM Print from the Server Type menu, and touch Add..., or
touch the Print button in the right-hand menu. A screen similar to the following displays.
10-7
Figure 10-5: Print Server Definition screen
Print Server Configuration
Server Alias
Port Number
is 104. Valid values are 1-65535.
AE Title
Retrieve Server in response to store requests.
Timeout
Select a limit to set the time, from 10 to 999 seconds, that the system waits for a
response from the server before timing out, or select 0 to allow the system to try to
reconnect to a server indefinitely.
Configuration Information
See the DICOM Conformance statement for configuration information options.
10-8
Minimum Density
Select a minimum print density, from 0-400. See the DICOM Conformance Statement
for the device.
Maximum Density
Select a maximum print density, from 0-400. See the DICOM Conformance Statement
for the device.
Ambient Illumination cd/m2
Select the appropriate ambient illumination, from 0-4000.
Reflective Ambient Light cd/m2
Select the appropriate reflective ambient light, from 0-400.
Printer Settings
Border Density
Select the appropriate image border density, Black or White.
Empty Density
Select the appropriate image empty density, Black or White.
Copies
Enter the default number of copies printed each time a print command is sent to the
printer, from 1-10. This can be overridden at the time of printing.
Print Priority
Select the priority of the print jobs, High, Medium, or Low.
Destination
Select the print destination, Magazine or Processor.
Medium Type
Select the print medium, Paper, Clear Film, or Blue Film.
Film Size
Select the film size:
l 8 x 10 l 11 x 14 l 24 x 30
l 10 x 12 l 14 x 14
l 10 x 14 l 14 x 17
Format 1-4
Select the format for the print output for the X-rays.
The format definition determines the printed format for the X-ray images in columns and
rows. The format choices are limited to those available from the selected printer. The
total number of images printed on one film sheet is the product of the two numbers. For
example, 2 columns multiplied by 3 rows, equals a total of six images printed on one
film.
The system supports the following formats (columns x rows):
10-9
l 1x1 l 2x2 l 3x3 l 4x4
l 1x2 l 2x3 l 3x4 l 4x5
Figure 10-6: Example of a 2 x 3 print layout
Bit Depth
Select a bit depth, 8 bits or 12 bits.
Verify
unavailable.
10.1.4 Set up DICOM query / retrieve server

Use the Applications > Setup > DICOM > Query / Retrieve Server Definition screen to set up
a server for retrieving patient images from a DICOM server.
See 8.3.2 Retrieve exams from a DICOM server beginning on page 8-15 for details on
retrieving images from a DICOM Query / Retrieve server.
On the DICOM screen, select Query / Retrieve Server from the Server Type menu, and touch
Add..., or touch the Query / Retrieve button in the right-hand menu. A screen similar to the
following displays.
10-10
Figure 10-7: Query / Retrieve Server Definition screen
Server Information
Server Alias
Port Number
AE Title
Timeout
Select a limit to set the time, from 10 to 999 seconds, that the system waits for a
response from the server before timing out, or select 0 to allow the system to try to
reconnect to a server indefinitely.
Information Model
Select the appropriate information model for the server that is being configured. For the
appropriate information model see the AACS Admin or to the DICOM conformance
10-11
statement for the server. Select a model that has both find and move support. Find and
move support are necessary for the Query/Retrieve application to function properly.
l Patient Root - start queries at the patient level, then the series level.
l Study Root - start queries at the study level, then the series level.
Verify
unavailable.
10.1.5 Store / Storage Commit Server

Use the Applications > Setup > DICOM > Store / Storage Commit Server Definition screen
to set up a DICOM store server, a networked computer used to archive and transfer DICOM
images and other related digital data between DICOM nodes, allowing exchange of data
among multiple devices over a DICOM network.
On the DICOM screen, select Store / Store Commit from the Server Type menu, and touch
Add..., or touch the Store button in the right-hand menu. A screen similar to the following
displays.
10-12
Figure 10-8: The Store / Storage Commit Server Definition screen
DICOM Conformance Statement for each DICOM storage server on the network:
DICOM Store Server Configuration
Server Alias
AE Title
Port Number
Timeout
Select the maximum length of time to allow for verification. Select 0 for no maximum
Verify
10-13
Modality
Select the image modality supported by the storage device. The system supports the
following modalities:
l RF - X-ray Radio Fluoroscopic Image Storage - static and cine. RF images can use
Store Overlay setting (see below).
l XA - X-ray Angiographic Image Storage - static and cine. XA images can use Store
Overlay setting (see below).
l SC - Secondary Capture Image Storage - 1K x 1K static image only. Multi-SC is
supported.
l CR - Computed Radiography image storage. CR images are single-frame screen
capture type image with annotation and markers, and can use the Merge Overlay
setting (see below).
Image Size
Select the image size supported by the storage device, either Full size or Half size.
Store Overlay
Select the appropriate image overlay setting for storage of overlay information asso-
ciated with an image as data separate from the image. RF or XA must be selected for
the Modality to use this setting.
If Merge Overlays is selected, this is unavailable.
Table 10-1 below explains the Store Overlay and Merge Overlays behavior in detail.
l Always - Always store overlay information with the image. With this setting,
additional data elements are sent with every image, whether or not the user added
any post-processed Markers or Comments to the image.
l If Annotated - Store overlay information only if the image is annotated. With this
setting, two additional data elements are sent in addition to the image data if the
user adds any post-processing markers or comments to the image. The first image
data element contains the clinical image, the second contains markers, comments,
arrows and the measurement results, and the third contains all the information in
the periphery of the image, such as patient demographics, X-ray technique,
window and level settings, and institute name, date, and time.
l Never - Never store overlay information with the image. With this setting, no
additional information or data elements is sent. This optimizes network transfer
speed, but any markers or comments added to the image will not be sent with the
image.
Merge Overlays
Select the check box to have annotation and patient information combined into a single
overlay and then stored with the image, or clear the check box to store the information
separately.
10-14
Selecting this check box creates burned-in overlays. Any text or annotation information
is applied directly to the clinical image. The information becomes part of the image and
cannot be removed. Burned-in overlays only work with SC modality images. SC must
be selected for the Modality to use this setting.
l Merge - Selecting this check box creates burned-in overlays. Any text or
annotation information is applied directly to the clinical image. Select one of the
following options:
l To single overlay - Annotations and image information overlays are
stored together in a single overlay.
l To image - Annotations and image information become part of the
image and cannot be removed. Burned-in overlays only work with SC
modality images. SC must be selected for the Modality to use this
setting.
Image overlay behavior varies depending on the Store Overlay and Merge
Overlay settings.
Table 10-1: Image overlay behavior
Store Merge Merge Image Resulting
Overlay Overlay Overlay has overlays
Setting Setting Option annotations? produced
2: image information,
Yes
No n/a annotations
No 1:image information
0: image information and
Yes
annotations burned to image
Always Image
0: image information burned
No
Yes to image
Single Yes
annotations combined
Overlay
No 1: image information
2: image information,
Yes
No n/a annotations
No 0
If Yes
Image annotations burned to image
Annotated
No 0
Yes
Single Yes
annotations combined
Overlay
No 0
Never n/a n/a n/a 0: nothing burned to image
10-15
Store RDSR on Complete

Select this check box to store the Radiation Dose Structured Report (RDSR) upon the
completion of the exam. This server will show up in the list of default RDSR server con-
figurations that can be selected to always store RDSRs.
DICOM Storage Commit Server Configuration
Enable Storage Commitment
Select to enable storage commitment on a DICOM store server. DICOM Storage Com-
mitment provides advanced safekeeping of DICOM images and data that have been
shared across a DICOM network.
Use Store Server Settings
Select to use the same information as used for the store server, if the IP address, port
number, and other settings are all the same. Clear this check box to manually enter dif-
ferent settings.
AE Title
Port Number
Timeout
Select the maximum length of time to allow for verification. Select 0 for no maximum
Verify
unavailable.
10.2 Troubleshoot DICOM setup

If the system experiences an error trying to connect to a DICOM server, a CANNOT
CONNECT TO DICOM SERVER message displays.
Touch Verify to confirm that the target server is online, and that its IP address, port number,
10-16
and AR title are configured properly on the system. If the message persists, call for service.
Additional DICOM messages may display if there is a problem with DICOM functionality:
l DICOM ERROR Check the Transfer Status Screen on the system for detailed error
information. Follow the instructions in the Transfer Status Screen to resolve the
issue, or call for service. See page 14-31 for more information on this message.
l DICOM MOVE DESTINATION UNKNOWN Make sure that PACS is configured to
allow images to be retrieved. See page 14-31 for more information on this message.
l DICOM SERVER OUT OF RESOURCES, TRY AGAIN LATER This is probably a
temporary condition caused by currently high usage of the server. If this message
persists, call for service. See page 14-31 for more information on this message.
l DICOM SERVER RESPONSE MISSING REQUIRED DICOM TAGS See the DICOM
Log for more information or call for service.See page 14-31 for more information on
this message.
10-17
10-18
11. Contrast agent injector

A contrast agent injector can be connected to the system using the room interface connector on
the rear of the Workstation. Connecting the injector to the system allows automatic injection of
contrast when performing Roadmap and/or Subtraction imaging.
Note: Automatic contrast injection is only available for positive (iodine) contrast agents.
11.1 Safety notice

The information presented here is intended for personnel with adequate training and
experience in angiographic studies. Any attempt to operate or repair a medical device such as
an injector without adequate training may result in personal injury, property damage, or patient
injury.
11.2 Proper injector use

Before attempting to connect and use an injector with the system, read the injector's operation
manual. Keep the manual available wherever the injector will be used.
11.2.1 Intended use

The contrast agent injector is intended to be used specifically for the purposes of injecting
intravenous contrast medium and common flushing solutions into humans for angiographic
diagnostic studies. DO NOT attempt to use the injector for any other purpose.
11.2.2 Connect the injector to the system

Use only the interface cable provided by GE Healthcare to connect the injector to the sytem.
See 16.4.1 Optional accessories beginning on page 16-17 for information on ordering an
interface cable for your injector.
Caution Replace any covers removed from connectors on the system and its peripherals
when the injector is disconnected.
Connect the interface cable to the room interface connector and to the J40 universal interface
connector on the control room console connector panel on the injector. See 3.3.2 Workstation
external connections on page 3-19 for more information in external connectors.
Figure 11-1: Room interface connector
11-1
11.2.3 Auto inject synchronization

When properly set up and connected, the contrast agent injector injects a preset amount of
contrast media upon receiving a signal from the system. During subtraction imaging, the inject
signal is sent when the Syringe icon displays on the left side of the main system monitor. The
Syringe icon displays to indicate that a digital mask has been acquired and the injection of
contrast media may begin. Make sure the injector is set up to respond to the external signal
from the system. If the injector is not properly set up, contrast media may be injected
prematurely or not at all.
The following table details the modes when the signal is sent from the system to the injector.
Note: The contrast agent injector must be correctly connected to the system and armed
before the system can automatically activate the injector and inject contrast media.
Table 11-1: Auto Inject Synchronization
Mode Cue Inject Signal
Subtract As soon as the image is stable, the Inject signal is sent when icon displays. The
Syringe icon displays for 3 seconds on inject signal continues until the X-ray control
the left side of the live image. is released.
Roadmap-1 As soon as the image is stable and as The system does not send a signal to the
long as Roadmap-1 is active, the injector. The Medrad injector must be
Syringe icon displays on the left side of triggered manually.
the live image.
HLF with No visual cue. Inject signal is sent as soon as the image is
Cine stable, 1 to 2 seconds after the X-ray switch is
pressed. The inject signal continues until the
X-ray control is released.
Digital cine No visual cue. Inject signal is sent as soon as the image is
Pulse stable, 1 to 2 seconds after the X-ray switch is
pressed. The inject signal continues until the
X-ray control is released.
In Fluoro, Digital Spot, and HLF mode without cine, the system does not send a signal to the
injector.
11-2
12. Labels and symbols

This chapter describes labels and symbols that are located on your system and that are not
described elsewhere. Not all labels and symbols appear on all systems or components.
12.1 Labels
Warning / caution labels define potential hazards and advise against misuse that might result in
personal injury. Familiarize yourself with these labels and their meanings in order to ensure a
safe environment for both the patient and yourself.
This section identifies the locations and descriptions of labels that may appear on your system.
Table 12-1
Label
Location Side of Workstation frame.

Description This label contains identification and system information.
Table 12-2
Label
Location Front of C-Arm, below interface panel.

Description This label contains identification information for the C-Arm.
12-1
Table 12-3
Label
Location On the rear bottom of the Touch Tableside device.

Description This label contains identification information for the OEC Touch Tableside.
Table 12-4
Label
Location On the C-Arm cross-arm housing.

Description This label indicates that users should be familiar with safe operating practices asso-
ciated with this equipment before using the system.
Table 12-5
Label
Location Back of the Workstation, next to the external connector panel.

Description This label warns users to not touch the connectors and patients at the same time, and
to connect only approved devices to the system.
This label applies to the connectors on the rear of the Workstation as well as to any
connectors not in use on other medical devices that are connected to the Workstation.
12-2
Table 12-6
Label
Location Wrapped around the power cord, near the power plug.
Description This label indicates the grounding reliability requirements of the system.
Table 12-7
Label
Location Workstation yoke, near the USB port inside the accessory compartment.
Description This label warns users to not touch the connectors and patients at the same time.
Table 12-8
Label
Location On the flat panel detector cover.

Description This label warns users not to look directly at the laser. The label also provides the laser
radiation information.
12-3
Table 12-9
Label
Location Above the C-Arm interconnect cable receptacle.

Description This label indicates that the C-Arm mechanical sub-assemblies should be placed in
their most compact position before the system is transported or moved. See 3.5.6
Move the C-Arm beginning on page 3-46 for directions on moving the C-Arm.
Table 12-10
Label
Location On the side of the Workstation yoke near the power switch.
Description This label indicates that the Workstation mechanical sub-assemblies should be placed
in their most compact position before the system is transported or moved. See 3.3.5
Move the Workstation beginning on page 3-23 for directions on moving the Work-
station.
Table 12-11
Label
Location On the skin spacer and anti-scatter grid.

Description This label identifies the specific type of skin spacer or anti-scatter grid installed on the
system.
Table 12-12
Label
Location Inside accessory compartment, near the accessory power outlet.

Description This label identifies the voltage and current available at the accessory power outlet.
12-4
Table 12-13
Label
(example)
Location Base of the Workstation (back).

Description This label contains a bar code and a global device ID number for identifying the sys-
tem.
Table 12-14
Label
(example)
Location Inside the Workstation yoke.

Description This label contains the system’s UDI (Unique Device Identifier)
Table 12-15
Label
Location C-Arm rear cover label panel.

Description This label identifies the location of certification labels. Open panel to view labels inside.
12.2 Symbols
This section identifies the locations and descriptions of symbols that may appear on your
system.
12-5
Table 12-16
Symbol
Location l On the C-Arm rear cover label panel

l Above the interconnect cable receptacle (see Transport Label in Table 12-9
on page 12-4)
l On the side of the motor cover (motorized systems only)
l On the C-Arm cephalad / caudal tilt mechanism
l Near the High Voltage cable port
l Near the Workstation backup batteries
l On the flat panel detector (see Laser Aimer caution label on page 12-3)
l On the C-Arm cross-arm housing (see X-ray warning labelon page 12-2)
l On the back of the Workstation, next to the external connector panel (see
connector warning label on page 12-2)
l On the skin spacer and removable anti-scatter grid (see skin spacer and
removable anti-scatter grid labelon page 12-4)
l On the Workstation yoke, near the USB port, and inside the accessory
compartment (see USB warning label on page 12-3)
l On the power cable (see plug grounding label on page 12-3)
l On the OEC Touch Tableside
Description This symbol indicates that users should consult the Operator Manual regarding safe
operation and use of the labeled parts.
Table 12-17
Symbol
Location Inside the Workstation yoke

Description The eIFU symbol indicates that the instructions for use are available on your system,
online, or on a USB-enabled device with PDF reading capabilities.
Read the operator manual before using the system.
See Electronic operator manuals beginning on page 3-1 for more information.
Table 12-18
Symbol
Location Connector warning label. See Table 12-5 on page 12-2.

Description This symbol indicates hazards arising from dangerous voltages.
12-6
Table 12-19
Symbol
Location X-ray warning label, C-Arm power/cable connections area, C-Arm X-ray On switch,
and the X-rays and Motion Enabled position of the C-Arm keyswitch.
Description This symbol indicates the emission or imminent emission of X-radiation.
Table 12-20
Symbol
Location On the back of the Workstation next to the external connector panel, inside the Work-
station arch next to the USB ports, inside the Workstation printer bay, and on the C-
Arm interface panel and just below the High Voltage cable port.
Description This symbol indicates that the system is sensitive to electrostatic discharge. Protective
measures must be taken to prevent ESD discharge when connecting or disconnecting
external equipment.
Warning Do not touch the pins of connectors identified with this symbol
unless ESD precautionary procedures are used.
Table 12-21
Symbol
Location On the C-Arm lateral rotation assembly and the Workstation monitor arm.
Description This symbol identifies potential hand / finger pinch point areas. Keep hands and fingers
away from these areas when parts are in motion.
Table 12-22
Symbol
Location On the C-Arm base toe cover.

Description This symbol identifies a potential foot crush point. Keep feet away from this area when
C-Arm parts are in motion.
12-7
Table 12-23
Symbol
Location On fast stop switches on back of C-Arm cross-arm housing.

Description This symbol indicates switches that disable X-rays and motion.
Table 12-24
Symbol
Location Back of the Workstation yoke.

Description This symbol indicates the system disable switch.
Table 12-25
Symbol
Location Motorized systems only: Remote User Interface (RUI) and mini RUI.
Description This symbol indicates the motion stop switch. Pressing this switch disables all
motorized motion.
Table 12-26
Symbol
Location On the system rating label and inside the accessory compartment, near the accessory
power outlet.
Description This symbol indicates alternating current (AC) power.
Table 12-27
Symbol
Location Adjacent to the Equipotential terminals (one on Workstation, one on C-Arm) and near
the equipotential lug on the rear bottom of the Touch Tableside device.
Description This symbol indicates the Equipotential terminal. These terminals allow connection
between the system and the equipotential bus bar of the facility.
12-8
Table 12-28
Symbol
Location Inside the monitor arm, near the protective earth screw.
Description This symbol shows the location of the protective earth screw and indicates that the sys-
tem is protected against electric shock by a protective earth connection.
Table 12-29
Symbol
Location On power switch.

Description This symbol indicates the system power switch.
Table 12-30
Symbol
Location Cable connections area on C-Arm.

Description This symbol indicates the System Standby position of the X-ray keyswitch. X-rays and
motorized C-Arm motion are disabled. The system is still powered on.
Table 12-31
Symbol

Description This symbol indicates the X-rays Disabled position of X-ray keyswitch. X-rays are dis-
abled, but the C-Arm remains powered, and motorized motion is enabled.
Table 12-32
Symbol

Description This symbol indicates the port for handswitch cable.
12-9
Table 12-33
Symbol

Description This symbol indicates the port for footswitch cable.
Table 12-34
Symbol

Description This symbol indicates the port for remote user interface device.
Table 12-35
Symbol

Description This symbol indicates that AC power is available to charge generator batteries.
Table 12-36
Symbol
Location On footswitch, handswitch, and C-Arm control panel.

Description This symbol indicates the Mode switch used to toggle through the available imaging
modes on ESP/GSP systems, and to change between fluoroscopy and vascular
modes on Vascular systems.
Table 12-37
Symbol
Location Both sides of the X-ray tube housing.

Description This symbol indicates the approximate location of the X-ray tube focal spot projected
on a straight line at right angles to the central axis of the beam. This symbol can be
used to determine the SID by measuring from the symbol to the surface of the image
detector.
12-10
Table 12-38
Symbol
Location Back of the Workstation, near circuit breakers 1-4.

Description This symbol indicates the circuit breaker. Push to reset the circuit breaker for power to
the system.
Table 12-39
Symbol
Location On handswitch and footswitch.

Description This symbol indicates the exposure control that initiates Fluoro mode or enables
Roadmap mode.
Table 12-40
Symbol
Location On handswitch and footswitch.

Description This symbol indicates the exposure control that initiates HLF, Digital Spot, Digital Cine
Pulse, or Subtract mode.
Table 12-41
Symbol
Location On three-pedal footswitch.

Description This symbol identifies the footswitch pedal that initiates Digital Cine pulsed sequences.
Table 12-42
Symbol
Location Right side of the image detector.

Description This symbol indicates the patient orientation relative to the image shown on screen.
Table 12-43
Symbol
Location Workstation rear interface panel.

Description This symbol indicates the Ethernet connector.
12-11
Table 12-44
Symbol

Description This symbol indicates the room interface input / output connector closure outputs for
such things as X-ray On and Room in Use lights, and power injector operation.
Table 12-45
Symbol

Description This symbol indicates a video-out port.
Table 12-46
Symbol

Description This symbol indicates the video-in (DVI-D) port.
Table 12-47
Symbol
#
Location AKR display device label, H.V. generator/X-ray control label, image detector label,
beam limiting device label, system nameplate / rating label (C-Arm and Workstation),
skin spacer anti-scatter grid label, bottom of the three-pedal footswitch, wireless
footswitch receiver, and the OEC Touch Tableside.
Description This symbol indicates the model number or part number of the system or component.
Table 12-48
Symbol
Location By the lateral rotation brake handle, cephalad / caudal tilt brake handle, cross-arm
brake handle, Wig-wag brake handle, and the rear caster pedal on the C-Arm.
Description This symbol indicates the locked position of brake handle or pedal.
12-12
Table 12-49
Symbol
Location By the lateral rotation brake handle, cephalad / caudal tilt brake handle, cross-arm
brake handle, Wig-wag brake handle, and the rear caster pedal on the C-Arm.
Description This symbol indicates the unlocked position of brake handle or pedal.
Table 12-50
Symbol
Location Above the cephalad / caudal tilt brake handle on the C-Arm.
Description This symbol indicates the motion direction of the cephalad / caudal tilt brake handle.
Table 12-51
Symbol
Location On the Workstation brake pedal.

Description This symbol indicates the fully locked position of the Workstation brake pedal.
Table 12-52
Symbol
Location On the Workstation brake pedal.

Description This symbol indicates the steering position of the Workstation brake pedal.
Table 12-53
Symbol
Location On the footswitch.

Description This symbol indicates that the electrical switching mechanism within the footswitch is
protected from exposure to the effects of continuous immersion in water. Placement
inside a protective cover is recommended.
12-13
Table 12-54
Symbol
IPX3
Location On the OEC Touch Tableside system label and RUI label.
Description This symbol indicates that the electrical switching mechanism within the device is pro-
tected from exposure to the effects of up to 5 minutes of water spray. Placement inside
a protective cover is recommended.
Table 12-55
Symbol
Location On the laser aimer on/off switch.

Description This symbol indicates the on/off switch for the laser aimer.
Table 12-56
Symbol
beam limiting device label, the skin spacer, anti-scatter grid label, system name-
plate/rating label (C-Arm and Workstation), footswitch, and the OEC Touch Tableside.
Description This symbol indicates the manufacturer of the system or component.
Table 12-57
Symbol
beam limiting device label, system nameplate/rating label (C-Arm and Workstation),
footswitch, and the OEC Touch Tableside.
Description This symbol indicates the date of manufacture of the system or component.
Table 12-58
Symbol
beam limiting device label, system nameplate/rating label (C-Arm and Workstation),
footswitch, and the OEC Touch Tableside.
Description This symbol indicates the serial number of the system or component.
12-14
Table 12-59
Symbol
Location On the Workstation, C-Arm, and OEC Touch Tableside rating labels.
Description This symbol indicates the device's approximate weight in kilograms.
Table 12-60
Symbol
Location On the Workstation, C-Arm, and OEC Touch Tableside rating labels.
Description This symbol indicates the catalog number or commercial product name of the system
or component.
Table 12-61
Symbol
Location On the system rating label.

Description This symbol indicates that the system is a medical device.
12-15
12-16
13. Quality assurance, maintenance, and storage

This section describes routine quality assurance (QA) checks that ensure that the system is
operating correctly. The QA checks listed are not intended to substitute for planned
maintenance. If problems are found during these checks, contact a qualified service engineer
to troubleshoot and repair the system.
In addition to QA checks, safe cleaning practices are included, along with a description of
planned maintenance that should be performed. All planned maintenance should be performed
by a GE OEC Medical Systems, Inc. representative or a qualified service engineer.
Prior to performing any of the QA checks in this section, it is important that potential hazards
associated with these tasks are understood. Review 1. Safety overview beginning on page 1-1
before proceeding.
Move the system into a safe operating area prior to beginning these checks and observe all
radiation safety precautions. The QA checks should be performed as often as equipment use
and circumstances warrant.
Warning Circuits inside the equipment use voltages capable of causing serious injury
or death from electrical shock. Do not remove the covers or perform any type
of service task, except as specifically instructed here.
13.1 Cleaning and disinfecting the system

13.1.1 Approved cleaning agents / disinfectants
The following cleaning agents and disinfectants are approved for cleaning the system.
l MadaCide-FD
l Virex® II 256
l CaviCide®
l CaviWipes®
l Clorox® Healthcare Bleach Germicidal Wipes
l Oxivir TB
l Oxivir® TB Wipes
l Oxivir® 1
l Oxivir® 1 Wipes
l Sodium Hypochlorite (0.5%)
13-1
l Sani-Cloth® AF3 Germicidal Disposable Wipe

l Sani-Cloth® Bleach Germicidal Disposable Wipe
Caution Be careful not to spill or splash liquids where they can enter electronic
assemblies.
Always turn the system off and disconnect power before cleaning.
Do not spray or use liquid cleaners in areas of electrical connections.
Do not let the system sit soiled for longer than 4 hours.
Cleaning procedure
Cleaning is intended to remove soil and contaminants from the surface of the system. Perform
this procedure after every use and any time the system has visible dirt, dust, or contaminants
on the surface, such as after extended storage.
1. Ensure the system has been properly shut down.
2. Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3. Visually inspect the equipment for damage to covers, cables, connectors, labels, and
monitor screens for unacceptable deterioration, such as corrosion (beyond surface rust
spotting), large areas of discoloration or discoloration deeper than yellowing, pitting,
cracked seals, large scale finish lifting or peeling, large bubbles, damage to monitor
screen, label adhesive failure resulting in a majority of label being detached, loss of text
or symbol that obscures meaning of label, or peeling or delamination of label material.
Caution Do not turn on electrical power if any of the covers are not in place or broken.
Hazardous electrical or mechanical parts could be exposed. Damaged parts may
lose their degree of protection against harmful ingress of liquids or may fall.
Contact service to replace the damaged or missing parts.
4. Apply any of the approved cleaners / disinfectants to a cloth and gently wipe surfaces.
Be careful not to drip liquids where they can enter electronic assemblies through panel or
cover seams.
5. Detach the removable X-ray grid from the C-Arm and gently wipe all surfaces.
6. Rinse grid with water and wipe with a clean cloth and / or swab to remove any excess
liquid.
7. Use a soft bristle brush to clean seams and crevices.
8. Apply liquid cleaners / disinfectants directly to the brush and gently brush surfaces.
9. Clean all surfaces thoroughly to remove any signs of dust or soil, paying special attention
to parts of the system that may be positioned over the patient.
10. Rotate the C-Arm and actuate all moveable parts to access and clean all areas of the
system. Pay special attention to the C-Arm cables.
13-2
11. To clean the monitor:

a. Clean the monitor screen with a soft, damp cloth. No cleaning agents or
disinfectants are recommended. Avoid using solutions containing alcohol as they
can damage the anti-fingerprint coating.
b. Apply liquid cleaners / disinfectants directly to the brush and gently brush the
casing surfaces, avoiding the monitor screen.
12. To clean cords and cables, including the power cord, interconnect cable, and any
accessory cords, apply approved cleaners / disinfectants to a cloth and gently wipe each
cord from the system down to the plug or free end. As the cord is cleaned, wrap the cord
around the appropriate cord wrap. Ensure that the cleaned cords do not contact the floor.
13. Dry the cleaned surfaces with a clean, soft cloth, making sure to leave no residue.
14. Inspect surfaces to ensure that there is no remaining soil.
15. Repeat cleaning procedure, if necessary.
16. Perform the disinfecting procedure if the system has come into contact with bodily fluids.
Caution Liquids, if allowed to drip into the equipment, can cause electrical short circuits
leading to electric shock and fire hazards.
Caution If liquids should accidentally spill into the system electronics, DO NOT connect
the power cord to a power supply connection or turn the system on until the
liquids have dried or evaporated completely.
Disinfecting procedure
Disinfection is intended to destroy viruses, mycobacteria, fungi, and vegetative bacteria from
the system. Perform this procedure any time the system has come into contact with bodily
fluids, such as after use.
1. Follow all cleaning procedure steps.
2. Ensure the system has been properly shut down and that the power cord has been
unplugged from the wall outlet.
3. To disinfect the system, apply any of the approved cleaners / disinfectants to the surface
of the system and keep them wet for the disinfectant manufacturer's recommended time.
Disinfectants must remain wet for the recommended time in order to properly disinfect
the surface. Be careful not to drip liquids where they can enter electronic assemblies
through panel or cover seams.
This following surfaces of the system should be individually disinfected:

a. C-Arm gantry.
b. X-ray tube.
c. Detector.
13-3
d. Main system monitor bezel. Be careful not to get disinfectant on the screen.
e. Workstation keyboard and top of work area.
f. OEC Touch and / or OEC Touch Tableside C-Arm control panel.
g. Lift switches on Cross-arm. Be careful not to drip liquids into the Cross-arm seams
around the switches.
h. X-ray switches on Cross-arm. Be careful not to drip liquids into the Cross-arm
seams around the switches.
i. C-Arm handles.
j. Handswitch.
k. Footswitch.
l. Motorized system only: RUI and / or Mini RUI.
4. Once the surfaces have been kept wet for the requisite time, allow the system to air-dry
and then wipe the disinfected surfaces with a clean, soft cloth, making sure to leave no
residue.
13.2 Planned and periodic maintenance

13.2.1 Owner responsibilities
Based on the concept of risk management, routine checks and planned maintenance are
required for the mobile C-Arm system to ensure safe operation, reliable system performance,
and correct diagnostic results.
Follow the detailed work instructions and safety information for all service and maintenance
activities included in this document. Contact your local GE Healthcare service representative
for detailed information.
Proof of these maintenance activities is required in certain countries.
13.2.2 Definitions
Planned maintenance must be performed by qualified and authorized service engineers. In this
context:
l Qualified means that the service engineer has been trained and has had practical
experience in the required routines so that he/she is capable of performing service work
on the system.
l Authorized means that the service engineer is recognized by the system owner as a
qualified service engineer and is therefore authorized to perform maintenance work on
the system.
Upon system start-up, GE Healthcare recommends designating one employee who is
responsible for ensuring that routine checks, preventive inspection, and maintenance work are
performed and that evidence is retained.
13-4
In addition to repair services, GE Healthcare also offers its customers complete planned
maintenance service, including inspection and planned maintenance on GE Healthcare
systems. These services can be provided either on a service call basis or in the form of a
flexible maintenance contract.
If you have not received a quotation for the performance of planned maintenance and
inspection from our GE Healthcare Services team, your local GE Healthcare sales
representative will provide this information for you. Your GE Healthcare representative can
provide a quotation for planned maintenance and inspection.
13.2.3 Planned maintenance overview

Planned maintenance activities are subdivided into the following activities.
Table 13-1: Planned maintenance activity intervals
Activity Interval
Safety checks (see page 13-5) Every 12 months
Planned maintenance (see page 13-6) Every 12 months
Recommended preventive replacement frequency (see page 13-6) Every 12-36 months
Replacement due to wear and tear (see page 13-8) As described below
Planned maintenance should be performed every 12 months.

System service and maintenance should not be conducted when the system is in use with a
patient.
Safety checks
The following safety checks help maintain the system in a safe operating condition. Depending
on the results, planned maintenance or repair may be required. The checkpoints are specified
in legal regulations and / or safety standards.
13-5
Table 13-2: Safety checks
Component / Reason for Safety Check Actions Interval

Function
Antistatic Drag Wires Reduces buildup of Inspect for wear and 12
Electrostatic Energy. ensure contact with floor. Months
Steering and Brakes Ensure proper control when Perform steering and 12
positioning system. brake checks. Months
AC Power Cord & Identify worn cable to prevent Inspect AC power cable. 12
Plug potential power loss or shock Months
hazard.
Interconnect Cable Ensure sound connections to Inspect interconnect 12
prevent potential system cable and receptacle. Months
errors due to communication
issue.
Ground Continuity Ensure adequate electrical Measure ground 12
grounding. continuity. Months
C-Arm Battery Pack Identify possible corrosion. Visually inspect around 12
the batteries within the Months
compartment for
corrosion.
Transformer Output Ensure that system power is Perform transformer 12
sufficient to prevent errors and output check. Months
potential failures.
High Voltage Cable Identify worn cable to prevent Inspect high voltage 12
potential power loss or shock cable. Months
hazard.
Planned maintenance
Planned maintenance helps to reduces unanticipated errors and to ensure minimum system
requirements are met over the life of the system.
These checks test the effects of various operating conditions (high or partial load, temperature,
dust particle size, humidity, gases, vapors). If necessary, preventive maintenance or repair
measures are performed as a result. The status of parts subject to wear is determined by
recording and analyzing performance parameters.
13-6
Table 13-3: Planned maintenance
Component / Reason for Planned Actions Interval

Function Maintenance
Monitor Arm Ensure that the monitor arm Perform monitor arm 12
moves properly and retains check and adjustment Months
position.
Fans / Filters Prevent system overheating Check and clean. 12
leading to degradation of Replace if necessary. Months
system components leading
to possible loss of full system
functionality.
Power Supply Ensure that the system power Inspect and adjust C-Arm 12
is sufficient to prevent errors power supply, setting at Months
and potential failures. nominal recommended
voltage output. Replace if
necessary.
Workstation Ensure that the system is Perform Workstation 12
functioning fully as intended. panel diagnostics and Months
functional test.
Accessories Ensure that the accessories Perform accessory 12
function as intended. functional test. Months
Visual examination of Identify deterioration of pads Visual examination and 12
C-Arm lateral and and prevent potential functional check. Replace Months
cross-arm brake contamination of sterile field. if necessary.
pads
Footswitch Ensure sound connections Visual examination and 12
and examine for wear to functional check. Replace Months
prevent potential failure of the if necessary.
switch to function.
Handswitch Ensure sound connections Visual examination and 12
and examine for wear to functional check. Replace Months
prevent potential failure of the if necessary.
switch to function.
C-Arm High Voltage Prevent high voltage arcing Regrease and perform 12
Cable Greasing leading to potential system generator and X-ray tube Months
malfunction and damage to calibration.
components that could lead to
loss of functionality.
C-Arm Generator Optimize system Calibrate. Replace if 12
and X-Ray Tube performance following HV necessary. Months
calibration cable greasing.
13-7
Recommended preventive replacement frequency

GE Healthcare recommends replacing the following components as specified to prevent
failure. These components are subject to wear and tear as they are used. Replacement will
reduce the likelihood of unexpected failure. Recommendations are based on typical customer
use. High use systems and / or systems used for high dosage situations may require
replacement of these components more frequently. Preventive replacement is not covered by
the standard planned maintenance contract coverage.
Table 13-4: Recommended preventive replacement frequency
Component / Reason Actions Interval

Function
Workstation CPU Prevent system failure due to Clean heat sink. 36
heat sink overheated CPU. Months
Workstation system Prevent loss of data, data corruption Replace 36
hard drive (mixed data), loss of system Months
functionality due to hard drive failure
or bad sectors on drive.
Workstation eBox Prevent loss of system functionality. Replace 36
motherboard coin cell Months
batteries
Replacement due to wear and tear

The following components are subject to degradation and must be replaced during the life of
the system. The rate at which the wear occurs depends on how the system is used and the
conditions of that use. For example, customers who take a higher number of shots per day /
procedure or who take higher level shots (for example, high level flouro) may experience a
shorter life for the components. Operation of the system at elevated temperatures or other
extreme environments could also affect the life of the components.
13-8
Table 13-5: Replacement due to wear and tear
Component / Potential Effect

Function
X-Ray Tube Loss of X-ray capability. (Also part of planned maintenance.)
System Battery Loss of capability to perform high level fluoro shots. Loss of system
Pack functionality.
Footswitch Uncommanded X-ray due to stuck foot switch. Loss of foot switch as an
option for commanding X-ray. (Also part of planned maintenance.)
Handswitch Uncommanded X-ray due to stuck hand switch. Loss of hand switch as
an option for commanding X-ray.(Also part of planned maintenance.)
Brake Pads Degradation of pads resulting in potential contamination of sterile field or
reduction in ability of system to maintain desired position / orientation.
(Also part of planned maintenance.)
Interconnect Loss of system functionality due to communication loss between
Cable Workstation and mainframe. (Also part of planned maintenance.)
High Voltage Loss of X-ray capability. (Also part of planned maintenance.)
Cable
Power Cable / Loss of system functionality due power loss or interruption of power.
Cord (Also part of planned maintenance.)
13.3 Quality assurance (QA) checks

This subsection and Appendix B: IQ and dose QA check data form on page B-1 constitute the
required training material for performing, recording, and monitoring QA tests.
Complete the following QA checks prior to using the system.
Personnel performing these tests must receive proper training and become fully acquainted
with the recommendations of the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements
and the International Commission on Radiation Protection. NCRP reports are available from:
NCRP Publications
7910 Woodmont Avenue
Suite 400
Bethesda, Maryland 20814-3095
http://ncrponline.org/publications
QA checks frequency
Perform these checks at the listed frequency. Some checks are part of the Startup checklist,
and should be performed before the system's first use each day.
Extensive use warrants increasing the frequency of QA checks. In addition, circumstances
13-9
such as accidents during transport or exposure to excessive fluids may warrant that QA checks
be performed to verify operation of the equipment. Refer to each QA check section for details
on when specific checks may need to be performed.
If problems are found during these checks, contact a qualified service engineer.
Table 13-6: Mechanical QA check (see page 13-11)
Item Frequency
Brake operation (Wig-wag, cross-arm, L-arm, lateral, cephalad /
caudal tilt, wheels, and / or steering, depending on C-Arm model)
Daily or
Lift column, rotation, and tilt movement operation
as needed
Vertical column lift operation
Skin spacer attachment
Table 13-7: Electrical QA check (see page 13-14)
Item Frequency
Cables and connectors integrity
Static drag wires integrity and cleanliness
Daily or
System startup operation
as needed
Fans and vents operation and cleanliness
Laser Aimer operation
Table 13-8: Fast stop QA check (see page 13-14)
Item Frequency
Vertical column lift fast stop operation
FAST STOP ACTIVATED message display Daily or
Fast stop switch reset as needed
Fast stop operation after restart
13-10
Table 13-9: Image quality and dosimetry QA checks (see page 13-15)
Item Frequency
X-ray QA check - System positioning, imaging system operation includ-
ing image manipulation controls and iris and leaf collimators operation, Daily or
and Handswitch / footswitch operation - Reference: DIN 6868-57, DIN as needed
6868-150
Auto technique check - Reference: 21CFR 1020.30 (h)(3)(vi), 21CFR
1020.30 (h)(3)(vii)
Half Value Layer check - Reference: 21 CFR 1020.30 (m)(1), IEC
60601-1-3:2008 cl. 7.1
FPD image resolution check - Reference: Internal spec equivalent to
IEC 61223-3-1
II image resolution check - Reference: IEC 61223-3-1
FPD entrance dose check Reference: 21 CFR 1020.32(d)(2), IEC
60601-1-3:2008 cl. 6.5 Annually or
II entrance dose check- Reference: 21 CFR 1020.32(d)(2), IEC 60601- as needed
1-3:2008 cl. 6.5
Reference Air Kerma Rate (AKR) accuracy check- Reference: 21 CFR
1020.30 (h)(6)(i), 21 CFR 1020.32 (k)(4), 21 CFR 1020.32(k)(6), IEC
60601-2-43:2010 cl. 203.6.4.5
Reference Cumulative Air Kerma (CAK) accuracy check- Reference:
21 CFR 1020.30 (h)(6)(i), 21 CFR 1020.32(k)(4), 21 CFR 1020.32 (k)
(6), IEC 60601-2-43:2010 cl. 203.6.4.5
Quality control check
Table 13-10: Motorized system QA check (see page 13-12)
Item Frequency
System startup
System positioning
RUI buttons and joystick operation
Lateral clutch and motion operation Annually or
Motion disabled operation, including MOTION STOP PRESSED mes- as needed
sage display
Contact Bumper integrity and operation, including CONTACT
DETECTED message display
13.3.1 Mechanical QA check

1. Non-motorized systems only: Lock and unlock the Wig-wag brake to check its operation.
Check the Wig-wag for ease of movement.
2. Lock and unlock the cross-arm brake to check its operation. Extend and retract the
cross-arm to check for ease of movement.
3. Ergo-C systems only: Lock and unlock the L-Arm brake to check its operation. Check L-
Arm rotation for ease of movement.
13-11
4. Non-motorized systems only: Lock and unlock the C-Arm lateral rotation brake to check
its operation. Check lateral rotation of the C-Arm for ease of movement. Release the C-
Arm and verify that there is no drift.
5. Non-motorized systems only: Lock and unlock the cephalad / caudal tilt brake to check
its operation. Check cephalad / caudal tilt for ease of movement.
6. Check the operation of the C-Arm rear wheel pedal brakes for ease of movement and
proper control of the wheels.
7. Check for proper operation of the C-Arm steering handle and control of the rear wheels.
Check for ease of movement.
8. Check the operation of the Workstation brake pedal for ease of movement and proper
control of the wheels.
9. Check the Workstation wheels for ease of movement.
10. Check the monitor latch. Make sure the monitor latches securely.
11. Raise and lower the vertical column by pressing the switches located on top of the cross-
arm housing.
12. Check that the skin spacer mounts to the X-ray tube cover. If the skin spacer is not
available, obtain a replacement.
13. OEC Touch Tableside systems only: Inspect the OEC Touch Tableside connector cable
for signs of wear or abrasion, loose, bent, or missing connector pins, and worn strain
reliefs.
14. Check the operation of the OEC Touch Tableside wheel pedal brakes for ease of
movement and proper control of the wheels.
15. Check the OEC Touch Tableside vertical latch for ease of movement and proper
operation.
16. Motorized OEC Touch Tableside systems only: Raise and lower the vertical column by
pressing the switches located on the mini RUI.
13.3.2 Motorized system QA check

This section is applicable to motorized systems only.
Caution Take proper precautions to ensure that the area is clear of obstructions. Provide
a minimum 6-foot clearance around all sides of the C-Arm. Provide a minimum 8-
foot vertical clearance. Verify that all brakes are locked.
1. Ensure that the system is turned off.

2. Inspect the RUI cable for signs of wear or abrasion, loose, bent, or missing connector
pins, and worn strain reliefs.
3. Plug the Remote User Interface (RUI) into the C-Arm.
4. If a surgical table is available, place the table near the system in a normal clinical
position with respect to the C-Arm, and attach the RUI to the table’s side rail. If no table is
13-12
available, attach the RUI to the C-Arm rail under the cross-arm housing. Check the RUI
mechanical latch for proper operation.
5. Turn on the system and allow it to start up completely.
6. Verify that the system starts successfully with no motion-related error messages. See
14.3 Messages beginning on page 14-6 for details on any messages that display during
the startup sequence. Verify that no uncommanded motion occurs at any time during the
startup process.
7. Imagine a patient lying face up on the table. Visualize the location of the patient’s head,
feet, right side, and left side.
8. Press the RUI orientation button until the correct LED illuminates, designating the current
location of the RUI with respect to the imagined patient.
9. Adjust the C-Arm orientation button on the RUI to designate the current location of the C-
Arm with respect to the imagined patient. Press the button until the correct LED
illuminates.
10. Verify that the vertical column buttons on the RUI operate correctly.
11. Verify that the RUI image acquisition buttons operate properly.
12. Disengage and hold the lateral clutch and verify manual lateral motion. Check lateral
rotation for ease of movement.
13. Engage the lateral clutch and verify that you cannot manually move the C-Arm in an
lateral motion.
14. Verify that the joystick moves the C-Arm through lateral rotation and cephalad / caudal
tilt without any error messages.
15. While the C-Arm is in motion, press the motion stop switch on the RUI and verify that
movement stops. Verify that lateral rotation, cephalad / caudal tilt, and vertical lift column
motion are disabled, and that a MOTION STOP PRESSED message displays in the
status bar and on the C-Arm control panel.
16. Twist the motion stop switch so that it pops up. Verify that the MOTION STOP
PRESSED message no longer displays.
17. Verify that there is no damage to the contact bumper.
18. Press firmly on the contact bumper and verify that an audible alarm sounds and a
CONTACT DETECTED message displays.
19. Remove your hand from the contact bumper and verify that the CONTACT DETECTED
message no longer displays and the audible alarm stops.
20. Motorized OEC Touch Tableside systems only:
a. Plug the Touch Tableside and mini RUI into the system.
b. Check the RUI mechanical latch for proper operation.
c. Verify that the joystick moves the C-Arm through lateral rotation and cephalad /
caudal tilt without any error messages.
13-13
d. While the C-Arm is in motion, press the motion stop switch on the mini RUI and
verify that movement stops. Verify that lateral rotation, cephalad / caudal tilt, and
vertical lift column motion are disabled, and that a MOTION STOP PRESSED
message displays in the Workstation status bar and on the C-Arm control panel.
screen.
e. Twist the motion stop switch so that it pops up. Verify that the MOTION STOP
PRESSED message no longer displays.
13.3.3 Electrical QA check

1. Inspect the high voltage cable for signs of wear and abrasion.
2. Inspect the footswitch and handswitch cables for signs of wear and abrasion.
3. Inspect the Workstation power cord. Look for signs of wear or abrasion to the cables,
loose, bent, or missing connector pins, and worn strain reliefs.
4. Inspect the interconnect cable for signs of wear or abrasion, loose, bent, or missing
connector pins, and worn strain reliefs.
5. Check the static drag wires below the Workstation. Look for damage and debris, and
ensure the wires touch the ground.
6. Check the static drag wires below the C-Arm. Look for damage and debris, and ensure
the wires touch the ground.
7. Turn the system on and verify that it successfully completes the startup sequence with
no errors reported. See 14.3 Messages beginning on page 14-6 for details on any
messages that display during the startup sequence.
8. Check that the Workstation fans function and that all vents are clear of obstruction. Fan
vents are located on the lower sides of the Workstation (See Figure 3-11: Workstation
components on page 3-16).
9. Check that the C-Arm X-ray tube fan functions and that all vents are clear of obstruction.
Fan vents are located on the side and bottom of the X-ray tube on systems with active
cooling only (See 3.5.2 C-Arm components on page 3-39).
10. Check that the Laser Aimer turns on and that the lasers are aligned with the center mark
on the collimator cover.
Warning Do not look directly into the lasers. You can damage your eyes by looking
into even a low-powered laser light source.
13.3.4 Fast stop QA check

This check is performed as a matter of routine operator maintenance to ensure that the fast
stop safety feature is functioning properly. Perform this check as often as conditions warrant,
such as removal from long-term storage or exposure to fluids.
13-14
1. Press and hold one of the vertical column control switches and, while motion is
occurring, press the fast stop switch so that it locks into position.
2. Verify that vertical column motion stops and that the FAST STOP ACTIVATED
message displays in the status bar and on the C-Arm control panel.
3. Press any X-ray switch and verify that X-rays are disabled.
4. Twist the fast stop switch that was locked in step 1 so that it pops out.
5. Turn off the system and then restart it.
Note: Images and annotations will be lost when the system is restarted unless you have
saved them. If you have saved images, you can access them through the Images tab.
13.3.5 Image quality and dosimetry QA checks

The following section addresses the parameters, their specifications, tests, tools, quality
standards, acceptance limits and action limits for the QA tests. All tools must be calibrated
before use.
These checks must be performed by personnel appropriately authorized, trained, qualified,
certified, and/or licensed to use the system and to perform the required testing, such as
certified/licensed radiologic technologists and licensed medical physicists knowledgeable
about the principles and techniques for image quality and dosimetry testing and evaluation.
The values provided in the tables below are the expected ranges if the system is calibrated per
your service manual procedures.
Professional medical physicist societies include:
l American Association of Physicists in Medicine: http://www.aapm.org
l International Organization for Medical Physics: http://www.iomp.org
l European Federation of Organizations for Medical Physics: http://www.efomp.org
Monitor the QA checks over time for system performance. In case of concerns, please consult
your service representative. If problems are found during these checks or if problems persists
after suggested troubleshooting, contact a qualified service engineer.
X-ray QA check
Warning This procedure produces X-rays. Take the appropriate precautions.
1. Position the C-Arm so that the X-ray tube is directly above the image detector.
2. Place a suitable test object on the removable grid of the image detector.
3. Verify that auto mode is selected. The LED or icon next to the Auto Technique key on
the C-Arm control panel will be illuminated or selected.The icon next to Auto Technique
on the C-Arm control panel will be selected.
13-15
4. Press the X-ray On switch located on top of the cross-arm housing.

a. Verify that the X-ray On lamps are illuminated and that the system beeps.
b. Verify that a live fluoro image of the test object displays on the left side of the main
system monitor and that it remains there after the exposure is terminated.
c. Verify that the DAP and CAK values accumulate with each exposure.
d. Verify that the AKR value displays during an exposure and returns to zero once
exposure is terminated.
5. If using a wireless footswitch, press the Mode switch on the footswitch to confirm that the
mode changes on the system.
6. Connect the wired footswitch (if applicable) and handswitch and, while pressing a
footswitch or handswitch X-ray switch:
a. Verify operation of the C-Arm image rotation and image reversal controls.
b. Verify operation of the field size selection keys: Norm, Mag1, and Mag2.
c. Verify operation of the collimator leaf rotation, iris collimation, and leaf open/close
controls.
d. Verify operation of the Mode switch, located on the footswitch and handswitch.
7. Open the Applications > Setup > Utilities > Display Test Patterns screen and touch
TG18-OIQ to display the TG18-OIQ test pattern. See 2.1.12 Set up Utilities beginning
on page 2-59 for more information on the Test Patterns screen. When the test pattern
displays:
a. Verify that the boxes of grid lines (A) are visible.
b. Verify the continuity of the light-to-dark ramp bars (B).
c. Verify that the 95% (C) contrast fields are visible.
d. Verify that the 5% (D) contrast fields are visible.
Figure 13-1: The TG18-OIQ test pattern showing the grid lines (A), light-to-dark ramp bars
(B), 95% contrast field (C), and 5% contrast field (D).
If this test fails, ensure that at least 20 minutes have passed since the system was started up.
13-16
View the monitor from no further away than 2 meters. Check the contrast and adjust ambient
light for improved visibility, and then try again.
Auto technique check

Required equipment: A set of 13 cm x 13 cm copper plates 110 Alloy (three 1 mm thick plates)
1. Ensure that the collimator cover and removable anti-scatter grid are installed.
2. Select the Orthopedic profile on the Reference > Mode > Profile screen.
3. Enable Auto Technique on the C-Arm control panel.
4. Select Norm field size on the C-Arm control panel.
5. Open the collimator iris and collimator leaves completely.
6. Place a 1 mm copper plate on the collimator cover and press a fluoro X-ray switch. Verify
that the kVp values are within the range indicated in the table.
Table 13-11: Copper plate kVp specifications
1 mm copper plates Range
1 58-64 kVp
2 68-74 kVp
3 76-82 kVp
7. Add a second 1 mm copper plate and press a fluoro X-ray switch. Verify that the kVp
values are within the range indicated in the table.
8. Add a third 1 mm copper plate and press a fluoro X-ray switch. Verify that the kVp values
are within the range indicated in the table.
9. Remove all copper plates.
If this test fails, try again with a different set of plates.
Half Value Layer check

Note: If you have a dosimeter that measures the Half Value Layer (HVL), steps 7-11 below
are not required. Use the instructions provided with the dosimeter to measure HVL.
Required equipment: Dosimeter, measuring tape, and a set of 10 cm x 10 cm aluminum plates
1100 Alloy (at least one 0.5 mm thick plate, five 1 mm thick plates, and five 0.1 mm thick plates)
1. Position the C-Arm with the X-ray Tube up and the image receptor down.
2. Ensure that the collimator cover and removable anti-scatter grid are installed.
3. Set up the dosimeter to measure dose rate (AKR).
4. Using the mounting bracket and stand provided with the meter, mount the ion
chamber/dose detector centered and 30 cm ± 3 mm from the image receptor.
5. Fluoro and center the ion chamber/dose detector as viewed on the main system monitor.
13-17
6. Disable Auto Technique on the C-Arm control panel and manually set the technique to
80 kV and 3 mA.
Note: The HVL is a measurement of beam quality. The components that contribute to the
HVL are the X-ray tube and cover, primary and variable collimators.
7. With no aluminum (0 mm) plates in the path of the beam, make a fluoro exposure until
the AKR on the Dosimeter stabilizes.
8. Note the initial (0 mm) AKR reading.
9. Divide the AKR reading by 2 to determine the ½ AKR value.
10. Continue to fluoro and add aluminum plates to the path of the beam (at the closest point
to the collimator) until the AKR value reaches the value calculated in step 9.
11. When the AKR reading reaches the ½ value calculated in step 9, the total thickness of
plates placed in the path of the beam is the system's Half Value Layer.
12. Verify that the HVL is ≥ 4.0 mm Al @ 80 kVp.
If this test fails, ensure that the dosimeter probe is centered and 30cm above the grid, and then
try again.
FPD image resolution check

Required equipment: Nuclear Associates 07-523 Converging line pairs/millimeter (LP/mm)
tool or equivalent
1. Select Auto Technique on the C-Arm control panel.
2. Place the converging line-pair tool at a 45° angle on the FPD with the converging end
near the center of the FPD , as shown:
Figure 13-2: Line pair tool placement on FPD
3. While taking auto fluoro exposures, observe the converging lines, from wider to narrower
separations, until approximately 50% of the converging line-pairs disappear.
Note: In order to minimize the effects of moiré pattern interference in the area of interest, the
tool may be slightly shifted from the position shown.
4. Adjust the brightness and contrast to achieve optimum resolution of the converging line-
pairs.
13-18
5. Verify that the resolution in line pairs/millimeter is equal to or greater than the following
values:
Table 13-12: FPD image resolution specifications
Field Size 21 cm 31 cm
Norm ≥ 2.5 lp/mm ≥ 1.8 lp/mm
Mag1 ≥ 3.0 lp/mm ≥ 2.2 lp/mm
Mag2 ≥ 3.3 lp/mm ≥ 2.4 lp/mm
If this test fails, ensure that the converging end of the Line Pair tool is centered on the detector
and is angled 45° from either the horizontal or vertical axis. Adjust Noise level, Brightness, and
Contrast to maximize visibility, and then try again.
II image resolution check

Required equipment: Nuclear Associates 07-523 Converging line pairs/millimeter (LP/mm)
tool or equivalent
1. Place the converging line-pair tool at a 45° angle on the II with the converging end near
the center of the II, as shown:
Figure 13-3: Line pair tool placement on II
1. II Grid
2. Camera H-scan
2. Observe the converging lines, from wider to narrower separations, until approximately
50% of the converging line-pairs disappear.
If the line-pairs disappear for a short distance and 50% (or more) reappear, that pattern
should be viewed again, further along, until 50% of the pairs disappear. In order to
minimize the effects of moiré pattern interference in the area of interest, the tool may be
slightly shifted from the position shown.
3. While taking Auto Fluoro X-ray exposures, adjust the brightness and contrast to achieve
optimum resolution (converging line pair tool). Verify compliance with the resolution
specification in Norm, Mag1 and Mag2 modes as shown in the table below.
Table 13-13: II image resolution specifications
Field Size 9" 12"
Norm ≥ 2.3 lp/mm ≥ 1.7 lp/mm
Mag1 ≥ 3.2 lp/mm ≥ 2.3 lp/mm
Mag2 ≥ 3.8 lp/mm ≥ 3.0 lp/mm
If this test fails, ensure that the converging end of the Line Pair tool is centered on the detector
13-19
and is angled 45° from either the horizontal or vertical axis. Adjust Noise level, Brightness, and
Contrast to maximize visibility, and then try again.
FPD entrance dose check

Required equipment: Dosimeter and a set of 13cm x 13cm copper plates 110 Alloy (two 1mm
thick plates)
1. Ensure that the removable anti-scatter grid is installed.
2. Ensure that the collimator cover is on the C-Arm.
3. Attach 2 mm of copper plate to the collimator cover so that the entire X-ray beam passes
through it.
Note: Measurements can be done using either an ION CHAMBER such as the 150 or 180 cc
for the low dose reading (low energies), or SOLID STATE DETECTORS that are
designed and calibrated to measure low dose energies measurements with copper in
the beam. The trigger level on the solid state dosimeter may need to be set to 'LOW
DOSE' for the test. If using an RTI Piranha dosimeter, use the external dose probe.
4. Place the dosimeter in the center of the grid on the image receptor. Make certain there is
no dosimeter stand or any other object on the image receptor.
5. Ensure that Standard ABS (not low dose) is selected on the C-Arm control panel. Take
an HLF shot to verify the operation of the dosimeter.
6. Select the Orthopedic profile on the Profile screen.
9. Fully open the collimator iris and shutter.
10. Take a continuous fluoro exposure for 5 to 10 seconds (until the dosimeter reading
stabilizes) and observe the dose rate on the dosimeter. The dose is very low, so ensure
that the reading has stabilized. You may need to take more than one shot.
11. Verify that the observed dose rate on the dosimeter is within the range specified below.
See Determining your settings on page A-2 for information which settings your system
uses.
Table 13-14: Continuous fluoro dose rates for FPD entrance dose checks
Software Detector / Dom Int'l 1 Int'l 2 Int'l 3 Int'l 4 Int'l 5 Int'l 6
version ABS table (µGy/min)
1.0.XXXX / 21 cm 36-42 16-21 16-21 n/a n/a n/a n/a
1.2.XXXX 31 cm 27-31 13-17 13-17 n/a n/a n/a n/a
2.X.X.XXXX / 21 cm 40-46 22-26 36-42 26-31 43-51 17-21 40-46
3.1.X.XXXX 31 cm 30-34 14-17 28-33 22-26 34-40 14-17 30-34
12. Navigate to the Reference > Mode screen and select HLF mode.
13. Select 8 pps pulse rate.
13-20
14. Take an HLF pulsed exposure for 5 to 10 seconds (until the dosimeter reading stabilizes)
and observe the dose rate on the dosimeter.
Table 13-15: HLF pulsed dose rates for FPD entrance dose checks
Software Detector / Dom Int'l 1 Int'l 2 Int'l 3 Int'l 4 Int'l 5 Int'l 6
version ABS table (µGy/min)
1.0.XXXX / 21 cm 68-82 38-47 68-82 n/a n/a n/a n/a
1.2.XXXX 31 cm 49-59 18-23 49-59 n/a n/a n/a n/a
2.X.X.XXXX / 21 cm 68-82 42-49 68-82 27-32 68-82 41-49 68-82
3.1.X.XXXX 31 cm 49-59 18-22 49-58 18-22 49-59 18-21 49-59
16. Remove the copper plates and enable Auto Technique and continuous mode.
If this test fails, ensure that the dosimeter is calibrated and is centered on the detector, and
then try again. Alternately, try again with a different dosimeter.
II entrance dose check

Required equipment: A set of 13cm x 13cm copper plates 110 Alloy (two 1mm thick plates)
1. Ensure that the removable anti-scatter grid is attached to the detector.
2. Place a low dose sensor onto the center for the receptor, securing it with tape if
necessary.
3. Ensure that the collimator cover is on the C-Arm.
4. Attach two 1 mm copper plates to the collimator.
Note: Measurements can be done using either an ION CHAMBER such as the 150 or 180 cc
for the low dose reading (low energies), or SOLID STATE DETECTORS that are
designed and calibrated to measure low dose energies measurements with copper in
the beam. The trigger level on the solid state dosimeter may need to be set to 'LOW
DOSE' for the test. If using an RTI Piranha dosimeter, use the external dose probe.
5. Select the Orthopedic profile on the Profile screen.

8. Take a continuous fluoro exposure for 5 to 10 seconds (until the dosimeter reading
stabilizes) and observe the dose rate on the dosimeter. The dose is very low, so ensure
that the reading has stabilized. You may need to take more than one shot.
See Determining your settings on page A-2 for information which settings your system
uses.
13-21
Table 13-16: Continuous fluoro dose rates for II entrance dose checks
Detector / ABS table Domestic Int'l 1 Int'l 2 Int'l 3 Int'l 4 Int'l 5 Int'l 6
9" (µGy/min) 40-46 22-26 36-42 26-31 43-51 17-21 40-46
12" (µGy/min) 30-34 14-17 28-33 22-26 34-40 14-17 30-34
10. Navigate to the Mode screen and select HLF mode.

11. Select 8 pps pulse rate.
12. Take an HLF pulsed exposure for 5 to 10 seconds (until the dosimeter reading stabilizes)
and observe the dose rate on the dosimeter.
Table 13-17: HLF pulsed dose rates for II entrance dose checks
Detector / ABS table Domestic Int'l 1 Int'l 2 Int'l 3 Int'l 4 Int'l 5 Int'l 6
9" (µGy/min) 68-82 42-49 68-82 27-32 68-82 41-49 68-82
12" (µGy/min) 49-59 18-22 49-58 18-22 49-59 18-21 49-59
Reference Air Kerma Rate (AKR) accuracy check

Required equipment: Dosimeter, measuring tape
Note: Do not use a 150 cc or 180 cc ion chamber for this measurement. Use a beam detector
that is smaller.
1. Set the dosimeter with the middle of the detector at 30 cm ± 3 mm above the surface of
the image receptor and centered in the X-ray beam.
2. Ensure that the collimator cover and removable anti-scatter grid are installed and no
copper plates are in the beam.
3. Set the dosimeter to measure dose rate in units of Gy/min.
Note: Use units of mGy/min if the dosimeter allows.
4. Verify the main system monitor displays dose rate units in mGy/min.
Figure 13-4: AKR dose reading

6. Verify that the collimator shutters and iris are fully open.
7. Take a 10 second manual exposure at 90 kVp and 3 mA. During the exposure, note the
displayed AKR as indicated in Figure 13-4.
13-22
8. During the exposure, also note the dose rate reading from the dosimeter. This is the
Measured AKR.
9. Ensure the units of measurement used for calculations are the same. Use the following
conversion factors to convert the units if needed.
l 1 μGy is equal to 0.001 mGy
l 1 mGy is equal to 1000 μGy
l 1 R is equal to 8.76 mGy
10. Use the following formula to calculate AKR accuracy:
Measured AKR - Displayed AKR

Percent Error = 100 x
Measured AKR
11. Verify that the percent error is within ± 25%.
Note: Do not use a 150 cc or 180 cc ion chamber for this measurement. Use an ion chamber
that is smaller or a solid state dosimeter.
Reference Cumulative Air Kerma (CAK) accuracy check

Required equipment: Dosimeter, measuring tape
Note: Do not use a 150 cc or 180 cc ion chamber for this measurement. Use a beam detector
that is smaller.
1. Set the dosimeter at 30 cm ± 3 mm above the surface of the image receptor and
centered in the X-ray beam.
2. Set the dosimeter to read the cumulative dose in units of Gy.
Note: Use units of mGy if the dosimeter allows.

4. Take an auto fluoro exposure and verify that the CAK is displayed as indicated
in Figure 13-5.
Figure 13-5: CAK reading
5. Start a new exam to reset the CAK to zero.

6. Reset the dosimeter dose readout to zero.
7. Take a normal fluoro exposure at 90 kVp and maximum mA until the "CAK" displayed on
the main system monitor and the dosimeter are greater than or equal to 100.1 mGy.
13-23
8. Note the CAK reading from the dosimeter. This is the Measured CAK.
9. Note the displayed CAK as indicated in Figure 13-5.
10. Ensure the units of measurement used for calculations are the same. Use the following
conversion factors to convert the units if needed.
l 1 μGy is equal to 0.001 mGy
l 1 mGy is equal to 1000 μGy
l 1 R is equal to 8.76 mGy
11. Use the following formula to calculate CAK accuracy:
Measured CAK - Displayed CAK

Percent Error = 100 x
Measured CAK
12. Verify that the percent error is within ± 25%.

Quality control check

Note: The quality control check is not a QA check and is not recorded in the Appendix B: IQ
and dose QA check data form.
The system provides a quality control mode for assessing the dose rate of the system. This is
provided in compliance with NEMA XR27. The American Association of Physicists in Medicine
(AAPM)'s Report No. 190 - Accuracy and calibration of integrated radiation output indicators in
diagnostic radiology: A report of the AAPM Imaging Physics Committee Task Group 190,
Medical Physics, Vol 42, Issue 12 (2015) includes complete details on how to perform quality
adjustments for dose calibration.
Once a quality control check has been performed, the calibration information is stored on the
system and each subsequent RDSR will include data related to the latest quality control check.
For information about the DICOM header and image pixels in images archived in DICOM
standard format for presentation or in OEC Compatible format for processing, see the DICOM
Conformance Statement found at http://ge.com/dicom.
Any imaging mode may be used for the quality control check, but HLF mode is the closest
imaging mode to the medium dose rate mode described in the AAPM report.
To perform a quality control check:
1. Touch the Applications tab, and then touch Setup.... The Applications > Setup screen
displays.
13-24
2. Touch Quality Control Mode in the menu. The Applications > Setup > Quality Control
Mode screen displays.
3. Perform the procedure your site has selected for calculating the calibration factor.
4. Follow the screen instructions.
5. Press Save to save the image(s) generated during the procedure.
6. After the site-specific procedure is complete, use the fields provided on the Quality
Control Mode screen to record the following values:
l Calibration Factor: the factor by which a measured or calculated value is multiplied to
obtain the estimated real world value, as determined by your site's selected protocol.
l Local Regulatory Uncertainty Limit: the uncertainty of the recorded value, as
determined by your site's selected protocol. Values range from 0% to 100%.
l Calibration Responsible Party: the individual or organization responsible for
calibration. This field may also include useful data such as the unique ID number for
the dosimeter used.
l Name of Executed Protocol Document: the identification name or number of the
internal protocol document used to test the system, as determined by your site.
7. To archive images during the quality control check:
Note: The RDSR is not available until the quality control check is complete. See To
archive images and the RDSR after exiting quality control mode beginning for
information on exporting the RDSR.
a. Without saving or exiting quality control mode, touch Images. The Images screen
displays with the current quality control exam displayed.
b. Insert a portable media device and touch Load USB.
c. Touch Options to display the Images > Portable Media Options screen.
l Select the DICOM Viewer Compatible check box to archive the images for
presentation.
l Select the OEC Compatible check box to archive the images for processing. These
images are stored on the portable media device as DICOM-formatted files.
d. Touch OK to exit the Portable Media Options screen.
e. Select the image thumbnail and touch Send.
f. Touch Applications to return to the Quality Control Mode screen.
8. Touch Save and then touch Exit.
Quality control images and the associated RDSR can also be archived to a portable media
device or to a PACS server after the quality control check is complete. The quality check exams
automatically complete once the check is finished.
To archive images and the RDSR after exiting quality control mode:
1. Touch the Patient tab and select the quality control entry. It will be listed as QC Data
13-25
Entry and will include the date of the quality control test in YYYY-MM-DD format.
2. Touch View Exam. The Images screen displays with the selected quality control exam
displayed.
3. To archive the images and RDSR to a PACS server in For Presentation format:
a. Select the server as the To location.
b. Select the thumbnails and touch Send.
4. To archive the images and RDSR to a portable media device:
a. Insert a portable media device and touch Load USB.
b. Touch Options to display the Portable Media Options screen.
l Select the DICOM Viewer Compatible check box to archive the images for
presentation.
l Select the OEC Compatible check box to archive the images for processing. These
images are stored on the portable media device as DICOM-formatted files.
c. Touch OK to exit the Portable Media Options screen.
d. Select the thumbnails and touch Send.
13.4 Storage and shipment

Follow these steps to store or ship the system.
13.4.1 Storage
Note: See 16.1.5 Environmental conditions beginning on page 16-3 for information on
environmental requirements for storage of the Workstation and C-Arm.
To prepare the system for storage, follow these steps:
1. Connect the Workstation and C-Arm with the interconnect cable.
2. Plug the system into a power outlet for up to 24 hours, until the batteries are fully
charged.
3. Once the system is fully charged, turn it off and unplug the power cord from the power
outlet.
4. Turn off the circuit breaker located under the right C-Arm wheel.
5. Disconnect the interconnect, footswitch, and other cables.
6. Place the C-Arm into transport position, as shown in the C-Arm Transport Position label
located above the C-Arm interconnect cable receptacle. See Transport Label on page
12-4 for more information.
7. Pack all accessories and store them with the system.
8. Set all brakes on the C-Arm including the lateral rotation brake, the cephalad / caudal tilt
brake, the Wig-wag brake, and the horizontal cross-arm brake.
13-26
9. Set all brakes on the Workstation.

10. Wrap the interconnect cable around the Workstation interconnect cord wrap.
11. Wrap the power cord onto the power cord wrap.
12. Secure the monitor in the monitor latch.
13. Cover the system with a dust cover.
Conditioning the X-ray tube during long-term storage

When the system is stored or unused for longer than 90 days, follow these conditioning steps
every three months to ensure that the tube remains viable:
1. Connect the Workstation and C-Arm with the interconnect cable.
2. Plug the system into a power outlet for up to 24 hours, until the batteries are fully
charged.
3. Turn the keyswitch to the X-rays and Motion Enabled position.
4. Activate HLF X-ray exposure for one minute at each of the following settings:
l 40 kV / 20 mA
l 60 kV / 20 mA
l 80 kV / 20 mA
l 100 kV / 20 mA
l 120 kV / 20 mA
If the C-Arm is stored longer than three months without X-ray tube conditioning performed as
described above, contact your biomedical team or GE Field Engineer to perform the X-ray
Generator Warm-up service instructions before using the C-Arm.
If the C-Arm is stored longer than six months without X-ray tube conditioning performed as
described above, the X-ray tube will be out of service warranty and will need replacement.
13.4.2 Shipment
Note: See 3.3.5 Move the Workstation beginning on page 3-23 and 3.5.6 Move the C-Arm
beginning on page 3-46 for detailed information on moving the system.
Caution Two people should maintain control of the Workstation or C-Arm when moving up or
down an incline. Do not move the Workstation or C-Arm over inclines greater than
10°. Do not move the Workstation or C-Arm up or down stairs or steps. Do not lock the
Workstation or C-Arm in place on an incline greater than 10°.
To prepare the system for shipment, follow these steps:
13-27
1. Turn off the system.

2. Unplug the system power cord from the power outlet and wrap the power cord onto the
power cord wrap.
3. Turn off the circuit breaker located under the right C-Arm wheel.
4. Disconnect the interconnect, footswitch, and other cables.
5. Wrap the interconnect cable around the Workstation interconnect cord wrap.
6. Place the C-Arm into transport position, as shown in the C-Arm Transport Position label
located above the C-Arm interconnect cable receptacle. See Transport Label on page
12-4 for more information.
7. Pack all accessories and store them with the system.
8. Set all brakes on the C-Arm including the C-Arm lateral rotation brake, the cephalad /
caudal tilt brake, the Wig-wag brake, the L-arm brake, and horizontal cross-arm brake,
and ensure they are working properly.
9. Set all brakes on the Workstation and ensure they are working properly.
10. Secure the monitor in the monitor latch, and firmly secure the monitor to the system
using plastic wrap, shrink wrap, or straps.
13-28
14. Troubleshooting and messages

This section describes messages that appear on the main system monitor and the C-Arm
control panel. Some of the messages are informational messages displayed to advise the user
that the system is operating correctly. Other messages display when the system fails during the
startup sequence or fails during system operation. System failures may result in impaired
system operation or automatic system shutdown. The messages are listed in alphabetical
order on the following pages.
Warning Ignoring error and warning messages may result in equipment damage and
personal injury.
14.1 Error recovery

Warning The system may fail at any time. Establish procedures for assuring patient
and operator safety in case of the loss of imaging or other system functions
during an exam up to and including but not limited to having a backup system
available. System functions and imaging may be recovered using the
following error recovery procedure.
14.1.1 Error recovery procedure

Perform the following error recovery procedure if you encounter problems during start-up or
operation.
1. Read the displayed message carefully.
Some messages display an OK button; touching this button allows system use to
continue, and acknowledges that the system may function in a degraded state.
Other messages contain instructions to shutdown and restart the system. See 2.2
System startup, shutdown, and restart beginning on page 2-68 for information on
properly shutting down and restarting the system.
If shutting down and restarting the system fails to restore normal operation, proceed with
step 2.
2. Shut down the system, remove all power, and call for service.
14.1.2 Event logs

Use the Applications > Event Log screen to find additional information about errors.
To access the event logs, touch the Applications tab and then touch Event Log....
14-1
Figure 14-1: Event Log screen
To search system log files for specific events:

1. Touch Source to select a type of event. Choose from User, and, for Administrative
users, User Audit, System Authentication, System Account, System Calls, and
System Secure.
l User logs contain errors event information.
l User Audit logs contain information used for internal auditing purposes.
l System Authentication logs contain OS events such as privilege escalation, remote
login, etc.
l System Account logs contain OS user account modifications.
l System Calls logs contain OS calls that make modifications to system security settings.
l System Secure logs contains alternate logs for security related events.
Audit events are available only for Administrative users.
2. Touch Date to select a date range. Options are Today, 2 Days, 1 Week, 2 Weeks, 1
Month, 3 Months, 6 Months, 1 Year, and All.
3. Enter Text to search for, if applicable.
4. Touch Apply to search for matching records, or Reset to clear search fields.
Matching events display on the screen. Select a specific event to see specific details about the
event, including the Date and Time it occurred, the Event ID associated with the event, and
additional Data about the event.
14-2
Touch Clear Log to clear User event details.

Touch OK to return to the Applications screen.
14.1.3 Transfer status

Use the Applications > Transfer Status screen to find additional information about transfers
and print jobs.
To access the event logs, touch the Applications tab and then touch Transfer Status....
Figure 14-2: Transfer Status screen
The Transfer Status screen displays a list of transfers, including print jobs and transfers to and
from portable media devices and DICOM servers. If the list is longer than can be displayed in a
single screen, use the arrow keys on the keyboard or the Page Up / Page Down arrows on the
screen to page through the list.
To view the status of specific transfers:
Enter text to search for in any of the displayed columns, such as a patient's name, accession
number, exam date, transfer status, destination details (AE title, address, or port), date or time
requested, date or time of the results, or the status code.
Alternately, use the dropdown menus to search for specific criteria. Use View Status, View
Exams, Sort By, and Sort Order to find specific transfers. View and sort criteria can be used
together or individually. The list updates automatically as the view and sort criteria change.
l To view by transfer status, select a View Status criterion from Active, Queued,
Complete, Failed, or All.
l To view by exam status, select a View Exams criterion from Current, Today's, or All.
14-3
l To sort, select a Sort By criterion, from Patient Name, Patient ID, Date, or Status, and
then select a Sort Order, Ascending (from A to Z, or from earliest to most recent) or
Descending (from Z to A, or from most recent to earliest).
Select a check box next to a transfer to view detailed information in the Data Transfer Details
area at the bottom of the screen.
Touch Close to return to the Applications screen.
14.1.4 Image freeze

If the image on the main system monitor “freezes,” press the power switch to shut down the
system, wait 10 seconds and press the power switch again. Should this condition persist, shut
down the system and call for service.
14.1.5 No X-ray
If the system fails to take X-rays, turn off the system following the shutdown procedure. Wait 10
seconds, and then turn on the system. Should this condition persist, shut down the system and
call for service.
14.1.6 No boot
Do not interrupt system power until the system has fully completed the boot cycle. If the system
fails to start up within 3 minutes, shut down the system, wait 10 seconds, and then press the
power switch again. Should this condition persist, shut down the system and call for service.
14.2 Heat management

The system's cooling hardware operation contributes to longer X-ray tube life, better system
performance, and improved patient throughput.
Because of how the cooling hardware operates, a hot or overheated system cools more quickly
when it is left plugged in and turned on.
14.2.1 Anode temperature thresholds

The system displays heat bar graphics in the status bar on the left side of the main system
monitor.
14-4
Figure 14-3: Anode (top) and housing (bottom) heat indicators
The status bar shows a percentage of the temperature of the X-ray tube anode and X-ray tube
housing.
The system displays the following temperature-related messages.
When the anode is hot, the following messages display in the status bar and on the C-Arm
control panel:
ANODE IS HOT, HLF DISABLED

HOT, HLF DISABLED
See page 14-13 for more information on these messages.
When the anode overheats, the following messages display in the status bar and on the C-Arm
control panel:
ANODE OVERHEATED, X-RAYS DISABLED

ANODE OVERHEATED, X-RAYS DISABLED, PRESS ALARM RESET
When the housing is hot, the following messages display in the status bar and on the C-Arm
control panel:
HOUSING IS HOT, HLF DISABLEDHOUSING IS HOT

HOUSING IS HOT
When the housing overheats, the following messages display in the status bar and on the C-
14-5
Arm control panel:
HOUSING OVERHEATED, X-RAYS DISABLED

HOUSING OVERHEATED, RESTART THE SYSTEM
14.3 Messages
The following messages display on OEC systems.
Follow all message instructions and call for service if a message repeatedly displays or cannot
be cleared.
System messages display in four locations:
l On the OEC Touch / OEC Touch Tableside C-Arm control panel. See 3.8.1 OEC Touch /
Touch Tableside C-Arm control panel on page 3-93 for information on location of C-Arm
control panel messages.
l On the main system monitor:
l In the status bar, located at the bottom of the monitor;
l In a dialog box with one or more acknowledgment buttons; or
l Across the full screen on the monitor.
4-HOUR WARM-UP REQUIRED Proceeding without waiting may affect image quality.
This message displays in the status bar when the system has been stored for
more than 60 days. A warm-up period is necessary for ion removal from the
image intensifier tube.
When this message displays, the following message displays on the C-Arm
control panel:
4-HOUR WARM-UP REQUIRED, PRESS ANY KEY
Leave the system on with no operation for 4 hours, and then press any C-Arm
control panel key or RUI control panel key.
14-6
A/D CHARGER SENSOR OUT OF RANGE, RESTART THE SYSTEM If this message per-
sists, call for service.
This message displays in the status bar when a fault in the data conversion
process is detected in the analog-to-digital channel for the Charger Current
Sensor. The system will not operate in this condition.
control panel:
A/D CHARGER SENSOR OUT OF RANGE, RESTART THE SYSTEM
Motorized systems only: When this message displays, all motorized motion (other
than lift motion) is disabled and the following message displays in a dialog box:
MOTION ERROR, MOTION DISABLED Motion component failure detected.
Restart the system. If this message persists, call for service.
A/D CURRENT OUT OF RANGE, RESTART THE SYSTEM If this message persists, call
for service.
process is detected in the analog-to-digital channel for the Filament Current
control panel:
A/D CURRENT OUT OF RANGE, RESTART THE SYSTEM
14-7
A/D FILAMENT SENSOR OUT OF RANGE, RESTART THE SYSTEM If this message per-
process is detected in any of the analog-to-digital channel for the Filament B+
control panel:
A/D FILAMENT SENSOR OUT OF RANGE, RESTART THE SYSTEM A/D
FILAMENT SENSOR OUT OF RANGE, RESTART THE SYSTEM
A/D FLUX OUT OF RANGE, RESTART THE SYSTEM If this message persists, call for ser-
vice.
process is detected in the analog-to-digital channel for the Flux Sensor. The
system will not operate in this condition.
control panel:
A/D FLUX OUT OF RANGE, RESTART THE SYSTEM

14-8
A/D HIGH MA OUT OF RANGE, RESTART THE SYSTEM If this message persists, call for
service.
process is detected in the analog-to-digital channel for the High mA Sensor. The
control panel:
A/D HIGH MA OUT OF RANGE, RESTART THE SYSTEM
A/D HOUSING TEMP OUT OF RANGE, RESTART THE SYSTEM If this message per-
process is detected in the analog-to-digital channel for the Housing Temperature
control panel:
A/D HOUSING TEMP OUT OF RANGE, RESTART THE SYSTEM
14-9
A/D INVERTER OUT OF RANGE, RESTART THE SYSTEM If this message persists, call
for service.
process is detected in the analog-to-digital channel for the Inverter B+ Sensor.
The system will not operate in this condition.
control panel:
A/D INVERTER OUT OF RANGE, RESTART THE SYSTEM
A/D KVP SENSOR OUT OF RANGE, RESTART THE SYSTEM If this message persists,
call for service.
process is detected in the analog-to-digital channel for the kVp Sensor. The
control panel:
A/D KVP SENSOR OUT OF RANGE, RESTART THE SYSTEM
14-10
A/D LOW MA OUT OF RANGE, RESTART THE SYSTEM If this message persists, call for
service.
process is detected in the analog-to-digital channel for the Low mA Sensor. The
control panel:
A/D LOW MA OUT OF RANGE, RESTART THE SYSTEM
A/D STATOR OUT OF RANGE, RESTART THE SYSTEM If this message persists, call for
service.
process is detected in the analog-to-digital channel for the Stator Sensor. The
control panel:
A/D STATOR OUT OF RANGE, RESTART THE SYSTEM
14-11
A/D VOLTAGE OUT OF RANGE, RESTART THE SYSTEM If this message persists, call
for service.
process is detected in the analog-to-digital channel for the Filament Voltage
control panel:
A/D VOLTAGE OUT OF RANGE, RESTART THE SYSTEM
ABANDON SELECTED EXAM WITH SELECTED ABANDON CODE? Touch Yes to aban-
don the selected exam, or No to cancel.
This message displays in a dialog box when the system is prompted to abandon
an exam. The system documents the selected reason code, and creates a
complete Radiation Dose Structure Report as a part of this action.
ACCESS ANTIVIRUS FEATURE? The antivirus feature disables access to X-rays and
requires a manual system restart when complete. Touch Yes to continue or No to cancel.
This message displays in a dialog box when the user requests access to the
antivirus feature.
ANATOMICAL PROFILE DISABLED The system has detected a problem with one or
more anatomical profiles. These profiles will be unavailable. To restore or correct these
profiles, call for service.
This message displays in a dialog box when an anatomical imaging profile did not
pass the integrity check, does not have a compatible format revision, or is
unavailable because it is not supported for the current system configuration.
Touch OK and follow the message instructions.
14-12
ANODE IS HOT, HLF DISABLED Allow the anode to cool to regain High Level X-rays.
This message displays in the status bar when the anode temperature is at 80% of
its rated heat capacity or greater. This message alternates with the technique
displayed on the C-Arm control panel, while an alarm sounds. HLF is not allowed
as long as this condition persists. Continued use without cooling may damage the
X-ray tube. Fluoroscopy is not prevented but the tube should be allowed to cool
before making another exposure.
control panel:
HOT, HLF DISABLED
Press the Alarm Reset key on the C-Arm control panel to silence the alarm and
follow the message instructions.
ANODE OVERHEATED, X-RAYS DISABLED Press the Alarm Reset Key.

This message displays in the status bar when the anode has reached 100% of its
heat capacity. X-rays are disabled until the anode cools.
control panel:
ANODE OVERHEATED, X-RAYS DISABLED, PRESS ALARM RESET
Press the Alarm Reset key on the C-Arm control panel to silence the alarm and
allow the anode to cool.
ANTIVIRUS FILE UPDATE REQUIRED The antivirus file has not been updated in the last
7 days. Contact the security administrator.Touch OK to continue.
This message displays in a dialog box during startup when the virus files are old.
ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO APPEND STEP TO EXAM? Touch Yes to append the
step to the exam, or No to cancel.
This message displays in a dialog box when the system is prompted to append a
step manually or to use a worklist step.
ASSOCIATE CURRENT IMAGES WITH THIS PATIENT? Touch Yes to associate the cur-
rent images with this patient, or No to cancel.
This message displays in a dialog box when patient information that is associated
with the images is selected to be copied to the system.
14-13
AUTHENTICATION FAILURE This account is temporarily locked because of too many

invalid logins. Use Emergency Login or wait to gain access to the system. Touch OK to
continue.
This message displays in a dialog box when a the system is locked due to too
many failed login attempts.
AUTHENTICATION FAILURE Invalid login and/or password detected. Touch OK and try
again.
This message displays in a dialog box when a username or password is entered
incorrectly.
AUTHENTICATION FAILURE This account has been locked. Use Emergency Login or
contact the administrative user to gain access to the system. Touch OK to continue.
This message displays in a dialog box during startup when the user attempts to
login, but their account is locked by the Security Administrator.
BANNER IMPORTED SUCCESSFULLY Touch OK to continue.

This message displays in a dialog box during startup when the banner import is
complete.
BATTERY LOW, HIGH LEVEL X-RAYS DISABLED Leave the C-Arm connected and
plugged into the wall to charge.
This message displays in the status bar when the battery charge drops below
40%. High-level X-rays are disabled until the battery is charged.
control panel:
BATTERY LOW
Follow the message instructions. Make sure that the interconnect cable in place
between the C-Arm and the Workstation. The Workstation power switch should
be turned to the off position. A full battery recharge typically requires a few hours.
14-14
BATTERY NOTICE - RECOMMEND CHARGING Leave the C-Arm connected and

plugged into the wall to charge.
This message displays in the status bar when the effective battery charge drops
to between 70 to 40 percent of capacity. This message alternates with the
technique displayed on the C-Arm control panel, and erases when the condition is
cleared. Fluoro and HLF exposures are allowed. If the batteries are further
discharged without adequate recharge time, the effective charge may drop low
enough that X-rays are disabled.
control panel:
BATTERY NOTICE
Follow the message instructions. Make sure that the interconnect cable in place
between the C-Arm and the Workstation. The Workstation power switch should
be turned to the off position. A full battery recharge typically requires a few hours.
BUMPER ATTACHED
Motorized systems only: This message displays for 3 seconds at the top of the left
side of the main system monitor when the contact detection assembly switch is
electrically connected to the system.
BUMPER REMOVED
side of the main system monitor when the contact detection assembly switch is
electrically disconnected from the system. When the bumper is removed, the
system limits motion speed to 3° per second.
C-ARM CONTROL PANEL DISCONNECTED

This message displays in the status bar when communication to the Touch /
Tableside C-Arm control panel has been lost and system operation has been
interrupted.
Follow the message instructions. If restarting the system does not correct the
problem, call for service.
14-15
C-ARM FIRMWARE INCOMPATIBLE, X-RAYS DISABLED If this message persists, call

for service.
This message displays in the status bar when software determines that any
Generator PION or Fluoro Functions PION firmware are not compatible during
startup.
control panel:
C-ARM FIRMWARE INCOMPATIBLE, X-RAYS DISABLED
This event can only be repaired by a service engineer.
C-ARM HAS BEEN CONNECTED TO WORKSTATION Wait while the C-Arm restarts.
This message displays in a dialog box when a C-Arm is reconnected to a
Workstation without restarting the Workstation. The message erases when the C-
Arm has started up successfully.
C-ARM HAS BEEN DISCONNECTED FROM WORKSTATION

This message displays in a dialog box when the C-Arm is disconnected from the
Workstation. The message erases after 3 seconds.
C-ARM POWER LOST, X-RAYS DISABLED Restart the system. If this message persists,
call for service.
This message displays in the status bar when AC Power to the C-Arm is lost even
though the Workstation has AC power.
control panel:
C-ARM POWER LOST, X-RAYS DISABLED
C-ARM REBOOT REQUIRED, RESTART THE SYSTEM If this message persists, call for
service.
This message displays in the status bar when there has been a problem with the
software that operates on the C-Arm component.
control panel:
C-ARM RESTART REQUIRED
14-16
CALIBRATE FPD DOSE

This message displays on the C-Arm control panel when the system detects that
image detector dose calibration is required. See FPD DOSE CALIBRATION
REQUIRED for details.
CALIBRATE FPD MAPS

This message displays on the C-Arm control panel when the Flat Panel Detector
map has not been calibrated. This can only be repaired by a service technician.
See FPD MAPS CALIBRATION REQUIRED for details.
CAMERA IRIS CALIBRATION REQUIRED Call for service.

This message displays in the status bar when the camera iris must be calibrated.
control panel:
CALIBRATE CAMERA
Call for service.
CAMERA IRIS ERROR, RESTART THE SYSTEM If this message persists, call for ser-
vice.
This message displays in the status bar when the camera iris must be calibrated.
control panel:
CAMERA IRIS ERROR
CANCEL COPY OPERATION? Touch Yes to cancel the copy operation, or No to con-
tinue.
This message displays in a dialog box when the user presses the Cancel button
on the Copy in Progress... screen.
CANNOT ACCESS USER MANUAL Verify that the User Manual USB device is inserted
into a system USB port. If this message persists, call for service.
This message displays in a dialog box when the user tries to access the user
manual files on the USB device but the system cannot access the files due to
corruption or because the USB device is not inserted.
Touch OK and follow the message instructions, or touch Cancel.
14-17
CANNOT CHANGE PASSWORD Password cannot be changed until a specific number of

days has passed. Contact the administrative user. Touch OK to continue.
This message displays in a dialog box during startup when the user attempts to
change their login password before the retention date has been reached.
CANNOT COMMUNICATE WITH WORKSTATION KEYPAD Check the connection and

then restart the system. If this message persists, call for service.
This message displays in a dialog box when the system is unable to initialize the
USB connection during startup.
CANNOT CONNECT TO DICOM SERVER Verify that the target server is online, and that
its IP address, port number and AE Title are configured properly on the system. If this mes-
sage persists, call for service.
This message displays in a dialog box when the system detects that the
connection to the DICOM server can't be established, due to an incorrect IP
address or port number, or an offline server.
CANNOT CONNECT TO DICOM SERVER Check your TLS configuration and verify that
the target server is online, and that its IP address, port number and AE Title are con-
figured properly on the system. If this message persists, call for service.
This message displays in a dialog box when TLS is enabled and the user
attempts to transfer images to a DICOM server with a missing or invalid
certificate.
CANNOT MAKE CONNECTION TO WIRELESS NETWORK The network you selected is

not FIPS compliant. Touch OK to select another network.
This message displays in a dialog box when FIPS security is configured and the
user attempts to connect to a non-FIPS network.
14-18
CANNOT MAKE CONNECTION TO WIRELESS NETWORK Verify wireless network set-

tings.
This message displays in a dialog box when the system fails to connect to the
configured wireless network due to an incorrect Username or password.
Touch OK and check the Username and password for the wireless network to
ensure that the values entered are correct. If the values are correct, call for
service.
CANNOT MAKE NETWORK CONNECTION Make sure that the Workstation is connected
to the network.
This message displays in a dialog box when the system is unable to perform a
Verify (DICOM Setup and Ping/Trace) or unable to perform a C-FIND Query
because the network connection is not available.
CANNOT MOUNT FILE SYSTEM ON PORTABLE MEDIA Check the connection for the
portable media device. If the device is a USB flash drive, format the device.
This message displays in a dialog box when the system is unable to mount the file
system on the USB device during startup.
CANNOT WRITE TO PORTABLE MEDIA - READ-ONLY IS AVAILABLE The system can

import but not export images to or from the portable media device. If image export is
needed, insert another media device and try again.
This message displays in a dialog box when a removable media device is
mounted or when a removable media device does not have any space left when
mounted. The system may be able to read and copy the images that already exist
on the removable media device, but the system cannot copy images to the
removable media device.
Try mounting the removable media device again if the removable media device
has available storage space.
CERTIFICATE CREATION FAILURE Self-signed certificate and private key creating

request has failed. Try again. If the message persists, call service .
This message displays in a dialog box when the system cannot create the self-
signed certificate and private key.
14-19
CERTIFICATE CREATION SUCCESS Self-signed certificate and private key have been
created. Touch OK to continue.
This message displays in a dialog box when the user has successfully created the
self-signed certificate and private key.
CERTIFICATE EXPORT FAILURE The selected certificate was not exported to portable
media device. Check the device. Touch OK to continue.
This message displays in a dialog box when they system failed to export the Self-
Signed or Host Certificate to a portable media device.
CERTIFICATE EXPORT SUCCESS The certificate has been successfully exported to port-
able media device. Touch OK to continue.
This message displays in a dialog box when the user has successfully exported
the self-sign or host certificate to a portable media device.
CERTIFICATE IMPORT SUCCESS Touch OK to continue.

This message displays in a dialog box when a Host or Trusted Certificate has
been added to the system.
CERTIFICATE SIGNING REQUEST NOT WRITTEN TO PORTABLE MEDIA DEVICE

Check the portable media device. Touch OK to continue.
This message displays in a dialog box when an error occurred while writing the
certificate signing request to the server.
CHANGE SECURITY SETTING DEFAULTS? Cybersecurity will be reduced. Touch OK to

continue or Cancel to retain the previous setting.
This message displays in a dialog box when the FIPS, Login, or portable media
option has been changed on the system.
Touch OK to continue.
14-20
CHARGER FAILED, RESTART THE SYSTEM Continued use will disable the system. Call
for service.
This message displays in the status bar when the battery charger fails at startup.
The system will not operate in this condition.
control panel:
CHARGER FAILED, RESTART THE SYSTEM
CHARGER FAILED Continued use will disable the system. Call for service.
This message displays in the status bar when a charger failure occurs during
operation. The message alternates with the technique displayed on the C-Arm
control panel. Continued use will result in loss of system functionality. This can
only be repaired by a service technician.
control panel:
CHARGER FAILED
Checking File System This process may take up to 5 minutes. DO NOT TURN OFF
POWER while this message is displayed. To avoid future file system checks do not turn
off power before the Patient Information or Login screen is displayed.
This message displays during the startup procedure when a file system check is
being performed.
See If the system fails to start normally beginning on page 2-69 for more
information.
CINE RUN INCOMPLETE One or more frames in this playback have been lost. If this mes-
This message displays in a dialog box when a cine playback in progress has lost
a frame.
14-21
CINE RUN INCOMPLETE One or more frames have been lost. If this message persists,
call for service. 2 This message displays in a dialog box when a frame was lost during cine
acquisition. The loss can show up as a duplicate frame in the playback or will have a miss-
ing frame or frames.
CINE STORAGE FULL X-rays will be disabled until space is available. Archive older
exams to PACS or portable media device and then delete the exams from the system to
free space.
This message displays in a dialog box when no more image storage space is
available. X-rays are disabled while in this state.
Touch OK to continue and then delete old exams to free space for new images to
be saved.
CLUTCH OPEN
Motorized systems only: This message displays at the top of the left side of the
main system monitor when the clutch is released and the C-Arm is free to orbit.
Normally this is possible only when someone holds the clutch handle in the
release position.
If this message displays with no one touching the clutch handle, call for service.
COLLIMATOR CALIBRATION REQUIRED Call for service.

This message displays in the status bar when the current collimator iris or leave
position values do not match the reference values stored in memory. This can
only be repaired by a service technician.
control panel:
COLLIMATOR CALIBRATION REQUIRED, PRESS ANY KEY
COLLIMATOR IRIS POSITION ERROR Dose reporting accuracy may be affected. Call for
service.
This message displays in the status bar when the collimator iris potentiometer is
not working and the iris position cannot be determined. This can only be repaired
by a service technician.
control panel:
IRIS POSITION ERROR
14-22
COLLIMATOR IRIS TOO LARGE Restart the system.

This message displays in the status bar when the collimator iris is larger than the
C-Arm control panel indicates. This message alternates with the technique
displayed on the C-Arm control panel.
control panel:
IRIS TOO LARGE
Caution Continuing procedures when the COLLIMATOR IRIS TOO LARGE
message displays can result in patient overexposure due to a larger
Caution
than indicated field size.
COLLIMATOR SHUTTER POSITION ERROR Dose reporting accuracy may be affected.

Call for service.
This message displays in the status bar when the collimator shutter width
potentiometer is not working and the shutter width position cannot be determined.
This can only be repaired by a service technician.
control panel:
SHUTTER POSITION ERR
COLLIMATOR STUCK If this message persists, restart the system.

This message displays in the status bar when the collimator iris motor is unable to
open or close the collimator iris. This message alternates with the technique
displayed on the C-Arm control panel. The system may continue to be used, but
the collimator iris cannot be adjusted.
control panel:
COLLIMATOR STUCK
14-23
COLLISION DETECTED
main system monitor when the system detects a decrease in velocity and
increased resistance to movement. Motorized lateral and motorized cephalad /
caudal tilt motion stops. This message erases and motorized movement is again
enabled when the condition clears.
Use the joystick to move the C-Arm away from the collision.
COMMUNICATION FAILED If this message persists, restart the system.

This message displays in the status bar when a loss of communication with the
generator is detected by the system.
control panel:
COMMUNICATION FAILED
COMPLETE SELECTED EXAM(S)? You cannot add X-ray events to completed exams.
Touch Yes to complete the selected exam(s), or No to cancel.
This message displays in a dialog box when the user asks the system to complete
an exam or exams. The system will create a complete Radiation Dose Structure
Report as a part of this action.
CONFIGURATION CHANGE REQUIRES RESTART The system configuration just

changed will not take effect until the system is connected to a wired network and then
restarted. To confirm the change, connect the system to a wired network and touch OK.
This message displays in a dialog box when the system settings for the NTP
server have been changed or the network settings have been changed.
CONTACT DETECTED
main system monitor when the contact detection assembly (bumper) senses
pressure from a contacting object. Any motorized lateral or motorized cephalad /
caudal tilt movement underway stops. This message erases and motorized
movement is again enabled when the condition clears.
14-24
CONTROL PANEL KEY STUCK, CHECK KEYS FOR OBSTRUCTIONS Press any key. If
this message persists, call for service.
This message displays in the status bar when a key is pressed on the C-Arm
control panel during startup, possibly indicating a stuck C-Arm control panel key.
control panel:
KEY STUCK, RELEASE AND PRESS ANY KEY
COPIED IMAGES MAY NOT DISPLAY AS EXPECTED The Imaging Profile used to gen-
erate the copied images does not exist on this system. The General profile will be used to
display the copied images. Image quality will be affected
This message displays in a dialog box when an OEC Compatible exam from an
external media is imported, or when an exam on the system is viewed when the
profile used for acquisition of the image is not present.
COPIED IMAGES MAY NOT DISPLAY AS EXPECTED The Imaging Profile version used
to generate the copied images is different from the version on the system. Image quality
may be affected.
This message displays in a dialog box when an OEC Compatible exam is
imported from an external media or when viewing an exam on the system which
was acquired with a different version. This may also occur after a system
upgrade.
COPY COMPLETE
This message displays in a dialog box when the selected copy operation is
completed. The message erases after 3 seconds.
CORRUPTED IMAGES DELETED Corrupted images were detected at startup and could
not be repaired. These images have been deleted. This may be the result of a power loss
or improper shutdown. If this message persists, call for service.
This message displays in a dialog box when the system starts up after corrupted
images were deleted at startup.
14-25
CSR EXPORT SUCCESS Certificate Signing Request has been copied to portable media.
This message displays in a dialog box when the user has successfully created the
Certificate Signing Request and exported it to portable media.
CUMULATIVE AIR KERMA LIMIT EXCEEDED

This message displays in the status bar and on the C-Arm control panel when the
system has reached the user-defined limit for Cumulative Air Kerma in a
procedure or exam.
Press the alarm reset key to silence the alarm, and complete the exam.
DATA ON PORTABLE MEDIA NOT SUPPORTED Data on the selected media device
includes DICOM objects that cannot be copied to the system. See the DICOM Log for the
specific patient and exam data that cannot be copied.
This message displays in a dialog box when an exam displayed from a USB
device contains DICOM objects not currently supported by the system for
viewing.
DATABASE CLEANUP FAILED Retry the database cleanup operation. If this message
persists, call for service.
This message displays in a dialog box when database cleanup was unsuccessful.
DATE OR TIME CHANGES REQUIRE RESTART Press OK to accept changes. You will
be prompted to restart the system.
This message displays in a dialog box when the date or time is changed. The
system will needs to restart to apply these changes. When this message is
confirmed,
Note that the system will set the time entered when this message is confirmed. If
there is delay in confirming the message, the new time may not reflect the current
time used as a reference for setting system time.
Follow the message instructions. The system will restart automatically.
DECRYPTION PASSWORD CREATED SUCCESSFULLY Touch OK to continue.

This message displays in a dialog box when a new decryption password has been
successfully created or changed on the system.
14-26
DECRYPTION PASSWORD CREATION FAILURE The new decryption password is not

complex enough. Touch OK to continue.
This message displays in a dialog box when the new password does not match
password complexity requirements.
Touch OK and use a more complex password.
DECRYPTION PASSWORD CREATION FAILURE The new and re-typed decryption pass-
words do not match. Touch OK to continue.
This message displays in a dialog box when the new encryption password does
not match the retyped password.
Touch OK and re-enter the password.
DECRYPTION PASSWORD DELETED The decryption password has been removed from
the system. Touch OK to continue.
This message displays in a dialog box when the user successfully deletes the
decryption password from the system.
DELETE ALL PATIENT HEALTH INFORMATION AND SAVED IMAGES? Touch Yes to
delete all information, or No to cancel.
This message displays in a dialog box when the operator invokes the Patient
Health Information Delete All option on the Applications > Setup > Security
screen.
DELETE All SAVED WIRELESS NETWORK CONFIGURATION DATA? The wireless net-
work information saved to the system including usernames and passwords will be per-
manently deleted. Wireless networks will need to be reconfigured for use. Touch Yes to
continue editing, or touch No to cancel.
This message displays in a dialog box when the operator touches Delete All
Saved Networks on the Applications > Setup > Network Configuration >
Wireless Networks screen.
14-27
DELETE EXAMS CONTAINING IMAGES NOT SAVED TO PACS OR EXTERNAL

MEDIA? Touch Yes to permanently delete exams, or No to cancel.
This message displays in a dialog box when a manual deletion operation finds an
exam with images that are not saved to PACS or external media. This message is
also displayed at startup when the check is performed to exams older than the
user defined limit for retention. Once exams are deleted, they cannot be restored.
DELETE EXAMS CONTAINING IMAGES QUEUED TO BE SAVED TO PACS? Touch Yes

to permanently delete exam(s), or No to cancel.
This message displays in a dialog box when a manual or automatic deletion
operation finds an exam with images or MPPS information queued to be sent to
the DICOM server. Once exams are deleted, they cannot be restored.
DELETE EXAMS CONTAINING INCOMPLETE MPPS EVENTS? Touch Yes to per-

manently delete exam(s), or No to cancel.
This message displays in a dialog box when a manual or automatic deletion
operation finds an exam with images or MPPS information queued to be sent to
the DICOM server. Exam deletion is permanent.
DELETE REMOTE LOGGING CERTIFICATE? Touch Yes to continue or No to retain cer-

tificate
This message displays in a dialog box when the user attempts to delete the
remote logging TLS certificate.
DELETE SELECTED CERTIFICATE? Touch Yes to continue or No to retain certificate.

This message displays in a dialog box when the user attempts to delete a
certificate.
DELETE SELECTED EXAM(S)? Touch Yes to delete the selected exams, or No to cancel.
This message displays in a dialog box when the user asks the system to delete an
exam or exams from the system. The system will check after confirmation for
storage of all locally acquired images in the exam(s) to PACS or external media
like a portable media device. Once exams are deleted, they cannot be restored.
14-28
DELETE SELECTED IMAGE(S)? Selected (highlighted) images will be permanently

deleted. Touch Yes to delete the selected image(s), or No to cancel.
This message displays in a dialog box when Delete is selected after image(s)
have been selected. The images that will be deleted are highlighted. Once
images are deleted, they cannot be restored.
DELETE SELECTED IMAGE(S)? Selected images are queued for storage. Touch Yes to
delete images anyway, or No to cancel.
This message displays in a dialog box when images selected for deletion are still
in the DICOM message queue and therefore have not been received by the
PACS server. This can happen if the system is not connected to the network.
Once images are deleted, they cannot be restored.
DELETE SELECTED SCHEDULED EXAM(S)? Touch Yes to delete selected exam(s), or

No to cancel.
This message displays in a dialog box when scheduled exam entries are selected
for deletion. Once exams are deleted, they cannot be restored.
DELETE SELECTED SERVER(S)? Selected server(s) will be permanently deleted. Touch

Yes to delete the selected server(s), or No to cancel.
This message displays in a dialog box when DICOM server configurations are
selected for deletion. The DICOM server configurations that will be deleted are
highlighted. Once servers are deleted, they cannot be restored.
DELETE THE AUTO-BOOT PASSWORD? If the auto-boot password is deleted, the

decryption password must be entered each time the system is restarted. Touch Yes to con-
tinue or No to cancel.
This message displays in a dialog box when the user selects the option to delete
the auto-boot password.
DESTINATION CURRENTLY UNAVAILABLE The network server is not available. The

request has been placed into the queue.
This message displays in a dialog box for 3 seconds to inform the user that the
storage request has been queued and will be attempted once, automatically, at a
later time. After a failed attempt, the request must be initiated again using the
Transfer Status screen. All selected data will be retained in the request.
14-29
DETECTOR COMMUNICATION FAILURE If this message persists, restart the system.

This message displays in the status bar when the system has lost communication
with the imaging detector or when critical number of frames are bad, either
incomplete or not received on time.
control panel:
DETECTOR COMMUNICATION FAILURE
DETECTOR ERROR, X-RAYS DISABLED Call for service.

This message displays in the status bar when the image detector gain map is
missing or corrupted at C-Arm initialization. This can only be repaired by a service
technician.
control panel:
DETECTOR ERROR, X-RAYS DISABLED
DETECTOR FIRMWARE INCOMPATIBLE Restart the system. If this message persists,

call for service.
This message displays in the status bar when the image detector firmware
version is not compatible with the system software.
control panel:
DETECTOR FIRMWARE INCOMPATIBLE, RESTART THE SYSTEM
DETECTOR MAP MISSING Image quality may degrade. If this message persists, call for
service.
This message displays in the status bar when the application fails to read detector
configuration data, or reads incorrect or invalid configuration data.
control panel:
DETECTOR MAP MISSING
14-30
DICOM ERROR Check the Transfer Status Screen on the system for detailed error inform-
ation. Follow the instructions in the Transfer Status Screen to resolve the issue, or call for
service.
This message displays in a dialog box when a DICOM device has been
configured improperly, for example, if a report is configured with a format layout
that the printer cannot support.
DICOM MOVE DESTINATION UNKNOWN Make sure that PACS is configured to allow
images to be retrieved.
This message displays in a dialog box when the DICOM Server does not know
the destination for the retrieve command.
DICOM OVER TLS ENABLED All subsequent transfers will use DICOM Transport Layer
Security. Ensure all configured servers are compliant with TLS 1.2. Touch OK to continue.
This message displays in a dialog box when the user has successfully configured
DICOM over TLS.
DICOM SERVER OUT OF RESOURCES, TRY AGAIN LATER This is probably a tem-
porary condition caused by currently high usage of the server. If this message persists,
call for service.
This message displays in a dialog box when a request is sent to either a DICOM
printer or a DICOM Server or RIS, and the DICOM device reports that it is out of
resources or busy.
DICOM SERVER RESPONSE MISSING REQUIRED DICOM TAGS See the DICOM Log
for more information or call for service.
This message displays in a dialog box when a DICOM server response does not
have the DICOM tags required by the DICOM Standard.
Touch OK and follow the message instructions. Refer to the server
manufacturer's DICOM Conformance statement to confirm missing data.
14-31
DICOM SERVER VERIFIED SUCCESSFULLY Touch OK to continue.

This message displays in a dialog box when the system successfully connects to
the DICOM server in response to a verify request invoked from the Applications >
Setup > DICOM > Print Server Definition, Store / Storage Commit Server
Definition, Worklist (MWL) / MPPS Server Definition,or Query / Retrieve
Server Definition screens.
DISABLE DICOM OVER TLS? DICOM transfers will no longer be secured. Touch Yes to
continue or No to leave enabled.
This message displays in a dialog box when the user clears the DICOM over TLS
configuration box.
DISABLE REMOTE LOGGING OVER TLS Remote log transfers will no longer be secured.
Touch Yes to continue or No to leave enabled.
This message displays in a dialog box when the user disables Remote Logging
TLS.
DOSE ACCURACY CALIBRATION REQUIRED Call for service.

This message displays in the status bar when dose display calibration is required.
This can only be repaired by a service technician.
control panel:
DOSE ACCURACY CALIBRATION REQUIRED, PRESS ANY KEY
Press any C-Arm control panel key or RUI control panel key and follow the
DUPLICATE NAME NOT ALLOWED The entered server alias name or system label is
already in use by another DICOM server configuration or system drive. Enter a different
name or label. Touch OK to continue.
This message displays in a dialog box when an entered DICOM server alias
name is already in use by another DICOM server or system label for use in the
drop-down list during system move, send, or print operations.
14-32
EDITING PATIENT INFORMATION WILL CHANGE OTHER EXAMS The patient being
edited has other exams on the system. The edits will affect all of the patient's exams.
Touch Yes to continue editing. Touch No to cancel.
This message displays in a dialog box when the user edits patient information in
an exam when the patient has multiple exams. The edited information will apply to
all exams for the edited patient that exist on the system.
EMAIL WAS SENT SUCCESSFULLY Touch OK to continue.

This message displays in a dialog box after the user configures an email address
from the security screen to receive security updates or requests a trial email be
sent to the server.
EXPIRED CERTIFICATE The certificate selected for import has expired. Touch OK to
return to the Import screen and import a different certificate.
This message displays in a dialog box when the user attempts to import a file that
has expired.
EXPORT SUCCESS Certificate signing request has been created and successfully expor-
ted to portable media device. Touch OK to continue.
This message displays in a dialog box when the user has successfully created
and exported the certificate signing request.
EXPORT SUCCESS The certificate has been successfully exported to portable media
device. Touch OK to continue.
This message displays in a dialog box when the user has successfully exported
the self-sign or host certificate to portable media.
EXPOSURE SETTING CHANGE Enabling Switch Released may lead to degraded image
quality because of limited X-ray exposure. Touch OK to continue.
This message displays in a dialog box when Switch Released is selected on the
Applications > Setup > Image Acquisition screen. In this mode, X-rays will
terminate as soon as the X-ray control is released. This may lead to poor image
quality. See Terminate Short Exposure When on page 2-6 for more information
on using this setting.
14-33
EXTERNAL VIDEO CANNOT BE DISPLAYED Touch OK to continue.

This message displays on the Touch / Tableside C-Arm control panel when the
system cannot display external video sources on the main system monitor.
Touch OK to continue without using the external video display, or check the
connection to the video source and ensure that the source is functioning to regain
external video display capability and then restart the system. If this message
EXTERNAL VIDEO DISPLAY CANNOT BE TURNED OFF Reboot the system. If the prob-
lem persists, call service.
This message displays across the full main system monitor when the system
cannot turn off the display of an external video source on the system monitor.
Disconnect the external video source cable from the Workstation, and then follow
the message instructions.
FAST STOP ACTIVATED Twist the switch to reset it and then restart the system.
This message displays in the status bar when the fast stop switch has been
pressed.
control panel:
FAST STOP ACTIVATED
Check the position of the switch. If the switch is depressed, twist the red portion to
release it, and then follow the message instructions.
FILAMENT CALIBRATION REQUIRED Call for service.

This message displays in the status bar when the system detects that the
filaments have not been calibrated. It is possible to receive multiple mA errors if
this condition exists. This can only be repaired by a service technician.
control panel:
FILAMENT CALIBRATION REQUIRED, PRESS ANY KEY
14-34
FILAMENT ERROR Call for service.

This message displays in the status bar when the filament size selected by
software does not match the current filament in the PION hardware. X-rays are
disabled while the message is displayed.
control panel:
FILAMENT ERROR, PRESS ANY KEY
Press any C-Arm control panel key and follow the message instructions.
FILAMENT REGULATOR FAILURE Call for service.

This message displays in the status bar when the system detects that the filament
current is out of tolerance. The resolution of future images may be degraded. This
can only be repaired by a service technician.
control panel:
FILAMENT REGULATOR FAILURE, PRESS ANY KEY
FILE CANNOT BE IMPORTED The selected file format is not supported. Select a different
format and try again.
This message displays in a dialog box when a user tries to import a file of an
incompatible format.
File System Check Complete To avoid future file system checks do not turn off power
before the Patient Information or Login screen is displayed. Normal system boot will now
continue.
This message displays during the startup procedure when a file system check
was performed and has completed successfully.
information.
File System Corruption Detected System files have been corrupted and are not recov-
erable. This system is no longer usable. Please call service.
This message displays during the startup procedure when the file system is
corrupted and must be reinstalled.
information.
14-35
FORMAT USB DEVICE? ALL DATA WILL BE LOST. The USB device will be formatted
and all existing data will be permanently lost. The maximum size for the format is 2 TB. If
the device is larger than this, the excess space will not be used. Touch Yes to format the
USB device, or No to cancel.
This message displays in a dialog box when the user selects the format control.
The USB device will be formatted to FAT32 file system and all data will be deleted
and cannot be restored. A progress bar displays to indicate the formatting
progress, and disappears when formatting is complete.
FPD DOSE CALIBRATION REQUIRED Call for service.

This message displays in the status bar when the system detects that image
detector dose calibration is required. The system sets the image detector dose
calibration data to default values and X-rays can be taken, but a calibration data
error message displays. The next time the system starts up, a message displays
stating that calibration is required. This can only be repaired by a service
technician.
control panel:
CALIBRATE FPD DOSE
FPD MAPS CALIBRATION REQUIRED Call for service.

This message displays in the status bar when the Flat Panel Detector map has
not been calibrated. This can only be repaired by a service technician.
control panel:
CALIBRATE FPD MAPS
GRID INSERTED
This message displays for 3 seconds in the status bar and on the C-Arm control
panel when the grid has been inserted into a Flat Panel Detector system.
GRID REMOVED
panel when the grid has been removed from a Flat Panel Detector system.
14-36
HARDWARE ERROR, X-RAYS DISABLED Restart the system. If this message persists,
call for service.
This message displays in the status bar when a hardware error causes the time
value used for the anode heat calculation is less than the previous anode heat
calculation time or not available.
control panel:
HARDWARE ERROR, X-RAYS DISABLED
HIGH VOLTAGE GENERATOR ERROR Restart the system.

This message displays in the status bar when the system detects an error in the
high voltage generator. The system automatically shuts down.
control panel:
HV GENERATOR ERROR, RESTART THE SYSTEM
HLF OVERTIME
HLF (High Level Fluoro), subtract, or digital cine exposure has exceeded the
preset time limit, and X-rays have been terminated.
The time interval parameters are dependent on the pulses per second defined for
the system. This is a safety precaution that discourages excessive continuous
exposure while in HLF mode.
Release the footswitch.
HOLD X-RAY SWITCH LONGER

This message displays for 3 seconds in the status bar when the Digital Spot X-ray
switch is released before the shot was completed.
control panel:
HOLD LONGER
14-37
HOT, HLF DISABLED

This message displays on the C-Arm control panel when the anode temperature
is at 80% of its rated heat capacity or greater. See ANODE IS HOT, HLF
DISABLED for details.
HOUSING IS HOT, HLF DISABLED Allow the system to cool to regain High-Level X-rays.
This message displays in the status bar when the housing temperature is at 80%
or more of its rated heat capacity. This message alternates with the technique
displayed on the C-Arm control panel , while an alarm sounds. Fluoroscopy is not
prevented but the tube should be allowed to cool before another exposure. HLF
and film exposures are not allowed while the system is in this state.
control panel:
HOUSING IS HOT
Press the Alarm Reset key on the C-Arm control panel to silence the alarm, and
allow the system to cool.
HOUSING OVERHEATED, X-RAYS DISABLED Restart the system.

This message displays in the status bar when the housing temperature has
reached 100% of its rated capacity. All system operation is terminated.
control panel:
HOUSING OVERHEATED, RESTART THE SYSTEM
Let the housing cool and follow the message instructions.
HV GENERATOR ERROR, RESTART THE SYSTEM

This message displays on the C-Arm control panel when the system detects an
error in the high voltage generator. See HIGH VOLTAGE GENERATOR
ERROR for details.
IMAGE DISPLAY ERROR, X-RAYS DISABLED Acknowledge this message to continue. If

This message displays in a dialog box too many frames are bad (incomplete or
not received on time).
14-38
IMAGE DISPLAY INCORRECT The pixel aspect ratio of the image is not 1:1. This image
will be distorted on the display.
This message displays in a dialog box when the resolution of a displayed
retrieved image is less than the original.
IMAGE PROCESSING ERROR, X-RAYS DISABLED The system has detected a problem
with the way the images are processed. The system will not operate. Restart the system. If
detects a problem with the image processing chain. X-rays are disabled while in
this state and images cannot be recalled from the Images screen.
IMAGE STORAGE FULL X-rays will be disabled until space is available. Archive older
exams with single images to PACS or portable media device and then delete the exams
from the system to free space.
This message displays in a dialog box when no more image storage space is
available. Delete old exams to free space for new images to be saved. X-rays are
disabled while in this state.
IMAGE TOO BIG TO COPY The size of a selected cine exceeds the limits specified in the
DICOM standard. Touch OK to clear the message, then clear the selection, use the Cine
player to Set Cues to shorten the run, and then try the copy operation again.
This message displays in a dialog box when a cine run is selected that exceeds
the DICOM standard limit of 4.29 GB or USB max files size of 4 GB.
Setting the cues to trim a cine run or copying the file as half-size or in XA or SC
formats will reduce the file size.
IMPORT THIS BANNER:

This message displays in a dialog box when a user imports a new banner for
display at system boot. X-rays are disabled while in this state.
14-39
INCOMPLETE IMAGE ACQUISITION Acknowledge this message to continue. If this mes-

This message displays in a dialog box when too many frames are incomplete or
are not received on time.
INCORRECT DECRYPTION PASSWORD Existing password is incorrect. Touch OK to

continue.
This message displays in a dialog box when the decryption password entered is
incorrect.
INCORRECT PASSPHRASE The system cannot decrypt the passphrase protected key.
Touch OK to enter the passphrase again or Cancel to go back to the Certificate screen.
This message displays in a dialog box when the user attempts to load a pass
phrase protected key and does not enter the correct passphrase.
INSUFFICIENT IMAGE STORAGE SPACE TO RETRIEVE IMAGES Delete some images

from the system and try again.
This message displays in a dialog box when a portable media OEC compatible
retrieve operation contains more images than the system's current available
capacity.
INSUFFICIENT LOCAL STORAGE Navigate to the Saved Exams screen and delete
exams marked as Retrieved in the Status column to free space and allow additional
exams to be retrieved .
This message displays in a dialog box when the system does not have enough
space to store retrieved exams from the Image server.
14-40
INTERLOCK FAILURE- CHECK FAST STOP. Reset if activated, then restart the system.
If this message persists, call for service.
This message displays at the top of the left side of the main system monitor on
Touch / Tableside C-Arm control panel systems when the interlock circuit fails
during the startup procedure.
control panel:
INTERLOCK FAILURE, RESET THE FAST STOP AND RESTART
INVALID CERTIFICATE The certificate selected for import could not be read. Touch OK to
return to the Import screen and import a different certificate.
This message displays in a dialog box when the user attempts to import an invalid
file.
INVALID PORT ENTRY OR PORT IN USE Could not open the port on the firewall. Accep-
ted values for ports are 104 or 1025-49150. The last valid port entry will be restored. Try
using a different port number.
This message displays in a dialog box when an incorrect port entry for a local
server is entered.
INVALID PRIVATE KEY The system cannot read the private key. Try a different key.
This message displays in a dialog box when when the system cannot read a
private key that is being imported.
INVALID TIMEOUT VALUE Accepted values for time-outs are:0 - Timeout disabled. 10-
999 seconds.
This message displays in a dialog box when an invalid IP Address is entered.
Touch OK to clear the message, and enter an accepted timeout value.
14-41
IRIS POSITION ERROR

This message displays on the C-Arm control panel when the collimator iris
potentiometer is not working and the iris position cannot be determined. See
COLLIMATOR IRIS POSITION ERROR for details.
IRIS TOO LARGE

This message displays on the C-Arm control panel when the collimator iris is
larger than the C-Arm control panel indicates. This message alternates with the
technique displayed on the C-Arm control panel. See COLLIMATOR IRIS TOO
LARGE for details.
JOYSTICK FAILURE Motion is disabled. Disconnect and then reconnect the RUI. If this
message persists, call for service.
Motorized systems only: This message displays in a dialog box when the system
fails to communicate with the joystick.
JOYSTICK STUCK Check the joystick. Disconnect and then reconnect the RUI. If this mes-
detects that the joystick is deflected from the neutral position at system startup.
Clear anything that is pressing on the joystick, touch OK, and then follow the
KEY AND CERTIFICATE MISMATCH The host certificate does not match the private key
and will not be imported. Check the host certificate. Touch OK to continue.
This message displays in a dialog box when a user attempts to import a system
certificate that does not match the key on the system.
KEY STUCK, RELEASE AND PRESS ANY KEY

This message displays on the C-Arm control panel when a key is pressed on the
C-Arm control panel during startup, possibly indicating a stuck C-Arm control
panel key. See CONTROL PANEL KEY STUCK, CHECK KEYS FOR
OBSTRUCTIONS for details.
14-42
KEYPAD STUCK Make sure there is nothing pressing on the Workstation keypad. The
keypad will be disabled until the system is restarted. If this message persists, call for ser-
vice.
Workstation keypad is stuck during startup. Check for objects sitting or pressing
on the keypad. The system can be operated without the keypad.
KEYSWITCH IN STANDBY POSITION, X-RAYS AND MOTION DISABLED Turn key to

enable more functionality.
This message displays in the status bar when the X-ray keyswitch on the C-Arm is
turned to the System Standby position. X-rays and motion are disabled while the
system is in this state.
control panel:
KEYSWITCH IN STANDBY POSITION
Turn the keyswitch to the X-Rays and Motion Enabled position to operate the
system. If the keyswitch is already in the X-Rays and Motion Enabled position,
there may be a fault in the keyswitch or system software.
KEYSWITCH IN X-RAYS DISABLED POSITION, X-RAYS DISABLED Motion is active.

Turn key to enable X-rays.
This message displays in the status bar when the X-ray keyswitch on the C-Arm is
turned to the X-rays Disabled position. X-rays are disabled while the system is in
this state.
control panel:
KEYSWITCH IN X-RAYS DISABLED POSITION, X-RAYS DISABLED
Turn the keyswitch to the X-Rays and Motion Enabled position to operate the
system. If the keyswitch is already in the X-Rays and Motion Enabled position,
there may be a fault in the keyswitch or system software.
14-43
KV ON IN ERROR, RESTART THE SYSTEM If this message persists, call for service.
This message displays in the status bar when high voltage is being generated
without an X-ray switch being activated. This indicates a fault with the high
voltage generator. The system will not operate with this error.
control panel:
KV ON IN ERROR, RESTART THE SYSTEM
LIFT SWITCH STUCK Check for obstructions. If this message persists, call for service.
This message displays in a dialog box when the lift switch is pressed continuously
for 30 seconds. This may indicate a foreign object is pressing against the switch
or a faulty switch or lift circuit.
Follow the message instructions. If there is nothing pressing against the switch,
this message may indicate a faulty switch or lift circuit.
LOGIN ACCOUNT LOCKED Maximum number of unsuccessful login attempts were made
in the last 15 minutes. Account will be locked for the next 15 minutes. Touch OK to con-
tinue.
This message displays in a dialog box when the maximum number of
unsuccessful login attempts were made in the last 15 minutes.
LOGOUT IN PROGRESS Touch Yes to log out, or No to return to system usage.

This message displays in a dialog box when the Logout button is touched.
LOW DISK SPACE Delete archived or unneeded exams from the Saved Exams screen to
make more space. If this message persists, call for service.
This message displays in a dialog box when, during the startup procedure, the
system detects less disk space than is expected.
See 8.9 Delete exams and images on page 8-36 for information on freeing space
on the system.
14-44
MA ON IN ERROR Restart the system. If this message persists, call for service.
This message displays in the status bar when X-ray current (tube current) has
been detected without an X-ray switch being activated, indicating a fault with the
X-ray generator. The system will not operate with this error.
control panel:
MA ON IN ERROR, RESTART THE SYSTEM
MA SENSOR FAILURE If this message persists, call for service.

This message displays in the status bar when the system has detected a failure in
one of the mA sensors. This message alternates with the technique displayed on
the C-Arm control panel.
control panel:
MA SENSOR FAIL
MANUAL FILE TRANSFER FAILED A manual remote file transfer did not complete
because the system was shut down. Touch OK to continue and then touch the Start button
to try file transfer again.
This message displays in a dialog box when the previous manual remote file
transfer did not complete because the system was shut down.
MANUAL FILE TRANSFER FAILED A manual remote file transfer did not complete
because an X-ray was taken. Touch OK to continue and then touch the Start button to try
file transfer again.
This message displays in a dialog box when the previous manual remote file
transfer did not complete because an X-ray was taken.
14-45
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF SERVERS REACHED The maximum number of allowable serv-

ers of this type has been reached. Modify or delete a server that is not in use.
This message displays in a dialog box when the maximum number of a particular
type of servers are configured on the system.
MEDIA FILE FORMAT ON DEVICE NOT SUPPORTED Some devices may not function
for all operations. Touch Yes to safely dismount the device and remove the device. Then
insert a device with supported format and try again. See the operator's manual for sup-
ported file formats. Touch No to leave the device mounted and then use the Portable
Media Options screen to format the media device.
This message displays in a dialog box when the user tries to copy to
unrecognized USB media.
Follow the instructions in the message.
MEDIA FILE SYSTEM HAS AN ERROR. FORMAT? Touch Yes to format the device and
load the newly formatted file system. Touch No to repair the media file system using a
standard personal computer. This will eject the device.
This message displays in a dialog box when the user tries to mount a mass
storage device with a supported file system that has an error.
Follow the instructions in the message.
MOTION CALIBRATION REQUIRED Range of C-Arm motorized motion will be limited.

Call for service to restore full range of motion.
detects that motion calibration has not been performed.
Touch OK to resume other functionality, and follow the message instructions.
MOTION ERROR, MOTION DISABLED Motion communication failure detected. Restart

the system. If this message persists, call for service.
Motorized systems only: This message displays in a dialog box when an error
prevents the system from communicating with the motorization functionality.
MOTION ERROR, MOTION DISABLED Motion component failure detected. Restart the
system. If this message persists, call for service.
Motorized systems only: This message displays in a dialog box when the number
of servo faults or uncommanded motions exceed limits or when a potentiometer
failure occurs.
14-46
MOTION ERROR Press OK to enable motion. If this message persists, call for service.
receives an uncommanded motion or a bad status from a servo controller.
MOTION FAILURE System is not ready for movement. Wait for at least 2 seconds, then
re-attempt motion. If this message persists, call for service.
side of the main system monitor on motorized when the system fails to move after
a motion command from the joystick. This may be because the motion servo node
has not completely reset after a power loss.
Follow the message instructions. If the problem is not resolved after following the
instructions, restart the system.
MOTION FAILURE Restart the system. If this message persists, call for service.
fails to move after a motion command from the joystick, but the system has not
detected an error.
MOTION FIRMWARE INCOMPATIBLE Restart the system. If this message persists, call
for service.
determines that Motion PION firmware is not compatible during startup. This can
only be repaired by a service engineer.
MOTION STOP PRESSED

main system monitor when a fast stop switch on the C-Arm control panel or the
motion stop switch on the RUI is pressed.
Release the stop switch to re-enable motion.
14-47
NETWORK NOT RESPONDING This may have been caused by the network connection
being broken or the server resetting the network connection. Contact the network admin-
istrator.
This message displays in a dialog box when the network connection has been
broken for DICOM MWL Query, Image Query/Retrieve, Store, Print or MPPS.
This may have been caused by the network connection being broken or the
server resetting the network connection.
NETWORK UNAVAILABLE DICOM requests will be queued and transferred when the net-
work is available. To transfer items now, ensure that the Workstation is connected to a net-
work.
This message displays in a dialog box when the system is unable to perform a
DICOM Store or Print transfer because the network connection is not available.
NEW PASSWORD AND RETYPED PASSWORD DO NOT MATCH Enter the new pass-
word again. Make sure the retyped password matches the new password.
This message displays in a dialog box when the new passwords do not match
when changing the password.
NEW PASSWORD SAVED Touch OK to continue.

This message displays in a dialog box when a new password is entered in the
Change Password screen.
NO COMPATIBLE DATA ON PORTABLE MEDIA DEVICE The mounted media device

does not contain any DICOM or OEC compatible data.
This message displays in a dialog box when a USB device that has been
mounted does not contain OEC or DICOM compatible data.
NO MATCH FOUND Modify the search criteria.

This message displays in a dialog box when a DICOM query finds no images.
NO MATCH FOUND Modify the search criteria using the Schedule Filter.
This message displays in a dialog box when a DICOM query finds no images on
the MWL server.
14-48
NO PRIVATE KEY FOR HOST CERTIFICATE The host certificate will not be imported.
This message displays in a dialog box when the user attempts to import a host
certificate and no private key has been or is being configured.
NO RESPONSE, SERVER TIMED OUT Check the DICOM server configuration.

This message displays in a dialog box when no response is received from a
DICOM server for the allotted time out period.
NON-CRITICAL SYSTEM SOFTWARE FAILURE Press OK to continue. If this message

This message displays in a dialog box when non-critical software functions stops
working. X-ray imaging functions are not affected.
NOT FOR DIAGNOSTIC USE. REFERENCE IMAGE ONLY.

This message displays on the C-Arm control panel under the image display as a
reminder that system images displayed on the touchscreen are reference images
only.
NTP SERVER CONNECTION FAILED Check the settings and try again.
This message displays in a dialog box when the system could not connect to the
NTP server using the definition set by the user.
Touch OK, check and correct the definition, and confirm that the NTP server
exists.
NTP SERVER CONNECTION VERIFIED The specified NTP server is reachable. Press
OK to continue.
This message displays in a dialog box when the system has verified that it can
successfully connect to the NTP server using the definition set by the user.
NTP SERVER CONNECTION VERIFIED To update the time on the system press OK, you
will be prompted to restart the system.
This message displays in a dialog box when the system has verified that it can
successfully connect to the NTP server using the definition set by the user.
14-49
ONBOARD PRINTER ERROR Check the onboard printer error display and refer to the
printer operating instructions for more information.
This message displays in a dialog box when the printer reports a hardware error
condition while printing an image.
OVERLOAD FAULT
This message displays in the status bar and on the C-Arm control panel for 3
seconds, and may indicate a fault in the high voltage regulator circuit or a spit (HV
arc) occurs.
The first time this fault is detected, the message appears only briefly after an
exposure. When this fault occurs during an exposure, the system automatically
disables X-rays, the message remains on the display.
OVERLOAD FAULT Restart the system. If this message persists, call for service.
This message displays in the status bar and may indicate a fault in the high
voltage regulator circuit or a spit (HV arc) has occurred. When this fault occurs
during an exposure, the system automatically disables X-rays and the message
remains on the display.
control panel:
OVERLOAD FAULT, RESTART THE SYSTEM

OVERVOLTAGE FAULT
This message displays in the status bar and on the C-Arm control panel for 3
seconds, and may indicate an X-ray generator failure or a spit (HV arc) occurs.
The first time this fault is detected, the message appears only briefly after an
exposure. When this fault occurs during an exposure, the system automatically
disables X-rays and the message remains on the display.
14-50
OVERVOLTAGE FAULT Restart the system. If this message persists, call for service.
This message displays in the status bar and may indicate that an X-ray generator
failure or a spit (HV arc) has occurred. When this fault occurs during an exposure,
the system automatically disables X-rays and the message remains on the
display.
control panel:
OVERVOLTAGE FAULT, RESTART THE SYSTEM

PASSPHRASE ERROR The selected key does not require a passphrase. Touch OK to
continue.
This message displays in a dialog box when the user enters a passphrase but
none is needed.
PASSWORD ERROR Password does not meet system requirements. Check system
requirements and try again. Touch OK to continue.
This message displays in a dialog box when the login password does not meet
the system's password requirements.
PASSWORD ERROR Password has been used before. Touch OK to continue.

This message displays in a dialog box when the user attempts to change their
login password to a password that has been used before.
PASSWORD RESET REQUIRED Your password has expired. Touch OK to reset pass-
word.
This message displays in a dialog box when the Administrative user has set the
username to require password re-entry or the password has expired.
14-51
PATIENT ID CONFLICT DETECTED. The entered patient ID has been changed to the
default patient ID because it conflicted with an existing patient ID for a different patient.
Check the patient information.
This message displays in a dialog box when the manually entered Patient ID was
found to match an existing Patient ID with different Patient Name, Date of Birth, or
Gender after an X-ray event has occurred. The Patient ID is replaced by the next
available default Patient ID in the sequence.
Touch OK, and follow the message instructions.
PATIENT ID CONFLICT DETECTED. The entered patient ID matches an existing patient

ID with a different Name, Date of Birth, or Gender. Check the patient information.
This message displays in a dialog box when the Patient ID is found to conflict with
an existing patient ID for a patient record that has a different Patient Name, Date
of Birth, or Gender. This message is displayed on exiting from the Patient
Information screen before an X-ray is taken.
Touch OK, and follow the message instructions.
PATIENT INFORMATION INCOMPLETE. END SELECTED EXAM ANYWAY? Patient

information will have to be corrected later. Touch Yes to end the selected exam, or No to
cancel.
This message displays in a dialog box when the system has been configured to
disable DICOM communication for "Unnamed" patient exams. This allows the
system to reconcile patient information prior to sending any data to PACS or RIS.
PATIENT INFORMATION INCOMPLETE. SEND SELECTED IMAGE ANYWAY? Patient

information will have to be corrected later. Touch Yes to send the selected images, or No
to cancel.
This message displays in a dialog box when the system has been configured to
disable DICOM communication for "Unnamed" patient exams. This allows the
system to reconcile patient information prior to sending any data to PACS or RIS.
PERFORM FULL DATABASE CLEANUP? The system will need to be restarted and
cleanup will occur before the system completes normal startup. This operation allows the
system to continue running without database errors. NOTE: Failure to perform this oper-
ation on a periodic basis will result in database corruption and loss of the data. Touch Yes
to perform a full database cleanup, or No to cancel.
This message displays in a dialog box when the user selects the control to
perform a full database cleanup.
14-52
PLEASE WAIT
This message displays on the C-Arm control panel during startup when the C-Arm
is initializing but is not yet capable of taking a shot.
Wait until the message clears before using the system.
PORT VERIFICATION SUCCESSFUL

This message displays in a dialog box when a connection is made.
PORTABLE MEDIA ERROR Current portable media operation will be canceled. See the
Transfer Status log for more information or call for service.
This message displays in a dialog box when the system fails to complete a data
transfer to a USB device.
Touch OK, check the Transfer Status log for details, and then try again.
If this message persists, try a different USB device or call for service.
POWER COMMUNICATION FAILURE Turn off system power. If power does not turn off
in 20 seconds, press the red System Disable Switch switch. Unplug the power cord for 10
seconds then plug the power cord in and turn on system power. If this message persists,
call for service.
This message displays in a dialog box when the system loses communication
with the Power PION.
Touch OK and follow the message instructions if necessary.
POWER CONFIGURATION DOES NOT MATCH MEASURED WALL POWER VOLTAGE

System efficiency may be reduced. Call for service.
This message displays in a dialog box when the intended operating AC line range
does not match measured AC line due to a configuration error or a hardware
failure, or when New Exam is selected, until system is configured. The battery
charger is disabled as long as this condition persists.
POWER CONFIGURATION NOT SET X-rays and battery charger are disabled. Call for
service.
This message displays in a dialog box when the intended operating AC line range
has not been configured, after a clean software installation, or when New Exam is
selected, until system is configured. The battery charger is disabled as long as
this condition persists.
14-53
POWER ERROR DETECTED X-rays are disabled. Restart the system. If this message
This message displays in a dialog box when the system detects one of the
following voltage/current sensor failures:
l AC Mains Voltage sensor fail if reading greater than 264 VAC or less than
50 VAC.
l AC Mains Current sensor fail (100-127 V range) if reading greater than 27
A or less than 1 A, or, for 200-240 V range, if reading greater than 13.7 A or
less than 0.35 A.
l T1 Secondary Voltage sensor fail if reading above 264 V or below 100 V.
X-rays are disabled until the system reboots without an error. The log file
identifies the failed sensor.
POWER LOST The system will shut down in 20 seconds unless power is restored.
This message displays in a dialog box when the system detects that power has
been lost or dips below what is required for system operation and the system has
begun the automatic shutdown process. The automatic shutdown waits 20
seconds for power to be restored. If power is restored, the system will return to full
operation within 5 seconds. If power is not restored, the system will automatically
shut down.
The message clears automatically if power is restored before shutdown begins.
PRECHARGE CIRCUIT TIMEOUT Check C-Arm circuit breaker and restart the system.
This message displays in the status bar when the contact relay has failed to close
during the startup process. This condition requires that the system be restarted.
control panel:
PRECHARGE CIRCUIT TIMEOUT, RESTART THE SYSTEM
Shut down the systems and, with the power off, check the circuit breaker
identified as CB1. Then restart the system. See Figure 2-58: C-Arm CB1 on page
2-70 for details on turning on CB1.
14-54
PRECHARGE VOLTAGE ERROR Check C-Arm circuit breaker and restart the system. If
This message displays in the status bar when the precharge voltage has been
sensed as too high during the startup process. This condition requires that the
system be restarted.
control panel:
PRECHARGE VOLTAGE ERROR, RESTART THE SYSTEM
Shut down the systems and, with the power off, check the circuit breaker
identified as CB1. Then restart the system. See Figure 2-58: C-Arm CB1 on page
2-70 for details on turning on CB1.
PRINTER IS OUT OF FILM OR PAPER Replace film or paper.

This message displays in a dialog box when the DICOM or onboard (local) printer
reports that it is out of film or paper while printing an image.
REMOTE FILE TRANSFER FAILED Remote file transfer failed because of network con-
nectivity issues. Check network connection settings. Touch OK to continue and then touch
the Start button to try file transfer again.
This message displays in a dialog box when a remote file transfer has failed due
to network connection loss.
REMOTE FILE TRANSFER STOPPED Touch OK to continue and then touch the Start but-
ton to try file transfer again.
This message displays in a dialog box when a remote file transfer has been
stopped.
14-55
REMOTE LOGGING OVER TLS ENABLED All subsequent remote log transfers will use
Transport Layer Security. Ensure the configured servers is compliant with TLS 1.2. Touch
OK to continue.
This message displays in a dialog box when Remote Logging TLS is successful
enabled.
REMOTE LOGGING OVER TLS ERROR The system is missing a host certificate or
private key. Remote Logging Over TLS will remain disabled. Touch OK to continue.
This message displays in a dialog box when theuser attempts to enable Remote
Logging TLS but there is no host certificate or private key.
REMOTE LOGGING OVER TLS ERROR The system is missing a trusted certificate.
Remote Logging TLS will remain disabled. Touch OK to continue.
This message displays in a dialog box when theuser attempts to enable Remote
Logging TLS but there is no certificate.
REMOTE LOGGING OVER TLS ERROR UDP is configured for the remote server.
Change to TCP, then re-enable Remote Logging Over TLS. Remote Logging Over TLS
will remain disabled. Touch OK to continue.
This message displays in a dialog box when the user attempts to enable Remote
Logging over TLS but UDP is selected.
REMOTE SERVER VERIFICATION FAILURE Test Log message was not accepted by the
Remote Server. Check the configuration.
This message displays in a dialog box when the user enters an invalid server
configuration.
REMOTE SERVER VERIFICATION SUCCESS Test Log message was sent successfully
to the Remote Server.
This message displays in a dialog box when the system is able to connect with
the configured remote server.
14-56
RESET PASSWORD? Touch Yes to reset password or No to cancel.

This message displays in a dialog box when the user asks the system to reset
their password.
RESTART REQUIRED X-rays are disabled. Restart the system.

This message displays across the full main system monitor when a process
requires the system to be restarted.
Press the power button on the front of the Workstation to restart the system and
regain functionality.
RETRIEVED STORAGE FULL Cannot import additional retrieved images. Delete

retrieved exams to free space.
This message displays in a dialog box when retrieved image storage space is full.
X-rays are disabled while in this state.
Touch OK to continue and then delete old retrieved exams to free space for new
exams to be saved.
ROOM DOOR OPEN, CLOSE DOOR

X-Ray door switch is open, indicating that the room door is open.
Close the room door.
RUI ERROR
main system monitor when the system fails to communicate with the Remote
User Interface (RUI).
Touch OK and check the RUI connection at the C-Arm. If that fails to correct the
problem, follow the message instructions.
RUI KEY STUCK Check the RUI for obstructions. Disconnect and then reconnect the RUI.
If this message persists, call for service.
detects that key(s) are being continuously pressed on the RUI.
Touch OK and ensure that RUI keys are not being pressed or contacted, and then
follow the message instructions.
RUI NOT CONNECTED

main system monitor when the system detects the RUI is disconnected.
14-57
SATURATION FAULT
This message displays in the status bar when the system detects a fault in the
IGBT circuit. The system will terminate the X-ray.
SAVE CHANGES BEFORE EXITING? Changes have not been saved. Touch Yes to save
changes, or No to exit the form without saving changes.
This message displays in a dialog box when information is entered on a screen,
but have not been saved before the user tries to exit or navigate to another screen
or tab.
SAVE FAILURE A setting is invalid. Change the setting to a valid value before saving.
This message displays in a dialog box when system setting changes are outside
of the valid range.
SAVE FAILURE System settings were not saved.

This message displays in a dialog box when system setting changes were not
able to be saved to the system.
SAVE FAILURE The specified hostname does not conform to RFC 952. Change the host-
name to a valid value before saving.
This message displays in a dialog box if the specific system setting is outside of
the valid range. The system will highlight the field with the invalid value.
SAVE OPERATION FAILED

This message displays for 3 seconds in the status bar if an image save fails to
complete successfully.
SAVE SUCCESS System settings saved.

This message displays in a dialog box when system setting changes were saved
to the system.
14-58
SCHEDULED EXAM LIST FULL Delete a manually entered exam to allow a new exam.
This message displays in a dialog box when the New Exam button is selected on
the Patient screen but the scheduled exam list is already full.
SCREEN SHARING ACTIVE, X-RAYS DISABLED

This message displays in the status bar and on the C-Arm control panel during
remote service screen sharing session.
SELECTED IMAGE(S) ARE BIGGER THAN THE CURRENT MEDIA CAPACITY Deselect
some images or use higher-capacity media.
This message displays in a dialog box when a single frame or a cine selected is
bigger than the current media capacity.
SELF-POWERED USB DEVICE CONNECTED TO SYSTEM, X-RAYS DISABLED

Remove the self-powered USB device from the system.
This message displays across the full main system monitor when a USB device
that uses an electrical outlet to power itself is connected to the system.
Warning Self-powered USB devices may cause a shock if connected to the
system. Not all devices report being self-powered, which is the only
way the system can detect if the device is self-powered.
SETTINGS MISSING/INVALID System settings file were found to be missing or invalid.

The settings file has been restored to the factory default. Call for service.
This message displays in a dialog box when the settings data is missing. Factory
settings have been restored. This can only be repaired by a service technician.
SHOT ERROR If this message persists, restart the system.

This message displays in the status bar when a software error has caused shot
termination.
control panel:
SHOT ERROR
Follow the message instructions. If this message appears on subsequent shots,
restart the system to clear the failure condition. If restarting the system does not
correct the problem, call for service.
14-59
SHOT FAILED, X-RAYS DISABLED Clear the message. If this message persists, call for
service.
This message displays in the status bar when the system does not receive a
synchronization signal during a shot.
control panel:
SHOT FAILED, X-RAYS DISABLED, PRESS ANY KEY
Press any C-Arm control panel key to clear the message, and follow the message
instructions.
SHUTTER POSITION ERR

This message displays on the control panel when the collimator shutter width
potentiometer is not working and the shutter width position cannot be determined.
See COLLIMATOR SHUTTER POSITION ERROR for details.
SOFTWARE ERROR A service software error has occurred. Restart the system.
This message displays in a dialog box when an internal software error occurs.
STATOR NOT ON Restart the system. If this message persists, call for service.
This message displays in the status bar when the X-ray tube stator is not on, and
the tube's anode cannot rotate. The system will not operate with this error.
control panel:
STATOR NOT ON, RESTART THE SYSTEM
STATOR STANDBY
panel when the X-ray tube stator is in standby mode.
SWITCH PRESS TOO SHORT, NO X-RAYS PRODUCED Press and hold X-ray switch
until exposure starts.
This message displays for 3 seconds in the status bar when an X-ray switch is
released prior to X-rays being produced.
14-60
SYSTEM BACKUP MISSING The system backup settings file was not found. If this is not
corrected the system may become inoperable. Call for service.
This message displays in a dialog box when the system backup settings file is
missing. This indicates that the system settings may be lost in the near future,
which will leave the system inoperable. This can only be repaired by a service
technician.
SYSTEM SOFTWARE ERROR Restart the system. If this message persists, call for ser-
vice.
This message displays in a dialog box when the system encounters an error that
may allow some functionality to continue in use, while other functionality is
disabled.
SYSTEM STANDBY
This message displays in the status bar when the system has been idle for longer
than 30 minutes.
control panel:
SYSTEM STANDBY, PRESS ALARM RESET
Press the alarm reset key to continue.
SYSTEM WILL NOT BOOT The system has detected a problem with the license files. The
system will not operate. Call for service.
This message displays across the full main system monitor when the System
Identity Management device is not valid or not found. The system is not in a
known valid state and therefore the startup procedure will not continue.
SYSTEM WILL NOT BOOT System software verification failed. Call for service.
This message displays across the full main system monitor ] when an RPM
verification failure has occurred.
14-61
TEMPERATURE SENSOR FAIL Temperature information unavailable.

This message displays in the status bar when, during the system's test of X-ray
tube's heat sensing element, there is an indication that the element is defective.
Continued use may cause the X-ray tube to overheat without further warnings
being given.
control panel:
TEMP SENSOR FAIL
Call for service.
TLS ERROR The system is missing a host certificate or private key. DICOM over TLS will
remain disabled. Touch OK to continue.
This message displays in a dialog box when DICOM TLS is configured, but no
system key is detected
Follow the message instructions. Import a system key if DICOM TLS is required.
TLS WARNING No trusted certificate has been uploaded to the system. DICOM Transfers
will fail until a trusted certificate has been added. Touch OK to continue or Cancel to dis-
able DICOM over TLS.
This message displays in a dialog box when DICOM TLS is configured, but no
DICOM server certificates are detected.
Follow the message instructions. Import a DICOM server certificate if DICOM TLS
is required.
TOO MANY MATCHES FOUND Narrow the search criteria and retry the search.
This message displays in a dialog box when a DICOM query results in too many
results.
Touch OK, refine the search criteria, and try the search again.
TOUCHSCREEN UNAVAILABLE The system may be used with the keyboard. Press
Enter on the keyboard to acknowledge this message. If this message persists, call for ser-
vice.
touchscreen is not connected to the system during startup. Because the
touchscreen has failed, the message cannot be acknowledged by touching the
screen.
Follow the message instructions. Use the keyboard and C-Arm control panel to
navigate.
14-62
UNABLE TO COMMUNICATE WITH USB DEVICE An unsupported device has been con-
nected to the system. This may be an encrypted USB, or a USB device that cannot com-
municate with the system.
This message displays in a dialog box when a USB device is inserted and cannot
be recognized by the system. The system will not recognize external DVD and
encrypted USB mass storage devices.
UNABLE TO CONNECT Certificates are required for TLS wireless connections under
FIPS140-2 enforcing. Disable FIPS140-2 enforcing before connecting to this network if
certificates are not used.
This message displays in a dialog box when a user attempts to connect to a
wireless EAP TLS network without certificates when FIPS140-2 enforcing is
enabled.
Touch OK and then follow the message instructions.
UNABLE TO DELETE OLDER EXAMS Exams older than the user-configured time to
retain exams are present on the system, but cannot be automatically deleted because
they contain images that have not been stored to PACS or a portable media device. Save
images or delete old exams.
This message displays in a dialog box at startup if exams older than the user-
configured time to retain exams has been reached and the exams contain images
that have not been archived.
UNABLE TO DELETE OLDER EXAMS Exams older than the user-configured time to
retain exams are present on the system, but cannot be automatically deleted because
they contain performed procedure step information that has not been sent to the MPPS
server. Retry the MPPS transfers or delete the old exams.
This message displays in a dialog box at startup if exams older than the user-
configured time to retain exams has been reached and the exams contain
incomplete MPPS transfers,
UNSENT DATA DELETED Touch OK to continue.

This message displays in a dialog box when analytic data in local storage has
been deleted.
14-63
UPS BATTERY LOW The system may be used, but it might not shut down correctly if wall
power (AC Mains) is lost. Allow the batteries to charge for 8 hours. If this message per-
This message displays in a dialog box when the Workstation power supply (UPS)
reports a low charge. The charger state is checked once at startup and may result
in this message. Other Workstation battery low messages display during
operation.
USB FORMAT COMPLETE

This message displays in a dialog box when a user-initiated USB format
completes. The message erases after 3 seconds.
USB FORMAT FAILED This USB device will not work. Use a different USB device. Touch
OK to continue.
This message displays in a dialog box when a user-initiated USB format fails to
format the USB device.
USB STORAGE DEVICE CAN SAFELY BE REMOVED FROM SYSTEM

This message displays in a dialog box when the USB eject button is pressed, and
the system dismounts a USB Storage Device.
VERIFY FAILED
This message displays in a dialog box when the system fails to verify that network
connections are made appropriately.
Touch OK, check the Network settings, and then retry.
WARNING! HIGH KV If this message persists, call for service.

This message displays in the status bar when an error has been detected in the
kV loop. The actual kVp is higher than that indicated on the C-Arm control panel
and is not within specified tolerances.
control panel:
WARNING! HIGH KV, PRESS ANY KEY
14-64
WARNING! HIGH MA If this message persists, call for service.

This message displays in the status bar when a calibration error has been
detected. The actual mA is higher than that indicated on the C-Arm control panel
and is not within specified tolerances.
control panel:
WARNING! HIGH MA, PRESS ANY KEY
WARNING! LOW KV If this message persists, call for service.

This message displays in the status bar when an error has been detected in the
kV loop. The actual kVp is lower than that indicated on the C-Arm control panel
and is not within specified tolerances. Lower kVp may result in poor image quality.
control panel:
WARNING! LOW KV, PRESS ANY KEY
WARNING! LOW MA If this message persists, call for service.

This message displays in the status bar when a calibration error has been
detected. The actual mA is lower than that indicated on the C-Arm control panel
and is not within specified tolerances. Lower mA may result in poor image quality.
control panel:
WARNING! LOW MA, PRESS ANY KEY
WIRELESS CONFIGURATION SETTINGS SAVED Remove wired connection to join wire-

less network.
This message displays in a dialog box when wireless network data is saved. Any
wired network connection must be removed to join a wireless network.
WIRELESS HARDWARE FAILURE Use wired network connection. If this message per-
This message displays in a dialog box when there is a problem with the wireless
interface card.
14-65
WORKSTATION AND C-ARM DO NOT MATCH Disconnect the C-Arm from the Work-
station, and connect the correct C-Arm.
This message displays in a dialog box when the user connects an improperly
paired C-Arm and Workstation.
control panel:
WORKSTATION AND C-ARM DO NOT MATCH
Touch OK and follow the message instructions. A system restart is not required if
a properly paired C-Arm is reconnected to the Workstation.
WORKSTATION SOFTWARE AND FIRMWARE INCOMPATIBLE Call for service.

This message displays in a dialog box when the system determines that the
firmware for the Workstation PION or the Power PION (or both) are not
compatible during bootup. This can only be repaired by a service engineer.
WORKSTATION SOFTWARE ERROR Restart the system. If this message persists, call
for service.
encounters an error that is not recoverable and that prevents the system from
being used.
X-RAY SWITCH SECURITY ERROR Restart the system. If this message persists, call for
service.
This message displays in the status bar when the X-ray security line has been
detected as enabled during the startup procedure.
control panel:
X-RAY SWITCH SECURITY ERROR, RESTART THE SYSTEM
Verify that switches are not being enabled by a foreign object, or disconnect the
handswitch and/or footswitch and attempt to restart the system. If the system
restarts, the disconnected device may contain a fault that requires service.
If this message persists, there is an internal fault preventing system operation.
14-66
X-RAY SWITCH SECURITY ERROR

This message displays in the status bar when a mismatch between security line
and the X-ray command line persists for 480 ms.
control panel:
X-RAY SWITCH SECURITY ERROR, PRESS ANY KEY
Follow the message instructions displayed on the C-Arm control panel.
X-RAY SWITCH STUCK Check for foreign objects and restart the system.
This message displays in the status bar when one of the X-ray exposure switches
has been detected as enabled during the startup procedure.
control panel:
X-RAY SWITCH STUCK, RESTART THE SYSTEM
Verify that switches are not being enabled by a foreign object, or disconnect the
handswitch and/or footswitch and attempt to restart the system. If the system
restarts, the disconnected device may contain a fault that requires service.
If this message persists, there is an internal fault preventing system operation.
Call for service.
X-RAYS DISABLED If this message persists, call for service.

This message displays in the status bar when the hardware for X-ray generation
is disabled during the X-ray exposure.
control panel:
X-RAYS DISABLED, PRESS ANY KEY
14-67
X-RAYS DISABLED, RECHARGE FOR 24 HOURS Shut down the system and leave
plugged in.
This message displays in the status bar when the system has been in storage for
more than six months, and the batteries need recharging. X-rays are disabled.
control panel:
X-RAYS DISABLED, RECHARGE FOR 24 HOURS
Follow the message instructions. Make sure the interconnect cable is properly
connected, and wait 24 hours before use. The system does not need to be turned
on.
X-RAYS DISABLED Restart the system. If this message persists, call for service.
This message displays in the status bar when X-ray generation subsystem is shut
down due to the detection of an active X-ray generation output signal during
startup.
control panel:
X-RAYS DISABLED, RESTART THE SYSTEM
X-RAYS DISABLED
system is incapable of taking X-rays.
Restart the system. If the message persists, call for service.
X-RAYS TEMPORARILY DISABLED Image storage is not available to record X-ray res-
ults. Archive older exams to PACS or portable media device, and then delete the exams
from the system to free space. The Image Storage icon in the System Status Tray displays
status.
This message displays in a dialog box when image storage space has reached
zero and no more space is available. X-rays are disabled while in this state.
14-68
15. Privacy and security

This chapter provides a overview of the cyber security considerations for the OEC Secure
system. Cyber security includes the core concerns of privacy and security. Privacy protects the
personal private interests of patients. Security protects both the product and the information
from risks to confidentiality, integrity, and availability.
The OEC Secure Privacy and Security Manual provides comprehensive coverage on this topic.
See 3.1 Electronic operator manuals beginning on page 3-1 for information on accessing this
manual.
15.1 Privacy and security environment

The system has been designed for an intended use with the following expectations of privacy
and security protections included in the environment where this product will be used:
Communication between the system and other information providers takes the form of data
flows. Each data flow defines the transfer of patient information, DICOM images, and system
configuration from an input source to the unit, and from the unit to one of several output
sources.
l The system should be connected to a secured network, not open to unintended users.
l The system should be physically secured in a way that it is not accessible for unintended
users.
l Default application users and passwords should be replaced with customized users and
passwords.
l External media containing images, patient data, reports and logs should be secured.
l When no longer used, the data should be securely erased and/or the media should be
securely deleted.
l The monitors of the system should be placed in a way limiting the visibility of the screen
content to the user only.
Caution The system must be physically secured to prevent unintended access to internal
data including PI/PHI.
15.2 Portable media security

The system supports storage devices including USB drives and USB DVD burners.
The system provides the following controls to limit external media access.
l The system does not permit execution from external media.
l The system does not permit auto-run from external media.
l The system does not permit the ability to boot from non OEC external media.
Portable media storage

Data stored on portable media is unencrypted.
15-1
When exporting data, the system allows you to de-identify the data. However, if the exported
data is not de-identified, the data may contain personal information (PI).
Caution Portable media devices and the content on them must be handled per applicable
regulations and guidelines for handling personal information (PI) / protected
health information (PHI).
Data destruction for portable media

The system’s delete function for removable media is not a secure deletion, meaning that the
deleted data (or part of it) still exists on media until other data overwrites it.
Caution To securely delete removable media, use only approved procedures and tools,
per applicable regulations and guidelines.
Example guidelines can be found here:

l NIST Special Publication 800-88, Guidelines for Media Sanitization:
http://dx.doi.org/10.6028/NIST.SP.800-88r1
l ISO/IEC 27040:2015 Information technology - Security techniques - Storage security
15.3 Enterprise authentication and user administration

To help customers comply with the Health Insurance and Portability and Accountability Act
(HIPAA), the system includes the Enterprise Authentication Authorization and Audit control
features. The facility is responsible for the correct use of these features and HIPAA
compliance.
15.3.1 Enable enterprise authentication

Enterprise Access Authorization and Audit is an identity management application created by
GE and used to manage users, groups, and access privileges.
To enable authentication, use the Authentication Management > Application Management >
Enterprise screen. See Enterprise beginning on page 2-40 for more information on enabling
this setting.
15.3.2 Local and enterprise user administration

The login function may be administered at either a local or enterprise level.
Local (or stand-alone) login administration is used on systems that have their own set of users
and passwords. Each system has one or more users with administrator access; these
administrators in turn manage the users. Each user needs a username and password for each
system they use.
Enterprise login administration uses the site’s existing usernames and passwords to allow
access to multiple systems throughout the site. A central site administrator manages the site’s
system and each system sends and receives login information over the network. Each user has
15-2
a single username and password for all systems.
15.3.3 Privileges, users, and groups

Privileges are the rights to access a system and perform certain functions. These privileges are
created by GE and cannot be changed:
l Emergency users are authorized to access only those clinical features needed to acquire
images.
l Clinical users are authorized to access all clinical features needed to acquire images,
add procedures to the Worklist, conduct exams and manage images.
l Administrative users (or administrators) are authorized all clinical features as well as all
security setup features, including login administration and preferences.
l GEHC Service users are authorized to access service features using the GESAK
mechanism.
Users get their privileges from groups. A user may be assigned to several groups.
Groups are categories of users that have certain privileges assigned. Groups are created and
assigned privileges by a user with GE Service or Administrator access.
15-3
15-4
16. Technical specifications and references

The policy of GE OEC Medical Systems, Inc. is one of continual product development and
improvement. For this reason, GE OEC Medical Systems, Inc. reserves the right to change the
operating characteristics and specifications of newer products at any time, without prior notice,
and without incurring any obligation relating to previously manufactured items.
The specifications listed are limited to general performance and physical data. Specifications of
optional equipment provided by other manufacturers are given in the applicable manuals
provided with those options.
GE OEC Medical Systems, Inc. will make available, on request, circuit diagrams, component
part lists, descriptions, calibration instructions, or other information which will assist properly
trained and qualified technicians to repair those parts of the system which are designated as
repairable.
16.1 General system information

16.1.1 Communication center contact information
Phone
1. Call the number that corresponds to your geographical location.
US: +1-800-874-7378
Canada: +1-800-668-0732
All other locations: Contact your local sales representative.

2. Establish an account with the customer service representative.
3. Place your order.
You may also call these numbers to order circuit diagrams, component part lists, calibration
instructions, arrange training, or obtain other information which will help qualified service
engineers to repair your system.
Fax
If you have a catalog and a GE Fax Order form, complete the form and fax it to +1-801-355-
8114. If you do not have a catalog, you can obtain one by dialing the number listed for your
geographical location.
16.1.2 Classification type

As defined by IEC 60601-1:
16-1
l Class I Equipment type protection against electric shock

l IPX0 (ordinary) protection against ingress of liquids (footswitch is IPX8 and RUI and
Touch / Tableside is IPX3)
l Mode of operation is continuous (standby) and intermittent (maximum)
16.1.3 Power requirements

Before power is connected to the system, the operator must be certain that the power outlet
has been approved, as indicated below, for the current, voltage, and line regulation
requirements of the system.
Note: A dedicated AC power line is recommended to avoid conflicts with the power
requirements of other equipment.
The system operating voltage is changeable. If the operating voltage requires changing, this
change must be made by a GE OEC Medical Systems, Inc. service technician, or by qualified
technical service personnel.
Table 16-1: Power requirements
Motorized Non-Motorized
systems systems
VAC1
A A A A
(maximum) (Standby)2, 3 (maximum) (Standby)2, 3
100 n/a n/a 20 5.0
110 n/a n/a 20 4.6
115 15 4.6 15 4.4
120 12 4.5 12 4.2
127 15 4.3 15 4.0
200 10 2.8 10 2.7
220 10 2.7 10 2.6
230 10 2.6 10 2.5
240 10 2.5 10 2.4
1. VAC values vary +/- 10% with the exception of 127 VAC, which varies +5%/-
10%.
2. Actual standby current may vary depending on the model and installed
options.
3. When the system is in Standby mode, motorized motion is disabled and the
stator and filament are on but the system is not taking x-rays.
l Line Frequency: 60/50 Hz
l Maximum line impedance: 0.3 Ω @ 100-127 VAC and 0.6 Ω @ 200-240 VAC
Technique factors at maximum line current condition: Peak power demand is determined by
the battery charger current limit and all accessories and features currently installed. The
system uses Battery Buffered power for X-ray Generation, as such Technique factors minimally
affects the maximum line current, and line current is generally independent of the technique.
16-2
Line regulation: 10% at nominal voltage at maximum radiographic exposure. Line regulation is
based on measurements made at the input (primary winding) of the isolation transformer under
standby conditions and at maximum radiographic exposure by the following equation:
Line regulation = 100 (Vn - Vi)/Vi
Where Vn = no load voltage (standby), and Vi = loaded voltage (maximum radiographic
exposure).
l System maximum continuous power dissipation: 5600 BTU/Hr.
l Workstation maximum continuous power dissipation: 2100 BTU/Hr.
l C-Arm maximum continuous power dissipation: 3500 BTU/Hr.
Input power cord and connector

The input power connector can be configured to connect to different power system wall outlets.
This change should only be performed by an authorized and qualified personnel familiar with
the equipment and local electrical requirements and regulations. Contact a Service
representative to change the input power plug or power cord.
Warning Incorrect wiring may result in electric shock hazards, risk of fire, and damage
to the equipment.
16.1.4 Workstation shelf power

The Workstation shelf power specifications are:
l USB 2.0 (1 x) + 5 VDC
l 230VAC, 50/60Hz, 3A
16.1.5 Environmental conditions

The following environmental specifications are applicable to both the C-Arm and Workstation
subsystems.
l Ambient operating temperature: +10 to +35° C, +50 to +95° F
l Short-term Storage and Transportation (< 2 days: -10 to +55° C, +14 to +131° F
l Extended Storage and Transportation (> 2 days): 0 to + 40° C, +32 to + 104° F
l Operating Altitude: Sea level to 3000 meters maximum
l Storage and Transport Altitude: 15000 ft (4572 meters) (57 kPa)
l Operating Humidity: 10% - 80%, non-condensing
l Storage and Transport Humidity: 10% - 80%, non-condensing
l Shock and Vibration: 1G at 5-200 Hz for 2 hours
16-3
Caution At initial setup or when removing from storage, stabilize for 24 hours at ambient
temperature and humidity before applying power.
Failure to observe this warning will result in damage to equipment.
16.2 Workstation specifications
16.2.1 Display monitor specifications

l Resolution: 3840 x 2160 pixels
l Aspect Ratio: 16:9
l Viewable image size: 31.5" (80.13 cm), measured diagonally
l Image display: 1920 x 1920 Pixels
l Horizontal and vertical viewing angle: 178°
l Luminance: 575 cd/m2
16.2.2 Line pair resolutions

The limiting resolution (as defined by observing at least half the lines) shall meet or exceed the
following line pairs/millimeter, as measured with a Nuclear Associates 07-523 Converging Line
Pair Resolution tool.
Table 16-2: Line pair resolutions
21 cm 31 cm 9 in 12 in
NORM ≥ 2.5 lp/mm ≥ 1.8 lp/mm ≥ 2.2 lp/mm ≥ 1.6 lp/mm
MAG1 ≥ 3.0 lp/mm ≥ 2.2 lp/mm ≥ 3.0 lp/mm ≥ 2.2 lp/mm
MAG2 ≥ 3.3 lp/mm ≥ 2.4 lp/mm ≥ 3.5 lp/mm ≥ 2.6 lp/mm
16.2.3 Input/Output (I/O)

See 3.3.2 Workstation external connections beginning on page 3-19 for Workstation external
connection ports.
l ROOM Interface Port Output: +24VAC Max relay closures
l ROOM Interface Port Input: External Relay contact closure
l Footswitch: 5 VDC 30 mA current source*
l Handswitch: 5 VDC 30 mA current source*
l Printer interface: USB 5 VDC 500 mA current source
l Video-in (DVI-D): 5 VDC 100 mA current source
16-4
l Video-out (DisplayPort):
l 3.3 VDC 500 mA current source
l Supports outputs of the full system monitor image, centered and with the aspect
ratio maintained, to an external monitor at resolutions of 3840x2160, 2560x1600,
2560x1440, 2048x1536, 1920x1200, 1920x1080, and 1280x1024
l DICOM: Ethernet interface
*Maximum non-destructive voltages that can be connected to signal I/O ports: 7 Volts DC
16.2.4 Image storage capacity

The local storage capacity for static images is a minimum of 40,000 single frame images.
The system's local storage capacity for cine runs depends on the system configuration:
l VASMTS or greater: 60 minutes at 30 fps
l VAS15: 60 minutes at 15 fps
l PM Care and BVAS: 30 minutes at 8 fps
16.2.5 Portable media specifications

The system can save and archive images and other files to portable media including DVD using
a DVD burner and to external USB drives.
The system can access files from USB portable media devices, including host certificates,
trusted certificates, calibration files, configuration files, banners, and GESAK files. When
accessing files from a USB portable media device, always place the files on the device's root
directory. The system cannot access files saved to folders on a portable media device.
DVD burner specifications

Non-self-powered portable DVD drives with a USB connection can be used with the system.
USB specifications
USB media must have a minimum 40MB/second read/write speed to assure at least a 1 image
per second read/write speed.
Unencrypted USB 2.0 (2x) or greater
Accepted file system formats:
l NTFS - The USB device must be formatted on a Windows PC. Use NTFS formatting for
large (128 GB or larger) drives.
l FAT16
l FAT32 - The USB device can be formatted on the system. System start-up may be slow
if a large USB device is inserted.
16-5
16.2.6 Wireless Card

l Integrated Compex WLE900VX Radio
l IEEE 802.11ac compliant & backward compatible with 802.11a/b/g/n
l 3x3 MIMO Technology, up to 1.3Gbps
l Frequency Range 2.412 ~ 2.472 GHz, 5.180 ~ 5.825 GHz
The frequency band and modulation characteristics are listed in the table below.
Table 16-1: Frequency band and modulation characteristics
5 GHz (802.11 a/n/ac) 2.4 GHz (802.11 b/g/n)
Frequency Band
5.18 GHz – 5.825 GHz 2.412 GHz – 2.462 GHz
(country-dependent)
Modulation l OFDM l DSSS
o BPSK l OFDM
o OPSK o BPSK
o DBSK o OPSK
o DOSK o DBSK
o CCK o DOSK
o 16-QAM o CCK
o 64-QAM o 16-QAM
o 256-QAM o 64-QAM
o 256-QAM
The wireless Effective Radiated Power (ERP) and the mean Equivalent Isotropically Radiated
Power (EIRP) for each frequency are listed in the table below.
Table 16-2: ERP and EIRP for each frequency band
Radiated Power 5 GHz 2.4 GHz
Maximum EIRP +35.96 dBm +35.3 dBm
Maximum ERP +33.81 dBm +33.15 dBm
Security
l WEP-128, WPA-PSK (TKIP)
l WPA2-PSK (AES-CCMP)
l PEAP: EAP-MS-CHAP v1 & v2, LEAP, EAP-FAST security methods
16.2.7 RSvP specifications

Remote connection uses an HTTPS tunnel, which enables secure bidirectional file uploads,
and VNC connections.
RSvP uses end-to-end TLS communication using FIPS 140-2 Level 1 compliant encryption and
hashing algorithms.
RSvP does not open inbound network ports on the device but opens outbound network port
9143.
16-6
RSvP is disabled by default but can be enabled by a field service engineer.

Log files are uploaded by the RSvP Agent to the GE back office and forwarded to a secure GE
network for storage and analysis.
Screen sharing uses Virtual Network Computing (VNC) protocol tunneled through HTTPS.
VNC servers can be only accessed by VNC clients through secure GE back office.
16.2.8 Interconnect cable

The C-Arm obtains AC power from an interconnect cable attached to the Workstation. The
power is isolated single phase. Power for C-Arm is included in Workstation power
requirements.
Note: The interconnect cable also provides video, communication, interlock and safety signal
interfaces, in addition to power.
16.3 C-Arm specifications

16.3.1 C-Arm generator specifications
Nominal (highest) kVp and highest mA values may vary due to system calibration or local
regulations.
Nominal (highest) kVp with highest obtainable current (when operated at that kVp)
l Fluoro Mode: 120 kVp @ 10 mA
l HLF: 120 kVp @ 20 mA
l Fluoroscopy Pulsed Mode: 120 kVp @ 28 mA
l Pulsed HLF: 120 kVp @ 35 mA
l Continuous Subtract: 120 kVp @ 27 mA
l Pulsed Subtract: 120 kVp @ 35 mA
l Digital Spot: 120 kVp @ 33 mA
l Digital Cine Pulse: 120 kVp @ 125 mA
Nominal (highest) mA with the highest obtainable kVp (when operated at that mA)
l Fluoro Mode: 10 mA @ 120 kVp
l HLF: 20 mA @ 120 kVp
l Fluoroscopy Pulsed Mode: 28 mA @ 120 kVp
l Pulsed HLF : 40 mA @ 105 kVp
l Continuous Subtract: 40 mA @ 80 kVp
l Pulsed Subtract: 40 mA @ 105 kVp
16-7
l Digital Spot: 75 mA @ 53 kVp

l Digital Cine Pulse: 150 mA @ 100 kVp
Maximum output power

l Fluoro Mode: 1.2 kW
l HLF: 2.4 kW
l Fluoroscopy Pulsed Mode: 3.36 kW
l Pulsed HLF : 4.2 kW
l Continuous Subtract: 3.2 kW
l Pulsed Subtract: 4.2 kW
l Digital Spot: 4 kW
l Digital Cine Pulse: 15.0 kW
Nominal output power

l Fluoro Mode: 1 kW @ 100 kVP, 10 mA for 0.5 second exposure (loading time)
l HLF: 2 kW @ 100 kVp, 20 mA for 0.5 second exposure (loading time)
l Pulsed HLF (Fluorography): 4 kW @ 100 kVp, 40 mA for 0.5 second exposure (loading
time)
l Digital Spot: 4 kW @ 100 kVp, 40 mA for 0.2 second exposure (loading time)
l Digital Cine Pulse: 15kW @ 100 kVp, 150 mA for 0.5 second exposure (loading time)
16.3.2 C-Arm generator operating parameters

l Type: Switched design, 60 kHz nominal operating frequency
l kVp Accuracy: ± (5% or 3 kVp) greater of the two
l mA Accuracy:
l 0.2 mA - 1.0 mA: ± 20%;
l 1.0 mA - 150 mA: ± 10% + 0.1 mA
l Time Accuracy: ± 10%
l Pulse Width Accuracy (Digital Cine Pulse and Pulsed): ± (10 % + 1 ms)
l AKR Accuracy: +/- 35% above 6 mGy/min
l CAK Accuracy: +/- 35% above 100 mGy
l DAP Accuracy: +/- 25% above 2.5 Gy cm²
l Linearity: < 0.1
l Reproducibility: C.O.V. ≤0.05
l Focal Spot: 0.3 and 0.6 per IEC 60336
l Fluoroscopy Duty Cycle: 70 kVp @ 2.0 mA continuous
16-8
16.3.3 Modes of operation

Note: In order to maintain system operation within regulations for maximum patient dose
rates, the maximum mA values may be lower at high kV levels. Reducing kV allows mA
to achieve the listed maximum levels.
Focal spot (0.3 nominal) per IEC 60336

Table 16-3: Focal spot (0.3) per IEC 60336
Mode mA kVp Pulse rate Pulse width
range range (pps) (ms)
Manual / Auto Fluoroscopy 0.2 - 10 40 - 120 N/A N/A
High Level Fluoro Continuous 0.2 - 20 40 - 120 N/A N/A
Pulsed Manual / Auto Fluoroscopy 0.2 - 28 40 - 120 4, 8, 15 34, 29, 19
Pulsed HLF 0.2 - 40 40 - 120 4, 8, 15 24, 29, 19
Continuous Subtract 0.2 - 40 40 - 120 N/A N/A
Pulsed Subtract 0.2 - 40 40 - 120 8, 15 29, 19
Digital Spot 1.4 - 75 40 - 120 N/A N/A*
* Digital Spot exposure length range is 132-1300 ms.

Table 16-4: Focal spot (0.6 nominal) per IEC 60336
Mode mA kVp range Pulse rate Pulse width
range (pps) (ms)
Pulsed Digital Cine 10 - 150 40 - 120 15, 30 9
The graphs below depict the relationship of kV and mA between Fluoroscopy and Digital Spot
techniques. See 5.7.8 Digital Spot mode beginning on page 5-26 for more information.
16-9
Figure 16-1: Relationship of kV and mA between Fluoroscopy and Digital Spot technique
21 cm A. Digital Spot mA
B. Fluoroscopy mA
C. Mag2 field size
D. Mag1 field size
E. Normal field size
31 cm
16-10
16.3.4 X-ray source assembly

l Type (rotating anode):
l Varex RAD-99B (insert) in ORIIIB (housing)
l GE BEL MX-80 Surgery (housing and insert)
l CE notified body number:
l Varex ORIIIB: CE 2797
l GE BEL MX-80: CE 0459
l Weight of X-ray Tube Assembly: 43 lbs. (20 kg)
l Focal Spot: Dual, 0.3 and 0.6 (per IEC 60336)
l Target Diameter: 3 inches (80mm)
l Target Material: Tungsten-rhenium molybdenum
l Target Angle: 10°
l Maximum Voltage:
l Anode to Cathode = 125 kV
l Anode to Ground = 62.5 kV
l Cathode to Ground = 62.5 kV
l Maximum Filament Current:
l Focus 0.3: 4.1 A
l Focus 0.6: 5.0 A
l Maximum Filament Voltage:
l Focus 0.3: 7.8 V
l Focus 0.6: 11.2 V
l Nominal Anode Input:
l Focus 0.3: 8.3 kW
l Focus 0.6: 22.5 kW
l Continuous Maximum Anode Input: 1 kW
l Speed up time for Anode: 1-2 seconds
l Braking time for Anode: N/A
l Leakage Radiation: Less than 100 mR/hr (0.88 mGy/hr)
l Leakage Technique Factors:
l X-ray tube assembly: 125 kVp and 1.5 mA
l Diagnostic source assembly: 120 kVp and 3.0 mA
l Inherent Filtration: 0.8mm ± 0.1 mm Al minimum (at 75 kVp) per IEC 60522
l Total filtration: 6.75 mm ± 0.75 mm aluminum equivalent (at 75 kVp)
16-11
16.3.5 Heating and cooling charts - tube housing

Conversion factors:
l 1.41 x Joules = Heat Units (HU)
l 1.41 x 60 x watts = Heat Units (HU) per minute
Figure 16-2: X-ray tube housing heating and cooling without air
circulator or port cooling adapter
Stored Housing
Time
Energy Temp
(minutes)
(kJ) (°C)
The figure above illustrates the heating and cooling of the X-ray tube housing assembly without
any modifications. The tables below show the heating and cooling of the X-ray tube and anode
of each C-Arm model, with available cooling options.
Table 16-5: X-ray tube housing cooling values
C-Arm Max Continuous Operation time until Max Heat
Cooling Rate automatic shutoff Capacity
21 cm FPD Super C-Arm (Passive)
21 cm FPD Ergo C-Arm (Passive) 120 minutes @
266 watts
31 cm FPD Ergo C-Arm (Passive) 60kVp / 5mA
(22.5 kHU/min)
9 in II Super C-Arm (continuous fluoro)
12 in II Standard C-Arm 1.14 MJ
21 cm FPD Super C-Arm (Active 15) 80 minutes @ (1.6 MHU)
405 watts
100kVp / 5mA
31 cm FPD Super C-Arm (Active 15) (34 kHU/min) (continuous fluoro)
120 minutes @
180 watts
9 in II Standard C-Arm 60kVp / 4mA
(15 kHU/min)
(continuous fluoro)
16-12
16.3.6 Heating and cooling chart - anode

Figure 16-3: Anode heating and cooling curves
Stored
HU Time
Energy
% (minutes)
(kJ)
Table 16-6: Anode cooling values

C-Arm Max Continuous Max Heat
Cooling Rate Capacity
21 cm FPD Ergo C-Arm (Passive)
21 cm FPD Super C-Arm (Passive)
21 cm FPD Super C-Arm (Active 15)
31 cm FPD Ergo C-Arm (Passive) 1066 watts 212 kJ
31 cm FPD Super C-Arm (Active 15) (85 kHU/min) (300 kHU)
9 in II Super C-Arm
9 in II Standard C-Arm
12 in II Standard C-Arm
16.3.7 Tube rating charts

The following charts and data describe tube characteristics when operated with three-phase,
full-wave rectification, a reasonable approximation to the high frequency generator with
minimal ripple.
16-13
Figure 16-4: 50 Hertz Digital Spot rating charts
Figure 16-5: 60 Hertz Digital Spot rating charts
16.3.8 Maximum surface temperatures

l X-ray tube: < 78° C / 172° F
l Monitor: < 56° C / 133° F
l Collimator / detector cover: < 41° C / 106° F
16.3.9 Collimator information

The system features a tungsten iris collimator and a rotatable double leaf collimator. Features
include on-screen collimator position indication and collimator adjustment without X-ray
exposure.
The X-ray beam can be collimated down to less than 5 cm x 5 cm.
16-14
16.3.10 Image detector specifications

Table 16-7: Image detector (FPD or II) specifications
Specification 21 cm FPD 31 cm FPD 9 in II 12 in II
Detector type CMOS CMOS CCD CCD
Total detector size 20.8 x 20.8 cm 30.7 x 30.7 cm 23 cm diameter 31 cm diameter
Active detector size 20.8 x 20.2 cm 30.7 x 30.2 cm 22 cm diameter 29 cm diameter
Field of view (cm) 21 / 15 / 11 31 / 21 / 15 22 / 16 / 12 29 / 20 / 16
Total pixel matrix 1536 x 1496 1548 x 1524 1000 x 1000 1000 x 1000
Pixel pitch 135.3 µm 198.0 µm 7.4 µm 7.4 µm
Frame rate 30 fps 30 fps 30 fps 30 fps
0 lp/mm typ-
72% 72% 65% 65%
ical
DQE 0.5 lp/mm typ-
63% 62% 57% 44%
ical
Dose / Frame <70μR/frame <50μR/frame <70μR/frame <50μR/frame
16.3.11 Removable anti-scatter grid specifications

Table 16-8: Anti-scatter grid specifications
21 cm 31 cm 9 in 12 in
FPD FPD II II
Material Carbon fiber Carbon fiber Carbon fiber Carbon fiber
Transmission
72% 72% 72% 72%
Factor
16-15
16.3.12 X-ray beam geometry

The following table shows the X-ray beam geometry and filtration from the X-ray source (focal
spot) to the image detector. Equivalent Al filtration is obtained at 75 kVp. Filtration values listed
are nominal.
Figure 16-6: X-ray beam geometry showing reference points
Reference Points:
A. Focal spot (X-ray tube 0.8mm Al filtration)
B. Primary collimator (2.03mm Al filtration)
C. Variable collimator (3.3mm Al filtration)
D. Secondary collimator
E. Collimator cover (0.3mm Al filtration)
F. Skin spacer
G. Patient entrance reference point
H. Removable anti-scatter grid
I. Image detector cover
J. Image detector
K. Maximum symmetrical radiation field (21 x 21 cm,
31 x 31 cm, 9 in diameter, or 12 in diameter,
depending on image detector size and type)
Distances between relevant reference points in the
image:
l A-E – Minimum skin space distance (20 cm)
l A-F – Standard skin space distance (30 cm)
l A-G – Focal spot to AKR/CAK measurement point (70 cm)
l A-J – Focal spot to image distance (SID) (100 cm ± 5%)
16.3.13 C-Arm camera output video signal

Hi-res 1k x 1k pixel, 1260 lines/frame @ 30Hz, 1320 lines/frame @ 25Hz.
16.3.14 Laser Aimer

The following Laser Aimer specifications are also indicated on the Laser Aimer label, shown on
page 12-3:
l Peak Power: < 1mW
l Wavelength: 515nm
16-16
l Class: II/2 Laser Product 21 CFR 1040 and IEC 60825-1:2014

l Geometry: Fan beam
16.4 Other system specifications

16.4.1 Optional accessories
The following accessories have been tested and are known to work with the system:
Medical accessories:
l Wireless footswitch (applicable systems only)
l OEC Touch Tableside
l Thermal printers
l Auto-injector interface
l Sterile drapes
l Wireless DICOM
Non-medical accessories:
l External DVD drive
Call the Communication Center to order optional equipment.
16-17
16.4.2 Disposable items

The following disposable items can be ordered:
l Printer paper
l Sterile drapes and covers
To receive more information on optional accessories or disposable items, call the Customer
Service Center.
16.4.3 Zones of occupancy

There are three significant zones of occupancy for the operator. These zones are designated to
be used for fluoroscopy and radiography. Two zones are next to the C-Arm control panels and
one is in front of the C-Arm. Two zones are next to the cross-arm housing and one is in front of
the C-Arm. These zones are represented in the image below as Z1 to Z3.
Figure 16-7: Significant zones of occupancy for the operator (FPD)
16-18
Figure 16-8: Significant zones of occupancy for the operator (II)
16.4.4 Isokerma maps of stray radiation

The following isokerma maps were generated using the following conditions:
l Radcal Accu-Gold System
l 180 cc Ion Chamber
l IEC phantom (25cm x 25cm x 25cm PMMA)
l Radiation field size collimated to 100cm2 at the entrance point of the phantom
In all images, D indicates the detector.
16-19
21 cm FPD
Figure 16-9: Isokerma map (21 cm) – Lateral configuration with X-ray beam at 1 m height, at
90 kVp. Isokerma curves are given (µGy/Gy x cm2)
Figure 16-10: Isokerma map (21 cm) – Vertical configuration with X-ray beam at 1 m height, at
90 kVp. Isokerma curves are given (µGy/Gy x cm2)
16-20
Figure 16-11: Isokerma map (21 cm) – Lateral configuration with X-ray beam at 1.5 m height,
at 90 kVp. Isokerma curves are given (µGy/Gy x cm2)
Figure 16-12: Isokerma map (21 cm) – Vertical configuration with X-ray beam at 1.5 m height,
at 90 kVp. Isokerma curves are given (µGy/Gy x cm2)
16-21
31 cm FPD
Figure 16-13: Isokerma map (31 cm) – Lateral configuration with X-ray beam at 1 m height, at
90 kVp - Isokerma curves are given (µGy/Gy x cm2)
Figure 16-14: Isokerma map (31 cm) – Vertical configuration with X-ray beam at 1 m height, at
16-22
Figure 16-15: Isokerma map (31 cm) – Lateral configuration with X-ray beam at 1.5 m height,
at 90 kVp - Isokerma curves are given (µGy/Gy x cm2)
Figure 16-16: Isokerma map (31 cm) – Vertical configuration with X-ray beam at 1.5 m height,
16-23
9 in II
Figure 16-17: Isokerma map (9 inch) – Lateral configuration with X-ray beam at 1 m height, at
Figure 16-18: Isokerma map (9 inch) – Vertical configuration with X-ray beam at 1 m height, at
16-24
Figure 16-19: Isokerma map (9 inch) – Lateral configuration with X-ray beam at 1.5 m height,
Figure 16-20: Isokerma map (9 inch) – Vertical configuration with X-ray beam at 1.5 m height,
16-25
12 in II
Figure 16-21: Isokerma map (12 inch) – Lateral configuration with X-ray beam at 1 m height, at
Figure 16-22: Isokerma map (12 inch) – Vertical configuration with X-ray beam at 1 m height,
16-26
Figure 16-23: Isokerma map (12 inch) – Lateral configuration with X-ray beam at 1.5 m height,
Figure 16-24: Isokerma map (12 inch) – Vertical configuration with X-ray beam at 1.5 m height,
16-27
16.4.5 Electromagnetic specifications

Emission
OEC mobile C-Arms are suitable for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below.
The purchaser or user should ensure that it is used in an electromagnetic environment as
described below:
Table 16-9: Electromagnetic tests and compliance
Emissions Test Compliance Electromagnetic Environment
Radio Frequency Group 1 The system uses RF energy only for its internal function.
Emissions Therefore, the RF emission is very low and not likely to
CISPR11 cause any interference in nearby electronic equipment.
Class A The system is suitable for use in all establishments other
than domestic and those directly connected to the low
voltage power supply network that supplies buildings
used for domestic purposes.
Harmonic Class A The system is suitable for use in all establishments other
emissions than domestic and those directly connected to the low
IEC 61000-3-2 voltage power supply network that supplies buildings
used for domestic purposes.
Voltage Complies The system is suitable for use in all establishments other
fluctuations/ than domestic and those directly connected to the low
flicker emissions voltage power supply network that supplies buildings
IEC 61000-3-3 used for domestic purposes.
16-28
16.4.6 Immunity
OEC mobile C-Arm are suitable for use in the specified electromagnetic environment. The
purchaser or user should ensure that it is used in an electromagnetic environment as described
below:
Table 16-10: Electromagnetic environments
Immunity test IEC 60601-1-2 Compliance level Electromagnetic environment
test level
Electrostatic Software version Software version Floors are wood, concrete, or
discharge 1.0.XXXX / 1.0.XXXX / ceramic tile, or floors are covered
(ESD) IEC 1.2.XXXX: 1.2.XXXX: with synthetic material and the rel-
61000-4-2 6 kV contact 6 kV contact ative humidity is at least 30%.
8 kV air 8 kV air
Software version Software version
2.X.X.XXXX / 2.X.X.XXXX /
3.1.X.XXXX: 8 kV 3.1.X.XXXX:8 kV
contact contact
15 kV air 15 kV air
Electrical fast 2 kV for power 2 kV for power Mains power quality is that of a typ-
transient/burst supply lines supply lines ical commercial and/or hospital
IEC 61000-4-4 1 kV for input/ 1 kV for input/ environment.
output lines output lines
Surge IEC 1 kV differential 1 kV differential Mains power quality is that of a typ-
61000-4-5 mode mode ical commercial and/or hospital
2 kV common 2 kV common environment.
mode mode
16-29

test level
Voltage dips, Software version Software version Mains power quality is that of a typ-
short inter- 1.0.XXXX / 1.0.XXXX / ical commercial and/or hospital
ruptions and 1.2.XXXX: <5% 1.2.XXXX: <5% UT environment. If the user requires
voltage vari- UT(>95% dip in (>95% dip in UT) continued operation during power
ations on UT) for 0.5 cycle for 0.5 cycle mains interruptions, it is recom-
power supply mended that the system be
40% UT(60% dip 40% UT(60% dip in
input lines IEC powered from an uninterruptible
in UT) for 5 cycles UT) for 5 cycles
61000-4-11 power supply or a battery.
70% UT(30% dip 70% UT(30% dip in
in UT) for 25 UT) for 25 cycles
cycles
<5% UT(>95% dip
<5% UT(>95% dip in UT) for 5 s
in UT) for 5 s
Software version
Software version 2.X.X.XXXX /
2.X.X.XXXX / 3.1.X.XXXX:0% of
3.1.X.XXXX:0% UT for 0.5 cycle @
of UT for 0.5 cycle 0°, 45°, 90°, 135°,
@ 0°, 45°, 90°, 180°,
135°, 180°, 225°, 225°, 270°, and
270°, and 315° 315°
0% of UT for 1 0% of UT for 1 cycle
cycle and 70% of and 70% of UT for
UT for 25/30 25/30 cycles Single
cycles Single phase @ 0°
phase @ 0°
0% UT for 250/300
0% UT for 250/300 cycles
cycles
Power fre- Software version Software version Power frequency magnetic fields is
quency (50/60 1.0.XXXX / 1.0.XXXX / at levels characteristic of a typical
Hz) magnetic 1.2.XXXX: 3 A/m 1.2.XXXX: 3 A/m location in a typical (commercial) or
field IEC hospital environment.
Software version Software version
61000-4-8
2.X.X.XXXX / 2.X.X.XXXX /
3.1.X.XXXX:30 3.1.X.XXXX:30
A/m A/m
Conducted RF 3 Vrms 150 kHz to 3 Vrms At this disturbance amplitude the
IEC 61000-4-6 80 MHz system is fully operational.
16-30

test level
Radiated RF Software version Software version Portable and mobile RF
IEC 61000-4-3 1.0.XXXX / 1.0.XXXX / Communications equipment are
1.2.XXXX: 3 V/m 1.2.XXXX: 3 V/m used no closer to any part of the
80 MHz to 2.5 system, including cables, than the
Software version
GHz recommended separation distance
2.X.X.XXXX /
calculated from the equation
Software version 3.1.X.XXXX:3 V/m,
appropriate for the frequency of the
2.X.X.XXXX / and those listed in
transmitter (see recommended
3.1.X.XXXX:3 60601-1-2 Table 9
separation distance table below).
V/m, and those
listed in 60601-1- Field strengths from fixed RF
2 Table 9 transmitters, as determined by an
electromagnetic site survey,a are
less than the compliance level in
each frequency range.b
Interference may occur in the
vicinity of equipment marked with
the following symbol:
a Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for cellular telephones and land mobile
radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast, and TV broadcast cannot be estimated accurately.
To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey
should be performed. If the measured field strength exceeds the RF compliance level above, observe the
system to verify normal operation in each use location. If abnormal performance is observed, additional
measures may be necessary, such as re-orienting or relocating the system.
b Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths are less than 3 V/m.
Note: These are guidelines. Actual conditions may vary.
Recommended separation distances for portable and mobile RF communications

equipment
Warning Portable RF communications equipment (including peripherals such as
antenna cables and external antennas) should be used no closer than 30 cm
(12 inches) to any part of the system, including cables specified by the
manufacturer. Otherwise, degradation of the performance of this equipment
could result.
16-31
Table 16-11: Separation distances
Frequency of Transmitter 150 KHz to 80 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2.5
MHz GHz
Equation d=1.2 d=1.2 d=2.3
Rated Power of Transmitter DISTANCE DISTANCE (meters) DISTANCE

(watts) (meters) (meters)
10 mW 0.12 0.12 0.23
100 mW 0.38 0.38 0.73
1 1.2 1.2 2.3
10 3.8 3.8 7.3
100 12 12 23
For transmitters rated at a power not listed above, the distance (d) in meters (m) can be
estimated using the equation in the corresponding column, where P is the power rating of the
transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.
Note: These are guidelines. Actual conditions may vary.
Limitations management
Using the recommendation distance from Table 16-11: Separation distances on page 16-32,
between 150 KHz and 2.5 GHz, some slight disturbances might be recorded at image level; the
disturbed image can’t be confused with a medical pathology, and the equipment keeps its
medical utility.
16.4.7 Material safety data sheets

Manufacturer’s material safety data sheets are available from the manufacturer upon request.
Contact the following manufacturers with regard to the materials listed:
l Dow Corning R 5 Compound (Silicone)-Dow Corning Corporation, South Saginaw Road,
Midland MI 48686, (989) 496-6000.
l Shell Diala Oil AX – Equilon Enterprises LLC, P. O. Box 4453, Houston, TX 77210, (877)
276-7285.
l Shell Diala S3 ZX-I – Belgian Shell SA/NV, 15-23 Avenue Arnaud Fraiteur, B-1050
Bruxelles, (+32) 02508 9298.
l Sealed Lead Acid Battery – Panasonic Energy, Osaka, 570, Japan, (800) 793-3772 or
EnerSys Energy Products Inc. (formerly Hawker Energy Products Inc.), 617 North
Ridgeview Drive, Warrensburg, MO 64093, (800) 964-2837.
16-32
16.5 Dimensions
Weights reported are maximum raw weights without accessories or options.
16.5.1 Workstation dimensions

Measurement Nominal Weight A B
21 cm MD
31 cm MD
9 in Super
21cm Super
31 cm Super ≤ 422 lbs (191 kg) 25.8 in (66cm) 25.8 in (66 cm)
21 cm Ergo
31 cm Ergo
9 in Standard
12 in Standard
Measurement C D E F
21 cm MD
31 cm MD
9 in Super
21cm Super
31 cm Super 34.1 in (87 cm) 7 in (17 cm) 13 in (34 cm) 68.1 in (173 cm)
21 cm Ergo
31 cm Ergo
9 in Standard
12 in Standard
Measurement G H
21 cm MD
31 cm MD
9 in Super
21cm Super
31 cm Super 28 in (71 cm) 43 in (109 cm)
21 cm Ergo
31 cm Ergo
9 in Standard
12 in Standard
16-33
Measurement I J
21 cm MD
31 cm MD
9 in Super
21cm Super
31 cm Super 51 in (130 cm) 48 in (122 cm)
21 cm Ergo
31 cm Ergo
9 in Standard
12 in Standard
Measurement K L M
21 cm MD
31 cm MD
9 in Super
21cm Super
31 cm Super 36 in (92 cm) 25 in (64 cm) 39 in (99 cm)
21 cm Ergo
31 cm Ergo
9 in Standard
12 in Standard
16.5.2 C-Arm dimensions

Measurement Nominal Weight A B C
21 cm MD ≤ 681 lbs (309 kg) 31 in (79 cm) 33 in (84 cm) 84 in (213 cm)
31 cm MD ≤ 685 lbs (311 kg) 31 in (79 cm) 33 in (84 cm) 84 in (213 cm)
9 in Super ≤ 639 lbs (290 kg) 31 in (79 cm) 33 in (84 cm) 83 in (211 cm)
21cm Super ≤ 650 lbs (295 kg) 31 in (79 cm) 33 in (84 cm) 83 in (211 cm)
31 cm Super ≤ 650 lbs (295 kg) 31 in (79 cm) 33 in (84 cm) 83 in (211 cm)
21 cm Ergo ≤ 645 lbs (293 kg) 31 in (79 cm) 27 in (67 cm) 83 in (211 cm)
31 cm Ergo ≤ 648 lbs (294 kg) 31 in (79 cm) 27 in (67 cm) 83 in (211 cm)
9 in Standard ≤ 618 lbs (280 kg) 31 in (79 cm) 26 in (66 cm) 82 in (208 cm)
12 in Standard ≤ 660 lbs (299 kg) 31 in (79 cm) 26 in (66 cm) 84 in (213 cm)
16-34
Measurement D E F G
21 cm MD 39 in (99 cm) 21 in (53 cm) 72 in (182 cm) 90 in (228 cm)
31 cm MD 39 in (99 cm) 21 in (53 cm) 72 in (182 cm) 90 in (228 cm)
9 in Super 38 in (97 cm) 20 in (51 cm) 70 in (178 cm) 88 in (224 cm)
21cm Super 38 in (97 cm) 20 in (51 cm) 70 in (178 cm) 88 in (224 cm)
31 cm Super 38 in (97 cm) 20 in (51 cm) 70 in (178 cm) 88 in (224 cm)
21 cm Ergo 36 in (91 cm) 18 in (46 cm) 65 in (164 cm) 83 in (210 cm)
31 cm Ergo 36 in (91 cm) 18 in (46 cm) 65 in (164 cm) 83 in (210 cm)
9 in Standard 36 in (91 cm) 18 in (46 cm) 68 in (173 cm) 86 in (219 cm)
12 in Standard 36 in (91 cm) 18 in (46 cm) 71 in (180 cm) 89 in (226 cm)
Measurement H I J
21 cm MD 50 in (127 cm) 99 in (251 cm) 105 in (266 cm)
31 cm MD 50 in (127 cm) 99 in (251 cm) 105 in (266 cm)
9 in Super 50 in (127 cm) 98 in (249 cm) 106 in (269 cm)
21cm Super 50 in (127 cm) 98 in (249 cm) 106 in (269 cm)
31 cm Super 50 in (127 cm) 98 in (249 cm) 106 in (269 cm)
21 cm Ergo 50 in (127 cm) 101 in (255 cm) 109 in (275 cm)
31 cm Ergo 50 in (127 cm) 101 in (255 cm) 109 in (275 cm)
9 in Standard 50 in (127 cm) 96 in (244 cm) 104 in (264 cm)
12 in Standard 50 in (127 cm) 101 in (255 cm) 109 in (275 cm)
Measurement K
21 cm MD 53°
31 cm MD 53°
9 in Super 55°
21cm Super 55°
31 cm Super 55°
21 cm Ergo 55°
31 cm Ergo 55°
9 in Standard 25°
12 in Standard 25°
16-35
Measurement L M
21 cm MD n/a 33.2 in (84 cm)
31 cm MD n/a 33.2 in (84 cm)
9 in Super 20° 33.2 in (84 cm)
21cm Super 20° 33.2 in (84 cm)
31 cm Super 20° 33.2 in (84 cm)
21 cm Ergo 20° 33.2 in (84 cm)
31 cm Ergo 20° 33.2 in (84 cm)
9 in Standard 20° 33.2 in (84 cm)
12 in Standard 20° 33.2 in (84 cm)
16.5.3 OEC Touch Tableside dimensions
Weight: ≤ 60lbs (27 kg) D: 19.7 in (50 cm)
A (shortest): 53.6 in (136 cm)
B (tallest): 59.9 in (152 cm)
C: 20.25 in (51 cm)
16-36
17. Country and regional information

This chapter includes importer information and other regional- and country-specific information,
as well as the locations and descriptions of labels and symbols that may appear on your
system. These labels and symbols include import, regulatory, and safety markings specific to
certain countries and locales.
17.1 USA and all FDA-regulated regions

Table 17-1
Label
Location On C-Arm rear cover label panel and inside the C-Arm arc, next to the image detector.
Description This is a USA FDA certification label that certifies that the image detector meets applic-
able federal standards and regulations as of the date of manufacture.
Table 17-2
Label
Location On a C-Arm rear cover label panel.

Description This is a USA FDA certification label that certifies that the beam limiting device meets
applicable federal standards and regulations as of the date of manufacture.
17-1
Table 17-3
Label
Location On C-Arm rear cover label panel.

Description This is a USA FDA certification label that certifies that the high voltage generator, X-ray
control, and AKR display meet applicable federal standards and regulations as of the
date of manufacture.
Table 17-4
Label
Location On C-Arm rear cover label panel and inside the C-Arm arc, next to the image detector.
Description This is a USA FDA registration label that provides manufacturer contact information,
product certification and registration information.
Table 17-5
Label
Location On C-Arm rear cover label panel.

Description This is a USA FDA certification label that certifies that the X-ray tube assembly meets
applicable federal standards and regulations as of the date of manufacture.
17-2
Table 17-6
Symbol
Location Combined wireless certification label on right side of the Workstation.

Description This symbol indicates compliance under Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation. The FCC ID identifies the
FCC equipment authorization associated with the transmitter.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:
l Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
l Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
l Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
l Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
l The wireless footswitch cannot be paired with other C-Arms, devices, or
systems, and uses an unpublished communication procedure. These measures
protect the device from unauthorized wireless access.
Table 17-7
Symbol

Description This symbol indicates that this product contains an RF transmitter.
17-3
Table 17-8
Label
Location Right side of the Workstation.

Description This label indicates that this product contains wireless components compliant under
Part 15 of the FCC rules.
17.2 North America

Table 17-9
Symbol
Location Combined certification label on the footswitch and the back of the Workstation.
Description This symbol indicates that the system has been tested and certified by the Canadian
Standards Association to comply with applicable U.S. and Canadian Standards.
17.3 Argentina
Table 17-10
Label

Description This label is required to import the device into Argentina.
17-4
17.4 Australia and New Zealand

Table 17-11
Symbol
Location Combined wireless certification label on right side of the Workstation, wireless foot-
switch, wireless footswitch receiver.
Description This symbol indicates compliance with ACMA radio communications regulatory
arrangements and mandatory technical standards as required for Australia and New
Zealand.
17.5 Brazil
17.5.1 Registration and importer information in Brazil
Produto Sistema de Raio-X com Arco em C Móvel
Modelo OEC Elite
Descrição Aparelho Móvel para Raio X
CNPJ 00.029.372/0001-40
Registro
80071260383
ANVISA N°
Nome do
Fabricante
Endereço do 384 Wright Brothers Dr.
Fabricante Salt Lake City, UT 84116 - EUA
Nome do GE HEALTHCARE DO BRASIL COMÉRCIO E SERVIÇOS PARA
Importador EQUIPAMENTOS MEDICOS-HOSPITALARES LTDA.
Endereço do Av. Magalhães de Castro 4800,
Importador 10º andar, conjuntos 101 e 102,
11º andar, conjuntos 111 e 112, e
12º andar, conjuntos 121 e 122,
Torre 3,
Cidade Jardim,
CEP: 05676120 - São Paulo/SP- Brasil
Telefone do
3004 2525 (Capitais e Regiões Metropolitanas)
Atendimento
08000 165 799 (Demais Localidades)
ao clienter
Responsável
Karolina Morangoni Torres - Registro CREA/SP n° 5069785521
Técnico
17-5
17.5.2 Labels
Table 17-12
Label

Description This label is required to import the device into Brazil.
Table 17-13
Label
Location On the shipping packaging.

Description This label is required to import the device into Brazil and provides information about the
importer.
17-6
17.6 Canada
Table 17-14
Symbol
Location Combined certification label on the footswitch and the back of the Workstation.
Description This symbol indicates that the system has been tested and certified by the Canadian
Standards Association to comply with applicable U.S. and Canadian Standards.
Table 17-15
Label

Description This label contains identification and system information for French Canadian
provinces.
Table 17-16
Label
Location Front of C-Arm, below interface panel.

Description This label contains identification information for the C-Arm for French Canadian
provinces.
17-7
Table 17-17
Label
Location On the C-Arm cross-arm housing.

Description This label indicates that users should be familiar with safe operating practices asso-
ciated with this equipment before using the system for Canada.
17.7 China
Table 17-18
Symbol
Location On the Chinese Workstation rating label on the side of the Workstation frame.
Description This symbol indicates the product contains hazardous materials in excess of the limits
established by the Chinese standard GB/T 26572 Requirements for Concentration Lim-
its for Certain Hazardous Substances in Electronic Information Products. The number
in the symbol is the Environment-friendly Use Period (EFUP), which indicates the
period during which the toxic or hazardous substances or elements contained in elec-
tronic information products will not leak or mutate under normal operating conditions so
that the use of such electronic information products will not result in any severe envir-
onmental pollution, any bodily injury or damage to any assets. The unit of the period is
“Year.”
17.8 European Union

GE OEC Medical Systems has designated the following entity to act as the authorized
European Union (EU) representative:
GE Medical Systems SCS
283 rue de la Minière
78530 Buc, France
Telephone: (+33) 1 30 70 40 40
Fax: (+33) 1 30 70 44 40
17-8
Table 17-19
Symbol
Location C-Arm rear cover label panel and combined certification label on back of the Work-
station.
Description See Medical Directive on page iii.
Table 17-20
Symbol
Location On the Workstation, C-Arm, Touch Tableside, and wireless footswitch rating labels.
Description This symbol accompanies the name and the address of the authorized representative
in the European Community.
Table 17-21
Symbol

Description See Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) on page iii.
17.9 Iran
Table 17-22
Label

Description This label is required to import the device into Iran.
17-9
17.10 Japan
Table 17-23
Symbol
Location On the workstation, wireless footswitch, wireless footswitch receiver.

Description The symbol indicates that the radio equipment conforms to the technical regulations
specified in Japan's Radio Law.
17.11 Kazakhstan
GE OEC Medical Systems has designated the following entity to act as the authorized
representative to receive claims in Kazakhstan:
General Electric Kazakhstan LLP
Timiryazev St 28V, office 307, Almaty, 050040
Kazakhstan
Telephone: +7 727 3560020
17.12 Mexico
Table 17-24
Label

Description This label is required to import the device into Mexico.
17-10
17.13 Peru
Table 17-25
Label

Description This label is required to import the device into Peru.
17.14 Russia
Table 17-26
Symbol
Location On the Russian Workstation rating label on the side of the Workstation frame.
Description This symbol indicates the device has been certified for compliance to established Rus-
sian medical device standards.
Table 17-27
Symbol
Location System nameplate/rating label (C-Arm and Workstation).

Description This symbol indicates compliance with the Eurasian Conformity (EAC) system.
17-11
17.15 Saudi Arabia

Table 17-28
Symbol
Location Below the combined wireless certification label on right side of the Workstation.
Description This symbol indicates wireless compliance as required for Saudi Arabia.
17.16 Singapore
Table 17-29
Symbol
Location Below the combined wireless certification label on right side of the Workstation.
Description This symbol indicates wireless compliance as required for Singapore.
17-12
17.17 South Korea

Table 17-30
Label

Description This label is required to import the device into South Korea.
17.18 Turkey
Table 17-31
Label

Description This label is required to import the device into Turkey.
17-13
17-14
Appendix A: Dose rates

The dose rates in the following tables represent typical AKR dose rates for systems at the AKR
dose rate reference point (item A on Figure A-1) when imaging a 30 cm x 30 cm x 20 cm thick
PMMA abdomen phantom (item B on Figure A-1) in automatic imaging mode using the
following setup (see Figure A-1: C-Arm setup for gathering dose rates):
l Vertical C-Arm orientation
l General imaging profile (Unless otherwise specified)
l Auto technique enabled
Note: 4PPS applies to standard and low dose Fluoro and HLF modes, but does not apply to
Roadmap or Subtract modes.
Note: Actual AKR dose rates were measured at a distance greater than 20 cm above the
PMMA abdomen phantom and adjusted to the dose rate at 30 cm from the detector, at
the AKR dose rate reference point (item A on Figure A-1), to minimize the effects of
backscatter from the phantom. Tolerances are referenced in the C-Arm generator
operating parameters section of this manual.
For Digital Spot, the value shown in the AKR row is actually CAK, listed in mGy, not
AKR. For all other modes, AKR is listed in mGy/min.
Figure A-1: C-Arm setup for gathering dose rates
A. AKR dose rate reference point

B. PMMA abdomen phantom
C. 70 cm
D. 30 cm
A-1
Determining your settings

Software version 1.0.XXXX / 1.2.XXXX
l Domestic (A-3) - All countries not listed as International 1 or International 2 use Domestic
values.
l International 1 (A-6) - Belgium, Italy, Spain, UK (low dose)
l International 2 (A-9) - Australia, Austria, Germany
Software version 2.X.X.XXXX / 3.1.X.XXXX

l Domestic (A-12) - All countries not listed as International 1 through 6 use Domestic
values.
l International 1 (A-25) - Belgium, Italy, Portugal, and Spain
l International 2 (A-33) - Australia
l International 3 (A-43) - Denmark
l International 4 (A-53) - Japan
l International 5 (A-65) - Any country may select this for reduced dose. However, image
quality will be adversely affected.
l International 6 (A-75) - Austria, Germany
A-2
A.1 Dose rates for software versions 1.0.XXXX /

1.2.XXXX
For software versions 1.0.XXXX and 1.2.XXXX, dose rates are provided for Domestic,
International 1, and International 2 values.
Domestic
All countries not listed as International 1 or International 2 use Domestic values.
Table A-1: 21 cm with grid

Imaging Mode Standard Fluoro Fluoro (Low Dose) HLF HLF (Low Dose)
Norm Mag1 Mag2 Norm Mag1 Mag2 Norm Mag1 Mag2 Norm Mag1 Mag2
kV 78 82 86 78 81 86 77 82 88 82 84 86
Continuous mA 2.9 4.5 6.0 1.1 2.1 2.8 5.5 9.5 15 1.5 3.3 6.7
AKR* 9.81 17.26 25.86 3.72 7.83 12.07 18.04 36.44 68.17 5.71 13.39 28.88
kV 80 84 91 79 83 89 82 90 107 87 90 91
8 PPs mA 3.5 5.5 6.9 1.1 2.2 2.8 25 37 39 9.2 13 20
AKR* 2.52 4.46 6.77 0.77 1.74 2.61 19.05 35.22 54.98 8.05 12.38 19.63
* AKR is mGy/min
Table A-2: 21 cm without grid

kV 66 71 73 66 70 73 64 70 74 69 73 74
Continuous mA 1.9 3.1 4.9 0.66 1.5 2.3 3.5 6.6 11 1.0 2.3 4.9
AKR* 4.24 8.40 14.29 1.47 3.92 6.71 7.22 17.25 33.17 2.50 6.67 14.78
kV 68 72 76 66 71 75 68 76 84 73 77 78
8 PPs mA 2.3 3.8 6.1 0.67 1.5 2.4 16 25 40 6.3 10 15
AKR* 1.11 2.13 3.93 0.30 0.81 0.93 7.72 16.00 32.64 3.63 6.61 10.28
* AKR is mGy/min

kV 78 81 82 79 81 82 77 80 84 79 81 80
Continuous mA 2.1 3.2 4.6 0.94 1.5 2.2 4.0 6.3 10 1.4 3.0 6.0
AKR* 7.09 11.49 16.14 3.27 5.56 7.72 13.09 22.67 37.26 4.88 11.12 19.79
kV 79 83 84 79 82 83 80 84 92 83 84 83
8 PPs mA 2.5 3.8 5.7 0.95 1.5 2.3 18 27 38 8.4 12 17
AKR* 1.74 2.99 4.25 0.66 1.15 1.66 12.93 21.82 35.32 6.59 9.70 12.30
* AKR is mGy/min
A-3

kV 65 69 70 66 69 71 63 68 72 67 69 69
Continuous mA 1.3 2.2 3.2 0.59 1.0 1.5 2.5 4.2 7.1 0.90 2.0 4.0
AKR* 2.76 5.49 7.42 1.31 2.49 3.62 4.89 10.08 17.78 2.07 4.99 8.92
kV 66 70 72 66 70 72 66 71 77 69 72 71
8 PPs mA 1.6 2.6 3.9 0.58 1.1 1.6 11 18 26 5.2 8.4 12
AKR* 0.71 1.35 1.95 0.26 0.57 0.80 4.87 9.66 15.55 2.58 4.67 5.79
* AKR is mGy/min
Table A-5: 9 in with grid

kV 78 83 90 78 83 89 77 83 91 82 86 88
Continuous mA 2.8 4.7 6.2 1.0 1.5 1.9 5.4 9.9 16 1.5 3.4 6.9
AKR* 9.14 18.11 29.08 3.27 5.78 8.67 17.07 38.14 77.07 5.55 14.29 28.42
kV 80 86 95 79 85 93 81 92 111 86 90 92
8 PPs mA 3.6 5.8 7.0 1.1 1.6 1.9 24 37 38 9.0 14 20
AKR* 2.51 4.87 7.48 0.74 1.31 1.93 17.23 36.57 58.44 7.49 13.13 19.78
* AKR is mGy/min
Table A-6: 9 in without grid

kV 66 71 74 66 71 74 64 71 75 70 73 75
Continuous mA 2.0 3.3 5.1 0.7 1.1 1.5 3.6 6.7 12 1.0 2.4 5.1
AKR* 4.22 5.71 14.69 1.48 2.85 4.32 6.98 17.39 35.79 2.47 6.69 15.21
kV 68 73 76 67 72 76 68 76 84 73 77 79
8 PPs mA 2.4 4.1 6.3 0.72 1.1 1.6 16 25 40 6.3 10 15
AKR* 1.10 2.29 3.89 0.32 0.59 0.99 7.32 15.46 31.71 3.47 6.39 10.21
* AKR is mGy/min

kV 76 80 83 75 80 83 76 80 86 78 80 81
Continuous mA 2.1 3.2 4.8 0.89 1.2 1.6 3.9 6.2 11 1.4 3.0 6.1
AKR* 6.74 10.88 17.79 2.77 4.08 5.93 12.52 21.08 44.52 4.78 10.20 21.28
kV 77 82 87 76 81 85 79 83 94 81 84 85
8 PPs mA 2.6 4.0 5.8 0.92 1.3 1.7 17 27 38 8.1 12 18
AKR* 1.72 2.89 4.83 0.59 0.91 1.34 11.95 20.11 38.19 6.04 9.21 14.16
* AKR is mGy/min
A-4

kV 64 67 70 64 67 70 62 67 73 65 68 69
Continuous mA 1.2 2.1 3.4 0.47 0.76 1.1 2.4 4.1 7.2 0.81 1.9 4.1
AKR* 2.50 4.52 8.18 0.98 1.64 2.64 4.60 8.83 19.30 1.76 4.26 9.49
kV 66 69 72 64 68 72 65 70 78 68 71 72
8 PPs mA 1.5 2.6 4.1 0.48 0.80 1.2 11 18 26 5.0 8.2 12
AKR* 0.68 1.21 2.12 0.20 0.36 0.62 4.78 8.70 16.50 2.44 4.12 6.21
* AKR is mGy/min
A-5
International 1
Belgium, Italy, Spain, UK (low dose)

kV 78 81 85 78 81 85 76 79 83 78 80 78
Continuous mA 1.5 2.5 3.8 0.72 1.1 1.8 3.9 6.1 9.8 1.4 2.9 5.7
AKR* 5.07 9.32 15.94 2.44 4.10 7.55 12.39 21.42 38.88 4.74 10.49 19.52
kV 79 83 87 78 82 86 79 83 88 81 83 81
8 PPs mA 1.9 3.0 4.7 0.73 1.2 1.9 17 26 37 8.1 12 16
AKR* 1.33 2.37 4.16 0.49 0.92 1.64 11.86 20.52 33.63 6.00 9.47 11.99
* AKR is mGy/min

kV 65 70 74 65 70 73 66 73 80 60 73 74
Continuous mA 0.91 1.6 2.6 0.42 0.72 1.2 1.8 3.0 4.7 1.0 2.3 4.9
AKR* 1.95 4.18 7.84 0.90 1.88 3.50 4.02 8.70 17.10 1.73 6.67 14.78
kV 66 72 75 65 70 74 70 77 85 73 77 78
8 PPs mA 1.1 1.9 3.2 0.42 0.74 1.2 8.8 15 22 6.3 10 15
AKR* 0.49 1.07 1.99 0.18 0.39 0.72 4.57 9.91 18.46 3.63 6.61 10.28
* AKR is mGy/min

kV 75 77 79 75 78 80 75 82 87 80 81 80
Continuous mA 1.4 2.1 3.2 0.69 1.0 1.5 2.2 3.9 5.7 1.2 3.0 5.9
AKR* 4.29 6.89 10.22 2.12 3.39 4.95 6.75 14.89 23.15 4.31 11.12 19.46
kV 76 79 81 77 79 81 78 85 91 82 84 83
8 PPs mA 1.7 2.6 3.9 0.7 1.1 1.6 8.4 16 24 5.6 12 17
AKR* 1.08 1.82 2.65 0.46 0.77 1.09 5.67 13.30 21.73 4.27 9.70 12.30
* AKR is mGy/min
A-6

kV 64 66 68 64 66 68 63 69 74 67 69 69
Continuous mA 0.84 1.3 2.0 0.41 0.64 0.97 1.1 2.2 3.7 0.74 2.0 4.0
AKR* 1.71 2.89 4.28 0.84 1.42 2.08 2.15 5.49 9.97 1.70 4.99 8.92
kV 64 67 70 65 67 60 65 72 77 68 72 72
8 PPs mA 0.97 1.6 2.5 0.41 0.65 1.0 4.4 9.4 16 3.3 8.5 12
AKR* 0.40 0.74 1.16 0.17 0.30 0.29 1.87 5.22 9.57 1.58 4.72 6.01
* AKR is mGy/min

kV 77 83 87 77 83 87 78 87 98 82 86 88
Continuous mA 1.5 2.6 4.0 0.71 1.2 1.9 3.1 4.9 6.9 1.5 3.4 6.9
AKR* 4.74 10.02 17.28 2.24 4.62 8.21 10.12 21.17 39.67 5.55 14.29 30.64
kV 79 86 90 78 84 90 81 92 105 86 91 92
8 PPs mA 1.9 3.2 4.9 0.74 1.3 2.0 13 22 29 9.0 14 20
AKR* 1.28 2.69 4.60 0.48 1.03 1.88 9.33 21.75 39.21 7.49 13.48 19.78
* AKR is mGy/min

kV 66 71 74 66 71 74 66 74 82 70 74 75
Continuous mA 0.93 1.6 2.6 0.43 0.76 1.2 1.9 3.2 5.0 1.0 2.4 5.1
AKR* 1.96 4.15 7.49 0.91 1.97 3.46 4.01 9.24 18.67 2.47 6.93 15.21
kV 67 73 76 66 72 76 70 77 86 74 77 78
8 PPs mA 1.1 2.0 3.3 0.43 0.8 1.3 7.9 14 21 6.4 10 15
AKR* 0.48 1.12 2.04 0.18 0.43 0.80 3.90 8.95 17.64 3.66 6.39 9.88
* AKR is mGy/min

kV 74 77 80 74 77 80 74 81 88 78 80 81
Continuous mA 1.3 2.1 3.3 0.61 1.0 1.6 2.3 3.4 5.2 1.4 3.0 4.8
AKR* 3.91 6.49 11.16 1.84 3.09 5.41 6.93 6.80 22.26 4.78 10.20 16.75
kV 75 79 83 74 79 82 77 84 93 81 84 84
8 PPs mA 1.6 2.7 4.2 0.63 1.1 1.7 10 15 22 6.5 12 17
AKR* 1.00 1.78 3.11 0.38 0.73 1.22 6.62 11.51 21.54 4.84 9.21 12.98
* AKR is mGy/min
A-7

kV 62 65 69 61 65 69 62 68 74 65 68 70
Continuous mA 0.76 1.3 2.1 0.35 0.59 0.96 1.1 1.9 2.8 0.81 1.9 3.5
AKR* 1.46 2.58 4.86 0.64 1.17 2.22 2.11 4.26 7.77 1.76 4.26 8.42
kV 63 67 70 61 66 70 64 71 77 68 71 72
8 PPs mA 0.91 1.6 2.5 0.34 0.61 1.0 5.0 8.4 13 4.0 8.2 12
AKR* 0.36 0.69 1.20 0.12 0.25 0.48 2.09 4.22 7.99 0.13 0.25 0.48
* AKR is mGy/min
A-8
International 2
Australia, Austria, Germany

kV 78 81 85 78 81 85 77 82 88 82 84 86
Continuous mA 1.5 2.5 3.8 0.72 1.1 1.8 5.5 9.5 15 1.5 3.2 6.7
AKR* 5.07 9.32 15.94 2.44 4.10 7.55 18.04 36.44 68.17 5.71 13.39 28.88
kV 79 83 87 78 82 86 82 90 108 87 88 91
8 PPs mA 1.9 3.0 4.7 0.73 1.2 1.9 25 37 39 9.2 13 20
AKR* 1.33 2.37 4.16 0.49 0.92 1.64 19.05 35.22 54.98 8.05 12.38 19.63
* AKR is mGy/min

kV 66 70 74 65 70 73 64 70 74 69 73 74
Continuous mA 0.91 1.6 2.5 0.42 0.72 1.2 3.6 6.6 11 1.0 2.3 4.9
AKR* 1.95 4.18 7.84 0.90 1.88 3.50 7.22 17.25 33.17 2.50 6.67 14.78
kV 67 71 75 65 70 74 68 76 84 73 77 78
8 PPs mA 1.1 1.9 3.2 0.42 0.74 1.2 16 25 40 6.3 10 15
AKR* 0.49 1.07 1.99 0.18 0.39 0.72 7.72 16.00 32.64 3.63 6.61 10.28
* AKR is mGy/min

kV 75 77 79 75 78 80 77 80 84 79 81 80
Continuous mA 1.4 2.1 3.2 0.69 1.0 1.5 4.0 6.3 10 1.4 3.0 6.0
AKR* 4.29 6.89 10.22 2.12 3.39 4.95 13.09 22.67 37.26 4.88 11.12 19.79
kV 76 79 81 77 79 81 80 84 92 82 84 83
8 PPs mA 1.7 2.6 3.9 0.69 1.0 1.6 18 27 38 8.3 12 17
AKR* 1.08 1.82 2.65 0.46 0.77 1.09 12.93 21.82 35.32 6.59 9.70 12.30
* AKR is mGy/min
A-9

kV 64 66 68 64 66 68 63 68 73 67 69 69
Continuous mA 0.84 1.3 2.0 0.41 0.64 0.97 2.5 4.3 7.2 0.90 2.0 4.1
AKR* 1.71 2.89 4.28 0.84 1.42 2.08 4.89 10.08 17.78 2.07 4.99 8.92
kV 64 67 70 65 67 69 65 71 76 69 72 72
8 PPs mA 0.97 1.6 2.5 0.41 0.65 1.00 11 18 26 5.2 8.5 12
AKR* 0.40 0.74 1.16 0.17 0.30 0.29 4.87 9.66 15.55 2.58 4.67 5.79
* AKR is mGy/min

kV 77 83 87 77 83 87 77 83 91 82 86 88
Continuous mA 1.5 2.6 4.0 0.71 1.2 1.9 5.4 9.9 16 1.5 3.4 6.9
AKR* 4.74 10.02 17.28 2.24 4.62 8.21 17.07 38.14 77.07 5.55 14.29 28.42
kV 79 85 91 78 85 90 80 91 111 86 91 92
8 PPs mA 1.9 3.1 4.9 0.73 1.3 2.0 24 37 38 9.0 14 20
AKR* 1.28 2.69 4.60 0.48 1.03 1.88 17.23 36.57 58.44 7.49 13.13 19.78
* AKR is mGy/min

kV 66 71 75 66 71 75 65 71 75 70 74 75
Continuous mA 0.94 1.6 2.7 0.44 0.77 1.3 3.6 6.8 12 1.0 2.4 5.1
AKR* 1.98 4.15 8.05 0.93 2.00 3.88 7.28 17.64 35.79 2.47 6.93 15.21
kV 67 73 77 66 72 76 67 77 85 74 77 79
8 PPs mA 1.1 2.0 3.3 0.44 0.79 1.3 16 25 40 6.4 10 15
AKR* 0.48 1.12 2.10 0.19 0.43 0.80 7.03 15.98 32.64 3.66 6.39 10.21
* AKR is mGy/min

kV 74 77 80 74 77 81 76 80 86 78 80 81
Continuous mA 1.3 2.2 3.4 0.61 1.0 1.6 3.9 6.2 11 1.4 3.0 6.1
AKR* 3.91 6.80 11.50 1.84 3.09 5.58 12.52 21.08 44.52 4.78 10.20 21.28
kV 75 79 83 74 79 82 79 83 94 82 84 85
8 PPs mA 1.6 2.7 4.2 0.62 1.1 1.7 17 27 38 8.1 12 18
AKR* 1.00 1.78 3.11 0.37 0.73 1.22 11.95 20.11 38.19 6.21 9.21 14.16
* AKR is mGy/min
A-10

kV 62 65 69 61 65 69 62 67 73 65 68 70
Continuous mA 0.76 1.3 2.1 0.35 0.59 0.96 2.4 4.1 7.2 0.81 1.9 4.1
AKR* 1.46 2.58 4.86 0.64 1.17 2.22 4.60 8.83 19.30 1.76 4.26 9.86
kV 63 67 70 61 66 70 65 70 78 68 71 71
8 PPs mA 0.91 1.6 2.5 0.35 0.61 1.0 11 18 26 5.0 8.2 12
AKR* 0.36 0.69 1.20 0.13 0.25 0.48 4.78 8.70 16.50 2.44 4.12 5.99
* AKR is mGy/min
A-11
A.2 Dose rates for software versions 2.X.X.XXXX /

3.1.X.XXXX
For software version 2.X.X.XXXX / 3.1.X.XXXX, dose rates are provided for Domestic and
International 1 - International 6 values.
Domestic
All countries not listed as International 1 through 6 use Domestic values.
A-12
21cm with grid - Domestic
Standard Fluoro / Low DoseFluoro /
HLF Low Dose HLF Digital Spot
Imaging Mode Roadmap Roadmap
Norm Mag1 Mag2 Norm Mag1 Mag2 Norm Mag1 Mag2 Norm Mag1 Mag2 Norm Mag1 Mag2
Continuous kV 79.00 81.00 82.00 79.00 81.00 82.00 77.00 81.00 83.00 77.00 81.00 84.00 79.00 81.00 83.00
(General Pro- mA 3.20 4.70 6.30 1.40 2.10 2.80 5.50 9.10 14.00 2.70 4.50 7.10 29.00 50.00 48.00
file) AKR* 11.00 17.20 24.20 4.84 7.59 10.80 18.00 33.50 56.30 8.98 16.60 28.50 0.20 0.47 0.79
Continuous kV 79.00 81.00 83.00
(Spine Pro- mA Same as above 28.00 49.00 48.00
file) AKR* 0.50 1.04 1.76
kV 78.00 79.00 81.00 77.00 79.00 80.00 78.00 84.00 91.00 77.00 84.00 91.00
4 PPS mA 8.60 13.00 18.00 1.70 2.40 3.40 22.00 31.00 40.00 11.00 15.00 20.00
AKR* 4.01 6.10 8.81 0.86 1.26 1.80 10.10 17.00 26.60 5.04 8.45 13.30
kV 77.00 79.00 80.00 77.00 79.00 80.00 79.00 85.00 94.00 79.00 85.00 93.00
8 PPS mA 8.50 12.00 18.00 3.40 5.10 7.20 23.00 32.00 40.00 11.00 16.00 20.00
AKR* 6.75 10.20 14.90 2.81 4.30 6.25 18.60 31.80 48.80 9.32 15.70 24.40
kV 77.00 79.00 80.00 76.00 79.00 80.00 83.00 90.00 103.00 82.00 90.00 102.00
15 PPS mA 8.60 12.00 17.00 3.40 5.10 7.20 26.00 37.00 40.00 13.00 18.00 20.00
AKR* 8.71 12.80 18.50 3.62 5.55 8.05 29.60 51.70 75.30 14.90 25.70 38.30
Low Dose Digital
Subtract Subtract Low Dose Digital Cine Pulse
Imaging Mode Cine Pulse
kV 72.00 79.00 88.00 72.00 77.00 86.00
Continuous mA 21.00 23.00 21.00 13.00 17.00 17.00
AKR 59.40 79.30 95.80 37.80 55.80 74.20
N/A
kV 74.00 80.00 90.00 74.00 79.00 89.00
8 PPS mA 21.00 23.00 21.00 15.00 17.00 17.00
AKR 14.30 19.40 23.60 10.00 14.30 18.50
N/A
kV 79.00 86.00 96.00 77.00 84.00 96.00 74.00 81.00 93.00 77.00 78.00 77.00
15 PPS mA 20.00 22.00 20.00 17.00 17.00 16.00 113.00 149.00 126.00 39.00 57.00 71.00
AKR 20.10 27.70 33.80 16.10 21.20 27.00 40.60 67.70 78.30 15.90 23.40 28.70
kV 74.00 82.00 93.00 78.00 78.00 77.00
30 PPS mA N/A 115.00 149.00 126.00 39.00 57.00 72.00
AKR 83.50 136.00 158.00 32.30 47.10 57.80
Subtract CO2 Low Roadmap CO2 Low
Subtract CO2 Roadmap CO2
Imaging Mode Dose Dose
kV 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00
Continuous mA 8.70 14.00 17.00 6.20 11.00 13.00 2.20 3.50 4.90 1.50 2.30 3.20
AKR* 41.60 65.00 80.40 29.70 49.80 64.00 10.50 16.70 23.40 7.00 11.10 15.40
kV 96.00 95.00 95.00 96.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 94.00 94.00 95.00
8 PPS mA 9.30 14.00 18.00 6.60 11.00 14.00 6.20 9.80 14.00 3.70 6.00 8.50
AKR* 11.00 16.40 20.10 8.03 12.70 16.10 7.36 11.20 15.60 4.66 7.16 9.91
kV 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 95.00
15 PPS mA 14.00 23.00 28.00 10.00 17.00 22.00 6.20 9.60 14.00 3.70 6.00 8.50
AKR* 21.00 32.30 39.40 15.10 24.80 31.50 9.47 14.00 19.50 6.08 9.23 12.70
* AKR is mGy/min
A-13
21cm with grid (Cardiac profile) - Domestic (2020-09-09)
Standard Fluoro / Low Dose Fluoro /
kV 79.00 81.00 82.00 79.00 81.00 82.00 77.00 81.00 83.00 77.00 81.00 83.00 79.00 81.00 83.00
Continuous mA 4.30 5.90 6.70 1.40 2.10 2.80 5.40 9.10 14.00 2.70 4.50 7.10 29.00 50.00 48.00
AKR 14.60 21.80 25.70 4.89 7.54 10.80 17.90 33.30 56.40 8.87 16.50 28.00 0.20 0.47 0.79
kV 77.00 79.00 81.00 77.00 79.00 81.00 78.00 84.00 91.00 77.00 84.00 91.00
4 PPS mA 12.00 16.00 19.00 3.50 5.20 7.30 22.00 31.00 40.00 11.00 15.00 20.00
AKR 5.26 7.82 9.29 1.70 2.60 3.77 10.10 16.80 26.50 5.03 8.44 13.30
kV 77.00 79.00 80.00 77.00 79.00 80.00 79.00 85.00 94.00 79.00 85.00 93.00
8 PPS mA 11.00 16.00 18.00 3.40 5.10 7.20 23.00 32.00 40.00 11.00 16.00 20.00 N/A
AKR 8.85 13.10 15.70 2.83 4.31 6.26 18.50 31.70 48.80 9.31 15.70 24.40
kV 77.00 79.00 80.00 76.00 79.00 80.00 83.00 90.00 103.00 82.00 90.00 102.00
15 PPS mA 11.00 16.00 18.00 3.40 5.10 7.20 26.00 37.00 40.00 13.00 18.00 20.00
AKR 11.10 16.50 19.70 3.61 5.56 8.02 29.70 51.60 76.00 14.90 25.70 38.20
Low Dose Digital
kV 72.00 79.00 88.00 73.00 78.00 87.00
Continuous mA 21.00 23.00 21.00 14.00 17.00 17.00
AKR 59.80 79.70 96.60 39.80 57.30 75.30
N/A
kV 74.00 81.00 90.00 73.00 79.00 89.00
8 PPS mA 21.00 23.00 21.00 15.00 17.00 17.00 N/A
AKR 14.20 19.50 23.50 9.96 14.40 18.40
kV 79.00 86.00 97.00 77.00 85.00 96.00 74.00 81.00 93.00 77.00 78.00 77.00
15 PPS mA 20.00 22.00 20.00 17.00 17.00 16.00 113.00 149.00 126.00 39.00 57.00 71.00
AKR 20.10 28.00 34.00 16.30 21.30 27.10 40.60 67.10 78.40 15.90 23.30 28.70
kV 74.00 82.00 93.00 78.00 78.00 77.00
30 PPS mA N/A 115.00 149.00 126.00 39.00 57.00 72.00
AKR 83.60 136.00 158.00 32.40 47.10 57.80
* AKR is mGy/min
A-14
21cm without grid - Domestic
Continuous kV 67.00 70.00 72.00 67.00 70.00 72.00 64.00 69.00 72.00 64.00 69.00 72.00 68.00 72.00 73.00
(General Pro- mA 2.10 3.40 5.00 0.94 1.50 2.20 3.50 6.40 11.00 1.80 3.20 5.30 17.00 36.00 55.00
file) AKR* 4.81 8.70 13.80 2.14 3.85 6.13 7.26 16.10 29.70 3.65 7.94 14.90 0.09 0.20 0.41
kV 68.00 72.00 73.00
Continuous
mA Same as above 18.00 36.00 54.00
(Spine Profile)
AKR* 0.21 0.49 1.04
kV 66.00 69.00 71.00 65.00 69.00 70.00 65.00 72.00
76.00 65.00 72.00 76.00
4 PPS mA 5.70 9.10 14.00 1.10 1.70 2.60 14.00 22.00
35.00 7.20 11.00 18.00
AKR* 1.72 3.13 4.90 0.37 0.65 1.00 4.05 8.18
15.20 2.07 4.06 7.62
kV 65.00 69.00 70.00 65.00 69.00 70.00 66.00 73.00
77.00 66.00 73.00 77.00
8 PPS mA 5.70 9.00 13.00 2.30 3.60 5.50 15.00 23.00
37.00 7.40 11.00 18.00
AKR* 2.90 5.28 8.23 1.22 2.18 3.47 7.49 15.10
28.20 3.85 7.50 14.10
kV 65.00 69.00 70.00 65.00 68.00 70.00 69.00 77.00
82.00 69.00 76.00 82.00
15 PPS mA 5.70 9.20 13.00 2.20 3.60 5.50 17.00 25.00
40.00 8.50 12.00 20.00
AKR* 3.72 6.83 10.30 1.55 2.76 4.45 12.00 24.10
44.20 6.39 12.00 22.20
Low Dose Digital
kV 63.00 68.00 74.00 63.00 67.00 72.00
Continuous mA 10.00 19.00 21.00 4.90 11.00 17.00
AKR* 20.20 45.30 61.90 9.69 24.50 47.80
N/A
kV 64.00 69.00 76.00 64.00 68.00 74.00
8 PPS mA 12.00 20.00 21.00 5.80 12.00 18.00
AKR* 5.84 11.40 15.60 2.80 6.65 12.20
N/A
kV 65.00 72.00 81.00 66.00 71.00 79.00 64.00 70.00 75.00 67.00 69.00 70.00
15 PPS mA 17.00 21.00 22.00 8.20 14.00 18.00 59.00 103.00 109.00 24.00 39.00 51.00
AKR* 10.30 17.40 23.50 5.46 11.00 18.20 14.30 31.80 39.90 6.94 11.90 15.70
kV 64.00 70.00 75.00 68.00 69.00 70.00
30 PPS mA N/A 60.00 104.00 109.00 24.00 39.00 51.00
AKR* 28.90 64.40 80.80 14.10 24.10 31.70
Subtract CO2 Low Roadmap CO2
Imaging Mode Dose Low Dose
kV 84.00 86.00 87.00 84.00 86.00 87.00 84.00 85.00 87.00 84.00 86.00 87.00
Continuous mA 4.30 8.90 12.00 3.00 6.70 9.60 1.30 2.20 3.40 0.85 1.40 2.30
AKR* 15.50 33.90 47.50 10.60 25.20 38.10 4.57 8.11 13.40 3.03 5.42 8.88
kV 85.00 87.00 89.00 84.00 87.00 88.00 83.00 85.00 87.00 83.00 85.00 87.00
8 PPS mA 4.60 9.30 13.00 3.10 7.00 10.00 3.50 6.00 9.50 2.10 3.70 5.90
AKR* 4.29 8.81 12.50 3.03 6.75 10.00 3.22 5.61 9.08 2.09 3.53 5.74
kV 84.00 86.00 88.00 84.00 86.00 88.00 83.00 85.00 87.00 82.00 85.00 87.00
15 PPS mA 7.30 14.00 20.00 4.90 11.00 16.00 3.50 6.00 9.30 2.10 3.60 5.80
AKR* 8.39 16.60 23.90 5.74 12.60 19.10 4.16 7.17 11.30 2.75 4.57 7.34
* AKR is mGy/min
A-15
21cm Cardiac without grid - Domestic (2020-09-09)
kV 67.00 70.00 72.00 67.00 70.00 72.00 64.00 69.00 72.00 64.00 69.00 72.00 68.00 72.00 73.00
Continuous mA 2.60 4.50 5.30 0.95 1.50 2.20 3.50 6.30 11.00 1.80 3.20 5.30 17.00 36.00 55.00
AKR 5.92 11.80 14.60 2.16 3.88 6.14 7.21 16.00 29.60 3.62 7.88 14.80 0.09 0.20 0.41
kV 66.00 69.00 71.00 65.00 69.00 71.00 65.00 72.00 76.00 65.00 72.00 76.00
4 PPS mA 7.10 12.00 14.00 2.40 3.70 5.70 14.00 22.00 35.00 7.20 11.00 18.00
AKR 2.11 4.15 5.17 0.73 1.30 2.09 4.03 8.18 15.30 2.07 4.08 7.67
kV 65.00 69.00 70.00 65.00 68.00 70.00 66.00 73.00 77.00 66.00 73.00 77.00
8 PPS mA 7.00 12.00 14.00 2.30 3.60 5.50 15.00 23.00 37.00 7.40 11.00 18.00 N/A
AKR 3.56 6.96 8.67 1.22 2.18 3.50 7.45 15.10 28.20 3.85 7.52 14.10
kV 65.00 69.00 70.00 65.00 68.00 70.00 69.00 77.00 82.00 69.00 76.00 82.00
15 PPS mA 7.10 12.00 14.00 2.20 3.60 5.50 17.00 25.00 40.00 8.50 12.00 20.00
AKR 4.59 8.71 10.80 1.55 2.76 4.46 12.00 24.30 44.20 6.40 12.00 22.20
Low Dose Digital
kV 64.00 68.00 74.00 64.00 67.00 73.00
Continuous mA 11.00 19.00 21.00 5.50 11.00 17.00
AKR 22.00 46.20 63.10 11.10 26.20 48.90
N/A
kV 64.00 69.00 76.00 64.00 68.00 74.00
8 PPS mA 12.00 20.00 21.00 5.80 12.00 18.00 N/A
AKR 5.74 11.50 15.70 2.82 6.73 12.30
kV 65.00 72.00 81.00 66.00 71.00 79.00 64.00 70.00 75.00 67.00 69.00 69.00
15 PPS mA 17.00 21.00 22.00 8.40 14.00 18.00 59.00 103.00 109.00 24.00 39.00 51.00
AKR 10.40 17.60 23.60 5.63 11.30 18.30 14.10 31.80 39.80 6.90 11.90 15.70
kV 64.00 70.00 75.00 68.00 69.00 70.00
30 PPS mA N/A 59.00 105.00 109.00 24.00 39.00 51.00
AKR 28.80 64.90 80.60 14.00 24.20 31.80
* AKR is mGy/min
A-16
31cm with grid - Domestic
Continuous kV 77.00 80.00 80.00 76.00 79.00 79.00 76.00 79.00 83.00 76.00 79.00 82.00 79.00 82.00 82.00
(General Pro- mA 2.10 3.40 4.80 0.90 1.50 2.10 3.90 6.10 9.80 1.90 3.00 4.90 21.00 41.00 49.00
file) AKR* 6.76 12.00 17.40 2.88 5.12 7.44 12.50 21.50 38.70 6.06 10.70 19.10 0.18 0.38 0.68
kV 79.00 81.00 82.00
Continuous
mA Same as above 21.00 41.00 49.00
(Spine Profile)
AKR* 0.45 0.92 1.67
kV 79.00 81.00 82.00 77.00 80.00 81.00 77.00 81.00 86.00
77.00 81.00 86.00
4 PPS mA 6.20 9.90 14.00 1.20 1.90 2.70 16.00 25.00 35.00
8.10 12.00 17.00
AKR* 3.02 5.20 7.43 0.65 1.08 1.51 7.42 12.50 20.70
3.76 6.22 10.30
kV 78.00 81.00 81.00 77.00 80.00 81.00 79.00 82.00 88.00
79.00 82.00 88.00
8 PPS mA 6.10 9.80 14.00 2.40 3.90 5.70 17.00 26.00 36.00
8.40 13.00 18.00
AKR* 5.09 8.70 12.50 2.14 3.65 5.19 13.80 23.40 39.00
6.99 11.50 19.30
kV 78.00 81.00 81.00 77.00 80.00 81.00 83.00 86.00 94.00
83.00 86.00 94.00
15 PPS mA 6.10 9.70 14.00 2.40 3.90 5.70 19.00 29.00 38.00
9.70 14.00 19.00
AKR* 6.58 11.00 15.60 2.79 4.70 6.73 22.30 37.80 61.10
11.90 18.80 30.70
Low Dose Digital
kV 67.00 70.00 73.00 67.00 70.00 70.00
Continuous mA 13.00 20.00 17.00 7.40 12.00 17.00
AKR* 29.60 50.90 48.10 16.60 28.90 43.10
N/A
kV 68.00 71.00 74.00 68.00 70.00 72.00
8 PPS mA 14.00 21.00 17.00 7.90 12.00 17.00
AKR* 7.78 12.70 12.30 4.43 7.47 10.90
N/A
kV 71.00 74.00 79.00 70.00 73.00 76.00 74.00 77.00 85.00 75.00 76.00 75.00
15 PPS mA 17.00 22.00 18.00 9.10 14.00 18.00 74.00 131.00 150.00 31.00 53.00 73.00
AKR* 12.80 18.90 19.40 7.06 12.10 16.90 26.30 52.80 77.70 12.00 21.00 27.30
kV 74.00 78.00 86.00 75.00 76.00 75.00
30 PPS mA N/A 75.00 132.00 150.00 32.00 54.00 74.00
AKR* 54.10 108.00 158.00 24.40 42.40 55.40
kV 95.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00
Continuous mA 6.50 8.90 11.00 4.60 6.80 8.40 1.40 2.50 3.70 0.93 1.70 2.40
AKR* 35.50 48.10 56.90 24.90 36.50 45.20 7.71 13.60 19.70 5.03 8.97 13.20
kV 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00
8 PPS mA 6.90 9.40 11.00 4.70 7.10 8.80 3.90 7.10 10.00 2.40 4.30 6.30
AKR* 9.37 12.50 14.40 6.59 9.64 11.80 5.40 9.39 13.20 3.49 5.84 8.36
kV 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 93.00 94.00 94.00
15 PPS mA 11.00 15.00 17.00 7.80 11.00 14.00 3.90 7.10 10.00 2.30 4.20 6.30
AKR* 17.70 23.90 28.00 13.30 18.20 22.40 6.99 12.00 16.50 4.60 7.53 10.80
* AKR is mGy/min
A-17
31cm Cardiac with grid - Domestic (2020-09-09)
kV 79.00 81.00 83.00 78.00 82.00 83.00 77.00 81.00 85.00 77.00 81.00 85.00 79.00 82.00 82.00
Continuous mA 2.90 4.50 5.60 0.97 1.60 2.30 4.10 6.50 11.00 2.00 3.20 5.40 21.00 41.00 49.00
AKR 9.93 17.00 21.90 3.31 5.98 9.13 13.50 24.20 45.70 6.75 11.90 23.00 0.18 0.38 0.68
kV 79.00 82.00 83.00 78.00 81.00 83.00 79.00 83.00 91.00 79.00 83.00 90.00
4 PPS mA 8.20 13.00 16.00 2.50 4.20 6.20 17.00 27.00 38.00 8.60 13.00 19.00
AKR 3.92 6.59 8.59 1.29 2.25 3.43 8.23 14.20 25.10 4.22 7.14 12.50
kV 78.00 81.00 83.00 77.00 81.00 83.00 80.00 84.00 93.00 81.00 84.00 93.00
8 PPS mA 8.10 13.00 16.00 2.50 4.00 6.00 18.00 28.00 38.00 8.90 14.00 19.00 N/A
AKR 6.66 11.30 14.50 2.15 3.76 5.75 15.30 26.70 46.10 7.85 13.30 23.10
kV 78.00 81.00 82.00 77.00 80.00 82.00 85.00 89.00 102.00 84.00 89.00 101.00
15 PPS mA 8.10 12.00 16.00 2.40 4.00 6.00 20.00 32.00 38.00 10.00 16.00 19.00
AKR 8.54 13.90 18.10 2.77 4.75 7.31 24.90 43.70 72.10 12.40 21.70 36.20
Low Dose Digital
kV 68.00 71.00 76.00 68.00 71.00 73.00
Continuous mA 14.00 21.00 18.00 8.10 13.00 17.00
AKR 34.20 54.90 56.10 19.20 33.30 49.70
N/A
kV 69.00 72.00 78.00 69.00 72.00 75.00
8 PPS mA 16.00 22.00 18.00 8.70 13.00 18.00 N/A
AKR 8.98 13.70 14.40 5.12 8.55 12.70
kV 72.00 75.00 84.00 71.00 75.00 81.00 75.00 80.00 92.00 76.00 77.00 77.00
15 PPS mA 18.00 22.00 19.00 9.80 15.00 18.00 80.00 135.00 150.00 33.00 58.00 82.00
AKR 14.20 20.30 22.60 7.92 13.60 20.00 30.20 59.60 91.50 13.30 23.50 33.00
kV 76.00 81.00 92.00 76.00 78.00 78.00
30 PPS mA N/A 80.00 135.00 150.00 34.00 58.00 82.00
AKR 61.10 120.00 183.00 26.80 47.60 66.70
* AKR is mGy/min
A-18
31cm Cardiac without grid - Domestic (2020-09-09)
kV 65.00 69.00 71.00 65.00 69.00 71.00 63.00 68.00 73.00 63.00 68.00 73.00 66.00 69.00 71.00
Continuous mA 1.80 3.20 3.80 0.62 1.10 1.60 2.50 4.30 7.20 1.30 2.10 3.60 13.00 26.00 47.00
AKR 3.69 7.69 9.91 1.31 2.55 4.14 4.91 10.30 20.30 2.46 5.11 10.20 0.07 0.16 0.31
kV 65.00 69.00 71.00 64.00 68.00 70.00 65.00 70.00 76.00 65.00 70.00 76.00
4 PPS mA 4.90 9.00 11.00 1.60 2.70 4.10 11.00 18.00 25.00 5.30 8.80 13.00
AKR 1.41 3.03 3.81 0.49 0.95 1.52 3.00 6.10 10.80 1.53 3.10 5.40
kV 65.00 69.00 70.00 64.00 68.00 70.00 66.00 71.00 77.00 66.00 71.00 77.00
8 PPS mA 4.80 8.90 10.00 1.60 2.70 4.00 11.00 18.00 26.00 5.50 9.10 13.00 N/A
AKR 2.40 5.11 6.40 0.83 1.59 2.55 5.53 11.20 19.90 2.84 5.74 9.95
kV 65.00 69.00 70.00 64.00 68.00 70.00 69.00 74.00 81.00 69.00 74.00 81.00
15 PPS mA 4.80 9.00 10.00 1.50 2.60 4.00 12.00 20.00 29.00 6.20 10.00 15.00
AKR 3.05 6.59 8.00 1.07 2.03 3.25 8.79 17.80 32.10 4.66 8.86 16.00
Low Dose Digital
kV 61.00 63.00 65.00 61.00 63.00 64.00
Continuous mA 6.10 10.00 11.00 3.10 6.10 10.00
AKR 10.50 20.10 23.20 5.32 11.80 21.10
N/A
kV 61.00 64.00 66.00 61.00 64.00 65.00
8 PPS mA 6.70 11.00 12.00 3.20 6.80 11.00 N/A
AKR 2.81 5.35 6.18 1.37 3.21 5.56
kV 63.00 65.00 68.00 62.00 66.00 66.00 64.00 68.00 72.00 65.00 67.00 68.00
15 PPS mA 8.20 14.00 15.00 4.10 8.40 14.00 39.00 80.00 130.00 19.00 35.00 53.00
AKR 4.63 9.00 10.20 2.38 5.43 8.92 9.35 22.70 43.70 5.09 10.10 15.00
kV 64.00 68.00 72.00 66.00 68.00 68.00
30 PPS mA N/A 39.00 81.00 130.00 19.00 36.00 53.00
AKR 19.10 45.90 87.60 10.30 20.60 30.40
* AKR is mGy/min
A-19
31cm without grid - Domestic
Continuous kV 64.00 67.00 69.00 63.00 67.00 69.00 62.00 67.00 71.00 62.00 67.00 71.00 66.00 69.00 71.00
(General Pro- mA 1.30 2.30 3.40 0.57 0.98 1.50 2.40 4.10 6.80 1.20 2.00 3.40 13.00 26.00 47.00
file) AKR* 2.57 5.15 8.25 1.09 2.20 3.56 4.44 9.37 18.30 2.17 4.58 9.05 0.07 0.16 0.31
kV 66.00 69.00 71.00
Continuous
mA Same as above 13.00 26.00 46.00
(Spine Profile)
AKR* 0.16 0.39 0.74
kV 65.00 69.00 70.00 64.00 68.00 69.00 64.00 69.00
74.00 63.00 69.00 74.00
4 PPS mA 3.90 6.80 9.90 0.73 1.30 1.90 10.00 17.00
24.00 5.00 8.30 12.00
AKR* 1.14 2.30 3.51 0.24 0.46 0.71 2.68 5.45
9.53 1.34 2.74 4.78
kV 65.00 69.00 70.00 64.00 68.00 70.00 64.00 70.00
75.00 64.00 69.00 75.00
8 PPS mA 3.80 6.70 9.80 1.50 2.60 3.90 10.00 17.00
24.00 5.20 8.50 12.00
AKR* 1.91 3.86 5.99 0.81 1.57 2.43 4.96 10.10
17.60 2.52 5.08 8.76
kV 65.00 69.00 70.00 64.00 68.00 70.00 67.00 73.00
79.00 68.00 73.00 78.00
15 PPS mA 3.90 6.70 9.90 1.50 2.60 3.90 12.00 19.00
27.00 5.90 9.70 13.00
AKR* 2.47 5.00 7.71 1.06 2.03 3.16 7.83 16.00
27.60 4.16 8.39 13.70
Low Dose Digital
kV 60.00 63.00 64.00 60.00 63.00 64.00
Continuous mA 5.60 9.00 9.90 2.70 5.40 9.20
AKR* 9.29 16.90 20.00 4.44 10.10 18.00
N/A
kV 61.00 64.00 65.00 61.00 63.00 64.00
8 PPS mA 6.20 10.00 11.00 2.90 6.00 10.00
AKR* 2.52 4.64 5.33 1.20 2.79 4.77
N/A
kV 62.00 65.00 67.00 62.00 65.00 66.00 63.00 67.00 70.00 65.00 67.00 67.00
15 PPS mA 7.70 13.00 14.00 3.80 7.80 12.00 36.00 75.00 118.00 18.00 33.00 47.00
AKR* 4.22 7.98 9.01 2.14 4.83 7.81 8.19 20.20 37.20 4.53 8.98 12.80
kV 63.00 67.00 71.00 65.00 67.00 67.00
30 PPS mA N/A 36.00 76.00 121.00 18.00 33.00 48.00
AKR* 16.80 41.70 76.80 9.15 18.40 26.30
kV 85.00 88.00 89.00 85.00 88.00 89.00 85.00 88.00 89.00 85.00 88.00 89.00
Continuous mA 3.50 5.90 7.80 2.40 4.40 6.30 0.92 1.80 2.80 0.61 1.20 1.80
AKR* 14.60 26.70 36.50 9.94 19.70 29.40 3.84 8.20 13.10 2.55 5.40 8.63
kV 85.00 89.00 90.00 85.00 88.00 90.00 84.00 87.00 89.00 84.00 87.00 89.00
8 PPS mA 3.60 6.30 8.30 2.40 4.50 6.60 2.50 5.00 7.70 1.50 3.00 4.70
AKR* 3.87 7.14 9.67 2.72 5.20 7.77 2.75 5.56 8.79 1.80 3.53 5.51
kV 85.00 89.00 89.00 85.00 88.00 89.00 84.00 87.00 89.00 83.00 87.00 89.00
15 PPS mA 5.70 9.90 13.00 3.80 7.40 10.00 2.50 4.90 7.80 1.50 3.00 4.70
AKR* 7.65 13.90 18.10 5.27 10.50 14.50 3.59 7.13 11.40 2.39 4.60 7.09
* AKR is mGy/min
A-20
9 in with grid - Domestic
kV 79.00 80.00 83.00 79.00 81.00 83.00 77.00 81.00 84.00 77.00 81.00 84.00 78.20 79.91 81.55
Continuous mA 3.30 4.80 6.40 1.40 2.10 2.80 5.60 9.30 15.00 2.80 4.60 7.30 26.95 48.80 47.24
AKR* 12.60 19.40 28.10 5.45 8.64 12.30 20.70 38.30 66.40 10.30 19.00 32.70 0.21 0.50 0.82
kV 79.00 81.00 84.00 79.00 81.00 84.00 79.00 86.00 97.00 79.00 86.00 96.00
4 PPS** mA 9.40 14.00 18.00 1.90 2.90 3.80 24.00 34.00 40.00 12.00 17.00 20.00
AKR* 5.10 7.82 11.10 1.14 1.78 2.51 12.90 22.10 34.30 6.37 10.90 17.40
kV 79.00 81.00 83.00 79.00 81.00 84.00 81.00 88.00 100.00 80.00 87.00 99.00
8 PPS mA 9.30 14.00 18.00 3.60 5.40 7.20 25.00 35.00 40.00 12.00 17.00 20.00 N/A
AKR* 8.63 13.20 18.60 3.48 5.52 7.76 24.10 41.20 63.40 11.90 20.40 31.60
kV 79.00 80.00 83.00 78.00 81.00 84.00 85.00 94.00 108.00 85.00 93.00 108.00
15 PPS mA 9.30 13.00 18.00 3.50 5.30 6.90 28.00 38.00 38.00 14.00 19.00 20.00
AKR* 10.90 16.30 23.60 4.33 6.86 9.70 38.80 66.50 92.90 19.10 33.10 48.60
Low Dose Digital
kV 73.00 80.00 89.00 72.00 78.00 87.00
Continuous mA 21.00 23.00 21.00 14.00 17.00 17.00
AKR* 66.20 90.10 111.00 43.90 63.90 83.70
N/A
kV 75.00 82.00 92.00 73.00 79.00 89.00
8 PPS mA 20.00 23.00 21.00 15.00 18.00 17.00 N/A
AKR* 16.10 22.20 27.40 11.50 16.20 20.80
kV 80.00 87.00 98.00 77.00 85.00 97.00 76.00 85.00 98.00 79.00 79.00 79.00
15 PPS mA 19.00 22.00 20.00 17.00 17.00 16.00 125.00 149.00 127.00 42.00 62.00 76.00
AKR* 22.90 31.70 38.90 18.30 24.00 30.90 53.10 84.60 102.00 20.30 29.70 35.40
kV 76.00 86.00 99.00 79.00 79.00 79.00
30 PPS mA N/A 126.00 149.00 128.00 42.00 63.00 76.00
AKR* 108.00 172.00 207.00 40.70 60.10 71.60
* AKR is mGy/min
A-21
9 in without grid - Domestic
Norm Mag1 Mag2 Norm Mag1 Mag2 Norm Mag1 Mag2
Norm Mag1 Mag2 Norm Mag1 Mag2
kV 66.00 68.00 69.00 66.00 68.00 69.00 63.00 67.00 69.00
63.00 67.00 69.00 66.21 68.40 69.76
Continuous mA 2.10 3.10 4.60 0.92 1.40 2.00 3.40 5.80 9.50
1.70 2.90 4.70 16.21 35.97 55.76
AKR* 4.50 7.49 11.50 2.03 3.34 5.14 6.67 13.20 23.90
3.35 6.70 11.90 0.08 0.19 0.40
kV 65.00 67.00 68.00 65.00 67.00 69.00 63.00 69.00 73.00
64.00 69.00 73.00
4 PPS** mA 5.60 8.60 13.00 1.20 1.80 2.70 14.00 20.00 32.00
6.90 9.90 16.00
AKR* 1.66 2.75 4.16 0.39 0.63 0.97 3.74 6.88 12.60
1.94 3.45 6.30
kV 65.00 67.00 68.00 64.00 67.00 68.00 64.00 70.00 74.00
65.00 70.00 74.00
8 PPS mA 5.50 8.50 12.00 2.20 3.30 5.00 14.00 21.00 33.00
7.20 10.00 17.00 N/A
AKR* 2.78 4.65 7.02 1.14 1.88 2.94 6.95 12.70 23.20
3.60 6.37 11.60
kV 64.00 67.00 68.00 64.00 67.00 68.00 68.00 74.00 78.00
68.00 73.00 77.00
15 PPS mA 5.50 8.50 12.00 2.10 3.20 4.80 16.00 23.00 37.00
8.30 11.00 18.00
AKR* 3.52 5.92 8.67 1.42 2.36 3.63 11.10 20.10 36.60
6.08 10.10 18.30
Low Dose Digital
kV 63.00 65.00 69.00 63.00 65.00 68.00
Continuous mA 8.40 16.00 19.00 4.50 9.20 16.00
AKR* 16.30 34.80 47.50 8.72 19.80 39.30
N/A
kV 63.00 66.00 71.00 63.00 66.00 70.00
8 PPS mA 9.70 17.00 19.00 5.10 10.00 17.00 N/A
AKR* 4.46 9.00 12.00 2.40 5.21 9.99
kV 64.00 69.00 75.00 65.00 68.00 74.00 63.00 67.00 70.00 67.00 68.00 67.00
15 PPS mA 14.00 20.00 21.00 7.50 12.00 18.00 55.00 90.00 97.00 23.00 35.00 41.00
AKR* 8.20 14.40 19.00 4.92 8.92 15.50 13.10 25.90 31.30 6.44 10.20 12.00
kV 63.00 68.00 71.00 67.00 68.00 67.00
30 PPS mA N/A 56.00 92.00 98.00 23.00 35.00 42.00
AKR* 26.60 52.80 63.30 13.10 20.70 24.10
* AKR is mGy/min
A-22
12in with grid - Domestic
kV 78.00 80.00 81.00 79.00 81.00 81.00 77.00 79.00 83.00
77.00 80.00 83.00 78.00 82.00 82.00
Continuous mA 2.10 3.30 4.80 0.94 1.50 2.20 3.90 6.00 9.60
2.00 3.00 4.90 21.00 45.00 47.00
AKR* 7.17 12.30 18.10 3.29 5.56 8.18 12.90 21.60 38.40
6.57 11.00 19.50 0.16 0.39 0.73
kV 79.00 81.00 82.00 79.00 81.00 82.00 77.00 80.00 85.00
78.00 80.00 86.00
4 PPS** mA 6.00 9.70 14.00 1.20 2.00 2.90 16.00 23.00 33.00
7.90 12.00 17.00
AKR* 2.99 5.09 7.32 0.73 1.19 1.73 7.09 11.70 19.00
3.73 5.97 9.75
kV 79.00 81.00 81.00 78.00 81.00 82.00 78.00 81.00 87.00
79.00 81.00 87.00
8 PPS mA 6.00 9.60 14.00 2.40 3.80 5.60 16.00 24.00 34.00
8.20 12.00 17.00 N/A
AKR* 5.09 8.64 12.40 2.17 3.63 5.41 13.20 21.70 35.50
6.89 11.10 18.10
kV 79.00 81.00 81.00 78.00 81.00 82.00 82.00 85.00 93.00
82.00 85.00 93.00
15 PPS mA 6.00 9.70 14.00 2.30 3.70 5.50 18.00 28.00 38.00
9.10 14.00 19.00
AKR* 6.61 11.10 15.80 2.77 4.55 6.82 21.40 34.90 58.40
10.90 17.40 29.40
Low Dose Digital
kV 68.00 70.00 74.00 67.00 70.00 71.00
Continuous mA 13.00 20.00 17.00 7.10 11.00 16.00
AKR* 30.90 52.90 51.50 16.80 28.30 44.00
N/A
kV 69.00 71.00 75.00 69.00 71.00 72.00
8 PPS mA 14.00 21.00 18.00 7.80 12.00 17.00 N/A
AKR* 8.17 13.10 12.90 4.60 7.44 11.10
kV 71.00 74.00 82.00 71.00 73.00 77.00 74.00 77.00 84.00 75.00 76.00 75.00
15 PPS mA 17.00 22.00 18.00 9.40 14.00 18.00 69.00 122.00 140.00 30.00 51.00 65.00
AKR* 13.40 19.70 20.90 7.74 12.10 17.20 24.90 48.60 68.90 11.90 20.30 25.10
kV 74.00 77.00 84.00 75.00 76.00 75.00
30 PPS mA N/A 70.00 123.00 140.00 30.00 52.00 66.00
AKR* 51.00 98.40 140.00 23.70 41.10 50.80
* AKR is mGy/min
A-23
12in without grid - Domestic
kV 65.00 67.00 69.00 65.00 68.00 70.00 63.00 67.00 71.00
64.00 67.00 71.00 65.00 69.00 70.00
Continuous mA 1.40 2.20 3.30 0.60 0.98 1.50 2.40 4.00 6.60
1.20 2.00 3.30 12.00 27.00 51.00
AKR* 2.90 5.21 8.24 1.30 2.37 3.76 4.86 9.26 17.70
2.47 4.70 9.00 0.06 0.15 0.30
kV 65.00 68.00 70.00 65.00 68.00 70.00 64.00 67.00 72.00
64.00 68.00 73.00
4 PPS** mA 3.90 6.40 9.50 0.79 1.30 2.00 9.70 15.00 21.00
4.80 7.80 11.00
AKR* 1.19 2.19 3.42 0.29 0.50 0.77 2.68 4.72 7.95
1.41 2.58 4.41
kV 65.00 68.00 70.00 65.00 68.00 70.00 64.00 69.00 74.00
65.00 69.00 74.00
8 PPS mA 3.80 6.30 9.40 1.50 2.50 3.70 10.00 16.00 23.00
5.10 8.10 11.00 N/A
AKR* 2.02 3.70 5.78 0.87 1.53 2.42 4.97 9.28 15.50
2.56 4.80 7.94
kV 65.00 68.00 70.00 65.00 68.00 70.00 67.00 72.00 77.00
68.00 72.00 77.00
15 PPS mA 3.80 6.40 9.60 1.40 2.40 3.60 11.00 18.00 25.00
5.80 9.20 13.00
AKR* 2.59 4.80 7.50 1.10 1.91 2.98 7.91 14.60 24.80
4.32 7.92 12.60
Low Dose Digital
kV 61.00 64.00 65.00 61.00 63.00 64.00
Continuous mA 5.70 8.40 9.60 2.70 5.00 8.40
AKR* 10.40 17.00 20.50 4.81 10.00 17.30
N/A
kV 62.00 64.00 66.00 61.00 64.00 65.00
8 PPS mA 6.40 9.40 11.00 2.90 5.60 9.10 N/A
AKR* 2.85 4.56 5.51 1.31 2.70 4.51
kV 63.00 65.00 67.00 63.00 65.00 65.00 64.00 64.00 70.00 65.00 68.00 66.00
15 PPS mA 7.90 12.00 13.00 3.80 7.30 11.00 35.00 67.00 96.00 17.00 31.00 40.00
AKR* 4.73 7.92 9.25 2.31 4.74 7.48 7.99 18.80 30.80 4.58 9.08 10.70
kV 63.00 66.00 68.00 65.00 66.00 66.00
30 PPS mA N/A 35.00 69.00 98.00 17.00 31.00 41.00
AKR* 16.80 37.50 61.40 9.20 16.80 24.00
* AKR is mGy/min
A-24
International 1
Countries: Belgium, Italy, Portugal, and Spain

21cm with grid - International 1
Continuous kV 79.00 80.00 82.00 79.00 80.00 82.00 78.00 84.00 90.00 78.00 84.00 90.00 79.00 81.00 83.00
(General Pro- mA 1.70 3.60 4.40 0.78 1.60 1.90 3.70 4.50 6.00 2.60 2.60 3.60 28.00 50.00 48.00
file) AKR* 6.02 12.90 16.80 2.75 5.76 7.42 12.60 18.30 29.10 8.80 10.60 17.30 0.20 0.48 0.78
kV 79.00 81.00 83.00
Continuous
mA Same as above 28.00 50.00 47.00
(Spine Profile)
AKR* 0.50 1.04 1.81
kV 78.00 79.00 80.00 77.00 78.00 79.00 78.00
84.00 91.00 79.00 84.00 91.00
4 PPS mA 4.60 9.70 12.00 0.90 1.90 2.20 12.00
18.00 25.00 6.30 9.10 12.00
AKR* 2.21 4.72 5.90 0.53 0.99 1.22 5.86
10.10 16.30 3.03 5.16 8.18
kV 77.00 79.00 80.00 77.00 78.00 79.00 80.00
86.00 93.00 80.00 86.00 92.00
8 PPS mA 4.50 9.60 12.00 1.80 3.80 4.70 13.00
19.00 25.00 6.50 9.50 13.00
AKR* 3.70 7.94 9.83 1.63 3.29 4.11 10.90
18.80 30.40 5.64 9.63 15.20
kV 77.00 79.00 80.00 76.00 78.00 79.00 83.00
91.00 100.00 83.00 91.00 99.00
15 PPS mA 4.50 9.70 11.00 1.80 3.80 4.60 9.40
16.00 22.00 4.60 8.00 11.00
AKR* 4.74 10.20 12.30 2.16 4.23 5.24 11.40
23.10 39.00 5.80 12.30 19.40
Low Dose Digital
kV 72.00 79.00 88.00 72.00 77.00 86.00
Continuous mA 21.00 23.00 21.00 13.00 17.00 17.00
AKR* 59.70 78.90 96.40 37.80 55.90 74.30
N/A
kV 74.00 80.00 90.00 74.00 79.00 89.00
8 PPS mA 21.00 23.00 21.00 15.00 17.00 17.00
AKR* 14.30 19.40 23.60 10.10 14.30 18.50
N/A
kV 79.00 86.00 96.00 77.00 84.00 96.00 74.00 81.00 93.00 77.00 78.00 77.00
15 PPS mA 20.00 22.00 20.00 17.00 17.00 16.00 100.00 149.00 149.00 35.00 57.00 79.00
AKR* 20.10 27.70 33.80 16.10 21.20 27.00 36.10 67.60 93.50 14.40 23.40 31.50
kV 74.00 79.00 93.00 77.00 78.00 77.00
30 PPS mA N/A 102.00 145.00 149.00 35.00 57.00 79.00
AKR* 73.80 123.00 189.00 28.80 47.40 63.90
kV 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00
Continuous mA 8.70 14.00 17.00 6.20 11.00 13.00 2.20 3.50 4.90 1.50 2.30 3.20
AKR* 41.60 65.00 80.40 29.70 49.80 64.00 10.50 16.70 23.40 7.00 11.10 15.40
kV 96.00 95.00 95.00 96.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 94.00 94.00 95.00
8 PPS mA 9.30 14.00 18.00 6.60 11.00 14.00 6.20 9.80 14.00 3.70 6.00 8.50
AKR* 11.00 16.40 20.10 8.03 12.70 16.10 7.36 11.20 15.60 4.66 7.16 9.91
kV 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 95.00
15 PPS mA 14.00 23.00 28.00 10.00 17.00 22.00 6.20 9.60 14.00 3.70 6.00 8.50
AKR* 21.00 32.30 39.40 15.10 24.80 31.50 9.47 14.00 19.50 6.08 9.23 12.70
* AKR is mGy/min
A-25
21cm without grid - International 1
Continuous kV 67.00 70.00 72.00 68.00 71.00 72.00 66.00 73.00 78.00 66.00 73.00 78.00 68.00 72.00 74.00
(General Pro- mA 1.20 2.40 3.00 0.53 1.10 1.30 2.20 3.00 4.40 1.60 1.70 2.60 17.00 36.00 55.00
file) AKR* 2.77 6.29 8.36 1.27 2.80 3.78 4.88 8.47 14.80 3.46 4.85 8.96 0.08 0.20 0.46
kV 68.00 72.00 74.00
Continuous
mA Same as above 17.00 35.00 54.00
(Spine Profile)
AKR* 0.20 0.49 0.96
kV 66.00 69.00 71.00 66.00 69.00 70.00 66.00 73.00
78.00 66.00 73.00 78.00
4 PPS mA 3.20 6.40 8.10 0.62 1.20 1.60 7.40 12.00
17.00 3.70 5.90 8.70
AKR* 1.01 2.24 3.02 0.24 0.48 0.63 2.29 4.63
8.11 1.16 2.37 4.12
kV 66.00 69.00 71.00 65.00 69.00 70.00 67.00 74.00
79.00 67.00 74.00 79.00
8 PPS mA 3.20 6.30 8.00 1.30 2.50 3.20 7.70 12.00
18.00 3.80 6.20 9.10
AKR* 1.71 3.78 5.07 0.76 1.58 2.09 4.27 8.61
15.00 2.16 4.48 7.73
kV 65.00 69.00 71.00 65.00 68.00 70.00 70.00 77.00
84.00 70.00 77.00 84.00
15 PPS mA 3.20 6.40 8.10 1.30 2.50 3.20 5.10 11.00
17.00 2.50 5.60 8.70
AKR* 2.20 4.85 6.54 1.00 2.02 2.70 4.10 11.00
20.60 2.15 5.81 10.90
Low Dose Digital
kV 63.00 68.00 74.00 63.00 67.00 72.00
Continuous mA 10.00 19.00 21.00 5.00 11.00 17.00
AKR* 20.30 45.30 61.60 9.76 24.40 47.60
N/A
kV 64.00 69.00 75.00 64.00 68.00 74.00
8 PPS mA 12.00 20.00 21.00 5.90 12.00 18.00
AKR* 5.83 11.40 15.50 2.86 6.62 12.20
N/A
kV 65.00 72.00 81.00 66.00 71.00 79.00 64.00 70.00 75.00 68.00 69.00 69.00
15 PPS mA 17.00 21.00 22.00 8.30 14.00 18.00 46.00 103.00 149.00 22.00 38.00 56.00
AKR* 10.40 17.50 23.50 5.51 11.00 18.10 11.10 31.60 55.80 6.31 11.80 17.40
kV 64.00 70.00 75.00 68.00 69.00 70.00
30 PPS mA N/A 46.00 105.00 149.00 21.00 39.00 57.00
AKR* 22.70 64.70 112.00 12.60 24.00 35.20
kV 84.00 86.00 87.00 84.00 86.00 87.00 84.00 85.00 87.00 84.00 86.00 87.00
Continuous mA 4.30 8.90 12.00 3.00 6.70 9.60 1.30 2.20 3.40 0.85 1.40 2.30
AKR* 15.50 33.90 47.50 10.60 25.20 38.10 4.57 8.11 13.40 3.03 5.42 8.88
kV 85.00 87.00 89.00 84.00 87.00 88.00 83.00 85.00 87.00 83.00 85.00 87.00
8 PPS mA 4.60 9.30 13.00 3.10 7.00 10.00 3.50 6.00 9.50 2.10 3.70 5.90
AKR* 4.29 8.81 12.50 3.03 6.75 10.00 3.22 5.61 9.08 2.09 3.53 5.74
kV 84.00 86.00 88.00 84.00 86.00 88.00 83.00 85.00 87.00 82.00 85.00 87.00
15 PPS mA 7.30 14.00 20.00 4.90 11.00 16.00 3.50 6.00 9.30 2.10 3.60 5.80
AKR* 8.39 16.60 23.90 5.74 12.60 19.10 4.16 7.17 11.30 2.75 4.57 7.34
* AKR is mGy/min
A-26
Continuous kV 77.00 77.00 78.00 75.00 77.00 78.00 74.00 80.00 85.00 74.00 80.00 85.00 79.00 81.00 82.00
(General Pro- mA 0.96 2.60 3.60 0.43 1.10 1.60 1.90 3.30 5.00 1.30 2.30 3.50 21.00 41.00 49.00
file) AKR* 3.12 8.81 12.50 1.33 3.73 5.34 5.50 12.20 21.10 3.73 8.44 14.70 0.18 0.37 0.68
kV 79.00 82.00 82.00
Continuous
mA Same as above 22.00 40.00 49.00
(Spine Profile)
AKR* 0.45 0.91 1.68
kV 78.00 79.00 80.00 76.00 78.00 79.00 76.00 82.00
90.00 76.00 82.00 90.00
4 PPS mA 2.80 8.20 11.00 0.52 1.50 2.10 6.80 12.00
17.00 3.30 6.20 8.20
AKR* 1.46 4.09 5.51 0.35 0.81 1.10 3.05 6.58
11.20 1.50 3.36 5.65
kV 78.00 79.00 79.00 77.00 78.00 79.00 77.00 83.00
92.00 76.00 83.00 92.00
8 PPS mA 2.80 8.00 11.00 1.10 3.10 4.30 7.20 13.00
17.00 3.40 6.40 8.50
AKR* 2.46 6.82 9.18 1.08 2.73 3.75 5.76 12.20
20.90 2.81 6.26 10.60
kV 77.00 79.00 79.00 76.00 78.00 79.00 81.00 88.00
98.00 79.00 87.00 98.00
15 PPS mA 2.70 8.00 11.00 1.10 3.00 4.30 5.90 9.20
12.00 2.60 4.30 5.80
AKR* 3.14 8.66 11.30 1.46 3.46 4.79 6.98 13.20
21.60 3.28 6.35 11.20
Low Dose Digital
kV 67.00 70.00 73.00 67.00 69.00 70.00
Continuous mA 13.00 20.00 17.00 7.40 12.00 17.00
AKR* 29.70 50.70 48.00 16.60 28.70 43.20
N/A
kV 68.00 71.00 74.00 68.00 70.00 72.00
8 PPS mA 14.00 21.00 17.00 8.00 12.00 17.00
AKR* 7.74 12.70 12.20 4.47 7.45 10.90
N/A
kV 71.00 73.00 79.00 70.00 73.00 76.00 74.00 77.00 85.00 75.00 76.00 75.00
15 PPS mA 17.00 22.00 18.00 9.10 14.00 18.00 56.00 89.00 122.00 20.00 47.00 65.00
AKR* 12.80 18.80 19.40 7.06 12.10 16.80 20.00 35.70 62.90 7.71 18.30 24.20
kV 73.00 77.00 86.00 75.00 76.00 75.00
30 PPS mA N/A 57.00 91.00 123.00 20.00 48.00 66.00
AKR* 40.60 73.40 129.00 15.60 37.60 49.30
kV 95.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00
Continuous mA 6.50 8.90 11.00 4.60 6.80 8.40 1.40 2.50 3.70 0.93 1.70 2.40
AKR* 35.50 48.10 56.90 24.90 36.50 45.20 7.71 13.60 19.70 5.03 8.97 13.20
kV 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00
8 PPS mA 6.90 9.40 11.00 4.70 7.10 8.80 3.90 7.10 10.00 2.40 4.30 6.30
AKR* 9.37 12.50 14.40 6.59 9.64 11.80 5.40 9.39 13.20 3.49 5.84 8.36
kV 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 93.00 94.00 94.00
15 PPS mA 11.00 15.00 17.00 7.80 11.00 14.00 3.90 7.10 10.00 2.30 4.20 6.30
AKR* 17.70 23.90 28.00 13.30 18.20 22.40 6.99 12.00 16.50 4.60 7.53 10.80
* AKR is mGy/min
A-27
kV 64.00 66.00 68.00 63.00 66.00 67.00 61.00 68.00 73.00 61.00 68.00 72.00 66.00 68.00 70.00
Continuous
mA 0.69 1.70 2.30 0.31 0.75 1.00 0.93 2.00 3.20 0.64 1.40 2.20 12.00 29.00 51.00
(General Profile)
AKR* 1.34 3.75 5.52 0.57 1.59 2.32 1.63 4.74 9.12 1.12 3.28 6.23 0.07 0.17 0.32
kV 66.00 68.00 70.00
Continuous
mA Same as above 12.00 28.00 50.00
(Spine Profile)
AKR* 0.16 0.41 0.78
kV 65.00 67.00 69.00 63.00 66.00 68.00 63.00 69.00 77.00
63.00 69.00 77.00
4 PPS mA 1.90 5.00 7.00 0.38 0.95 1.30 3.70 8.10 11.00
1.80 4.00 5.40
AKR* 0.59 1.60 2.43 0.15 0.34 0.49 1.01 2.75 4.99
0.51 1.35 2.48
kV 64.00 67.00 69.00 64.00 67.00 68.00 64.00 70.00 78.00
64.00 70.00 78.00
8 PPS mA 1.90 4.90 6.90 0.79 2.00 2.70 3.80 8.30 11.00
1.90 4.10 5.60
AKR* 1.01 2.70 4.07 0.46 1.15 1.65 1.85 5.07 9.27
0.95 2.51 4.66
kV 64.00 67.00 69.00 63.00 66.00 68.00 66.00 73.00 82.00
66.00 73.00 81.00
15 PPS mA 1.90 4.90 7.00 0.79 2.00 2.70 2.40 4.90 6.70
1.10 2.40 3.20
AKR* 1.32 3.47 5.22 0.62 1.50 2.14 1.73 4.45 8.12
0.92 2.32 4.09
Low Dose Digital
kV 60.00 63.00 64.00 60.00 63.00 64.00
Continuous mA 5.60 8.90 10.00 2.70 5.40 9.10
AKR* 9.32 16.90 20.10 4.41 10.10 17.90
N/A
kV 61.00 64.00 65.00 61.00 63.00 64.00
8 PPS mA 6.20 10.00 11.00 2.90 6.10 10.00
AKR* 2.53 4.63 5.34 1.21 2.80 4.73
N/A
kV 62.00 65.00 67.00 62.00 65.00 66.00 63.00 66.00 70.00 65.00 67.00 66.00
15 PPS mA 7.70 13.00 14.00 3.80 7.80 12.00 19.00 49.00 94.00 11.00 29.00 41.00
AKR* 4.21 7.81 9.00 2.13 4.86 7.76 4.37 13.30 29.70 2.81 7.93 11.20
kV 63.00 67.00 70.00 65.00 67.00 67.00
30 PPS mA N/A 19.00 50.00 95.00 11.00 29.00 42.00
AKR* 8.75 27.20 59.80 5.61 16.10 23.00
kV 85.00 88.00 89.00 85.00 88.00 89.00 85.00 88.00 89.00 85.00 88.00 89.00
Continuous mA 3.50 5.90 7.80 2.40 4.40 6.30 0.92 1.80 2.80 0.61 1.20 1.80
AKR* 14.60 26.70 36.50 9.94 19.70 29.40 3.84 8.20 13.10 2.55 5.40 8.63
kV 85.00 89.00 90.00 85.00 88.00 90.00 84.00 87.00 89.00 84.00 87.00 89.00
8 PPS mA 3.60 6.30 8.30 2.40 4.50 6.60 2.50 5.00 7.70 1.50 3.00 4.70
AKR* 3.87 7.14 9.67 2.72 5.20 7.77 2.75 5.56 8.79 1.80 3.53 5.51
kV 85.00 89.00 89.00 85.00 88.00 89.00 84.00 87.00 89.00 83.00 87.00 89.00
15 PPS mA 5.70 9.90 13.00 3.80 7.40 10.00 2.50 4.90 7.80 1.50 3.00 4.70
AKR* 7.65 13.90 18.10 5.27 10.50 14.50 3.59 7.13 11.40 2.39 4.60 7.09
* AKR is mGy/min
A-28
9 in with grid - International 1
kV 79.00 80.00 82.00 78.00 80.00 82.00 78.00 84.00 91.00 78.00 84.00 91.00 78.35 79.52 81.13
Continuous mA 1.80 3.70 4.60 0.77 1.60 2.00 3.50 4.60 6.20
2.50 2.60 3.70 25.97 49.00 47.29
AKR* 6.86 15.00 19.70 2.94 6.49 8.69 13.20 20.80 34.10 9.27 12.00 20.20 0.20 0.50 0.91
kV 80.00 81.00 83.00 79.00 81.00 84.00 80.00 87.00 95.00 80.00 87.00 94.00
4 PPS** mA 5.10 11.00 13.00 1.00 2.20 2.80 14.00 20.00 26.00 6.90 9.90 13.00
AKR* 2.86 5.99 7.92 0.68 1.39 1.91 7.60 13.30 21.50 3.88 6.68 10.90
kV 79.00 81.00 82.00 79.00 80.00 83.00 81.00 89.00 97.00 81.00 88.00 96.00
8 PPS mA 5.00 10.00 13.00 2.00 4.10 5.30 12.00 20.00 27.00 6.30 10.00 13.00 N/A
AKR* 4.82 10.10 13.20 2.01 4.15 5.70 12.30 24.70 40.30 6.40 12.30 19.90
kV 79.00 80.00 82.00 78.00 81.00 84.00 86.00 94.00 103.00 86.00 94.00 103.00
15 PPS mA 5.00 10.00 13.00 1.90 4.00 5.10 10.00 13.00 18.00 5.30 6.50 9.00
AKR* 6.14 12.50 16.70 2.58 5.25 7.32 14.90 22.90 39.60 8.04 12.10 20.60
Low Dose Digital
kV 73.00 79.00 89.00 72.00 77.00 87.00
Continuous mA 21.00 23.00 21.00 14.00 17.00 17.00
AKR* 66.00 89.80 110.00 43.80 63.50 83.40
N/A
kV 75.00 82.00 91.00 74.00 79.00 90.00
8 PPS mA 20.00 22.00 21.00 15.00 18.00 17.00 N/A
AKR* 16.10 22.10 27.40 11.60 16.10 20.90
kV 80.00 87.00 98.00 77.00 85.00 97.00 76.00 85.00 98.00 79.00 79.00 79.00
15 PPS mA 19.00 22.00 20.00 17.00 17.00 16.00 99.00 118.00 133.00 34.00 47.00 72.00
AKR* 22.90 31.70 38.90 18.10 24.00 30.90 42.40 67.10 107.00 16.20 22.40 33.90
kV 76.00 85.00 99.00 79.00 79.00 79.00
30 PPS mA N/A 100.00 119.00 134.00 34.00 47.00 73.00
AKR* 85.70 135.00 218.00 32.60 45.40 68.60
* AKR is mGy/min
A-29
9 in without grid - International 1
kV 66.00 68.00 69.00 67.00 68.00 70.00 65.00 70.00 75.0065.00 70.00 75.00 66.80 68.63 70.15
Continuous mA 1.20 2.20 2.70 0.52 0.98 1.20 2.00 2.70 3.80 1.40 1.50 2.30 15.29 34.45 55.37
AKR* 2.63 5.37 6.92 1.20 2.41 3.16 4.20 7.09 11.80 2.99 4.09 7.16 0.08 0.19 0.40
kV 65.00 68.00 69.00 66.00 68.00 70.00 66.00 71.00 75.0065.00 71.00 76.00
4 PPS** mA 3.20 6.00 7.50 0.67 1.30 1.60 7.30 11.00 15.00 3.50 5.50 7.90
AKR* 0.98 1.98 2.59 0.26 0.48 0.66 2.20 3.99 6.63 1.08 2.06 3.53
kV 65.00 67.00 69.00 65.00 67.00 69.00 66.00 72.00 76.0066.00 72.00 77.00
8 PPS mA 3.20 5.90 7.30 1.30 2.30 2.90 6.60 11.00 16.00 3.30 5.70 8.20 N/A
AKR* 1.67 3.30 4.32 0.74 1.38 1.82 3.55 7.38 12.40 1.81 3.82 6.41
kV 65.00 67.00 69.00 65.00 67.00 69.00 69.00 75.00 80.0069.00 75.00 80.00
15 PPS mA 3.20 5.90 7.40 1.20 2.20 2.90 4.20 7.70 13.00 2.10 3.80 6.70
AKR* 2.15 4.26 5.51 0.95 1.77 2.37 3.40 7.40 14.50 1.82 3.79 7.64
Low Dose Digital
kV 63.00 65.00 69.00 63.00 65.00 68.00
Continuous mA 9.00 16.00 19.00 4.50 9.20 16.00
AKR* 17.40 35.10 48.30 8.74 19.60 39.50
N/A
kV 63.00 66.00 70.00 63.00 66.00 70.00
8 PPS mA 9.50 17.00 19.00 5.10 9.90 17.00 N/A
AKR* 4.38 9.02 12.00 2.41 5.16 9.98
kV 64.00 69.00 74.00 65.00 68.00 74.00 63.00 67.00 70.00 67.00 67.00 67.00
15 PPS mA 13.00 20.00 21.00 7.40 12.00 18.00 39.00 66.00 111.00 18.00 26.00 39.00
AKR* 8.17 14.30 18.90 4.84 8.83 15.40 9.24 18.80 35.60 5.23 7.52 11.20
kV 63.00 68.00 71.00 67.00 68.00 67.00
30 PPS mA N/A 40.00 66.00 112.00 18.00 26.00 39.00
AKR* 18.80 38.40 72.00 10.60 15.30 22.80
* AKR is mGy/min
A-30
12in with grid - International 1
kV 78.00 78.00 79.00 79.00 79.00 80.00 75.00 81.00 85.0075.00 81.00 86.00 79.00 80.00 80.00
Continuous mA 0.99 2.60 3.70 0.46 1.20 1.70 1.90 3.30 4.50 1.30 2.30 3.20 21.00 49.00 48.00
AKR* 3.45 9.18 13.20 1.60 4.18 6.04 5.89 12.50 19.40 4.19 8.77 13.80 0.17 0.50 0.81
kV 79.00 79.00 80.00 79.00 80.00 81.00 76.00 81.00 90.0076.00 82.00 90.00
4 PPS** mA 2.80 7.80 11.00 0.59 1.60 2.30 6.50 12.00 16.00 3.20 6.10 8.10
AKR* 1.49 3.89 5.46 0.42 0.94 1.34 2.95 6.16 10.70 1.52 3.32 5.57
kV 78.00 79.00 80.00 78.00 79.00 80.00 77.00 82.00 91.0077.00 83.00 92.00
8 PPS mA 2.80 7.70 11.00 1.10 3.00 4.30 6.90 12.00 15.00 3.40 6.30 7.60 N/A
AKR* 2.51 6.54 9.20 1.18 2.79 3.97 5.59 11.50 17.80 2.85 6.16 9.41
kV 79.00 79.00 80.00 78.00 79.00 81.00 81.00 88.00 98.0081.00 87.00 99.00
15 PPS mA 2.80 7.80 11.00 1.10 2.90 4.20 5.70 8.60 10.00 2.70 4.20 5.50
AKR* 3.34 8.57 11.70 1.59 3.55 5.09 6.82 12.10 18.90 3.52 6.27 10.70
Low Dose Digital
kV 68.00 70.00 74.00 67.00 70.00 71.00
Continuous mA 13.00 20.00 17.00 7.10 11.00 16.00
AKR* 31.20 52.60 51.50 16.80 28.20 43.90
N/A
kV 69.00 71.00 75.00 69.00 71.00 72.00
8 PPS mA 14.00 21.00 17.00 7.80 12.00 17.00 N/A
AKR* 8.22 13.20 13.00 4.61 7.43 11.10
kV 71.00 74.00 81.00 71.00 73.00 76.00 73.00 76.00 84.00 75.00 76.00 75.00
15 PPS mA 16.00 22.00 18.00 9.40 14.00 18.00 52.00 82.00 109.00 19.00 45.00 58.00
AKR* 13.30 19.60 20.60 7.75 12.10 17.20 18.80 32.50 53.90 7.59 18.00 22.30
kV 74.00 76.00 84.00 75.00 76.00 75.00
30 PPS mA N/A 52.00 82.00 110.00 19.00 45.00 58.00
AKR* 38.10 65.50 109.00 15.30 36.20 44.60
* AKR is mGy/min
A-31
12in without grid - International 1
kV 66.00 67.00 68.00 66.00 67.00 69.00 63.00 68.00 73.00
63.00 68.00 73.00 65.00 67.00 69.00
Continuous mA 0.69 1.70 2.30 0.31 0.75 1.00 0.95 2.00 2.80 0.68 1.40 2.00 12.00 29.00 56.00
AKR* 1.52 3.88 5.63 0.68 1.74 2.56 1.87 4.86 8.03 1.34 3.42 5.70 0.05 0.15 0.31
kV 66.00 67.00 69.00 65.00 67.00 69.00 63.00 68.00 76.00
64.00 68.00 76.00
4 PPS** mA 1.90 4.80 6.70 0.40 1.00 1.40 3.60 7.70 10.00 1.80 3.80 5.20
AKR* 0.64 1.56 2.35 0.18 0.39 0.56 1.03 2.63 4.48 0.55 1.33 2.37
kV 66.00 67.00 69.00 66.00 67.00 69.00 64.00 70.00 77.00
64.00 69.00 77.00
8 PPS mA 1.90 4.80 6.60 0.76 1.90 2.70 3.80 8.00 10.00 1.90 3.90 5.10 N/A
AKR* 1.09 2.67 3.95 0.51 1.16 1.69 1.91 4.87 7.91 1.02 2.46 4.23
kV 65.00 67.00 69.00 65.00 67.00 69.00 67.00 73.00 81.00
67.00 73.00 81.00
15 PPS mA 1.90 4.80 6.70 0.75 1.80 2.50 2.40 4.80 5.80 1.20 2.40 2.80
AKR* 1.43 3.45 5.18 0.68 1.47 2.13 1.84 4.38 6.89 1.04 2.35 3.68
Low Dose Digital
kV 61.00 63.00 65.00 61.00 63.00 64.00
Continuous mA 5.80 8.40 9.50 2.70 5.00 8.40
AKR* 10.50 16.90 20.50 4.76 9.91 17.30
N/A
kV 61.00 64.00 66.00 61.00 64.00 65.00
8 PPS mA 6.30 9.20 11.00 2.90 5.50 9.10 N/A
AKR* 2.75 4.47 5.44 1.32 2.68 4.53
kV 63.00 65.00 68.00 63.00 65.00 66.00 63.00 66.00 70.00 65.00 66.00 66.00
15 PPS mA 7.80 12.00 13.00 3.80 7.20 11.00 19.00 47.00 81.00 11.00 27.00 35.00
AKR* 4.65 7.92 9.37 2.28 4.71 7.52 4.64 12.80 25.60 2.95 7.51 9.95
kV 64.00 66.00 70.00 65.00 66.00 66.00
30 PPS mA N/A 18.00 47.00 81.00 11.00 27.00 35.00
AKR* 9.08 26.20 51.30 5.93 15.30 20.00
* AKR is mGy/min
A-32
International 2
Countries: Australia
Continuous kV 79.00 80.00 82.00 79.00 80.00 82.00 77.00 81.00 84.00 77.00 81.00 83.00 79.00 81.00 83.00
(General Pro- mA 2.80 3.50 5.00 1.20 1.50 2.20 5.50 9.10 14.00 2.70 4.50 7.10 27.00 49.00 48.00
file) AKR* 9.73 12.50 18.80 4.36 5.59 8.33 17.90 33.40 56.90 8.91 16.50 28.30 0.20 0.46 0.78
Continuous kV 79.00 81.00 83.00
file) AKR* 0.49 1.02 1.79
kV 78.00 79.00 80.00 77.00 78.00 80.00 78.00 84.00 91.00 77.00 84.00 91.00
4 PPS mA 7.60 9.40 14.00 1.50 1.80 2.70 22.00 31.00 40.00 11.00 15.00 20.00
AKR* 3.58 4.58 6.83 0.78 0.97 1.42 10.10 17.00 26.60 5.05 8.49 13.30
kV 77.00 79.00 80.00 77.00 78.00 80.00 79.00 85.00 94.00 79.00 85.00 93.00
8 PPS mA 7.50 9.30 14.00 3.00 3.70 5.50 23.00 32.00 40.00 11.00 16.00 20.00
AKR* 6.04 7.68 11.50 2.54 3.17 4.85 18.60 31.70 48.90 9.32 15.70 24.40
kV 77.00 79.00 80.00 77.00 78.00 80.00 83.00 90.00 103.00 82.00 90.00 103.00
15 PPS mA 7.60 9.30 14.00 3.00 3.70 5.60 26.00 37.00 40.00 13.00 18.00 20.00
AKR* 7.76 9.87 14.40 3.26 4.08 6.26 29.80 51.70 75.70 14.90 25.80 38.40
Low Dose Digital
kV 72.00 79.00 88.00 72.00 77.00 86.00
Continuous mA 21.00 23.00 21.00 13.00 17.00 17.00
AKR* 59.40 79.30 95.90 37.80 55.80 74.10
N/A
kV 74.00 80.00 90.00 74.00 79.00 89.00
8 PPS mA 21.00 23.00 21.00 15.00 17.00 17.00
AKR* 14.30 19.40 23.50 9.96 14.30 18.50
N/A
kV 78.00 86.00 96.00 77.00 84.00 96.00 74.00 81.00 93.00 77.00 78.00 77.00
15 PPS mA 20.00 22.00 20.00 17.00 17.00 16.00 113.00 149.00 149.00 39.00 57.00 79.00
AKR* 20.00 27.70 33.90 16.10 21.10 26.90 40.80 67.70 93.00 16.00 23.50 31.70
kV 74.00 82.00 93.00 78.00 78.00 77.00
30 PPS mA N/A 115.00 149.00 149.00 39.00 57.00 80.00
AKR* 83.70 137.00 188.00 32.30 47.30 64.10
kV 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00
Continuous mA 8.70 14.00 17.00 6.20 11.00 13.00 2.20 3.50 4.90 1.50 2.30 3.20
AKR* 41.60 65.00 80.40 29.70 49.80 64.00 10.50 16.70 23.40 7.00 11.10 15.40
kV 96.00 95.00 95.00 96.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 94.00 94.00 95.00
8 PPS mA 9.30 14.00 18.00 6.60 11.00 14.00 6.20 9.80 14.00 3.70 6.00 8.50
AKR* 11.00 16.40 20.10 8.03 12.70 16.10 7.36 11.20 15.60 4.66 7.16 9.91
kV 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 95.00
15 PPS mA 14.00 23.00 28.00 10.00 17.00 22.00 6.20 9.60 14.00 3.70 6.00 8.50
AKR* 21.00 32.30 39.40 15.10 24.80 31.50 9.47 14.00 19.50 6.08 9.23 12.70
* AKR is mGy/min
A-33
Continuous kV 67.00 70.00 72.00 67.00 71.00 72.00 64.00 69.00 72.00 64.00 69.00 72.00 68.00 72.00 74.00
(General Pro- mA 1.90 2.50 3.90 0.82 1.10 1.70 3.50 6.30 11.00 1.80 3.20 5.30 17.00 36.00 55.00
file) AKR* 4.32 6.43 10.90 1.91 2.84 4.84 7.30 16.00 29.70 3.63 7.89 14.90 0.08 0.20 0.41
kV 68.00 72.00 74.00
Continuous
mA Same as above 17.00 35.00 54.00
(Spine Profile)
AKR* 0.20 0.48 0.97
kV 66.00 69.00 71.00 66.00 69.00 71.00 65.00 72.00
76.00 65.00 72.00 76.00
4 PPS mA 4.90 6.60 11.00 0.96 1.30 2.10 14.00 22.00
35.00 7.20 11.00 18.00
AKR* 1.51 2.32 3.98 0.34 0.50 0.83 4.07 8.22
15.30 2.07 4.07 7.67
kV 66.00 69.00 71.00 66.00 69.00 70.00 66.00 73.00
77.00 66.00 73.00 77.00
8 PPS mA 4.90 6.50 11.00 2.00 2.60 4.40 15.00 23.00
37.00 7.40 11.00 18.00
AKR* 2.55 3.90 6.70 1.10 1.64 2.81 7.50 15.20
28.20 3.85 7.52 14.10
kV 66.00 69.00 70.00 65.00 68.00 71.00 69.00 77.00
82.00 69.00 76.00 82.00
15 PPS mA 4.90 6.60 11.00 1.90 2.60 4.40 17.00 25.00
40.00 8.50 13.00 20.00
AKR* 3.27 5.00 8.38 1.41 2.10 3.62 12.10 24.30
44.20 6.39 12.00 22.20
Low Dose Digital
kV 63.00 68.00 74.00 63.00 67.00 72.00
Continuous mA 10.00 19.00 21.00 4.90 11.00 17.00
AKR* 20.10 45.50 61.60 9.67 24.60 47.80
N/A
kV 64.00 69.00 76.00 64.00 68.00 74.00
8 PPS mA 12.00 20.00 21.00 5.80 12.00 18.00
AKR* 5.85 11.30 15.50 2.80 6.66 12.20
N/A
kV 65.00 72.00 81.00 66.00 71.00 79.00 64.00 70.00 75.00 67.00 69.00 70.00
15 PPS mA 17.00 21.00 22.00 8.20 14.00 18.00 59.00 103.00 149.00 24.00 39.00 57.00
AKR* 10.40 17.50 23.50 5.46 11.10 18.20 14.30 31.80 55.50 6.97 12.00 17.50
kV 64.00 70.00 75.00 68.00 69.00 70.00
30 PPS mA N/A 60.00 104.00 149.00 24.00 39.00 57.00
AKR* 29.10 64.30 112.00 14.00 24.30 35.20
kV 84.00 86.00 87.00 84.00 86.00 87.00 84.00 85.00 87.00 84.00 86.00 87.00
Continuous mA 4.30 8.90 12.00 3.00 6.70 9.60 1.30 2.20 3.40 0.85 1.40 2.30
AKR* 15.50 33.90 47.50 10.60 25.20 38.10 4.57 8.11 13.40 3.03 5.42 8.88
kV 85.00 87.00 89.00 84.00 87.00 88.00 83.00 85.00 87.00 83.00 85.00 87.00
8 PPS mA 4.60 9.30 13.00 3.10 7.00 10.00 3.50 6.00 9.50 2.10 3.70 5.90
AKR* 4.29 8.81 12.50 3.03 6.75 10.00 3.22 5.61 9.08 2.09 3.53 5.74
kV 84.00 86.00 88.00 84.00 86.00 88.00 83.00 85.00 87.00 82.00 85.00 87.00
15 PPS mA 7.30 14.00 20.00 4.90 11.00 16.00 3.50 6.00 9.30 2.10 3.60 5.80
AKR* 8.39 16.60 23.90 5.74 12.60 19.10 4.16 7.17 11.30 2.75 4.57 7.34
* AKR is mGy/min
A-34
Continuous kV 77.00 77.00 78.00 76.00 77.00 78.00 76.00 79.00 83.00 76.00 79.00 82.00 79.00 81.00 82.00
(General Pro- mA 1.90 2.90 3.50 0.84 1.30 1.50 3.90 6.10 9.80 1.90 3.00 4.90 21.00 41.00 49.00
file) AKR* 6.36 9.76 11.80 2.71 4.18 5.04 12.40 21.60 38.90 6.12 10.70 19.10 0.18 0.38 0.68
kV 79.00 81.00 82.00
Continuous
mA Same as above 21.00 40.00 48.00
(Spine Profile)
AKR* 0.45 0.93 1.67
kV 79.00 79.00 80.00 77.00 78.00 78.00 78.00 81.00 86.00
77.00 81.00 86.00
4 PPS mA 5.70 8.90 11.00 1.10 1.60 1.90 16.00 25.00 35.00
8.10 12.00 17.00
AKR* 2.85 4.41 5.45 0.61 0.89 1.05 7.44 12.50 20.80
3.74 6.26 10.30
kV 78.00 79.00 79.00 78.00 78.00 79.00 79.00 82.00 88.00
79.00 82.00 87.00
8 PPS mA 5.70 8.70 11.00 2.20 3.40 4.10 17.00 26.00 36.00
8.40 13.00 18.00
AKR* 4.78 7.41 8.99 2.01 3.00 3.59 13.80 23.30 38.90
7.00 11.50 19.20
kV 78.00 79.00 79.00 77.00 78.00 78.00 83.00 86.00 94.00
82.00 86.00 94.00
15 PPS mA 5.70 8.80 10.00 2.20 3.40 4.00 19.00 29.00 38.00
9.40 14.00 19.00
AKR* 6.20 9.41 10.80 2.63 3.83 4.54 22.20 37.60 61.00
11.30 18.80 30.80
Low Dose Digital
kV 67.00 70.00 72.00 67.00 69.00 70.00
Continuous mA 13.00 20.00 17.00 7.30 11.00 17.00
AKR* 29.60 50.80 47.90 16.60 28.60 43.00
N/A
kV 68.00 71.00 74.00 68.00 70.00 72.00
8 PPS mA 14.00 21.00 17.00 7.90 12.00 17.00
AKR* 7.76 12.60 12.20 4.45 7.46 10.90
N/A
kV 71.00 73.00 79.00 70.00 73.00 76.00 74.00 77.00 85.00 75.00 76.00 75.00
15 PPS mA 17.00 22.00 18.00 9.10 14.00 18.00 84.00 130.00 150.00 36.00 53.00 73.00
AKR* 12.80 18.80 19.40 7.05 12.10 16.90 30.20 52.40 77.80 13.60 21.00 27.30
kV 74.00 78.00 86.00 75.00 76.00 75.00
30 PPS mA N/A 86.00 132.00 150.00 36.00 54.00 74.00
AKR* 61.50 108.00 158.00 27.80 42.30 55.50
kV 95.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00
Continuous mA 6.50 8.90 11.00 4.60 6.80 8.40 1.40 2.50 3.70 0.93 1.70 2.40
AKR* 35.50 48.10 56.90 24.90 36.50 45.20 7.71 13.60 19.70 5.03 8.97 13.20
kV 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00
8 PPS mA 6.90 9.40 11.00 4.70 7.10 8.80 3.90 7.10 10.00 2.40 4.30 6.30
AKR* 9.37 12.50 14.40 6.59 9.64 11.80 5.40 9.39 13.20 3.49 5.84 8.36
kV 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 93.00 94.00 94.00
15 PPS mA 11.00 15.00 17.00 7.80 11.00 14.00 3.90 7.10 10.00 2.30 4.20 6.30
AKR* 17.70 23.90 28.00 13.30 18.20 22.40 6.99 12.00 16.50 4.60 7.53 10.80
* AKR is mGy/min
A-35
31cm Cardiac with grid - International 2 (2020-09-09)
kV 79.00 79.00 81.00 79.00 79.00 81.00 77.00 81.00 85.00 77.00 81.00 85.00 79.00 81.00 82.00
Continuous mA 2.10 3.10 4.20 0.90 1.40 1.90 4.10 6.50 11.00 2.00 3.20 5.40 21.00 41.00 49.00
AKR 7.14 11.00 15.70 3.14 4.91 6.86 13.50 24.00 45.80 6.75 12.00 22.90 0.18 0.38 0.68
kV 79.00 80.00 81.00 78.00 79.00 81.00 79.00 83.00 90.00 79.00 83.00 90.00
4 PPS mA 5.70 9.10 12.00 2.40 3.70 4.90 17.00 27.00 38.00 8.60 13.00 19.00
AKR 2.80 4.52 6.25 1.21 1.86 2.59 8.23 14.20 25.00 4.24 7.15 12.50
kV 78.00 80.00 81.00 78.00 79.00 80.00 80.00 84.00 93.00 81.00 84.00 93.00
8 PPS mA 5.70 8.90 12.00 2.30 3.50 4.60 18.00 28.00 38.00 8.90 14.00 19.00 N/A
AKR 4.80 7.61 10.30 2.03 3.09 4.21 15.30 26.70 46.00 7.85 13.30 23.10
kV 78.00 79.00 80.00 77.00 78.00 80.00 84.00 89.00 102.00 84.00 89.00 101.00
15 PPS mA 5.70 8.90 11.00 2.20 3.50 4.60 20.00 32.00 38.00 10.00 16.00 19.00
AKR 6.13 9.64 12.60 2.61 3.94 5.27 24.80 43.60 72.00 12.40 21.80 36.40
Low Dose Digital
kV 68.00 71.00 76.00 68.00 71.00 73.00
Continuous mA 15.00 21.00 18.00 8.10 13.00 17.00
AKR 34.70 54.90 56.20 19.10 33.30 49.80
N/A
kV 69.00 72.00 78.00 69.00 72.00 75.00
8 PPS mA 15.00 22.00 18.00 8.70 13.00 18.00 N/A
AKR 8.95 13.80 14.40 5.10 8.51 12.70
kV 72.00 75.00 84.00 71.00 75.00 81.00 75.00 80.00 92.00 76.00 77.00 77.00
15 PPS mA 18.00 22.00 19.00 9.80 15.00 18.00 91.00 134.00 150.00 38.00 57.00 82.00
AKR 14.20 20.30 22.40 7.89 13.60 20.00 34.10 58.90 90.80 15.00 23.40 32.70
kV 76.00 80.00 91.00 76.00 78.00 78.00
30 PPS mA N/A 91.00 135.00 150.00 38.00 58.00 82.00
AKR 68.80 119.00 182.00 30.20 47.50 66.70
* AKR is mGy/min
A-36
Continuous kV 64.00 66.00 68.00 63.00 66.00 68.00 62.00 67.00 71.00 62.00 67.00 71.00 66.00 68.00 70.00
(General Pro- mA 1.20 1.90 2.40 0.53 0.82 1.10 2.40 4.10 6.80 1.20 2.00 3.40 12.00 28.00 51.00
file) AKR* 2.46 4.13 5.61 1.02 1.75 2.42 4.44 9.35 18.40 2.15 4.60 9.07 0.06 0.16 0.31
kV 66.00 68.00 70.00
Continuous
mA Same as above 12.00 28.00 50.00
(Spine Profile)
AKR* 0.16 0.41 0.77
kV 65.00 68.00 69.00 64.00 66.00 68.00 64.00 69.00
74.00 63.00 69.00 74.00
4 PPS mA 3.60 5.60 6.90 0.67 1.10 1.30 10.00 17.00
24.00 5.00 8.20 12.00
AKR* 1.07 1.81 2.38 0.23 0.37 0.49 2.69 5.47
9.60 1.35 2.74 4.76
kV 65.00 67.00 69.00 64.00 67.00 69.00 64.00 70.00
75.00 64.00 70.00 75.00
8 PPS mA 3.60 5.50 6.80 1.40 2.20 2.70 10.00 17.00
24.00 5.20 8.60 12.00
AKR* 1.81 3.05 4.01 0.76 1.25 1.67 4.95 10.20
17.60 2.52 5.12 8.78
kV 65.00 67.00 69.00 64.00 66.00 68.00 67.00 73.00
79.00 68.00 73.00 78.00
15 PPS mA 3.60 5.60 6.90 1.40 2.20 2.70 12.00 19.00
27.00 5.90 9.70 13.00
AKR* 2.32 3.91 5.13 1.00 1.63 2.14 7.91 16.00
27.70 4.20 8.44 13.70
Low Dose Digital
kV 60.00 63.00 64.00 60.00 63.00 64.00
Continuous mA 5.60 8.90 9.90 2.70 5.40 9.20
AKR* 9.32 16.80 20.10 4.43 10.10 18.10
N/A
kV 61.00 64.00 65.00 61.00 63.00 64.00
8 PPS mA 6.20 10.00 11.00 2.90 6.00 10.00
AKR* 2.53 4.61 5.31 1.21 2.79 4.77
N/A
kV 62.00 65.00 67.00 62.00 65.00 66.00 63.00 67.00 71.00 65.00 67.00 67.00
15 PPS mA 7.70 13.00 14.00 3.80 7.80 12.00 41.00 74.00 119.00 20.00 33.00 47.00
AKR* 4.23 8.00 9.00 2.14 4.85 7.82 9.29 20.00 37.40 5.05 9.14 12.90
kV 63.00 67.00 71.00 65.00 67.00 67.00
30 PPS mA N/A 41.00 76.00 121.00 20.00 33.00 48.00
AKR* 19.00 41.20 77.10 10.20 18.40 26.40
kV 85.00 88.00 89.00 85.00 88.00 89.00 85.00 88.00 89.00 85.00 88.00 89.00
Continuous mA 3.50 5.90 7.80 2.40 4.40 6.30 0.92 1.80 2.80 0.61 1.20 1.80
AKR* 14.60 26.70 36.50 9.94 19.70 29.40 3.84 8.20 13.10 2.55 5.40 8.63
kV 85.00 89.00 90.00 85.00 88.00 90.00 84.00 87.00 89.00 84.00 87.00 89.00
8 PPS mA 3.60 6.30 8.30 2.40 4.50 6.60 2.50 5.00 7.70 1.50 3.00 4.70
AKR* 3.87 7.14 9.67 2.72 5.20 7.77 2.75 5.56 8.79 1.80 3.53 5.51
kV 85.00 89.00 89.00 85.00 88.00 89.00 84.00 87.00 89.00 83.00 87.00 89.00
15 PPS mA 5.70 9.90 13.00 3.80 7.40 10.00 2.50 4.90 7.80 1.50 3.00 4.70
AKR* 7.65 13.90 18.10 5.27 10.50 14.50 3.59 7.13 11.40 2.39 4.60 7.09
* AKR is mGy/min
A-37
31cm Cardiac without grid - International 2 (2020-09-09)
kV 65.00 67.00 69.00 66.00 68.00 69.00 63.00 68.00 73.00 63.00 68.00 73.00 66.00 68.00 70.00
Continuous mA 1.30 2.00 2.50 0.57 0.88 1.10 2.50 4.30 7.20 1.30 2.20 3.60 12.00 28.00 51.00
AKR 2.79 4.60 6.18 1.23 2.04 2.75 4.95 10.30 20.20 2.47 5.16 10.10 0.06 0.16 0.31
kV 65.00 68.00 70.00 65.00 67.00 69.00 65.00 70.00 76.00 65.00 70.00 76.00
4 PPS mA 3.60 5.60 7.00 1.50 2.30 2.90 11.00 18.00 25.00 5.30 8.80 12.00
AKR 1.07 1.82 2.45 0.47 0.78 1.04 3.00 6.11 10.80 1.53 3.12 5.39
kV 65.00 67.00 69.00 64.00 67.00 69.00 66.00 71.00 77.00 66.00 71.00 77.00
8 PPS mA 3.60 5.60 7.00 1.40 2.20 2.80 11.00 18.00 26.00 5.50 9.10 13.00 N/A
AKR 1.80 3.11 4.17 0.79 1.29 1.73 5.52 11.20 19.90 2.82 5.76 9.94
kV 65.00 67.00 69.00 64.00 66.00 69.00 69.00 74.00 81.00 69.00 74.00 81.00
15 PPS mA 3.60 5.60 7.00 1.40 2.20 2.80 12.00 20.00 29.00 6.20 10.00 15.00
AKR 2.32 3.95 5.31 1.02 1.64 2.20 8.80 17.80 32.00 4.66 8.92 16.00
Low Dose Digital
kV 61.00 63.00 65.00 61.00 63.00 64.00
Continuous mA 6.10 10.00 11.00 3.00 6.10 10.00
AKR 10.50 20.20 23.50 5.17 11.90 21.00
N/A
kV 61.00 64.00 66.00 61.00 64.00 65.00
8 PPS mA 6.70 11.00 12.00 3.20 6.80 11.00 N/A
AKR 2.82 5.33 6.18 1.37 3.23 5.54
kV 63.00 65.00 68.00 62.00 66.00 66.00 64.00 68.00 72.00 66.00 67.00 68.00
15 PPS mA 8.20 14.00 15.00 4.10 8.40 14.00 44.00 80.00 130.00 21.00 36.00 52.00
AKR 4.59 8.91 10.20 2.37 5.43 8.91 10.60 22.80 43.60 5.70 10.10 15.00
kV 64.00 68.00 72.00 66.00 68.00 68.00
30 PPS mA N/A 44.00 81.00 130.00 21.00 36.00 53.00
AKR 21.60 45.80 86.80 11.50 20.50 30.20
* AKR is mGy/min
A-38
kV 79.00 80.00 82.00 79.00 80.00 82.00 77.00 81.00 84.00 77.00 81.00 84.00 78.31 79.37 80.89
Continuous mA 2.90 3.60 5.10 1.30 1.60 2.20 5.60 9.30 15.00
2.80 4.60 7.30 26.22 49.25 47.33
AKR* 11.20 14.40 21.80 4.87 6.28 9.59 20.70 38.40 65.80 10.20 19.00 32.80 0.20 0.50 0.90
kV 80.00 81.00 83.00 79.00 81.00 84.00 80.00 86.00 96.00 79.00 86.00 97.00
4 PPS** mA 8.40 10.00 14.00 1.70 2.10 3.00 24.00 34.00 40.00 12.00 17.00 20.00
AKR* 4.63 5.82 8.60 1.03 1.35 2.05 12.90 21.90 33.90 6.42 10.90 17.30
kV 79.00 80.00 82.00 79.00 80.00 83.00 81.00 87.00 99.00 80.00 87.00 99.00
8 PPS mA 8.20 10.00 14.00 3.20 4.00 5.70 25.00 35.00 40.00 12.00 18.00 20.00 N/A
AKR* 7.73 9.77 14.50 3.13 4.07 6.12 24.10 41.10 63.00 11.90 20.40 31.60
kV 79.00 80.00 82.00 79.00 80.00 84.00 85.00 94.00 108.00 85.00 93.00 108.00
15 PPS mA 8.30 10.00 14.00 3.10 3.90 5.60 28.00 38.00 38.00 14.00 19.00 20.00
AKR* 9.96 12.10 18.30 3.92 5.12 7.85 39.00 66.70 92.90 19.10 33.00 48.80
Low Dose Digital
kV 73.00 80.00 89.00 72.00 77.00 87.00
Continuous mA 21.00 23.00 21.00 14.00 17.00 17.00
AKR* 66.20 90.10 111.00 43.90 63.50 83.20
N/A
kV 75.00 82.00 91.00 73.00 79.00 89.00
8 PPS mA 20.00 22.00 21.00 15.00 18.00 17.00 N/A
AKR* 16.20 22.20 27.30 11.50 16.20 20.80
kV 80.00 87.00 98.00 77.00 85.00 97.00 76.00 85.00 99.00 79.00 79.00 79.00
15 PPS mA 19.00 22.00 20.00 17.00 17.00 16.00 124.00 149.00 148.00 42.00 62.00 87.00
AKR* 22.80 31.60 38.90 18.20 24.10 30.90 53.00 84.30 120.00 20.50 29.70 40.80
kV 76.00 85.00 98.00 79.00 79.00 79.00
30 PPS mA N/A 125.00 149.00 149.00 42.00 62.00 88.00
AKR* 107.00 168.00 237.00 41.00 59.70 82.50
* AKR is mGy/min
A-39
kV 66.00 68.00 69.00 67.00 68.00 69.00 63.00 67.00 69.0063.00 67.00 69.00 66.80 68.75 70.08
Continuous mA 1.80 2.30 3.80 0.80 1.00 1.70 3.40 5.80 9.50 1.70 2.90 4.80 15.47 34.64 55.76
AKR* 4.00 5.47 9.65 1.83 2.50 4.25 6.69 13.20 24.00 3.36 6.65 12.00 0.08 0.19 0.40
kV 65.00 67.00 69.00 65.00 68.00 69.00 63.00 69.00 73.0064.00 69.00 73.00
4 PPS** mA 4.80 6.20 11.00 1.00 1.30 2.20 14.00 20.00 32.00 6.90 9.90 16.00
AKR* 1.46 2.04 3.57 0.35 0.50 0.83 3.75 6.88 12.60 1.93 3.46 6.27
kV 65.00 67.00 68.00 65.00 67.00 69.00 64.00 70.00 74.0065.00 70.00 74.00
8 PPS mA 4.80 6.10 10.00 1.90 2.40 4.20 14.00 21.00 33.00 7.20 10.00 16.00 N/A
AKR* 2.45 3.41 6.01 1.03 1.44 2.51 6.92 12.60 23.30 3.59 6.36 11.50
kV 65.00 67.00 68.00 65.00 67.00 69.00 68.00 74.00 78.0068.00 73.00 77.00
15 PPS mA 4.70 6.20 10.00 1.80 2.30 4.00 16.00 23.00 37.00 8.30 11.00 18.00
AKR* 3.06 4.40 7.53 1.29 1.82 3.14 11.20 20.30 36.60 6.08 10.10 18.30
Low Dose Digital
kV 63.00 65.00 69.00 63.00 65.00 68.00
Continuous mA 8.50 16.00 19.00 4.50 9.20 16.00
AKR* 16.30 34.70 48.10 8.74 19.70 38.90
N/A
kV 63.00 66.00 71.00 63.00 66.00 70.00
8 PPS mA 9.60 17.00 19.00 5.00 9.90 16.00 N/A
AKR* 4.43 8.92 12.00 2.39 5.16 9.91
kV 64.00 69.00 75.00 65.00 68.00 74.00 63.00 67.00 71.00 67.00 67.00 67.00
15 PPS mA 14.00 20.00 21.00 7.50 12.00 18.00 56.00 90.00 144.00 23.00 35.00 50.00
AKR* 8.20 14.30 18.90 4.91 8.84 15.40 13.00 25.90 46.60 6.45 10.10 14.20
kV 63.00 68.00 71.00 67.00 68.00 67.00
30 PPS mA N/A 56.00 91.00 144.00 23.00 35.00 50.00
AKR* 26.70 52.50 93.60 13.10 20.70 28.70
* AKR is mGy/min
A-40
kV 78.00 78.00 79.00 79.00 79.00 80.00 77.00 80.00 83.0077.00 80.00 83.00 79.00 80.00 80.00
Continuous mA 2.00 2.90 3.20 0.87 1.30 1.50 3.90 6.00 9.70
2.00 3.00 4.90 21.00 49.00 47.00
AKR* 6.84 10.20 11.40 3.06 4.57 5.30 12.90 21.60 38.60 6.50 11.00 19.50 0.16 0.51 0.80
kV 79.00 79.00 80.00 79.00 79.00 81.00 77.00 80.00 86.0078.00 80.00 86.00
4 PPS** mA 5.70 8.50 9.50 1.20 1.80 2.10 16.00 23.00 33.00 7.90 12.00 17.00
AKR* 2.87 4.22 4.83 0.70 1.00 1.23 7.12 11.70 19.30 3.73 5.98 9.76
kV 79.00 79.00 80.00 78.00 79.00 80.00 78.00 81.00 87.0079.00 81.00 87.00
8 PPS mA 5.60 8.40 9.20 2.20 3.30 3.80 16.00 24.00 34.00 8.20 12.00 17.00 N/A
AKR* 4.82 7.15 8.04 2.05 3.02 3.57 13.20 21.70 36.20 6.92 11.00 18.10
kV 79.00 79.00 80.00 78.00 79.00 81.00 82.00 85.00 93.0082.00 85.00 93.00
15 PPS mA 5.70 8.60 9.30 2.10 3.20 3.70 18.00 28.00 38.00 9.10 14.00 19.00
AKR* 6.31 9.35 10.30 2.61 3.78 4.57 21.40 35.00 58.30 10.90 17.30 29.40
Low Dose Digital
kV 68.00 70.00 74.00 67.00 70.00 71.00
Continuous mA 13.00 20.00 17.00 7.10 11.00 16.00
AKR* 31.20 52.80 51.70 16.80 28.20 43.90
N/A
kV 69.00 71.00 76.00 69.00 71.00 72.00
8 PPS mA 14.00 21.00 18.00 7.80 12.00 17.00 N/A
AKR* 8.21 13.10 13.00 4.59 7.41 11.10
kV 71.00 74.00 81.00 71.00 73.00 77.00 74.00 77.00 84.00 75.00 76.00 75.00
15 PPS mA 17.00 22.00 18.00 9.40 14.00 18.00 79.00 122.00 150.00 35.00 51.00 72.00
AKR* 13.50 19.70 20.70 7.75 12.10 17.30 28.60 48.60 75.10 13.60 20.40 27.50
kV 74.00 77.00 84.00 75.00 76.00 75.00
30 PPS mA N/A 80.00 123.00 150.00 35.00 52.00 72.00
AKR* 57.90 98.00 150.00 27.30 41.10 55.30
* AKR is mGy/min
A-41
kV 65.00 67.00 68.00 66.00 67.00 69.00 63.00 67.00 71.0063.00 67.00 71.00 66.00 67.00 69.00
Continuous mA 1.30 1.90 2.20 0.56 0.82 0.95 2.40 4.00 6.60 1.20 2.00 3.30 12.00 29.00 55.00
AKR* 2.78 4.25 5.28 1.22 1.92 2.37 4.86 9.31 17.70 2.45 4.70 8.98 0.06 0.16 0.31
kV 66.00 67.00 69.00 66.00 67.00 70.00 64.00 68.00 73.0064.00 68.00 73.00
4 PPS** mA 3.60 5.30 6.00 0.73 1.10 1.30 9.70 16.00 22.00 4.90 7.80 11.00
AKR* 1.12 1.75 2.10 0.28 0.42 0.52 2.69 5.01 8.53 1.37 2.57 4.39
kV 66.00 67.00 69.00 65.00 67.00 69.00 64.00 68.00 74.0065.00 69.00 74.00
8 PPS mA 3.50 5.30 6.00 1.40 2.10 2.40 10.00 16.00 23.00 5.10 8.10 11.00 N/A
AKR* 1.90 2.97 3.61 0.83 1.26 1.55 4.97 9.25 15.70 2.59 4.77 7.94
kV 65.00 67.00 69.00 65.00 67.00 69.00 68.00 72.00 77.0068.00 72.00 77.00
15 PPS mA 3.50 5.30 6.00 1.30 2.00 2.30 11.00 18.00 25.00 5.80 9.20 13.00
AKR* 2.44 3.81 4.66 1.05 1.59 1.97 7.91 14.60 24.90 4.28 7.94 12.50
Low Dose Digital
kV 61.00 63.00 65.00 61.00 63.00 64.00
Continuous mA 5.70 8.50 9.60 2.70 5.00 8.40
AKR* 10.40 17.00 20.70 4.81 9.92 17.40
N/A
kV 62.00 64.00 66.00 61.00 64.00 65.00
8 PPS mA 6.40 9.20 11.00 2.90 5.50 9.10 N/A
AKR* 2.84 4.44 5.46 1.31 2.66 4.53
kV 63.00 65.00 67.00 63.00 65.00 66.00 63.00 66.00 70.00 65.00 66.00 66.00
15 PPS mA 7.90 12.00 13.00 3.80 7.30 11.00 39.00 68.00 108.00 19.00 30.00 44.00
AKR* 4.71 7.87 9.29 2.28 4.74 7.58 9.61 18.70 33.70 5.20 8.51 12.40
kV 63.00 66.00 70.00 65.00 66.00 66.00
30 PPS mA N/A 40.00 69.00 109.00 19.00 31.00 45.00
AKR* 19.30 37.70 68.60 10.60 17.30 24.90
* AKR is mGy/min
A-42
International 3
Countries: Denmark
Continuous kV 79.00 80.00 82.00 79.00 80.00 82.00 78.00 84.00 90.00 78.00 84.00 90.00 79.00 81.00 83.00
(General Pro- mA 2.10 3.40 4.00 0.92 1.50 1.80 2.50 4.30 5.50 1.70 2.60 2.80 28.00 50.00 48.00
file) AKR* 7.14 12.40 15.00 3.28 5.54 6.78 8.42 17.70 26.60 5.92 10.60 13.30 0.20 0.47 0.77
kV 79.00 81.00 83.00
Continuous
mA Same as above 27.00 49.00 48.00
(Spine Profile)
AKR* 0.49 1.01 1.80
kV 78.00 79.00 80.00 77.00 78.00 79.00 78.00 84.00
91.00 78.00 84.00 91.00
4 PPS mA 5.60 9.30 11.00 1.10 1.80 2.00 8.30 18.00
25.00 4.10 9.10 12.00
AKR* 2.63 4.54 5.31 0.61 0.96 1.11 3.95 10.00
16.30 1.99 5.12 8.19
kV 77.00 79.00 80.00 77.00 78.00 79.00 79.00 86.00
93.00 79.00 85.00 92.00
8 PPS mA 5.50 9.20 10.00 2.20 3.70 4.20 8.70 19.00
25.00 4.30 9.40 13.00
AKR* 4.44 7.65 8.84 1.92 3.17 3.74 7.39 18.80
30.30 3.74 9.58 15.20
kV 77.00 79.00 79.00 77.00 78.00 79.00 84.00 91.00
99.00 82.00 91.00 98.00
15 PPS mA 5.50 9.30 10.00 2.20 3.70 4.20 6.80 16.00
22.00 3.10 8.00 11.00
AKR* 5.74 9.80 11.10 2.50 4.07 4.75 8.45 23.10
38.80 4.08 12.30 19.30
Low Dose Digital
kV 72.00 79.00 87.00 72.00 77.00 86.00
Continuous mA 21.00 23.00 21.00 13.00 17.00 17.00
AKR* 59.30 79.30 95.70 37.90 55.60 74.30
N/A
kV 74.00 80.00 90.00 74.00 79.00 89.00
8 PPS mA 21.00 23.00 21.00 15.00 17.00 17.00
AKR* 14.30 19.30 23.60 10.00 14.20 18.50
N/A
kV 79.00 86.00 96.00 77.00 84.00 96.00 74.00 81.00 93.00 77.00 78.00 77.00
15 PPS mA 20.00 22.00 20.00 17.00 17.00 16.00 113.00 148.00 149.00 39.00 57.00 79.00
AKR* 20.10 27.80 33.80 16.10 21.10 27.00 40.60 67.60 93.60 16.20 23.40 31.60
kV 74.00 82.00 93.00 78.00 78.00 77.00
30 PPS mA N/A 115.00 149.00 149.00 39.00 57.00 79.00
AKR* 83.60 136.00 188.00 32.40 47.10 63.80
kV 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00
Continuous mA 8.70 14.00 17.00 6.20 11.00 13.00 2.20 3.50 4.90 1.50 2.30 3.20
AKR* 41.60 65.00 80.40 29.70 49.80 64.00 10.50 16.70 23.40 7.00 11.10 15.40
kV 96.00 95.00 95.00 96.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 94.00 94.00 95.00
8 PPS mA 9.30 14.00 18.00 6.60 11.00 14.00 6.20 9.80 14.00 3.70 6.00 8.50
AKR* 11.00 16.40 20.10 8.03 12.70 16.10 7.36 11.20 15.60 4.66 7.16 9.91
kV 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 95.00
15 PPS mA 14.00 23.00 28.00 10.00 17.00 22.00 6.20 9.60 14.00 3.70 6.00 8.50
AKR* 21.00 32.30 39.40 15.10 24.80 31.50 9.47 14.00 19.50 6.08 9.23 12.70
* AKR is mGy/min
A-43
Continuous kV 67.00 70.00 72.00 68.00 71.00 72.00 66.00 73.00 78.00 66.00 73.00 78.00 68.00 72.00 74.00
(General Pro- mA 1.40 2.30 2.70 0.62 1.00 1.20 1.50 2.80 3.90 1.10 1.70 2.00 17.00 36.00 55.00
file) AKR* 3.26 6.05 7.54 1.47 2.70 3.37 3.38 8.14 13.30 2.36 4.92 6.71 0.08 0.20 0.41
kV 68.00 72.00 74.00
Continuous
mA Same as above 17.00 35.00 54.00
(Spine Profile)
AKR* 0.20 0.48 0.96
kV 66.00 69.00 71.00 66.00 69.00 70.00 66.00 73.00
78.00 66.00 73.00 78.00
4 PPS mA 3.70 6.20 7.30 0.73 1.20 1.40 4.90 12.00
17.00 2.50 6.00 8.70
AKR* 1.16 2.17 2.73 0.27 0.47 0.58 1.52 4.63
8.09 0.79 2.38 4.12
kV 66.00 69.00 71.00 65.00 69.00 70.00 67.00 74.00
79.00 67.00 74.00 79.00
8 PPS mA 3.70 6.10 7.20 1.50 2.40 2.90 5.10 12.00
18.00 2.50 6.30 9.10
AKR* 1.95 3.63 4.58 0.86 1.53 1.89 2.86 8.62
15.20 1.47 4.51 7.70
kV 66.00 69.00 71.00 65.00 68.00 70.00 70.00 77.00
84.00 70.00 77.00 84.00
15 PPS mA 3.70 6.20 7.30 1.50 2.40 2.90 3.30 11.00
17.00 1.60 5.60 8.80
AKR* 2.51 4.69 5.89 1.12 1.95 2.44 2.76 11.10
20.70 1.49 5.85 11.00
Low Dose Digital
kV 63.00 68.00 74.00 63.00 67.00 72.00
Continuous mA 10.00 19.00 21.00 4.90 11.00 17.00
AKR* 20.20 45.50 61.90 9.69 24.60 47.40
N/A
kV 64.00 69.00 76.00 64.00 68.00 74.00
8 PPS mA 12.00 20.00 21.00 5.80 12.00 18.00
AKR* 5.83 11.40 15.60 2.82 6.68 12.10
N/A
kV 65.00 72.00 81.00 66.00 71.00 79.00 64.00 70.00 75.00 68.00 69.00 69.00
15 PPS mA 17.00 21.00 22.00 8.20 14.00 18.00 51.00 103.00 149.00 24.00 39.00 56.00
AKR* 10.40 17.60 23.60 5.49 11.10 18.10 12.50 31.60 55.70 7.04 11.90 17.30
kV 64.00 70.00 75.00 67.00 69.00 69.00
30 PPS mA N/A 52.00 104.00 149.00 24.00 39.00 57.00
AKR* 25.50 64.70 112.00 14.00 24.10 34.90
kV 84.00 86.00 87.00 84.00 86.00 87.00 84.00 85.00 87.00 84.00 86.00 87.00
Continuous mA 4.30 8.90 12.00 3.00 6.70 9.60 1.30 2.20 3.40 0.85 1.40 2.30
AKR* 15.50 33.90 47.50 10.60 25.20 38.10 4.57 8.11 13.40 3.03 5.42 8.88
kV 85.00 87.00 89.00 84.00 87.00 88.00 83.00 85.00 87.00 83.00 85.00 87.00
8 PPS mA 4.60 9.30 13.00 3.10 7.00 10.00 3.50 6.00 9.50 2.10 3.70 5.90
AKR* 4.29 8.81 12.50 3.03 6.75 10.00 3.22 5.61 9.08 2.09 3.53 5.74
kV 84.00 86.00 88.00 84.00 86.00 88.00 83.00 85.00 87.00 82.00 85.00 87.00
15 PPS mA 7.30 14.00 20.00 4.90 11.00 16.00 3.50 6.00 9.30 2.10 3.60 5.80
AKR* 8.39 16.60 23.90 5.74 12.60 19.10 4.16 7.17 11.30 2.75 4.57 7.34
* AKR is mGy/min
A-44
Continuous kV 77.00 77.00 78.00 76.00 77.00 78.00 74.00 80.00 85.00 74.00 80.00 85.00 79.00 82.00 82.00
(General Pro- mA 1.50 2.80 4.00 0.65 1.20 1.70 2.60 3.60 5.40 1.80 2.50 3.80 21.00 41.00 49.00
file) AKR* 4.99 9.50 13.50 2.10 4.05 5.82 7.77 13.30 22.90 5.39 9.27 15.90 0.18 0.37 0.67
kV 79.00 82.00 82.00
Continuous
mA Same as above 21.00 40.00 48.00
(Spine Profile)
AKR* 0.45 0.93 1.67
kV 79.00 79.00 80.00 77.00 78.00 79.00 76.00 82.00
90.00 75.00 82.00 90.00
4 PPS mA 4.50 8.60 12.00 0.84 1.60 2.20 6.80 12.00
17.00 3.30 6.20 8.20
AKR* 2.25 4.30 5.93 0.50 0.87 1.19 3.05 6.56
11.20 1.48 3.34 5.64
kV 78.00 79.00 80.00 77.00 78.00 79.00 77.00 83.00
92.00 76.00 83.00 92.00
8 PPS mA 4.40 8.50 12.00 1.80 3.30 4.70 7.20 13.00
17.00 3.40 6.40 8.50
AKR* 3.74 7.23 9.95 1.61 2.92 4.08 5.73 12.20
20.90 2.80 6.23 10.60
kV 78.00 79.00 79.00 77.00 78.00 79.00 81.00 88.00
98.00 79.00 87.00 98.00
15 PPS mA 4.40 8.50 12.00 1.70 3.30 4.60 5.90 9.20
12.00 2.60 4.20 5.80
AKR* 4.82 9.17 12.30 2.11 3.73 5.19 6.96 13.10
21.60 3.27 6.25 11.20
Low Dose Digital
kV 67.00 70.00 72.00 67.00 69.00 71.00
Continuous mA 13.00 20.00 17.00 7.30 11.00 17.00
AKR* 29.60 50.80 47.90 16.60 28.60 43.40
N/A
kV 68.00 71.00 74.00 68.00 70.00 72.00
8 PPS mA 14.00 21.00 17.00 7.90 12.00 17.00
AKR* 7.76 12.60 12.20 4.44 7.44 10.90
N/A
kV 71.00 73.00 79.00 70.00 73.00 76.00 74.00 77.00 85.00 75.00 76.00 75.00
15 PPS mA 17.00 22.00 18.00 9.10 14.00 18.00 64.00 101.00 134.00 23.00 53.00 73.00
AKR* 12.70 18.80 19.40 7.06 12.00 16.90 22.80 40.40 69.30 8.80 21.00 27.40
kV 74.00 77.00 85.00 75.00 76.00 75.00
30 PPS mA N/A 65.00 103.00 135.00 23.00 54.00 74.00
AKR* 46.60 83.60 141.00 17.60 42.70 55.60
kV 95.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00
Continuous mA 6.50 8.90 11.00 4.60 6.80 8.40 1.40 2.50 3.70 0.93 1.70 2.40
AKR* 35.50 48.10 56.90 24.90 36.50 45.20 7.71 13.60 19.70 5.03 8.97 13.20
kV 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00
8 PPS mA 6.90 9.40 11.00 4.70 7.10 8.80 3.90 7.10 10.00 2.40 4.30 6.30
AKR* 9.37 12.50 14.40 6.59 9.64 11.80 5.40 9.39 13.20 3.49 5.84 8.36
kV 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 93.00 94.00 94.00
15 PPS mA 11.00 15.00 17.00 7.80 11.00 14.00 3.90 7.10 10.00 2.30 4.20 6.30
AKR* 17.70 23.90 28.00 13.30 18.20 22.40 6.99 12.00 16.50 4.60 7.53 10.80
* AKR is mGy/min
A-45
kV 79.00 79.00 81.00 79.00 79.00 81.00 75.00 82.00 89.00 76.00 82.00 88.00 79.00 82.00 82.00
Continuous mA 1.60 3.10 4.40 0.72 1.40 1.90 2.90 4.00 6.00 2.00 2.80 4.20 21.00 41.00 49.00
AKR 5.65 10.80 16.40 2.50 4.79 7.24 8.97 15.50 27.50 6.32 10.80 19.10 0.18 0.37 0.67
kV 78.00 80.00 82.00 78.00 79.00 81.00 78.00 84.00 95.00 77.00 84.00 95.00
4 PPS mA 4.50 8.80 13.00 1.90 3.60 5.20 7.40 14.00 18.00 3.60 6.80 9.10
AKR 2.22 4.41 6.53 0.98 1.82 2.76 3.47 7.60 13.70 1.71 3.88 6.91
kV 78.00 80.00 81.00 77.00 79.00 81.00 79.00 86.00 97.00 78.00 86.00 97.00
8 PPS mA 4.50 8.70 12.00 1.80 3.40 5.00 7.80 14.00 19.00 3.70 7.20 9.40 N/A
AKR 3.75 7.43 10.90 1.63 3.01 4.57 6.52 14.50 25.70 3.19 7.43 13.10
kV 78.00 79.00 81.00 77.00 78.00 80.00 83.00 91.00 104.00 81.00 90.00 104.00
15 PPS mA 4.40 8.70 12.00 1.70 3.40 4.90 7.00 10.00 16.00 3.10 5.20 7.90
AKR 4.78 9.43 13.40 2.12 3.84 5.68 8.49 15.40 32.20 3.96 8.16 16.80
Low Dose Digital
kV 68.00 71.00 76.00 68.00 71.00 73.00
Continuous mA 15.00 21.00 18.00 8.00 13.00 17.00
AKR 34.70 54.80 56.40 19.00 33.30 49.80
N/A
kV 69.00 72.00 78.00 69.00 72.00 75.00
8 PPS mA 15.00 22.00 18.00 8.70 13.00 18.00 N/A
AKR 8.92 13.70 14.50 5.10 8.51 12.70
kV 72.00 75.00 84.00 71.00 75.00 81.00 75.00 80.00 91.00 76.00 77.00 77.00
15 PPS mA 18.00 22.00 19.00 9.80 15.00 18.00 73.00 110.00 142.00 26.00 57.00 81.00
AKR 14.10 20.30 22.50 7.87 13.60 19.90 27.00 47.80 85.40 10.50 23.40 32.70
kV 75.00 80.00 92.00 76.00 78.00 77.00
30 PPS mA N/A 73.00 111.00 143.00 27.00 58.00 82.00
AKR 54.90 97.00 174.00 21.60 47.40 66.50
* AKR is mGy/min
A-46
Continuous kV 64.00 66.00 68.00 63.00 66.00 68.00 62.00 68.00 73.00 61.00 68.00 73.00 66.00 68.00 70.00
(General Pro- mA 0.99 1.80 2.50 0.43 0.79 1.10 1.30 2.20 3.50 0.91 1.50 2.40 12.00 28.00 51.00
file) AKR* 1.96 4.00 5.97 0.81 1.69 2.56 2.34 5.14 9.89 1.60 3.53 6.87 0.06 0.17 0.32
kV 66.00 68.00 70.00
Continuous
mA Same as above 12.00 28.00 50.00
(Spine Profile)
AKR* 0.16 0.40 0.77
kV 65.00 68.00 69.00 63.00 66.00 68.00 63.00 69.00
77.00 63.00 69.00 77.00
4 PPS mA 2.90 5.40 7.60 0.54 1.00 1.40 3.70 8.10
11.00 1.80 4.00 5.40
AKR* 0.86 1.75 2.62 0.19 0.36 0.53 1.01 2.75
4.93 0.51 1.35 2.50
kV 65.00 67.00 69.00 64.00 67.00 68.00 64.00 70.00
78.00 64.00 70.00 78.00
8 PPS mA 2.80 5.30 7.50 1.10 2.10 3.00 3.80 8.30
11.00 1.90 4.10 5.70
AKR* 1.45 2.95 4.38 0.62 1.21 1.80 1.86 5.08
9.19 0.94 2.53 4.69
kV 65.00 67.00 69.00 64.00 66.00 68.00 66.00 73.00
82.00 66.00 73.00 81.00
15 PPS mA 2.80 5.40 7.60 1.10 2.10 3.00 2.30 4.90
6.60 1.10 2.40 3.20
AKR* 1.86 3.79 5.62 0.83 1.58 2.32 1.72 4.43
8.08 0.93 2.31 4.12
Low Dose Digital
kV 60.00 63.00 64.00 60.00 63.00 64.00
Continuous mA 5.60 8.90 9.90 2.70 5.30 9.30
AKR* 9.31 16.90 19.90 4.43 10.10 18.30
N/A
kV 61.00 64.00 65.00 61.00 63.00 64.00
8 PPS mA 6.20 10.00 11.00 2.90 6.00 10.00
AKR* 2.52 4.61 5.28 1.20 2.79 4.76
N/A
kV 62.00 65.00 67.00 62.00 65.00 66.00 63.00 66.00 70.00 65.00 67.00 66.00
15 PPS mA 7.70 13.00 14.00 3.80 7.80 12.00 21.00 56.00 107.00 12.00 33.00 47.00
AKR* 4.23 7.90 8.98 2.14 4.84 7.79 4.86 15.10 33.50 3.08 8.98 12.80
kV 63.00 67.00 71.00 65.00 67.00 67.00
30 PPS mA N/A 21.00 57.00 108.00 12.00 33.00 48.00
AKR* 9.84 31.00 68.40 6.17 18.40 26.40
kV 85.00 88.00 89.00 85.00 88.00 89.00 85.00 88.00 89.00 85.00 88.00 89.00
Continuous mA 3.50 5.90 7.80 2.40 4.40 6.30 0.92 1.80 2.80 0.61 1.20 1.80
AKR* 14.60 26.70 36.50 9.94 19.70 29.40 3.84 8.20 13.10 2.55 5.40 8.63
kV 85.00 89.00 90.00 85.00 88.00 90.00 84.00 87.00 89.00 84.00 87.00 89.00
8 PPS mA 3.60 6.30 8.30 2.40 4.50 6.60 2.50 5.00 7.70 1.50 3.00 4.70
AKR* 3.87 7.14 9.67 2.72 5.20 7.77 2.75 5.56 8.79 1.80 3.53 5.51
kV 85.00 89.00 89.00 85.00 88.00 89.00 84.00 87.00 89.00 83.00 87.00 89.00
15 PPS mA 5.70 9.90 13.00 3.80 7.40 10.00 2.50 4.90 7.80 1.50 3.00 4.70
AKR* 7.65 13.90 18.10 5.27 10.50 14.50 3.59 7.13 11.40 2.39 4.60 7.09
* AKR is mGy/min
A-47
kV 66.00 67.00 69.00 66.00 68.00 70.00 63.00 69.00 74.00 63.00 69.00 75.00 66.00 68.00 70.00
Continuous mA 1.00 1.90 2.70 0.45 0.86 1.20 1.40 2.30 3.80 0.98 1.60 2.70 12.00 28.00 51.00
AKR 2.21 4.47 6.86 0.97 1.99 3.07 2.67 5.68 11.30 1.85 3.94 8.02 0.06 0.17 0.32
kV 65.00 67.00 70.00 65.00 67.00 69.00 64.00 71.00 79.00 64.00 70.00 79.00
4 PPS mA 2.90 5.40 7.80 1.20 2.20 3.20 3.90 8.50 12.00 1.90 4.20 6.00
AKR 0.86 1.75 2.72 0.38 0.75 1.15 1.12 3.05 5.72 0.58 1.52 2.94
kV 65.00 67.00 69.00 64.00 67.00 69.00 65.00 72.00 80.00 65.00 71.00 80.00
8 PPS mA 2.80 5.40 7.70 1.10 2.20 3.10 4.10 8.80 12.00 2.00 4.30 6.20 N/A
AKR 1.44 3.01 4.57 0.64 1.25 1.89 2.09 5.74 10.70 1.07 2.83 5.52
kV 64.00 67.00 69.00 64.00 66.00 69.00 68.00 75.00 85.00 67.00 74.00 84.00
15 PPS mA 2.80 5.40 7.80 1.10 2.10 3.00 2.50 5.20 7.30 1.20 2.50 3.50
AKR 1.86 3.82 5.89 0.84 1.59 2.40 1.91 5.02 9.42 1.04 2.57 4.78
Low Dose Digital
kV 61.00 63.00 65.00 61.00 63.00 64.00
Continuous mA 6.10 10.00 11.00 3.00 6.10 10.00
AKR 10.40 20.10 23.20 5.13 11.80 21.30
N/A
kV 61.00 64.00 66.00 61.00 64.00 65.00
8 PPS mA 6.70 11.00 12.00 3.20 6.80 11.00 N/A
AKR 2.81 5.31 6.18 1.37 3.21 5.58
kV 63.00 65.00 68.00 62.00 66.00 66.00 63.00 68.00 72.00 65.00 67.00 68.00
15 PPS mA 8.20 14.00 15.00 4.10 8.40 14.00 23.00 59.00 113.00 12.00 35.00 53.00
AKR 4.57 8.81 10.20 2.37 5.39 8.96 5.58 16.60 37.90 3.23 10.10 15.10
kV 64.00 68.00 72.00 65.00 68.00 68.00
30 PPS mA N/A 23.00 59.00 114.00 12.00 36.00 53.00
AKR 11.20 33.70 76.70 6.41 20.60 30.40
* AKR is mGy/min
A-48
kV 79.00 80.00 82.00 79.00 80.00 82.00 78.00 84.00 91.00 78.00 84.00 90.00 78.43 79.41 80.89
Continuous mA 2.10 3.50 4.20 0.92 1.60 1.80 2.60 4.50 5.70
1.80 2.70 2.80 26.26 49.34 47.24
AKR* 8.19 14.30 17.80 3.53 6.28 7.86 9.73 20.30 31.20 6.69 12.10 15.40 0.21 0.50 0.90
kV 80.00 81.00 83.00 79.00 81.00 84.00 80.00 87.00 95.00 80.00 87.00 94.00
4 PPS** mA 6.10 10.00 12.00 1.20 2.10 2.60 9.40 20.00 26.00 4.60 9.80 13.00
AKR* 3.38 5.78 7.23 0.79 1.32 1.75 5.26 13.10 21.50 2.58 6.62 10.80
kV 79.00 80.00 82.00 79.00 80.00 83.00 81.00 88.00 97.00 81.00 88.00 96.00
8 PPS mA 6.00 10.00 12.00 2.40 4.00 4.70 9.70 20.00 27.00 4.80 10.00 13.00 N/A
AKR* 5.69 9.68 12.00 2.38 4.04 5.15 9.64 24.50 40.40 4.82 12.40 19.90
kV 79.00 80.00 82.00 78.00 80.00 83.00 86.00 94.00 103.00 85.00 94.00 103.00
15 PPS mA 6.10 9.90 12.00 2.20 3.80 4.60 8.80 18.00 24.00 4.00 8.90 12.00
AKR* 7.36 12.10 15.20 2.97 5.05 6.51 13.00 30.80 53.10 6.05 16.40 26.50
Low Dose Digital
kV 73.00 79.00 89.00 72.00 77.00 86.00
Continuous mA 21.00 23.00 21.00 14.00 17.00 17.00
AKR* 66.00 89.70 110.00 43.40 63.50 83.10
N/A
kV 75.00 82.00 91.00 73.00 79.00 89.00
8 PPS mA 20.00 23.00 21.00 15.00 18.00 17.00 N/A
AKR* 16.10 22.20 27.40 11.50 16.10 20.80
kV 80.00 87.00 98.00 77.00 85.00 97.00 76.00 85.00 99.00 79.00 79.00 79.00
15 PPS mA 19.00 22.00 20.00 17.00 17.00 16.00 124.00 149.00 149.00 42.00 62.00 87.00
AKR* 22.80 31.70 38.80 18.10 23.90 30.90 52.90 84.30 120.00 20.50 29.70 40.80
kV 76.00 85.00 98.00 79.00 79.00 79.00
30 PPS mA N/A 125.00 149.00 149.00 42.00 63.00 87.00
AKR* 107.00 168.00 237.00 40.80 60.10 82.10
* AKR is mGy/min
A-49
kV 66.00 68.00 69.00 67.00 68.00 70.00 65.00 70.00 75.0065.00 70.00 75.00 66.80 68.63 70.04
Continuous mA 1.40 2.10 2.40 0.61 0.94 1.10 1.50 2.60 3.40 1.00 1.60 1.70 15.41 34.30 55.52
AKR* 3.10 5.10 6.16 1.41 2.32 2.82 3.16 6.80 10.60 2.21 4.11 5.41 0.08 0.19 0.40
kV 65.00 68.00 69.00 66.00 68.00 70.00 65.00 71.00 75.0065.00 71.00 76.00
4 PPS** mA 3.70 5.70 6.70 0.78 1.20 1.50 4.80 11.00 16.00 2.40 5.50 8.00
AKR* 1.13 1.89 2.32 0.29 0.47 0.60 1.47 3.95 6.62 0.76 2.08 3.52
kV 65.00 67.00 69.00 65.00 67.00 69.00 66.00 71.00 76.0066.00 72.00 76.00
8 PPS mA 3.60 5.60 6.60 1.40 2.20 2.60 5.00 11.00 16.00 2.50 5.70 8.10 N/A
AKR* 1.88 3.15 3.88 0.82 1.34 1.66 2.77 7.28 12.40 1.39 3.84 6.35
kV 65.00 67.00 69.00 65.00 67.00 69.00 69.00 75.00 80.0069.00 75.00 80.00
15 PPS mA 3.60 5.60 6.60 1.40 2.20 2.60 3.30 10.00 16.00 1.60 5.20 8.20
AKR* 2.40 4.02 4.97 1.05 1.70 2.20 2.68 9.44 17.40 1.45 5.02 9.23
Low Dose Digital
kV 63.00 65.00 69.00 63.00 65.00 68.00
Continuous mA 8.50 16.00 19.00 4.50 9.20 16.00
AKR* 16.50 34.70 48.10 8.65 19.60 39.20
N/A
kV 63.00 66.00 70.00 63.00 66.00 70.00
8 PPS mA 9.70 17.00 19.00 5.00 9.90 16.00 N/A
AKR* 4.50 8.96 12.00 2.40 5.15 9.91
kV 64.00 69.00 74.00 65.00 68.00 74.00 63.00 67.00 71.00 67.00 67.00 67.00
15 PPS mA 14.00 20.00 21.00 7.50 12.00 18.00 49.00 90.00 143.00 23.00 35.00 50.00
AKR* 8.22 14.30 18.80 4.93 8.85 15.40 11.40 25.80 46.00 6.47 10.20 14.20
kV 63.00 68.00 71.00 67.00 68.00 67.00
30 PPS mA N/A 49.00 91.00 144.00 23.00 35.00 50.00
AKR* 23.30 52.30 92.90 13.10 20.70 28.90
* AKR is mGy/min
A-50
kV 78.00 78.00 79.00 79.00 79.00 80.00 75.00 81.00 85.0075.00 81.00 86.00 79.00 80.00 80.00
Continuous mA 1.60 2.80 4.00 0.69 1.30 1.80 2.70 3.60 5.40 1.90 2.50 3.80 21.00 49.00 48.00
AKR* 5.41 9.85 14.20 2.43 4.50 6.51 8.34 13.50 23.20 5.87 9.40 16.50 0.17 0.50 0.81
kV 79.00 79.00 80.00 79.00 79.00 81.00 76.00 81.00 90.0076.00 82.00 90.00
4 PPS** mA 4.40 8.30 12.00 0.92 1.70 2.50 6.50 12.00 16.00 3.20 6.10 8.10
AKR* 2.22 4.11 5.88 0.58 0.98 1.42 2.93 6.16 10.70 1.52 3.33 5.57
kV 78.00 79.00 80.00 79.00 79.00 80.00 77.00 82.00 91.0077.00 83.00 92.00
8 PPS mA 4.30 8.20 11.00 1.70 3.30 4.70 6.90 12.00 15.00 3.40 6.30 7.60 N/A
AKR* 3.77 6.97 9.88 1.68 2.94 4.27 5.60 11.40 17.80 2.84 6.17 9.40
kV 79.00 79.00 80.00 78.00 79.00 81.00 81.00 88.00 98.0081.00 87.00 98.00
15 PPS mA 4.40 8.30 11.00 1.60 3.10 4.50 5.70 8.60 10.00 2.70 4.20 5.40
AKR* 4.95 9.07 12.50 2.15 3.71 5.40 6.80 12.10 18.70 3.54 6.29 10.60
Low Dose Digital
kV 68.00 70.00 74.00 67.00 70.00 71.00
Continuous mA 13.00 20.00 17.00 7.10 11.00 16.00
AKR* 31.10 52.80 51.60 16.90 28.20 43.80
N/A
kV 69.00 71.00 75.00 69.00 71.00 72.00
8 PPS mA 14.00 21.00 17.00 7.80 12.00 17.00 N/A
AKR* 8.20 13.10 13.00 4.60 7.44 11.20
kV 71.00 74.00 81.00 71.00 73.00 76.00 74.00 77.00 84.00 75.00 76.00 75.00
15 PPS mA 17.00 22.00 18.00 9.40 14.00 18.00 59.00 94.00 131.00 22.00 51.00 72.00
AKR* 13.40 19.70 20.70 7.75 12.10 17.20 21.40 37.40 64.50 8.63 20.40 27.60
kV 74.00 77.00 84.00 75.00 76.00 75.00
30 PPS mA N/A 60.00 94.00 132.00 22.00 51.00 72.00
AKR* 43.70 75.10 132.00 17.30 41.00 55.40
* AKR is mGy/min
A-51
kV 65.00 67.00 68.00 66.00 67.00 69.00 63.00 68.00 73.0063.00 68.00 73.00 66.00 68.00 69.00
Continuous mA 1.00 1.80 2.50 0.45 0.81 1.10 1.30 2.10 3.40 0.94 1.50 2.40 12.00 30.00 56.00
AKR* 2.19 4.11 6.11 0.99 1.87 2.78 2.64 5.27 9.71 1.85 3.67 6.91 0.06 0.15 0.31
kV 66.00 67.00 69.00 66.00 67.00 69.00 63.00 68.00 76.0064.00 68.00 76.00
4 PPS** mA 2.90 5.20 7.20 0.59 1.10 1.50 3.70 7.70 10.00 1.80 3.80 5.20
AKR* 0.91 1.71 2.53 0.23 0.41 0.61 1.03 2.63 4.48 0.55 1.34 2.39
kV 65.00 67.00 69.00 66.00 67.00 69.00 64.00 69.00 77.0064.00 69.00 77.00
8 PPS mA 2.80 5.10 7.20 1.10 2.10 2.90 3.80 8.00 10.00 1.90 3.90 5.10 N/A
AKR* 1.53 2.89 4.30 0.69 1.23 1.83 1.90 4.86 7.91 1.02 2.46 4.23
kV 65.00 67.00 69.00 65.00 67.00 69.00 67.00 73.00 81.0067.00 73.00 81.00
15 PPS mA 2.80 5.20 7.30 1.10 2.00 2.80 2.30 4.70 5.70 1.20 2.40 2.80
AKR* 1.99 3.72 5.53 0.88 1.54 2.29 1.84 4.30 6.85 1.05 2.36 3.71
Low Dose Digital
kV 61.00 64.00 65.00 61.00 63.00 64.00
Continuous mA 5.70 8.40 9.60 2.70 5.00 8.40
AKR* 10.40 17.00 20.40 4.97 9.94 17.30
N/A
kV 62.00 64.00 66.00 61.00 64.00 65.00
8 PPS mA 6.40 9.30 11.00 2.90 5.50 9.10 N/A
AKR* 2.82 4.46 5.47 1.31 2.68 4.54
kV 63.00 65.00 67.00 63.00 65.00 66.00 63.00 66.00 70.00 65.00 66.00 66.00
15 PPS mA 7.90 12.00 13.00 3.70 7.20 12.00 21.00 53.00 102.00 12.00 30.00 45.00
AKR* 4.71 7.86 9.26 2.27 4.73 7.62 5.07 14.60 32.20 3.26 8.52 12.40
kV 63.00 66.00 70.00 65.00 66.00 67.00
30 PPS mA N/A 21.00 54.00 103.00 12.00 31.00 45.00
AKR* 10.20 29.70 65.10 6.54 17.30 24.90
* AKR is mGy/min
A-52
International 4
Countries: Japan
Continuous kV 79.00 80.00 82.00 79.00 81.00 82.00 77.00 81.00 83.00 77.00 81.00 83.00 79.00 81.00 83.00
(General Pro- mA 3.50 5.10 7.00 1.50 2.30 3.10 5.40 9.10 14.00 2.70 4.50 7.10 28.00 49.00 48.00
file) AKR* 11.90 18.70 26.70 5.33 8.33 11.80 17.90 33.40 56.40 8.95 16.60 28.30 0.20 0.48 0.78
Continuous kV 79.00 81.00 83.00
file) AKR* 0.51 1.02 1.74
kV 78.00 79.00 81.00 77.00 79.00 80.00 78.00 84.00 91.00 77.00 84.00 91.00
4 PPS mA 9.50 14.00 19.00 1.80 2.70 3.80 22.00 31.00 40.00 11.00 15.00 20.00
AKR* 4.39 6.72 9.68 0.93 1.37 1.97 10.10 16.90 26.50 5.04 8.49 13.30
kV 77.00 79.00 80.00 77.00 79.00 80.00 79.00 85.00 94.00 79.00 85.00 93.00
8 PPS mA 9.40 14.00 19.00 3.80 5.60 7.90 23.00 32.00 40.00 11.00 16.00 20.00
AKR* 7.41 11.20 16.30 3.08 4.72 6.86 18.60 31.80 48.80 9.31 15.80 24.30
kV 77.00 79.00 80.00 77.00 79.00 80.00 83.00 90.00 103.00 82.00 90.00 102.00
15 PPS mA 9.50 14.00 19.00 3.70 5.60 7.90 26.00 37.00 40.00 13.00 18.00 20.00
AKR* 9.52 14.00 20.40 3.94 6.11 8.72 29.70 52.00 75.40 15.00 25.70 38.30
Low Dose Digital
kV 72.00 79.00 88.00 72.00 77.00 86.00
Continuous mA 21.00 23.00 21.00 13.00 17.00 17.00
AKR* 59.40 79.40 95.90 37.90 55.60 73.90
N/A
kV 74.00 80.00 90.00 73.00 79.00 89.00
8 PPS mA 21.00 23.00 21.00 14.00 17.00 17.00
AKR* 14.30 19.40 23.60 9.80 14.20 18.40
N/A
kV 78.00 86.00 96.00 77.00 84.00 96.00 74.00 82.00 93.00 77.00 78.00 77.00
15 PPS mA 20.00 22.00 20.00 17.00 17.00 16.00 113.00 149.00 126.00 39.00 57.00 72.00
AKR* 20.00 27.80 33.80 16.10 21.10 26.90 40.80 67.80 78.10 16.00 23.40 28.70
kV 74.00 82.00 93.00 78.00 78.00 77.00
30 PPS mA N/A 115.00 149.00 126.00 39.00 57.00 72.00
AKR* 83.50 136.00 159.00 32.40 47.30 58.10
kV 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00
Continuous mA 8.70 14.00 17.00 6.20 11.00 13.00 2.20 3.50 4.90 1.50 2.30 3.20
AKR* 41.60 65.00 80.40 29.70 49.80 64.00 10.50 16.70 23.40 7.00 11.10 15.40
kV 96.00 95.00 95.00 96.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 94.00 94.00 95.00
8 PPS mA 9.30 14.00 18.00 6.60 11.00 14.00 6.20 9.80 14.00 3.70 6.00 8.50
AKR* 11.00 16.40 20.10 8.03 12.70 16.10 7.36 11.20 15.60 4.66 7.16 9.91
kV 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 95.00
15 PPS mA 14.00 23.00 28.00 10.00 17.00 22.00 6.20 9.60 14.00 3.70 6.00 8.50
AKR* 21.00 32.30 39.40 15.10 24.80 31.50 9.47 14.00 19.50 6.08 9.23 12.70
* AKR is mGy/min
A-53
21cm with grid (Cardiac profile) - International 4 (2020-09-09)
kV 79.00 80.00 82.00 79.00 81.00 82.00 77.00 81.00 83.00 77.00 81.00 83.00 79.00 81.00 83.00
Continuous mA 4.30 5.90 7.00 1.50 2.30 3.10 5.50 9.10 14.00 2.70 4.50 7.10 28.00 49.00 48.00
AKR 14.60 21.50 26.70 5.36 8.33 11.80 17.90 33.40 56.40 8.85 16.50 28.20 0.20 0.48 0.78
kV 77.00 79.00 81.00 77.00 79.00 81.00 78.00 84.00 91.00 77.00 84.00 91.00
4 PPS mA 12.00 16.00 19.00 3.90 5.80 8.10 22.00 31.00 40.00 11.00 15.00 20.00
AKR 5.29 7.83 9.63 1.85 2.86 4.13 10.00 16.90 26.40 5.05 8.48 13.30
kV 77.00 79.00 80.00 77.00 79.00 80.00 79.00 85.00 94.00 79.00 85.00 93.00
8 PPS mA 11.00 16.00 19.00 3.80 5.60 7.90 23.00 32.00 40.00 11.00 16.00 20.00 N/A
AKR 8.87 13.20 16.30 3.08 4.73 6.86 18.60 31.80 48.90 9.29 15.70 24.40
kV 77.00 79.00 80.00 76.00 79.00 80.00 83.00 90.00 103.00 82.00 90.00 102.00
15 PPS mA 11.00 16.00 19.00 3.70 5.60 7.90 26.00 37.00 40.00 13.00 18.00 20.00
AKR 11.20 16.50 20.40 3.94 6.13 8.82 29.90 51.60 76.00 14.90 25.70 38.40
Low Dose Digital
kV 73.00 79.00 88.00 73.00 78.00 87.00
Continuous mA 21.00 23.00 21.00 14.00 17.00 17.00
AKR 59.70 79.80 96.30 40.00 57.30 75.10
N/A
kV 74.00 81.00 90.00 74.00 79.00 89.00
8 PPS mA 21.00 23.00 21.00 15.00 18.00 17.00 N/A
AKR 14.20 19.50 23.60 9.99 14.40 18.50
kV 79.00 86.00 97.00 77.00 84.00 96.00 74.00 81.00 93.00 77.00 78.00 77.00
15 PPS mA 20.00 22.00 20.00 17.00 17.00 16.00 113.00 148.00 126.00 39.00 57.00 71.00
AKR 20.20 27.90 34.10 16.40 21.20 27.00 40.80 67.40 78.40 16.00 23.50 28.70
kV 74.00 82.00 93.00 78.00 78.00 77.00
30 PPS mA N/A 115.00 149.00 126.00 39.00 57.00 72.00
AKR 83.30 136.00 159.00 32.40 47.30 58.00
* AKR is mGy/min
A-54
Continuous kV 66.00 70.00 72.00 67.00 70.00 72.00 64.00 69.00 72.00 64.00 69.00 72.00 68.00 72.00 74.00
(General Pro- mA 2.30 3.70 5.50 1.00 1.60 2.50 3.50 6.30 11.00 1.80 3.10 5.30 18.00 36.00 55.00
file) AKR* 5.20 9.55 15.20 2.35 4.21 6.74 7.21 16.00 29.90 3.66 7.88 14.80 0.08 0.20 0.41
kV 68.00 72.00 73.00
Continuous
mA Same as above 18.00 36.00 54.00
(Spine Profile)
AKR* 0.21 0.49 1.03
kV 66.00 69.00 71.00 65.00 68.00 70.00 65.00 72.00
76.00 65.00 72.00 76.00
4 PPS mA 6.30 10.00 15.00 1.20 1.90 2.90 14.00 22.00
36.00 7.20 11.00 18.00
AKR* 1.89 3.39 5.43 0.40 0.70 1.09 4.06 8.16
15.40 2.07 4.04 7.63
kV 65.00 69.00 70.00 65.00 68.00 70.00 66.00 73.00
77.00 66.00 73.00 77.00
8 PPS mA 6.20 9.80 15.00 2.50 4.00 6.10 15.00 22.00
37.00 7.40 11.00 18.00
AKR* 3.18 5.66 9.11 1.33 2.37 3.80 7.47 15.10
28.40 3.84 7.48 14.00
kV 65.00 69.00 70.00 65.00 68.00 70.00 69.00 77.00
82.00 69.00 76.00 82.00
15 PPS mA 6.30 9.80 15.00 2.50 4.00 6.10 17.00 25.00
40.00 8.50 12.00 20.00
AKR* 4.10 7.13 11.40 1.69 3.02 4.89 12.00 24.20
44.50 6.40 12.00 22.10
Low Dose Digital
kV 63.00 68.00 74.00 63.00 67.00 72.00
Continuous mA 10.00 19.00 21.00 4.90 11.00 17.00
AKR* 20.10 45.30 62.00 9.69 24.40 47.50
N/A
kV 64.00 69.00 76.00 64.00 68.00 74.00
8 PPS mA 12.00 20.00 21.00 5.80 12.00 18.00
AKR* 5.77 11.30 15.60 2.82 6.59 12.10
N/A
kV 65.00 72.00 81.00 66.00 71.00 79.00 64.00 70.00 75.00 68.00 69.00 69.00
15 PPS mA 17.00 21.00 22.00 8.20 14.00 18.00 59.00 103.00 109.00 24.00 39.00 51.00
AKR* 10.30 17.50 23.60 5.49 11.00 18.20 14.20 31.60 40.10 6.98 11.90 15.60
kV 64.00 70.00 75.00 68.00 69.00 70.00
30 PPS mA N/A 60.00 104.00 109.00 24.00 39.00 51.00
AKR* 29.20 64.30 81.00 14.00 24.10 31.50
kV 84.00 86.00 87.00 84.00 86.00 87.00 84.00 85.00 87.00 84.00 86.00 87.00
Continuous mA 4.30 8.90 12.00 3.00 6.70 9.60 1.30 2.20 3.40 0.85 1.40 2.30
AKR* 15.50 33.90 47.50 10.60 25.20 38.10 4.57 8.11 13.40 3.03 5.42 8.88
kV 85.00 87.00 89.00 84.00 87.00 88.00 83.00 85.00 87.00 83.00 85.00 87.00
8 PPS mA 4.60 9.30 13.00 3.10 7.00 10.00 3.50 6.00 9.50 2.10 3.70 5.90
AKR* 4.29 8.81 12.50 3.03 6.75 10.00 3.22 5.61 9.08 2.09 3.53 5.74
kV 84.00 86.00 88.00 84.00 86.00 88.00 83.00 85.00 87.00 82.00 85.00 87.00
15 PPS mA 7.30 14.00 20.00 4.90 11.00 16.00 3.50 6.00 9.30 2.10 3.60 5.80
AKR* 8.39 16.60 23.90 5.74 12.60 19.10 4.16 7.17 11.30 2.75 4.57 7.34
* AKR is mGy/min
A-55
kV 67.00 70.00 72.00 67.00 70.00 72.00 64.00 69.00 72.00 64.00 69.00 72.00 68.00 72.00 74.00
Continuous mA 2.60 4.50 5.50 1.00 1.60 2.40 3.50 6.30 11.00 1.80 3.20 5.30 18.00 36.00 55.00
AKR 5.92 11.70 15.20 2.37 4.26 6.67 7.23 15.90 29.80 3.62 7.92 14.70 0.08 0.20 0.41
kV 66.00 69.00 71.00 65.00 69.00 71.00 65.00 72.00 76.00 65.00 72.00 76.00
4 PPS mA 7.10 12.00 15.00 2.60 4.10 6.30 14.00 22.00 36.00 7.20 11.00 18.00
AKR 2.12 4.13 5.44 0.80 1.43 2.30 4.05 8.16 15.40 2.08 4.08 7.62
kV 65.00 69.00 70.00 65.00 69.00 70.00 66.00 73.00 77.00 66.00 73.00 77.00
8 PPS mA 7.00 12.00 15.00 2.50 4.00 6.00 15.00 22.00 37.00 7.50 11.00 18.00 N/A
AKR 3.58 6.94 9.12 1.33 2.39 3.80 7.49 15.10 28.40 3.86 7.54 14.00
kV 66.00 69.00 70.00 65.00 68.00 70.00 69.00 77.00 82.00 69.00 77.00 81.00
15 PPS mA 7.10 12.00 15.00 2.50 4.00 6.10 17.00 25.00 40.00 8.50 13.00 20.00
AKR 4.60 8.69 11.40 1.69 3.04 4.88 12.00 24.20 44.50 6.40 12.10 22.10
Low Dose Digital
kV 64.00 68.00 75.00 64.00 67.00 73.00
Continuous mA 11.00 19.00 21.00 5.60 11.00 17.00
AKR 22.20 46.00 63.40 11.20 26.40 48.80
N/A
kV 64.00 69.00 76.00 64.00 68.00 74.00
8 PPS mA 12.00 20.00 21.00 5.80 12.00 18.00 N/A
AKR 5.79 11.40 15.70 2.80 6.77 12.30
kV 65.00 72.00 81.00 66.00 71.00 79.00 64.00 70.00 75.00 68.00 69.00 69.00
15 PPS mA 17.00 21.00 22.00 8.40 14.00 18.00 59.00 102.00 109.00 24.00 39.00 51.00
AKR 10.50 17.50 23.60 5.62 11.30 18.30 14.20 31.60 40.10 6.98 12.00 15.60
kV 64.00 70.00 75.00 68.00 69.00 69.00
30 PPS mA N/A 59.00 104.00 109.00 24.00 39.00 51.00
AKR 28.90 64.00 81.10 14.00 24.30 31.40
* AKR is mGy/min
A-56
Continuous kV 77.00 80.00 80.00 76.00 79.00 80.00 76.00 79.00 82.00 76.00 79.00 82.00 79.00 81.00 82.00
(General Pro- mA 2.40 3.70 5.30 1.00 1.60 2.30 3.90 6.10 9.80 1.90 3.00 4.90 21.00 41.00 49.00
file) AKR* 7.95 13.30 19.20 3.34 5.69 8.28 12.40 21.60 38.40 6.11 10.60 19.00 0.18 0.38 0.68
kV 79.00 81.00 82.00
Continuous
mA Same as above 21.00 40.00 48.00
(Spine Profile)
AKR* 0.45 0.92 1.66
kV 79.00 81.00 81.00 77.00 80.00 81.00 78.00 81.00 86.00
77.00 81.00 86.00
4 PPS mA 7.20 11.00 16.00 1.40 2.10 3.00 16.00 25.00 35.00
8.10 12.00 17.00
AKR* 3.49 5.68 8.13 0.74 1.17 1.64 7.46 12.50 20.80
3.77 6.25 10.30
kV 78.00 81.00 81.00 78.00 80.00 81.00 79.00 82.00 88.00
79.00 82.00 87.00
8 PPS mA 7.10 11.00 15.00 2.80 4.30 6.20 17.00 26.00 36.00
8.40 13.00 18.00
AKR* 5.87 9.53 13.70 2.46 3.98 5.69 13.90 23.20 38.90
6.98 11.60 19.20
kV 78.00 81.00 81.00 77.00 80.00 81.00 83.00 86.00 94.00
83.00 86.00 93.00
15 PPS mA 7.10 11.00 15.00 2.80 4.30 6.30 19.00 29.00 38.00
9.70 14.00 19.00
AKR* 7.60 12.00 17.10 3.16 5.12 7.36 22.40 37.80 61.10
11.80 18.80 30.40
Low Dose Digital
kV 67.00 70.00 72.00 67.00 69.00 70.00
Continuous mA 13.00 20.00 17.00 7.30 11.00 17.00
AKR* 29.40 50.60 47.80 16.50 28.60 43.10
N/A
kV 68.00 71.00 74.00 68.00 70.00 72.00
8 PPS mA 14.00 21.00 17.00 7.90 12.00 17.00
AKR* 7.75 12.70 12.20 4.43 7.44 10.90
N/A
kV 71.00 73.00 79.00 70.00 73.00 76.00 74.00 77.00 85.00 75.00 76.00 75.00
15 PPS mA 17.00 22.00 18.00 9.10 14.00 18.00 74.00 130.00 150.00 31.00 53.00 73.00
AKR* 12.70 18.90 19.40 7.04 12.10 16.80 26.30 52.50 78.00 11.90 20.90 27.30
kV 74.00 77.00 86.00 75.00 76.00 75.00
30 PPS mA N/A 75.00 132.00 150.00 32.00 54.00 74.00
AKR* 53.70 107.00 158.00 24.40 42.30 55.50
kV 95.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00
Continuous mA 6.50 8.90 11.00 4.60 6.80 8.40 1.40 2.50 3.70 0.93 1.70 2.40
AKR* 35.50 48.10 56.90 24.90 36.50 45.20 7.71 13.60 19.70 5.03 8.97 13.20
kV 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00
8 PPS mA 6.90 9.40 11.00 4.70 7.10 8.80 3.90 7.10 10.00 2.40 4.30 6.30
AKR* 9.37 12.50 14.40 6.59 9.64 11.80 5.40 9.39 13.20 3.49 5.84 8.36
kV 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 93.00 94.00 94.00
15 PPS mA 11.00 15.00 17.00 7.80 11.00 14.00 3.90 7.10 10.00 2.30 4.20 6.30
AKR* 17.70 23.90 28.00 13.30 18.20 22.40 6.99 12.00 16.50 4.60 7.53 10.80
* AKR is mGy/min
A-57
kV 79.00 81.00 83.00 78.00 82.00 83.00 77.00 81.00 85.00 77.00 81.00 85.00 79.00 81.00 82.00
Continuous mA 2.90 4.50 5.80 1.10 1.70 2.60 4.10 6.50 11.00 2.00 3.20 5.40 21.00 41.00 49.00
AKR 9.93 16.80 22.50 3.86 6.53 10.00 13.50 24.00 45.60 6.72 11.90 22.70 0.18 0.38 0.68
kV 79.00 82.00 83.00 78.00 81.00 83.00 79.00 83.00 90.00 79.00 83.00 90.00
4 PPS mA 8.10 13.00 16.00 2.90 4.60 6.80 17.00 27.00 38.00 8.60 13.00 19.00
AKR 3.90 6.59 8.83 1.47 2.45 3.75 8.23 14.30 24.90 4.21 7.12 12.50
kV 78.00 81.00 83.00 78.00 81.00 83.00 80.00 84.00 93.00 80.00 84.00 93.00
8 PPS mA 8.10 13.00 16.00 2.80 4.40 6.60 18.00 28.00 38.00 8.90 14.00 19.00 N/A
AKR 6.66 11.20 14.90 2.45 4.09 6.27 15.30 26.70 45.90 7.84 13.20 23.10
kV 78.00 81.00 82.00 77.00 80.00 82.00 84.00 89.00 102.00 84.00 88.00 101.00
15 PPS mA 8.10 12.00 16.00 2.80 4.40 6.60 20.00 32.00 38.00 10.00 16.00 19.00
AKR 8.50 13.90 18.50 3.14 5.20 8.03 24.80 43.50 71.80 12.40 21.60 36.10
Low Dose Digital
kV 68.00 71.00 76.00 68.00 71.00 73.00
Continuous mA 14.00 21.00 18.00 8.10 13.00 17.00
AKR 34.30 55.10 56.00 19.10 33.10 49.70
N/A
kV 69.00 72.00 78.00 69.00 72.00 75.00
8 PPS mA 15.00 22.00 18.00 8.70 13.00 18.00 N/A
AKR 8.93 13.70 14.40 5.10 8.51 12.70
kV 72.00 75.00 84.00 71.00 75.00 81.00 75.00 80.00 91.00 76.00 77.00 77.00
15 PPS mA 18.00 22.00 19.00 9.80 15.00 18.00 80.00 134.00 150.00 33.00 57.00 81.00
AKR 14.20 20.20 22.50 7.91 13.60 19.90 29.90 58.70 90.50 13.20 23.40 32.80
kV 75.00 80.00 91.00 76.00 78.00 77.00
30 PPS mA N/A 80.00 135.00 150.00 33.00 58.00 82.00
AKR 60.30 119.00 182.00 26.60 47.40 66.10
* AKR is mGy/min
A-58
Continuous kV 64.00 67.00 69.00 63.00 67.00 69.00 62.00 67.00 71.00 62.00 67.00 71.00 66.00 69.00 71.00
(General Pro- mA 1.50 2.50 3.70 0.65 1.10 1.60 2.40 4.10 6.80 1.20 2.00 3.40 12.00 26.00 47.00
file) AKR* 3.01 5.76 9.08 1.25 2.43 3.93 4.44 9.35 18.30 2.15 4.54 9.04 0.07 0.15 0.30
kV 66.00 69.00 71.00
Continuous
mA Same as above 12.00 25.00 45.00
(Spine Profile)
AKR* 0.16 0.38 0.73
kV 65.00 69.00 70.00 64.00 68.00 69.00 64.00 69.00
74.00 64.00 69.00 74.00
4 PPS mA 4.50 7.40 11.00 0.84 1.40 2.10 10.00 17.00
24.00 5.00 8.30 12.00
AKR* 1.30 2.53 3.87 0.27 0.50 0.78 2.68 5.49
9.58 1.36 2.76 4.75
kV 65.00 69.00 70.00 64.00 68.00 70.00 64.00 70.00
75.00 64.00 70.00 75.00
8 PPS mA 4.40 7.30 11.00 1.80 2.90 4.30 10.00 17.00
24.00 5.20 8.60 12.00
AKR* 2.19 4.24 6.44 0.92 1.71 2.65 4.97 10.20
17.60 2.52 5.11 8.77
kV 65.00 69.00 70.00 64.00 68.00 70.00 67.00 73.00
79.00 68.00 73.00 78.00
15 PPS mA 4.40 7.40 11.00 1.80 2.90 4.30 12.00 19.00
27.00 5.90 9.70 13.00
AKR* 2.82 5.50 8.06 1.20 2.21 3.44 7.86 16.00
27.70 4.17 8.39 13.80
Low Dose Digital
kV 60.00 63.00 64.00 60.00 63.00 64.00
Continuous mA 5.60 8.90 9.90 2.70 5.40 9.20
AKR* 9.32 16.90 20.00 4.44 10.10 18.00
N/A
kV 61.00 64.00 65.00 61.00 63.00 64.00
8 PPS mA 6.20 10.00 11.00 2.90 6.00 10.00
AKR* 2.53 4.63 5.29 1.20 2.78 4.74
N/A
kV 62.00 65.00 67.00 62.00 65.00 66.00 63.00 67.00 70.00 65.00 67.00 66.00
15 PPS mA 7.70 13.00 14.00 3.70 7.70 12.00 36.00 74.00 118.00 18.00 33.00 47.00
AKR* 4.22 8.04 9.01 2.11 4.83 7.79 8.21 20.10 37.20 4.56 9.08 12.80
kV 63.00 67.00 71.00 65.00 67.00 67.00
30 PPS mA N/A 36.00 76.00 120.00 18.00 33.00 48.00
AKR* 16.70 41.30 76.40 9.08 18.40 26.20
kV 85.00 88.00 89.00 85.00 88.00 89.00 85.00 88.00 89.00 85.00 88.00 89.00
Continuous mA 3.50 5.90 7.80 2.40 4.40 6.30 0.92 1.80 2.80 0.61 1.20 1.80
AKR* 14.60 26.70 36.50 9.94 19.70 29.40 3.84 8.20 13.10 2.55 5.40 8.63
kV 85.00 89.00 90.00 85.00 88.00 90.00 84.00 87.00 89.00 84.00 87.00 89.00
8 PPS mA 3.60 6.30 8.30 2.40 4.50 6.60 2.50 5.00 7.70 1.50 3.00 4.70
AKR* 3.87 7.14 9.67 2.72 5.20 7.77 2.75 5.56 8.79 1.80 3.53 5.51
kV 85.00 89.00 89.00 85.00 88.00 89.00 84.00 87.00 89.00 83.00 87.00 89.00
15 PPS mA 5.70 9.90 13.00 3.80 7.40 10.00 2.50 4.90 7.80 1.50 3.00 4.70
AKR* 7.65 13.90 18.10 5.27 10.50 14.50 3.59 7.13 11.40 2.39 4.60 7.09
* AKR is mGy/min
A-59
kV 65.00 69.00 71.00 65.00 69.00 71.00 63.00 68.00 73.00 63.00 68.00 73.00 66.00 69.00 71.00
Continuous mA 1.80 3.20 3.90 0.71 1.20 1.70 2.50 4.30 7.20 1.30 2.10 3.60 12.00 26.00 47.00
AKR 3.70 7.67 10.30 1.50 2.80 4.58 4.92 10.30 20.40 2.46 5.13 10.20 0.07 0.15 0.30
kV 65.00 69.00 71.00 64.00 68.00 70.00 65.00 70.00 76.00 65.00 70.00 76.00
4 PPS mA 4.90 9.00 11.00 1.80 3.00 4.60 11.00 18.00 25.00 5.30 8.80 13.00
AKR 1.41 3.02 3.97 0.56 1.04 1.67 3.00 6.08 10.80 1.53 3.12 5.44
kV 65.00 69.00 70.00 64.00 68.00 70.00 66.00 71.00 77.00 66.00 71.00 77.00
8 PPS mA 4.80 8.90 11.00 1.80 2.90 4.40 11.00 18.00 26.00 5.50 9.10 13.00 N/A
AKR 2.38 5.08 6.70 0.94 1.74 2.79 5.52 11.20 20.00 2.83 5.75 10.00
kV 65.00 69.00 70.00 64.00 68.00 70.00 69.00 74.00 81.00 69.00 74.00 81.00
15 PPS mA 4.80 9.00 11.00 1.80 2.90 4.40 12.00 20.00 30.00 6.20 10.00 15.00
AKR 3.05 6.57 8.36 1.21 2.23 3.57 8.77 17.70 32.30 4.65 8.89 16.10
Low Dose Digital
kV 61.00 63.00 65.00 61.00 63.00 64.00
Continuous mA 6.10 10.00 11.00 3.10 6.20 10.00
AKR 10.50 20.00 23.30 5.31 12.00 21.20
N/A
kV 61.00 64.00 66.00 61.00 64.00 65.00
8 PPS mA 6.70 11.00 12.00 3.20 6.80 11.00 N/A
AKR 2.80 5.31 6.21 1.37 3.21 5.60
kV 63.00 65.00 68.00 62.00 66.00 66.00 64.00 68.00 72.00 66.00 67.00 68.00
15 PPS mA 8.20 14.00 15.00 4.10 8.50 14.00 39.00 80.00 131.00 19.00 36.00 53.00
AKR 4.61 8.91 10.20 2.37 5.45 8.98 9.37 22.60 44.00 5.10 10.10 15.10
kV 64.00 68.00 72.00 66.00 68.00 68.00
30 PPS mA N/A 39.00 81.00 131.00 19.00 36.00 53.00
AKR 19.00 45.90 87.80 10.20 20.50 30.40
* AKR is mGy/min
A-60
kV 79.00 81.00 83.00 79.00 80.00 83.00 77.00 81.00 84.00 77.00 81.00 84.00 78.31 79.76 81.36
Continuous mA 3.60 5.30 7.10 1.60 2.30 3.10 5.60 9.30 15.00
2.80 4.60 7.30 27.00 48.95 47.58
AKR* 13.80 21.80 30.90 5.98 9.41 13.60 20.60 38.30 65.70 10.20 18.80 32.70 0.21 0.50 0.82
kV 79.00 81.00 84.00 79.00 81.00 84.00 80.00 86.00 96.00 79.00 86.00 96.00
4 PPS** mA 10.00 15.00 20.00 2.10 3.10 4.10 24.00 34.00 40.00 12.00 17.00 20.00
AKR* 5.48 8.65 12.20 1.23 1.89 2.70 13.00 22.00 34.00 6.38 11.00 17.40
kV 79.00 81.00 83.00 79.00 81.00 83.00 81.00 88.00 100.00 80.00 87.00 99.00
8 PPS mA 10.00 15.00 20.00 4.00 6.00 7.90 25.00 35.00 40.00 12.00 17.00 20.00 N/A
AKR* 9.21 14.50 20.50 3.79 5.98 8.46 24.10 41.30 63.30 11.90 20.30 31.70
kV 78.00 81.00 83.00 78.00 81.00 84.00 85.00 94.00 108.00 85.00 93.00 108.00
15 PPS mA 10.00 15.00 20.00 3.80 5.80 7.60 28.00 38.00 39.00 14.00 19.00 20.00
AKR* 11.50 17.90 25.60 4.70 7.52 10.60 38.90 66.40 93.00 19.10 33.10 48.90
Low Dose Digital
kV 73.00 80.00 89.00 72.00 77.00 87.00
Continuous mA 21.00 23.00 21.00 14.00 17.00 17.00
AKR* 66.10 90.10 110.00 43.60 63.30 83.50
N/A
kV 75.00 82.00 91.00 74.00 79.00 89.00
8 PPS mA 20.00 22.00 21.00 15.00 18.00 17.00 N/A
AKR* 16.10 22.10 27.40 11.50 16.10 20.90
kV 80.00 87.00 98.00 77.00 85.00 97.00 76.00 85.00 97.00 79.00 79.00 79.00
15 PPS mA 19.00 22.00 20.00 17.00 17.00 16.00 124.00 149.00 124.00 42.00 62.00 73.00
AKR* 22.90 31.70 38.90 18.20 24.10 31.00 53.20 84.20 96.70 20.30 29.80 34.30
kV 76.00 85.00 98.00 79.00 79.00 79.00
30 PPS mA N/A 125.00 149.00 124.00 43.00 63.00 74.00
AKR* 107.00 169.00 197.00 41.20 60.10 69.30
* AKR is mGy/min
A-61
kV 66.00 68.00 69.00 66.00 68.00 69.00 63.00 67.00 69.00
63.00 67.00 69.00 66.41 68.44 69.61
Continuous mA 2.30 3.40 5.10 1.00 1.50 2.20 3.40 5.80 9.50 1.70 2.90 4.70 16.51 35.87 56.15
AKR* 4.98 8.24 12.60 2.22 3.67 5.59 6.66 13.20 23.90 3.37 6.64 11.90 0.08 0.19 0.40
kV 65.00 67.00 68.00 65.00 67.00 69.00 63.00 69.00 73.00
65.00 69.00 73.00
4 PPS** mA 6.20 9.50 14.00 1.30 1.90 2.90 14.00 20.00 32.00 15.00 9.90 16.00
AKR* 1.82 3.05 4.57 0.42 0.68 1.04 3.75 6.91 12.60 4.29 3.44 6.26
kV 64.00 67.00 68.00 64.00 67.00 68.00 64.00 70.00 74.00
65.00 70.00 74.00
8 PPS mA 6.10 9.30 14.00 2.40 3.70 5.50 14.00 21.00 33.00 7.20 10.00 16.00 N/A
AKR* 3.03 5.06 7.72 1.24 2.06 3.22 6.93 12.70 23.10 3.58 6.33 11.50
kV 64.00 67.00 68.00 64.00 67.00 68.00 68.00 74.00 78.00
68.00 73.00 77.00
15 PPS mA 6.10 9.40 13.00 2.30 3.50 5.30 16.00 23.00 37.00 8.20 11.00 18.00
AKR* 3.87 6.52 9.44 1.52 2.55 4.01 11.30 20.30 36.70 6.00 10.00 18.20
Low Dose Digital
kV 63.00 65.00 69.00 63.00 65.00 68.00
Continuous mA 8.30 16.00 19.00 11.00 9.20 16.00
AKR* 16.10 34.90 47.80 21.80 19.60 39.10
N/A
kV 63.00 66.00 71.00 63.00 66.00 70.00
8 PPS mA 9.70 17.00 19.00 5.10 9.90 16.00 N/A
AKR* 4.46 9.02 12.00 2.40 5.16 9.94
kV 64.00 69.00 75.00 65.00 68.00 74.00 63.00 68.00 71.00 67.00 68.00 67.00
15 PPS mA 13.00 20.00 21.00 7.50 12.00 18.00 56.00 90.00 93.00 23.00 35.00 40.00
AKR* 8.17 14.40 18.90 4.91 8.84 15.40 13.10 25.90 30.10 6.51 10.20 11.50
kV 63.00 68.00 71.00 67.00 68.00 67.00
30 PPS mA N/A 56.00 91.00 93.00 23.00 35.00 40.00
AKR* 26.50 52.70 60.30 13.10 20.70 23.20
* AKR is mGy/min
A-62
kV 78.00 80.00 81.00 78.00 81.00 81.00 77.00 80.00 83.0077.00 80.00 83.00 78.00 82.00 82.00
Continuous mA 2.40 3.60 5.30 1.10 1.60 2.40 3.90 6.00 9.60
2.00 3.00 4.80 21.00 45.00 47.00
AKR* 8.36 13.30 19.60 3.75 6.03 8.99 12.90 21.70 38.50 6.53 11.00 19.30 0.16 0.39 0.74
kV 79.00 81.00 81.00 78.00 81.00 82.00 77.00 80.00 85.0077.00 80.00 86.00
4 PPS** mA 7.00 11.00 15.00 1.50 2.20 3.20 16.00 24.00 33.00 7.90 12.00 16.00
AKR* 3.44 5.50 7.98 0.82 1.29 1.85 7.12 11.80 19.00 3.69 6.00 9.71
kV 78.00 81.00 81.00 78.00 81.00 82.00 78.00 81.00 87.0079.00 81.00 87.00
8 PPS mA 6.90 10.00 15.00 2.70 4.20 6.10 16.00 24.00 34.00 8.20 12.00 17.00 N/A
AKR* 5.84 9.28 13.40 2.46 3.93 5.81 13.20 21.80 35.40 6.93 11.00 18.10
kV 79.00 81.00 81.00 78.00 81.00 82.00 82.00 86.00 93.0082.00 85.00 93.00
15 PPS mA 7.00 10.00 15.00 2.60 4.00 5.90 18.00 28.00 38.00 9.10 14.00 19.00
AKR* 7.63 11.70 17.20 3.08 4.88 7.27 21.50 35.00 58.30 10.90 17.50 29.60
Low Dose Digital
kV 68.00 70.00 74.00 67.00 70.00 71.00
Continuous mA 13.00 20.00 17.00 7.10 11.00 16.00
AKR* 31.00 52.90 51.40 16.90 28.20 43.70
N/A
kV 69.00 71.00 76.00 68.00 71.00 72.00
8 PPS mA 14.00 21.00 17.00 7.80 12.00 17.00 N/A
AKR* 8.20 13.10 13.00 4.57 7.41 11.20
kV 71.00 74.00 81.00 71.00 74.00 77.00 74.00 77.00 83.00 75.00 76.00 75.00
15 PPS mA 17.00 22.00 18.00 9.40 14.00 18.00 69.00 122.00 141.00 31.00 52.00 67.00
AKR* 13.40 19.70 20.80 7.77 12.20 17.20 25.10 48.50 67.40 12.00 20.60 25.80
kV 74.00 77.00 85.00 75.00 76.00 76.00
30 PPS mA N/A 70.00 123.00 140.00 31.00 52.00 67.00
AKR* 50.70 98.40 144.00 24.50 41.50 51.80
* AKR is mGy/min
A-63
kV 65.00 68.00 69.00 65.00 68.00 69.00 63.00 67.00 71.0064.00 67.00 71.00 65.00 69.00 70.00
Continuous mA 1.60 2.40 3.60 0.70 1.10 1.60 2.50 4.00 6.60 1.20 2.00 3.30 12.00 27.00 52.00
AKR* 3.38 5.84 9.06 1.51 2.61 4.10 4.90 9.29 17.80 2.47 4.72 9.04 0.06 0.15 0.30
kV 66.00 68.00 70.00 65.00 68.00 70.00 64.00 68.00 73.0064.00 68.00 73.00
4 PPS** mA 4.50 7.00 10.00 0.92 1.40 2.20 9.80 16.00 22.00 4.90 7.80 11.00
AKR* 1.37 2.37 3.69 0.33 0.55 0.86 2.70 5.01 8.56 1.38 2.58 4.40
kV 65.00 68.00 70.00 65.00 68.00 70.00 64.00 69.00 74.0065.00 69.00 74.00
8 PPS mA 4.40 7.00 10.00 1.70 2.80 4.10 10.00 16.00 23.00 5.10 8.10 11.00 N/A
AKR* 2.30 4.04 6.25 0.98 1.68 2.63 4.99 9.29 15.80 2.59 4.80 7.99
kV 65.00 68.00 69.00 65.00 68.00 70.00 67.00 72.00 77.0068.00 72.00 77.00
15 PPS mA 4.40 7.00 10.00 1.70 2.60 4.00 11.00 18.00 25.00 5.80 9.30 13.00
AKR* 2.95 5.19 7.84 1.23 2.08 3.27 7.94 14.80 25.10 4.30 7.97 12.50
Low Dose Digital
kV 61.00 64.00 65.00 61.00 63.00 64.00
Continuous mA 5.70 8.50 9.60 2.70 5.00 8.40
AKR* 10.40 17.10 20.60 4.84 10.00 17.40
N/A
kV 62.00 64.00 66.00 61.00 64.00 65.00
8 PPS mA 6.40 9.40 11.00 2.90 5.50 9.10 N/A
AKR* 2.84 4.57 5.50 1.31 2.68 4.54
kV 63.00 65.00 67.00 63.00 65.00 66.00 63.00 66.00 70.00 65.00 66.00 67.00
15 PPS mA 7.90 12.00 13.00 3.70 7.30 11.00 35.00 69.00 99.00 17.00 31.00 41.00
AKR* 4.73 7.97 9.29 2.27 4.72 7.57 8.48 18.80 31.00 4.76 8.59 11.60
kV 63.00 66.00 70.00 65.00 66.00 67.00
30 PPS mA N/A 35.00 69.00 100.00 17.00 31.00 41.00
AKR* 17.30 38.00 62.90 9.54 17.40 23.20
* AKR is mGy/min
A-64
International 5
Any country may select this for reduced dose. However, image quality will be
adversely affected.
Continuous kV 78.00 80.00 81.00 79.00 81.00 82.00 78.00 84.00 90.00 78.00 84.00 90.00 78.00 81.00 82.00
(General Pro- mA 1.60 2.30 3.40 0.70 1.00 1.50 3.10 4.50 6.00 1.60 2.30 3.00 29.00 49.00 48.00
file) AKR* 5.33 8.54 12.80 2.45 3.84 5.71 10.40 18.30 29.10 5.28 9.13 14.40 0.20 0.47 0.76
kV 78.00 81.00 82.00
Continuous
mA Same as above 29.00 49.00 48.00
(Spine Profile)
AKR* 0.50 1.02 1.77
kV 77.00 79.00 80.00 77.00 78.00 79.00 78.00 84.00
91.00 79.00 84.00 91.00
4 PPS mA 4.10 6.30 9.20 0.80 1.20 1.80 13.00 18.00
25.00 6.30 9.10 12.00
AKR* 1.93 3.08 4.62 0.48 0.70 0.98 5.91 10.10
16.40 3.03 5.16 8.19
kV 76.00 79.00 80.00 76.00 78.00 79.00 80.00 86.00
93.00 80.00 86.00 92.00
8 PPS mA 4.00 6.20 9.10 1.60 2.50 3.60 13.00 19.00
25.00 6.50 9.50 13.00
AKR* 3.24 5.17 7.78 1.44 2.22 3.24 11.00 18.80
30.30 5.64 9.61 15.20
kV 76.00 79.00 80.00 76.00 78.00 79.00 83.00 91.00
99.00 83.00 91.00 98.00
15 PPS mA 4.00 6.20 9.20 1.60 2.40 3.60 9.40 16.00
22.00 4.60 8.00 11.00
AKR* 4.11 6.68 10.00 1.90 2.87 4.15 11.40 23.00
38.50 5.82 12.30 19.30
Low Dose Digital
kV 72.00 79.00 88.00 72.00 77.00 86.00
Continuous mA 21.00 23.00 21.00 13.00 17.00 17.00
AKR* 59.40 79.10 96.00 37.80 55.70 74.20
N/A
kV 74.00 80.00 90.00 74.00 79.00 89.00
8 PPS mA 21.00 23.00 21.00 15.00 17.00 17.00
AKR* 14.40 19.40 23.60 10.10 14.30 18.40
N/A
kV 79.00 86.00 96.00 77.00 84.00 96.00 74.00 81.00 93.00 77.00 78.00 77.00
15 PPS mA 20.00 22.00 20.00 17.00 17.00 16.00 98.00 149.00 120.00 34.00 57.00 56.00
AKR* 20.10 27.80 33.80 16.10 21.20 26.90 35.20 67.60 74.60 14.00 23.40 22.50
kV 74.00 82.00 93.00 77.00 78.00 77.00
30 PPS mA N/A 99.00 149.00 119.00 34.00 57.00 57.00
AKR* 71.60 136.00 148.00 28.20 47.30 45.90
kV 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00
Continuous mA 8.70 14.00 17.00 6.20 11.00 13.00 2.20 3.50 4.90 1.50 2.30 3.20
AKR* 41.60 65.00 80.40 29.70 49.80 64.00 10.50 16.70 23.40 7.00 11.10 15.40
kV 96.00 95.00 95.00 96.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 94.00 94.00 95.00
8 PPS mA 9.30 14.00 18.00 6.60 11.00 14.00 6.20 9.80 14.00 3.70 6.00 8.50
AKR* 11.00 16.40 20.10 8.03 12.70 16.10 7.36 11.20 15.60 4.66 7.16 9.91
kV 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 95.00
15 PPS mA 14.00 23.00 28.00 10.00 17.00 22.00 6.20 9.60 14.00 3.70 6.00 8.50
AKR* 21.00 32.30 39.40 15.10 24.80 31.50 9.47 14.00 19.50 6.08 9.23 12.70
* AKR is mGy/min
A-65
Continuous kV 67.00 70.00 72.00 67.00 71.00 72.00 66.00 73.00 78.00 66.00 73.00 78.00 67.00 71.00 73.00
(General Pro- mA 0.93 1.50 2.30 0.43 0.69 1.00 1.80 3.00 4.40 0.93 1.50 2.20 18.00 36.00 55.00
file) AKR* 2.09 4.00 6.44 0.98 1.82 2.92 4.09 8.46 14.90 2.08 4.25 7.41 0.09 0.20 0.40
kV 67.00 71.00 74.00
Continuous
mA Same as above 18.00 36.00 54.00
(Spine Profile)
AKR* 0.21 0.49 0.97
kV 65.00 69.00 71.00 65.00 68.00 70.00 66.00 73.00
78.00 66.00 73.00 78.00
4 PPS mA 2.50 4.00 6.30 0.48 0.78 1.20 7.40 12.00
17.00 3.70 6.00 8.70
AKR* 0.75 1.41 2.31 0.19 0.33 0.50 2.29 4.63
8.11 1.16 2.42 4.12
kV 65.00 68.00 70.00 64.00 68.00 70.00 67.00 74.00
79.00 67.00 74.00 79.00
8 PPS mA 2.40 4.00 6.20 0.97 1.60 2.50 7.80 13.00
18.00 3.80 6.30 9.10
AKR* 1.26 2.39 3.88 0.57 1.03 1.64 4.30 8.80
15.10 2.15 4.51 7.69
kV 64.00 68.00 71.00 64.00 68.00 70.00 71.00 77.00
84.00 70.00 77.00 84.00
15 PPS mA 2.40 4.00 6.20 0.95 1.60 2.40 5.10 11.00
17.00 2.50 5.60 8.70
AKR* 1.60 3.01 5.01 0.75 1.33 2.10 4.17 11.10
20.60 2.13 5.84 10.90
Low Dose Digital
kV 63.00 68.00 74.00 63.00 67.00 72.00
Continuous mA 10.00 19.00 21.00 4.90 11.00 17.00
AKR* 20.10 45.30 62.00 9.60 24.60 47.20
N/A
kV 64.00 69.00 76.00 64.00 68.00 74.00
8 PPS mA 12.00 20.00 21.00 6.00 12.00 18.00
AKR* 5.84 11.40 15.60 2.90 6.64 12.10
N/A
kV 65.00 72.00 81.00 66.00 71.00 79.00 64.00 70.00 74.00 67.00 69.00 69.00
15 PPS mA 17.00 21.00 22.00 8.20 14.00 18.00 45.00 103.00 105.00 21.00 39.00 39.00
AKR* 10.40 17.60 23.60 5.49 11.00 18.10 10.80 31.60 38.60 6.09 11.80 12.00
kV 64.00 70.00 75.00 68.00 69.00 69.00
30 PPS mA N/A 45.00 104.00 106.00 21.00 39.00 39.00
AKR* 21.90 64.40 78.10 12.30 24.00 24.30
kV 84.00 86.00 87.00 84.00 86.00 87.00 84.00 85.00 87.00 84.00 86.00 87.00
Continuous mA 4.30 8.90 12.00 3.00 6.70 9.60 1.30 2.20 3.40 0.85 1.40 2.30
AKR* 15.50 33.90 47.50 10.60 25.20 38.10 4.57 8.11 13.40 3.03 5.42 8.88
kV 85.00 87.00 89.00 84.00 87.00 88.00 83.00 85.00 87.00 83.00 85.00 87.00
8 PPS mA 4.60 9.30 13.00 3.10 7.00 10.00 3.50 6.00 9.50 2.10 3.70 5.90
AKR* 4.29 8.81 12.50 3.03 6.75 10.00 3.22 5.61 9.08 2.09 3.53 5.74
kV 84.00 86.00 88.00 84.00 86.00 88.00 83.00 85.00 87.00 82.00 85.00 87.00
15 PPS mA 7.30 14.00 20.00 4.90 11.00 16.00 3.50 6.00 9.30 2.10 3.60 5.80
AKR* 8.39 16.60 23.90 5.74 12.60 19.10 4.16 7.17 11.30 2.75 4.57 7.34
* AKR is mGy/min
A-66
Continuous kV 74.00 76.00 77.00 73.00 75.00 77.00 74.00 80.00 85.00 73.00 80.00 84.00 79.00 81.00 82.00
(General Pro- mA 1.20 2.00 3.00 0.54 0.87 1.30 1.80 3.40 5.00 0.89 1.60 2.50 21.00 41.00 49.00
file) AKR* 3.68 6.39 9.75 1.55 2.71 4.17 5.47 12.30 21.20 2.60 5.94 10.40 0.18 0.38 0.67
kV 79.00 82.00 82.00
Continuous
mA Same as above 21.00 40.00 48.00
(Spine Profile)
AKR* 0.44 0.92 1.66
kV 75.00 78.00 79.00 74.00 76.00 77.00 76.00 82.00
90.00 75.00 81.00 90.00
4 PPS mA 3.70 6.10 9.00 0.69 1.10 1.70 6.80 12.00
17.00 3.30 6.20 8.20
AKR* 1.69 2.92 4.38 0.38 0.60 0.89 3.04 6.58
11.20 1.49 3.33 5.65
kV 75.00 78.00 79.00 74.00 77.00 78.00 77.00 83.00
92.00 76.00 83.00 92.00
8 PPS mA 3.70 6.00 8.80 1.40 2.40 3.50 7.20 13.00
17.00 3.40 6.40 8.50
AKR* 2.83 4.90 7.37 1.21 2.02 2.98 5.73 12.20
20.70 2.80 6.24 10.60
kV 75.00 77.00 78.00 74.00 76.00 77.00 81.00 88.00
98.00 79.00 87.00 98.00
15 PPS mA 3.60 6.00 8.90 1.40 2.30 3.40 5.90 9.20
12.00 2.60 4.20 5.80
AKR* 3.56 6.23 9.35 1.60 2.60 3.81 6.94 13.20
21.50 3.27 6.29 11.20
Low Dose Digital
kV 67.00 70.00 73.00 67.00 69.00 70.00
Continuous mA 13.00 20.00 17.00 7.30 11.00 17.00
AKR* 29.50 50.50 48.00 16.50 28.30 43.20
N/A
kV 68.00 71.00 74.00 68.00 70.00 72.00
8 PPS mA 14.00 21.00 17.00 7.90 12.00 17.00
AKR* 7.74 12.60 12.20 4.43 7.42 10.90
N/A
kV 71.00 73.00 79.00 70.00 73.00 76.00 73.00 77.00 85.00 75.00 76.00 75.00
15 PPS mA 17.00 22.00 18.00 9.10 14.00 18.00 56.00 89.00 122.00 20.00 47.00 65.00
AKR* 12.70 18.80 19.30 7.04 12.00 16.80 19.80 35.70 62.50 7.65 18.30 24.10
kV 74.00 77.00 85.00 75.00 76.00 75.00
30 PPS mA N/A 57.00 90.00 123.00 20.00 47.00 65.00
AKR* 40.50 73.10 127.00 15.30 37.60 48.90
kV 95.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00
Continuous mA 6.50 8.90 11.00 4.60 6.80 8.40 1.40 2.50 3.70 0.93 1.70 2.40
AKR* 35.50 48.10 56.90 24.90 36.50 45.20 7.71 13.60 19.70 5.03 8.97 13.20
kV 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00
8 PPS mA 6.90 9.40 11.00 4.70 7.10 8.80 3.90 7.10 10.00 2.40 4.30 6.30
AKR* 9.37 12.50 14.40 6.59 9.64 11.80 5.40 9.39 13.20 3.49 5.84 8.36
kV 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 93.00 94.00 94.00
15 PPS mA 11.00 15.00 17.00 7.80 11.00 14.00 3.90 7.10 10.00 2.30 4.20 6.30
AKR* 17.70 23.90 28.00 13.30 18.20 22.40 6.99 12.00 16.50 4.60 7.53 10.80
* AKR is mGy/min
A-67
kV 76.00 78.00 80.00 76.00 78.00 80.00 75.00 82.00 88.00 75.00 82.00 88.00 79.00 81.00 82.00
Continuous mA 1.40 2.20 3.30 0.60 0.96 1.50 2.00 3.70 5.50 1.00 1.80 2.80 21.00 41.00 49.00
AKR 4.24 7.36 11.90 1.88 3.24 5.26 6.28 14.10 25.30 3.17 7.12 12.70 0.18 0.38 0.67
kV 75.00 78.00 81.00 75.00 78.00 80.00 78.00 84.00 95.00 77.00 84.00 95.00
4 PPS mA 3.80 6.20 9.50 1.50 2.50 3.80 7.40 14.00 18.00 3.60 6.80 9.10
AKR 1.69 3.00 4.83 0.75 1.26 2.00 3.47 7.60 13.60 1.71 3.89 6.94
kV 75.00 78.00 80.00 74.00 77.00 79.00 79.00 86.00 97.00 78.00 86.00 97.00
8 PPS mA 3.70 6.10 9.40 1.50 2.40 3.70 7.80 14.00 19.00 3.70 7.20 9.50 N/A
AKR 2.85 5.05 8.10 1.25 2.11 3.31 6.50 14.50 25.50 3.20 7.50 13.20
kV 75.00 78.00 79.00 74.00 77.00 79.00 83.00 91.00 104.00 81.00 90.00 104.00
15 PPS mA 3.60 6.10 9.10 1.40 2.40 3.70 7.00 10.00 16.00 3.10 5.20 7.90
AKR 3.60 6.41 9.74 1.62 2.71 4.20 8.48 15.50 32.10 3.96 8.17 16.90
Low Dose Digital
kV 68.00 71.00 76.00 68.00 71.00 73.00
Continuous mA 15.00 21.00 18.00 8.10 13.00 17.00
AKR 34.70 55.30 56.10 19.10 33.10 49.90
N/A
kV 69.00 72.00 78.00 69.00 72.00 75.00
8 PPS mA 15.00 22.00 18.00 8.70 13.00 18.00 N/A
AKR 8.92 13.70 14.40 5.13 8.51 12.70
kV 72.00 75.00 84.00 71.00 75.00 81.00 75.00 80.00 91.00 76.00 77.00 77.00
15 PPS mA 18.00 22.00 19.00 9.80 15.00 18.00 64.00 98.00 132.00 23.00 51.00 73.00
AKR 14.10 20.10 22.40 7.87 13.60 19.80 23.70 42.20 79.00 9.15 20.70 29.20
kV 75.00 80.00 91.00 76.00 78.00 77.00
30 PPS mA N/A 64.00 99.00 133.00 24.00 51.00 73.00
AKR 48.10 86.00 161.00 18.90 41.80 59.20
* AKR is mGy/min
A-68
kV 61.00 65.00 67.00 61.00 64.00 66.00 61.00 68.00 73.00 61.00 68.00 72.00 63.00 66.00 69.00
Continuous
mA 0.71 1.20 1.90 0.31 0.52 0.81 0.93 2.00 3.20 0.45 0.99 1.60 15.00 31.00 55.00
(General Profile)
AKR* 1.26 2.45 4.20 0.51 1.02 1.77 1.63 4.72 9.11 0.77 2.29 4.42 0.07 0.17 0.32
kV 63.00 67.00 69.00
Continuous
mA Same as above 15.00 31.00 53.00
(Spine Profile)
AKR* 0.18 0.42 0.79
kV 63.00 66.00 68.00 61.00 64.00 67.00 63.00 69.00 77.00
63.00 69.00 77.00
4 PPS mA 2.10 3.60 5.70 0.38 0.67 1.00 3.70 8.10 11.00
1.80 4.00 5.40
AKR* 0.58 1.11 1.90 0.13 0.23 0.38 1.00 2.74 4.97
0.51 1.35 2.48
kV 62.00 66.00 68.00 61.00 65.00 67.00 64.00 70.00 78.00
64.00 70.00 78.00
8 PPS mA 2.10 3.60 5.60 0.82 1.40 2.20 3.80 8.30 11.00
1.90 4.10 5.60
AKR* 0.99 1.87 3.18 0.42 0.78 1.29 1.85 5.08 9.24
0.95 2.53 4.67
kV 62.00 65.00 68.00 61.00 65.00 67.00 66.00 73.00 82.00
66.00 73.00 81.00
15 PPS mA 2.10 3.50 5.60 0.81 1.40 2.20 2.40 4.90 6.60
1.10 2.40 3.20
AKR* 1.26 2.37 4.02 0.56 1.02 1.64 1.74 4.42 8.08
0.93 2.32 4.12
Low Dose Digital
kV 60.00 63.00 64.00 60.00 63.00 64.00
Continuous mA 5.60 8.90 10.00 2.70 5.40 9.10
AKR* 9.32 16.70 20.10 4.43 10.10 17.90
N/A
kV 61.00 64.00 65.00 61.00 63.00 64.00
8 PPS mA 6.20 10.00 11.00 2.90 6.00 10.00
AKR* 2.52 4.60 5.33 1.20 2.79 4.73
N/A
kV 62.00 65.00 67.00 62.00 65.00 66.00 63.00 66.00 70.00 65.00 66.00 66.00
15 PPS mA 7.70 13.00 14.00 3.80 7.80 12.00 19.00 49.00 94.00 11.00 29.00 41.00
AKR* 4.21 7.98 8.98 2.13 4.85 7.74 4.33 13.30 29.60 2.79 7.91 11.20
kV 63.00 67.00 71.00 65.00 67.00 67.00
30 PPS mA N/A 19.00 50.00 95.00 11.00 29.00 42.00
AKR* 8.80 27.20 60.00 5.60 16.30 23.00
kV 85.00 88.00 89.00 85.00 88.00 89.00 85.00 88.00 89.00 85.00 88.00 89.00
Continuous mA 3.50 5.90 7.80 2.40 4.40 6.30 0.92 1.80 2.80 0.61 1.20 1.80
AKR* 14.60 26.70 36.50 9.94 19.70 29.40 3.84 8.20 13.10 2.55 5.40 8.63
kV 85.00 89.00 90.00 85.00 88.00 90.00 84.00 87.00 89.00 84.00 87.00 89.00
8 PPS mA 3.60 6.30 8.30 2.40 4.50 6.60 2.50 5.00 7.70 1.50 3.00 4.70
AKR* 3.87 7.14 9.67 2.72 5.20 7.77 2.75 5.56 8.79 1.80 3.53 5.51
kV 85.00 89.00 89.00 85.00 88.00 89.00 84.00 87.00 89.00 83.00 87.00 89.00
15 PPS mA 5.70 9.90 13.00 3.80 7.40 10.00 2.50 4.90 7.80 1.50 3.00 4.70
AKR* 7.65 13.90 18.10 5.27 10.50 14.50 3.59 7.13 11.40 2.39 4.60 7.09
* AKR is mGy/min
A-69
kV 63.00 66.00 69.00 63.00 66.00 68.00 63.00 69.00 74.00 63.00 69.00 74.00 63.00 66.00 69.00
Continuous mA 0.78 1.30 2.10 0.35 0.57 0.90 1.00 2.10 3.50 0.50 1.00 1.70 15.00 31.00 55.00
AKR 1.50 2.85 4.98 0.67 1.27 2.16 1.89 5.17 10.50 0.96 2.58 5.20 0.07 0.17 0.32
kV 63.00 66.00 69.00 62.00 66.00 68.00 64.00 71.00 79.00 64.00 70.00 79.00
4 PPS mA 2.20 3.70 5.90 0.88 1.50 2.30 3.90 8.50 12.00 1.90 4.20 5.90
AKR 0.59 1.13 1.99 0.27 0.49 0.82 1.12 3.07 5.78 0.58 1.53 2.91
kV 62.00 66.00 68.00 62.00 65.00 68.00 65.00 72.00 80.00 65.00 71.00 80.00
8 PPS mA 2.10 3.60 5.70 0.84 1.40 2.30 4.10 8.90 13.00 2.00 4.30 6.30 N/A
AKR 1.00 1.91 3.32 0.44 0.81 1.36 2.08 5.78 10.80 1.07 2.84 5.55
kV 62.00 65.00 68.00 61.00 65.00 67.00 68.00 75.00 85.00 67.00 74.00 84.00
15 PPS mA 2.10 3.60 5.70 0.83 1.40 2.20 2.50 5.20 7.30 1.20 2.50 3.50
AKR 1.26 2.40 4.20 0.58 1.04 1.72 1.90 5.03 9.49 1.04 2.58 4.74
Low Dose Digital
kV 61.00 63.00 65.00 61.00 63.00 64.00
Continuous mA 6.10 10.00 11.00 3.00 6.10 10.00
AKR 10.40 20.00 23.50 5.16 11.80 20.90
N/A
kV 61.00 64.00 66.00 61.00 64.00 65.00
8 PPS mA 6.70 11.00 12.00 3.20 6.80 11.00 N/A
AKR 2.80 5.31 6.24 1.37 3.22 5.50
kV 63.00 65.00 68.00 62.00 66.00 66.00 63.00 68.00 72.00 65.00 67.00 68.00
15 PPS mA 8.10 14.00 15.00 4.10 8.40 14.00 20.00 52.00 100.00 11.00 31.00 46.00
AKR 4.54 8.83 10.20 2.37 5.41 8.88 4.93 14.70 33.60 2.89 8.89 13.10
kV 63.00 68.00 72.00 65.00 67.00 68.00
30 PPS mA N/A 20.00 52.00 100.00 11.00 31.00 46.00
AKR 9.89 29.50 67.70 5.78 18.00 26.40
* AKR is mGy/min
A-70
kV 78.00 80.00 82.00 78.00 80.00 82.00 78.00 84.00 91.00 78.00 84.00 91.00 77.42 79.56 80.70
Continuous mA 1.60 2.40 3.50 0.69 1.10 1.60 3.20 4.60 6.20
1.60 2.30 3.10 27.15 48.85 47.33
AKR* 5.93 9.79 15.00 2.54 4.26 6.56 12.10 20.80 33.70 5.94 10.50 16.90 0.20 0.49 0.90
kV 78.00 81.00 82.00 78.00 82.00 84.00 80.00 87.00 94.00 80.00 87.00 95.00
4 PPS** mA 4.50 7.00 10.00 0.93 1.50 2.20 14.00 20.00 26.00 6.90 9.90 13.00
AKR* 2.47 4.12 6.10 0.62 1.00 1.51 7.62 13.20 21.50 3.87 6.70 10.90
kV 78.00 81.00 82.00 78.00 81.00 82.00 81.00 88.00 97.00 81.00 88.00 96.00
8 PPS mA 4.40 6.90 10.00 1.80 2.70 4.00 12.00 20.00 27.00 6.30 10.00 13.00 N/A
AKR* 4.13 6.85 10.10 1.78 2.86 4.34 12.20 24.60 40.20 6.38 12.40 19.90
kV 78.00 81.00 82.00 78.00 81.00 83.00 85.00 94.00 103.00 86.00 94.00 103.00
15 PPS mA 4.50 7.00 10.00 1.70 2.60 3.90 10.00 13.00 18.00 5.30 6.50 9.10
AKR* 5.34 8.86 12.90 2.32 3.68 5.63 14.90 22.90 39.40 8.04 12.20 20.70
Low Dose Digital
kV 73.00 79.00 89.00 72.00 77.00 87.00
Continuous mA 21.00 23.00 21.00 14.00 17.00 17.00
AKR* 66.20 89.80 110.00 43.50 63.40 83.40
N/A
kV 75.00 82.00 91.00 73.00 79.00 89.00
8 PPS mA 20.00 22.00 21.00 15.00 18.00 17.00 N/A
AKR* 16.20 22.10 27.40 11.50 16.10 20.80
kV 80.00 87.00 98.00 77.00 85.00 97.00 76.00 85.00 99.00 79.00 79.00 79.00
15 PPS mA 19.00 22.00 20.00 17.00 17.00 16.00 100.00 119.00 127.00 34.00 47.00 66.00
AKR* 22.90 31.70 38.90 18.00 24.00 30.80 42.60 67.00 103.00 16.40 22.80 31.30
kV 76.00 85.00 99.00 79.00 79.00 79.00
30 PPS mA N/A 101.00 119.00 127.00 34.00 47.00 67.00
AKR* 86.20 136.00 207.00 33.20 45.30 62.80
* AKR is mGy/min
A-71
kV 65.00 68.00 69.00 66.00 68.00 70.00 65.00 70.00 75.00
66.00 71.00 75.00 65.59 68.28 69.80
Continuous mA 0.90 1.40 2.10 0.41 0.63 0.94 1.80 2.70 3.80 0.90 1.40 1.90 16.35 35.57 55.27
AKR* 1.96 3.39 5.31 0.92 1.55 2.43 3.85 7.02 11.80 1.96 3.65 6.02 0.08 0.19 0.39
kV 64.00 67.00 69.00 65.00 68.00 70.00 66.00 71.00 75.00
65.00 71.00 76.00
4 PPS** mA 2.40 3.80 5.70 0.52 0.82 1.30 7.30 11.00 15.00 3.50 5.50 7.90
AKR* 0.71 1.24 1.98 0.21 0.34 0.53 2.20 3.95 6.65 1.10 2.07 3.55
kV 64.00 66.00 68.00 64.00 67.00 69.00 66.00 71.00 76.00
66.00 72.00 76.00
8 PPS mA 2.30 3.70 5.60 0.93 1.50 2.30 6.60 11.00 16.00 3.30 5.70 8.10 N/A
AKR* 1.19 2.05 3.29 0.55 0.93 1.46 3.57 7.34 12.30 1.80 3.82 6.35
kV 64.00 66.00 68.00 64.00 67.00 69.00 69.00 75.00 80.00
69.00 75.00 80.00
15 PPS mA 2.30 3.70 5.70 0.90 1.50 2.30 4.20 7.70 13.00 2.10 3.80 6.70
AKR* 1.52 2.63 4.25 0.73 1.24 1.94 3.39 7.36 14.50 1.81 3.79 7.61
Low Dose Digital
kV 63.00 65.00 69.00 63.00 65.00 68.00
Continuous mA 8.90 16.00 19.00 4.50 9.20 16.00
AKR* 17.30 34.80 47.70 8.69 19.70 39.40
N/A
kV 63.00 66.00 70.00 63.00 66.00 70.00
8 PPS mA 9.50 17.00 19.00 5.10 9.90 16.00 N/A
AKR* 4.38 8.96 11.90 2.41 5.15 9.95
kV 64.00 69.00 74.00 65.00 68.00 74.00 63.00 67.00 70.00 67.00 67.00 67.00
15 PPS mA 13.00 20.00 21.00 7.40 12.00 18.00 40.00 66.00 99.00 19.00 26.00 34.00
AKR* 8.14 14.20 18.80 4.83 8.84 15.30 9.32 18.80 31.70 5.33 7.55 9.94
kV 63.00 68.00 71.00 67.00 68.00 67.00
30 PPS mA N/A 40.00 66.00 99.00 18.00 26.00 35.00
AKR* 19.00 38.30 63.60 10.60 15.40 20.10
* AKR is mGy/min
A-72
kV 76.00 77.00 78.00 76.00 78.00 79.00 75.00 81.00 85.0075.00 81.00 86.00 76.00 79.00 79.00
Continuous mA 1.30 2.00 3.00 0.57 0.92 1.40 1.90 3.30 4.50 0.96 1.70 2.30 26.00 49.00 48.00
AKR* 4.17 6.82 10.50 1.84 3.15 4.87 5.94 12.40 19.40 3.03 6.33 10.00 0.19 0.49 0.87
kV 76.00 78.00 80.00 76.00 78.00 81.00 76.00 81.00 90.0076.00 82.00 90.00
4 PPS** mA 3.70 5.90 8.90 0.77 1.30 1.90 6.50 12.00 16.00 3.20 6.10 8.10
AKR* 1.71 2.87 4.48 0.46 0.73 1.12 2.91 6.27 10.70 1.52 3.30 5.55
kV 76.00 78.00 79.00 76.00 78.00 79.00 77.00 82.00 91.0077.00 83.00 92.00
8 PPS mA 3.60 5.80 8.80 1.40 2.40 3.50 6.90 12.00 15.00 3.40 6.30 7.60 N/A
AKR* 2.88 4.85 7.51 1.30 2.13 3.23 5.58 11.60 17.90 2.83 6.12 9.53
kV 76.00 78.00 80.00 76.00 78.00 80.00 81.00 88.00 98.0081.00 87.00 98.00
15 PPS mA 3.60 5.90 9.00 1.40 2.30 3.40 5.60 8.60 10.00 2.70 4.10 5.30
AKR* 3.75 6.35 9.90 1.71 2.76 4.18 6.63 12.10 18.80 3.50 6.21 10.40
Low Dose Digital
kV 68.00 70.00 74.00 68.00 70.00 71.00
Continuous mA 13.00 19.00 17.00 7.10 11.00 16.00
AKR* 31.30 51.20 51.50 16.90 28.20 43.80
N/A
kV 69.00 71.00 75.00 69.00 71.00 72.00
8 PPS mA 14.00 21.00 17.00 7.80 12.00 17.00 N/A
AKR* 8.21 13.30 13.00 4.59 7.43 11.20
kV 71.00 74.00 81.00 71.00 73.00 76.00 73.00 76.00 84.00 75.00 76.00 75.00
15 PPS mA 17.00 22.00 19.00 9.40 14.00 18.00 52.00 83.00 110.00 19.00 46.00 58.00
AKR* 13.30 19.80 20.80 7.77 12.10 17.20 19.00 33.00 54.60 7.67 18.30 22.30
kV 73.00 77.00 84.00 75.00 76.00 75.00
30 PPS mA N/A 53.00 84.00 110.00 19.00 46.00 58.00
AKR* 38.40 67.20 111.00 15.60 36.70 45.10
* AKR is mGy/min
A-73
kV 63.00 65.00 67.00 64.00 66.00 68.00 63.00 68.00 73.00
63.00 68.00 73.00 63.00 66.00 68.00
Continuous mA 0.76 1.20 1.90 0.34 0.54 0.84 0.96 2.00 2.80 0.49 0.99 1.40 15.00 33.00 56.00
AKR* 1.51 2.61 4.37 0.69 1.20 2.03 1.88 4.86 8.07 0.98 2.44 4.12 0.06 0.17 0.38
kV 63.00 66.00 68.00 63.00 66.00 69.00 63.00 69.00 76.00
64.00 68.00 76.00
4 PPS** mA 2.10 3.50 5.50 0.45 0.74 1.20 3.70 7.70 10.00 1.90 3.80 5.20
AKR* 0.63 1.09 1.85 0.17 0.29 0.47 1.04 2.64 4.48 0.55 1.34 2.40
kV 63.00 65.00 68.00 63.00 66.00 68.00 64.00 70.00 77.00
64.00 69.00 77.00
8 PPS mA 2.10 3.40 5.40 0.84 1.40 2.20 3.80 8.00 10.00 1.90 3.90 5.10 N/A
AKR* 1.06 1.84 3.11 0.49 0.83 1.36 1.91 4.88 7.94 1.02 2.45 4.21
kV 63.00 66.00 68.00 63.00 66.00 68.00 67.00 73.00 81.00
67.00 73.00 81.00
15 PPS mA 2.10 3.40 5.40 0.81 1.30 2.10 2.30 4.70 5.70 1.20 2.40 2.80
AKR* 1.38 2.39 4.04 0.64 1.08 1.77 1.83 4.32 6.88 1.05 2.35 3.68
Low Dose Digital
kV 61.00 64.00 65.00 61.00 63.00 64.00
Continuous mA 5.80 8.50 9.60 2.80 5.00 8.40
AKR* 10.50 17.10 20.50 5.00 10.00 17.40
N/A
kV 62.00 64.00 66.00 61.00 64.00 65.00
8 PPS mA 6.40 9.40 11.00 2.90 5.50 9.10 N/A
AKR* 2.84 4.56 5.50 1.32 2.67 4.51
kV 63.00 65.00 67.00 63.00 65.00 66.00 63.00 66.00 70.00 65.00 66.00 67.00
15 PPS mA 7.90 12.00 13.00 3.80 7.30 12.00 19.00 47.00 81.00 11.00 27.00 35.00
AKR* 4.73 7.93 9.29 2.28 4.75 7.62 4.61 13.00 25.40 2.97 7.63 9.96
kV 63.00 66.00 70.00 65.00 66.00 67.00
30 PPS mA N/A 18.00 47.00 81.00 11.00 27.00 36.00
AKR* 9.15 26.20 51.30 5.95 15.30 20.10
* AKR is mGy/min
A-74
International 6
Countries: Austria, Germany

Continuous kV 79.00 80.00 82.00 79.00 81.00 82.00 77.00 81.00 83.00 77.00 81.00 83.00 79.00 81.00 83.00
(General Pro- mA 3.20 4.70 6.30 1.40 2.10 2.80 5.50 9.10 14.00 2.70 4.50 7.10 28.00 49.00 48.00
file) AKR* 10.90 16.90 24.30 4.87 7.61 10.80 18.00 33.30 56.70 8.92 16.70 28.20 0.20 0.48 0.78
Continuous kV 79.00 81.00 83.00
file) AKR* 0.50 1.02 1.71
kV 78.00 79.00 81.00 77.00 79.00 80.00 78.00 84.00 91.00 77.00 84.00 91.00
4 PPS mA 8.60 13.00 18.00 1.70 2.40 3.40 22.00 31.00 40.00 11.00 15.00 20.00
AKR* 4.00 6.09 8.82 0.86 1.26 1.80 10.10 17.00 26.60 5.05 8.48 13.30
kV 77.00 79.00 80.00 77.00 79.00 80.00 79.00 85.00 94.00 79.00 85.00 93.00
8 PPS mA 8.50 12.00 17.00 3.40 5.10 7.20 23.00 32.00 40.00 11.00 16.00 20.00
AKR* 6.75 10.20 14.80 2.81 4.32 6.25 18.70 31.60 49.00 9.30 15.80 24.40
kV 77.00 79.00 80.00 76.00 79.00 80.00 83.00 90.00 103.00 82.00 90.00 102.00
15 PPS mA 8.60 12.00 17.00 3.40 5.10 7.20 26.00 37.00 40.00 13.00 18.00 20.00
AKR* 8.70 12.70 18.50 3.60 5.55 8.00 29.70 51.50 75.50 14.90 25.80 38.30
Low Dose Digital
kV 72.00 79.00 87.00 72.00 77.00 86.00
Continuous mA 21.00 23.00 21.00 13.00 17.00 17.00
AKR* 59.40 79.40 95.80 37.80 55.80 74.10
N/A
kV 74.00 80.00 90.00 73.00 79.00 89.00
8 PPS mA 21.00 23.00 21.00 14.00 17.00 17.00
AKR* 14.30 19.30 23.50 9.90 14.30 18.50
N/A
kV 78.00 86.00 96.00 77.00 84.00 96.00 74.00 81.00 93.00 77.00 78.00 77.00
15 PPS mA 20.00 22.00 20.00 17.00 17.00 16.00 113.00 149.00 126.00 39.00 57.00 71.00
AKR* 20.00 27.70 33.70 16.10 21.10 27.00 40.70 67.40 78.50 16.00 23.40 28.60
kV 74.00 82.00 93.00 77.00 78.00 77.00
30 PPS mA N/A 114.00 149.00 126.00 39.00 57.00 72.00
AKR* 82.60 137.00 159.00 32.30 47.30 57.90
kV 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00
Continuous mA 8.70 14.00 17.00 6.20 11.00 13.00 2.20 3.50 4.90 1.50 2.30 3.20
AKR* 41.60 65.00 80.40 29.70 49.80 64.00 10.50 16.70 23.40 7.00 11.10 15.40
kV 96.00 95.00 95.00 96.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 94.00 94.00 95.00
8 PPS mA 9.30 14.00 18.00 6.60 11.00 14.00 6.20 9.80 14.00 3.70 6.00 8.50
AKR* 11.00 16.40 20.10 8.03 12.70 16.10 7.36 11.20 15.60 4.66 7.16 9.91
kV 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 95.00
15 PPS mA 14.00 23.00 28.00 10.00 17.00 22.00 6.20 9.60 14.00 3.70 6.00 8.50
AKR* 21.00 32.30 39.40 15.10 24.80 31.50 9.47 14.00 19.50 6.08 9.23 12.70
* AKR is mGy/min
A-75
6 Low Dose HLF Digital Spot
Continuous kV 67.00 70.00 72.00 67.00 70.00 72.00 64.00 69.00 73.00 64.00 69.00 72.00 68.00 72.00 73.00
(General Pro- mA 2.10 3.40 5.00 0.94 1.50 2.20 3.50 6.30 11.00 1.80 3.20 5.30 18.00 36.00 55.00
file) AKR* 4.78 8.69 13.80 2.14 3.91 6.13 7.29 15.90 30.10 3.64 7.97 14.80 0.08 0.20 0.40
kV 68.00 72.00 73.00
Continuous
mA Same as above 18.00 36.00 54.00
(Spine Profile)
AKR* 0.21 0.49 1.04
kV 66.00 69.00 71.00 65.00 69.00 70.00 65.00 72.00
76.00 65.00 72.00 76.00
4 PPS mA 5.70 9.10 14.00 1.10 1.80 2.60 14.00 22.00
35.00 7.20 11.00 18.00
AKR* 1.73 3.12 4.93 0.37 0.65 1.00 4.07 8.10
15.30 2.08 4.08 7.59
kV 65.00 69.00 70.00 65.00 69.00 70.00 66.00 73.00
77.00 66.00 73.00 77.00
8 PPS mA 5.60 9.00 13.00 2.30 3.60 5.50 15.00 22.00
37.00 7.40 11.00 18.00
AKR* 2.89 5.26 8.26 1.22 2.19 3.45 7.50 15.00
28.40 3.85 7.56 14.00
kV 65.00 69.00 70.00 65.00 68.00 70.00 69.00 77.00
82.00 69.00 77.00 81.00
15 PPS mA 5.70 9.10 13.00 2.20 3.60 5.50 17.00 25.00
40.00 8.50 12.00 20.00
AKR* 3.72 6.77 10.30 1.56 2.78 4.43 12.10 24.00
44.30 6.42 12.10 22.00
Low Dose Digital
kV 63.00 68.00 74.00 63.00 67.00 72.00
Continuous mA 10.00 19.00 21.00 4.90 11.00 17.00
AKR* 20.10 45.10 62.10 9.70 24.70 47.40
N/A
kV 64.00 69.00 76.00 64.00 68.00 74.00
8 PPS mA 12.00 20.00 21.00 5.80 12.00 18.00
AKR* 5.82 11.20 15.50 2.82 6.69 12.10
N/A
kV 65.00 72.00 81.00 66.00 71.00 79.00 64.00 70.00 75.00 67.00 69.00 69.00
15 PPS mA 17.00 21.00 22.00 8.20 14.00 18.00 59.00 102.00 109.00 24.00 39.00 51.00
AKR* 10.40 17.30 23.60 5.49 11.10 18.10 14.30 31.30 40.00 6.95 12.00 15.60
kV 64.00 70.00 75.00 68.00 69.00 70.00
30 PPS mA N/A 59.00 104.00 109.00 24.00 39.00 51.00
AKR* 29.00 64.10 80.80 14.00 24.30 31.50
kV 84.00 86.00 87.00 84.00 86.00 87.00 84.00 85.00 87.00 84.00 86.00 87.00
Continuous mA 4.30 8.90 12.00 3.00 6.70 9.60 1.30 2.20 3.40 0.85 1.40 2.30
AKR* 15.50 33.90 47.50 10.60 25.20 38.10 4.57 8.11 13.40 3.03 5.42 8.88
kV 85.00 87.00 89.00 84.00 87.00 88.00 83.00 85.00 87.00 83.00 85.00 87.00
8 PPS mA 4.60 9.30 13.00 3.10 7.00 10.00 3.50 6.00 9.50 2.10 3.70 5.90
AKR* 4.29 8.81 12.50 3.03 6.75 10.00 3.22 5.61 9.08 2.09 3.53 5.74
kV 84.00 86.00 88.00 84.00 86.00 88.00 83.00 85.00 87.00 82.00 85.00 87.00
15 PPS mA 7.30 14.00 20.00 4.90 11.00 16.00 3.50 6.00 9.30 2.10 3.60 5.80
AKR* 8.39 16.60 23.90 5.74 12.60 19.10 4.16 7.17 11.30 2.75 4.57 7.34
* AKR is mGy/min
A-76
Continuous kV 77.00 79.00 80.00 76.00 79.00 79.00 76.00 79.00 82.00 76.00 79.00 82.00 79.00 82.00 82.00
(General Pro- mA 2.10 3.30 4.80 0.89 1.50 2.10 3.90 6.10 9.70 1.90 3.00 4.90 21.00 41.00 49.00
file) AKR* 6.81 12.00 17.20 2.87 5.15 7.44 12.40 21.50 38.30 6.05 10.50 19.10 0.18 0.38 0.67
kV 79.00 81.00 82.00
Continuous
mA Same as above 21.00 40.00 49.00
(Spine Profile)
AKR* 0.45 0.92 1.68
kV 79.00 81.00 81.00 77.00 80.00 80.00 77.00 81.00 86.00
77.00 80.00 86.00
4 PPS mA 6.20 9.90 14.00 1.20 1.90 2.70 16.00 25.00 35.00
8.00 12.00 17.00
AKR* 3.03 5.18 7.43 0.64 1.08 1.50 7.37 12.50 20.60
3.72 6.21 10.30
kV 78.00 81.00 81.00 77.00 80.00 81.00 79.00 82.00 88.00
79.00 82.00 87.00
8 PPS mA 6.10 9.70 14.00 2.40 3.90 5.60 17.00 25.00 36.00
8.40 13.00 18.00
AKR* 5.07 8.67 12.40 2.13 3.62 5.16 13.80 23.00 38.70
6.98 11.60 19.20
kV 78.00 80.00 81.00 77.00 80.00 81.00 83.00 86.00 95.00
82.00 86.00 94.00
15 PPS mA 6.10 9.70 14.00 2.40 3.90 5.70 19.00 29.00 38.00
9.50 14.00 19.00
AKR* 6.56 10.90 15.50 2.76 4.65 6.70 22.50 37.80 62.00
11.30 18.70 30.70
Low Dose Digital
kV 67.00 70.00 72.00 67.00 69.00 70.00
Continuous mA 13.00 20.00 17.00 7.30 11.00 17.00
AKR* 29.60 50.50 47.50 16.50 28.60 43.00
N/A
kV 68.00 71.00 74.00 68.00 70.00 72.00
8 PPS mA 14.00 21.00 17.00 7.90 12.00 17.00
AKR* 7.74 12.60 12.20 4.42 7.42 10.90
N/A
kV 71.00 73.00 79.00 70.00 73.00 76.00 74.00 77.00 85.00 75.00 76.00 75.00
15 PPS mA 17.00 22.00 18.00 9.10 14.00 18.00 74.00 130.00 150.00 31.00 53.00 73.00
AKR* 12.70 18.80 19.40 7.01 12.10 16.90 26.40 52.60 77.90 11.90 20.90 27.40
kV 74.00 77.00 86.00 75.00 76.00 75.00
30 PPS mA N/A 75.00 131.00 150.00 32.00 54.00 74.00
AKR* 53.80 106.00 158.00 24.40 42.30 55.30
kV 95.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00
Continuous mA 6.50 8.90 11.00 4.60 6.80 8.40 1.40 2.50 3.70 0.93 1.70 2.40
AKR* 35.50 48.10 56.90 24.90 36.50 45.20 7.71 13.60 19.70 5.03 8.97 13.20
kV 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00
8 PPS mA 6.90 9.40 11.00 4.70 7.10 8.80 3.90 7.10 10.00 2.40 4.30 6.30
AKR* 9.37 12.50 14.40 6.59 9.64 11.80 5.40 9.39 13.20 3.49 5.84 8.36
kV 95.00 95.00 95.00 95.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 94.00 93.00 94.00 94.00
15 PPS mA 11.00 15.00 17.00 7.80 11.00 14.00 3.90 7.10 10.00 2.30 4.20 6.30
AKR* 17.70 23.90 28.00 13.30 18.20 22.40 6.99 12.00 16.50 4.60 7.53 10.80
* AKR is mGy/min
A-77
kV 78.00 81.00 83.00 79.00 82.00 83.00 77.00 81.00 85.00 77.00 81.00 85.00 79.00 82.00 82.00
Continuous mA 2.20 3.60 5.30 0.97 1.60 2.30 4.10 6.50 11.00 2.00 3.20 5.40 21.00 41.00 49.00
AKR 7.55 13.40 20.60 3.34 5.97 9.12 13.60 23.90 45.90 6.77 12.00 22.80 0.18 0.38 0.67
kV 78.00 81.00 83.00 78.00 81.00 83.00 79.00 83.00 91.00 79.00 83.00 90.00
4 PPS mA 6.20 10.00 15.00 2.50 4.20 6.20 17.00 26.00 38.00 8.60 13.00 19.00
AKR 2.99 5.26 8.02 1.29 2.25 3.42 8.23 14.20 25.10 4.23 7.13 12.60
kV 78.00 81.00 83.00 77.00 81.00 83.00 80.00 84.00 93.00 81.00 84.00 93.00
8 PPS mA 6.20 9.90 15.00 2.50 4.00 6.00 18.00 28.00 38.00 9.00 14.00 19.00 N/A
AKR 5.13 8.82 13.60 2.14 3.76 5.75 15.30 26.70 45.90 7.86 13.30 23.00
kV 78.00 81.00 82.00 77.00 81.00 82.00 85.00 89.00 102.00 84.00 89.00 101.00
15 PPS mA 6.10 9.90 15.00 2.40 4.00 6.00 20.00 32.00 38.00 10.00 16.00 19.00
AKR 6.49 11.10 16.90 2.77 4.80 7.33 24.80 43.50 72.20 12.40 21.70 36.40
Low Dose Digital
kV 68.00 71.00 76.00 68.00 71.00 73.00
Continuous mA 15.00 21.00 18.00 8.10 13.00 17.00
AKR 34.60 55.00 56.30 19.10 33.30 49.70
N/A
kV 69.00 72.00 78.00 69.00 72.00 75.00
8 PPS mA 15.00 22.00 18.00 8.70 13.00 18.00 N/A
AKR 8.92 13.70 14.40 5.11 8.54 12.70
kV 72.00 75.00 84.00 71.00 75.00 81.00 75.00 80.00 91.00 76.00 78.00 77.00
15 PPS mA 18.00 22.00 19.00 9.80 15.00 18.00 80.00 134.00 150.00 33.00 58.00 82.00
AKR 14.20 20.20 22.50 7.92 13.60 19.90 29.90 58.70 90.40 13.20 23.50 32.80
kV 75.00 80.00 91.00 76.00 78.00 77.00
30 PPS mA N/A 80.00 134.00 150.00 34.00 58.00 82.00
AKR 60.20 118.00 181.00 26.70 47.80 66.30
* AKR is mGy/min
A-78
Continuous kV 64.00 67.00 69.00 63.00 67.00 69.00 62.00 67.00 71.00 62.00 67.00 71.00 66.00 69.00 71.00
(General Pro- mA 1.30 2.30 3.40 0.57 0.98 1.50 2.40 4.10 6.90 1.20 2.00 3.40 12.00 26.00 46.00
file) AKR* 2.60 5.19 8.29 1.08 2.20 3.54 4.41 9.35 18.40 2.16 4.59 9.01 0.07 0.15 0.30
kV 66.00 69.00 71.00
Continuous
mA Same as above 12.00 25.00 45.00
(Spine Profile)
AKR* 0.16 0.38 0.72
kV 65.00 69.00 70.00 64.00 67.00 69.00 64.00 69.00
74.00 64.00 69.00 74.00
4 PPS mA 3.90 6.70 9.90 0.72 1.30 1.90 10.00 17.00
24.00 5.00 8.30 12.00
AKR* 1.13 2.29 3.52 0.24 0.46 0.71 2.68 5.47
9.58 1.35 2.76 4.75
kV 65.00 69.00 70.00 64.00 68.00 69.00 64.00 70.00
75.00 64.00 70.00 75.00
8 PPS mA 3.80 6.60 9.90 1.50 2.60 3.90 10.00 17.00
24.00 5.20 8.60 12.00
AKR* 1.90 3.83 6.01 0.80 1.56 2.42 4.96 10.10
17.60 2.52 5.11 8.73
kV 65.00 69.00 70.00 64.00 68.00 70.00 67.00 73.00
79.00 68.00 73.00 78.00
15 PPS mA 3.80 6.70 9.90 1.50 2.60 3.90 12.00 19.00
27.00 5.90 9.70 13.00
AKR* 2.46 4.95 7.72 1.06 2.04 3.14 7.88 15.90
27.90 4.18 8.42 13.70
Low Dose Digital
kV 60.00 63.00 64.00 60.00 63.00 64.00
Continuous mA 5.60 8.90 10.00 2.70 5.40 9.10
AKR* 9.30 16.70 20.10 4.43 10.10 17.90
N/A
kV 61.00 64.00 65.00 61.00 63.00 64.00
8 PPS mA 6.20 10.00 11.00 2.90 6.00 10.00
AKR* 2.51 4.60 5.34 1.21 2.78 4.74
N/A
kV 62.00 65.00 67.00 62.00 65.00 66.00 63.00 67.00 70.00 65.00 67.00 66.00
15 PPS mA 7.70 13.00 14.00 3.80 7.80 12.00 36.00 74.00 118.00 18.00 33.00 47.00
AKR* 4.22 7.87 9.01 2.13 4.86 7.77 8.17 20.00 37.20 4.55 9.16 12.80
kV 63.00 67.00 71.00 65.00 67.00 67.00
30 PPS mA N/A 36.00 75.00 120.00 18.00 33.00 48.00
AKR* 16.80 40.80 76.40 9.09 18.40 26.00
kV 85.00 88.00 89.00 85.00 88.00 89.00 85.00 88.00 89.00 85.00 88.00 89.00
Continuous mA 3.50 5.90 7.80 2.40 4.40 6.30 0.92 1.80 2.80 0.61 1.20 1.80
AKR* 14.60 26.70 36.50 9.94 19.70 29.40 3.84 8.20 13.10 2.55 5.40 8.63
kV 85.00 89.00 90.00 85.00 88.00 90.00 84.00 87.00 89.00 84.00 87.00 89.00
8 PPS mA 3.60 6.30 8.30 2.40 4.50 6.60 2.50 5.00 7.70 1.50 3.00 4.70
AKR* 3.87 7.14 9.67 2.72 5.20 7.77 2.75 5.56 8.79 1.80 3.53 5.51
kV 85.00 89.00 89.00 85.00 88.00 89.00 84.00 87.00 89.00 83.00 87.00 89.00
15 PPS mA 5.70 9.90 13.00 3.80 7.40 10.00 2.50 4.90 7.80 1.50 3.00 4.70
AKR* 7.65 13.90 18.10 5.27 10.50 14.50 3.59 7.13 11.40 2.39 4.60 7.09
* AKR is mGy/min
A-79
kV 65.00 69.00 71.00 65.00 69.00 71.00 63.00 68.00 73.00 63.00 68.00 73.00 66.00 69.00 71.00
Continuous mA 1.40 2.40 3.60 0.62 1.10 1.60 2.50 4.30 7.20 1.30 2.20 3.60 12.00 26.00 46.00
AKR 2.95 5.76 9.34 1.29 2.55 4.16 4.92 10.20 20.50 2.46 5.17 10.20 0.07 0.15 0.30
kV 65.00 69.00 71.00 64.00 68.00 70.00 65.00 70.00 76.00 65.00 70.00 76.00
4 PPS mA 3.90 6.80 10.00 1.60 2.70 4.10 11.00 18.00 25.00 5.30 8.80 13.00
AKR 1.13 2.29 3.62 0.49 0.95 1.52 3.00 6.08 10.80 1.52 3.11 5.44
kV 64.00 69.00 70.00 64.00 68.00 70.00 66.00 71.00 77.00 66.00 71.00 77.00
8 PPS mA 3.90 6.70 9.90 1.60 2.70 4.00 11.00 18.00 26.00 5.50 9.10 13.00 N/A
AKR 1.92 3.86 6.09 0.83 1.59 2.54 5.52 11.20 20.10 2.83 5.75 10.00
kV 64.00 69.00 70.00 64.00 68.00 70.00 69.00 74.00 81.00 69.00 74.00 81.00
15 PPS mA 3.80 6.70 9.90 1.50 2.60 4.00 12.00 20.00 30.00 6.20 10.00 15.00
AKR 2.45 4.97 7.63 1.06 2.03 3.25 8.77 17.80 32.40 4.64 8.89 16.10
Low Dose Digital
kV 61.00 63.00 65.00 61.00 63.00 64.00
Continuous mA 6.10 10.00 11.00 3.10 6.20 10.00
AKR 10.40 20.10 23.50 5.30 12.00 21.30
N/A
kV 61.00 64.00 66.00 61.00 64.00 65.00
8 PPS mA 6.70 11.00 12.00 3.20 6.80 11.00 N/A
AKR 2.81 5.31 6.24 1.37 3.21 5.59
kV 63.00 65.00 68.00 62.00 66.00 66.00 64.00 68.00 72.00 65.00 67.00 68.00
15 PPS mA 8.20 14.00 15.00 4.10 8.50 14.00 39.00 80.00 130.00 19.00 36.00 53.00
AKR 4.59 8.90 10.30 2.35 5.47 8.95 9.41 22.70 43.80 5.08 10.10 15.10
kV 64.00 68.00 72.00 66.00 68.00 68.00
30 PPS mA N/A 39.00 81.00 131.00 19.00 36.00 53.00
AKR 19.10 45.80 88.10 10.20 20.50 30.40
* AKR is mGy/min
A-80
kV 79.00 80.00 83.00 78.00 81.00 83.00 77.00 81.00 84.00 77.00 81.00 84.00 78.12 79.68 81.40
Continuous mA 3.30 4.80 6.40 1.40 2.10 2.80 5.60 9.30 15.00
2.80 4.60 7.30 26.90 48.95 47.33
AKR* 12.50 19.50 27.90 5.43 8.62 12.30 20.60 38.40 66.00 10.30 18.90 32.70 0.21 0.50 0.82
kV 80.00 81.00 83.00 79.00 81.00 84.00 80.00 86.00 97.00 79.00 86.00 97.00
4 PPS** mA 9.40 14.00 18.00 1.90 2.90 3.80 24.00 34.00 40.00 12.00 17.00 20.00
AKR* 5.13 7.86 11.00 1.12 1.77 2.47 12.90 22.10 34.30 6.43 11.00 17.30
kV 79.00 81.00 83.00 79.00 81.00 83.00 81.00 88.00 100.00 80.00 87.00 99.00
8 PPS mA 9.30 14.00 18.00 3.60 5.50 7.20 25.00 36.00 40.00 12.00 18.00 20.00 N/A
AKR* 8.68 13.20 18.50 3.48 5.53 7.74 24.20 41.30 63.60 11.90 20.50 31.70
kV 79.00 81.00 83.00 79.00 81.00 84.00 85.00 94.00 108.00 85.00 93.00 108.00
15 PPS mA 9.30 13.00 18.00 3.50 5.30 7.00 28.00 38.00 38.00 14.00 19.00 20.00
AKR* 11.00 16.40 23.40 4.35 6.88 9.76 38.80 66.70 93.00 19.20 32.90 48.60
Low Dose Digital
kV 73.00 79.00 89.00 72.00 77.00 87.00
Continuous mA 21.00 23.00 21.00 14.00 17.00 17.00
AKR* 66.00 89.80 110.00 43.70 63.60 83.60
N/A
kV 75.00 82.00 92.00 74.00 79.00 89.00
8 PPS mA 20.00 22.00 21.00 15.00 18.00 17.00 N/A
AKR* 16.10 22.20 27.40 11.50 16.20 20.80
kV 80.00 87.00 98.00 77.00 85.00 97.00 76.00 85.00 98.00 79.00 79.00 79.00
15 PPS mA 19.00 22.00 20.00 17.00 17.00 16.00 125.00 149.00 132.00 43.00 62.00 81.00
AKR* 23.00 31.80 38.80 18.20 24.00 30.90 53.50 84.70 106.00 20.60 29.80 38.00
kV 76.00 85.00 98.00 79.00 79.00 79.00
30 PPS mA N/A 126.00 149.00 132.00 42.00 63.00 81.00
AKR* 108.00 170.00 212.00 41.00 60.20 76.90
* AKR is mGy/min
A-81
kV 66.00 68.00 69.00 66.00 68.00 69.00 63.00 67.00 69.0063.00 67.00 69.00 66.41 68.36 69.69
Continuous mA 2.10 3.10 4.60 0.92 1.40 2.00 3.40 5.80 9.50 1.70 2.90 4.80 16.30 35.72 55.91
AKR* 4.52 7.48 11.40 2.04 3.36 5.14 6.67 13.20 23.90 3.38 6.60 12.00 0.08 0.19 0.40
kV 65.00 67.00 68.00 64.00 67.00 69.00 63.00 69.00 73.0064.00 69.00 73.00
4 PPS** mA 5.60 8.50 13.00 1.10 1.80 2.70 14.00 20.00 32.00 6.90 9.90 16.00
AKR* 1.65 2.73 4.14 0.38 0.62 0.97 3.73 6.83 12.40 1.93 3.45 6.32
kV 64.00 67.00 68.00 64.00 67.00 68.00 64.00 70.00 74.0065.00 70.00 74.00
8 PPS mA 5.50 8.40 12.00 2.20 3.30 5.00 14.00 21.00 33.00 7.20 10.00 16.00 N/A
AKR* 2.77 4.61 6.93 1.13 1.88 2.94 6.88 12.60 23.00 3.58 6.32 11.40
kV 64.00 67.00 67.00 64.00 67.00 68.00 68.00 74.00 77.0068.00 73.00 77.00
15 PPS mA 5.50 8.50 12.00 2.10 3.20 4.80 16.00 23.00 37.00 8.20 11.00 18.00
AKR* 3.46 5.88 8.56 1.40 2.34 3.61 11.20 20.00 36.30 6.00 9.99 18.20
Low Dose Digital
kV 63.00 65.00 69.00 63.00 65.00 68.00
Continuous mA 8.80 16.00 19.00 4.50 9.30 16.00
AKR* 17.20 34.50 47.30 8.78 19.90 39.20
N/A
kV 63.00 66.00 70.00 63.00 66.00 70.00
8 PPS mA 9.30 17.00 19.00 5.10 9.90 16.00 N/A
AKR* 4.30 8.90 11.90 2.40 5.16 9.96
kV 64.00 69.00 74.00 65.00 68.00 74.00 63.00 67.00 71.00 67.00 67.00 67.00
15 PPS mA 14.00 20.00 21.00 7.30 12.00 18.00 56.00 90.00 105.00 23.00 35.00 45.00
AKR* 8.33 14.20 18.80 4.77 8.85 15.50 13.10 25.60 33.80 6.47 10.20 12.90
kV 63.00 67.00 71.00 67.00 68.00 67.00
30 PPS mA N/A 56.00 91.00 105.00 23.00 35.00 45.00
AKR* 26.30 52.00 67.70 13.10 20.50 26.00
* AKR is mGy/min
A-82
kV 78.00 80.00 81.00 79.00 81.00 81.00 77.00 80.00 83.0077.00 80.00 83.00 78.00 82.00 82.00
Continuous mA 2.10 3.30 4.80 0.94 1.50 2.20 3.90 6.00 9.60
2.00 3.00 4.90 21.00 45.00 47.00
AKR* 7.21 12.20 18.00 3.29 5.54 8.20 12.90 21.60 38.40 6.54 10.90 19.40 0.16 0.39 0.72
kV 79.00 81.00 82.00 78.00 81.00 82.00 77.00 80.00 85.0077.00 80.00 86.00
4 PPS** mA 6.00 9.60 14.00 1.30 2.00 2.90 16.00 23.00 33.00 7.90 12.00 16.00
AKR* 2.98 4.99 7.33 0.73 1.19 1.72 7.14 11.70 19.10 3.72 5.98 9.74
kV 78.00 81.00 81.00 78.00 81.00 82.00 78.00 81.00 87.0079.00 81.00 87.00
8 PPS mA 6.00 9.60 14.00 2.40 3.80 5.60 16.00 25.00 34.00 8.20 12.00 17.00 N/A
AKR* 5.05 8.63 12.40 2.17 3.61 5.32 13.30 21.90 35.60 6.91 11.00 18.10
kV 78.00 81.00 82.00 78.00 81.00 82.00 83.00 86.00 93.0082.00 85.00 93.00
15 PPS mA 6.00 9.70 14.00 2.30 3.60 5.40 19.00 28.00 38.00 9.20 14.00 19.00
AKR* 6.53 11.20 15.80 2.75 4.51 6.65 21.60 35.40 58.70 10.90 17.60 29.40
Low Dose Digital
kV 68.00 70.00 74.00 67.00 70.00 71.00
Continuous mA 13.00 20.00 17.00 7.10 11.00 16.00
AKR* 31.00 52.30 51.80 16.90 28.20 44.00
N/A
kV 69.00 71.00 76.00 69.00 71.00 72.00
8 PPS mA 14.00 21.00 17.00 7.80 12.00 17.00 N/A
AKR* 8.23 13.10 13.10 4.60 7.44 11.20
kV 71.00 74.00 81.00 71.00 73.00 77.00 74.00 77.00 84.00 75.00 76.00 75.00
15 PPS mA 17.00 22.00 18.00 9.40 14.00 18.00 71.00 124.00 150.00 31.00 52.00 73.00
AKR* 13.50 19.80 20.90 7.73 12.10 17.30 25.70 49.50 75.60 12.10 20.80 28.00
kV 74.00 77.00 85.00 75.00 76.00 76.00
30 PPS mA N/A 71.00 125.00 150.00 31.00 52.00 73.00
AKR* 51.80 101.00 152.00 24.10 41.70 56.50
* AKR is mGy/min
A-83
kV 65.00 67.00 69.00 65.00 68.00 70.00 63.00 67.00 71.0064.00 67.00 71.00 65.00 69.00 70.00
Continuous mA 1.40 2.20 3.30 0.60 0.98 1.50 2.40 4.00 6.60 1.20 2.00 3.30 12.00 27.00 51.00
AKR* 2.91 5.20 8.23 1.30 2.37 3.78 4.89 9.28 17.80 2.49 4.73 9.04 0.06 0.15 0.30
kV 65.00 68.00 70.00 65.00 68.00 70.00 64.00 68.00 73.0064.00 68.00 73.00
4 PPS** mA 3.90 6.40 9.50 0.79 1.30 2.00 9.80 16.00 22.00 4.90 7.80 11.00
AKR* 1.19 2.18 3.42 0.29 0.51 0.78 2.70 5.02 8.53 1.38 2.57 4.39
kV 65.00 68.00 70.00 65.00 68.00 70.00 64.00 69.00 74.0065.00 69.00 74.00
8 PPS mA 3.80 6.30 9.40 1.50 2.50 3.80 10.00 16.00 23.00 5.10 8.10 11.00 N/A
AKR* 2.01 3.67 5.77 0.87 1.54 2.40 4.99 9.26 15.70 2.58 4.78 7.96
kV 65.00 68.00 70.00 65.00 68.00 70.00 68.00 72.00 77.0068.00 73.00 77.00
15 PPS mA 3.80 6.40 9.60 1.40 2.40 3.60 11.00 18.00 25.00 5.80 9.30 13.00
AKR* 2.57 4.74 7.51 1.10 1.92 3.00 7.95 14.70 24.90 4.29 7.96 12.60
Low Dose Digital
kV 61.00 63.00 65.00 61.00 63.00 64.00
Continuous mA 5.70 8.40 9.60 2.70 5.00 8.40
AKR* 10.40 16.90 20.70 4.82 10.00 17.40
N/A
kV 62.00 64.00 66.00 61.00 64.00 65.00
8 PPS mA 6.40 9.40 11.00 2.90 5.50 9.10 N/A
AKR* 2.83 4.55 5.49 1.31 2.68 4.53
kV 63.00 65.00 67.00 63.00 65.00 66.00 63.00 66.00 70.00 65.00 66.00 66.00
15 PPS mA 7.90 12.00 13.00 3.80 7.20 12.00 35.00 69.00 108.00 17.00 31.00 44.00
AKR* 4.70 7.98 9.32 2.28 4.72 7.61 8.49 18.70 34.00 4.80 8.57 12.40
kV 63.00 66.00 70.00 65.00 66.00 66.00
30 PPS mA N/A 35.00 69.00 109.00 17.00 31.00 45.00
AKR* 17.10 38.10 69.10 9.55 17.30 24.90
* AKR is mGy/min
A-84
Appendix B: IQ and dose QA check data form

Complete as part of the Image quality and dosimetry QA checks and retain for your records.
Country: __________________________ Software version: __________________________
Page QA check Parameters Specifications Measurement

13-15 X-ray check Visibility of boxes of grid lines Yes / No
Continuity of light to dark ramp
Contrast / Yes / No
bars
Brightness
95% contrast field is visible Yes / No
5% contrast field is visible Yes / No
13-17 Auto technique 1 plate (1mm of Cu): 58-64 kV
check kVp 2 plate (1mm of Cu): 68-74 kV
3 plate (1mm of Cu): 76-82 kV
13-17 HVL check HVL in mm AL >= 4.0 mm @ 80 kVp
Tools Dosimeter #:
Measuring tape #:
13-18 FPD image Norm >= 1.8
resolution 31 cm
Mag 1 >= 2.2
check FPD
Mag 2 >= 2.4
Norm >= 2.5
21 cm
Mag 1 >= 3.0
Image FPD
Mag 2 >= 3.3
resolution
13-19 II image Norm >= 2.3
in lp/mm 9 inch
resolution Mag 1 >= 3.2
check II
Mag 2 >= 3.8
Norm >= 1.7
12 inch
Mag 1 >= 2.3
II
Mag 2 >= 3.0
Tool Line pair converging tool #:
13-20 FPD entrance 31 cm Fluoro:
dose check FPD HLF:
21 cm Fluoro:
Entrance FPD HLF:
dose
13-21 II entrance 9 inch Fluoro:
in µGy/min
dose check II HLF:
12 inch Fluoro:
II HLF:
Tool Dosimeter #:
13-22 AKR check % error ± 25%
Tool Dosimeter #:
13-23 CAK check % error ± 25%
Tool Dosimeter #:
B-1
B-2
Index
Index Authentication
Enterprise setup 2-40
A Groups setup 2-37
Access modes 5-1 Local users setup 2-33
Additional Information Screen 4-4 Application authentication setup 2-31
After-sale operating and safety prac- Audit logging setup 2-44
tices 1-4
Certification management setup 2-47
Air kerma 5-47
Authentication setup 2-31
Air kerma rate 5-47
Autosave 5-18
Alarms 5-14
Available exams 8-4
Cumulative exposure 5-14
B
X-ray termination 5-14
Battery pack 3-35
Annotations
Blank button 3-33
Fine-tune placement 7-3
Blank key 1-16
Annotations screen 7-1
Brazil regional information 17-5
Anode warm and hot thresholds 14-4
Burns
Antivirus setup 2-27
Contact 1-13
Radiation 1-14
Enterprise setup 2-40
Buttons 3-80
Groups setup 2-37
Motorized C-Arm 3-78
Local users setup 2-33
Movement 3-80
Application authentication setup 2-31
Orientation 3-80
Archive images 8-30
Workstation operation 3-81
Configure storage device 8-33
Copy to archive device 8-35 C
Select a storage device 8-31 C-Arm

Select a storage location 8-31 Components 3-39
USB options 8-33 Control Panel
Argentina regional information 17-4 OEC Touch/Touch Tableside 3-93
Audible X-ray indication 5-55 Overview 3-97
Audio setup 2-10 Controls 3-93
Audit logging setup 2-44 Dimensions
Australia regional information 17-5 12 in Standard C-Arm 16-34
I-1
Index
21 cm Ergo C-Arm 16-34 Positioning 3-49

21 cm Motorized C-Arm 16-34 Cephalad/caudal tilt
21 cm Super C-Arm 16-34 Ergo C-Arm 3-65
31 cm Ergo C-Arm 16-34 Motorized C-Arm 3-84
31 cm Motorized C-Arm 16-34 Standard C-Arm 3-57
31 cm Super C-Arm 16-34 Super C-Arm 3-51
9 in Standard C-Arm 16-34 Horizontal
9 in Super C-Arm 16-34 Ergo C-Arm 3-66
Function keys 3-3 Motorized C-Arm
Rotate image 3-3 Manual 3-87
Functions Standard C-Arm 3-58
Alarm reset 3-7 Super C-Arm 3-52
Auto technique 3-105 L-arm rotation
Collimator Leaf Open/Close 3-5 Ergo C-Arm 3-70
Collimator Leaf Rotation 3-5 Standard C-Arm 3-61
Field of view 3-4 Lateral rotation
High level fluoro 3-105 Ergo C-Arm 3-63
Iris Collimator Open/Close 3-5 Motorized C-Arm 3-85
kVp 3-104 Manual 3-88
Low dose 3-6 Standard C-Arm 3-55
mA 3-104 Super C-Arm 3-50
Mode 3-4 SmartView rotation
Pulse 3-5 Ergo C-Arm 3-70
Reverse image 3-4 Standard C-Arm 3-61
Generator operating parameters Vertical
specifications 16-8
Ergo C-Arm 3-67, 3-86
Identification 3-36
Standard C-Arm 3-59
Immediate shutdown 2-80
Super C-Arm 3-53
Keyswitch Off position 5-13
Wig-wag
Moving 3-46
Ergo C-Arm 3-69
Orientation 3-48
Standard C-Arm 3-60
Overview 3-36
Super C-Arm 3-54
I-2
Index
Positioning for CPR 3-71 Roadmap mask 6-16

Motorized C-Arms 3-92 Select runs from cine screen 6-10
RUI orientation 3-83 Set cues 6-12
Setup 3-36, 3-48 Set mask 6-11
Sleep mode 3-112 Setup 6-3
Specifications 16-7 Activate disk 6-3
Camera output video signal 16-16 Viewing options 6-14
X-ray beam geometry 16-16 Classification type 16-1
Steering handle 3-47 Cleaning agents 13-1
Wheel brakes 3-47 C-Arm 13-1
X-ray and Lift On position 5-13 Workstation 13-1
X-ray generator Cleaning and disinfecting the sys-
tem 13-1
Specifications 16-7
Cleaning the system 13-1
X-rays off 5-13
Clear print queue 8-29
Callibrate measurements 7-8
Collimator specifications 16-14
Canada regional information 17-7
Comments 7-5
Cephalad/caudal tilt
Create 7-5
Ergo C-Arm 3-65
Delete 7-6
Compliance A-1
Standard C-Arm 3-57
X-ray equipment certification 1-4
Super C-Arm 3-51
Contact burns 1-13
Certificate setup 2-51
Contact detection 3-83
Certification management setup 2-47
Contact information 16-1
Check disk space 8-29
European Union 17-8
China regional information 17-8
FAX 16-1
Cine
Kazakhstan 17-10
Acquire 6-5
Phone 16-1
Adjust mask 6-16
Contact Information 1-5
Apply peak opacification 6-15
Continued compliance 1-1
Change acquisition rate 6-6, 6-6
Contraindications for use 1-3
Mini cine playback 6-17
Contrast agent injector 11-1
Post-processing subtraction 6-15
Auto inject synchronization 11-2
Review 6-8
Connect to Workstation 11-1
I-3
Index
Intended use 11-1 Positioning non-motorized C-Arm 3-71

Proper injector use 11-1 Create prints 8-22
Safety 11-1 Clear queue 8-29
Controlling the system 3-24 Print dose summary 8-26
Controls Print patient summary 8-28
Fast stop switches 5-9 Select device 8-23
Footswitch 5-10 D
Handswitch 5-10 D on thumbnail 5-18
X-ray on switch 5-10 Data security 1-16
Cooling efficiency 1-13 Default imaging profile setup 2-6
Copy images to a new study 8-19 Default profile screen 2-6
Country-specific information 17-1 Delete images 8-36
Argentina 17-4 Derived images 5-18
Australia 17-5 Designated use areas 1-14
Brazil 17-5 Deterministic effects of ionizing radi-
Canada 17-7 ation on humans 5-56
China 17-8 Device description 1-2
European Union 17-8 DICOM
Iran 17-9 Image Retrieve Server 10-10
Japan 17-10 Internal viewer 8-37
Kazakhstan 17-10 Portable viewer 8-40
Mexico 17-10 Print Servers 10-7
New Zealand 17-5 Retrieve exams 8-15
North America 17-4 Setup configurations 10-1
Peru 17-11 Store servers list 10-12
Russia 17-11 Troubleshooting 10-16
Saudi Arabia 17-12 Using the viewer 8-40
Singapore 17-12 DICOM Internal Viewer 8-37
South Korea 17-13 DICOM setup 10-1
Turkey 17-13 Local server 10-4
USA 17-1 MWL / MPPS server 10-6
CPR Digital pen 7-14
Positioning motorized C-Arm 3-92
I-4
Index
Digital Pulse Cine Domestic

Vascular 5-41 1.0.XXX / 1.2.XXXX A-3
Digital Spot imaging 5-26 2.X.X.XXXX / 3.1.X.XXXX A-12
Dimensions 16-33 International 1
12 in Standard C-Arm 16-34 1.0.XXX / 1.2.XXXX A-6
21 cm Ergo C-Arm 16-34 2.X.X.XXXX / 3.1.X.XXXX A-25
21 cm Motorized C-Arm 16-34 International 2
21 cm Super C-Arm 16-34 1.0.XXX / 1.2.XXXX A-9
31 cm Ergo C-Arm 16-34 2.X.X.XXXX / 3.1.X.XXXX A-33
31 cm Motorized C-Arm 16-34 International 3
31 cm Super C-Arm 16-34 2.X.X.XXXX / 3.1.X.XXXX A-43
9 in Standard C-Arm 16-34 International 4
9 in Super C-Arm 16-34 2.X.X.XXXX / 3.1.X.XXXX A-53
Disinfecting the system 13-1 International 5
Disk encryption setup 2-55 2.X.X.XXXX / 3.1.X.XXXX A-65
Display monitor specifications 16-4 International 6
Display test pattern 2-65 2.X.X.XXXX / 3.1.X.XXXX A-75
Disposable items 16-18 Dose summary 5-48
Dose area product 5-48 Review 8-21
Specification 5-48 Dose to operator specifications 16-18
Dose rates Dosimetry display 5-46
1.0.XXX / 1.2.XXXX A-3 Draping
Domestic A-3 C-Arm 1-12
International 1 A-6 X-ray cooling kit 1-13
International 2 A-9 DVD burner recommendations 16-5
2.X.X.XXXX / 3.1.X.XXXX A-12 DVD specifications 16-5
Domestic A-12 Dynamic recording 6-1
International 1 A-25 E
International 2 A-33 Electrical quality assurance check 13-14
International 3 A-43 Electrical safety 1-9
International 4 A-53 Electrical fire 1-9
International 5 A-65 Electrical shock 1-9
International 6 A-75 Equipment malfunction 1-10
I-5
Index
Explosion 1-10 Exams

Ground fault 1-10 Available exams 8-4
Electromagnetic Retrieve from a USB device 8-14
Compatibility 1-15 Retrieve from DICOM 8-15
Degradation 1-16 Saved 4-15
Performance criteria 1-16 Access Images 4-15
Use near other equipment 1-16 Scheduled 4-8
Emission specifications 16-28 Append Step 4-12
Immunity Filter 4-10
Limits management 16-32 Select patient from 4-9
Tests and compliance 16-28 Set up 4-8
Enhanced noise reduction Update Schedule 4-10
Cardiac profile 2-8, 5-6 Explosion 1-10
Vascular profile 2-8, 5-6 Exposure timer 5-7
Enterprise Access Authorization and Extended exposure feature 3-35
Audit
External connections 3-19
Enable enterprise authentication 15-2
External devices 1-6
Enterprise authentication
F
Enable 15-2
Fast stop quality assurance check 13-14
Environmental conditions 16-3
Fast stop switches 1-15, 5-9
Equipment malfunction 1-10
Fluoro (fluoroscopic) imaging 5-19
Equipment stability, transport, and
positioning 1-11 Digital Spot 5-26
Equivalent filtration 5-46 Fluoro Mode 5-22
Error recovery 14-1 High Level Fluoro (HLF) 5-23
Image freeze 14-4 Low dose 5-25
No boot 14-4 Producing an image 5-23
No X-ray 14-4 Pulsed X-ray 5-23
Procedure 14-1 Focal spot specifications 16-9
European Union regional inform- 0.3 16-9
ation 17-8 0.3 nominal 16-9
European Union representative 17-8 0.6 nominal 16-9
Event logs 14-1 Footswitch 5-10
Mode or Model mismatch 5-12
I-6
Index
Models 5-11 Standard C-Arm 3-58

G Super C-Arm 3-52
GE OEC responsibilities 1-2 I

After-sale operating and safety I/O interfaces 16-4
practices 1-4
Image acquisition setup 2-4
General Safety 1-5
Image annotation 7-1
Contact Information 1-5
Comments 7-5
European Union 17-8
Display 7-12
Kazakhstan 17-10
Hide 7-12
External devices 1-6
Markers 7-3
Hazard alerts 1-5
Measure 7-7
Patient environment 1-8
Angle 7-10
Reporting serious incidents 1-5
Calibrate 7-8
Wireless devices 1-6
Distance 7-9
Generator operating parameters
Stenosis 7-11
specifications 16-8
Image annotations
Ground Fault 1-10
Fine-tune placement 7-3
H
On the main system monitor 7-1
Handswitch 5-10
On the Touch/Touch Tableside 7-2
Models 5-11
Delete measurement lines 7-3
Heat Management 14-4
Move measurement lines 7-3
Anode warm and hot thresholds 14-4
Screen 7-1
Heating and cooling charts
Image control keypad 3-29
Anode 16-13
Image detector specifications 16-15
Tube housing 16-12
Image handling and processing
High Level Fluoro (HLF) keys 3-7, 7-12
Producing an image 5-23 Auto brightness and contrast 3-8
High Level Fluoro (HLF) imaging 5-23 Enhance 3-14
HIPAA security measures 1-16 Manual brightness and contrast 3-9
Horizontal cross-arm 3-52, 3-58, 3-66 Negate 3-11
Horizontal positioning Noise filter (averaging) 3-15
Ergo C-Arm 3-66 Reset 3-15
Motorized C-Arm Save image 3-7
Manual 3-87
I-7
Index
Smart Metal 3-10 Surge 16-29

Swap 3-8 Transient/burst 16-29
Zoom 3-12 Voltage variation 16-29
Image processing 8-9 Improperly attached equipment 1-11
Image quality and dosimetry QA Indications for use 1-3
checks 13-15
Ingress of fluids 1-12
Image storage capacity 16-5
Intended clinical benefits 1-3
Images screen 8-1, 8-2
Intended use 1-2
Available exams 8-4
Intended users 1-3
Damaged thumbnails 8-3
Iran regional information 17-9
Review archived images 8-14
Isokerma specifications 16-19
Imaging
J
Access mode 5-1
Japan regional information 17-10
Anatomical Profile 5-4
Joystick 3-80
Autosaving images 5-18
K
Changing imaging modes during
an exam 5-3 Kazakhstan regional information 17-10
Fluoro (fluoroscopic) 5-19 Keyboard 3-24
Mode pairs 5-1 Keypad 3-29
Mode screen 5-19 Keys
Modes summary 5-50 Cursor movement 3-29
Pediatric patients 5-43, 5-45 Text entry 3-29
Saving 5-18 Keyswitch
Modified images 5-18 Off position 5-13
Recalled images 5-18 X-rays and Lift On position 5-13
Zoomed images 5-18 L
Small patients 5-43, 5-45
L-arm rotation
Status Bar 5-2
Ergo C-Arm 3-70
Technique control 5-8
Standard C-Arm 3-61
Vascular 5-27
Labels
Accessory power limit 12-4
Immunity tests
Argentina import 17-4
ESD, transient 16-29
Brazil import 17-6
Power frequency 16-29
Brazil shipping 17-6
I-8
Index
C-Arm system rating 12-1 French Workstation system

rating 17-7
Canada radiation and X-ray warn-
ing 17-8 GOST 17-11
Certification IEC Type (Iran) 17-9
Beam limiting device 17-1 Iran import 17-9
HV generator and X-ray con- Mexico import 17-10
trol 17-2
PCT 17-11
Image detector 17-1
Peru import 17-11
Label location 12-5
South Korea import 17-13
Laser aimer 17-2
Turkey import 17-13
X-ray tube assembly 17-2
WEEE with black bar 17-9
Connector shock warning 12-2
Wireless 17-3, 17-4
French C-Arm system rating 17-7
New Zealand 17-5
French Workstation system rat-
Saudi Arabia 17-12
ing 17-7
Singapore 17-12
Global device ID 12-5
Mexico Import 17-10
IEC TYPE 17-9
OEC Touch Tableside rating 12-2
Iran import 17-9
Peru import 17-11
Laser Aimer caution 12-3
Plug grounding warning 12-3
Location-specific
Regional labels 17-1
50 17-8
Argentina 17-4
Argentina import 17-4
Australia 17-5
Brazil import 17-6
Brazil 17-5
Brazil shipping 17-6
Canada 17-7
Canada radiation and X-ray
warning 17-8 China 17-8
Canadian Standards European Union 17-8
Association 17-4, 17-7
FDA 17-1
CE 0459 17-9
Iran 17-9
CSA 17-4, 17-7
Mexico 17-10
EAC 17-11
New Zealand 17-5
EFUP 17-8
North America 17-4
EU Representative 17-9
Peru 17-11
FCC 17-3
Russia 17-11
French C-Arm system rating 17-7
Saudi Arabia 17-12
I-9
Index
Singapore 17-12 Manual movement 3-87

South Korea 17-13 Markers 7-3
Turkey 17-13, 17-13 Create 7-4
USA 17-1 Delete 7-4
Removable grid 12-4 Material safety data sheets 16-32
Skin spacer 12-4 Maximum surface temperatures 16-14
South Korea import 17-13 Measure 7-7
Transport position Angle 7-10
C-Arm 12-4 Calibrate 7-8
Workstation 12-4 Delete 7-12
Turkey import label 17-13 Distance 7-9
Types of labels 12-1 Stenosis 7-11
Unique Device ID 12-5 Mechanical quality assurance
check 13-11
USB warning 12-3
Mechanical Safety 1-11
Workstation system rating 12-1
Burns 1-13
X-ray warning 12-2
Cooling efficiency 1-13
Laser Aimer 9-1
Draping 1-12
On/off switch 9-1
Equipment stability, transport,
Operating 9-2
and positioning 1-11
Safety 9-1
Improperly attached equipment 1-11
Specifications 16-16
Ingress of fluids 1-12
Lateral rotation
Manual mechanical movement 1-11
Ergo C-Arm 3-63
Motorized mechanical movement 1-11
Repetitive motion 1-12
Manual 3-88
Media Viewer 8-40
Standard C-Arm 3-55
Using the Media Viewer 8-40
Super C-Arm 3-50
Medical directive iii
Line pair resolutions 16-4
Messages 14-6
Low dose 5-25
4-hour warm-up required 14-6
M A/D charger sensor out of range 14-7
Main system monitor A/D current out of range 14-7
Touchscreen controls 3-31 A/D filament senror out of range 14-8
Malfunction 1-10 A/D flux out of range 14-8
I-10
Index
A/D high MA out of range 14-9 Calibrate FPD maps 14-17, 14-36
A/D housing temp out of range 14-9 Camera iris calibration required 14-17
A/D inverter out of range 14-10 Camera iris error 14-17
A/D kVp sensor out of range 14-10 Cancel copy operation? 14-17
A/D low MA out of range 14-11 Cannot access user manual 14-17
A/D stator out of range 14-11 Cannot change password 14-18
A/D voltage out of range 14-12 Cannot communicate with the
Workstation keypad 14-18
Abandon selected exam with
selected abandon code? 14-12 Cannot connect to
DICOM server 14-18, 14-18
Access antivirus feature? 14-12
Cannot make connection to wire-
Anatomical profile(s) disabled 14-12
less network - Network is not
Anode is hot 14-13 FIPS compliant 14-18
Anode overheated 14-13 Cannot make connection to wire-
less network - Verify settings 14-19
Anti-virus file update required 14-13
Cannot make network con-
Append step to exam? 14-13 nection 14-19
Associate current images with Cannot mount file system on
this patient? 14-13 USB flash drive 14-19
Authentication failure 14-14 Cannot write to portable media 14-19
Account temporarily locked 14-14 Certificate creation failure 14-19
Invalid login and/or password 14-14 Certificate creation success 14-20
Banner imported successfully 14-14 Certificate export failure 14-20
Battery low 14-14 Certificate export success 14-20
Battery notice 14-15 Certificate import success 14-20
Bumper attached 14-15, 14-15 Certificate signing request not
C-Arm control panel dis- written to portable device 14-20
connected 14-15 Change security setting
C-Arm firmware incompatible 14-16 defaults? 14-20
C-Arm has been connected to Charger failed 14-21
Workstation 14-16 Charger failed, restart the sys-
C-Arm has been disconnected tem 14-21
from Workstation 14-16 Checking file system 14-21
C-Arm power lost 14-16 Cine run incomplete - One or
C-Arm reboot required 14-16 more frames have been lost 14-22
C-Arm restart required 14-16 Cine run incomplete - One or
more frames in this playback
Calibrate FPD dose 14-17, 14-36 have been lost 14-21
I-11
Index
Cine storage full 14-22 Decryption password deleted 14-27

Clutch open 14-22 Delete all patient health inform-
ation and saved images? 14-27
Collimator calibration required 14-22
Delete all saved wireless net-
Collimator iris position error 14-22
work configuration data? 14-27
Collimator iris too large 14-23
Delete exams containing images
Collimator shutter position error 14-23 not saved to PACS or external
media? 14-28
Collimator stuck 14-23
Delete exams containing images
Collision detected 14-24 queued to be saved to PACS? 14-28
Communication failed 14-24 Delete exams containing incom-
Complete selected exam(s)? 14-24 plete MPPS events? 14-28
Configuration change requires Delete remote logging cer-
restart 14-24 tificate? 14-28
Contact detected 14-24 Delete selected certificate? 14-28
Control panel key stuck 14-25 Delete selected exam(s)? 14-28
Copied images may not display Delete selected image(s)? -
as expected - The imaging pro- Selected (highlighted) images
file does not exist on this sys- will be permanently deleted. 14-29
tem... 14-25 Delete selected image(s)? -
Copied images may not display Selected images are queued
as expected - The imaging pro- for storage 14-29
file is different... 14-25 Delete selected scheduled exam
Copy complete 14-25 (s)? 14-29
Corrupted images deleted 14-25 Delete selected server(s)? 14-29
CSR export success 14-26 Delete the auto-boot password? 14-29
Cumulative air kerma limit Destination currently unavail-
exceeded 14-26 able. 14-29
Data on USB not supported 14-26 Detector communication failure 14-30
Database cleanup failed 14-26 Detector error 14-30
Date or time changes require Detector firmware incompatible 14-30
restart 14-26 Detector map missing 14-30
Decryption password created DICOM error 14-31
successfully 14-26
DICOM move destination
Decryption password creation unknown 14-31
failure - Password not complex
enough 14-27 DICOM over TLS enabled 14-31
Decryption password creation DICOM server out of resources 14-31
failure - Passwords do not
match 14-27
I-12
Index
DICOM server response missing High voltage generator error 14-37

required DICOM tags 14-31
HLF overtime 14-37
DICOM server verified suc-
Hold longer 14-37
cessfully 14-32
Hold X-ray switch longer 14-37
Disable DICOM over DLS? 14-32
Hot, HLF disabled 14-13, 14-38
Disable remote logging TLS? 14-32
Housing is hot 14-38
Dose accuracy calibration
required 14-32 Housing overheated 14-38
Duplicate name not allowed 14-32 HV generator error 14-37, 14-38
Editing patient information will Image display error 14-38
change other exams 14-33
Image display incorrect 14-39
Email was sent successfully 14-33
Image processing error 14-39
Expired certificate 14-33
Image storage full 14-39
Export success - Certificate sign-
ing created and exported 14-33 Image too big to copy 14-39
Export success - Certificate Import this banner 14-39

sucessfully exported 14-33 Incomplete image acquisition 14-40
Exposure setting change 14-33 Incorrect decryption password 14-40
External video cannot be dis- Incorrect passphrase 14-40
played 14-34
Insufficient image storage space
External video cannot be turned to retrieve USB images 14-40
off 14-34
Insufficient local storage 14-40
Fast stop activated - Twist the
switch 14-34 Interlock failure - Reset if activ-
ated 14-41
Filament calibration required 14-34
Invalid certificate 14-41
Filament error 14-35
Invalid port entry or port in use 14-41
Filament regulator error 14-35
Invalid private key 14-41
File cannot be imported 14-35
Invalid timeout value 14-41
File system check complete 14-35
Iris position error 14-22, 14-42
File system corruption detected 14-35
Iris too large 14-23, 14-42
Format USB device? 14-36
Joystick failure 14-42
FPD dose calibration required 14-36
Joystick stuck 14-42
FPD maps calibration required 14-36
Key and certificate mismatch 14-42
Grid inserted 14-36
Key stuck 14-25, 14-42
Grid removed 14-36
Keypad stuck 14-43
Hardware error 14-37
Keyswitch in Standby position 14-43
I-13
Index
Keyswitch in X-rays Disabled Non-critical system software fail-

position 14-43 ure 14-49
kV on in error 14-44 Not for diagnostic use. Refer-
ence image only. 14-49
Lift switch stuck 14-44
NTP server connection failed 14-49
Login account locked 14-44
NTP server connection verified -
Logout in progress 14-44
The specified NTP server is
Low disk space 14-44 reachable. Press OK to con-
tinue. 14-49
MA on in error 14-45
NTP server connection verified -
MA sensor failure 14-45 To update the time on the sys-
Manual file transfer failed tem press OK, you will be
prompted to restart the sys-
System was shut down 14-45 tem. 14-49
X-ray was taken 14-45 Onboard printer error 14-50
Maximum number of servers Overload fault 14-50
reached 14-46
Overload fault Restart the sys-
Media file format on device not tem 14-50
supported 14-46
Overvoltage fault 14-50
Media file system has an error 14-46
Overvoltage fault Restart the sys-
Motion calibration required 14-46 tem 14-51
Motion error 14-46, 14-47 Passphrase error 14-51
Restart the system 14-46 Password error 14-51, 14-51
Motion failure 14-47, 14-47 Password reset required 14-51
Motion firmware incompatible 14-47 Patient ID conflict - ID has been
Motion stop pressed 14-47 changed 14-52
Network not responding 14-48, 14-48 Patient ID conflict - ID matches
and existing ID 14-52
New password and retyped pass-
word do not match 14-48 Patient information incomplete -
End selected exame anyway? 14-52
New password saved 14-48
Patient information incomplete -
No compatible data on USB Send selected image(s) any-
device 14-48 way? 14-52
No match found Perform full database cleanup? 14-52
Modify the search criteria 14-48 Please wait 14-53
Modify the search criteria Port verification successful 14-53
using the Schedule Filter 14-48
Portable media error 14-53
No private key for host certificate14-49
Power communication failure 14-53
No response, server timed out 14-49
I-14
Index
Power configuration does not Save operation failed 14-58

match measured voltage 14-53
Save operation failed - The spe-
Power configuration not set 14-53 cified hostname does not con-
form to RFC 952. Change the
Power error detected 14-54
hostname to a valid value
Power lost 14-54 before saving. 14-58
Precharge circuit timeout 14-54 Save success 14-58
Precharge voltage error - Check Scheduled exam list full 14-59
the C-Arm circuit breaker 14-55
Screen sharing active 14-59
Printer is out of film or paper 14-55
Selected image(s) are bigger
Remote file transfer failed 14-55 than the current media capa-
city 14-59
Remote file transfer stopped 14-55
Self-powered USB device con-
Remote logging over TLS nected to system 14-59
enabled 14-56
Settings missing/invalid 14-59
Remote logging over TLS error
Shot error 14-59
Missing host certificate or
private key 14-56 Shot failed 14-60
Missing truster certificate 14-56 Shutter position err 14-60
UDP configured for remote Software error 14-60
server 14-56
Stator not on 14-60
Remote server verification fail-
Stator standby 14-60
ure 14-56
Switch press too short 14-60
Remote server verification suc-
cess 14-56 System backup missing 14-61
Resert password? 14-57 System software error 14-61
Restart required 14-57 System standby 14-61
Retrieved storage full 14-57 System will not boot 14-61
Room door open, close dooR 14-57 System will not boot - Problem
with the license files 14-61
RUI error 14-57
Temp sensor fail 14-62
RUI key stuck 14-57
Temperature sensor fail 14-62
RUI not connected 14-57
TLS error 14-62
Saturation fault 14-58
TLS warning 14-62
Save changes before exiting? 14-58
Too many matches found 14-62
Save failure
Touchscreen unavailable 14-62
A setting is invalid 14-58
Unable to communicate with
System settings were not
USB device 14-63
saved 14-58
I-15
Index
Unable to connect 14-63 Mexico regional information 17-10

Unable to delete older exams - Mode groups 5-1
they contain images that have
Mode pairs
not been stored 14-63
Switching with footswitch /
Unable to delete older exams -
handswitch 5-13
they contain performed pro-
cedure step information 14-63 Modes of operation specifications 16-9
Unsent data deleted 14-63 0.3 16-9
UPS battery low 14-64 0.3 nominal 16-9
USB format complete 14-64 0.6 nominal 16-9
USB format failed 14-64 Modes summary 5-50
USB storage device can safely Monitor specifications 16-4
be removed from system 14-64
Monitors 3-18
Verify failed 14-64
Motion stop switch 3-78
Warning! High kV 14-64
Motorized and manual mechanical
Warning! High MA 14-65 movement 1-11
Warning! Low kV 14-65 Motorized C-Arm 3-72
Warning! Low MA 14-65 Buttons 3-78
Wireless configuration settings Remote User Interface (RUI) 3-77
saved 14-65
Cephalad / caudal tilt 3-84
Wireless hardware failure 14-65
Horizontal positioning
Workstation and C-Arm do not
match 14-66 Manual 3-87
Workstation software and firm- Joystick 3-80

ware incompatible 14-66 Lateral rotation 3-85
Workstation software error 14-66 Manual 3-88
X-ray switch security error 14-67 Manual movement 3-87
Restart the system 14-66 Motorization status icons 3-81
X-ray switch stuck 14-67 Movement and operation 3-83
X-rays disabled 14-68 Orientation buttons 3-80
If this message persists, call Positioning 3-83
for service 14-67
Rotational speed 3-83
Press any key 14-67
Safety 3-73
Recharge for 24 hour 14-68
Setup 3-73
Restart the system 14-68
Workstation function buttons 3-80
X-rays temporarily disabled 14-68
I-16
Index
Motorized system quality assur- OEC Touch

ance check 13-12
Overview 3-102
Move images to a new study 8-19
OEC Touch / Touch Tableside
movement and operation keys
Auto technique 3-105
C-Arm Orientation 3-80
Brightness control 3-111
Movement 3-80
C-Arm position panel 3-107
RUI Orientation 3-80
Cine frame rate selection 3-110
Movement buttons 3-80
Cine record selection 3-110
Multiple switch presses 5-12
Cine rubs 3-106
N Compatibility 3-98
Network High Level Fluoro control 3-105
Set up networks 2-12 Image control 3-95
Ping/Trace 2-21 Image processing 3-103
Wired 2-19 Images screen 3-106
Wireless 2-14 kVp control 3-104
Network configuration setup screen 2-12 mA control 3-104
Ping/Trace 2-21 Message display 3-110
Wired 2-19 Mini RUI 3-101
Wireless 2-14 Mode selection 3-109
New Zealand regional information 17-5 Monitor swivel 3-100
North America regional information 17-4 Motorized systems 3-100
O Overview 3-93, 3-97
OEC Elite description Positioning 3-98
Contraindications for use 1-3 Profile selection 3-108
Device description 1-2 Recovery 3-112
Indications for use 1-3 Rotating images 3-103
Intended clinical benefits 1-3 System status display 3-110
Intended use 1-2 Technique control 3-104
Intended users 1-3 Technique display 3-110
Patient population 1-3 Volume control 3-111
Potential side effects 1-3 Zoom fine control 3-104
Use environment 1-3 Operator qualifications 1-1
I-17
Index
Owner responsibilities 1-1 Position defaults setup 2-10

Continued compliance 1-1 Positioning the C-Arm 3-49
Operator qualifications 1-1 Cephalad/caudal tilt
System compatibility 1-1 Ergo C-Arm 3-65
Unauthorized modifications 1-1 Motorized C-Arm 3-84
P Standard C-Arm 3-57
Password 1-16 Super C-Arm 3-51
Patient Horizontal
Environment 1-8 Ergo C-Arm 3-66
International 1-8 Motorized C-Arm
United States 1-8 Manual 3-87
Privacy and security 1-16 Standard C-Arm 3-58
Radiation protection 1-14 Super C-Arm 3-52
Patient Information Screen L-arm rotation
Select Current Patient 4-2 Ergo C-Arm 3-70
Patient information setup 2-8, 2-8 Standard C-Arm 3-61
Patient population 1-3 Lateral rotation
Patient Screen 4-1 Ergo C-Arm 3-63
Edit information 4-6 Motorized C-Arm 3-85
Enter Patient Information 4-2 Manual 3-88
Peak opacification 6-15 Standard C-Arm 3-55
Pediatric imaging 5-43, 5-45 Super C-Arm 3-50
Performance checks 13-9 SmartView rotation
Personal radiation protection 1-14 Ergo C-Arm 3-70
Peru regional information 17-11 Standard C-Arm 3-61
Ping/Trace 2-21 Vertical
Port Ergo C-Arm 3-67, 3-86
DVI-D 12-12 Standard C-Arm 3-59
DVI-I 12-12 Super C-Arm 3-53
Ethernet 12-11 Wig-wag
Relay 12-12 Ergo C-Arm 3-69
Room interface 12-12 Standard C-Arm 3-60
Portable media 16-5 Super C-Arm 3-54
I-18
Index
Post-Processing X-rays 13-15

Brightness 8-10 Quality control mode 13-24
Contrast 8-11 R
Enhancement 8-12 Radiation control 5-7
Procedure 8-10 Radiation dose structured report 5-49
Reset manipulations 8-14 Radiation Modes 5-50
Potential side effects 1-3 Radiation safety 1-13
Power loss 2-81 Designated use areas 1-14
Power requirements 16-2 Fast stop switches 1-15
Interconnect cable 16-7 Patient pradiation protection 1-14
Print dose summary 8-26 Patient supports 1-15
Print images 8-22 Personal radiation protection 1-14
Print patient summary 8-28 Radiation burns 1-14
Privacy and security Radiation indicators 1-14
Information protection Skin spacer 1-14
Portable media security 15-1 Source-to-skin distance 1-14
Removable media security 15-1 RDSR 5-49
Removable media secur- Recording
ityData destruction for port-
able media 15-2 Dynamic Recording 6-1
Privacy and security environment 15-1 Regional settings screen 2-23
Processing images 8-9 Regional settings setup 2-23
Pulsed X-ray 5-23 Remote logging setup 2-58
Change rate 5-24 Remote Service Platform (RSvP)
Enable 5-24 Specifications 16-6
Q Remote Service Platform (RSvP)

setup 2-61
Quality assurance checks
Removable anti-scatter grid spe-
Electrical 13-14 cifications 16-15
Fast stop 13-14 Repetitive motion 1-12
Image Quality and dosimetry Reporting serious incidents 1-5
checks 13-15
Reset image manipulations 8-14
Mechanical 13-11
Restarting the System 2-81
Motorized system 13-12
Retrieve exams
Quality control mode 13-24
From DICOM 8-15
I-19
Index
From USB 8-14 Saved exams

Saved exam 8-14 Retrieve 8-14
Image review 8-3 Saving images 5-18
Review Modified images 5-18
Archived images 8-14 Recalled images 5-18
Cine 6-8 Zoomed images 5-18
Dose information 8-21 Screen saver 2-83
Patient information 8-21 Security 3-33
Revision history ii Enterprise user administration 15-2
Roadmap imaging 5-36 Groups 15-3
Clearing current mask 5-39 Local user administration 15-2
Clearing mask 5-39 Privileges 15-3
Mask from subtraction Cine run 5-40 Users 15-3
Procedure 5-37 Security setup 2-25
Selecting mask 5-39 Antivirus 2-27
Sequence of events 5-37 Authentication 2-31
Use a LIH as a mask 5-41 Application authentication 2-31
Use a recalled image as a mask 5-41 Enterprise 2-40
Use a recalled mask 5-40 Groups 2-37
Russia regional information 17-11 Local users 2-33
S Audit logging 2-44
Safety 1-1 Certification management 2-47
Electrical 1-9 Certificate 2-51
Electromagnetic compatibility 1-15 Disk encryption 2-55
GE OEC responsibilities 1-2 Remote logging 2-58
General 1-5 Separation distances
Hazard alerts and definitions 1-5 Recommended 16-31
Mechanical 1-11 Serious incidents 1-5
Overview 1-1 Service 2-68
Owner responsibilities 1-1 Service visit exam 4-22
Patient privacy and security 1-16 Setup
Radiation 1-13 Antivirus 2-27
Saudi Arabia regional information 17-12 Audio 2-10
I-20
Index
Authentication 2-31 Security setup screen 2-25

Application authentication 2-31 Service screen 2-68
Enterprise 2-40 Setup screen 2-2
Groups 2-37 System software 2-1
Local users 2-33 Touchpad 2-10
Audit logging 2-44 Touchpad/Audio screen 2-10
Certification management 2-47 Utilities
Certificate 2-51 Remote Service Platform
(RSvP) 2-61
Default profile screen 2-6
Test patterns 2-65
DICOM 10-4, 10-6
Video output 2-66
Disk encryption 2-55
Utilities setup screen 2-59
Image acquisition screen 2-4
Shelf power specifications 16-3
Network configuration setup
screen 2-12 Shipment 13-27
Ping/Trace 2-21 Shipping the system 13-27
Wired 2-19 Shutting down the system 2-79
Wireless 2-14 Singapore regional information 17-12
Patient information 2-8 Skin spacer 1-14, 3-41
Patient information screen 2-8 Attaching 3-41
Position defaults screen 2-10 Removing 3-42
Regional settings screen 2-23 SmartView rotation
Remote logging 2-58 Ergo C-Arm 3-70
Security Standard C-Arm 3-61
Antivirus 2-27 Software Setup 2-1
Authentication 2-31 Default profile screen 2-6
Application authentication 2-31 Image acquisition screen 2-4
Enterprise 2-40 Network configuration setup
screen 2-12
Groups 2-37
Ping/Trace 2-21
Local users 2-33
Wired setup 2-19
Audit logging 2-44
Wireless setup 2-14
Certification management 2-47
Patient information screen 2-8
Certificate 2-51
Position defaults screen 2-10
Regional settings screen 2-23
Remote logging setup 2-58
I-21
Index
Security Generator operating para-

meters 16-8
Antivirus 2-27
Heating and cooling charts
Authentication 2-31
Anode 16-13
Application authentication 2-31
Tube housing 16-12
Enterprise 2-40
Image detector 16-15
Groups 2-37
Laser Aimer 16-16
Local users 2-33
Maximum surface tem-
Audit logging 2-44
peratures 16-14
Certification management 2-47
Removable anti-scatter grid 16-15
Certificate 2-51
Tube housing heating and
Disk encryption 2-55 cooling charts 16-12
Remote logging 2-58 Tube rating charts 16-13
Security setup screen 2-25 X-ray beam geometry 16-16
Service screen 2-68 X-ray generator
Setup screen 2-2 Specifications 16-7
Touchpad/Audio screen 2-10 X-ray source assembly 16-11
Utilities Dose area product 5-48
Remote Service Platform Environmental conditions 16-3
(RSvP) screen 2-61
Interconnect cable power require-
Test patterns 2-65 ments 16-7
Video output 2-66 Other 16-17
Utilities setup screen 2-59 Dose to operator 16-18
Source-to-skin distance 1-14 Isokerma 16-19
South Korea regional information 17-13 Material safety data sheets 16-32
Specifications Zones of occupancy 16-18
C-Arm 16-7 Remote Service Platform (RSvP) 16-6
Anode heating and cooling Workstation 16-4
charts 16-13
Display monitors 16-4
Camera output video signal 16-16
DVD burner 16-5
Collimator 16-14
I/O interfaces 16-4
Focal spot specifications 16-9
Image storage capacity 16-5
0.3 16-9
Line pair resolutions 16-4
0.3 nominal 16-9
Monitors 16-4
0.6 nominal 16-9
Shelf power 16-3
I-22
Index
USB device 16-5 Digital Spot exposure 12-11

Standard fluoroscopy imaging Disable X-rays and motion 12-8
X-ray switch setup 5-19 EAC 17-11
Standby or X-rays Off 1-16 EFUP 17-8
Starting up the System 2-69, 2-77, 13-9 eIFU 12-6
Status Bar Electrical shock 12-6
Imaging 5-2 Equipotential terminals 12-8
Storage 13-26 ESD 12-7
Tube conditioning 13-27 Ethernet connector 12-11
Storing the system 13-26 External monitor connector 12-12
Subtraction imaging 5-31 Eye 12-11
Adjusting mask 5-35 Eye+ 12-11
Landmarking 5-36 Fast Stop 12-8
Registration 5-35 FCC 17-3
Procedure 5-33 Fluoro exposure 12-11
Sequence of events 5-32 Focus 12-10
Switch Footswitch cable port 12-10
Motion stop 3-78 GOST 17-11
Symbol Ground 12-9
Mass 12-15 Handswitch cable port 12-9
Symbols 12-5 HLF exposure 12-11
50 17-8 IPX3 12-14
Alternating Current 12-8 IPX8 12-13
Battery 12-10 kg 12-15
Canadian Standards Asso- Laser Aimer 12-14
ciation 17-4, 17-7
Lateral rotation lock 12-13
CE
Lateral rotation unlock 12-13
0459 17-9
Lock 12-12
Circuit breakers 12-11
Manufacturer 12-14
Consult manual before use 12-6
MD 12-15
CSA 17-4, 17-7
Mode switch 12-10
Dangerous voltages 12-6
Model/type 12-15
Date of manufacture 12-14
Part number 12-12
Digital pulse pedal 12-11
I-23
Index
Patient orientation 12-11 Controls 3-24

PCT 17-11 Default profile screen 2-6
Pinch points 12-7 Disconnect C-Arm 2-82
Power switch 12-9 Failure to start normally 2-69
REF 12-15 Image acquisition screen 2-4
Regional labels Immediate shutdown 2-80
Japan 17-10 Locked up 2-82
Regional symbols 17-1 Move the power cord 2-82
Relay outputs 12-12 Network configuration setup
screen 2-12
Roadmap 12-11
Ping/Trace 2-21
RUI port 12-10
Wired 2-19
Serial number 12-14
Wireless 2-14
Subtract exposure 12-11
Operation 3-1
System shutdown
Password 2-73
RUI 12-8
Patient information screen 2-8
Workstation back 12-8
Position defaults screen 2-10
Toggle Mode 12-10
Regional settings screen 2-23
Unlock 12-13
Restart 2-81
Video-in connector 12-12
Security
Video-out Connector 12-12
Antivirus 2-27
WEEE with black bar 17-9
Authentication 2-31
Wireless 17-3, 17-4
Application authentication 2-31
New Zealand 17-5
Enterprise 2-40
Saudi Arabia 17-12
Groups 2-37
Singapore 17-12
Local users 2-33
Workstation brake pedal locked
position 12-13 Audit logging 2-44
Workstation brake pedal steer- Certification management 2-47
ing position 12-13
Certificate 2-51
X-ray emissions 12-7
X-ray key off position 12-9
Remote logging 2-58
X-ray key standby position 12-9
Security setup screen 2-25
System
Service screen 2-68
Connect C-Arm 2-82
Setup screen 2-2
I-24
Index
Shut down / turn off 2-79, 2-80 Image handling and pro-
cessing 3-7, 7-12
Shutdown checklist 2-80
Auto brightness and contrast 3-8
Software setup 2-1
Enhance 3-14
Start up / Turn on 2-69, 2-77, 13-9
Manual brightness and con-
Startup checklist 2-77, 13-9
trast 3-9
Touchpad/Audio screen 2-10
Negate 3-11
Unresponsive 2-82
Noise filter (averaging) 3-15
Utilities
Reset 3-15
Remote Service Platform
Save image 3-7
(RSvP) screen 2-61
Smart Metal 3-10
Test patterns 2-65
Swap 3-8
Video output 2-66
Zoom 3-12
Utilities setup screen 2-59
Workstation operation
System compatibility 1-1
Images screen 3-81
System controls
Remote image processing 3-81
C-Arm functions 3-3
RUI Arrow keys 3-81
Alarm reset 3-7
Switch Applications 3-30
Auto technique 3-105
System information 16-1
Collimator Leaf Open/Close 3-5
System security feature 3-33
Collimator Leaf Rotation 3-5
Field of view 3-4 T
High level fluoro 3-105 Tabs 3-31

Iris Collimator Open/Close 3-5 Annotations tab 3-32
kVp 3-104 Applications tab 3-32
Low dose 3-6 Images tab 3-32
mA 3-104 Patient tab 3-32
Mode 3-4 Reference tab 3-32
Pulse 3-5 Technique control
Reverse image 3-4 Automatic 5-8
Rotate image 3-3 Manual 5-8
C-Arm movement and operation Test pattern setup and display 2-65
C-Arm Orientation 3-80 Test patterns screen 2-65
Movement 3-80 Thumbnails
RUI Orientation 3-80 Committed PACS icon 8-3
I-25
Index
D 5-18 Digital pulse cine 5-41

Damaged icon 8-3 Mode screen 5-28
Failed cine icon 8-3 Subtraction 5-31
Failed PACS icon 8-3 X-ray switch setup 5-27
Hourglass icon 8-3 Vertical positioning
Icons 8-3 Ergo C-Arm 3-67, 3-86
Local printer icon 8-3 Standard C-Arm 3-59
Mask icon 8-3 Super C-Arm 3-53
PACS icon 8-3 Video output setup 2-66
Printer icon 8-3 View external video 3-21
Processing icon 8-3 Virtual control panel 3-33
Scissors icon 8-3 Virtual keyboard 3-25
Trimmed icon 8-3 Visual X-ray indication 5-55
USB icon 8-3 W
Touchpad 3-30 WEEE iii
Touchpad setup 2-10 Wheel brakes 3-47
Touchpad/Audio setup 2-10 Wig-wag positioning
Transfer Status 14-3 Ergo C-Arm 3-69
Tube conditioning during storage 13-27 Standard C-Arm 3-60
Tube rating charts 16-13 Super C-Arm 3-54
Turkey regional information 17-13 Wired network setup 2-19
U Wireless devices 1-6
Unauthorized modifications 1-1 Wireless network setup 2-14
USA regional information 17-1 Workstation
USB specifications 16-5 Anatomical profile 5-4
Use environment 1-3 Battery-backed power supply 3-24
Utilities setup 2-59 Battery pack 3-35
Remote Service Platform (RSvP) 2-61 Blank button 3-33
Test patterns 2-65 Brake pedal 3-17
Video output 2-66 Locked position 3-17, 12-13
V Steering position 3-17, 12-13
Vascular imaging 5-27 Cursor movement and text-entry 3-28
Change pulse rate 5-31 External connections 3-19
I-26
Index
External video 3-21 X-ray mode setup 5-1

First-time Setup 2-1 X-ray on switch 5-10
Image control keypad 3-29 X-ray quality assurance check 13-15
Imaging mode screen 5-19 X-ray source assembly spe-
cifications 16-11
X-ray switch setup
Keyboard 3-24
Standard fluoroscopy imaging 5-19
Keypad 3-29
Vascular imaging 5-27
Monitors 3-18
X-rays and Lift On 5-13
Move the Workstation 3-23
X-rays off 5-13
Operation buttons 3-81
Overview 2-1 Z
Setup 3-16 Zones of occupancy specifications 16-18

Shelf power specifications 16-3 Zoom
Specifications 16-4 Cine runs 6-18
Tabs 3-31 Dynamic images 6-18
Annotations tab 3-32 Saving zoomed images 5-18
Applications tab 3-32
Images tab 3-32
Patient tab 3-32
Reference tab 3-32
Touchpad 3-30
Video signal 3-22
Workstation operation keys
Images screen 3-81
Remote image processing 3-81
RUI Arrow keys 3-81
Switch Applications 3-30
X
X-ray alarms 5-14
X-ray equipment certification 1-4
X-ray indication
Audible 5-55
Visual 5-55
I-27
Index

Manual Operator OEC Elite English - UM - 5483603-8EN-18 - 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Operator OEC Elite English - UM - 5483603-8EN-18 - 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Operator OEC Elite English - UM - 5483603-8EN-18 - 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Healthcare

GE OEC Medical Systems, a General Electric company, going to market as GE Healthcare.

GE OEC Medical Systems, Inc. GE Medical Systems SCS

The OEC Elite was first CE marked in 2016.

Radio Equipment Directive (RED)

Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)

1.7 Mechanical safety 1-11

2.2.5 Restart the system 2-81

3.7 Motorized C-Arm overview 3-72

5.4.5 Footswitch and handswitch 5-10

5.13 Deterministic effects of ionizing radiation on humans 5-56

8.2.3 Adjust contrast 8-11

10.2 Troubleshoot DICOM setup 10-16

15.3.1 Enable enterprise authentication 15-2

16.4.7 Material safety data sheets 16-32

1.2 Owner responsibilities

1.2.1 System compatibility

1.2.2 Operator qualifications

1.2.3 Continued compliance

1.2.4 Unauthorized modifications

standards. Unauthorized modifications to the equipment may impact adherence to these

1.3 GE OEC responsibilities

1.4 Product description and summary of use

1.4.2 Intended use

1.4.3 Indications for use

1.4.4 Patient population

1.4.5 Use environment

1.4.6 Intended users

1.4.7 Intended clinical benefits

1.4.8 Contraindications for use

1.4.9 Potential side effects

1.4.10 Essential performance

1.4.11 X-ray equipment certification

1.4.12 After-sale operating and safety practices

1.5 General safety

1.5.1 Contact information

1.5.2 Reporting serious incidents

1.5.3 Safety hazard alerts

Table 1-1: Hazard alert definitions

Alert Circumstances for Use

1.5.4 External devices

1.5.5 Wireless compliance and safety

3. Select X-ray Surgery (XR) from the Modality filter menu.

This product is restricted to indoor use.

1.5.6 Patient environment

Figure 1-2: International patient environment

1.6 Electrical safety

1.6.1 Electrical shock

1.6.2 Electrical fire

1.6.4 Ground fault

1.6.5 Equipment malfunction

1.7 Mechanical safety

1.7.2 Equipment stability, transport, and positioning

1.7.3 Motorized and manual mechanical movement

1.7.4 Repetitive motion

1.7.5 Ingress of fluids

Draping the X-ray tube cooling kit option

1.7.7 Cooling efficiency

1.7.8 Contact Burns